Caesar - II - Tutorial - Version 8

CAESAR II
User's Guide
Version 2016 (8.0)
September 2015
DICAS-PE-200104F
Copyright
Copyright 1985-2015 Intergraph CAS, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; co ntains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Contains RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc. Copyright 1998-2015 Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Portions of the user interface copyright 2012-2015 Telerik AD.
U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictio ns as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with
subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal
Acquisition Regulations ("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws o f the
United States. For units of the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS
252.227-7014 and the rights of the Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a.
Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b.
For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or do es not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time a nd
for any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergra ph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applic able
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
CAESAR II User's Guide
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a.
To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b.
To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, Intergraph Smart, PDS, SmartPlant, SmartMarine, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, IntelliShip, Isogen,
SmartSketch, SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, and SupportModeler are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.
Contents
What's New in CAESAR II .................................................................................................................... 19
Introduction.......................................................................................................................................... 24
About the CAESAR II Documentation .............................................................................................. 25
Software Support/User Assistance ................................................................................................... 25
Software Revision Procedures ......................................................................................................... 26
Updates and License Types ............................................................................................................. 28
Getting Started ..................................................................................................................................... 29
Starting CAESAR II.......................................................................................................................... 29
Understanding Jobs ......................................................................................................................... 30
Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................... 30
Create a new job ....................................................................................................................... 30
Piping Input generation .............................................................................................................. 31
Model Error Checking ................................................................................................................ 34
Building Load Cases.................................................................................................................. 35
Run a static analysis.................................................................................................................. 36
Static Output Review ................................................................................................................. 36
Main Menu....................................................................................................................................... 37
File Menu .................................................................................................................................. 37
Input Menu ................................................................................................................................ 40
Analysis Menu ........................................................................................................................... 40
Output Menu ............................................................................................................................. 41
Language Menu ........................................................................................................................ 42
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................... 42
Diagnostics Menu ...................................................................................................................... 43
ESL Menu ................................................................................................................................. 45
View Menu ................................................................................................................................ 45
FEA Tools Menu........................................................................................................................ 46
Help Menu................................................................................................................................. 46
Configuration and Environment .......................................................................................................... 48
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation ........................................................................................ 48
Computational Control ..................................................................................................................... 50
Convergence Tolerances ........................................................................................................... 51
Input Spreadsheet Defaults ....................................................................................................... 53
Miscellaneous ........................................................................................................................... 55
Database Definitions ........................................................................................................................ 56
Databases ................................................................................................................................. 57
ODBC Settings .......................................................................................................................... 62
FRP Pipe Properties ........................................................................................................................ 62
Material Properties .................................................................................................................... 63
Settings ..................................................................................................................................... 65
Contents
Geometry Directives ........................................................................................................................ 67
Bends........................................................................................................................................ 67
Input Items ................................................................................................................................ 69
Graphic Settings .............................................................................................................................. 70
Advanced Options ..................................................................................................................... 72
Background Colors .................................................................................................................... 72
CADWorx Options ..................................................................................................................... 73
Component Colors .................................................................................................................... 74
Marker Options .......................................................................................................................... 76
Miscellaneous Options............................................................................................................... 77
Output Colors ............................................................................................................................ 81
Text Options .............................................................................................................................. 82
Visual Options ........................................................................................................................... 83
Miscellaneous Options ..................................................................................................................... 86
Input Items ................................................................................................................................ 86
Output Items.............................................................................................................................. 88
System Level Items ................................................................................................................... 89
SIFs and Stresses ........................................................................................................................... 91
Advanced Settings .................................................................................................................... 92
Code-Specific Settings .............................................................................................................. 93
General Settings........................................................................................................................ 96
Legacy Settings....................................................................................................................... 102
Set/Change Password ................................................................................................................... 104
New Password ........................................................................................................................ 104
Access Protected Data ............................................................................................................ 105
Change Password ................................................................................................................... 105
Remove Password .................................................................................................................. 105
Piping Input Reference ...................................................................................................................... 106
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 107
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the Function Keys .................................. 108
Help Screens and Units ........................................................................................................... 108
Node Numbers ........................................................................................................................ 108
Deltas...................................................................................................................................... 110
Pipe Sizes ............................................................................................................................... 113
Operating Conditions ............................................................................................................... 116
Component Information ........................................................................................................... 120
Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................... 155
Loading Conditions.................................................................................................................. 193
Materials ................................................................................................................................. 199
Material Elastic Properties ....................................................................................................... 222
Densities ................................................................................................................................. 224
Line Number............................................................................................................................ 228
Available Commands ..................................................................................................................... 229
File Menu ................................................................................................................................ 229
Edit Menu ................................................................................................................................ 237
Model Menu ............................................................................................................................ 245
Environment Menu .................................................................................................................. 286
Global Menu ............................................................................................................................ 334
Options Menu .......................................................................................................................... 340
Contents
View Menu .............................................................................................................................. 345
Tools Menu ............................................................................................................................. 363
3D Modeler .................................................................................................................................... 372
Building Models Quickly........................................................................................................... 376
Configuring 3D Graphics ......................................................................................................... 381
Changing the Model Display .................................................................................................... 382
Highlighting Graphics .............................................................................................................. 383
Manipulating the Toolbar ......................................................................................................... 386
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads .............................. 386
Saving an Image for Later Presentation ................................................................................... 387
Walking Through the Model ..................................................................................................... 388
Moving Elements ..................................................................................................................... 389
S3D/SPR Model View .................................................................................................................... 390
Load an S3D/SPR Model......................................................................................................... 390
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model .................................................................................................... 395
Dim S3D/SPR Model ............................................................................................................. 395
S3D/SPR Visibility Options ...................................................................................................... 395
Structural Steel Modeler .................................................................................................................... 397
Structural Steel Model Basics ........................................................................................................ 397
Structural Steel Graphics ............................................................................................................... 402
CAESAR II Structural Input ............................................................................................................ 403
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard .................................................................... 404
Structural Steel Input Examples ..................................................................................................... 406
Structural Steel Example #1 .................................................................................................... 406
Insert Menu ................................................................................................................................... 433
Before Current Element ........................................................................................................... 433
After the Current Element ........................................................................................................ 433
At End of Model ....................................................................................................................... 433
Commands Menu .......................................................................................................................... 433
Node ....................................................................................................................................... 433
NFill ........................................................................................................................................ 434
NGen ...................................................................................................................................... 435
Fix ........................................................................................................................................... 437
Elem........................................................................................................................................ 440
EFill......................................................................................................................................... 441
EGen....................................................................................................................................... 443
EDim ....................................................................................................................................... 447
Angle....................................................................................................................................... 449
Unif ......................................................................................................................................... 450
Orient ...................................................................................................................................... 452
Load ........................................................................................................................................ 454
Wind Loads ............................................................................................................................. 455
GLoads ................................................................................................................................... 457
MatId ....................................................................................................................................... 457
SecId....................................................................................................................................... 459
Free End Connections - FREE................................................................................................. 461
Beams..................................................................................................................................... 463
Contents
Braces ..................................................................................................................................... 466
Columns.................................................................................................................................. 468
Default .................................................................................................................................... 471
Comment ................................................................................................................................ 471
Vertical .................................................................................................................................... 472
Unit ......................................................................................................................................... 473
List Options ............................................................................................................................. 473
Structural Databases ..................................................................................................................... 474
AISC 1977 Database ............................................................................................................... 474
AISC 1989 Database ............................................................................................................... 481
Australian 1990 Database ....................................................................................................... 487
German 1991 Database .......................................................................................................... 488
South African 1992 Database .................................................................................................. 490
Korean 1990 Database............................................................................................................ 492
UK 1993 Database .................................................................................................................. 493
Buried Pipe Modeler .......................................................................................................................... 494
Buried Pipe Modeler Window ......................................................................................................... 496
From Node .............................................................................................................................. 497
To Node .................................................................................................................................. 497
Soil Model No. ......................................................................................................................... 498
From/To End Mesh.................................................................................................................. 498
User-Defined Lateral "K" .......................................................................................................... 499
Ultimate Lateral Load .............................................................................................................. 499
User-Defined Axial Stif............................................................................................................. 499
Ultimate Axial Load.................................................................................................................. 500
User-Defined Upward Stif ........................................................................................................ 500
Ultimate Upward Load ............................................................................................................. 500
User-Defined Downward Stif.................................................................................................... 500
Ultimate Downward Load ......................................................................................................... 501
Soil Models .................................................................................................................................... 501
CAESAR II Basic Model .......................................................................................................... 502
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model ..................................................................................... 503
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 507
Model an underground piping system............................................................................................. 514
Buried Pipe Example ..................................................................................................................... 515
Static Analysis ................................................................................................................................... 522
Static Analysis Overview ................................................................................................................ 522
Error Checking ........................................................................................................................ 522
What is a Load Case? ............................................................................................................. 524
Working with Load Cases .............................................................................................................. 528
Editing Multiple Load Cases .................................................................................................... 529
Building Static Load Cases ...................................................................................................... 529
Providing Wind Data ................................................................................................................ 539
Providing Wave Data ............................................................................................................... 540
Running the Static Analysis ..................................................................................................... 541
Controlling Results .................................................................................................................. 543
Contents
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box ............................................................................... 544
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................ 545
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................. 554
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) ............................................ 570
Static Output Processor .................................................................................................................... 575
Work with Reports ......................................................................................................................... 576
Filter Reports........................................................................................................................... 577
Filters Dialog Box .................................................................................................................... 579
Print or Save Reports to File Notes .......................................................................................... 583
Standard Reports .......................................................................................................................... 584
Displacements......................................................................................................................... 585
Restraints ................................................................................................................................ 586
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates...................................................................... 587
Restraint Summary .................................................................................................................. 589
Nozzle Check Report ............................................................................................................... 590
Flange Reports ........................................................................................................................ 590
Global Element Forces ............................................................................................................ 592
Local Element Forces .............................................................................................................. 592
Stresses .................................................................................................................................. 593
Stress Summary ...................................................................................................................... 594
Code Compliance Report ........................................................................................................ 595
Cumulative Usage Report ........................................................................................................ 596
General Computed Results ............................................................................................................ 596
Load Case Report ................................................................................................................... 597
Hanger Table with Text............................................................................................................ 598
Input Echo ............................................................................................................................... 599
Miscellaneous Data ................................................................................................................. 600
Warnings ................................................................................................................................. 601
Output Viewer Wizard .................................................................................................................... 602
Report Template Editor .................................................................................................................. 603
Available Commands ..................................................................................................................... 605
View Menu .............................................................................................................................. 606
Options Menu .......................................................................................................................... 611
Plot Options Menu ................................................................................................................... 619
Plot View Menu ....................................................................................................................... 625
Element Viewer Dialog Box ..................................................................................................... 626
Dynamic Analysis .............................................................................................................................. 628
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems ................................................................................................. 628
Random .................................................................................................................................. 630
Harmonic................................................................................................................................. 630
Impulse ................................................................................................................................... 632
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ...................................................................................... 634
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ........................................................................................................... 635
Contents
The Dynamic Analysis Window ...................................................................................................... 636
Modal Analysis ........................................................................................................................ 637
Harmonic Analysis ................................................................................................................... 638
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis ............................................................................... 638
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis .................................................. 638
Time History Analysis .............................................................................................................. 639
Excitation Frequencies Tab............................................................................................................ 639
Starting Frequency .................................................................................................................. 640
Ending Frequency ................................................................................................................... 640
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 640
Load Cycles ............................................................................................................................ 641
Harmonic Forces Tab .................................................................................................................... 641
Force....................................................................................................................................... 643
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 643
Phase...................................................................................................................................... 643
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 643
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 644
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 644
Harmonic Displacements Tab ........................................................................................................ 645
Displacement .......................................................................................................................... 646
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 646
Phase...................................................................................................................................... 646
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 647
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 647
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 647
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab .......................................................................................... 648
Name ...................................................................................................................................... 649
Range Type............................................................................................................................. 650
Ordinate Type ......................................................................................................................... 651
Range Interpol ......................................................................................................................... 651
Ordinate Interpol...................................................................................................................... 651
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 651
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ........................................................................................ 653
Spectrum/Time History Profile ................................................................................................. 655
Factor...................................................................................................................................... 655
Dir. .......................................................................................................................................... 655
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 656
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 657
Increment ................................................................................................................................ 657
Anchor Movement ................................................................................................................... 657
Force Set # ............................................................................................................................. 657
Force Sets Tab ........................................................................................................................ 658
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 663
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab ................................................................................................. 668
Load Case............................................................................................................................... 669
Factor...................................................................................................................................... 669
Examples ................................................................................................................................ 669
Contents
Lumped Masses Tab ..................................................................................................................... 673
Mass ....................................................................................................................................... 673
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 673
Start Node ............................................................................................................................... 674
Stop Node ............................................................................................................................... 674
Increments .............................................................................................................................. 674
Snubbers Tab ................................................................................................................................ 675
Stiffness .................................................................................................................................. 675
Direction .................................................................................................................................. 675
Node ....................................................................................................................................... 675
CNode..................................................................................................................................... 675
Control Parameters Tab ................................................................................................................. 677
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ................................................... 678
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status ...................................................................... 689
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ........................................................................................ 690
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ............................................................................................................. 692
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) .................................................... 693
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) .................................................................................................. 694
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical).......................................................................................... 694
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases ....................................... 695
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ................................................... 699
Spatial or Modal Combination First .......................................................................................... 699
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ............................................................................... 700
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) ................................................. 700
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) .................................................. 703
Include Missing Mass Components.......................................................................................... 704
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ................................................ 706
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ..................................................................... 706
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ......................................................................... 706
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) .................................................................................... 707
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues ................................................................. 707
Advanced Tab ............................................................................................................................... 708
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues .......................................................... 708
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ......................................................................................................... 709
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ....................................................................................... 709
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) ................................................................................................... 709
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used) ............................................................... 710
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ......................................................................... 710
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization.................................................................... 711
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ................................................................... 711
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) .......................................................................................... 711
Frequency Array Spaces ......................................................................................................... 711
Directive Builder ............................................................................................................................ 712
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data .............................................................................................................. 713
Range ..................................................................................................................................... 713
Ordinate .................................................................................................................................. 714
DLF/Spectrum Generator ............................................................................................................... 714
Spectrum Name ...................................................................................................................... 714
Spectrum Type ........................................................................................................................ 715
Generate Spectrum ................................................................................................................. 723
10
Contents
Relief Load Synthesis .................................................................................................................... 724
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig ............................................................ 724
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids ............................................................................................. 727
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis........................................................................... 730
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis........................................................................ 734
Analysis Results ............................................................................................................................ 736
Modal ...................................................................................................................................... 737
Harmonic................................................................................................................................. 738
Spectrum................................................................................................................................. 738
Time History ............................................................................................................................ 739
Dynamic Output Processing ............................................................................................................. 740
Dynamic Output Window ............................................................................................................... 740
Open a Job ............................................................................................................................. 742
Enter a Report Title ................................................................................................................. 742
View Load Cases .................................................................................................................... 743
Send Reports to Microsoft Word .............................................................................................. 743
View Reports ........................................................................................................................... 744
Dynamic Output Animation Window ............................................................................................... 755
Save Animation to File............................................................................................................. 756
Animation of Static Results -Displacements ............................................................................. 756
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum ..................................................................... 757
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic .............................................................................. 757
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History .......................................................................... 757
Relief Load Synthesis Results........................................................................................................ 758
Generate Stress Isometrics Overview............................................................................................... 759
Add input feature information ......................................................................................................... 760
Add output feature information ....................................................................................................... 761
Add custom annotations for nodal features .................................................................................... 761
Add custom annotations for elemental features .............................................................................. 762
Set project information ................................................................................................................... 762
Configure annotation preferences .................................................................................................. 763
Configure isometric drawing split points ......................................................................................... 763
Create a drawing using the default style ......................................................................................... 765
Create a drawing using an existing style ........................................................................................ 766
Create a drawing using a new style ................................................................................................ 767
Create and save an annotation template ........................................................................................ 769
Apply a Template........................................................................................................................... 769
Stress Isometric Tutorials............................................................................................................... 770
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style .......................... 770
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features ....................................................... 773
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences ............................ 775
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template................................................................. 779
11
Contents
Equipment Component and Compliance .......................................................................................... 782
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ...................................................................................... 783
Intersection Type ..................................................................................................................... 786
Piping Code ID ........................................................................................................................ 786
Header Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................................................ 787
Header Pipe Wall Thickness .................................................................................................... 787
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter................................................................................................. 787
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness .................................................................................................... 788
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection .................................................................................. 788
Pad Thickness......................................................................................................................... 788
Intersection Crotch Radius....................................................................................................... 788
Intersection Crotch Thickness.................................................................................................. 789
Extrusion Crotch Radius .......................................................................................................... 789
Weld Type ............................................................................................................................... 789
Ferritic Material........................................................................................................................ 789
Design Temperature ................................................................................................................ 789
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ................................................................................................ 789
Bend Tab ................................................................................................................................ 791
Trunnion Tab ........................................................................................................................... 795
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses .......................................................................................... 797
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ............................................................................................................ 799
WRC Bulletin 297 .................................................................................................................... 802
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations .............................................................................................. 802
Flange Tab .............................................................................................................................. 804
Bolts and Gasket Tab .............................................................................................................. 807
Material Data Tab .................................................................................................................... 816
Loads Tab ............................................................................................................................... 818
Flange Rating .......................................................................................................................... 819
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G).......................................................................... 821
Data Tab ................................................................................................................................. 823
Measurements Tab.................................................................................................................. 825
Expansion Joint Rating .................................................................................................................. 826
Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 830
Displacements and Rotations .................................................................................................. 831
Allowables ............................................................................................................................... 831
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ...................................................................................................... 831
Global Input............................................................................................................................. 834
Local Member Data Tab .......................................................................................................... 836
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ...................................................................................................... 839
NEMA Turbine Example .......................................................................................................... 841
NEMA Input Data Tab ............................................................................................................. 844
Errors/Warnings Tab ............................................................................................................... 847
Equipment Report Tab............................................................................................................. 847
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) ......................................................................................................... 847
Input Data Tab ........................................................................................................................ 853
Suction Nozzle Tab ................................................................................................................. 856
Discharge Nozzle Tab ............................................................................................................. 857
12
Contents
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ................................................................................................ 859
API 617 Input Tab ................................................................................................................... 860
Suction Nozzle Tab ................................................................................................................. 862
Discharge Nozzle Tab ............................................................................................................. 863
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab ......................................................................................................... 864
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab ......................................................................................................... 866
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) .......................................................................................... 868
Input Data Tab ........................................................................................................................ 869
Inlet Nozzle Tab ...................................................................................................................... 871
Outlet Nozzle Tab .................................................................................................................... 872
HEI Standard ................................................................................................................................. 873
HEI Nozzle .............................................................................................................................. 874
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)................................................................... 876
API 560 Input Data Tab ........................................................................................................... 877
Technical Discussions....................................................................................................................... 879
Rigid Element Application .............................................................................................................. 879
Rigid Weight ............................................................................................................................ 879
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements ................................................................................................ 880
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements........................................................................................ 880
In-Line Flange Evaluation .............................................................................................................. 881
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method ....................................................................................... 881
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged Joints with High
Strength Bolting....................................................................................................................... 881
Cold Spring.................................................................................................................................... 882
Expansion Joints ........................................................................................................................... 885
Effective ID .............................................................................................................................. 887
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ................................................................................................................ 887
Spring Design Requirements ................................................................................................... 888
Restrained Weight Case .......................................................................................................... 889
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case ....................................................................................................................................... 889
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual Installed (Cold) Load ....................... 890
Create Spring Load Cases....................................................................................................... 890
Constant Effort Support ........................................................................................................... 891
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design Algorithm ................................................. 891
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing ................................................................................................. 892
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ............................................................................................................ 892
Modeling Friction Effects ................................................................................................................ 895
Nonlinear Code Compliance .......................................................................................................... 896
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints................................................................................. 896
Notes on Occasional Load Cases ............................................................................................ 898
Static Seismic Inertial Loads .......................................................................................................... 900
Wind Loads ................................................................................................................................... 901
Elevation ................................................................................................................................. 902
13
Contents
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................................................................... 903
Ocean Wave Particulars .......................................................................................................... 904
Applicable Wave Theory Determination ................................................................................... 905
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading ..................................................................................... 905
Airy Wave Theory Implementation ........................................................................................... 906
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation ................................................................... 907
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation ........................................................................ 907
Ocean Currents ....................................................................................................................... 907
Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading ........................................................... 908
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II ...................................................... 911
Current Data............................................................................................................................ 912
Wave Data .............................................................................................................................. 912
Seawater Data ........................................................................................................................ 913
Piping Element Data................................................................................................................ 914
References .............................................................................................................................. 914
Evaluating Vessel Stresses............................................................................................................ 915
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007).................... 915
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107 ......................................................... 917
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007.................................................................................................................... 918
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis pre-2007 ............................... 919
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction ............................................................................................. 919
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads ................................................................................ 923
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ................................................................................................ 924
Fatigue Basics......................................................................................................................... 924
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems ......................................................................................... 925
Static Analysis Fatigue Example .............................................................................................. 926
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis ................................................................................. 933
Creating the .FAT Files ............................................................................................................ 934
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses ............................................................................................... 935
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ................................................................................................ 937
Underlying Theory ................................................................................................................... 937
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II............................................................................................... 951
Code Compliance Considerations .................................................................................................. 957
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on Piping Code Calculations .................. 957
Code-Specific Notes ................................................................................................................ 962
Local Coordinates .......................................................................................................................... 997
Other Global Coordinate Systems............................................................................................ 999
The Right Hand Rule ............................................................................................................... 999
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems.............................................................................. 1001
Defining a Model ................................................................................................................... 1004
Using Local Coordinates........................................................................................................ 1006
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions ................................................................................ 1006
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates .................................................................. 1009
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates ......................................................................... 1015
Transforming from Global to Local ......................................................................................... 1015
Frequently Asked Questions .................................................................................................. 1016
14
Contents
Miscellaneous Processors .............................................................................................................. 1018
Material Database........................................................................................................................ 1018
Add a new material to the database ....................................................................................... 1020
Delete a material from the database ...................................................................................... 1021
Edit a material in the database............................................................................................... 1021
Material Number .................................................................................................................... 1021
Material Name ....................................................................................................................... 1021
Applicable Piping Code.......................................................................................................... 1022
Composition/Type ................................................................................................................. 1022
Material Density..................................................................................................................... 1022
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) ....................................................................................... 1022
Eff, Cf, z ................................................................................................................................ 1023
Cold Elastic Modulus ............................................................................................................. 1023
Poisson's Ratio...................................................................................................................... 1023
FAC ...................................................................................................................................... 1023
Laminate Type ...................................................................................................................... 1024
Eh / Ea .................................................................................................................................. 1024
Temperature.......................................................................................................................... 1024
Exp. Coeff. ............................................................................................................................ 1024
Allowable Stress .................................................................................................................... 1025
Elastic Modulus ..................................................................................................................... 1025
Yield Stress ........................................................................................................................... 1025
Ult Tensile Stress .................................................................................................................. 1025
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) ..................................................................................... 1025
Temperature Dependent Stress Value ................................................................................... 1026
Material Selection Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 1026
Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box ................................................................. 1026
Accounting................................................................................................................................... 1026
Activating the Accounting System .......................................................................................... 1028
Units File Operations ................................................................................................................... 1033
Create/Review Units .............................................................................................................. 1033
Change Model Units .............................................................................................................. 1036
Batch Stream Processing............................................................................................................. 1037
Define Jobs to Run ................................................................................................................ 1037
Analyze Specified Jobs.......................................................................................................... 1037
CAESAR II Error Processing ........................................................................................................ 1038
External Interfaces ........................................................................................................................... 1039
CAESAR II Neutral File ................................................................................................................ 1040
Version and Job Title Information .......................................................................................... 1041
Control Information ................................................................................................................ 1041
Basic Element Data ............................................................................................................... 1042
Auxiliary Element Data .......................................................................................................... 1045
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 ................................................................................................ 1053
Units Conversion Data ........................................................................................................... 1057
Nodal Coordinate Data .......................................................................................................... 1058
CAESAR II Data Matrix ................................................................................................................ 1058
15
Contents
Data Export Wizard...................................................................................................................... 1059
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1061
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box .......................................................................... 1063
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box ....................................................................... 1085
AFT IMPULSE ............................................................................................................................. 1094
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface................................................................................ 1094
PIPENET ..................................................................................................................................... 1095
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface ..................................................................... 1095
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface ................................................................... 1095
LIQT ............................................................................................................................................ 1096
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface .................................................................................. 1096
How to Use the LIQT Interface............................................................................................... 1097
Example 1 ............................................................................................................................. 1098
Example 2 ............................................................................................................................. 1100
Pipeplus ...................................................................................................................................... 1102
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface ......................................................................................... 1102
FlowMaster .................................................................................................................................. 1106
How to Use The Flowmaster Interface ................................................................................... 1107
Intergraph CADWorx Plant........................................................................................................... 1107
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF ............................................................................................................ 1108
Intergraph PDS ............................................................................................................................ 1108
File Name.............................................................................................................................. 1109
Browse .................................................................................................................................. 1109
Minimum Anchor Node .......................................................................................................... 1109
Maximum Anchor Node ......................................................................................................... 1109
Start Node ............................................................................................................................. 1109
Increment .............................................................................................................................. 1109
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than ................................................................ 1110
Remove HA Elements ........................................................................................................... 1110
Force Consistent Bend Materials ........................................................................................... 1110
Include Additional Bend Nodes .............................................................................................. 1110
Enable Advanced Element Sort ............................................................................................. 1110
Model TEES as 3 Elements ................................................................................................... 1110
Model Rotation ...................................................................................................................... 1110
Neutral File Weight Units ....................................................................................................... 1111
Neutral File Insulation Units ................................................................................................... 1111
Data Modification and Details ................................................................................................ 1111
Example Neutral File from PDS ............................................................................................. 1112
Intergraph Data After Element Sort ........................................................................................ 1119
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications ...................................................................... 1120
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications .............................................................................. 1121
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications ............................................................................... 1124
CADPIPE .................................................................................................................................... 1130
CADPIPE Example Transfer .................................................................................................. 1133
General Notes ....................................................................................................................... 1136
Error Code Statements .......................................................................................................... 1137
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion.............................................................................................. 1138
Section 1 - Entity Information ................................................................................................. 1138
Section 2-Segment Information.............................................................................................. 1139
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data ............................................................................................ 1140
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer ................................................................. 1141
16
Contents
Import PCF .................................................................................................................................. 1142
PCF Interface Custom Attributes ........................................................................................... 1142
How to Use the PCF Interface ............................................................................................... 1157
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases ................................................................................ 1165
DSN Setup ............................................................................................................................ 1165
Controlling the Data Export .................................................................................................... 1168
File Sets............................................................................................................................................ 1169
CAESAR II File Guide .................................................................................................................. 1169
Required Program Files ............................................................................................................... 1170
Required Error Data Files ............................................................................................................ 1172
Required Data Sets ..................................................................................................................... 1172
Required Printer/Listing Files ....................................................................................................... 1176
Dynamics Files ............................................................................................................................ 1178
Auxiliary Sets ............................................................................................................................... 1179
Structural Data Files .................................................................................................................... 1180
Example Files .............................................................................................................................. 1180
External Interface Files ................................................................................................................ 1182
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data .............................................................................................. 1183
Update History ................................................................................................................................. 1186
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)........................................................................................... 1187
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) ..................................................................................... 1187
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) ................................................................................... 1188
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) ..................................................................................... 1189
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) ..................................................................................... 1189
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ....................................................................................... 1190
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) ..................................................................................... 1191
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations ............................................................................... 1192
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations ...................................................................................... 1192
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad ................................................................................ 1192
Miscellaneous ....................................................................................................................... 1192
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91) ................................................................................... 1193
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93) ................................................................................... 1196
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ...................................................... 1197
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) .......................................................... 1199
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) ..................................................................................... 1200
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) .......................................................... 1201
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) .................................................... 1206
17
Contents
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) ..................................................... 1207
Glossary ........................................................................................................................................... 1215
Index ................................................................................................................................................. 1219
18
What's New in CAESAR II

The latest CAESAR II release delivers a number of significant new and extended capabilities in
response to current market requirements, as well as direct feedback from the growing CAESAR
II user community. The following changes have been made to CAESAR II:
CAESAR II 2016, Version 8.00
Technical Changes
The following technical changes for this release may affect the numeric results:
Updated the calculations for jobs using the B31.3 2012 code standard to use the Axial SIF
(ia) value for any non-bend elements, unless you do not specify an Axial SIF (ia) value.
When you leave the Axial SIF (ia) value blank, the software uses the Out-Plane SIF (io)
value. (DM-TX-13192)
Revised the calculations for wind loads using ASCE 2010 or IBC 2012. This update requires
the user to include a 0.6 scale factor for wind loads when setting up load cases. Also, refer
to each wind code standard, and ensure the wind speed is in accordance with the specified
wind design code. (CR-TX-10344)
Corrected the B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding/Contour Tees configuration setting to only

apply this constant for tee SIFs with B31.1 and B31.3 jobs and not jobs specified for
EN-13480. (TR-TX-13501)
Revised the materials properties for the ASME B31.3 2012 update. (DI-TX-13619)
Corrected calculations for sand/gravel soil models using the American Lifetime Alliance
(ALA) model type when the height/diameter ratio exceeds the valid range of the ALA
equations. The software now limits the height/diameter ratio to less than or equal to 20 for
yield loads at 40- to 45-degree angles. In addition, to prevent negative coefficient values,
CAESAR II now calculates the coefficient value e for 40- to 45-degree angles as a positive
value, which is different from the code standard. (TR-TX-14465)
Piping Code Updates
ASME B31.1, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10720, DI-TX-13119)
ASME B31.3 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10721), including the following changes:
Addressed the code standard requirement to consider sustained (and occasional) stress in
all support conditions. New static load cases, called alternate sustained or alternate
occasional cases, depend upon the support configuration of a converged operating
condition. This condition addresses systems where non-linear supports are active in some
operating conditions and inactive in others. The alternate support condition is indicated
using the new Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
(DI-TX-13679, CR-TX-13680, CR-TX-13838)
Added two new load case templates (.tpl files) for the software to use when
recommending load cases, which include support for the alternate sustained (SUS) load
conditions. The template files include:
LOAD.TPL - the updated default load case template, which recommends alternate
sustained load casee for jobs including the B31.3 code
19

LOAD_EXP.TPL - includes all expansion load cases between different operating
conditions. (This was the default template in CAESAR II 2014.)
LOAD_ALT.TPL - includes all expansion and alternate SUS load cases for all available
piping codes, except IGE/TD/12.
Resolved an issue where the software was not acquiring the HGR stress type for the
first load case when it applied recommend load cases for jobs with hanger design and
multiple temperatures. (DI-TX-13678)
Updated B31.3 materials, including changes to expansion coefficients (Ec), weld

reduction factors (W), and elastic modulus (EM) values. Updated allowable stress
values for material 341 (A789 S32750) and 342 (A790 S32750). Corrected low
temperature allowable values to match the code standard. (DI-TX-13120, DI-TX-13800,
DI-TX-13801)
Moved the B31.3 Implement Appendix P configuration setting from SIFs and
Stresses > Code Specific Settings to SIFs and Stresses > Legacy Settings as
Appendix P was removed and some of its requirements were merged into the body of
the B31.3 code standard.
Added appropriate warnings and notes to the error checking module and the output
reports to account for the code updates
ASME B31.8, 2014 Edition, including a small revision to the biaxial state of stress formula
(Sc), according to code Paragraph 833.4. You can find this formula in the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide. (CR-TX-11871, DI-TX-13125, DI-TX-13651)
ASME B31.9, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10723, DI-TX-13441)
Wind/Seismic Code Updates
NBC Wind Code Standard, 2010 Edition. (CR-TX-11109, CR-TX-11110)
NBC Seismic Code Standard, 2010 Edition (CR-TX-13497)
ASCE 7 Wind Code Standard, 2010 Edition and IBC Wind Code Standard, 2012 Edition.
Includes a change in the wind load reduction factor. You must now type a 0.6 wind design
factor in wind load values and use the wind speed for the appropriate code standard.
(Completed portions in CAESAR II 2014 SP3) (CR-TX-10344, CR-TX-10611, CR-TX-12404)
ASCE 7 Seismic Code Standard, 2010 Edition and IBC Seismic Code Standard, 2012
Edition. (Completed in CAESAR II 2014 Service Pack 2.) (CR-TX-10611, CR-TX-12404)
Equipment Code Updates
API 560, 4th Edition (CR-TX-11947, CR-TX-13176)
20

Piping Input/Hanger Support
Added hanger data for the following hanger manufacturers: Hesterberg, Unison, Spring
Supports Mfg. Co., Senior, and Wookwang. Also, revised the listing of the manufacturer
formerly known as Flexider, to CASTIM 2000. (CR-TX-13017, CR-TX-3923, CR-TX-5071,
CR-TX-10192, CR-TX-10625, CR-TX-10879, CR-TX-13027)
Improved the Classic Piping Input to display a Pressure 3 value on the interface.
Previously, this third pressure value was only accessible by clicking >> to open the extended
dialog box. Now, you can type three sets of temperatures and pressures without having to
open a separate dialog box. (CR-TX-10336)
Finite Element Analysis (FEA)

Added easier access to third-party tools for better modeling and evaluation from the CAESAR
II main menu, to generate more accurate SIFs and K factors. Compare multiple file results,
assess the sensitivity of your model elements, and evaluate nozzle/branch connections with
NozzlePRO.
Load Case Editor
Redesigned the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to improve the user's experience and
add more robust functionality when creating and revising load cases for analysis.
(CR-TX-11962)
Changes included the following features:
Removed the Load Case Options tab and merged all options to one List view.
Improved and enhanced the List view Easier scrolling and viewing options, as well as
filtering on columns, drag-and-drop capabilities, and easier manipulation of load cases.
Added a Group Edit view - select and change values on multiple load cases
simultaneously.
Improved the organization and groupings of input boxes on the Wind Loads and Wave
Loads tabs to improve the usability.
Updated user documentation.
Distance Measurements
Added functionality so you can minimize the Distance dialog box while remaining in
measuring mode in the piping input. Perform multiple measurements around a model
continually without the dialog box blocking any of the model. When you exit the dialog box,
the software exits the distance mode and returns you to the previous operator. Also, revised
the layout to improve the usability of the dialog box, improved snapping in the Line Drawing
(single line) mode, and increased the default font size setting for distance measurement
labels on the model for ease of reading. (CR-TX-10373)
Updated the Snap To Nearest Node functionality when measuring from piping elements to
other DWG piping objects, such as imported CADWorx models. (CR-TX-5973)
Added the ability to measure multiple distances in the Distance dialog box and see all of
your measurements simultaneously. Press CTRL + click while measuring distances along a
line of pipe, and the software retains and displays all the measurements you have made.
(CR-TX-10374)
21

3D Model/Graphics
Added rotation functionality for S3D or SPR graphics (VUE) model when importing it into
CAESAR II using the S3D/SPR Model option in the piping input. You can specify the
degrees in which to rotate the loaded S3D or SPR model from the Load S3D/SPR Model
dialog box. (CR-TX-4531)
Enhanced the S3D/SPR Model functionality so you can now open zipped VUE files (ZVFs)
and Stitched VUE files (SVFs) from the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box. (CR-TX-8586)
Added the ability to filter by line numbers from the 3D Plot (Options > Graphical Output) in
the Static Output Processor.
Improved modeling with single- and multiple- element right-click menus containing
frequently-used commands.
Select a single element on the model, and right-click to access the Element context
menu. This menu includes typical actions performed on elements, restraints, and rigids
(such as valve/flanges).
Select multiple elements on the model, and right-click to access the Block Operations
context menu. This menu includes lets you perform group operations such as rotate,
delete, duplicate, renumber, and so forth, on a block of elements.
Notice that the software returns the cursor to the next logical action in the piping input
after you select one of the right-click menu options, which improves modeling/piping
input time. (CR-TX-12995, CR-TX-13033)
Added the ability to view only node names on the 3D model by selecting a new option on
Node Number drop-down box in the piping input. The Names Only option applies to
whatever other node numbering option you have selected. For example, if you select to see
Anchors on the model, and you select the Names Only, you see only those anchors with
node names and no anchor node numbers. If you select All, you will see all node names
specified for anchors, hangers, and restraints, but none of the node numbers for those
elements. The software defaults to showing both node names and node numbers.
(CR-TX-1257)
User Interface
Updated the look of the CAESAR II splash screen that appears when launching the software
to the latest Intergraph standards. Also updated the CAESAR II icon to the new Intergraph
style. (DI-TX-13041, DI-TX-13658)
Documentation/Help
Updated the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping and
wind/seismic code editions supported in CAESAR II 2016.
Updated portions of the user documentation to the latest Intergraph PPM standards for
formats, which included adding more white space and indentation for field property formats.
(DI-TX-10490, DI-TX-R3733)
Added a comprehensive glossary of terms to the CAESAR II User's Guide to improve

understanding of the documentation. (DI-TX-10660)
Updated the software to display the .chm-based help when you press F1 in the Material
Database Editor, Accounting, Change Model Units, and Create/Review Units modules.
22

Previously, these modules displayed in a text-based help dialog box (CR-TX-3344,
CR-TX-12922, CR-TX-770, CR-TX-3352)
23
SECTION 1
Introduction
CAESAR II is a PC-based pipe stress analysis software package that is developed, marketed
and sold by Intergraph CAS. This software is an engineering tool used in the mechanical design
and analysis of piping systems. Use CAESAR II to create a model of the piping system
represented by simple 3D beam elements and to define the loading conditions imposed on the
system.
With this input, CAESAR II produces results in the form of displacements, loads, and stresses
throughout the system. Additionally, CAESAR II compares these results to limits specified by
recognized codes and standards.
What are the applications of CAESAR II?

CAESAR II is most often used for the mechanical design of new piping systems. Loads,
displacements, and stresses can be estimated through analysis of the piping model in CAESAR
II. CAESAR II incorporates many of the limitations placed on these systems and their attached
equipment. These limits are typically specified by engineering bodies (such as the ASME B31
committees, ASME Section VIII, and the Welding Research Council) or by manufacturers of
piping-related equipment (API, NEMA, or EJMA).
Hot piping systems present a unique problem to the mechanical engineer. These irregular
structures experience great thermal strain that must be absorbed by the piping, supports, and
attached equipment. These structures must be stiff enough to support their own weight but
flexible enough to accept thermal growth.
CAESAR II is not limited to thermal analysis of piping systems. CAESAR II also has the
capability of modeling and analyzing the full range of static and dynamic loads which can be
imposed on the system. Because of this, CAESAR II is not only a tool for new design. It is also
valuable in troubleshooting or redesigning existing systems. You can determine the cause of
failure or evaluate the severity of unanticipated operating conditions such as fluid to piping
interaction or mechanical vibration caused by rotating equipment.
Why is CAESAR II from other pipe stress software?

Our staff of experienced pipe stress engineers are involved in day-to-day software development,
software support, and training. This approach has produced software that most closely fits the
requirements of todays pipe stress industry. Data entry is simple and straight-forward through
dialog boxes. CAESAR II provides the widest range of modeling and analysis capabilities
without becoming too complicated for simple system analysis. You can tailor your CAESAR II
installation through default settings and customized databases. Comprehensive input graphics
confirm the model construction before the analysis is made. The software's interactive output
processor presents results on the monitor for quick review or sends complete reports to a file or
printer. CAESAR II uses standard analysis guidelines and provides the latest recognized
opinions for these analyses.
CAESAR II also offers seamless interaction with Intergraph CADWorx Plant, which is an
AutoCAD-based design and drafting system for creating orthographic, isometric, and 3D piping
drawings. The two-way-link automatically generates stress analysis models of piping layouts or
creates spectacular stress isometrics in minutes from CAESAR II models.
24
Introduction
CAESAR II is a field-proven engineering analysis application. It is a widely recognized product
with a large customer base and an excellent support and development record.
In This Section
About the CAESAR II Documentation ......................................... 25
Software Support/User Assistance .............................................. 25
Software Revision Procedures .................................................... 26
Updates and License Types ........................................................ 28
About the CAESAR II Documentation

The supporting software documentation is organized in the following manuals:
CAESAR II User's Guide - Describes the basic operation and flow of the commands found in
CAESAR II. This manual gives an overview of the software capabilities and introduces model
creation, analysis, and output review. It explains the function of, input for, and output from each
module of the software. This manual also explains much of the theory behind CAESAR II
calculations. It is intended as a general road map for the software.
CAESAR II Application Guide - Provides examples of how to use CAESAR II. These examples
illustrate methods of modeling individual piping components as well as complete piping systems.
This document contains tutorials on system modeling and analysis. The CAESAR II Application
Guide is a reference providing quick "how to" information on specific subjects.
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide - Provides version and technical change details in addition
to installation and commonly used information. This document also lists the currently
implemented piping codes (with publication and revision dates) and related stress and allowable
equations.
You can view and print any of the manuals by clicking Help > Online Documentation on the
CAESAR II Main menu.
Software Support/User Assistance

Intergraph CAS understands that CAESAR II is a complex analysis tool. While the
documentation is intended to explain piping analysis, system modeling, and results
interpretation, you may have additional questions.
We understand the engineers need to produce efficient, economical, and expeditious designs.
To that end, we have a staff of helpful professionals ready to address any CAESAR II and piping
issues raised by you. CAESAR II support is available by telephone, e-mail, fax, and the Internet.
We provide this service at no additional charge to you for questions focused on the current
version of the software.
Formal training in CAESAR II and pipe stress analysis is also available from Intergraph CAS.
We schedule regular training classes in Houston and provide in-house and open attendance
training around the world. These courses focus on the expertise available for modeling, analysis,
and design.
To aid internet users when contacting technical support, Intergraph CAS has added an option
that generates an e-mail template with the basic computer and CAESAR II version details. This
25
Introduction
information is typically what is needed to resolve technical support issues. To use this option,
click Help > Email CAESAR II Support.
This command starts the default e-mail client and populates an e-mail with the default
information.
The e-mail is addressed to Technical Support and contains all the information relevant to your
CAESAR II installation. Type the problem description at the Type Message Here prompt and
attach any necessary files.
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General

Support (http://support.intergraph.com/Default.asp)
Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com
Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)
Fax: 281-890-3301
Sales E-mail: sales.icas@intergraph.com
Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):

https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com)
Software Revision Procedures

CAESAR II is updated continually to reflect engineering code addenda, operational
enhancements, your requests, operating system modifications, and corrections. New versions
are planned and targeted for a specific release date. However, there may be corrections
necessary to the current version before the next version can be released. When this occurs, a
correction to the current version is made. This correction is referred to as a service pack update.
How do I find out about software updates?

When a service pack update to the software becomes available, all users who have registered
the software are sent an email announcement. Therefore, it is imperative that you register the
software following installation.
Can software updates be applied to any version?

A software update is intended for a specific version of the software. As the CAESAR II team
releases new versions of the software, new features require additional inputs and options and
the software includes additional information in the software data files. In addition, file formats
change, databases grow, and so on. Applying a software update on a different version of the
software, without specific consent from Intergraph CAS support, puts your software integrity at
risk.
How do I download a software update?

You can download software updates from our customer support website, Intergraph Smart
Support. Navigate to find updates in subfolders by the program name. Each update file includes
a description, the file size, and the creation date.
26
Introduction
How do I know what is in a software update?
Each service pack update of the software includes a file named BUILD.TXT, which is an ASCII
text file that you can view with any text editor or send to a printer. This file contains a description
of all corrections and enhancements made to the software because the original release of this
specific version. When necessary, additional usage instructions are included in this file.
How do I install a service pack update?

Service packs distributed for Windows-based applications use a Windows installation procedure
with a standard SETUP.EXE to actually install the update. This procedure ensures that you
register the necessary files with the system and that the uninstall utility works.
How do I know if there is a new update?

When a service pack update is ready to be released, Help > About CAESAR II is revised to
reflect the service pack number. To see which software modules have been modified, you can
run an Intergraph CAS Program Scanner utility from Diagnostics > Build Version. This utility
scans each of the .EXE modules in the program folder and lists the size, memory requirements,
and build number for each file.
The following shows example results from running the utility.
How do I archive and reinstall an older, patched version?

When the CAESAR II team releases a new version of the software, save any previous
distribution disks sent from Intergraph CAS. Additionally, archive any previous service pack
updates. This allows you full usage of the older version at a later time, if it becomes necessary.
27
Introduction
To reinstall an older version of the software, first install the software from Intergraph CAS. Then,
install the latest service pack update. Each update includes the modifications made in all prior
service pack updates.
Updates and License Types

You can identify CAESAR II update sets by their version number. The current release is Version
2016 (8.0) . Intergraph CAS schedules and distributes these updates periodically, depending on
their scope and necessity. The type of CAESAR II license that you have determines whether
you receive these updates. There are three types of CAESAR II licenses:
Full Run - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II. Updates, maintenance, and support are
available on an annual basis.
Lease - Provides unlimited access to CAESAR II with updates, maintenance, and support
provided as long as the lease is in effect.
Limited Run - Provides 50 static or dynamic analyses of piping system models over an
unlimited period of time, but does not include software updates. Your license is upgraded, if
necessary, whenever you purchase a new set of 50 runs.
Intergraph CAS only ships the current version of CAESAR II, no matter which type of license
you purchase. Updates will be delivered on request to lease users and to full run users who
have a current support/maintenance contract.
28
SECTION 2
Getting Started
This section explains the CAESAR II basic operation, and steps you through a quick static
piping analysis.
The main steps required to perform a static analysis are:
1. Starting CAESAR II (on page 29)
2. Create a new job (on page 30)
3. Piping Input generation (on page 31)
4. Model Error Checking (on page 34)
5. Building Load Cases (on page 35)
6. Run a static analysis (on page 36)
7. Static Output Review (on page 36)
A complete tutorial is provided in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
In This Section
Starting CAESAR II..................................................................... 29
Understanding Jobs .................................................................... 30
Basic Operation .......................................................................... 30
Main Menu.................................................................................. 37
Starting CAESAR II
1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph CAS > CAESAR II >
CAESAR II. You may
also have a CAESAR II icon on your desktop that you can use to start CAESAR II.
The main CAESAR II window displays.
This window contains the main menu and toolbar from which you select jobs and analysis
types, start analysis, and review output.
29
Getting Started
2. Click File > Set Default Data Directory.
The Default Data Directory Specification dialog box displays.
3. Define the folder to save your jobs and other CAESAR II data files. The default folder is
C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\Examples.
4. From the Language menu, select your language for the interface.
5. In Windows Explorer, go to C:\ProgramData\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\version\System.
6. Using a text editor, open Company.txt and specify your company name on the first line.
This will place your company name is the header of CAESAR II calculations.
Understanding Jobs
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. All subsequent input,
analysis, or output reviews reference the job specified. You create a new job by selecting File >
New or by clicking New
on the main toolbar. You open an existing job by selecting File >
Open or by clicking Open
on the main toolbar.
After you have created or opened a job, the job name displays in the title bar of the main
CAESAR II window. Use the commands on the Input, Analysis, and Output menus to define,
analyze, and review your data.
Basic Operation
To help you get familiar with CAESAR II, we will step through a basic piping analysis.
Topics
Create a new job......................................................................... 30
Generate piping input.................................................................. 31
Check for errors in the model ...................................................... 34
Build load cases.......................................................................... 35
Run a static analysis ................................................................... 36
Review static output.................................................................... 36
Create a new job

1. Click Start > All Programs > Intergraph ICAS > CAESAR II > CAESAR II
The CAESAR II main window displays.

2. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box displays.
3. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type MyFirstPipingModel.
4. Select the Piping Input option.
5. In the Enter the data directory box, type C:\temp\CAESAR II.
30
Getting Started
You can put your job file in another folder if you want, just remember where and
substitute that folder for C:\temp\CAESAR II when needed.
6. Click OK.
The job is created and the job name displays in the main window title bar.
Next, the Review Current Units dialog box displays.

7. Review the units listed in the dialog box, and then click OK.
The Piping Input window displays.
You can use Input > Piping to activate the Piping Input window.
Generate piping input

Model input generation consists of describing the piping elements and any external influences
(boundary conditions or loads) acting on those elements. Two node numbers identify each pipe
element end. Every pipe element also requires the specification of geometric, cross sectional,
and material data. One method of data entry is the Piping Spreadsheet.
You define a piping element on its own spreadsheet. Some data, when defined on a piping
element, is automatically duplicated by CAESAR II to subsequent piping spreadsheets. This
means that for many elements you only have to confirm the node numbers and type the
delta-dimensions, and then CAESAR II automatically duplicates from the previous element the
other data such as pipe diameter, operating temperatures, material type, and so forth. You can
always type specific data to override the duplicated data in the piping spreadsheet for an
element.
The menus, toolbars, and accelerators offer a number of additional commands to type auxiliary
processors or use special modelers or databases. The commands and general input instructions
of the piping spreadsheet are discussed in detail in Piping Input Reference (on page 106).
1. In the DX box, type 10-0 (which is 10 ft).
2. In the Diameter box, type 8 (8-in. nominal).
CAESAR II automatically converts this value to the actual diameter.
31
Getting Started
3. In the Wt/Sch box, type S (standard schedule pipe wall).
CAESAR II automatically converts this to wall thickness.
4. In the Temp 1 box, type 600 (degrees Fahrenheit).
5. In the Pressure 1 box, type 150 (psig).
6. Double-click the Bend check box.
The Bends tab displays.
This adds a long radius bend at the end of the element, and adds intermediate nodes 18
and 19 at the near weld and mid-points of the bend, respectively (node 20 physically
represents the far weld point of the bend).
7. Double-click the Restraint check box.

The Restraint tab displays.
32
Getting Started
8. In the first Node box, type 10, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
9. Select A106 B from the Material drop list.

This selection fills in the material parameters such as density and modulus elasticity.
10. Double-click the Allowable Stress check box.
The Allowable Stresses tab displays.
11. Select the B31.3 code from the Code drop list.
Allowable stresses for the given material, temperature, and code display automatically.
12. In the Fluid Den 1 box, type 0.85SG (0.85 specific gravity).
The software automatically converts this value to density.
13. After you finish defining the first element, you need to move to the next element. You can do
this by pressing Alt-C, by clicking Continue
, or by selecting Edit > Continue from the
menu.
Node numbers are automatically generated in the From and To boxes and data is carried
forward from the previous element.
14. In the DY box, type 10-0 (10 feet).
15. Double-click the Restraint check box.
16. In the first Node box, type 30, and then select ANC from the first Type drop list.
The two-element model (a well-defined configuration anchored at each end) is complete.
33
Getting Started
The piping input preprocessor has an interactive graphics and a list view function to make model
editing and verification easier. You can verify your model using the Graphics or List utilities,
although a combination of both modes is recommended. By default, the graphics screen
displays to the right of the input spreadsheet. You can click the small pin in the upper-left corner
to collapse the input spreadsheet to provide maximum graphic space.
Check for errors in the model

When you are finished modeling, you must run File > Error Check
analysis.
before you can run an
The two main functions of this error check are to verify your input data by checking each
individual piping element for consistency and to build the execution data files used by the
analysis and review processes.
Errors that will prevent the analysis from running (such as a corrosion allowance greater than
the wall thickness) are flagged as fatal errors and display in red text. Unusual items (such as a
change of direction without a bend or intersection) are flagged as warnings and display in green
text. Other informational messages that may show intermediate calculations or general notes
display in blue text. All messages display in the Errors and Warnings tab next to the model
graphics.
34
Getting Started
When you double-click an error or warning message, CAESAR II displays the spreadsheet of
the associated element and highlights the element in the graphic display. You can sort error
messages by clicking the column titles. Use File > Print
to print the entire error report or
selected sections. Use the options arrow on the Error Check icon to display only fatal errors or
all errors.
If there is a fatal error, you must return to the input module to make corrections. Click the
Classic Piping Input tab or double-click the row number for the error message.
If the error check process completes without fatal errors, a center of gravity report displays, the
analysis data files are generated, and the solution phase can commence. If fatal errors do exist,
the analysis data files are not generated and the solution phase cannot begin. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until successful before analysis is permitted.
Build load cases

After the analysis data files have been created by the error checker, you can run a static
analysis. The first step of a static analysis is to define the load cases. For new jobs (there are no
previous solution files available), the static analysis module recommends load cases to you
based on the load types encountered in the input file. These recommended load cases are
usually sufficient to satisfy the piping code requirements for the Sustained and Expansion load
cases. If the recommended load cases are not satisfactory, you should modify them.
1. From the Piping Input window, select Edit > Edit Static Load Cases
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box displays.

2. You can build loads two ways:
Combine the load components defined in the input (weight, displacements,

temperatures, and so forth) into load cases (basic cases), or
Combine pre-existing load cases into new load cases (combination cases).
3. Build the basic cases by selecting one or more load components in the Loads Defined in
Input list and then dragging and dropping them to the Load Cases list to the right. You can
also type on any of the individual load case lines. Stress types (indicating which code
equations should be used to calculate and check the stresses) are selected from the Stress
Type list.
Combination cases, if needed, must follow the basic cases. You can build combination
cases by selecting one or more load components and dragging and dropping the basic load
cases from either the Load Defined in Input primitives or from the other previous load
cases (by dragging the load case number) to combine cases (or create new load cases)
later in the list.
You can have a maximum of 999 static load cases. For more information, see Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on page 544).
35
Getting Started
Run a static analysis

After the load cases are defined, you can run the analysis.
1. Select File > Batch Run
to run the actual finite element solution.
The analysis creates the element stiffness matrices and load vectors and solves for
displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. The analysis also performs
the design and selection of spring hangers and iterative stiffness matrix modifications for
nonlinear restraints. Finally, the Static Output Processor window displays.
Review static output

When the analysis is finished, you can review the results using the Static Output Processor
window.
1. On the main CAESAR II window, select Output > Static.
The Static Output Processor window displays.
2. In the Load Case Analyzed list, select one or more load cases for which to review results.
3. In the Standard Reports list, select one or more reports to review.
4. Click --> Add.
5. Select where you want to view the results: the screen, Microsoft Word or Excel, the printer,
or an ASCII file.
6. Click Finish to view the reports.
7. Click Options > Graphical Output to review the analytic results in graphics mode, which
can produce displaced shapes, stress distributions, and restraint actions.
The actual study of the results depends on the purpose of each load case and the reason for the
analysis. Usually the review checks that the system stresses are below their allowables,
restraint loads are acceptable, and displacements are not excessive. Additional post processing
(such as equipment, nozzle, and structural steel checks) might be required depending on the
model and type of analysis.
After you finish reviewing the output, return to the main window by exiting the output review
module.
36
Getting Started
Main Menu
After starting CAESAR II, the software opens the main menu and toolbar. Keep this window as
small as possible to conserve screen space.
Topics
File Menu.................................................................................... 37
Input Menu ................................................................................. 40
Analysis Menu ............................................................................ 40
Output Menu............................................................................... 41
Language Menu.......................................................................... 42
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 42
Diagnostics Menu ....................................................................... 43
ESL Menu................................................................................... 45
View Menu .................................................................................. 45
FEA Tools Menu ......................................................................... 46
Help Menu .................................................................................. 46
File Menu
The File menu is used to create and save piping and structural jobs.
Topics
Set Default Data Directory .......................................................... 38
New ............................................................................................ 38
Open .......................................................................................... 39
37
Getting Started
Set Default Data Directory

Sets the default data (project) directory without selecting a specific job file. Some CAESAR II
options do not require that a job be selected but must know in which directory to work. All
CAESAR II generated data files are written to this directory. Click File > Set Default Data
Directory on the main menu to activate the Default Data Directory Specification dialog box.
Click Examples to set the default data directory to the examples directory delivered with
CAESAR II.
The data directory specification is very important because any configuration, units, or
other data files found in that directory are considered to be local to that job.
New
Starts a new piping or structural job. Click File > New
Job Name Specification dialog box.
on the main menu to activate the New
New Job Name Specification Dialog Box

Controls parameters for creating a new CAESAR II job.
Enter the name for the new job file
Specifies the job name.
Piping Input
Indicates that the job is a piping job. The software only displays this radio button option
when you create a new file from the CAESAR II main menu.
Structural Input
Indicates that the job is a structural job. The software only displays this radio button option
Enter the data directory
Specifies the location of the job file. You can type the directory into the field, or click the
browse button to browse to the directory.
38
Getting Started
Open
Opens an existing piping or structural job. Click File > Open
on the main menu to activate
the Open dialog box. Use the Open dialog box to browse to and select the job file to open. Click
System to jump to the CAESAR II system folder. Click Example to jump to the CAESAR II
delivered example jobs folder.
You can also roll-back to a previous revision of a piping input job using the Open dialog box.
CAESAR II saves the last 25 revisions, deleting the oldest revision when necessary.
1. Click File > Open.
2. Browse to and then select the piping input job to roll-back.
3. In the Previous Revisions list in the bottom-right corner of the Open dialog box, select the
revision to rollback to.
4. Click Open.
The software asks you to confirm restoring the selected backup.
5. Click Yes to restore the previous revision.
39
Getting Started
Input Menu
The Input menu is used to select the modules to define the job input parameters. Piping and
Underground are available for piping jobs. Structural Steel is available for structural jobs.
Piping
Defines piping job parameters. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page
106).
Underground
Converts an existing piping model to buried pipe. For more information, see Buried Pipe
Modeler (on page 494).
Structural Steel
Defines structural steel for the job. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on
page 397).
Analysis Menu
The Analysis menu displays the available calculations in CAESAR II.
Statics
Performs Static analysis of pipe or structure. The command is available after error checking
the input files. For more information, see Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box (on
page 544).
Dynamics
Performs Dynamic analysis of pipe or structure. The command is avail\-able after error
checking the input files. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis (on page 628).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at tee intersections. For
more information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 783)
Bend SIF Scratchpad
Displays scratch pads used to calculate stress intensification factors at bends. For more
information, see Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 789).
WRC 107(537)/297
Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see WRC 107
Vessel Stresses (see "WRC Bulletin 107(537)" on page 799).
Flanges
Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 802).
B31.G
Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining Strength
Calculations (B31G) (on page 821).
40
Getting Started
Expansion Joint Rating
Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more information, see Expansion
Joint Rating (on page 826).
AISC
Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements.
NEMA SM23
Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles.
API 610
Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps.
API 617
Evaluates piping loads on compressors.
API 661
Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers.
HEI Standard
Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters.
API 560
Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters.
Output Menu
The Output menu lists all available output of piping or structural calculations that can be
selected for review.
Static
Displays the results of a static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor
Window (see "Static Output Processor" on page 575).
Harmonic
Displays Harmonic Loading results.
Spectrum Modal
Displays Natural Frequency/Mode Shape calculations or Uniform/Force Spectrum Loading
results.
Time History
Displays Time History Load Simulation results.
Animation
Displays Animated Graphic simulations of any of the above results. Click to view any of the
following simulations:
Mode Shapes
Harmonic
41
Getting Started
Time History
Static
Language Menu
CAESAR II supports multiple languages. To select the language, click Language on the
CAESAR II main menu, and then select the language you prefer. Many of the CAESAR II
modules are available in English and Japanese, such as the Main Menu, the Classic Piping
Input dialog box, the Static Load Case Editor, and the Static Output Processor. Additionally,
significant portions of the documentation, including the various guides and F1 Help information,
are translated.
English (United States)
Identifies that the current language is English, which is the default language.
Japanese
Changes portions of the CAESAR II user interface text and the user documentation to
Japanese.
Future releases of CAESAR II will include support for new languages in the product and
documentation.
Tools Menu
The Tools menu activates various CAESAR II supporting utilities.
Configure/Setup
The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains directives that dictate how CAESAR II will operate
on a particular computer and how it will perform a particular analysis. Each time that you open
the software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data folder. If the configuration
file is not found in the current data folder, the software then searches the CAESAR II system
folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error is generated and
CAESAR II exits. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).
Calculator
Launches an on-screen calculator.
Create/Review Units
Creates custom sets of units or lets you review the units configuration. For more information,
see Create/Review Units (on page 1033).
Change Model Units
Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. For more information, see Change
Model Units (on page 1036).
Material Database
Edits or adds to the CAESAR II Material Database. For more information, see Material
Database (on page 1018).
42
Getting Started
Accounting
Activates or customizes job accounting or generates accounting reports. For more
information, see Accounting (on page 1026).
Multi-Job Analysis
Enables the user to run a stream of jobs without operator intervention. For more information,
see Batch Stream Processing (on page 1037).
External Interfaces
Displays the interfaces to and from third party software (both CAD and analytical). For more
information, see External Interfaces (on page 1039).
ISOGEN Isometrics
Starts CAESAR II Isometrics. For more information, see Generate Stress Isometrics (see
"Generate Stress Isometrics Overview" on page 759).
I-Configure
Starts I-Configure.
Explore System Folder
Opens the CAESAR II System folder.
Reset Layouts to Default
Restores all CAESAR II window layouts to the default positions. In addition, all toolbar
customizations are reset to the default state and your video driver is to OpenGL.
Diagnostics Menu
The Diagnostics menu activates utilities to help troubleshoot problem installations.
CRC Check
Verifies that software files are not corrupted. For more information, see CRC Check (on
page 44).
Build Version
Determines the build version of CAESAR II files. For more information, see Build Version
(on page 44).
Error Review
Allows you to look up errors for more information. For more information, see Error Review
(on page 44).
QA Test
Runs the QATEST software, which compares output file information between a new version
of the software and the previously verified version. For more information, see QA Test (on
page 45).
43
Getting Started
CRC Check
Assesses whether the version of CAESAR II you are running matches the originally installed
files. Run the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) to identify if any files are corrupted. When you
click CRC Check in Utilities > Diagnostics, the software opens the CRCCHK File Verification
dialog box and begins scanning all CAESAR II files. When the scan completes, the CRC Status
column indicates if there were any files that did not match the originally installed software files,
and the File Name column shows the file path. In addition, the scan results shows how many
files were read and how many errors the software detected.
The following issues can contribute to a CRC Check failure.
The distribution DVD is corrupted. Contact CAESAR II support for a new DVD.
The wrong files were installed (for example a service pack was installed for the wrong
version of the software).
A virus has infected the file. Use virus-detecting software to correct this issue.
You received a new file from Intergraph CAS. The CRC value is expected to be different in
this circumstance, and it is not a problem.
Build Version
Scans all EXE, DLL, and COM files for the ID Version information. Intergraph CAS defines ID
Version information for all of the previously mentioned files to indicate version and build details
for the file. The software displays additional information about the file, such as the name, file
size, build number, operating system, and date and time of the file. For more specifics on the ID
Version file information, click Details at the bottom of the dialog box.
Error Review
Provides a search dialog for error codes. When you select Error Review, the software opens
the Additional Error Information dialog box. Type the error number returned by the software
during analysis, and click OK. The software displays additional details about the error message
and any resolution steps. For general information on error handling in the CAESAR II software,
see CAESAR II Error Processing (on page 1038).
44
Getting Started
QA Test
Compares output file information between a new version of the software and the previously
verified version. You can use the QATEST software to verify the output generated by a specific
version of CAESAR II. For more information on the fields compared, click QA Test and then
click the CAESAR II icon in the upper-left corner of the dialog box, and select QATEST
Information.
ESL Menu
The ESL menu accesses utilities that interact with the External Software Lock (ESL). These
commands are disabled if you are using SmartPlant License Manager.
Show Data
Displays data stored on the ESL.
Access Codes
Allows runs to be added or other ESL changes, to be made either through Fax or E-mail (in
conjunction with option below).
Authorization Codes
See the Access Codes option.
Check ESL Driver
Verifies the location and version of the ESL.
Install ESL Driver
Installs the ESL Drivers.
View Menu
The View menu is used to enable and customize the status bar and all toolbars.
Toolbar
Displays or hides toolbars and allows you to customize toolbars.
Status Bar
Displays or hides the status bar at the bottom of the window.
45
Getting Started
FEA Tools Menu

The FEA Tools menu lets you access and use third-party tools from Paulin Research Group
(PRG) for better modeling and evaluation.
If you have not purchased and installed FEATools or NozzlePRO, the software opens the
ICAS website with information about these products.
FEA Translator
Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II FEA Translator. The translator in this tool lets
you incorporate finite element analysis into your pipe stress analysis. Calculate and apply
more relevant FEA-based SIFs and flexibilities (k factors) for branch connections.
Results Comparison
Opens the CAESAR II job in the CAESAR II Comparison Tool. This utility compares output
results from multiple jobs, including values for displacements, forces and moments, restraint
forces, and restraint moments. Use the comparison tool to compare results CAESAR II jobs.
Criticality Index/Evaluator
Opens the CAESAR II job in the Piping System Criticality Evaluator, which analyzes system
data, such as number of pressure cycles, system D/T ratio, operating temperatures or
pressures, thermal conditions, and so forth, and alerts you to areas of risk on the model.
NozzlePRO
Opens the CAESAR II job in NozzlePRO, which is a single-component analysis tool for
piping and pressure vessels. Analyze individual nozzles, clips, lugs, saddles or other branch
connections.
For more information on using FEATools or NozzlePRO software to perform finite element
analysis, see the FEATools User Manual.
Help Menu
The Help menu displays the available CAESAR II documentation.
Online Documentation
Displays CAESAR II documentation in HTML or PDF format.
Desktop (Online) Help
Launches Intergraph CAS online technical support.
Online Registration
Enables you to register electronically with Intergraph CAS. An active internet connection is
required.
Information
Provides information on the best ways to contact Intergraph CAS personnel for technical
support and provides internet links for Intergraph CAS downloads and information.
Check for Upgrades
Enables you to verify the most current version of CAESAR II is installed.
46
Getting Started
About CAESAR II
Displays CAESAR II version and copyright information.
CAESAR II is context-sensitive, which means you can access on-screen help by clicking ? or
pressing F1 when the cursor is in any input field. A help screen displays showing a discussion
and the required units, if applicable.
47
SECTION 3
Configuration and Environment

This section discusses the configuration options that are available.
In This Section
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation ................................... 48
Computational Control ................................................................ 50
Database Definitions ................................................................... 56
FRP Pipe Properties ................................................................... 62
Geometry Directives ................................................................... 67
Graphic Settings ......................................................................... 70
Miscellaneous Options ................................................................ 85
SIFs and Stresses ...................................................................... 91
Set/Change Password ................................................................ 104
CAESAR II Configuration File Generation

The CAESAR.cfg configuration file contains instructions that dictate how CAESAR II operates
on a particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to perform
the analysis.
If the configuration file is not found in the current data directory, the software then
searches the installation folder. If the configuration file is not found in either location, a fatal error
is generated and CAESAR II exits.
The CAESAR.cfg file may vary from computer to computer, and many of the
configuration spreadsheet values modify the analysis. To produce identical results between
computers, use the same configuration file. Make a copy of the setup file to be archived with
input and output data so that identical reruns can be made. The units file, if it is modified, must
also be identical if the same results are to be produced.
View the current CAESAR.cfg file

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
Alternatively, you can click Configure
on the toolbar.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays. The attributes for Computational
Control display.
In the left-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheets categories display.
In the right-hand pane, the configuration spreadsheet values for that category display.
The Data Directory displays the path where the current configuration file is stored.
2. Click the title in the Categories pane to navigate to the appropriate configuration
spreadsheets.
48

3. Click the X in the right-hand corner to exit.
Create a new CAESAR.cfg file

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.
on the toolbar.
Control display.
2. Click Save and Exit
located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Change the current CAESAR.cfg file for this computer

1. To display the CAESAR.cfg file, click Tools > Configure/Setup.
on the toolbar.
Control display.
2.
Click the description to change a value for a configuration attribute,

A drop-down menu which contains the possible values for the attribute displays.
3. Select a new value.

The new value displays in bold text.
4. Continue changing values until you are finished.
5. Click Save and Exit
located in the top-left corner of the Configuration Editor window.
Reset the current CAESAR.cfg file to the default settings
Click Alt D to reset an individual field value in the current configuration file to its default
value.
Click Reset All -> Set Current Defaults to reset all the values for the current configuration
file to the default values.
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup to display the CAESAR.cfg file.

on the toolbar.
Control display.
2. Click the Reset All drop-down menu.
The various default file options display.
3. Select a default file.
The values in left-hand pane change to the default values. Values change to normal text
from bold text.
4. Save the changes.
The following section explains each of the CAESAR II configuration file Category options.
49
Computational Control
The Computational Control category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Convergence Tolerances (on page 50)
Input Spreadsheet Defaults (on page 53)
Miscellaneous (on page 55)
Figure 1: Computation Control Configuration Settings
50
Convergence Tolerances
Topics
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance ........................................... 51
Friction Angle Variation ............................................................... 51
Friction Normal Force Variation ................................................... 51
Friction Slide Multiplier ................................................................ 52
Friction Stiffness .......................................................................... 52
Rod Increment (Degrees) ............................................................ 52
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) ............................................................ 52
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Defines the value used by the software to check the ratio of off-diagonal to on-diagonal
coefficients in the row. The default value is 1.0 e+10. If this ratio is greater than the
decomposition singularity tolerance, then a numerical error may occur. This problem does not
have to be associated with a system singularity. This condition can exist when very small, and/or
long pipes are connected to very short, and/or large pipes. These solutions have several general
characteristics:
When computer precision errors of this type occur, they are very local in nature. They
typically affect only a single element or very small part of the model and are readily
noticeable upon inspection.
The 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E11 or 1E12 and still provide a reasonable check on
solution accuracy. Any solution computed after increasing the limit should always be
checked closely for reasonableness. At 1E11 or 1E12, the number of significant figures in
the local solution is reduced to two or three.
Although the 1E10 limit can be increased to 1E20 or 1E30 to get the job to run, it is
important to remember that the possibility for a locally errant solution exists when stiffness
ratios are allowed to get this high. Solutions should be carefully checked.
Friction Angle Variation

Specifies the friction sliding angle variation. The default value is 15-degrees.
This parameter had more significance in software versions prior to 2.1. It is currently only
used in the first iteration when a restraint goes from the non-sliding to sliding state. All
subsequent iterations compensate for the angle variation automatically.
Friction Normal Force Variation

Defines the amount of variation in the normal force that is permitted before an adjustment is
made in the sliding friction force. The default value is 0.15, or 15 percent. Normally, you should
not adjust this value.
51
Friction Slide Multiplier

Specifies the internal friction sliding force multiplier.
You should never adjust this value unless you are instructed to do so by Intergraph
CAS Support.
Friction Stiffness
Specifies the friction restraint stiffness.
The default value for the friction restraint stiffness is 1.0E+06 lb/in.
If the structural load normal to a friction restraint is less than the restraint load multiplied by the
coefficient of friction, the pipe will not move at this support this restraint node is "non-sliding."
To model the non-sliding state, stiffnesses are inserted in the two directions perpendicular to the
restraint's line of action to oppose any sliding motion.
Nonlinear convergence problems may be alleviated by reducing the friction restraint stiffness.
Lower friction stiffness will more readily distribute friction loads throughout the system and allow
nonlinear convergence. However, this lower stiffness affects the accuracy of the results. Lower
stiffness values permit more "non-sliding" movement, but given the indeterminate nature of the
friction problem in general, this error may not be crucial.
Rod Increment (Degrees)

Specifies the maximum amount of angular change that any one support can experience
between iterations. For difficult-to-converge problems, values of 0.1 have proven effective.
When small values are used, you should be prepared for a large number of iterations. The total
number of iterations can be estimated from the following:
Estimate number of Iterations = 1.5(x)/(r)/(Rod Increment)
Where:
x = maximum horizontal displacement at any one rod
r = rod length at that support
Rod Tolerance (Degrees)

Specifies the angular plus-or-minus permitted convergence error. Unless the change from
iteration n to iteration n+1 is less than this value, the rod will not converge. The default value is
1.0 degree.
For systems subject to large horizontal displacements, values of 5.0 degrees for
convergence tolerances have been used successfully.
52
Input Spreadsheet Defaults

Topics
Alpha Tolerance .......................................................................... 53
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)........................................................... 53
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness........................................... 53
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness ...................................... 53
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness ............................................... 53
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)................................................. 54
New Job Ambient Temperature ................................................... 54
New Job Bourdon Pressure ......................................................... 54
Alpha Tolerance
Indicates the breakpoint at which CAESAR II decides that the entry in the Temp fields on the
input spreadsheet is a thermal expansion coefficient or a temperature. The default value is 0.05.
Any entry in the Temp fields whose absolute magnitude is less than 0.05 is taken to be a
thermal expansion coefficient in terms of inches per inch (dimensionless).
Coefficient of Friction (Mu)

Specifies the value that the software applies by default as the coefficient of friction to all
translational restraints. If you type 0, which is the default value, the software does not apply any
friction.
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified rotational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value is
assumed to be (1.0E12 in-lb/deg).
Default Translational Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for non-specified translational restraint stiffnesses. By default this value
is assumed to be (1.0E12 lb./in).
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness

Defines the value used for computing the hanger restrained weight loads. Where hangers are
adjacent to other supports or are themselves very close, such as where there are two hangers
on either side of a trunnion support, the CAESAR II hanger design algorithm may generate
poorly distributed hot hanger loads in the vicinity of the close hangers. Using a more flexible
support for computing the hanger restrained weight loads often allows the design algorithm to
more effectively distribute the systems weight. A typical entry is 50,000 lbs/in.; the default value
is (1.0E12 lb/in).
53
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%)

Specifies the default percentage of wall thickness allowed for mill and other mechanical
tolerances.
For most piping codes, this value is only used during the minimum wall thickness
computation. Mill tolerance is usually not considered in the flexibility analysis.
The default value is 12.5, corresponding to a 12.5% tolerance. To eliminate mill tolerance
consideration, set Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) to 0.0.
New Job Ambient Temperature

Represents the installed, or zero expansion, strain state. The default ambient temperature for all
elements in the system is 70F/21C.
This value is only used to initialize the ambient temperature input field for new jobs.
Changing this configuration value will not affect existing jobs. To change the ambient
temperature for an existing job, use the Ambient Temperature (on page 302) field in the Piping
Input Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
New Job Bourdon Pressure

Specifies the type of Bourdon pressure effect used. The Bourdon effect causes straight pipe to
elongate and bends to open up translationally along a line connecting the curvature end points.
If the Bourdon effect is disabled, there will be no global displacements due to pressure.
None - Disables the Bourdon effect. There will be no global displacements due to pressure.
Trans Only - Includes only translation effects (Bourdon Pressure Option #1).
Trans + Rot - Includes translational and rotational effects on bends. This option may apply
for bends that are formed or rolled from straight pipe, where the bend-cross section will be
slightly oval due to the bending process. (Bourdon Pressure Option #2)
For straight pipe, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 is the same as Bourdon Pressure Option #2.
For elbows, Bourdon Pressure Option #1 should apply for forged and welded fittings where
the bend cross-section can be considered essentially circular.
The Bourdon effect (Trans only) is always considered when FRP pipe is used, regardless of
the actual setting of the Bourdon flag.
54
Miscellaneous
Topics
Bend Axial Shape........................................................................ 55
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness .................................................... 55
Include Insulation in Hydrotest ..................................................... 55
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases ................. 55
Incore Numerical Check .............................................................. 55
Missing Mass ZPA....................................................................... 56
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends ............................................... 56
WRC-107 Interpolation Method ................................................... 56
WRC-107(537) Version ............................................................... 56
Bend Axial Shape

Controls whether the displacement mode is ignored. For bends 45-degrees or smaller, a major
contributor to deformation can be the axial displacement of the short-arched pipe. With the axial
shape function disabled, this displacement mode is ignored and the bend will be stiffer.
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness

Indicates whether the software uses the stiffness of spring hangers in the analysis. The default
setting is False, meaning that the software does not ignore the stiffness of spring hangers.
Setting this option to True is consistent with hand computation methods of spring hanger
design, which ignores the effects of the springs.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you never change this value.
Include Insulation in Hydrotest

Controls whether the weight of any insulation and cladding will be considered in the hydrotest
case. To ignore the insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select False (the default
setting). To include the weight of insulation and cladding in the hydrotest case, select True.
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE Travel Cases

Controls how the software handles spring hangers. If you select True, the software places the
designed spring stiffness into the Hanger Operating Travel Case and iterates until the system
balances. This iteration scheme therefore considers the effect of the spring hanger stiffness on
the thermal growth of the system (vertical travel of the spring). If this option is used, it is very
important that the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) be adjusted to match the
reported hanger cold load.
If you select False, spring hangers are designed the traditional way.
Incore Numerical Check

Enables the incore solution module to test the solution stability for the current model and
loadings. This option, if selected, adds the solution of an extra load case to the analysis.
55
Missing Mass ZPA

Indicates which spectrum value CAESAR II uses. If you select Extracted (the default setting),
the software will use the spectrum value at the last "extracted" mode. Changing this value to
Spectrum instructs CAESAR II to use the last spectrum value as the ZPA for the missing mass
computations.
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends

Controls whether CAESAR II includes pressure stiffening effects in those codes that do not
explicitly require its use. In these cases, pressure stiffening effects will apply to all bends,
elbows, and both miter types. In all cases, the pressure used is the maximum of all pressures
defined for the element.
Pressure stiffening effects are defined in Appendix D of B31.1 and B31.3.
When set to Default, the software considers the pressure stiffening of bends according to the
active piping code.
WRC-107 Interpolation Method

Specifies the interpolation method used by the software. The curves in WRC Bulletin 107 cover
typical applications of nozzles in vessels or piping; however, should any of the interpolation
parameters, such as U, Beta, and so forth, fall outside the limits of the available curves, then
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
WRC-107(537) Version
Sets the version of the WRC-107(537) bulletin used in the computations. Valid options are:
Aug'65 - August 1965
Mar'79 - March 1979
March '79 1B1/2B1 - March 1979 with the 1B1-1 and 2B-1 off axis curves. This is the
default setting.
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
Database Definitions
The Database Definitions category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Databases (on page 57)
56
ODBC Settings (on page 62)
Databases
Topics
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path ................................. 58
Default Spring Hanger Table ....................................................... 59
Expansion Joints ......................................................................... 59
Load Case Template ................................................................... 59
Piping Size Specification ............................................................. 60
Structural Database..................................................................... 60
Units File Name........................................................................... 60
User Material Database Filename................................................ 60
Valve/Flange Files Location ......................................................... 61
Valves and Flanges ..................................................................... 61
57
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data Path

Specifies which system folder CAESAR II users to run the software. Select a folder in the list.
Because the software writes the configuration file (CAESAR.cfg) to the local data folder, you can
configure different data folders to reference different system folders. All of the system folders
contain formatting files, units files, text files, and other user-configurable data files. Some of
these formatting files are language or code-specific. Therefore, you may want to switch between
system folders depending on the current job.
Use Multiple System Folders in the Same Location

You can create multiple system folders in the same location to provide different options for
different projects. System folder names must use the following naming convention:
SYSTEM.xxx, where .xxx, is a three-character suffix identifying the folder. You can create as
many system folders as needed below the CAESAR II installation program folder, as long as
you follow the required naming convention. CAESAR II uses the system folder you indicate in
the configuration settings.
For example, you could set up system folders specified for each of the piping codes
configurations you need, such as:
System.STM (Stoomwezen code system configuration)
System.ANC (ASME NC code system configuration)
System.313 ASME B31.3 code system configuration)
You could also set up system folders that are customized specific projects.
Browse and locate any system folders named using the SYSTEM.xxx format from the Alternate
CAESAR II Distributed Data Path configuration setting. Then, you can select one and save the
configuration.
Use System Folders in Varying Locations

You can create system folders that reside in other locations, such as somewhere on your
network. This allows you to share the settings from the System folder with others. However, you
must copy the System folder and other necessary program folders to the secondary location.
You must also copy the LIB_I, LIB_M, and Spec folders (found in the Program folder
along with the System folder) to each new system folder location. You can leave the Backup,
Examples, and Temp folders in the original program folder location, as shown in the example
below.
The file name requirements mentioned in the previous section apply for system folders on a
network or in a secondary location as well. In addition, you can set up network system files that
apply at a project level.
There must be a primary system folder, named System, in which the software can place
accounting, version, and diagnostic files that it creates during execution. The location of the
primary system folder is dependent on the specific edition of the Windows operating system, as
follows:
58

Windows 7 and later
"C:\ProgramData\INTERGRAPH CAS\CAESAR II\x.xx\System"
The x.xx in each of the above sample path represents the CAESAR II version number.
Default Spring Hanger Table

Defines the value of the default spring hanger table, which is referenced during the spring
hanger design stage of the solution. The software includes tables from more than 35 different
vendors.
Expansion Joints
Specifies which expansion joint database the software should reference during subsequent input
sessions. Available databases provided include Pathway, Senior Flexonics, IWK, Piping
Technology, and China.
Load Case Template

Specifies which load case template is active. The software uses the active template file to
recommend load cases.
Because the software writes the CAESAR.cfg file to the local data folder, you can configure
different data directories to reference different template files.
Different piping codes have different requirements for load cases. If you use multiple piping
codes in your job, CAESAR II refers to the piping code defined on the last element in the
model to determine which load cases to recommend as per the code standards.
The load case template file name is limited to 15 characters (including the extension).
LOAD.TPL (default)
Select this option to include alternate Sustained (SUS) load cases to consider all support
configurations for each corresponding Operating (OPE) condition as required by the B31.3
code. This option, which is only applicable to the B31.3 piping code, also includes the
additional Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple
operating conditions.
LOAD_BASIC.TPL
Select this option if you do not need additional EXP stress range load cases and do not use
the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.
LOAD_EXP.TPL
Select this option to include additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions and do not use the alternate SUS/OCC load cases for B31.3.
LOAD_ALT.TPL
Select this option to include alternate SUS load cases to consider all support configurations
for each corresponding OPE condition as required by the 2014 edition of B31.3. This option
59

is applicable to all piping codes (except for IGE/TD/12), and not limited to B31.3 piping code.
This option also includes the additional EXP stress range load cases for better coverage of
multiple operating conditions.
Piping Size Specification

Specifies the piping specification standard. Select one of the following standards: ANSI
(American National Standard), JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard), or DIN (German Standard).
By default, the software uses the ANSI pipe size and schedule tables in the input processor.
Structural Database
Specifies which database file is used to acquire the structural steel shape labels and cross
section properties. Select one of the following: AISC 1977, AISC 1989, German 1991, South
African 1991, Korean 1990, Australian 1990, United Kingdom, or China.
Units File Name

Specifies which of the available units files is active. The active units file is used for new job
creation and all output generation.
Because the CAESAR.cfg file is written to the local data directory, you can configure
different data directories to reference different units files.
The software first searches for units files in the local data directory, followed by the active
System directory.
User Material Database Filename

Specifies which user material database (UMD) file the software will access. By default, when
you add to or modify the supplied material database, the changes are saved to a file named
umat1.umd, which is located in the \System folder.
Versions of CAESAR II prior to 5.30 used the name umat1.bin. This file can be copied,
then renamed, if necessary, to umat1.umd.
In some cases, it may be necessary to manipulate several UMD files. This can occur if UMD
files are acquired from different sources. Because a specific file name can only be used once, it
will be necessary to rename any additional UMD files. As long as the file suffix is UMD, and the
file resides in the \System folder, the various CAESAR II modules will be able to access them.
Material database files are accessed as described below:
Piping Input and Analysis
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses the updated
materials in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
60

The Material Database Editor
The software reads the CAESAR II supplied material database (cmat.bin).
The software reads the specified user material database (UMD) and uses updated materials
in the UMD file instead of those in the CAESAR II supplied database.
CAESAR II saves any changes or additions to the specified user material database (UMD).
Create a New UMD File

1. Open the Configuration Editor and click Database Definitions.
2. In User Material Database Filename, type in a new name.
The UMD suffix should not be changed.
The file name plus the period plus the UMD suffix should not exceed 15 characters.
Do not use spaces (blanks) in the file name.
3. Before exiting the Configuration Editor, click Save and Exit

configuration.
to save the modified
4. When you open the Piping Input or the Material Database Editor, the software creates the
new UMD file.
Valve/Flange Files Location

Defines where CAESAR II looks for the valve/flange data file. The possible settings for this
configuration setting include:
CAESARII Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%.
Specs in CII, Data in CW
Directs the software to look for the specification files in the CAESAR II folders below
%allusersprofile%, but to look for the actual data files in the CADWorx folders.
CADWorx Directory
Directs the software to look for the valve/flange data files in the CADWorx folders.
Valves and Flanges

Specifies which valve/flange database CAESAR II references during subsequent input sessions.
The available databases include:
CADWORX.VHD
Reference the CADWorx Plant database.
CRANE.VHD
Reference the Crane database.
61

GENERIC.VHD
Reference a generic database.
NOFLANGE.VHD
Reference a database (generic) without attached flanges.
ODBC Settings
Topics
Append Reruns to Existing Data .................................................. 62
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases .................... 62
ODBC Compliant Database Name............................................... 62
Append Reruns to Existing Data

Controls how the software handles data from multiple runs.
False
Overwrite data from previous runs in the ODBC database. This is the default setting.
True
Add new data to the database, thus storing multiple runs of the same job in the database.
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant Databases

Turns on or off the capability to create ODBC-compliant databases for static output.
ODBC Compliant Database Name

Type the name of the ODBC project database. All jobs run in this data folder will write their
output to the database specified here.
FRP Pipe Properties

The FRP Properties category provides access to the following groups of configuration settings:
Material Properties (on page 63)
62
Settings (on page 65)
Material Properties
Topics
Axial Modulus of Elasticity ........................................................... 63
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) ....................................... 64
FRP Alpha (xe-06)....................................................................... 64
FRP Density ................................................................................ 64
FRP Laminate Type .................................................................... 64
FRP Property Data File ............................................................... 65
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus......................................... 65
Axial Modulus of Elasticity

Displays the axial elastic modulus of fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. This is the default value
used to set the data in the input processor. When necessary, you may override this value.
63
Axial Strain: Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a)

Displays the product of the ratio of the axial to the hoop elastic modulus and Poisson's ratio,
which relates the strain in the axial direction to a stress in the hoop direction.
Ea
Elastic modulus in the axial direction.
Eh
Elastic modulus in the hoop direction.
Vh/a
Poisson's ratio relating the strain in the axial direction due to a stress in the hoop direction.
FRP Alpha (xe-06)

Type the thermal expansion coefficient for the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used (multiplied
by 1,000,000). For example, if the value is 8.5E-6 in/in/deg, you will type 8.5. The exponent
(E-6) is implied.
If a single expansion coefficient is too limiting for your application, the actual thermal
expansion may always be calculated at temperature in inches per inch (or mm per mm) and
entered directly into the Temperature field on the Pipe spreadsheet.
FRP Density
Displays the weight of the pipe material on a per unit volume basis. This field is used to set the
default weight density of FRP materials in the piping input module.
FRP Laminate Type

Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
64
FRP Property Data File

Select the file from which the software will read the standard FRP material properties. After the
file is selected, the software will give you the option of reading in from that file.
You may create FRP material files as text files with the .frp extension; these files should be
stored in the CAESAR\System sub-folder. The format of the files must adhere to the format
shown in the following sample FRP data file:
The data lines must exactly follow the order shown in the above sample FRP data file.
The four data lines defining the UKOOA envelope are intended for future use and may be
omitted.
Ratio Shear Modulus: Elastic Modulus

Type the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity (in the axial direction) of the
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe used. For example, if the material modulus of elasticity (axial)
is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, the ratio of these two, 0.25, should be entered.
Settings
Topics
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening ........................................................ 66
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress .................................... 66
Use FRP Flexibilities ................................................................... 66
Use FRP SIF ............................................................................... 67
65
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening

Displays the method used to calculate the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs. The BS
7159 code explicitly requires that the effect of pressure stiffening on the bend SIFs be calculated
using the design strain (this is based upon the assumption that the FRP piping is fully
pressurized to its design limit). This is the default method for CAESAR II.
When the piping is pressurized to a value much lower than its design pressure, it may be more
accurate to calculate pressure stiffening based on the actual pressure stress, rather than its
design strain.
This alternative method is a deviation from the explicit instructions of the BS 7159 code.
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending Stress

Modifies the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress. Some sources, such as Shell's DEP
31.40.10.19-Gen. (December 1998) and ISO/DIS 14692 suggest that, when using the UKOOA
code, the axial bending stress should not be multiplied by the Part Factor f2 (the System Factor
of Safety) prior to combination with the longitudinal pressure stress.
True
Modify the UKOOA requirements for axial bending stress.
False
Use the UKOOA exactly as written.
Use FRP Flexibilities

Controls the fitting flexibility factor used by the software.
True
Set the fitting flexibility factor to 1.0 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the
default setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" flexibility factor equations to all FRP fittings.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software uses code flexibility factors,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
66
Use FRP SIF

Controls the SIF used by the software.
True
Set the fitting SIF to 2.3 when FRP pipe is selected (Material #20). This is the default
setting.
False
Apply the standard "code" SIF equations to all FRP fittings. Optionally, you can manually
type an alternative value.
If the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes are in effect, the software always uses code SIFs,
regardless of the setting of this configuration setting.
Geometry Directives
The Geometry Directives category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Bends (on page 67)
Input Items (on page 69)
Bends
Topics
Bend Length Attachment Percent ................................................ 68
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle.................................................. 68
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle .................................................. 68
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend ................................................ 68
67
Bend Length Attachment Percent

Controls the amount of accuracy included in the system dimensions around bends. The default
attachment is 1.0 percent.
Whenever the element leaving the tangent intersection of a bend is within (n)% of the bend
radius on either side of the weldline, CAESAR II inserts an element from the bend weldline to
the To node of the element leaving the bend. The inserted element has a length equal to exactly
(n)% of the bend radius. You can use Bend Length Attachment Percent to adjust this
percentage to reduce the error due to the inserted element; however, the length tolerance for
elements leaving the bend will also be reduced.
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the maximum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend. The default value is
95-degrees.
Very large angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a large angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the large angle
bend plots well when compared to the surrounding elements, then the bend can probably be
used without difficulty. Well-proportioned bends up to 135-degrees have been tested without a
problem.
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle

Specifies the minimum angle CAESAR II will accept for a bend angle. The default value is 5.0
degrees.
Very small angles, short radius bends can cause numerical problems during solution. When you
have a reasonable radius and a small angle, problems rarely arise. However, if the small angle
bend is grossly small compared to the surrounding elements, then a different modeling
approach is recommended so that the bend is not used.
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend

Controls the CAESAR II error checking tolerance for the "closeness" of points on the bend
curvature. The default value is 5.0-degrees.
Nodes on a bend curvature that are too close together can cause numerical problems during
solution. Where the radius of the bend is large, such as in a cross-country pipeline, it is not
uncommon to find nodes on a bend curvature closer than 5-degrees.
68
Input Items
Topics
Auto Node Number Increment ..................................................... 69
Connect Geometry Through CNodes ........................................... 69
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance ......................................... 69
Loop Closure Tolerance .............................................................. 70
New Job Z-Axis Vertical .............................................................. 70
Auto Node Number Increment

Sets the value for the Automatic Node Numbering routine. The software uses any non-zero,
positive value that you type to automatically assume the To node value on the piping input
spreadsheets. The new To node number is determined as:
"To Node" = "From Node" + Auto Node Number Increment
If this value is set to 0.0, automatic node numbering is disabled.
Connect Geometry Through CNodes

Controls whether each restraint, nozzle, or hanger exists at the same point in space as its
connecting node.
Restraints, flexible nozzles, and spring hangers may be defined with connecting nodes. By
default, CAESAR II ignores the position of the restraint node and the connecting node. They
may be at the same point, or they may be hundreds of feet apart. In many cases, enabling this
option will cause "plot-wise" disconnected parts of the system to be re-connected and to appear
as-expected in both input and output plots.
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance

Specifies the maximum slope of a straight pipe element for which thermal bowing effects will be
considered.
Thermal bowing is usually associated with fluid carrying horizontal pipes in which the fluid does
not fill the cross section. In these cases, there is a temperature differential across the cross
section. You can use Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance to define the interpretation of
"horizontal." By default, the software uses a value of 0.0001 as the horizontal threshold value. If
a pipe elements pitch is less than this tolerance, the element is considered to be horizontal, and
thermal bowing loads can be applied to it. An elements pitch is computed using the following
formula:
PITCH = | DY | / ( DX2 + DY2 + DZ2 )1/2
69
Loop Closure Tolerance

Sets the loop closure tolerance that CAESAR II uses for error checking. You can set this value
interactively for each job analyzed, or you can type the loop closure tolerance using this option
and override the software default value of 1.0 in without distraction.
New Job Z-Axis Vertical

Controls in which plane the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane.
False
Place the Z-axis in the horizontal plane. This is the default setting.
True
Make the Z-axis vertical. The X- and Y-axes will be in the horizontal plane.
This setting applies only to jobs created after this setting is changed.
Graphic Settings
The Graphics Settings category provides access to configuration settings that used to set the
different plot option colors, font characteristics, and the view options.
Advanced Options - Contains options that should only be used by graphics experts. For
more information, see Advanced Options (on page 71).
Background Colors - Contains options that define the color of the plot window. For more
information, see Background Colors (on page 72).
CADWorx Options - Contains options that define the color and behavior for CADWorx
drawings imported into CAESAR II models. For more information, see CADWorx Options (on
page 73).
Component Colors - Contains options that define the color for various components in the
plot. For more information, see Component Colors (on page 74).
Marker Options - Contains options that set the node marker color and size. For more
information, see Marker Options (on page 76).
Miscellaneous Options - Contains options that determine how graphics are displayed
either by default or when using the Reset Plot option. For more information, see
Miscellaneous Options (on page 77).
Output Colors - Contains options that set the colors used when plotting code stress in
output. For more information, see Output Colors (on page 81).
Text Options - Contains options for defining font, font style, font size, and color. Scripts are
supported. For more information, see Text Options (on page 82).
Visual Options - Contains options that control general plotting visibility. For more
information, see Visual Options (on page 83).
70

To change a color, click it once and then click the ellipses button that appears to the
right. Select a color in the dialog box that appears, and then click OK. To save the color settings,
click Save and Exit
before closing the Configuration Editor.
71
Advanced Options
Topics
Backplane Culling........................................................................ 72
Culling Maximum Extent .............................................................. 72
Use Culling Frustrum ................................................................... 72
Backplane Culling
This setting should only be used by graphics experts. If you are experiencing difficulties with
your graphics, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
Culling Maximum Extent

Use Culling Frustrum

Background Colors
Topics
Bottom ........................................................................................ 72
Top ............................................................................................. 72
Use Uniform Background Color ................................................... 72
Bottom
Sets the color for the bottom of the plot window.
Top
Sets the color for the top of the plot window.
Use Uniform Background Color

Controls the background color. Set this option to True if you want the plot background to be one
uniform color instead of blending between the top and bottom colors.
72
CADWorx Options
Topics
Color - Ambient ........................................................................... 73
Color - Face ................................................................................ 73
Color - Line ................................................................................. 73
Color - Specular .......................................................................... 73
Color - Transmission ................................................................... 73
Gloss Value................................................................................. 73
Show Lines ................................................................................. 73
Show Model ................................................................................ 74
Use AutoCAD Colors ................................................................... 74
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough .................................................... 74
Color - Ambient
Sets the color of the ambient properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Face
Sets the color of the face of the CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Line
Sets the color of the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Color - Specular
Sets the color of the specular properties on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Color - Transmission
Sets the color of the transmission lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Gloss Value
Sets the level of the gloss value on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II model.
Show Lines
Indicates to show or hide the piping lines on a CADWorx drawing imported into a CAESAR II
model.
73
Show Model
Indicates to show or hide the CADWorx drawing (model) that was imported into a CAESAR II
model.
Use AutoCAD Colors

Indicates to use the color settings from AutoCAD on a CADWorx drawing imported into a
CAESAR II model.
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough

Indicates to use the keyboard, not the mouse, to perform a walkthrough on a CADWorx drawing
imported into a CAESAR II model.
Component Colors
Topics
Anchor CNode............................................................................. 74
Anchors....................................................................................... 74
Expansion Joints ......................................................................... 75
Flange......................................................................................... 75
Hanger CNode ............................................................................ 75
Hangers ...................................................................................... 75
Nozzles ....................................................................................... 75
Nozzle Limit Color 1 .................................................................... 75
Nozzle Limit Color 2 .................................................................... 75
Pipes........................................................................................... 75
Restraint CNode.......................................................................... 76
Restraints .................................................................................... 76
Rigids.......................................................................................... 76
Selection ..................................................................................... 76
SIFs/Tees ................................................................................... 76
Steel ........................................................................................... 76
Anchor CNode
Sets the color of Cnode anchors when displayed in the graphics.
Anchors
Sets the color of anchors when displayed in the graphics.
74
Expansion Joints
Sets the color of expansion joints when displayed in the graphics.
Flange
Sets the color of all flanges when displayed in the graphics.
Hanger CNode
Sets the color of Cnode hangers when displayed in the graphics.
Hangers
Sets the color of the spring hangers (and spring cans) when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzles
Sets the color of all nozzles when displayed in the graphics.
Nozzle Limit Color 1

Sets the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle
Limit Color 2 (on page 75) configuration setting.
Nozzle Limit Color 2

Sets the second color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow when displayed in the graphics.
This arrow shows the element orientation when defining the local coordinate system for an
equipment check. Set the first color of the nozzle limit reference vector arrow in the Nozzle Limit
Color 1 (on page 75) configuration setting.
Pipes
Sets the color of all pipe elements when displayed in the graphics.
75
Restraint CNode
Sets the color of the restraint Cnode when displayed in the graphics.
Restraints
Sets the color of all restraints (except for anchors and hangers) when displayed in the graphics.
Rigids
Sets the color of all rigid elements when displayed in the graphics.
Selection
Sets the color of the selected element when displayed in the graphics.
SIFs/Tees
Sets the color of all tees when displayed in the graphics.
Steel
Sets the color of all structural steel elements in both the structural steel plot and the piping plot
when structural steel is included.
Marker Options
Topics
Marker Color ............................................................................... 76
Marker Size ................................................................................. 76
Marker Color
Sets the color of the node markers shown in the graphics.
Marker Size
Sets the size of the node markers shown in the graphics.
76
Miscellaneous Options
These options determine how graphics display by default or how they display when you use the
Reset Plot option while in the graphics.
Topics
Default Operator ......................................................................... 77
Default Projection Mode .............................................................. 77
Default Render Mode .................................................................. 77
Default View ............................................................................... 78
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble ................................................... 78
Force Black and White Printing ................................................... 78
Idle Processing Count ................................................................. 79
Optimal Frame Rate.................................................................... 79
Restore Previous Anchor Size..................................................... 79
Restore Previous Hanger Size .................................................... 79
Restore Previous Operator.......................................................... 79
Restore Previous Projection Mode .............................................. 80
Restore Previous Render Mode .................................................. 80
Restore Previous Restraint Size.................................................. 80
Restore Previous View ................................................................ 80
Video Driver ................................................................................ 81
Default Operator
Controls the initial display of graphics. Available options are Zoom to Window, Annotate,
Orbit, Pan, Restore Previous, Select, and Zoom with Mouse. The default setting is Zoom to
Window.
Default Projection Mode

Specifies the projection of graphics in the software. You can select Orthographic, Perspective,
or Stretched. The default projection setting is Orthographic.
Default Render Mode

Specifies the render mode. Available options are Phong Shading, Centerline, Flat, Gouraud
Shading, Silhouette, Triangulated, and Wireframe, either with or without hidden lines. The
default render mode setting is Phong Shading.
Centerline and Silhouette are the fastest render modes and less memory intensive for
your computer graphics card.
77
Default View
Specifies the graphical view. Available options are SE Isometric, SW Isometric, NW Isometric,
NE Isometric, Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, Right, and Restore Previous. The default
view setting is SE Isometric.
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble

Enables or disables the tooltip bubble that displays information about the element that you
mouse over in the graphics view.
True
Tooltip bubble does not display.
False
Tooltip bubble displays.
Force Black and White Printing

Controls printing output of graphics. If set to True, graphics are printed using only black and
white.
78
Idle Processing Count

Controls the number of objects the software is allowed to draw during a single idle cycle.
CAESAR II draws the model whenever your machine becomes idle, that is, whenever any
interaction between you and the computer ceases. For example, there may three or four idle
messages between keystrokes. On slower machines, it may increase performance to lower this
value, and vice versa.
Optimal Frame Rate

Determines how many times per second the software will re-draw the piping display when it is
being manipulated, such as when you are zooming, panning, or rotating the display. If you
experience graphics problems such as sluggishness during operations or large boxes being
drawn instead of the piping system display, lower this number.
Restore Previous Anchor Size

Returns the anchor size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the anchor size to its previous setting.
False
Use the default setting.
Restore Previous Hanger Size

Returns the hanger size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the hanger size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Operator

Returns the operator to its previous setting.
True
Restore the operator to its previous setting.
False
79
Restore Previous Projection Mode

Returns the projection mode to its previous state. Projection mode is either isometric or
orthographic.
True
Restore the projection mode to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Render Mode

Returns the render mode to its previous state.
Four render modes are available in CAESAR II: solids, wireframes, silhouette, and
centerline.
True
Restore the render mode to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous Restraint Size

Returns the restraint size to its previous setting.
True
Restore the restraint size to its previous setting.
False
Restore Previous View

Returns the standard view to its previous setting.
The standard views are Front, Back, Top, Bottom, Left, Right, SW Isometric, SE
Isometric, NW Isometric and NE Isometric.
True
Restore the standard view to its previous setting.
False
80
Video Driver
Determines the video driver used in plotting. Select OpenGL, Direct 3D, or Windows Basic
Video.
Output Colors
Topics
Actual Stress Settings ................................................................. 81
Displaced Shape ......................................................................... 81
Percent Stress Settings ............................................................... 82
Actual Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of actual stress. The levels are currently set as follows:
Level
Actual Stress
Level 1
<10,000 psi
Level 2
10,000 to 15,000 psi
Level 3
15,000 to 20,000 psi
Level 4
20,000 to 25,000 psi
Level 5
25,000 to 30,000 psi
Level 6
> 30,000 psi
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
percent of code allowable. For more information, see Percent Stress Settings (on page 82).
Displaced Shape
Sets the color of the Displaced Shape option when displayed in output graphics.
81
Percent Stress Settings

Assigns a color to a specific level of stress. When plotting code stress in output, the software will
color the elements in terms of the percent of code allowable. The levels are currently set as
follows:
Level
Percent (of Code Allowable)

Stress
Level 1
< 20%
Level 2
20 to 40%
Level 3
40 to 60%
Level 4
60 to 80%
Level 5
80 to 100%
Level 6
>100%
When plotting code stress in output, the software can also color elements in terms of
actual stress. For more information, see Actual Stress Settings (on page 81).
Text Options
You can use these options to select font, font style, and font size and color. Scripts are
supported. The different plot texts are node numbers and names, annotation, and legends.
Topics
Annotation Text .......................................................................... 82
Legend Text................................................................................ 83
Node Text ................................................................................... 83
Output Text ................................................................................. 83
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 83
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible ........................................... 83
Annotation Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of annotation text.
82
Legend Text
Sets the text color and font style settings of all legends, such as displacements, temperatures,
and so forth, when displayed in the graphics.
Node Text
Determines the color and font style settings of node numbers and node names when displayed
in the graphics.
Output Text
Defines the font, font size, and color of output text.
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of rendered text. By default, the software will not draw text that is occluded
by anything else, including other text. For example, if a pipe is in front of text, the text will not be
drawn. If some text overlaps other text, the text that is further back will be hidden. To override
this behavior so that all text is shown, set RenderedModeTextAlwaysVisible to True.
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible

Controls the display of silhouette text.
Visual Options
These options control general plotting visibility.
Topics
Always Use System Colors ......................................................... 84
Always Use System Fonts .......................................................... 84
Axis Mode................................................................................... 84
Fixed Size Restraint Size ............................................................ 84
Hide Overlapping Text ................................................................ 84
Restraint Helix is a Line .............................................................. 84
Shadow Mode............................................................................. 84
Show Bounding Box.................................................................... 85
Smooth Transitions ..................................................................... 85
Use Fixed Size Restraints ........................................................... 85
Visibility % .................................................................................. 85
83
Always Use System Colors

Stores the colors the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Always Use System Fonts

Stores the fonts that the software uses to display the model in the registry.
Axis Mode
Turns on and off the display of the axes in the plot. By default, the axes displays in the lower left
corner of the plot.
Fixed Size Restraint Size

Controls the restraint size. By default, the software draws restraints relative to the size of the
pipe to which they are attached. For example, the symbol is larger on a 12-inch pipe than on a
2-inch pipe. You can override this behavior so that the software uses the same size restraint
everywhere by setting Use Fixed Size Restraints (on page 85) to True and defining a Fixed
Size Restraint Size value.
Hide Overlapping Text

Hides node text that is overwritten by other text. This makes reading the plot easier, but
eliminates some node text.
Restraint Helix is a Line

Controls how the software draws a restraint helix.
By default, a restraint with a variable retention is drawn with a small spring to indicate that it is
not fixed. If this property is set to True (the default setting), the software draws the spring as a
line; otherwise, the software draws the spring as a coiled cylinder.
If drawing the restraint helix as a line degrades plot performance, set Restraint Helix is
a Line to False.
Shadow Mode
Defines the shadow mode. Select Hard, Soft, or None. The default setting is None.
84
Show Bounding Box

Controls whether a bounding box appears around the model when it is being manipulated--for
example, rotated or panned-- with the mouse.
True
Display a bounding box.
False
Suppress the display of a bounding box.
Smooth Transitions
Specifies whether graphics have a smooth transition when the view is changed.
True
Enable smooth transition.
False
Change the view instantly. This option reduces the video card memory requirements.
Use Fixed Size Restraints

Controls the size of the restraint. When it is set to True, this property draws restraints based on
the value defined by the property Fixed Size Restraint Size (on page 84).
Visibility %
Determines the percentage of incident light that passes through an element volume when using
the Translucent Objects or Hidden Lines option in the graphics. Setting this to zero makes all
elements completely opaque while a setting of 100% renders all elements transparent. The
default setting is 50%.
85
The Miscellaneous Options category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Input Items (on page 86)
Output Items (on page 88)
System Level Items (on page 89)
Input Items
Topics
Autosave Time Interval ................................................................ 87
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail ....................................... 87
Disable Undo/Redo Ability ........................................................... 87
Dynamic Example Input Text ....................................................... 87
Enable Autosave ......................................................................... 88
Prompted Autosave ..................................................................... 88
86
Autosave Time Interval

Sets the time interval used to perform the auto-save function. Type a value in minutes.
Disable "File Open" Graphic Thumbnail

Controls whether the graphic thumbnail plot in the Open dialog box (accessed by clicking File >
Open in the software) is displayed. The graphics thumbnail plots a small image of the model as
a single line drawing. On some slower, memory limited processors, or when scanning very large
models, this thumbnail graphic may take a few seconds to plot the model.
True
Turn on the display of thumbnail graphics.
False
Turn off the display of thumbnail graphics.
Disable Undo/Redo Ability

Controls the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. On some installations, it may be useful to
disable the Undo/Redo feature of the input module. With Undo/Redo enabled, CAESAR II can
process a job approximately one-half the size of that which can be processed when Undo/Redo
is disabled (for similar memory settings). Likewise, with Undo/Redo enabled, the input module
speed may be reduced.
Dynamic Example Input Text

Controls how much example text is placed in new dynamic input files. By default, the software
places example text and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input files.
After you are familiar with the input, this example text may be unnecessary. Select from the
following options to vary how much of this example text is incorporated in the input:
Max
Place all of the examples and spectrum definitions in the input stream of new dynamic input
files.
None
Eliminate all the example text and all the built-in spectrum definitions. This setting is
intended for experienced users.
Spec
Eliminate all of the example text, but leaves the predefined spectrum definition. This means
that the built-in spectrum definitions (El Centro, and so forth) will still be defined and
available for use.
87
Enable Autosave
Controls whether CAESAR II will automatically save the piping input at specified intervals.
True
Turn on Autosave.
False
Turn off Autosave.
Prompted Autosave
Controls whether the software prompts you at the specified time interval to save the input. You
must also set Enable Autosave to True.
True
Prompt before performing the autosave
False
Perform the autosave without prompting.
Output Items
Topics
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes ...................................... 88
Output Reports by Load Case ..................................................... 89
Output Table of Contents............................................................. 89
Time History Animation ............................................................... 89
Displacement Reports Sorted by Nodes

Turns on and off nodal sort. By default, the software sorts the nodes in ascending order during
the force/stress computations. This produces a displacement output report in which the nodes
are ordered in increasing magnitude. Select False to turn off this nodal sort. The resulting
displacement reports will be produced in the order the nodes were entered during model
building.
88
Output Reports by Load Case

Controls how output reports are sorted. By default, the software generates output reports sorted
by load case. Select False to turn off this option, which causes output reports to be sorted by
type. For reports by type, all displacement reports will be generated, then all restraint reports,
then all force reports, and so on.
Output Table of Contents

Controls the generation of a table of contents, which is normally produced after a static or a
dynamic output session.
True
Generate a table of contents upon exit. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of a table of contents.
Time History Animation

Controls the creation of the file used to animate the time history displacement of the piping
system. By default, this setting is turned on, which instructs CAESAR II to generate a file of
displacements, <jobname>.XYT, for every time step. This file is used in subsequent interactive
animation sessions by the user. The size of this file is dependent on the size of the model and
the number of time steps analyzed. Consequently, it may be advantageous from a disk usage
point of view not to create this file.
True
Generate the displacement file. This is the default setting.
False
Suppress generation of the displacement file.
System Level Items

Topics
Compress CAESAR II Files ......................................................... 90
Memory Allocated (Mb) ............................................................... 90
User ID........................................................................................ 90
89
Compress CAESAR II Files

Controls the compression of CAESAR II files.
True
Compress all of the CAESAR II job files into an archive named <jobname>.c2, when the job
is not active. After the software creates the archive, it deletes the component files (_a, _j,
_p, _7, _s, and so forth).
False
Leave the component files in the data directory and do not create the c2 archive.
The advantages and disadvantages to using the compressed c2 archive are outlined
follows:
Advantages
Only one job file exists in the data directory.
The job and all related data are easily archived.
The job and all related data can be transmitted in its entirety.
Disadvantages
The archive makes it difficult to get to the component files.
The archive is big, because it contains all component files. Therefore, saving or
transmitting takes more resources than manipulating a single component file.
For larger jobs, the compression/decompression activity slows down file access.
Memory Allocated (Mb)

Modifies the Windows registry to increase the amount of RAM available to CAESAR II. Setting
this option to a number greater than the available RAM will cause Windows to use Virtual
Memory (hard disk space to be used as RAM). Because doing this may slow the software, it is
usually recommended only for very large piping models.
User ID
Creates a control file for a specific computer. Type a three-character user ID for each user, or
more exactly, each workstation.
When multiple workstations attempt to access CAESAR II data in the same directory
simultaneously, the control file in the data directory becomes corrupted, which may cause
abnormal software execution. In situations where there may be more than one concurrent user
running CAESAR II in a given data directory, you can use this option to create a separate
control file for each computer, thus allowing simultaneous access of the CAESAR II data within
the same folder.
This user ID is not a password and is specific to the computer requiring access and not to
the user.
90
SIFs and Stresses

The SIFs and Stresses category provides access to the following groups of configuration
settings:
Advanced Settings (on page 92)
Code-Specific Settings
General Settings (on page 96)
Legacy Settings (on page 102)
91
Advanced Settings
Topics
Class 1 Branch Flexibility............................................................. 92
Use Schneider............................................................................. 92
Use WRC 329 ............................................................................. 92
Class 1 Branch Flexibility

Activates the Class 1 flexibility calculations. By default, this setting is False.
The appearance of this parameter in the configuration file will completely change the modeling
of intersections in the analysis. For intersections not satisfying the reduced branch rules that d/D
0.5 and that D/T100, the branch will start at the surface of the header pipe. A perfectly rigid
junction between the center\-line of the header and surface will be formed automatically by
CAESAR II using the element offset calculations. SIFs act at the surface point for the branch.
When the reduced branch rules are satisfied, the local flexibility of the header is also inserted at
this surface point. Intersections not satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be stiffer and
carry more loads, while intersections satisfying the reduced intersection rules will be more
flexible and will carry less load. All changes to the model are completely transparent to the user.
In systems where the intersection flexibility is a major component of the overall system stiffness,
you are urged to run the analysis both with and without the Class 1 Branch Flexibility active to
determine the effect of this modeling on the analysis.
Use Schneider
Activates the Schneider reduced intersection assumptions. By default, this setting is False.
It was because of observations by Schneider that much of the work on WRC 329 was started.
Schneider pointed out that the code SIFs could be in error when the d/D ratio at the intersection
was less than 1.0 and greater than 0.5. In this d/D range, the SIFs could be in error by a factor
as high as 2.0. Using the Schneider option in CAESAR II results in a multiplication of the out of
plane branch stress intensification by a number between 1 and 2 when the d/D ratio for the
inter\-section is between 0.5 and 1.0. For B31.1 and other codes that do not differentiate
between in and out-of-plane SIFs, the multiplication will be used for the single stress
intensification given.
Use WRC 329

Activates the WRC329 guidelines for all intersections, not just for reduced intersections. By
default, this setting is False.
The recommendations made by Rodabaugh in section 5.0 of WRC329 will be followed exactly in
making the stress calculations for intersections. Every attempt has been made to improve the
stress calculations for all codes, not just the four discussed in Rodabaughs paper. Throughout
this document, WRC330 and WRC329 are used synonymously (330 was the draft version of
329). When finally published, the official WRC designation was 329.
92
Code-Specific Settings
Topics
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix................................................................... 93
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees ......................... 93
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF.......................... 94
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor..................................................... 94
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs .......................................... 94
Occasional Load Factor ............................................................... 94
Pressure Variation in EXP Case .................................................. 95
Reduced Intersection................................................................... 95
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix

Makes the correction to the reduced branch stress calculation that existed in the 1980 through
1989 versions of B31.1. This error was corrected in the 1989 version of B31.1.
True
Turn on the correction. This is the default setting.
False
Turn off the correction.
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour Tees

Controls the assumption that the geometry of B31.3 welding and contour insert tees
(sweepolets) meets the dimensional requirements of the code and can be classified as B16.9
tees.
True
Assume that the fitting geometry meets the requirements of Note 11, introduced in the A01
addendum, and a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r will be used.
False
Use a flexibility characteristic of 3.1*T/r, as per the A01 addendum. This is the default
setting.
In order to match runs made with CAESAR II prior to Version 4.40, set this option to
True. Prior to Version 4.40, CAESAR II always used a flexibility characteristic of 4.4*T/r.
93
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane SIF

Controls the use of in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs. The EN-13480 piping code (and other
European piping codes) defaults to the use of a single SIF, applied to the SRSS of all three
bending moments. Optionally, you can utilize distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIF values for
in-plane and out-of-plane moments.
To use distinct in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs, select True.
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor

Controls the application of the circumferential weld strength reduction factor, which is now an
option in B31.1 and B31.3.
True
Suppress the application of a weld strength reduction factor.
False
Apply the weld strength reduction factor at all bends, tees, and reducers for temperatures
greater than the starting creep temperature, as defined in the code.
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs

Controls whether welding tees and reinforced tees are included in the SIFs for reduced fittings.
Part of the discussion centers around just what should be considered a reduced fitting. The
CAESAR II default (False) is to assume that welding tees and reinforced fabricated tees are
covered by the reduced fitting expressions, even though the reduced fitting expressions do not
explicitly cover these intersection types. If you want to leave welding tees and rein\-forced tees
out of this definition, set this option to True.
Occasional Load Factor

Specifies the occasional load factor. The default value of 0.0 tells CAESAR II to use the value
that the active piping code recommends. B31.1 states that the calculated stress may exceed the
maximum allowable stress from Appendix A, (Sh), by 15% if the event duration occurs less than
10% of any 24-hour operating period, and by 20% if the event duration occurs less than 1% of
any 24 hour operating period. The default for B31.1 applications is 15%. If 20% is more suitable
for the system being analyzed, then this option can be used to enter the 20%.
B31.3 states, "The sum of the longitudinal stresses due to pressure, weight, and other sustained
loadings (S1) and of the stresses produced by occasional loads such as wind or earthquake
may be as much as 1.33 times the allowable stress given in Appendix A. Where the allowable
stress value exceeds 2/3 of yield strength at temperature, the allowable stress value must be
reduced as specified in Note 3 in 302.3.2." The default for B31.3 applications is 33%. If this is
too high for the material and temperature specified, then a smaller occasional load factor could
be input.
This configuration option is used to send new job files. After the static load cases have
been defined, changing this directive will have no effect for static analysis. For existing static
load case definitions, change the occasional load multiplier on the Load Cases tab in the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor. Dynamic analyses will always reference this configuration option.
94
Pressure Variation in EXP Case

Controls whether any pressure variation between the referenced load cases will be considered
in the resulting expansion case. When set to Default, the software considers the pressure
variation according to the active piping code.
Reduced Intersection
Defines the code rules for reduced intersection. Select one of the following options:
B31.1 (Pre 1980)
Use the pre-1980 B31.1 code rules used for reduced intersection. These rules did not define
a separate branch SIF for the reduced branch end. The branch stress intensification factor
will be the same as the header stress intensification factor regardless of the
branch-to-header diameter ratio.
B31.1 (Post 1980)
Use the post-1980 B31.1 code rules for reduced intersections. The reduced intersection SIF
equations in B31.1 from 1980 through 1989 generated unnecessarily high SIFs because of
a mistake made in the implementation. (This is according to WRC329.) For this reason,
many analysts opted for the pre-1980 B31.1 SIF calculation. CAESAR II corrects this
mistake by automatically setting B31.1 Reduced Z Fix to True (the default setting). You can
vary the status of this flag in the CAESAR II configuration file to generate any interpretation
of B31.1 that you want. The default for a new job is for B31.1(Post 1980) and for B31.1
Reduced Z Fix to be set to True.
The No RFT/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs (see "No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting
SIFs" on page 94) option also affects the SIF calculations at reduced intersections.
WRC 329
Use the recommendations of WRC329 for reduced intersections. A reduced intersection is
any intersection where the d/D ratio is less than 0.975. The WRC329 recommendations
result in more conservative stress calculations in some instances and less conservative
stress calculations in others. In all cases, the WRC329 values should be more accurate and
more in-line with the respective codes intent.
ASME Sect. III
Use the 1985 ASME Section III NC and ND rules for reduced intersections.
Schneider
Activate the Schneider reduced intersection stress intensification factor multiplication. Has
the same effect as Use Schneider (on page 92).
95
General Settings
Topics
Add F/A in Stresses..................................................................... 96
Add Torsion in SL Stress ............................................................. 96
All Cases Corroded ..................................................................... 97
Allow User's SIF at Bend ............................................................. 97
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam).................................. 97
Default Piping Code .................................................................... 98
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable............................... 99
Use PD/4t ................................................................................... 99
Yield Stress Criterion ................................................................... 99
Add F/A in Stresses

Specifies whether the axial stress term is included in the code stress computation.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. Only the process piping codes (except for B31.3), or codes where the
sustained stress equation is not explicitly given, have the F/A stresses included in the sustained
and occasional stress equations. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) do not include the
F/A stresses because the equations given explicitly in the code do not include them. To force
CAESAR II to include the axial stress term in those codes that do not include it already by
default, select Yes.
The F/A stresses discussed here are not due to longitudinal pressure. These are the F/A
stresses due to structural loads in the piping system itself.
Add Torsion in SL Stress

Controls how the software handles the torsion term in those codes that do not include it already
by default.
If you select Default in this configuration setting, the software uses whatever the currently active
piping code recommends. The power piping codes (such as B31.1) include torsion in the
sustained and occasional stresses by explicitly including it in the stress equation (B31.1). The
process piping codes (except for B31.3) do not include torsion in the sustained and occasional
stresses by implicitly calling for longitudinal stresses only. To force CAESAR II to include the
torsion term in those codes that do not include it already by default, select Yes.
In a sustained stress analysis of a very hot piping system subject to creep, it is
recommended that you include torsion in the sustained stress calculation using this parameter in
the setup file.
96
All Cases Corroded

Controls whether CAESAR II uses corroded section modulus in stress calculations.
A recent version of the B31.3 piping code mentioned reducing the section modulus for sustained
or occasional stress calculations by the reduction in wall thickness due to corrosion. Some have
interpreted this to mean that the reduced section modulus should be used for all stress
calculations, including expansion. This option allows you to apply this conservative interpretation
of the code. Enabling All Cases Corroded causes the software to use the corroded section
modulus for the calculation of all stress types. This method is recommended as conservative,
and probably more realistic as corrosion can significantly affect fatigue life, or expansion. If,
however, you disable this option, the software will strictly follow the piping code
recommendations. That is, depending on the active piping code, some load cases will consider
corrosion and some will not.
Allow User's SIF at Bend

Controls the stress intensification factor for bends. Previously this was not permitted, and the
code-defined SIF was always used. To override the codes calculated SIF for bends, select
True. The user-defined SIF acts over the entire bend curvature and must be specified at the To
end of the bend element. The default setting is False.
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/Lam)

Indicates how the value of hoop stress should be calculated. The default is to use the ID of the
pipe. Most piping codes consider the effects of pressure in the longitudinal component of the
CODE stress. Usually, the value of the hoop stress has no bearing on the CODE stress, so
changing this directive does not affect the acceptability of the piping system.
If necessary, you may change the way CAESAR II computes the hoop stress value. Available
options are:
ID
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the internal diameter of the pipe.
OD
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Mean
Compute hoop stress according to Pd/2t, where d is the average or mean diameter of the
pipe.
Lam
Compute maximum hoop stress according to Lam's solution: s = P(Ro2+Ri2)/(Ro2-Ri2).
97
Default Piping Code

Specifies the piping code that you design to most often. This code will be used as the default if
no code is specified in the problem input. The default piping code is B31.3, the chemical plant
and petroleum refinery code. Valid entries are:
B31.1
B31.3
B31.4
B31.4 Chapter IX
B31.5
B31.8
B31.8 Chapter VIII
B31.9
B31.11
ASME-NC (Class 2)
ASME-ND (Class 3)
Navy 505
CAN Z662
CAN Z662 Chapter 11
BS 806
Swedish 1
Swedish 2
B31.1-1967
Stoomwezen
RCC-M C
RCC-M D
CODETI
Norwegian TBK-6
FDBR
BS 7159
UKOOA
IGE/TD/12
DNV
EN 13480
GPTC/Z380
PD 8010-1
98

PD 8010-2
ISO 14692
HPGSL
JPI
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress Allowable

Instructs the software to default new jobs to use the liberal expansion stress allowable. This
allowable adds the difference between the hot allowable stress and the sustained stress to the
allowable expansion stress range if it is allowed by the particular code in use. To instruct the
software to default new jobs to not use this allowable, select False.
Use PD/4t
Instructs the software to use the simplified form of the longitudinal stress term when computing
sustained stresses. Some codes permit this simplified form when the pipe wall thickness is thin.
This option is used most often when you are comparing CAESAR II results to older pipe stress
software results. The more comprehensive calculation--the default--is recommended.
Yield Stress Criterion

Specifies the method the software uses to calculate maximum stress. CAESAR II can calculate
this maximum stress (which is not a code stress) according to either the von Mises Theory or
the Maximum Shear Theory.
Code stress refers to a stress calculated by an equation provided by the code. For more
information on code-defined stresses, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
The Stresses Extended output report produced by CAESAR II contains a value representative of
the maximum stress state through the cross section, calculated according to the indicated yield
criteria theory.
Configuration
Setting
Failure Theory
Calculated Stress
Max3D Shear
Maximum Shear Stress
Maximum Stress Intensity
von Mises
Maximum Energy of
Distortion
Octahedral Shearing Stress
CAESAR II computes the selected stress at four points along the axis normal to the plane of
bending (outside top, inside top, inside bottom, outside bottom), and includes the maximum
value in the stresses report. The equations used for each of these yield criteria are listed below.
If von Mises Theory is used, the software computes the octahedral shearing stress, which differs
from the von Mises stress by a constant factor.
For codes B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DnV, this setting controls
which equation the software uses to compute the equivalent stress. For these codes, the
software uses the equations shown in the piping code to determine the yield stress criterion in
the Stresses Extended output report.
99

Stress Formulation
CAESAR II reports the largest stress using four calculation points through the pipe cross
section, as show in the following figure.
The four points are established by a line perpendicular to the bending moment acting on the
pipe (shown in red). Points 1 and 4 are on the outside surface of the pipe, where radial stress is
zero. Point 1 is in bending tension and Point 4 is in bending compression. Points 2 and 3 are on
the inside surface of the pipe where radial stress is compressive (negative) pressure.
Longitudinal stress (Sl), hoop stress (Sh), radial stress (Sr) and shear stress (St) are calculated
at each position using the appropriate formulas.
Position
Longitudinal Stress (Sl)
Hoop Stress (Sh)
Radial
Shear
Stress
Stress (St)
(Sr)
4
The table formulas assume that this is a B31.3-style stress equation with Lam hoop
stress.
These stresses are translated into the principal stresses S1, S2, and S3. The following shows a
graphical representation of a typical calculation of the four position points.
100
Determine the principal stress using the longitudinal stress (Sl), the hoop stress (Sh), and the
shear stress (St)which sets the red line. The principal stress refers to the points where the red
circle crosses the normal stress axis (shear stress equals zero). Place the radial stress (Sr)
(which has a shear stress of zero) on the same axis. The largest intersection point is S1 and the
smallest is S3.
Equivalent Stress, Octahedral Shearing Stress, von Mises Stress:
Use the S1, S2, and S3 values in the equation above to determine the octahedral shearing
stress at each position. CAESAR II reports the largest of these four values.
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (S.I.):

S.I. = S1-S3
When you configure CAESAR II to report 3D maximum shear stress intensity, the software
reports the largest intensity (S1-S3).
101
Legacy Settings
Topics
B31.3 Implement Appendix P ...................................................... 102
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)................................. 102
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress ...................................... 102
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index ..................................... 103
B31.3 Implement Appendix P

Controls the implementation of the alternate rules in B31.3 Appendix P. This option produces a
code compliance operating load case, with allowable stress values.
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010)

Controls what formula CAESAR II uses for computing longitudinal stress for sustained loads
(SL) for the B31.3 code. The 2010 Edition of B31.3 code introduced a specific formula for
computing SL. This code formula was previously optional and referred to as B31.3 Code Case
178.
The software defaults to automatically computing sustained loads using this formula. You can
change the B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320 (2010) configuration setting in the
Configuration Editor > SIFs and Stresses to False if you do not want CAESAR II to use this
formula, for example in the case of pre-2010 Edition jobs.
CAESAR II sets this configuration setting to True by default, which means the software
overrides the directives for F/A and torsion and uses this formula to calculate sustained case
stresses.
Include Axial Force in Expansion Stress

Enables the software to include calculated axial force in the expansion stress (SE). Choose one
of the following settings:
No
Exclude axial forces from the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range value. (This is Se in
Eq. (17) of B31.3.)
|Sa| + Se
Include the absolute value of the axial force to the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range,
and report the sum as the (Expansion) Displacement Stress Range, Se. This selection is
more conservative than (|Sa| + Sb)2.
(|Sa| + Sb)2
Include the absolute value for the axial force to the bending term in the (Expansion)
Displacement Stress Range equation (Se, Eq (17) in B31.3). This selection is less
conservative than |Sa| + Se. This option more closely follows theory.
Default
102

Follow the recommended setting for the axial force in expansion stress based on the piping
code you specified for the job. (For example, the B31.3 piping code recommends to use the
(|Sa| + Sb)2 equation for axial force. So, when you set this configuration setting to Default, if
the job uses the B31.3 piping code, the software uses the (|Sa| + Sb)2 option for calculating
axial force in the expansion stress.)
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress Index

Modifies the stress index for sustained loads and occasional loads. The default setting is
0.0000, which indicates that the software uses whatever the currently active piping code
recommends for the SIF/Index multiplier. For example, if this configuration setting is set to
0.000, when you select B31.3 on the job, the B31.3 code recommends to set the SIF multiplier
to 0.7500. The software uses that value in the calculation.
With the release of CAESAR II 2014 and the implementation of B31.3 2012, the internal
interpretation of this existing configuration setting was changed. B31.3 2012 defines the SIF
multiplier value as 0.75. Other codes similar to B31.3 do not address this value. The default
value of this configuration setting was changed to 0.0000. This change enables CAESAR II to
internally set the multiplier to 0.7500 for B31.3 and to 1.0000 for other similar codes. The
following table summarizes these settings.
Option
Configuration
SIF Multiplier Setting
Sustained Moment
Multiplier (I)
B31.3 Code
Codes similar to B31.3

(such as: JPI, B31.5)
Option 1
(default)
0.0000
I = 0.75i
I = i (similar to Option 4)
Option 2
0.0001
I = 1.0
I = 1.0
Option 3
0.7500
I = 0.75i
I = 0.75i
Option 4
1.0000
I=i
I=i
This change does not affect all piping codes.

The following interpretations apply to B31.3 code prior to the 2010 Edition, so they are only
applicable if you need to analyze older jobs to the older code addenda:
B31.3 Interpretation 1-34 (February 23, 1981) File: 1470-1 states that for sustained and
occasional loads, you can use an SIF of 0.75i, but not less than 1.0. To comply with this
interpretation (1-34), type 0.7500.
B31.3 Interpretation 6-03 (December 14, 1987) File B31-87-022 permits you to ignore the
stress intensification for sustained and occasional loads. To comply with this interpretation
(6-03), type 0.0001.
103
Set/Change Password
You can set password protection for the configuration file using the Security command. By
setting a password on the primary configuration file, a corporate standard can be enforced
throughout the network. Subsequent use of the configuration module in other data folders will
allow only modification of display or other environment directives that do not affect calculated
results.
To set security on your configuration file:

1. Set up your configuration file and click Save and Exit
in the top-left corner of the
Configuration Editor window to save the configuration settings.
2. From the Home tab, select File > Set Default Data Directory.
3. Browse and select the CAESAR II System subfolder in the Default Data Directory
Specification dialog box
Locate the System subfolder in the root folder based on your platform.
Windows 7/8/8.1: \Program Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR II\Version Number\System
Windows XP: \Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Intergraph CAS\CAESAR
II\Version Number\System
Click
Configure or Tools > Configure/Setup to open the Configuration Editor dialog box, and
then click on the Security
drop-down arrow.
1. Select one of the following options, depending upon your current configuration:
New Password (on page 104)
Access Protected Data (on page 105)
Change Password (on page 105)
Remove Password (on page 105)
New Password
Type a password. After entering a password, you have the ability to change configuration
settings from the program folder, or alter or remove the password.
Initially, New Password is the only option available.
When typing a new password, you are prompted for the new password a second time to
ensure the password was typed as expected the first time.
104
Access Protected Data

Allows you to modify protected options. This option is accessible only after a password exists.
The use of this option is not necessary if there is no previously specified password. If no
password has been set, you can modify all configuration settings.
Change Password
Allows you to change your current password. You must first type the correct existing password.
The current password may be changed at any time by anyone who has authorization to do so.
After a password has been set, the software disables all computation controls, stress options,
and any other configuration options, which could affect the CAESAR II computations.
Remove Password
Deletes the current password. Anyone with authorization can remove the current password by
entering the correct existing password for this option. After a password is removed, all options
that appear in the Configuration Editor can be modified from any folder where you have
read/write access rights.
105
SECTION 4
Piping Input Reference

This section describes how to specify job parameters through the menus, boxes, and
commands of the software.
To edit a piping model, open a piping file from the CAESAR II main menu. Then, click Input >
Piping. The CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box displays.
This dialog box describes the piping on an element-by-element basis. It consists of menus and
toolbars which perform a number of supporting operations, and data fields that contain
information about each piping element. A graphic representation of the model displays
automatically. This model updates as you add new elements.
106

In This Section
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box................................................... 107
Available Commands .................................................................. 229
3D Modeler ................................................................................. 372
S3D/SPR Model View ................................................................. 390
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box

Piping data is grouped into blocks of related data on the left side of the Classic Piping Input.
Double click >> in the upper right corner of any group to display additional input boxes in a
dialog box. You can arrange these dialog boxes to meet your needs.
The right side of the piping input includes an auxiliary panel with tabs that relate to items
selected through the check boxes. You can also access these tabs by selecting the auxiliary
area in the Aux Tools Toolbar (Piping Input) (see "Aux Tools Toolbar" on page 357).
107
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box using the

Function Keys
Function keys help you to quickly type data without using the mouse to move to various input
boxes. By default, when you place the cursor inside a box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box, pressing a function key on the keyboard moves the cursor to the beginning of a block of
input data according to the list below.
Function Key
Destination
F2
From Node
F3
DX
F4
Diameter
F5
Temp 1
F6
Material
F7
Elastic Modulus (c)
F8
Refractory Thickness
F9
Line number
Help Screens and Units

Press the question mark key ? or the F1 function key while the cursor is in any of the input data
cells to display interactive help text for that item. Hover the cursor over a box to display a tool tip
indicating the current units.
Node Numbers
Each element is identified by its end node number. Because each input screen represents a
piping element, you must specify the element end points, called the From node and the To
node. The software uses these points as locations at which you can type or extract information.
You must specify a From and To node for all elements.
You can set the Auto Node Number Increment configuration setting in Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu and CAESAR II generates the From and To node values
automatically (to a value other than zero) based on the increment you specify.
108

Double-click >> to display the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
From
Specifies the node number for the starting end of the element. Node numbers must be
numeric, ranging from 1 to 32000. Typically, the From node number is automatically
generated by CAESAR II from the preceding element. You can change the node numbers,
but be careful not to use the same node number more than once in a model.
To
Specifies the node number for the end of the element. Node numbers must be numeric,
ranging from 1 to 32000. You can change the node numbers, but be careful not to use the
same node number more than once in a model.
Name
Assigns non-numeric names to node points. Double-click the Name check box to display an
auxiliary dialog box where you can assign names of up to 10 characters to the From and To
nodes. These names display with (or instead) of the node numbers in graphic plots and
reports. In Piping Input, click the down arrow on Node Numbers
(in the Plot Tools
toolbar) and select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not node
numbers.
Non-numeric names can be truncated in 80-column reports.
109
Deltas
Type element lengths as delta dimensions according to the X, Y, and Z rectangular coordinate
system established for the piping system. The Y-axis represents the vertical axis in CAESAR II.
CAESAR II treats each element as a vector. The vector length is equal to the element length.
The vector direction points from the From node to the To node.
The delta dimensions DX, DY, and DZ, are the measurements along the X, Y, and Z-axes
between the From node and the To node. In most cases you only need to use one of the three
options, because the piping usually runs along the global axes. Where the piping element is
skewed, you must make two or three entries. You must define at least one option for all
elements except zero-length expansion joints.
When you are using feet and inches for compound length and length units, valid entries
include formats such as: 3-6, 3 ft. -6 in, and 3-6-3/16.
You can use offsets to modify the stiffness of the current element by adjusting its length and the
orientation of its neutral axis in 3-D space.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Deltas dialog box.
DX
Specifies the X component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch fraction or meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use
simple forms of addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Optionally, use a tic mark ( ' ) instead of the first dash ( - ), to indicate feet in this field.
110
DY
Specifies the Y component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
DZ
Specifies the Z component of the element.
CAESAR II accepts [compound length]-[length]-[fraction] formats (such as feet - inch - fraction or
meter - decimal - centimeters) as valid input values in most cells. You can use simple forms of
addition, multiplication, and division, as well as exponential format.
Offsets
Indicates whether the software corrects modeled dimensions of an element back to its
actual dimensions. Double-click the Offsets check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box to select or clear this option.
Specify the distances from the position of the From node in 3-D space to the actual From
end of the element.
Specify the distances from the position of the To node in 3-D space to the actual To end of
the element.
If you leave any offset direction distances blank, the software defaults them to zero.
Thermal expansion is 0 for the offset portion of an offset element. No element flexibility is
generated for the offset portion of the element. The following figure shows a common usage
for the offset element.
111
Length
Specifies the distance between the To node and the From node.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X, Y, and Z components or element direction cosines.
For an element aligned with the X-axis,
Cos X ..... 1.0
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Y-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... 1.0
Cos Z ..... <Blank>
For an element aligned with the Z-axis,
Cos X ..... <Blank>
Cos Y ..... <Blank>
Cos Z ..... 1.0
112
Pipe Sizes
Type the dimensions for the element. Plus mill tolerance is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping
code. Seam weld is used only for the IGE/TD/12 piping code. These options carry forward from
one element to the next during the design session so you only need to type values for those
elements at which a change occurs. You can specify nominal pipe sizes and schedules.
CAESAR II converts these values to actual outside diameter and wall thickness. Outside
diameter and wall thickness are required data inputs.
Nominal diameters, thicknesses, and schedule numbers are a function of the pipe size
specification. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu or click CAESAR II
Configuration
on the CAESAR II Tools toolbar to select ANSI, JIS, or DIN as the piping
size specification.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Diameter
Specifies the pipe diameter. Normally, you should type the nominal diameter and CAESAR
II converts it to the actual outer diameter necessary for the analysis. There are two ways to
prevent this conversion:
Use a modified UNITS file with the Nominal Pipe Schedules turned off,
Specify diameters whose values are off slightly from a nominal size (in English units
the tolerance on diameter is 0.063 in.).
Use F1 to obtain additional information and the current units for this input box. Available
nominal diameters are determined by the active pipe size specification, set by the
configuration software. The following are the available nominal diameters.
ANSI Nominal Pipe ODs, in inches (file ap.bin)
1 1 2 2 3 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 42
JIS Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file jp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650
113

DIN Nominal Pipe ODs, in millimeters (file dp.bin)
15 20 25 32 40 50 65 80 100 125 150 200 250 300 350 400 500 600 700 800 900 1000
1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 2200
Wt/Sch
Specifies the thickness of the pipe. Normal input consists of a schedule indicator (such as S,
XS, or 40), which is converted to the proper wall thickness by CAESAR II. If actual thickness
is entered, CAESAR II accepts it as entered. Available schedule indicators are determined
by the active piping specification, set by the configuration software.
ANSI B36.10 Steel Nominal Wall Thickness Designation:
S - Standard
XS - Extra Strong
XXS - Double Extra Strong
ANSI B36.10 Steel Pipe Numbers:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
ANSI B36.19 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S 80S
JIS Pipe Schedules
1990 Steel Schedules:
10 20 30 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
1990 Stainless Steel Schedules:
5S 10S 40S
DIN Pipe Schedules
None
Only the s (standard) schedule applies to wall thickness calculations for DIN.
Seam Welded
Indicates whether the piping element is seam welded
B31.1 / B31.3
If the B31.1 or B31.3 piping codes are active, select the Seam-welded check box to activate
the Wl box. Wl (the weld strength reduction factor) is used by the software to determine the
minimum wall thickness of the element.
IGE/TD/12
If the IGE/TD/12 piping code is active, select the Seam welded check box when straight
pipes are seam welded. This option affects the stress intensification factor calculations for
that pipe section due to seam welded fabrication.
114
WI Factor
Specifies the WI factor.
+Mill Tol %; Wl
Specifies the positive mill tolerance. This option is only enabled when IGE/TD/12 is active. It
is used when the Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is
set to Plus Mill Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on
the nominal wall thickness increased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
If the B31.3 piping code is activated, this box specifies the weld strength reduction factor
(W l), to be used in the minimum wall calculation for straight pipe.
-Mill Tol %
Displays the negative mill tolerance. This value is read from the configuration file and used
in minimum wall thickness calculations. Also, for IGE/TD/12, this value is used when the
Base Stress/Flexibility On option of the Special Execution Options is set to Plus Mill
Tolerance. In that case, piping stiffness and section modulus is based on the nominal wall
thickness, decreased by this percentage. You can change this value on an
element-by-element basis.
Corrosion
Specifies the corrosion allowance used to calculate a reduced section modulus. There is a
configuration option available to consider all stress cases as corroded. For more
information, see All Cases Corroded (on page 97).
Pipe Density
Displays the pipe density value. The appropriate pipe density is filled in automatically when
you provide a proper material number. You can override this value at any time. The software
then duplicates the value through the rest of the input.
115
Fluid Density
Displays the fluid density. Specify the fluid density when the internal fluid the piping system
transports significantly affects the weight loads. When the specific gravity of the fluid is
known, you can type that instead of the density. For example, you could type 0.85SG.
Specific gravities are converted to the appropriate densities immediately on input. To type
specific gravity, follow the numeric value with the letters SG (no spaces). The software
automatically converts this value to density.
In the default ENGLISH units system, densities are typed in pounds per cubic inch.
Propagate Properties
Indicates whether to propagate the property changes. Clear this check box to indicate that
properties apply to the current element only.
Operating Conditions
You can specify up to nine temperatures and ten pressures (one extra for the hydrostatic test
pressure) for each piping element. The temperatures are actual temperatures, not changes from
the ambient temperature. CAESAR II uses these temperatures to obtain the thermal strain and
allowable stresses for the element from the Material Database. As an alternative, you can
directly specify the thermal strains. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 53).
Thermal strains have absolute values on the order of 0.002, and are unitless. Pressures are
typed as gauge values and cannot be negative. Each temperature and each pressure that you
typed creates a loading for you to use when building load cases. Both thermal and pressure
data carries forward from one element to the next until changed. Typing a value in the Hydro
pressure box causes CAESAR II to build a hydro case in the set of recommended load cases.
CAESAR II uses an ambient temperature of 70F, unless changed using the Special
Execution Parameters option. For more information, see New Job Ambient Temperature (on
page 54).
116

Double-click >> to display the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
Temperatures
Specifies operating temperatures. There are nine temperature boxes to allow up to nine
different operating cases. The error checker validates temperature values to insure that they
are within the code allowed ranges. You can exceed the ranges by typing the expansion
coefficient in the temperature box in units of length/length. When you are using material 21
(user-defined material), type a thermal expansion coefficient instead of a temperature.
Values, whose absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance, in the temperature box
are taken to be thermal expansion coefficients. The Alpha Tolerance is a configuration file
parameter and is taken to be 0.05 by default. For example, if you wanted to type the thermal
expansion coefficient equivalent to 11.37in./100ft., the calculation would be:
11.37in./100ft. * 1 ft./ 12in. = .009475 in./in.
Type this into the appropriate Temperature box.
A cut short does no more than reduce the length of a pipe element to zero. For
example; if you wanted 8.5 cm of cold spring you could put in an 8.5 cm long element and
then thermally shrink its length to zero. This allows the cold spring to be manipulated as an
individual thermal case rather than as a concentrated force.
117

Access to operating conditions 4 through 9 is granted through the Extended Operating
Conditions dialog box, accessible by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the
frame surrounding the standard Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can keep this
dialog box open or closed for your convenience.
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. Use the
following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
118
Thermal Expansion
Displays thermal expansion coefficients. CAESAR II displays the corresponding thermal
expansion coefficients in the fields when you type operating temperatures in the
temperature fields. When the thermal expansion coefficients are not in the material
database, you can type thermal expansion coefficients in the temperature field if the
absolute values are less than the Alpha Tolerance in the configuration. The Alpha
Tolerance is 0.05 by default. For more information, see Alpha Tolerance (on page 53). You
can type up to nine thermal expansion coefficients in units of length/length in the
temperature field on the Extended Operating Conditions dialogue box. CAESAR II
displays these values in the Thermal Expansion boxes.
Pressures
Specifies operating pressures. There are 10 pressure boxes, which allow up to nine
operating and one hydrotest pressure cases. When you type multiple pressures, be careful
with the setup of the analysis load cases. Review the recommended load cases provided by
the software carefully before proceeding.
Specify operating pressures 4 through 9 through the Extended Operating Conditions
dialog box, accessed by clicking the >> button in the upper right corner of the standard
Temperature and Pressure input boxes. You can work with this dialog box open and move
the box around for your convenience.
Type a value in the HydroPress box to signal CAESAR II to recommend a hydrotest load
case.
Type the design gage pressure (that is, the difference between the internal and external
pressures).
The software disables the Bourdon effect (pressure elongation) by default because it
assumes the job to be non-conservative. If you want to enable the Bourdon effect, you
can do so by using the Special Execution options. For more information, see New Job
Bourdon Pressure (on page 54).
The Bourdon effect is always considered in the analysis of fiberglass reinforced plastic
pipe (Material ID=20).
CAESAR II automatically suggests load cases according to IGE/TD/12 Appendix 7. You

must use the following conventions for the specification of the operating conditions.
T1 Maximum Temperature
T2 Minimum Temperature
T3 Minimum Summer Temperature
T4 Maximum Winter Temperature
T5 Maximum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
T6 Minimum Temperature (flow induced) (optional)
P1 Maximum Incidental Pressure
P2 Maximum Operating Pressure
P3 Compressor Operation
119

P4 Demand Pressure
HP Hydrotest Pressure
Component Information
Special components (such as bends, rigid elements, expansion joints, and tees) require
additional information. You can define this information by selecting the component check box,
and then typing data in the auxiliary dialog box.
Bend
Double-click Bend if the active element ends in a bend, elbow or mitered joint. This displays
the auxiliary dialog box on the right side of the screen. CAESAR II usually assigns three
nodes to a bend to define the near, mid, and far nodes on the bend. For more information,
see Bends (on page 121).
Rigid
Double-click Rigid if the active element is much stiffer than the connecting pipe, such as a
flange or valve. This displays the auxiliary dialog box to collect the component weight. For
more information, see Rigid (on page 126).
For rigid elements, CAESAR II follows these rules:
When the rigid element weight is defined as a value other than zero, CAESAR II
computes any extra weight due to insulation and contained fluid. The software then
adds that value to the defined weight value.
The weight of fluid added to a non-zero weight rigid element is equal to the same
weight that would be computed for an equivalent straight pipe. The weight of
insulation added is equal to the same weight that would be computed for an
equivalent straight pipe multiplied by 1.75.
If the weight of a rigid element is zero or blank, CAESAR II assumes that the
element is an artificial construction element rather than an actual piping element. In
this case, the software does not calculate an insulation or fluid weight for that
element.
The stiffness of the rigid element is relative to the diameter wall thickness. Make
sure that the diameter on a rigid element indicates the rigid stiffness to generate.
Expansion Joint
Double-click Expansion Joint if the active element is an expansion joint. This displays the
auxiliary dialog box used to collect stiffness parameters and effective diameter. For more
information, see Expansion Joints (on page 126).
Expansion joints can be modeled as zero-length (with all stiffnesses acting at a single point)
or as finite-length (with the stiffnesses acting over a continuous element). In the single-point
case, you must type all stiffness. In the continuous element case, you must omit either the
120

lateral or angular stiffness.
SIF & Tees

Double-click SIF & Tees if the active element has special stress intensification factors
(SIFs). CAESAR II automatically calculates these factors for each component. For more
information, see SIFs & Tees (on page 131).
Bends, rigids, and expansion joints are mutually exclusive. For more information, see
Rigid (on page 126) and Expansion Joints (on page 126).
Bends
Indicates that the element is entering a bend. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Bend check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can place Intermediate node points at specified angles along the bend, or at the bend
mid-point (M).
121

Radius
Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default. You can override
this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
3D - Indicates a 3D bend. The radius is equal to 3 times the nominal diameter.
Type
Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached flanges and
can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type blank. A bend
should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two diameters of the
bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Angle
Displays the angle to a point on the bend curvature. You can place additional nodes at any
point on the bend curvature provided the added nodes are not within five degrees of each
other. You can change the 5 node-spacing limit by using the configuration. For more
information, see Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend (on page 68).
The element To node is always physically located at the far end of the bend. By
default, CAESAR II places a node at the midpoint of the bend (designated by the letter M in
this box) as well as at the zero degree position (start) of the bend, if possible.
122

Node
Displays the node number associated with the extra point on the bend. CAESAR II places
unique node numbers in these boxes whenever you initiate a bend. New, unique node
numbers must be assigned to the points whenever you add points on the bend curvature. If
numbering by fives and the To node number for the bend element is 35, a logical choice for
the node number for an added node at 30 degrees on the bend would be 34. You can treat
the added nodes on the bend like any other nodes in the piping system. Nodes on the bend
curvature may be restrained, displaced, or placed at the intersection of more than two pipes.
Nodes on a bend curvature are most commonly used as an intersection for a dummy leg or
for the location of a restraint. All nodes defined in this manner are plotted at the tangent
intersection point for the bend.
Miter Points
Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you type a number, CAESAR
II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If the bend is determined to
be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than one, the bend should be
broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is the total number of cuts in
the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all that is required to calculate
the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31 codes. The bend radius and the
bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Fitting Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the thickness of the
matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall thickness, then the
inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the matching pipe.
CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the properties of
the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
123

r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code
For Tn:
For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1
Fitting
Fitting
B31.3
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.4
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.5
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.8
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII
Fitting
Matching Pipe
SECT III NC
Fitting
Matching Pipe
SECT III ND
Fitting
Matching Pipe
Z662
Matching Pipe
Matching Pipe
NAVY 505
Fitting
Fitting
B31.1 (1967)
Fitting
Fitting
SWEDISH
Fitting
Matching Pipe
BS 806
N/A
N/A
STOOMWEZEN
N/A
N/A
RCC-M C/D
Matching
Pipe
Matching Pipe
CODETI
Fitting
Fitting
NORWEGIAN
Fitting
Fitting
FDBR
Fitting
Fitting
BS 7159
Fitting
Fitting
124

UKOOA
Fitting
Fitting
IGE/TD/12
Fitting
Fitting
EN-13480
Fitting
Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380
Fitting
Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
K-Factor
Specifies the bend flexibility factor. CAESAR II calculates the factor according to the current
piping code. You can type a value to override this calculation.
Seam-Welded
Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the
Wl box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine
the minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Wl for Bends
B31.1 / B31.3 - Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W l) for bend elements. This
value is used in the minimum wall thickness calculations.
ISO 14692 - Replaces this box with EPTp/(EbTb) where Ep and Eb are the axial modulus of
the attached pipe and the bend respectively, Tp and Tb are the average wall thickness of the
attached pipe and the bend respectively. If these values are omitted, the software uses a
default value of 1.0. This value affects the calculation of the flexibility factor for bends.
125
Rigid
Indicates that you are supplying rigid element data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Rigid check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type a value for Rigid Weight. This value should always be zero or positive and should not
include the weight of any insulation or fluid. If you type no weight, then CAESAR II models the
element as a weightless construction element.
Rigid weights are defined automatically if you use the Valve and Flange database.
CAESAR II automatically includes 1.0 times the fluid weight of equivalent straight pipe and 1.75
times the insulation weight of equivalent straight pipe.
Rigid elements with zero weight are considered to be modeling constructs and do not have fluid
or insulation weight added.
The rigid element stiffness is proportional to the matching pipe. For example, a 13 in. long 12 in.
diameter rigid element is stiffer than a 13 in. long 2 in. diameter rigid element. This fact should
be observed when modeling rigid elements that are part of a small pipe/large vessel, or small
pipe/heavy equipment model. The stiffness properties are computed using 10 times the
thickness of the rigid element. For additional details, see Technical Discussions (on page 879).
Type the rigid element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes.
See Valve (on page 247) for automatic input for these types of components.
Expansion Joints
Indicates that you are supplying expansion joint data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking Expansion Joint on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for expansion joint stiffness parameters and
effective diameter. For a non-zero length expansion joint, you must omit either the transverse or
the bending stiffness.
Setting the effective diameter to zero deactivates the pressure thrust load. Use this
method in conjunction with setting a large axial stiffness to simulate the effect of axial tie-rods.
126

Zero Length Expansion Joints
Specifies zeroes in the DX, DY, and DZ fields (or leave the fields blank) for hinged and
gimball joints. Use 1.0 to define completely flexible stiffness and 1.0E12 to define completely
rigid stiffness. You must type all stiffnesses.
Finite Length Expansion Joints

Specifies the expansion joint vector in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes. Because the transverse
stiffness is directly related to the bending stiffness for finite length expansion joints, type only
one of these stiffnesses. CAESAR II calculates the other stiffness automatically based on
flexible length, effective ID, and the other stiffness. In general, type the transverse stiffness
and leave the bending stiffness blank.
Bellows Stiffness Properties

Specifies the expansion joint parameters.
If the element length is zero, then you should define all of the stiffnesses. If the element
length is not zero, then you should leave blank either the Bending Stif or the Trans Stif
box. CAESAR II automatically calculates the stiffness that you did not type. You can type all
stiffnesses for rubber expansion joints
If the torsional stiffness value is not specified, CAESAR II uses a default value of
0.10000E+06.
Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint manufacturers) that are
used in a finite length expansion joint model should be multiplied by four before being used
in any piping software. Bending STIFFNESSES from EJMA (and from most expansion joint
manufacturers) that are used in a ZERO length expansion joint model should be used
without modification.
Use 1.0 for bellows stiffnesses that are completely flexible.
Use 1.0E12 for rigid bellows stiffnesses.
Zero length expansion joints can be used in many modeling applications, such as defining
struts or hinged ends. The orientation of zero length expansion joints is taken from the
element that precedes the expansion joint if the To node of the preceding element is equal
to the From node on the expansion joint element. If the preceding element does not go into
the expansion joint, then the orientation is taken from the element that follows the expansion
joint if it properly leaves the joint.
127

Effective ID
Specifies the effective inside diameter for pressure thrust from the manufacturer's catalog.
For all load cases, including pressure, CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust force
tending to blow the bellows apart. If left blank, or zero, then no axial thrust force due to
pressure is calculated. Many manufacturers give the effective area of the expansion joint:
Aeff. The Effective ID is calculated from the effective area by:
Effective ID = (4Aeff / )1/2
Reducer
Indicates that you are supplying reducer data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Reducer on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Specifies the Diameter 2, Thickness 2, and Alpha values at the To node of the reducer. The
diameter and wall thickness at the From node of the reducer element are taken from the current
piping element data.
128

CAESAR II constructs a concentric reducer element made of ten pipe cylinders, each of a
successively larger or smaller diameter and wall thickness over the element length. CAESAR II
calculates SIFs according to the current piping code (for more information, see Code
Compliance Considerations (on page 957)) and applies these internally to the Code Stress
Calculations. These SIFs are dependent on the slope of the reducer transition (among other
code-specific considerations), Alpha. If Alpha is left blank, then the software calculates this
value based on the change in pipe diameter over 60% of the element length. If specified,
Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are carried forward when the next pipe element is created as
Diameter and Wt/Sch. If not specified, Diameter 2 and Thickness 2 are assumed to be equal
to Diameter and Wt/Sch on the following element dialog box.
If there is no value for Alpha is specified on the dialog box, CAESAR II reports the alpha value
in the Errors and Warnings dialog box.
Diameter 2
Specifies the diameter at the To of the reducer element. The value carries forward as the
diameter of the following element. Nominal values are converted to actual values if that
feature is active. If left blank, CAESAR II uses the diameter from the following element as
Diameter 2.
Thickness 2
Specifies the wall thickness at the To node of the reducer element. The value carries
forward as the wall thickness of the following element. Nominal values are converted to
actual values if that feature is active. If this option is left blank, CAESAR II uses the
thickness from the following element as Thickness 2.
129

Alpha
Specifies the slope, in degrees, of the reducer transition. If left blank, CAESAR II assumes
the slope equal to the arc tangent 1/2(the change in diameters) / (length of sloped portion of
reducer).
TD/12. This entry is a required input for IGE/TD/12.
Because all reducers are different, the actual length of sloped portion of reducer is unknown
unless you define it. Because of this, if Alpha is not specified, CAESAR II makes an
assumption that the length of sloped portion of reducer is equal to 60% of the total reducer
length. If you leave the Alpha value blank, then CAESAR II defaults to arc tangent 1/2(the
change in diameters) / (0.60 x element length).
R1
Specifies the transition radius for the large end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12 Code. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
R2
Specifies the transition radius for the small end of the reducer as shown in Appendix 4,
Table 8 of IGE/TD/12. This option is enabled only when IGE/TD/12 is active.
130
SIFs & Tees

Indicates that you are supplying SIF and tee data. Select or clear by double-clicking the SIFs &
Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for stress intensification factors (SIFs), or fitting
types, for up to two nodes per element. If you select components from the list, CAESAR II
automatically calculates the SIF values according to the applicable code unless you override this
behavior. Certain fittings and certain codes require additional data. Boxes display as appropriate
for the selected fitting.
There are two basic component types:
Three element intersection components
Two element joint components
131

A fully defined intersection model requires that three pipes frame into the intersection node and
that two of them are co-linear. Partial intersection assumptions are made for junctions where
you have coded one or two pipes into the intersection node, but these models are not
recommended. Two element joint components can be formed equally well with one or two
elements framing into the node.
You only need to type the intersection or joint type and properties on one of the elements going
to the junction. CAESAR II duplicates the intersection characteristics for all other pipes framing
into the intersection.
Fully review the warning messages coming from CAESAR II during error checking.
These messages detail any assumptions made during the assembly and calculation of the
intersection SIFs.
The available intersections and joint types, along with the other parameters that can affect the
stress intensification factors for the respective component, are shown in the table that follows.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO 14692)*
1
REINFORCED FABRICATED TEE
FTG RO
CROTCH
UNREINFORCED FABRICATED
TEE
FTG RO
CROTCH
WELDING TEE
FTG RO
CROTCH
SWEEPOLET
CROTCH
WELDOLET
CROTCH
EXTRUDED WELDING TEE
GIRTH BUTT WELD
WELD D OR
ID
SOCKET WELD (NO UNDERCUT)
FILLET
SOCKET WELD (AS WELDED)
FILLET
10
TAPERED TRANSITION
WELD D
11
THREADED JOINT
12
DOUBLE WELDED SLIP-ON
13
LAP JOINT FLANGE (B16.9)
14
BONNEY FORGE SWEEPOLET
15
BONNEY FORGE LATROLET
PAD THK
FTG RO
CROTCH
WELD ID
132

16
BONNEY FORGE INSERT

WELDOLET
17
FULL ENCIRCLEMENT TEE
FTG RO
WELD ID
*This list does not include input items effecting SIF calculations for ISO 14692. For more
information on ISO 14692, see Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692
(on page 140).
Node
Specifies the node number where the stress intensification exists. CAESAR II displays the
To node of the current element by default. You can type any node in the system, but it is
most often at a pipe intersection or joint.
If the node is at an intersection, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for all pipes going to the
intersection if the intersection Type is specified. You only need to type the intersection type
once. CAESAR II finds all other pipes framing into the intersection and applies the
appropriate SIFs.
If the node is at a two-pipe joint, such as a butt weld, CAESAR II calculates SIFs for the two
pipes going to the joint node if the joint Type is specified. You only need to specify the joint
type once. CAESAR II finds the other pipe completing the joint and applies the appropriate
SIFs.
If the node is not at an intersection or a joint then, leave the Type box blank and type user
defined SIFs in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes. Entries in the SIF(i) and SIF(o) boxes only
apply to the element on which they are defined.
User defined stress intensification factors must be greater than or equal to one.
CAESAR II calculates and displays code-defined SIFs in the Intersection SIF scratchpad.
Access this scratchpad from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment
> Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or
Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar. You can modify parameters used in the scratchpad so that you can observe
the effects of different geometries and thicknesses. Most changes made in the scratchpad
can be automatically transferred back into the model.
If the node is on any part of the bend curvature then the following applies:
You cannot override code calculated SIFs for bends by default. A configuration
option exists to override this default. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). If you set Allow User's SIF at Bend to True, then you can
specify SIFs for bend To nodes. The SIFs specified in this way apply for the entire
bend curvature.
CAESAR II applies user-defined SIFs to straight pipe going to points on a bend

curvature regardless of any parameter in the setup file. This option is commonly
used to intensify injector tie-ins at bends, or dummy legs, or other bend
attachment-type of supports.
133

Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*" on page 132) table.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 150).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type
of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
In-Plane SIF (ii)

Indicates the in-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or an intersection.
Specify this value for any point in the piping system by selecting the SIFs & Tees check box
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the In-Plane SIF (ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
For more information on stress intensification factors (SIFs) in CAESAR II, see Stress
Intensification Factors Details.
In-Plane Index (Ii)
Indicates the in-plane sustained stress index (Ii) value.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress index
applies. Then, specify the In-Plane (Ii) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane Index (Ii) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
134

Out-Plane SIF (io)
Indicates the out-of-plane stress intensification factors (SIFs) for a bend or intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress applies.
Then, specify the Out-Plane SIF (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes,
CAESAR II performs code-related calculations.
Out-Plane Index (Io)
Indicates the out-of-plane sustained stress index (I o) value.
applies. Then, specify the Out-Plane Index (io) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Out-Plane Index (Io) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to the greater value of either 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF value (io) or 1.0.
Torsion SIF (it)
Indicates the torsional SIF (it) value for a bend or an intersection.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion SIF (it) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion SIF (it) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
Torsion Index (It)

Indicates the sustained torsional moment index (I t). You can use this index value (along with
the torsional moment due to sustained loads) to determine the amount of stress that is due
to sustained torsional moment.
applies. Then, specify the Torsion Index (It) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Torsion Index (It) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
135

Axial SIF (ia)
Indicates the longitudinal (axial) SIF (ia) value on a bend or at an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the SIF applies.
Then, specify the Axial SIF (ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
The B31.3 code indicates that, in the absence of more applicable data, the Axial SIF
(ia) value is 1 for elbows, pipe bends, and miter bends. The ia value is the same as the
Out-Plane SIF (io) value for all other components.
Axial Index (Ia)
Indicates the sustained longitudinal (axial) force index (I a). You can use this index value
(along with the longitudinal force due to sustained loads and the dimensions of a
cross-sectional area of the pipe) to determine the amount of stress that is due to sustained
longitudinal force.
applies. Then, specify the Axial Index (Ia) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Axial Index (Ia) box, CAESAR II sets the value to
1.0 by default.
Pressure SIF (ip)
Indicates the pressure SIF (ip) value for a bend or an intersection.
on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. Type the node number to which the stress pressure
applies. Then, specify the Pressure SIF (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure SIF (ip) box, CAESAR II sets the value
to 1.0 by default.
136

Pressure Index (Ip)
Indicates the sustained pressure index (I p).
applies. Then, specify the Pressure Index (ip) value on the SIFs/Tees tab.
If you do not specify a value in the Pressure Index (Ip) box, CAESAR II sets the
value to 1.0 by default.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
CROTCH R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
137

WELD (D)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
FILLET
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Weld ID
Specifies the weld identifier value. Choose from the following options:
0 or BLANK - As Welded
1 - Finished/Ground Flush
This box is only applicable for:
IGE/TD/12
Bonney Forge Sweepolets
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets
Butt Welds in the Swedish Piping Codes or the IGE/TD/12 code
If you specify a value of 1 - Finished/Ground Flush, then the software considers the weld
to be ground flush on the inside and out and it calculates the SIF as 1.0.
For more information on how input parameters are used to compute SIFs for girth butt
welds, see WELD (D) (on page 138).
B1; Wc
Specifies values that depend upon the code that you are using.
ASME Class 2 and ASME Class 3
Defines the primary stress index used for the given node on the current element.
Unless you otherwise over ride this value, the following values are applied for ASME Class 2
and Class 3 piping:
Straight Pipe:
B1 = 0.5 B2 = 1.0
Curved Pipe:
B1 = -0.1 + 0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2 = 1.30/h**2/3 but not <1.0; h = tR/ rm**2
Intersections:
B1 = 0.5
138

Butt Welded Tees:
B2b = 0.4(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0

B2r = 0.5(R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
Branch Connections:
(r < 0.5R)
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)**2/3 (r/R)**1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)**1/4 but not < 1.5
B31.1 / B31.3
Defines the weld strength reduction factor (W c) used to reduce the allowable stress for the
sustained load case.
BS-7159 and UKOOA
Defines the pressure stress multiplier (m) if it is different than the code requirements. For
straight pipe, m = 1.0; for bends and tees, m is defined in Figures 7.1 and 7.12 of the BS
7159 Code.
IGE/TD/12
Override the cyclic pressure stress intensification factor Ip(Cyc) if it is different than the code
calculations (calculated according to Table 9, Figure 5, and Figure 7 of the code).
B2
Specifies the primary stress index for the given node on the current element. This entry is
only applicable for ASME Class 2 and 3 piping.
If omitted, B1 and B2 are defaulted as follows:
Straight Pipe:
B1=0.5 B2=1.0
Curved Pipe:
B1=-0.1+0.4h; but not <0 or >0.5

B2=1.30/h2/3; but not <1.0; h=tR/rm 2
Intersections:
B1=0.5
Butt-Welded Tees:
B2b=0.4(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0

B2r=0.5(R/T)2/3 but not <1.0
Branch Connections:
(r<0.5R)
B2b=0.50 C2b but not <1.0
B2r=0.75 C2r but not <1.0
C2b=3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/FTG ro) but not <1.5
C2r=1.15(r/t)1/4 but not <1.5
You can use the SIF(IN) and SIF(OUT) boxes to override the CAESAR II calculated values
139

for any intersection. Override values only apply for the single element on which they are
defined. SIFs can be calculated for partial intersections and dummy legs.
When IGE/TD/12 is active, the SIF/TEE dialog box changes its appearance to
accommodate specialized SIF parameters. Refer to the supplementary IGE/TD/12
documentation for further information.
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8)

B31.1
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure D1 as well as Notes 10a, 10c,
10d, 10e, and 10f. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining
the SIF value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration
Options Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
B31.8
Indicates that the software should use B31.8 Notes 6, 9, or 10, as applicable, when
determining the SIF value for the tee.
ASME NC and ND
Indicates that the tee meets the dimensional criteria of Figure 3673.2(b)-2 as well as Notes
10 and 11. This allows the software to use the branch equation when determining the SIF
value for the tee. Note that this option relies on the setting of the Configuration Options
Reduced Intersection and No RFT / WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs.
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the software to compute the
Y value based on the highest temperature value specified.
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations For ISO 14692

When you select SIF & Tees on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, the Auxiliary panel for
SIFs/Tees becomes active. The Type box indicates what type of tee or joint to use for the piping
code specified. The software uses this input in the same way for most piping codes. However,
there are only a few tee and joint types for ISO 14692.
1
Tee
Joint
Qualified Tee
Specifying a tee, a qualified tee, or a joint in the Type box allows CAESAR II to perform the
correct allowable stress calculations.
Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO 14692 code for
non-qualified tees.
Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the calculations specified in the code for joints and
fittings.
140
Select 3 - Qualified Tee for the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified
service stress for tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping System

SIFs for non-intersection points are normally taken to be 1.0 unless the piping element is a
bend. If the SIF should be greater than (1.0), then you can type the non-unity SIF in the
Intersection Auxiliary box without specifying the intersection type. A user-defined SIF only
acts at the node on the current element.
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress Indices Details

CAESAR II calculates SIFs automatically for bends and defined intersections as specified by
the applicable piping code. You can type a user-defined SIF for any point in the piping
system by activating the SIFs & Tees check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Type the node number where the stress is to be intensified in the first available Node box.
Type the in-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors in the In-Plane SIF (ii) and the
Out-Plane SIF (io) boxes. Specify any axial and torsion index values on the elements on
the Axial Index (Ia) and Torsion Index (It) boxes.
You cannot specify SIFs for bend elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend
option is set to True in the configuration file. For more information, see Allow User's SIF at
Bend (on page 97). Code defined SIFs always apply.
CAESAR II does not allow user-defined stress intensification factors to be less than 1.0.
The node to be intensified must be the To or the From node on the current element.
Stresses are only intensified at the element end going to the specified node. For example, if
two pipes frame into node 10, one going from 5 to 10, and the other from 10 to 15 and a
stress intensification factor of 2.0 for node 10 is defined on the element from 5 to 10, then
the 10 end of the element from 5 to 10 has a stress intensification of 2.0 and the 10 end of
the element from 10 to 15 has a stress intensification of 1.0.
You can use user-defined stress intensification factors to override code calculated values for
nodes at intersections. For example, let node 40 be an intersection defined by an
unreinforced fabricated tee. The header pipes framing into the intersection go from 35 to 40
and from 40 to 45. The branch pipe framing into the intersection goes from 175 to 40. The
code-calculated values for the stress intensification factors in the header pipes are:
SIF (ii) = 4.50
SIF (io) = 3.75
and in the branch pipe are
SIF (ii) = 6.70
SIF (io) = 5.58
Also assume that finite element analysis of the intersection showed the header stress
intensification factors to be 2.3 and 1.87 respectively and the branch stress intensification
factors to be equal to the code recommended value, which is 6.70 and 5.58. To properly
override the code-calculated stress intensification factors for the header pipes, two pipe
elements must be modified:
141

35 to 40
Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
40 to 15
Node 40
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.3
SIF (io): 1.87
The stress intensification for the branch pipes can be calculated according to the code, so
part of the branch pipe data might appear:
175 to 40
NODE 40
Type: 2 - Unreinforced
SIF (ii):
SIF (io):
If either of the SIF boxes for the header elements going to 40 were left blank, the
code-calculated value would be used in its place. This is only true where code-calculated
values exist along with user-specified values.
If the element from 110 to 115 needs the stress intensification factors for each of its ends is
2.0, then a part of that element data might appear:
110 to 115
Node 110
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Node: 115
Type:
SIF (ii): 2.0
SIF (io):
Leaving the out-of-plane stress intensification factor blank implies that it is equal to the
in-plane stress intensification factor. There are no code-calculated values to override these
user-input values.
If you do not specify Torsion SIF (it), Axial SIF (ia), and Pressure SIF (ip), CAESAR II
calculates the values as 1.
The ASME B31.3 code update also introduced using the stress indices in sustained stress
equations.
If you do not specify the In-Plane Index (Ii), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either 0.75 multiplied by the In-Plane SIF value (ii) or 1.0.
142

If you do not specify the Out-Plane Index (Io), then CAESAR II uses the greater value of
either of 0.75 multiplied by the Out-Plane SIF (io) or 1.
If you do not specify the Torsion Index (It), Axial Index (Ia), and Pressure Index (Ip),
CAESAR II sets these values to 1.
Currently, the software does not use the Pressure SIF (ip) or Pressure Index (Ip) in
the calculation.
You are not permitted to override code-calculated stress intensification factors for bend
elements unless the Allow User's SIF at Bend option is set to True in the configuration file.
Additionally, bend stress intensification factors supersedes any code-calculated intersection
stress intensification factors for the same node. This characteristic allows you to apply
code-calculated intersection stress intensification factors to dummy legs without disturbing
the normal bend stress intensification factors. The node on the dummy leg, which is also on
the bend curvature, is defined as an intersection on the Intersection SIF Scratchpad. The
intersection stress intensification factors are calculated and can be applied to the dummy leg
end that connects to the bend. Bend stress intensification factors are unchanged.
Stress intensification factors can be calculated for intersections having one, two, or three
pipes framing into it. Where two pipes form a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that
the larger pipe is the header and the smaller the branch.
Where one pipe forms a partial intersection, CAESAR II assumes that the intersection is full
sized.
CAESAR II does not calculate stress intensification factors for intersections having more
than three pipes framing into it (for example, a cross, and for non 90-degree branches, such
as lateral intersections).
SIF Scratchpad
View the stress intensification factors calculated by CAESAR II interactively from the
Classic Piping Input dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection
Nodes or Intersection SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
View the stress intensification factors at bends from the Classic Piping Input dialog box by
clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bends or
Bend SIF scratchpad on the Input
Tools toolbar.
143

The SIF scratchpads display after you type in the node number to review when prompted.
The node must be a valid bend node when reviewing SIFs at bends.
You can interactively change any of the data and recalculate the SIFs. This allows you to
see the effect of changing geometries and properties on code stress intensification factors.
CAESAR II allows you to transfer data from the scratchpad back to the actual model.
144

IGE\TD\12 Requirements
IGE\TD\12 requires different information than the other codes used in CAESAR II. When
IGE\TD\12 is active, the SIFs/Tees Auxiliary field changes to accommodate specialized SIF
parameters. For more information regarding the specialized parameters refer to the text and
figures at the end of this section.
Node
appropriate SIFs.
145

SIFs.
bend curvature.

Type
Specifies the type of tees or joints.
Do/r3
Specifies the following terms for each component type:
Forged Tee to BS 1640
Specifies the Do value. For more information on Do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 150).
Weldolet
Specifies the r3 value. For more information on r3, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
page 150).
Weldoflange
150).
146

T/Th/T'b
Specifies the T value. For more information on T, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
Specifies the theta value. For more information on theta, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on
page 150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Weldoflange
page 150).
Te/Tb
Fabricated Tee with Pad
Specifies the Te value. For more information on Te, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Specifies the Tb value. For more information on Tb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Full Encirclement Tee
150).
Long Weldneck Flange
150).
Weldoflange
150).
147

rp/do
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the rp value. For more information on rp, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Specifies the do value. For more information on do, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the rc value. For more information on rc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
148

150).
Weldoflange
150).
r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
Specifies the L1 value. For more information on L1, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
149

Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
IGE\TD\12 Reference
Use the figures below to identify the specialized parameters.
150

Forged Tee
Weldolet
151

Drawn/Extruded Tee
Weldoflange
152

153

Sweepolet
Fabricated Tee
154

Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Stress Concentration Factors

Overrides the stress concentration factors calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code
equations. Any values typed here apply only to the element on which they have been
specified except when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the
bend.
For branches of tees, any bending SCFs specified here must include the "w" term.
Fatigue Class
Overrides the fatigue class calculated according to the IGE/TD/12 Code equations. Any
values selected here apply only to the element on which they have been specified except
when entered on a bend node. In that case, they apply throughout the bend.
Boundary Conditions
The check boxes in this block open the auxiliary dialog box tabs to collect information on items
which restrain (or impose movement on) the pipe. These items include restraints, hangers,
flexible nozzles or displacements. Though not required, it is recommended that you define such
information on the dialog box which has that point as the From node or To node. This is of
benefit if the data must be located for modification. The auxiliary dialog box tabs allow you to
specify up to four restraints (devices which in some way modify the free motion of the system),
one hanger, one nozzle, or two sets of nodal displacements per element. If needed, you can
define additional conditions for any node on other elements.
155
Restraints
Indicates that you are supplying restraint data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the
Restraints check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls data for up to four restraints for each element. Node
number and restraint types are required. All other information is optional. If you omit the
stiffness, entry defaults to rigid.
You can specify skewed restraints by typing direction cosines with the type, such as X
(1,0,1) for a restraint running at 45 in the X-Z plane.
You can specify as many as four restraints for an element. If you need to specify more than four
restraints on one element, you can place the additional restraints on any other element.
Do not use restraints in the following three situations:
1. Imposed Displacements - Specify displacements for the point using the Displacement
Auxiliary box.
2. Flexible Nozzles - Use the Nozzles Flex check box to open the Nozzles Auxiliary Data
box to input the vessel or tank characteristics required by WRC 297, PD 5500, or API 650 to
156

calculate local nozzle flexibilities. After these flexibilities have been calculated, CAESAR II
automatically inserts the necessary restraints and flexibilities into the piping model.
3. Hangers program designed or pre-defined spring hangers - Use the Hangers check
box to open the Hanger Auxiliary Data box.
Node
Specifies the node number where the restraint is to act. The node number does not have to
be on the current element.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node. Restraints with connecting nodes can be used to tie one
node in the piping system to any other node in the system. If left blank then the restraint
node is tied by the restraint stiffness to a fixed point in space. If the connecting node is
specified then the restraint node is tied by the restraint stiffness to the connecting node.
In all cases, CNodes associate nodal degrees of freedom. Additionally, CNodes can be
used to geometrically connect different parts of a model graphically. This option is controlled
by the configuration option Connect Geometry through CNodes (on page 69).
Type
Specifies the restraint type. You can select a restraint from the list in the Restraint
Auxiliary box. For more information, see Section 3 of the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Restraint Type
Abbreviation
Anchor
ANC
Translational Double Acting
X, Y, or Z
Rotational Double Acting
RX, RY, or RZ
Guide, Double Acting
GUIDE
Double Acting Limit Stop
LIM
Translational Double Acting Snubber
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Translational Directional
+X, -X, +Y, -Y, +Z, -Z
Rotational Directional
+RX, -RX, +RY, etc.
Directional Limit Stop
+LIM, -LIM
157

Large Rotation Rod
XROD, YROD, ZROD
Translational Double Acting Bilinear
X2, Y2, Z2
Rotational Double Acting Bilinear
RX2, RY2, RZ2
Translational Directional Bilinear
-X2, +X2, -Y2, etc.
Rotational Directional Bilinear
+RX2, -RX2, +RY2, etc.
Bottom Out Spring
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR
Directional Snubber
+XSNB, -XSNB, +YSNB, etc.
Anchor
Specifies an anchor restraint. This type of restraint is defined for all degrees of freedom at
the node.
X, Y, or Z
Specifies translational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
For example, a +Y restraint is a restraint against movement in the minus -Y direction. It is
free to move in the plus Y direction.
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies translational skewed restraints. These values can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If
you type a direction vector such as vecx, vecy, or vecz, CAESAR II converts the direction
vector into the corresponding cosines.
RX, RY, or RZ
Specifies rotational restraints which can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you type a sign, it
defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the specified degree-of-freedom.
158

Guide
Specifies a transverse restraint that can be skewed.
LIM
Specifies limit stops. These are axial restraints that can be preceded by a (+) or (-). If you
type a sign, it defines the direction of allowed free displacement along the element
longitudinal axis.
XROD, YROD, ZROD

Specifies translational, large rotation, rod, or hanger-type restraints. These values can be
preceded by a (+) or (-) sign to indicate the orientation of the pivot point about which the rod
swings. A (+) is assumed. In the case of a YROD, this implies that the pivot point is above
the pipe. The rod or hanger length is also required.
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD (VECX, VECY, VECZ)

Specifies translational skewed, large rotation rod, or hanger type restraints.
X2, Y2, Z2
Specifies bilinear restraints. These are restraints that have two different stiffnesses
associated with them. The stiffness is dependent upon the loading on the restraint. Bilinear
restraints can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx, vecy, vecz)

Specifies rotational skewed restraints.
XSPR, YSPR, ZSPR

Specifies spring supports. These values can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
A bottom out spring requires additional input. The additional input includes the spring rate,
allowed travel, and initial load. If the allowed travel in the direction of support is exceeded,
the spring bottoms-out.
159

XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB
Specifies snubbers, which are restraints that engage only during quick movements such as
those induced by a shock. They only act on the piping system in the occasional load case.
Snubbers can be preceded by a (+) or a (-).
Because CAESAR II cannot perform load stepping, static analysis with snubbers requires a
preliminary manual analysis to determine thermal movements. Here is the procedure.
1. Analyze a hot operating case without your occasional loads.
2. Take the displacements from this analysis at the snubbers and put them back into the
input.
3. At the location where the snubbers are defined, define a CNODE and put these
displacements on the CNODE.
4. For your real analysis, apply these displacements to all load cases. Because they are
on the far side of the snubber, they won't affect anything unless the load case is called
OCC, which activates the snubber stiffness.
So:
When you run your standard OPE case (W+T1+P1+D1), the snubber node
displaces as before. There are no restraints because the load case is OPE, not
OCC.
When you run the operating + occasional case (W+T1+P1+D1+WIND1), the

snubber node displaces along with its CNODE. There is a difference in these two
displacements due to the WIND1 load and the snubber stiffness, because the case
is now set as OCC.
K2
Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint exceeds
Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type a value of 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
Gap
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM RX RY RZ
GAP - Specifies the distance along the restraint line of action that the restrained node can
travel before resistance to movement begins. The gap value must be positive. The gap is
given in degrees for rotational restraints. If the translational restraint is not preceded by a
sign, then the restraint is double acting and the gap exists for both positive and negative
displacements along the line of action. For example, if a 0.25 in. gap is specified at a +Y
restraint, then the restrained node can move freely 0.25 in. in the minus Y direction before
restraint occurs. The gap specification does not affect the amount of free displacement that
can occur along the positive Y direction in this example.
You can type two restraints having the same line of action but with different signs at the
same node when you define windows of allowed movement. Be careful to remember to form
the window with signs on restraints rather than with signs on gaps. A gap is a measure of
160

length in CAESAR II. A gap is always positive.
Examples:
TYPE GUI GAP 1/4 ... One quarter in. gap on either side of the guided restraint.
TYPE +Y GAP 3.0 ... Three in. gap below the support that must be closed before the +Y
support begins acting.
TYPE RX GAP 5.0 ... Five degree gap about the X axis about which the pipe may rotate
freely before rotational restraint occurs.
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Len - Specifies the swinging length of the rod or hanger. This is the distance along the
restraint line of action from the restrained node to the pivot point. The restraint swings about
the pivot point. If a CNODE is defined then the restraint swings about the CNODE. Len is a
required entry.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
K2 - Specifies the yield stiffness of a bilinear restraint. When the load on the restraint
exceeds Fy, the stiffness on the restraint changes from K1 to K2. Type a negative value to
model shallow trench or groove-type pipeline supports. CAESAR II treats K2 values of zero
as rigid. Type 1.0 for very small stiffnesses.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
"x" - Specifies the distance traveled along the spring axis before bottom-out occurs. In the
case of a typical YSPR, this is the movement in the negative Y direction before the spring
bottoms out.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
Stif
Specifies stiffness associated with any support, guide, limit stop, rod, or spring that can be
defined as a restraint. If you leave this option blank then the defined restraint is considered
rigid. The default rigid restraint stiffness is 1.0E12.
K1 is the initial stiffness of a bilinear restraint (for example, X2). If the restraint is not rigid,
then you can type any positive stiffness.
Avoid stiffnesses greatly in excess of 1.0E15. If a stiffness value is specified for an anchor,
the stiffness applies for all six degrees of freedom at the anchored node.
161

Mu
Specifies the following values:
TYPE = X Y Z GUI LIM
MU - Specifies the static friction coefficient. Friction provides resistance to movement along
the direction normal to the restraint line of action. The magnitude of the friction force is equal
to MU * Fn, where Fn is the normal force on the restraint. You can automatically assign a
friction coefficient to every new translational restraint by assigning a value to the Coefficient
of Friction box in the configuration. For more information, see Coefficient of Friction (Mu)
(on page 53).
TYPE = XROD YROD ZROD
Fi - Specifies the initial spring load. Leave this box blank for a rigid YROD. If you use YROD
to model a spring hanger, type the hanger stiffness into the STIF box. Type the initial cold
load on the hanger.
TYPE = X2 Y2 Z2 RX2 RY2 RZ2
Fy - Specifies the yield load. If the load on the support is less than Fy then the initial
stiffness K1 is used. If the load on the support is greater than Fy then the second stiffness
K2 is used.
TYPE = XSPR YSPR ZSPR
F - Specifies the initial spring cold load. This input is required and is almost always positive.
TYPE = XSNB YSNB ZSNB
na - Not Applicable. This box is not used when the restraint TYPE is snubber.
Hangers
Indicates that you are supplying hanger data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Hangers on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box controls options for hanger installations. You can fully define the hanger
data, or the hanger can be designed by CAESAR II. In this case, two special load cases are run
and the results are used as design parameters to select the springs from the user-specified
catalog.
CAESAR II provides catalogs for more than 35 spring hanger vendors.
The Hangers auxiliary dialog box lets you specify details on a hanger-by-hanger basis in the
piping input. To specify values for all hangers in a model, see Hanger Design Control Data (on
page 262).
162

Any changes you type in the Hangers auxiliary dialog box override the global values you
specify in the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
163

Node
Specifies the node number to which the hanger is connected.
CNode
Specifies the connecting node number. This value is used only when the other end of the
hanger is to be connected to another point in the system, such as another pipe node.
Design Data
There are two sections on the Hanger auxiliary dialog box.
Design Data - Specifies the hanger data if you need CAESAR II to design the hanger for
you.
Predefined Hanger Data - Specifies the hanger data if you know the hanger information.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil
2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping
4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega
6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology
8. Capitol
9. Piping Services
10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex
12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec
14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider)
16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd.
18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi
20. Myricks
21. China Power
22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports
24. PiHASA
25. Binder
26. Gradior
164

27. NHK
28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa
30. Mitsubishi
31. Yamashita
32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry
34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.
36. Senior
37. Unison
38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (see "Hanger Design Control Data" on page 262), accessed by clicking Hanger
design criteria
in the piping input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this
dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in
Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application
Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.

A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
165

connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value

proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides
as much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the
system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping
systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated
by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The
CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the
middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is
effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot
load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the
spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Available Space (neg. for can)

Specifies the amount of room above or below the pipe where you can install the hanger or
can. If the value is negative, then CAESAR II assumes that a can is to be installed. If the
value is positive, then CAESAR II assumes that a hanger is to be in installed. Hangers or
cans are selected for a particular location only if they can be installed in the space allotted.
The precise definition of available space varies with the manufacturer. Drawings and tables
for each manufacturer are shown at the end of this section.
166

This is the available vertical clearance for the hanger or can:
Leave the box blank or set to zero if the Available Space is not an important design criteria.
When the available space is the governing factor in a hanger design, several smaller springs
are typically chosen in place of one large spring.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this
value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This
is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation
is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
167

or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined
hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support
is selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable
support from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a
constant effort support for a particular location.
168

No. Hangers at Location
Specifies the number of hangers at a location.
Type a positive number to indicate the exact number of hangers at that location.
Leave the box blank to indicate that CAESAR II can place as many hangers as necessary to
make the installation work.
Type a negative number to indicate the maximum number of hangers that you accept. For
example, if you want to use as few springs as possible, yet are willing to use as many as 5
springs if necessary, type -5 in the No. of Hangers at Location box.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from
the selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some
instances and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons.
Clear this check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range
spring, assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than
their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Operating Load (Total at Loc.)

Overrides the operating load that CAESAR II is calculating.
This value is normally specified when you think that loads on a piece of equipment are
reduced if a hanger in the vicinity of the equipment is artificially caused to carry a
proportionately larger part of the total load. This operating load is the hot load that the
hanger is designed to support after it undergoes any travel due to the thermal expansion of
the piping. CAESAR II's calculated hanger operating loads may be read from the hanger
table printed in the output processor. The column is titled HOT LOAD. The value also
appears in this table. Type the total operating load that you want to use at the location. For
example, if there are two hangers specified at the location and each should carry 500 lb.,
then the operating load specified should be 1,000 lb.
169

Hanger Hardware Weight
Specifies any additional weight that must be supported by the hanger that exists between
the hanger and the pipe. This weight could affect the hanger design if the magnitude of this
weight is great enough.
Multiple Load Case Design Option

Specifies the load case for hanger design. You can base the spring selection algorithm on
one or more operating conditions. A two-pump installation where only one pump operates at
a time is a good application for multiple load case hanger design.
There are currently thirteen different multiple load case design algorithms available:
Design spring per operating case #1.
Design spring per operating case #2.
Design spring per operating case #3, #4, #5, #6, #7, #8, and #9.
Design spring for maximum operating load.
Design spring for maximum travel.
Design spring for average load and average travel.
Design spring for maximum load and maximum travel.
You can specify the Multiple Load Case Design option at the global level on the Hanger
Design Control Data dialog box. The globally specified option applies for all hanger design
locations unless overridden on a specific hanger design dialog box.
Type the number of operating thermal cases to consider when sizing springs for this system
on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box. This value defaults to 1.0. Also type the
Multiple Load Case Design option to be the default value unless the design option is to be
specified individually for each hanger to be designed in the system.
170

Example Problem: Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger Design
This example illustrates the different hanger designs that can result from the use of different
multiple load case design options.
171
Multiple Load Case Design Option for Hanger Design

Hanger A
Multiple Load Case
Design Option
Design Hanger Travel
Design Hanger Load
0.752 in
730.0 lb
0.029 in
560.0 lb
10
0.752 in
730.0 lb
11
0.752 in
730.0 lb
12
0.3905 in
645.0 lb
13
0.752 in
730.0 lb
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
172

Hanger B
Multiple Load Case
Design Option
Design Hanger Travel
Design Hanger Load
0.032 in
592.0 lb
0.733 in
587.0 lb
10
0.032 in
592.0 lb
11
0.733 in
587.0 lb
12
0.3825 in
589.5 lb
13
0.733 in
592.0 lb
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Free Restraint at Node

Specifies the node number for the equipment where the restraint is freed. You can also
specify the corresponding free code to tell CAESAR II which of the restraint or anchor
directions to free. For nozzles that are further removed from the hanger usually only the Y
direction should be freed. Anchors or restraints simulating equipment connections that are in
the immediate vicinity of the hanger are usually freed during the hanger design restrained
weight run so that loads normally going to the equipment nozzle are carried by the hanger.
Hangers are commonly used around equipment nozzles to support the weight of the pipe as
it thermally expands away from the nozzle. The hanger can usually be designed to take
almost the full weight of the pipe between the anchor and the hanger if the anchor is freed
when making the restrained weight calculation. The pipe going to the anchor is treated just
like a free end, but only for the hanger weight calculation only.
The Free Restraint at Node box works in conjunction with the Free Code box. If the Free
Code is not specified for an anchor, then the software assumes that the anchor is
completely free for the restrained weight run.
The restrained Weight hanger design pass is the first analysis step in the hanger design. It
173

is run automatically by CAESAR II. The following steps comprise the restrained weight run:
1. Putting rigid Y restraints at each hanger location.
2. Removing anchors and restraints that are to be freed.
3. Running the weight analysis to find the hot hanger loads.
Nonlinear restraints are not freed during hanger design.
Free Code
Specifies the directions in which the anchor or restraint is released. When an anchor or
restraint should be released for the restrained weight run, type the node number for that
anchor in the Free Restraint at Node box and specify the free code describing the
directions to be released in the Free Code box on the same hanger dialog box. The
available free codes are as follows:
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y direction only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and X directions only.
Free the anchor or restraint in the Y and Z directions only.
Free all translational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint. (X,Y, and Z)
Free all translational and rotational degrees of freedom for the anchor or restraint.
(X, Y, Z, RX, RY, and RZ)
The last option usually results in the highest adjacent hanger loads, but you should only use
that option when the horizontal distance between the hanger and the anchor is within about
4 pipe diameters.
Predefined Hanger Data

Specifies predefined hanger data. When you use the Predefined Hanger Data section on
the hanger dialog box and there is more than one hanger at the location, use the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section to specify the number of hangers.
Then, type the spring rate and pre-load applicable to a single hanger. There is no reason to
try to compute the equivalent spring rates or theoretical loads.
Pre-defined hanger data can be specified in one of two ways:
Specify all information for the hanger.
Specify only the spring rate for the hanger.
If you specify all of the information, and the restraint configuration for the node is completely
defined, then it is not included in the hanger design algorithm.
For a position to be completely pre-defined, one of the following conditions must apply:
Spring rate and theoretical cold load
Constant effort support load
174

Spring Rate
Specifies the spring rate.
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load

Specifies the cold load for the hanger. If you type both the spring rate and the cold load, the
hanger location is completely predefined and CAESAR II does not perform analysis level
design for the hanger.
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring Hangers

If only the spring rate is given, CAESAR II assumes that you want to rerate the spring at the
given location. The software reads the old spring rate from the existing hanger and inputs it
directly to CAESAR II. Leave the Theoretical Cold Load box blank for the rerate. If more
than a single spring exists at the location, then type the total number of springs in the No. of
Hangers at Location box in the Design Data section. CAESAR II assumes that the load is
distributed evenly among multiple springs at the same point.
CAESAR II goes through its normal hanger design procedure to calculate the load and
travel for all proposed hanger locations including the location with springs to be reset. The
stiffness of the reset springs is not used for this redesign. After CAESAR II sizes the springs,
it makes a comparison with the user-defined spring rates. If the selected spring rate is within
5% of your existing spring rate, CAESAR II lists the spring's figure number and size in the
output report. If the selected spring rate is more than 5% of your value, no manufacturer's
data is listed. In either case, CAESAR II uses the spring rate that you typed in all following
analyses. It is up to you to confirm that the new hot and cold loads are within the existing
spring's working range.
The primary use of the rerate capability is to find new installed loads for old springs. Springs
might be rerated after the shutdown of a unit that has been operating continuously for a long
period, or after mechanical or process changes are made to a piping system.
Constant Effort Support Load

Specifies the support load for the constant effort hanger.
Nozzles
Indicates that you are supplying nozzle data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Nozzle Flex on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls options for flexible nozzle connections. When you type
values in this dialog box tab, CAESAR II automatically calculates the flexibilities and adds them
to the active element. CAESAR II calculates nozzle loads according to WRC 297, API 650 or BS
5500 criteria.
175
WRC 297
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to WRC 297.
When you type a nozzle node number, CAESAR II scans the current input data for the node and
fills the corresponding diameter and wall thickness in the Nozzle Outer Diameter and Nozzle
Wall Thickness boxes.
Current nozzle flexibility calculations are in accordance with the Welding Research Council
Bulletin No. 297, issued August 1984 for cylinder-to-cylinder intersections.
A valid nozzle node has the following properties:
Only a single element connects to the nozzle node.
The nozzle node is not restrained and does not have displacements specified for any of its
degrees of freedom.
Computed nozzle flexibilities are automatically included in the piping system analysis through
software-generated restraints. This generation is completely automatic. Six restraints are
established for each flexible nozzle input.
176

If you define a vessel node number, then the vessel node acts like a connecting node for each
of the six restraints. Vessel nodes are subject to the same restrictions shown above for nozzle
nodes.
You should not put a restrainer on an element between the nozzle node and any
specified vessel node. CAESAR II creates the required connectivity from the nozzle flexibility
data and any user-generated stiffnesses between these two points erroneously add to the
nozzle stiffnesses.
After the error checking, CAESAR II displays all useful WRC curve data on the Errors and
Warnings dialog box. You can use these values to define the illustrated nozzles in the WRC
297 bulletin. It is sometimes helpful to know just how close a particular nozzle is to one of the
several asymptotic limits, or to a curve boundary.
You can see the WRC 297 computed data only during the error checking process.
177

Nozzle Node
Specifies the node number located at the nozzle intersection with the vessel shell. There
should only be a single piping element connected to this node. There should be no restraints
acting on the node. The nozzle element must be perpendicular to the vessel shell.
You can model hillside nozzles and latrolets. To do this, the first (and possibly very short)
nozzle element that comes from the vessel must be perpendicular to the vessel to keep the
local stiffness properly oriented. The second, longer nozzle element can then go off on the
true centerline of the nozzle.
Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects
the vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then
the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel
nodes when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
Nozzle Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using
the corresponding pipe diameter. You can override this value because it does not have to be
equal to the diameter of the pipe used to model the nozzle.
Nozzle Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to
be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.
178

Vessel Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.
Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from
the previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>

If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)

Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.
179

Vessel Material (Optional)
Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can
be any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number
are left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
API 650
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to API 650.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix P of API 650, "Design of
Carbon Steel Atmospheric Oil Storage Tanks."
180

Nozzle Node
Tank Node (optional)

Specifies the node number on the tank surface at the point where the nozzle intersects the
tank shell.
This is optional. If you do not specify one, then the nozzle node is connected by the
stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you type this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to the tank node.
Specify the tank node when you want to model through the tank from the nozzle connection
to the foundation.


Specifies the wall thickness of the nozzle. CAESAR II fills this field automatically using the
corresponding pipe wall thickness. You can override this value because it does not have to
be equal to the wall thickness of the pipe element used to model the nozzle.
Tank Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the storage tank. API 650 Addendum 1 does not
recommend these computations for diameters less than 120 feet.
181

Tank Wall Thickness
Specifies the wall thickness of the storage tank at the point where the nozzle connects to the
tank. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2)

Specifies whether the reinforcing is on the shell or on the nozzle. If the reinforcing is on the
shell, then type 1. If it is on the nozzle, type 2.
Nozzle Height
Specifies the height from the centerline of the nozzle to the base of the tank.
Fluid Height
Specifies the liquid level of the fluid in the storage tank. This value must be greater than the
nozzle height.
Fluid SG
Specifies the specific gravity of the stored liquid. This value is unitless.
Tank Coefficient of Thermal Expansion

Specifies the coefficient of thermal expansion of the plate material of the tank. Values are
listed in engineering handbooks or the appropriate section of the API 650, App P. If this
value is left blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
Temperature Change
Specifies the change in temperature from ambient to the maximum that the tank normally
experiences. For example, if the maximum summertime temperature is 107F, then the
temperature change would be 107 70 = 37, where 70 is the default ambient temperature
defined in configuration and environment. You would type 37 in this box. If this value is left
blank, the software assumes a value of zero.
182

Tank Modulus of Elasticity
Specifies the hot modulus-of-elasticity for the tank. If this value is left blank, the software
assumes a value of 0.2950E+08.
Set Displacement Vector

Specifies the displacement vector to assign to the calculated displacements. If you select
one among D1 to D9, the calculated displacements become the boundary conditions of the
current job, and CAESAR II can use them for the stress analysis. If you have already
specified displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II uses the
calculated displacements to replace the original displacements. If you select None,
CAESAR II does not use the calculated displacements for the stress analysis.
PD 5500
Performs nozzle flexibility calculations according to PD 5500.
CAESAR II can also calculate nozzle flexibilities according to Appendix G of the PD 5500
Specification for Unfired Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels.
183

Nozzle Node
Vessel Node (Optional)

Specifies the node number on the vessel surface at the point where the nozzle intersects
the vessel shell. This is optional. If you do not specify this value, then the nozzle node is
connected by the stiffnesses to a point fixed rigidly in space. If you specify this value, then
the nozzle node is connected by the stiffnesses to the vessel node. Specify the vessel
nodes when you want to model through the vessel from the nozzle connection to the skirt or
foundation.
Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or Sphere (1)

Indicates whether the vessel is cylindrical or spherical.
Type 0 if the vessel is cylindrical. For cylinders, the distances to stiffeners or heads and the
vessel direction cosines are required.
Type 1 if the vessel is spherical. For spheres, the boxes for the distances to stiffeners or
heads and vessel direction cosines are ignored.

Vessel Outer Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the vessel.
184

Specifies the wall thickness of the vessel at the point where the nozzle connects to the
vessel. Do not include the thickness of any reinforcing pad.
Vessel Pad Thickness

Specifies the thickness of any reinforcing pad at the nozzle. This thickness is added to the
vessel wall thickness before the software performs nozzle stiffness calculations.
Distance to Stiffener or Head

Specifies the distance along the vessel center-line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel that significantly stiffens the
vessel's cross-section against local deformation normal to the shell surface.
Distance to Opposite Stiffener

Specifies the distance along the vessel center line from the center of the nozzle opening in
the vessel shell to the closest stiffener or head in the vessel in the opposite direction from
the previous one. This entry is ignored for spherical vessels.
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY, VZ

Specifies the direction vector or direction cosines which defines the center-line of the vessel.
For example, a vertical vessel in a Y-up coordinate system, these entries would read:
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX - <blank>
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VY - 1.0
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VZ - <blank>

If the centerlines of the nozzle and vessel are collinear, CAESAR II flags this as an
error.
Vessel Temperature (Optional)
Specifies the estimated temperature of the vessel or nozzle junction. If you type this value,
you must also type a valid vessel material number in the corresponding field. The software
uses the estimated temperature to calculate the hot modulus-of-elasticity.
185

Vessel Material (Optional)
Specifies the vessel material number. If you type this value, you must pair the vessel
material number with a valid vessel temperature. The allowed vessel material number can
be any valid material number from the material database. This value corresponds to the pipe
materials used in the dialog box. If the vessel temperature and the vessel material number
are left blank or zero, then the software uses an elastic modulus of 29.0E6 psi.
Displacements
Indicates that you are supplying displacement data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
Displacements on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab controls imposed displacements for up to two nodes for each
element. If a displacement value is entered for any vector, this direction is considered to be fixed
for any other nonspecified vectors.
Leaving a direction blank for all nine vectors models the system as free to move in that
direction. Specify 0.0 to indicate that the system is fully restrained in that direction.
186

Node
Specifies the node number where the displacement is defined. Do not place a restraint at
this node.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the six components of the displacements for a vector. You can type as many as
nine vectors, corresponding to nine operating temperatures. The six components of a vector
are for six degrees of freedom along global X, Y and Z directions. If you leave any field
blank, that degree of freedom is free.
If an imposed displacement is specified for a specific degree-of-freedom, then that

degree-of-freedom is considered restrained for all load cases whether or not they
contain that displacement set.
You can import displacements into the CAESAR II model from a file. For more
information, see Import/Export Displacements from File (on page 364).
Flange Checks
Indicates that you are supplying flange data to evaluate an in-line flange. Select or clear this
option by double-clicking the Flange check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
You can read the values for the Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G boxes from a file
if you select ASME - 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are
located in the ASME-2003.G text file in the system folder under the application data folder.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the flanges in a
model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the flanges in the
Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.
Flange evaluation can be performed for individual load cases and for ABS and MAX load
combination cases. For more information, see Combination Method (on page 550).
187

From, To, Both
Specifies whether the flange is on the From end, the To end, or both ends of the element.
Specifies whether to evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
or the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
Peq
Evaluate the flanges using the Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method.
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/()G2 + PD Pressure Rating
Where:
Peq = equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = axial force on flange
PD = design pressure
NC-3658.3
Evaluate the flanges using the ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3 method.
S = 36,000 * Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000) non-occasional load case
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000) occasional load case
Where (note that the constants 36,000 and 3125 should be 248.22 and 21.6 in standard SI
units):
S = flange stress
Mfs = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during a non-occasional load case
Mfd = bending or torsional moment (whichever is greater) acting on the flange,
developed during an occasional load case
Sy = yield strength of flange material at design temperature; (where Sy, given in psi,
shall not be taken as greater than 36,000 psi)
C = bolt circle diameter
Ab = total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = design pressure
188

Read from File
Displays the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. Click this button to read
Temperature-Pressure Rating data from a file (ASME and DIN flanges are shipped with
CAESAR II).
As an alternative to reading from a file, you can type the data directly into the table.
You can create your own data files by following the format described in the CAESAR II
documentation.
Values for both Flange Class/Grade and Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory.
Flange Class/Grade
Displays the flange class and material grade. Typically, flanges are identified by pressure
class and material grade, but you can type anything in this box. If the flange
Temperature-Pressure Rating data is read in from a file, then CAESAR II automatically
builds a flange name made up of the File Name, the Pressure Class, and the Material
Class.
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle

Displays the gasket diameter. Values for Gasket Diameter, G can be read from a file if you
select ASME 2003 from the Flange Pressure Ratings dialog box. The G values are in the
text file ASME-2003.G located in the system folder of your application data directory. This
box does double duty depending on which analysis technique is active.
Peq Method:
Specify the diameter at the location of the gasket load reaction. From ASME Section VIII,
Division 1, Appendix 2, (except as noted in sketch (1) of Fig 2-4), G is defined as (see Table
2-5.2):
when b0 is less than or equal to 1/4, G equals the mean diameter of the gasket
contact face
when b0 is greater than 1/4, G equals the outside diameter of the gasket contact
face less 2b.
When using the Peq method with the Stoomwezen Piping Code, use the bolt circle
diameter instead of the gasket load reaction diameter (see chapter D0701 of the Code
RToD). The results of this Peq Method are considered by Stoomwezen to be conservative.
NC-3658 Method:
Specify the bolt circle diameter. This value is the diameter of the circle that passes through
the bolt centers.
Flange evaluation is based on a specific load case temperature. To evaluate the
flanges in a model, specify the operating temperature at which the software evaluates the
flanges in the Flange Analysis Temperature box on the Load Cases tab of the Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor.
189
Temperature-Pressure Table
Specifies temperature and pressure values. Use this table to define the flange
Temperature-Pressure rating as a function of temperature for a particular material grade.
You can type up to 24 temperature-pressure pairs. These values must be typed in
ascending temperature order.
Bolt Area (Ab)

Specifies the total cross-sectional area of the bolts at the root of thread or the section of
least diameter under stress.
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9

Specifies the flange yield stress at the cold (ambient) temperature and at each of the
operating temperatures, for use in calculating the flange allowable stress.
Nozzle Lmt Check

Indicates that you are supplying equipment data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Nozzle Lmt Check check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Equipment nozzle evaluation is one of the most important tasks in analyzing a piping system.
The various nozzle loads, when subjected to the operating criteria of the piping system, must be
less than their associated allowable loads. Verification of the nozzle loads is a time consuming
task, which cannot be performed until the pipe stress requirements are met.
CAESAR II enables you to define overall nozzle limits. This permits CAESAR II to perform a first
pass screening. Actual detailed nozzle evaluation can then be focused on those nozzles that fail
this initial screening.
190

To illustrate this procedure, consider the limits defined for a nozzle displayed below:
The data above specifies the nozzle limits and how the resulting loads (from the analysis) are
compared to the limits. After the analysis has been performed and the results are available, you
can select the specific load case the nozzle must be evaluated against as well as the Nozzle
Check report. For more information on the Nozzle Check report see the Equipment Report.
Nozzle Limit Check is a first pass at qualifying the equipment nozzles. This is a simple
check based on the limits defined on this dialog box. This screening is not a substitute for the
more rigorous checks of the actual equipment standards.
191

Node
Specifies the node number representing the equipment nozzle to be checked. The node
should have a restraint or a displacement in the CAESAR II model, because this node
represents an equipment nozzle.
Comparison Method
Specifies the method used to compare the actual nozzle loads to the defined limits.
Available choices are:
Absolute - Each load is compared directly to the corresponding limit. That is, FX to
FX_allowable, FY to FY_allowable, and so on.
|Fa| |Fal|
|Fb| Fbl|
|Fc| |Fcl|
|Ma| |Mal|
|Mb| |Mbl|
|Mc| |Mcl|
SRSS - The square root sum of the squares (SRSS) of each load divided by the
corresponding allowable is compared to 1.0.
Forces
and
Moments
Unity Check - The sum of the three forces and three moments, each divided by
their respective allowables is compared to 1.0.
and
192

Ref Vector X, Y, Z
Specifies the three components or direction cosines of the reference vector. The reference
vector is used with the current element orientation to define the local coordinate system
ABC for this equipment check. See Axis B, in the Forces - Moments (on page 193) fields.
The vector must be perpendicular to the current pipe element. This vector need not be unity.
Examples:
( 0, 1, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "Y" direction
( 1, 0, 0 ) - the reference vector is in the global "X" direction
( 0.7071, 0, 0.7071 ) - the reference vector is skewed 45 degrees in the global X-Z
plane.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box. Select a file (some files are shipped with CAESAR II) and
read force and moment data into the Forces - Moments fields. Alternatively, you can enter
the data directly into the fields.
Forces - Moments
Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for
the load limits. The load limits are based on the local coordinate system ABC, where: axis A
is defined by the current element (From to To is positive), axis B is defined by the reference
vector, and axis C is the cross product of A and B (the right hand rule). For more information
on the use of these limits (Fal, Fbl, Fcl, Mal, Mbl, Mcl), see Comparison Method (on page
192).
A - Pipe/nozzle axis
B - Major equipment axis (the longitudinal direction of a vessel, or the pump shaft
direction.)
C - Other perpendicular direction.
Loading Conditions
The check boxes in this block allow you to define loadings acting on the pipe. These loads may
be individual forces or moments acting at discrete points, distributed uniform loads (which can
be specified on force per unit length, or gravitational body forces), or wind loadings (wind
loadings are entered by specifying a wind shape factorthe loads themselves are specified
when building the load cases. The uniform load and the wind shape factor check boxes are
unchecked on subsequent input screens. This does not mean that the loads were removed from
these elements; instead, this implies that the loads do not change on subsequent screens.
You can specify uniform loads in g-values by setting a parameter in the Special
Execution Options. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).
193
Forces/Moments
Indicates that you are supplying force and moment data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Forces/Moments check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls imposed forces or moments for up to two nodes per
element. You can use up to nine force vectors.
Node
Specifies the node number where the forces and moments act.
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9

Specifies the three components of the force and the three components of the moment for a
vector. You can type as many as nine vectors. The components of the force and the
moment are along the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Uniform Loads
Indicates that you are supplying uniform load data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking
the Uniform Loads check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary database tab controls up to three uniform load vectors. These uniform loads are
applied to the entire current element, as well as all subsequent elements in the model, until
explicitly changed or zeroed out.
194
The uniform load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
Assuming uniform loading in F/L, a snow load of 8.0 pounds per foot (assuming units of pounds
per inch in a Y-up coordinate system) could be specified as follows:
Vector 1
Vector 2
Vector 3
Vector 2
Vector 3
X
Y
-8/12
Z
or may be specified:
Vector 1
X
Y
-.6667
Z
Assuming uniform load in Gs, your entries of X = 1.0, Y = 0.0, Z = 0.0 represent a 1.0g load on
the piping system in the horizontal X direction. Your entries of X = 0.0, Y = -1.0, Z = 0.0
represent a 1.0g load in the minus Y direction, and is exactly equal to the pipe weight load in
Y-up coordinate system.
Uniform load in Gs is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
You can activate uniform loads in Gs by selecting the Uniform load in Gs check box
using the Environment > Special Execution Parameters command on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
195

Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3
Specifies the three components of the uniform load for a vector. You can type as many as
three vectors. The components of the uniform load are along the global X, Y, and Z
directions. The uniform load is either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a
magnifier of gravitational loading (G).
in G's, in F/L
Indicates the unit of the uniform load.
Wind / Wave Loads

Indicates that you are supplying environmental load data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Wind/Wave check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab indicates whether this portion of the pipe is exposed to wind or
wave loading. The pipe cannot be exposed to both.
Selecting Wind exposes the pipe to wind loading; selecting Wave exposes the pipe to wave,
current, and buoyancy loadings; selecting Off turns off both types of loading.
This dialog box tab is also used to specify the Wind Shape Factor when Wind is specified. The
dialog box tab is used to specify various wave coefficients when Wave is specified. The
software automatically computes the wave coefficients if you leave these boxes blank.
Entries on this auxiliary dialog box tab apply to all subsequent piping, until changed on a later
element.
Specific wind and wave load cases are built using the Static Load Case Editor.
196

Wind Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wind load data.
Wind load data is distributive and applies to the current and all following elements until you
change it.
Wind Shape Factor

Specifies the coefficient as defined in ASCE 7 in Figure 6-21 for chimneys, tanks, and
similar structure. A value of 0.5 to 0.65 is typically used for cylindrical sections. Activating
the wind option activates the Wind Load Input tab, which is accessed from the Load Case
Editor during static analysis.
Refer to the respective wind code standard for the applicable wind shape factor,
specific to that code.
197

Wave Loads
Indicates that you are supplying wave load data.
Wave load data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you change
it.
Drag Coefficient, Cd
Specifies the drag coefficient as recommended by API RP2A. Typical values range from 0.6
to 1.20. Type 0.0 to calculate the drag coefficient based on particle velocities.
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca
Specifies the added mass coefficient. This coefficient accounts for the added mass of fluid
entrained into the pipe. Typical values range from 0.5 to 1.0. Type 0.0 to calculate the added
mass coefficient based on particle velocities.
Lift Coefficient, Cl
Specifies the lift coefficient. This coefficient accounts for wave lift which is the force
perpendicular to both the element axis and the particle velocity vector. Type a value of 0.0 to
calculate the added lift coefficient based on particle velocities.
Marine Growth
Specifies the thickness of any marine growth adhering to the external pipe wall. The
software increases the pipe diameter experiencing wave loading by twice this value.
Marine Growth Density

Specifies the density used if you are including the weight of the marine growth in the pipe
198

weight. If you leave this box blank, the software ignores the weight of the marine growth.
Off
Indicates that you do not want wind or wave loads on the current element and all following
elements until you change it.
Materials
CAESAR II requires the specification of the pipe materials elastic modulus, Poissons ratio,
density, and (in most cases) expansion coefficient. The software provides a database containing
the parameters for many common piping materials. This information is retrieved by picking a
material from the list, by typing the material number, or by typing the entire material name and
then picking it from the match list.
The coefficient of expansion does not appear on the dialog box, but you can review it during
error checking.
These material properties carry forward from one element to the next during the design session
so you only need to type values for those elements in which a change occurs.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Materials dialog box.
Material
Displays the material name. Materials are specified either by name or number. All available
material names and their CAESAR II material numbers are displayed in the list. Because
this list is quite long, typing a partial material name (such as A106) allows you to select from
matching materials.
Numbers 1-17 corresponds to the generic materials without code allowable

stresses.
Material 18 represents the cold spring element for cut short.
Material 19 represents the cold spring element for cut long.
199
Material 20 is used to define Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe.
Material 21 is for user-defined material.
When you select a material from the database, the physical properties as well as the
allowable stresses are obtained and placed in the dialog box.
If you change the temperature or piping code later, these allowable stress values are
automatically updated.
For user-defined material, type the corresponding properties.
Allowable Stress
Indicates that you are supplying allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by
double-clicking the Allowable Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
This auxiliary dialog box tab is used to select the piping code and to enter any data required
for the code check. Allowable stresses are automatically updated for material, temperature
and code if available in the Material Database.
The Allowable Stress Auxiliary changes according to the piping code. It incorporates
piping codes with their associated inputs. Press F1 to display the help screen to be sure that
you correctly interpret each new input data cell.
200

Allowable stress data is distributive and applies to current and all following elements
until you change it.
Click Fatigue Curves to specify material fatigue curve data. The Material Fatigue Curve
dialog box displays. Type stress versus cycle data with up to 8 points per curve.
Code
Specifies the piping code. CAESAR II uses B31.3 by default. You can change this default
setting in the configuration. The following table lists the piping codes. You can find their
current publication dates in the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide.
B31.1
Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 1)
B31.3
Swedish Power Piping Code (Method 2)
B31.4
B31.1 - 1967
B31.4, Chapter IX
Stoomwezen
B31.5
RCC-M C
B31.8
RCC-M D
B31.8, Chapter VIII
CODETI
B31.9
B31.11
Norwegian TBK-6
GPTC/Z380
ASME Sect III NC (Class 2) FDBR

ASME Sect III ND (Class 3) BS 7159
Navy 505
UKOOA
CAN/CSA Z662
IGE/TD/12
CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter

11
DNV
BS 806
ISO 14692
EN-13480
PD 8010-1
HPGSL
PD 8010-2
JPI
The following topics discuss each of the input data cells. For more information about code
compliance considerations, see Technical Discussions (on page 879).
201
SC
Specifies the cold stress value. Typically, this is the cold allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills this box automatically
after you select the material and piping code. The value of SC is usually divided by the
longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff) before being used. See the notes that follow for the specific
piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress tables in Appendix A include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies
where applicable. Do not use these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If the joint
efficiency (Eff) is given on this dialog box, then CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint
efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations.
B31.3 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The Eff value
should be zero, blank, or one. The 1980 version of B31.3 included the longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies as part of the tables in Appendix A. If you are using this version of the code,
then you should type a value for Eff in the appropriate box on this dialog box.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Not used. The only stress value in B31.4 is the yield stress taken
from Table 1 in the appendix. For more information, see Sy (on page 209).
B31.5 - Values from tables in Appendix A do not include the joint efficiency. The value of Eff
should be zero, blank, or one.
B31.8 - Su, the specified minimum ultimate tensile strength.
B31.8 Chapter VIII - Not used. The only stress value in B31.8 is the yield stress taken from
Appendix D. For more information, see Sy (on page 209).
B31.9 - SC is taken directly from I-1. If you define a value for Eff, the software only uses it in
the minimum wall thickness check.
B31.11 - Not used. The only stress value used in B31.11 is the yield stress.
ASME NC and ND - SC is taken directly from Appendix I. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Navy 505 - There is no mention of joint efficiency in the 505 specification; however, it is
implied in Footnote 1 of Table TIIA. If a joint efficiency is given, then CAESAR II divides SC
by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress equations. Eff should be zero,
blank, or one.
CAN Z662 - Not used. The only stress value in Z184 is the yield stress specified in the
standards or specification under which the pipe was purchased. For more information, see
Sy (on page 209).
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at room temperature from Appendix E. Eff is not used in
BS 806. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Method 1 only uses the yield or creep rupture stress at
temperature (SHn and Fn respectively on this dialog box). Eff is used, but is the
circumferential weld joint efficiency and has a different meaning.
Swedish Method 2 - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from Appendix 2. Eff is
not used. If you define a value for Eff, the software ignores it.
B31.1 (1967) - SC is the allowable stress at room temperature from the tables in Appendix
A. These tables include the longitudinal weld joint efficiencies where applicable. Do not use
these efficiencies for flexibility stress calculations. If you define a value for Eff, then
202

CAESAR II divides the SC by the joint efficiency before using it in the allowable stress
equations.
Stoomwezen (1989) - SC is the yield stress at room temperature. This value is referred to
as Re in the code.
RCC-M C, D - SC is taken from the Appendix. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff,
the software ignores it.
CODETI - This is famb from the code. Eff is not used. If you define a value for Eff, the
software ignores it.
Norwegian - This is f1 from the code. Eff is not used for longitudinal joint efficiency.
BS 7159 - Not used. Design stress is typed in the SH boxes.
UKOO - Not used. Design stress (in the hoop direction) is typed in the SH boxes.
IGE/TD/1 - Not used.
DN - Not used.
EN-13480 - SC is the basic allowable stress at minimum metal temperature as defined in
Section 12.1.3.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD 8010-1 - Not used.
PD 8010-2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SC is used in a different way. See reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SH1, SH2, ... SH9

Specifies the hot stresses. Typically, these are the hot allowable stress for the specific
material taken directly from the governing piping code. CAESAR II fills the boxes
automatically after you select the material and piping code. There are nine boxes
corresponding to the nine operating temperatures. You must type a value for each defined
temperature case. The value of SH is usually divided by the longitudinal weld efficiency (Eff)
before being used. See the recommendations that follow for the specific piping code.
B31.1 - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page 202).
B31.4 - B31.4 Chapter IX. SH is not used.
B31.8 - Temperature derating factor, T, according to Table 841.116A.
B31.8, Chapter VIII - Temperature derating factor, T (according to Table 841.116A).
B31.9 - Allowable stress from Table I-1. For more information, see SC (on page 202).
B31.11 - Not used.
ASME NC and ND - Allowable stress from Appendix I.
Navy 505 - Allowable stress from Table XIIA. For more information, see SC (on page 202).
203

CAN Z662 - Not used.
BS 806 - 0.2% of the proof stress at design temperature Appendix E. Eff is not used.
Swedish Method 1 - Yield stress at temperature from Appendix 1.
Swedish Method 2 - Allowable stress at temperature from Appendix 2.
B31.1 (1967) - Allowable stress from Appendix A. For more information, see SC (on page
202).
Stoomwezen - Yield stress at design temperature. This value is referred to as Re (vm) in
the code.
RCC-M C, D - Taken from the Appendix.
CODETI - f from the code.
Norwegian - f2 from the code.
FDBR - Hot allowable defined in Section 3.2.
BS 7159 - Design stress sd in the longitudinal direction as defined in Section 4.3 of the
code. That is d =d * Elamx . Specify design stress in the circumferential (hoop) direction by
typing the ratio of the circumferential design stress to the axial design stress in the Eff box.
Because design strain should be the same for both directions, the value in the Eff box is
also the ratio of Elam f(hoop) to Elam x (longitudinal).
UKOOA - Allowable design stress in the hoop direction defined in the code as f1 * LTHS.
The three hot allowable stress boxes correspond to the three possible temperature cases.
DNV - Yield stress is used here instead of hot allowable stress.
IGE/TD/12 - Yield stress is used here instead of a hot allowable stress.
EN-13480 - Allowable stress at maximum metal temperature.
GPTC/Z380 - Temperature reduction factor T according to Par. 192.115.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 - SH is used in a different way. See the reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SY1, SY2, ... SY9

Specifies the yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at the design temperature. This option
only displays when you select JPL or HPGSL in the Codes list.
This is Syt, the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at
maximum temperature.
If you do not type a value, the software takes the value from the Material Database if
that value is available and applicable.
204

UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength at the design temperature.
F1, F2, ... F9

Specifies the stress range reduction factor for most piping codes.
B31.1 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c. Consult the applicable
piping code for methods of combining cycle life data where several thermal states exist and
where the number of thermal cycles is high. The software assumes a value of one if you do
not type a value.
B31.3 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from equation 1c corresponding to Fig
302.3.5. If certain criteria are met, then the stress range reduction factor is allowed to
exceed 1.0. The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.3. This allows
CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to equation 1c.
B31.4 - Not used.
B31.8 - Stress range reduction factor is obtained from the equation given in Section
833.8(b). The number of cycles can be specified in this box for B31.8 which allows CAESAR
II to compute the cyclic reduction factor according to this equation.
B31.8 CHAPTER VIII - Not used.
B31.9 - References B31.1 for detailed stress analysis. For more information, see Paragraph
919.4.1.b.
CODETI - Called U in the code.
NORWEGIAN - Called fr in the code. This value can be as high as 2.34.
DNV - Material ultimate tensile strength at temperature.
CAN Z662
F1 = L - the location factor is obtained from Table 4.2

Application
CLASS 1
CLASS 2
CLASS 3
CLASS 4
General & Cased crossings
1.000
0.900
0.700
0.550
Roads
0.750
0.625
0.625
0.500
Railways
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.500
Stations
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.500
Other
0.750
0.750
0.625
0.500
Gas (non-sour)
Gas (sour service)
205

0.900
0.750
0.625
0.500
Roads
0.750
0.625
0.625
0.500
Railways
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.500
Stations
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.500
Other
0.750
0.750
0.625
0.500
1.000
0.800
0.800
0.800
Roads
0.800
0.800
0.800
0.800
Railways
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.625
Stations
0.800
0.800
0.800
0.800
Other
0.800
0.800
0.800
0.800
Uncased railway crossings
0.625
0.625
0.625
0.625
All others
1.000
1.000
1.000
1.000
HVP
LVP
Class 1 - Location areas containing ten or fewer dwelling units intended for human
occupancy
Class 2 - Location areas containing 11 to 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR
buildings with more than 20 persons
outside areas with more than 20 persons
industrial installations
Class 3 - Location areas with more than 46 dwelling units intended for human occupancy
OR institutions where rapid evacuation may be difficult
Class 4 - Location areas where buildings intended for human occupancy have 4 or more
stories.
206

F2 = T - The temperature derating factor, is obtained from Table 4.4
Temperature
Derating Factor T
up to 120 (C)
1.00
150
0.97
180
0.93
200
0.91
230
0.87
F3 - F9 - Not used.
CAN Z662 Chapter 11
F1 - Not used.
F2 = T - Temperature derating factor obtained from Table 4.4
F3 = - Design factor for Condition A from Table 11.1.
F4 = - Design factor for Condition B from Table 11.1.
F5 - F9 - Not used.
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure in design life at design temperature. F1, F2, ... F9. This
value corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
FDBR - Identical to B31.1,unless you type the expansion coefficients directly instead of
temperatures. In that case, the software cannot determine Ehot. In this case, type a value of
1.0 in the FAC box and use these boxes to specify the product of f * Ehot / Ecold for each
temperature case.
SWEDISH METHOD 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature. F1, F2 ... F9. This value
corresponds to the nine possible thermal states.
STOOMWEZEN - Creep related material properties as follows:
F1 = Rrg - Average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
at temperature (vm).
F2 = Rmg - Average creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at
temperature (vm).
F3 = Rmmin - Minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours
BS 7159 - Fatigue factor Kn. This value is used inversely compared to other codes so that
its value is greater than 1.0. Kn is calculated as follows:
Kn = 1 + 0.25(As/sn) (log10(n) - 3)
Where:
As = stress range during fatigue cycle
n = Maximum stress during fatigue cycle
n = number of stress cycles during design life
207

UKOOA - Ratio r from the material UKOOA idealized allowable stress envelope. This ratio
is defined as sa(0:1)/sa(2:1) as shown on the figure below. One value should be given for
each of the operating temperature cases.
IGE/TD/12 - UTS value.
EN-13480 - Stress range reduction factor taken from Table 12.1.3-1 (which matches the
B31.1 table above), or computed from equation 12.1.3-4. You can specify the number of
cycles in this box for EN-13480. This allows CAESAR II to compute the cyclic reduction
factor according to equation 12.1.3-4.
GPTC/Z380 - Not used.
PD-8010 (Part 1 & Part 2) - Not used.
ISO 14692 F is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
JPI - Stress range reduction factor at design temperature.
Eff
Specifies the longitudinal weld joint efficiency. The field changes according to the current
piping code.
B31.1, B31.1-1967, B31.5 - Allowable stress tables include longitudinal weld joint
efficiencies where applicable. If Eff is specified, then values for SC and SH are divided by
Eff before they are used in the flexibility calculations. Eff is ignored in the minimum wall
calculation.
B31.3, B31.4, B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII, B31.9, B31.11, NAVY 505, Z662 (J), BS 806 (e),
CODETI (z), FDBR (vl), GPTC/Z380 - Allowable stress or yield stress tables do not include
longitudinal weld joint efficiencies. Eff is ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is
multiplied by Eff when calculating the minimum wall thickness.
B31.4 Chapter IX, ASME NC, ASME ND, RCCM-C, RCCM-D - Ignored for both flexibility
and minimum wall thickness calculations. The box is disabled for these codes.
Swedish Method 1, Swedish Method 2, Norwegian TBK 5-6 - Circumferential joint factor
z and is used in the calculation of the code stresses rather than in the calculation of the
allowables. This applies to both flexibility or minimum wall thickness.
Stoomwezen - Cyclic reduction factor referred to as Cf in the code. CAESAR II does not
consider weld joint efficiency for this code.
BS 7159 - Ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity Eh/Ea. The software
uses a default value of 1.0, as though the material is isotropic if you leave this box blank.
UKOOA - Replace this box with f2. This is the system design factor. The value is typically
0.67.
IGE/TD/12 - Replace this box with Dfac. This is the system design factor (f) as described in
Table 2 of the IFE/TD/12 code. The value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
DNV - Replaces this box with usage factor Ns (pressure yielding) from Tables C1 or C2.
The value must be between 0.77 and 0.96.
EN-13480 - Ignored for the flexibility calculations. SH is multiplied by Eff when calculating
the minimum wall thickness.
208

PD-8010 Part 1 - Weld joint factor used in determining the allowable hoop stress. See
Section 6.4.3.1 for details.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 Eff is used in different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
JPI - Longitudinal weld joint efficiency.
Sy
Specifies the yield stress. CAESAR II fills the box automatically after you select the material
and piping code. The field changes according to the current piping code, and is generally
used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
B31.4, B31.4 Chapter IX - Used for the allowable stress determination.
B31.5 - Used to satisfy the requirements of Paragraph 523.2.2.f.4. This paragraph
addresses ferrous materials in piping systems between -20F and -150F. The value typed
here should be the quantity (40% of the allowable) as detailed in the Code. When Sy is
defined, the OPE case is considered a stress case. This value is the allowable reported in
the output report. The computed operating stress includes all longitudinal components and
ignore torsion.
B31.8, B31.8 Chapter VIII - Specified minimum yield stress.
B31.11 - Specified minimum yield stress.
ASME Sect III Class 2 and 3 - Basic Material Yield Strength at design temperature for use
in Eqn. 9 for consideration of Level A and B service limits. Level C and Level D service limits
must be satisfied in separate runs by adjusting the value for the occasional factor in the
CAESAR II configuration file. If the occasional factor is set to 1.2, the allowable stress is the
minimum of 1.2 x 1.5 SH or 1.5 SY. If the factor is 1.5, the allowable is the minimum of 1.5 x
1.5 SH or 1.8 SY. If the factor is 2.0, the allowable is the minimum of 2.0 x 1.5 S H or 2.0 SY.
To satisfy the code, replace S H with SM for the latter two.
Navy 505 - Not used.
CAN Z662 - Minimum yield strength taken from the standards or specifications under which
the pipe was purchased or according to clause 4.3.3.
BS 806 - Sustained stress limit. The lower of 0.8 X 0.2% Proof stress value or the creep
rupture design stress value defined in Appendix A under cold, or any other, operating
condition. See 17.2(c)
Swedish Method 1 - Not used. Type the yield stress at temperature in the respective SHn
boxes for the up to nine possible thermal states.
Swedish Method 2 - Ultimate tensile strength at room temperature.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Stoomwezen (1989) - Tensile strength at room temperature. This value is referred to as Rm
in the code.
209

RCC-M C, D - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
CODETI - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
Norwegian - Allowable stress at 7000 load cycles, RS, from Code Table 10.2. If you do not
type a value, then this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
BS 7159 - Not used.
UKOOA - Not used.
IGE/TD/12 - Minimum yield stress (SMYS).
DnV - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
EN-13480 - Used only for the hydrotest allowable.
GPTC/Z380 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Minimum yield stress.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Minimum yield stress.
ISO-14692 - Sy is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
SYa
Specifies the specified minimum yield or stated proof stress of the pipe material at room
temperature. This is also referred to as SMYS or SY.
SY (c)
Specifies the minimum yield point or 0.2% endurance strength at room temperature.
Ksd
Material shakedown factor described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Typical values are:
Carbon Steel: 1.8
Austenitic Steel: 2.0
UTSa
Specifies the ultimate tensile strength of the pipe material corresponding to the specified
ambient temperature.
210

UTS (c)
Specifies the minimum tensile strength at room temperature.
DFac
Specifies the system design factor (f) as described in Table 2 of the IGE/TD/12 code. Its
value must be 0.3, 0.5, and 0.67.
Fac
Specifies the multiplication factor. The field changes according to the current piping code,
and is generally used for the transmission and non-US piping codes.
B31.1 - Not used.
B31.3 - Not used.
B31.4 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
The equation for pipe under complete axial restraint is:
Stress = (Fac) x abs[ E(T2-T1) + (1-) Shoop ] + (SE + SL)(1-Fac)
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= thermal expansion coefficient per degree
T2 = operating temperature
T1 = ambient temperature
= Poisson's ratio
Shoop = hoop stress in the pipe.
SE = expansion stress due to bending
SL = sustained stress due to pressure.
Fac should be 1.0, 0.0, or 0.001. This value should be one for pipe under complete axial
restraint. This value should be one when the pipe is fully restrained, such as buried for a
long distance. The default value for Fac is 0.0. When Fac is 0.001, this indicates to
CAESAR II that the pipe is buried but that the soil supports have been modeled. This
causes the hoop stress component, rather than the longitudinal stress, to be added to the
operating stresses if the axial stress is compressive.
B31.4 Chapter IX - F1, hoop stress design factor, according to Table A402.3.5(a) of B31.4.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.60 for platform piping and risers.
B31.5 - Not used.
B31.8 - Construction design factor from Table 841.114B.
Construction Type: (Descriptions are approx.)
Factor
A (CLASS 1) Wasteland, Deserts, Mountains, Grazing Land, Farmland,

Sparsely Populated Areas.
0.72
B (CLASS 2) Fringe Areas Around Cities, Industrial Areas, Ranch, or
0.60
211

Country Estates.
C (CLASS 3) Suburban Housing Developments, Shopping Centers,
Residential Areas.
0.50
D (CLASS 4) Multi-Story Buildings are prevalent, traffic is heavy, and

where there may be numerous other utilities underground.
0.40 (0.4 defaults if

left blank)
B31.8 Chapter VIII - F1, Hoop stress design factor, according to Table A842.22 of B31.8.
Appropriate values are 0.72 for pipelines or 0.50 for platform piping and risers.
B31.9 - Not used.
B31.11 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or unrestrained.
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= Poisson's ratio
ASME Sect III, Class 2 and 3 - Not used.
B31.1 (1967) - Not used.
Navy 505 - Not used
CAN Z662 - Indicates whether the pipe is restrained, such as long or buried, or
unrestrained.
Where:
E = elastic modulus
= Poisson's ratio
212

BS806 - Not used.
Swedish Power Code, Method 1 - Sigma(tn) multiplier. This value is usually 1.5. This value
should be 1.35 for prestressed (cold sprung) piping. The default value is 1.5.
Swedish Power Code, Method 2 - Not used.
Stoomwezen - Constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, see
Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
RCC-M C, D - Not used.
CODETI - Not used.
Norwegian - Material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature, RM. If this value is not
specified, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
FDBR - Overrides the ratio of Ehot/Ecold which is automatically determined by CAESAR II.
The modulus ratio is used to compute the expansion case allowable stress based on the
material and temperature. Normally, you can leave this box blank. However, if necessary,
you can type a value greater than zero and less than one to override the ratio calculated by
the software.
To use FBDR, type the hot modulus in the Elastic Modulus box of the dialog box. CAESAR
II looks up the cold modulus and computes this necessary ratio. Using the hot modulus in
the flexibility analysis is a deviation of FBDR from every other piping code in CAESAR II.
If you type expansion coefficients directly instead of temperatures, then the software cannot
determine Ecold. In this case, type a value of 1.0 in this cell and use the cyclic reduction
factor boxes to specify the product of (f * E hot /Ecold) for each temperature case.
BS 7159 - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined in Section 7.2.1 of the code.
This should be 0.85 for liquids, 0.8 for gases, and 1.0 for ambient temperature changes. If
left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
UKOOA - Mean temperature change multiplier k as defined for the BS 7159. If left blank,
this value defaults to 1.0.
IGE/TD/12 - Material shakedown factor Ksd described in Table 4 of the IGE/TD/12 code.
Typical values are 1.8 for carbon steel and 2.0 for austenitic steel..
HPGSL - Not used.
JPI - Not used.
DNV - Usage factor Nu (pressure bursting) from Tables C1or C2. Values must be between
0.64 and 0.84.
EN-13480 - Not used.
GPTC/Z380 - Construction design factor from Table 192.111.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Same usage as B31.4.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Not used.
ISO 14692 - Fac is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
213
Pvar
Specifies the pressure variance. The field changes according to the current piping code.
ASME and RCC-M C, D - Variance in the pressure between operating and peak to be used
as the component in equation 9 above that found from B1 * P * Do / 2tn. Do not type the
peak pressure for Pvar. Type the difference between the operating pressure and the peak
pressure.
Swedish Power Code, Methods 1 & 2 - Beta for the Seff calculation. If not given, this
value defaults to 10%. Type ten percent as 10.0. Values must be between 0.1 and 25.0.
Values specified outside of this range are automatically adjusted to the outer limit of the
allowed range. The definition for beta, as given in the Swedish piping code in section
5.6.2.1, is the "maximum allowable minus the tolerance as a percentage of the nominal wall
thickness".
Stoomwezen - Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Norwegian - Difference between design pressure P (in equation 10.7) and peak pressure
Pmaks (in equation 10.8).
The table that follows defines when each of these parameters is valid input for the piping
code (V) or not required (N).
DNV - Usage factor N for equivalent stress check from Table C4. Values must be between
0.77 and 1.00.
PD-8010 Part 1 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1.2. Typical limits on this value
are 0.3 and 0.72, depending on categories and class locations. This design factor
determines the allowable hoop stress. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 1.
PD-8010 Part 2 - Design factor as discussed in Section 6.4.1 Table 2. Type the value of fd
for the hoop stress evaluation. This value should be either 0.6 (riser/land fall) or 0.72
(seabed/tie-in). CAESAR II determines the appropriate fd values for the equivalent stress
from Table 2. This value has no units for PD-8010 Part 2.
This value is taken from the Material Database, if available and applicable, unless
you type a value.
ISO 14692 - Pvar is used in a different way. See the Reference for ISO 14692.
"f" Allowed Maximum of 1.2

Indicates whether to allow a maximum cyclic reduction factor. The 2004 edition of B31.3
permits the cyclic reduction factor (f) to exceed 1.0 under certain conditions. To allow "f" to
exceed 1.0, up to the limit of 1.2, click On. To prohibit "f" from exceeding 1.0, click Off.
This setting is distributive and applies to current and all following elements until you
change it.
214

Appendix P - OPE Allowable Reduction
Indicates whether the software reduces the Operating Range Allowable value by 15%.
Appendix P in the 2010 Edition of B31.3 requires a reduction of the Operating Range
Allowable value by 15% for materials with ratio of Sy/St > 0.8. The software selects this
check box by default for the B31.3 code. When selected, CAESAR II performs this
reduction, when applicable.
You must set the Implement Appendix P configuration setting to True for CAESAR
II to display this check box on the Allowable Stresses tab of the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can find this configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses > B31.3
Code-Specific Settings section of the Configuration Editor.
Restrained Piping per B31.8

Indicates whether or not the piping is restrained. With restrained piping, the soil or supports
prevent the pipe from axial displacement or flexure at bends. With unrestrained piping, the
piping is free to displace axially or to flex at bends.
B31.8 (2003) distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of
stress computations. When implementing the B31.8 piping code, you must define which
sections of the piping system are restrained according to Code Section 833.1.
If the pipe is restrained, click Yes. If the pipe is not restrained, click No.
See Section 833.1 in the B31.8 code standards for more information.
Fatigue Curves
Displays the Material Fatigue Curves dialog box.
215

Cycle Stress Table
Specifies cycle and stress values. Use the material fatigue curve data to evaluate fatigue
load cases and cumulative use scenarios. You can type up to eight cycle-stress pairs.
These values must be entered in ascending cycle order.
IGE/TD/12 provides the opportunity to type up to five fatigue curves, representing fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W. Fatigue evaluations are explicitly specified by IGE/TD/12.
CAESAR II offers them as extensions to other codes.
You must type cycle/stress pairs in ascending order (ascending by cycles). Type stress
values as the allowable stress range rather than allowable stress amplitude. The software
considers fatigue curves to be specified using a logarithmic interpolation.
Static fatigue cases are evaluated against the full range of the fatigue curve, while
dynamic fatigue cases are assumed to represent amplitudes, and are therefore evaluated
against half of the range of the fatigue curve.
Read from File

Displays the Open dialog box so that you can select a file (some files are shipped with
CAESAR II) and read cycles and stress data into the Cycles and Stress boxes.
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at

temperatures lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
TD/12 Modulus Correction

IGE/TD/12 Section A5.6 requires that the allowable fatigue stress (as specified in the fatigue
curves) be adjusted by the ratio of the material modulus-of-elasticity divided by 209103
N/mm2. This divisor can be adjusted if necessary by changing the entry in the Modulus
Correction box.
Allowable Stress (ISO 14692)

Activates allowable stress data. Select or clear this option by double-clicking the Allowable
Stress check box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. When you select material 20 for
FRP (Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic) and piping code ISO 14692, the Allowable Stress
auxiliary dialog box changes.
216
al(0:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 0:1 stress ratio. Typically, the axial stress (hoop stress
is 0 at this point) is lower than the axial stress al(2:1) (hoop stress is double the axial stress
at this point). The ratio of these stresses, called bi-axial stress ratio, can range between 0.5
and 0.75 for plain pipe depending on the winding angle and specific pipe type.
al(1:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962,, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio, that is hl(1:1)=al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows you to type different values for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a
generalized failure profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error
Checker.
If you leave both the al(1:1) and hl(1:1) boxes blank, CAESAR II assumes that a simplified
envelope is used for plain pipe.
hl(1:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at 1:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress
has the same value as that for axial stresses at a 1:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(1:1) = al(1:1).
However, CAESAR II allows a different value for al(1:1) and hl(1:1) for a generalized failure
profile. In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning message displays in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(1:1) and leave hl(1:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(1:1) is equal to
al(1:1), and displays a warning message in the Error Checker. For more information, see
al(1:1) (on page 217).
217

al(2:1)
Specifies the long term axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14962, hoop
stress is twice the axial stress at a 2:1 ratio, that is hl(2:1) = 2 * al(2:1). This is a natural
condition when a pressurized pipe is enclosed at both ends. However CAESAR II allows you
to type different values for hl(2:1) 2 * al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
hl(2:1)
Specifies the long term hoop stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. According to ISO 14692, hoop stress is
twice the axial stress at a 2:1 stress ratio. That is, hl(2:1)= 2*al(2:1). However, CAESAR II allows
hl(2:1) to have a different value than twice of al(2:1). In this case, CAESAR II displays a warning
message in the Error Checker.
If you specify al(2:1) and leave hl(2:1) blank, CAESAR II assumes that hl(2:1) is equal to twice
al(2:1), and displays a warning message in the error checker. For more information, see al(2:1)
(on page 218).
Qs
Specifies the qualified stress for joints, bends, and tees. A qualified stress, Qs, provided by
the manufacturer is defined as:
Pq is the qualified pressure;

D is the average diameter of the pipe;
tr is the average reinforced wall thickness of the pipe.
The qualified stress, qs, for fittings is calculated as:
CAESAR II does not require qualified stress Qs for plain pipe. Qs for pipe = hl(2:1),
and hl(2:1) is required input for plain pipe.
You must enter qualified stress Qs for joints, bends and tees even if these fitting are
not in the piping model. You can type positive values (1000.0 for Qs and 1.0 for r,
for example) to pass the Error Checker.
218

r
Specifies the bi-axial stress ratio for bends, tees, and joints. The bi-axial stress r is defined
as:
where:
sh(2:1) is the short-term hoop strength, under 2:1 stress conditions;
sa(0:1) is the short-term axial strength, under axial loading only.
In the absence of data from the manufacturer, use the default values:
Fitting
Component
Filament-wound unidirectional 90
and
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
100% hand-lay
Tees
Other Hand
laminated
Bends
Joints
Short-term
Strength Bi-axial
Stress Ratio (r)*
0.45
1.0
1.9
Filament-wound and hand-lay 1
1.0
CSM/WR 1, 9
1.9
Spigot/Socket Adhesive or
Mechanical Connection
1.0
Threaded
0.45
Flange
1.0
Laminated
2.0
You can use a higher factor for r if justified by testing according to 6.2.6
ISO 14692-2-2002.
CAESAR II assumes that the bi-axial stress ratio r is 1.0 for tees according to ISO 14692.
CAESAR II displays a warning message in the Error Checker if the bi-axial stress ratio r is
greater than 20 for bends or joints. You can ignore the warning message.
If a piping system has no joints or bends, the corresponding bi-axial stress ratio r should not
be required. However, you must type a positive value (such as 1.0) for r to get rid of error
messages.
219

Eh/Ea
Specifies the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If you leave this
box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 2.0.
Hand Lay
Indicates that the bend is hand-layed. If this box is selected, the software assumes smooth
bends. This affects the calculations of both the flexibility factor and the SIFs for the bend.
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature (A1)

Specifies the partial factor for temperature. Because each operating temperature needs an
A1 factor, you may need to specify up to 9 factors if all 9 operating temperatures are defined
in a model. If you leave the boxes blank, CAESAR II uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.2 Design Temperature.
The effect of temperature on reduction of mechanical properties shall be accounted for by
the partial factor A1, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002.
The maximum operating temperature of the piping system shall not exceed the temperature
used to calculate the partial factor A1 of the GRP components. If the operating temperature
is less than or equal to 65C, then A 1 is generally equal to 1.0
The effect of low temperatures on material properties and system performance shall be
considered. For service temperatures below 0C, the principal should consider the need for
additional testing, depending on the resin system. Both qualification as well as additional
mechanical tests should be considered.
Glass Reinforced Plastic GRP materials do not undergo ductile/brittle transition within
the temperature range of this part of ISO 14692. Because of this, there is no significant
abrupt change in mechanical properties at low temperatures. A concern is that at
temperatures lower than 35C, internal residual stresses could become large enough to
reduce the safe operating envelope of the piping system.
Chemical Resistance (A2)

Specifies the partial factor for chemical resistance. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II
uses the default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.3 Chemical Degradation.
The effect of chemical degradation of all system components from either the transported
medium or the external environment shall be considered on both the pressure and
temperature ratings. System components shall include adhesive and elastomeric
seals/locking rings, if used, as well as the basic glass fiber and resin materials.
220

The effect of chemical degradation shall be accounted for by the partial factor A 2 for
chemical resistance, which is determined according to Annex D in ISO 14692-2:2002. If the
normal service fluid is water, then A 2 = 1. Reference shall be made to manufacturers' data if
available.
In general, the aqueous fluids specified in the qualification procedures of ISO

14692-2:2002 are among the more aggressive environments likely to be
encountered. However, strong acids, alkalis, hypochlorite, glycol, aromatics and
alcohol can also reduce the properties of Glass Reinforced Plastic (GRP) piping
components; the effect depends on the chemical concentration, temperature and
resin type.
The information from the manufacturers' tables is based on experience and

laboratory tests at atmospheric pressure, on published literature, raw material
suppliers' data, and so on. Chemical concentrations, wall stresses, reinforcement
type and resin have not always been taken into account. Therefore the tables only
give an indication of the suitability of the piping components to transport the listed
chemicals. In addition, the mixing of chemicals may cause severe situations.
Cyclic Service (A3)

Specifies the partial factor for cyclic service. If you leave the box blank, CAESAR II uses the
default value of 1.0.
The following passage is from ISO 14692-3:2002(E) section 7.4.4 Fatigue and Cyclic
Loading.
Cyclic loading is not necessarily limited to pressure loads. Thermal and other cyclic loads
shall therefore be considered when assessing cyclic severity.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycle is less than 7000 over the design
life, the service shall be considered static. If required, the limited cyclic capability of the pipe
system components can be demonstrated according to 6.4.5 of ISO 14692-2:2002.
If the predicted number of pressure or other loading cycles exceeds 7000 over the design
life, then the designer shall determine the design cyclic severity, R c, of the piping system. Rc
is defined as:
where Fmin and Fmax are the minimum and maximum loads (or stresses) of the load (or
stress) cycle.
The partial factor, A3 , for cyclic service is given by:
where N is the total number of cycles during service life.

This equation is intended for cyclic internal pressure loading only, but may be applied with
caution to axial loads provided they remain tensile, that is, it is not applicable for reversible
loading.
221

System Design Factor
Specifies the system design factor. This value is multiplied by the occasional load factor (k)
to generate the value of the part factor for loading (f2). If you leave this box blank, CAESAR
II uses the default value of 0.67.
The purpose of the system design factor is to define an acceptable margin of safety
between the strength of the material and the operating stresses for the three load cases.
These load cases are occasional, sustained including thermal loads, and sustained
excluding thermal loads. The following table shows the relationship between the system
design factor, the occasional load factor, and f2, along with their default values.
Loading Type
Load
Duration
System Design Occasional

Factor (SDF)
Load Factor
Occasional
Short-term 0.67
1.33
0.89
Sustained Including
Long-term 0.67
Thermal Loads
1.24
0.83
Sustained
Excluding Thermal
Loads
1.00
0.67
Long-term 0.67
Part Factor For

Loading (f2)
The part factor for loading f2 is equal to System Design Factor times the Occ Load
Factor.
Thermal Factor (k)

Specifies the thermal factor. This factor is defined in Section 8.4 of ISO-14692-3:2002(E). In
the absence of further information, the thermal factor k should be taken as 0.85 for liquids
and 0.8 for gasses. If you leave this box blank, CAESAR II uses a default value of 1.0.
Material Elastic Properties

Specifies the elastic modulus and Poissons ratio of the material. These values must be typed
for Material type 21 (user specified).
Material properties in the database can be changed permanently using the CAESAR II
Material Database editor. For more information, see Material Database (on page 1018).
222

Double-click >> to display the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box.
Material Properties
Displays the properties associated with the material. CAESAR II automatically fills in the
Modulus of Elasticity, Poisson's Ratio, and other material properties. If you want to
change any material property extracted from the material database, change the value in the
corresponding box.
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP)

The CAESAR II FRP pipe element models an orthotropic material whose properties can be
defined by:
Ea - Axial Modulus-of-elasticity
Eh - Hoop Modulus-of-elasticity
h/a - Poisson's ratio of the strain in the axial direction resulting from a stress in the hoop
direction.
223

G - Shear Modulus (Not related to the Elastic Modulus and Poisson's ratio in the
conventional manner.)
FRP pipe is specified by setting the Material box to 20. The material name displays and
FRP properties from the configuration file display on the dialog box.
Some of the material parameters are renamed when the FRP material is selected: Elastic
Modulus changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio changes to "E a/Eh*h/a". The
latter entry requires the value of the following expression: (E a*h/a) / Eh. This expression is
equal to a/h, Poisson's ratio of the strain in the hoop direction resulting from a stress in the
axial direction. The shear modulus G is defined by typing the ratio of G/E a (shear modulus to
axial modulus) on the special execution parameters screen. You can type only one ratio for
each job.
The decrease in flexural stiffness at bends and intersections due to changes in the circular
cross-section is typically negligible because the hoop modulus is usually considerably higher
than the axial modulus for FRP pipe. Because of this, a default flexibility factor of 1 is used
for these components. Similarly, because the fatigue tests performed by Markl on steel pipe
are likely to have no bearing on FRP design, an SIF of 2.3 is applied for all fittings. CAESAR
II uses these recommendations for all FRP fittings unless you specifically override the
defaults. You can override the defaults on a point-by-point basis or by forcing all calculations
to adhere to the requirements of the governing code through a CAESAR II configuration
parameter. Note that if the BS 7159, UKOOA, or ISO 14692 code is in effect, all SIFs and
flexibility factors are calculated according to that code regardless of the configuration
parameter settings.
Densities
The densities of the piping material, insulation, and fluid contents are specified in this block. The
piping material density is a required entry and is usually extracted from the Material Database.
You can also type Fluid density in terms of specific gravity, if convenient, by following the input
224

immediately with the letters: SG, for example, 0.85SG (there can be no spaces between the
number and the SG).
If an insulation thickness is specified (in the pipe section properties block) but no
insulation density is specified, CAESAR II defaults to the density of calcium silicate.
Double-click >> to display the Edit Densities dialog box.
225
Refract Thk
Specifies the thickness of refractory to apply to the piping. Refractory is applied to the inside
of the pipe. It is included in the dead weight of the system and reduces the internal pipe area
affecting the fluid weight in the system.
Refract Density
Displays the density of the refractory lining. If you select a value from the list, the numeric
value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
Refractory densities are much higher than insulation densities and could lead to
under sized restraints.
Densities for some typical refractory materials display below:
MATERIAL
DENSITY (lb./cu.in. )
A.P. GREEN GREENCAST 94
0.09433
A.P. GREEN KRUZITE

CASTABLE
0.08391
A.P. GREEN MC-30
0.08391
A.P. GREEN MC-22
0.07234
A.P. GREEN KAST-SET
0.06655
A.P. GREEN KAST-O-LITE 25
0.05208
A.P. GREEN VSL-35AST 94
0.02257
B & W KAOCRETE B
0.05787
B & W KAOCRETE 32-C
0.08333
B & W KAO-TAB 95
0.09549
B & W KAOLITE 2200
0.03241
B & W KAOLITE 2200-HS
0.04745
B & W KAOLITE 2500-LI.
0.03472
226
Insul Thk
Specifies the thickness of the insulation to be applied to the piping. Insulation applied to the
outside of the pipe is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected pipe
area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of the insulation or cladding, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Clad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the cladding to be applied to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation. It is included in the dead weight of the system and in the projected
pipe area used for wind load computations.
Even if you specify the unit weight of cladding plus insulation, the thickness values
are still required so that the software can determine the correct projected area.
Insulation Density
Displays the density of the insulation on a per unit volume basis. If you select a value from
the list, the numeric value replaces the material name when the box is registered.
If you leave this box blank, then the software assumes that the insulation is CALCIUM
SILICATE having a density of 0.006655.
Verify that this assumed value is appropriate for the current application. Sample density
values for insulation materials are:
MATERIAL
DENSITY
AMOSITE ASBESTOS
.009259
CALCIUM SILICATE
.006655
CAREYTEMP
.005787
FIBERGLASS (OWEN/CORNING) .004051

FOAM-GLASS/CELLULAR
GLASS
.004630
HIGH TEMP
.01389
KAYLO 10 (TM)
.007234
MINERAL WOOL
.004919
PERLITE / CELO-TEMP 1500
.007523
227

POLY URETHANE
.001273
STYRO FOAM
.001042
SUPER X
.01447
Cladding Density
Displays the thickness of the cladding to apply to the piping. Cladding is applied to the
outside of the insulation and is included in the dead weight of the system. Cladding is also
included in the projected pipe area used for wind load computations.
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight

Displays an alternative to specifying the insulation and cladding thickness and density. This
is an optional combined uniform load (weight per unit length).
If you are applying wind loads, then you must type the insulation and cladding
thickness to obtain the correct projected area for wind load computation.
Line Number
Specifies the line number for an element.
Line numbers carry forward to successive elements. Because of this, you only need to specify
data on the first element of a new line.
To assign a line number name, do one of the following:
Select the Line Number box, or press F9. Select <new..> to automatically assign a name.
The line number is named Line Number X, where X is a sequential number.
Use the auto-complete feature that populates with the nearest match as you type. For
example, if you have a line named 8-300-123 and you want to assign 8-150-124, Type 8
and the box automatically fills with the first line number that matches what you have typed.
Press End to change the last character.
228
You can also select elements on the graphics model and click Create from Selection in the
Line Numbers dialog box.
See Also
Line Numbers (on page 285)
Available Commands
Topics
File Menu .................................................................................... 229
Edit Menu.................................................................................... 237
Model Menu ................................................................................ 245
Environment Menu ...................................................................... 286
Global Menu................................................................................ 334
Options Menu.............................................................................. 340
View Menu .................................................................................. 345
Tools Menu ................................................................................. 363
File Menu
Performs actions associated with opening, closing, and running the job file.
New
Creates a new CAESAR II job.

Piping Input
Structural Input
229

Piping Input
Structural Input
Open
Opens an existing CAESAR II job.
Open Dialog Box

Controls options for opening existing files.
Look in
Specifies the folder in which the file exists.
Name
Lists the files in the selected folder that match the selected file type. You can sort the list by
clicking the Name, Data modified, or Type column headers.
File Name
Specifies the name of the selected file. This field is automatically filled in if you click a file in
the Name list.
Files of type
Specifies the type of file listed in the Name list.
System
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II System folder.
Examples
Changes the Look in box to the CAESAR II Examples folder.
230
Open CADWorx Model

Opens an existing CADWorx model.
Save <filename>
Saves the current CAESAR II job under its current name.
Save As
Saves the current CAESAR II job under a new name.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
the Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.
Save As Dialog Box

Save in
Specifies the folder in which to save the job.
Name
File Name
the Name list.
Save as type
Save
Writes the file to the selected folder.
231
Save as Graphics Image

Saves the current CAESAR II job as an HTML page, .TIFF, .BMP, or .JPG file.
Error Check
Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the first step of analysis. When
the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog box displays the results. For more
information, see Error Checking (on page 522).
Archive
Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to type the
password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without this
password; however, they can be opened and reviewed.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Archive Dialog Box

Controls options for archiving a CAESAR II job.
Password
Specifies the password for the job. Type a password between 6 and 24 characters in length.
Batch Run
Error checks the model without any involvement required by you. This process stops only for
errors, which must be resolved for the analysis to run successfully. When you select Batch Run,
the software uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Print Setup
Sets up the printer for the input listing.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
232

Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Setup Dialog Box

Controls parameters for setting up a printer.
Name
Specifies the name of the printer.
Properties
Displays printer properties.
Size
Specifies the size of the paper in the printer.
Source
Specifies the active paper tray
Portrait
Prints the file using a vertical orientation.
Landscape
Prints the file using a horizontal orientation.
Network
Allows you to specify a printer from the network.
Print Preview
Displays a preview of the print job.
233
Print <filename>
Prints the current job. The software prompts you to select the reports to print, prior to
printing.
You can change the report contents by modifying the .inp file.
Any time an input listing is written to a file or to the printer, the format of each of the reports is
obtained from the .inp file. The .inp files are ASCII text files which can be modified to create
reports of differing styles or content. You can modify the Initial.inp to change the page length in
the report, and the starting and stopping column positions. Any text editor (such as Notepad)
can be used to change any of the .inp files. If you change the .inp file, you may receive fatal
errors during report generation if impossible formats, or if invalid commands are requested.
If you prefer a different (more columnar) form of the basic element data, three additional
formatting files have been provided.
ELEMENT0.INP - Intergraph CAS standard element format
ELEMENT1.INP - 1st alternate element format
ELEMENT2.INP - 2nd alternate element format
ELEMENT3.INP - 3rd alternate element format
To use any of these formatting files, change folders to the CAESAR II\System folder. Then,
copy the formatting file that you want to use into Element.inp.
To print an Input Echo from the input dialog box, click File > Print. To write an Input Echo to the
screen for review, click File > Print Preview.
You can print an input listing from the output module as part of the entire output report.
234

Input Listing Options Dialog Box
Controls which options are included in the print job. Select the box for items to include. Clear the
box for items not to include.
Input Listing Options Dialog Box

Controls which options are included in the print job. Select the box for items to include. Clear the
box for items not to include.
235
Recent Piping Files

Displays a list of most recently opened piping files.
Recent Structural Files

Displays a list of most recently opened structural files.
Exit
Closes the session. The software prompts you to save any unsaved changes.
236
Edit Menu
Performs actions associated with cutting and pasting, navigating through the elements, and
performing a few small utilities.
Cut
Cuts selected elements from the document and pastes them to the Clipboard. The selected
elements replace the previous contents of the Clipboard.
Copy
Copies selected elements to the Clipboard. When you use this command, it replaces the
previous contents of the Clipboard with the new contents.
Paste
Inserts the Clipboard contents into the file. The command is not available if the Clipboard is
empty.
Continue
Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a new element if
there is no next element.
Duplicate Element
Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly continue building the model.
Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For more information on duplicating
groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page 334).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate Element,
the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the selected
element.
Insert Element
Inserts an element.
Insert Element Dialog Box

Controls options for inserting an element.
Before
Inserts a new element prior to the current element. The To node of the new element is then
equal to the From node of the current element.
After
Inserts a new element following the current element. The From node of the new element is
237

then equal to the To node of the current element.
Delete Element
Deletes the current element.
Find
Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box that allows you
to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can enter the node
numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From node number, the
software searches for the first available element that starts with that node number. If you enter
only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending with that node number.
When the software locates the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can
zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
Find Element Dialog Box

Controls parameters for finding elements.
Node Numbers
Specifies the node numbers to search for. Enter a single node number to find the next
element containing that node number (either as a From or To node). Enter two node
numbers to find the next element containing both of those node numbers (in either order).
Zoom to Node if Found
Indicates that the software will display the found node in the active view.
Global
Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each discontiguous system
segment.
This may be required for three reasons:
1. To show nodal coordinates in absolute, rather than relative coordinates.
2. Defining global coordinates for discontiguous segments allows the piping segments to plot in
the correct locations, rather than superimposed at the origin.
3. It is important that the pipe be given the correct elevation if wind loading is present.
Global Coordinates Dialog Box

Controls parameters for defining the absolute coordinates for the start node of an element.
X
Specifies the X coordinate.
Y
Specifies the Y coordinate.
238

Z
Specifies the Z coordinate.
Close Loop
Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the model.
Increment
Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal increment set in
Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new elements. You can override
this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For more information, see Auto Node
Number Increment (on page 69).
Set Node Increment Dialog Box

Specifies the parameters for setting an increment between nodes.
Node Increment
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Distance
Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you select on
the model.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
Distance Dialog Box

Allows measurements for finding distances between nodes or specified points on a model.
Choose a measuring method, and then view results for the measurements in the Distance
dialog, at the bottom of the dialog box, and on the model.
Use the Pan and Zoom functions to move around larger models when measuring the
distance between two nodes.
Press SHIFT to confine the measuring line to the x-, y-, or z-axis directions. When you press
SHIFT, the software selects the axis nearest to the cursor location. As the mouse moves
around the model, the software changes the measuring line direction to the closest axis to
the cursor location.
Press CTRL + click to select multiple distances along a line of pipe.
239

Measure Method
Snap to Nearest Node
Specifies for the software to choose the start and end point of an element on the model by
highlighting snap points. Snap points are markers that indicate element node points. The
software uses snap points to highlight a node when the mouse cursor comes within a certain
proximity range of it. The software defaults to having this check box selected. Clear this
check box for the software to measure without using the snapping functionality.
Clear the Snap to Nearest Node check box when measuring distance in imported
graphics models, such as from CADWorx or Smart 3D. The software cannot snap to
nodes on models created outside of CAESAR II.
Change the shape, size, and color of snap point markers by selecting Properties >
Display Options from the right-click context menu. Make changes to the Graphic
Edit Options>Symbol Information settings, and then click Apply in the Plot
Settings dialog box.
Origin and Selected Element

Calculates the distance between the origin point using the starting node coordinates (0,0,0),
and a selected point on the model.
To and From Nodes
Calculates the distance between two nodes. Type the node numbers in the boxes and click
Calculate (or press ENTER) for the software to perform the distance calculation. The
distance calculated displays in the Results area of the dialog box.
Calculate
Calculates the To and From Nodes measurement specified in the Measure Method.
Free Measure
Calculates the distance between two points anywhere on the model (regardless of the
node). Free measure lets you measure randomly on a model.
Results
Shows the results of the previous distance calculation.
The software also displays the result on the status bar at the bottom of the window. The
results indicate the start and end point and the length measured in the unit of measure
specified for the current model.
The software displays the difference of change along the three axes in the delta (DX, DY, DZ)
boxes.
What do you want to do?
Measure between two nodes
1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input
in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.
240

3. Click Distance
on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.

4. Click Nodes to measure distance between two specified nodes.
5. Type the starting and ending node numbers and click Calculate.
The software displays the measured distance in the Delta X, Y, Z boxes at the bottom of the
Distance dialog box, on the measure line in the model, and in the status bar at the bottom
of the window.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side or even minimize the dialog box entirely. Then, as you measure
distances, the results display on the model and also in the status bar at the bottom of
the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
Measure between two points on a model
1. Open a CAESAR II file.

2. Click Piping Input
in the main menu.
The Classic Piping Input dialog box opens.

3. Click Distance
on the Input Tools toolbar.
The Distance dialog box opens.

4. Double-click to select the element.
5. Click Origin and selected node.
You must have only one element selected on the model to use the Origin and
selected node option.
The software displays the measured distance from the To node of the element selected to
the origin (first) node in the model.
The distance measurement, including the location of the start and end points, displays in the
Results section of the dialog box and at the bottom of the main CAESAR II window. The
delta DX, DY, DZ boxes at the bottom of the Distance dialog box show the differences of
change along the three axes.
After you select the method for measuring the distance, you can dock the Distance
dialog box to the side. Then, as you measure distances, the results display on the
model and also in the status bar at the bottom of the window.
Press ESC to stop the distance measuring functionality on the model (but leave the
dialog box open), or close the Distance dialog box.
241
List
Displays all of the applicable input data in a dialog box. You can edit, delete, or modify data in
the lists.
Show All Lists
Displays the all of the available List dialog boxes.
Close All Lists
Closes all of the List dialog boxes and clears (un-checks) all the list options, such as
Allowables, Bends, Elements, and so forth.
The List dialog boxes appear as a rows tabs at the bottom of the piping input. These tabs
specify the various list options that you can access.
When you select a tab, the headings at the top of the selected List dialog box display the
specific input data and controlling parameters in the corresponding columns. All of the input data
can be accessed through the various List dialog boxes.
The following shows an example of a List dialog box, the Elements dialog box.
The software displays the input information in the List dialog boxes in a column format. Move the
cursor into any box to type a new value to replace the original value. You can scroll through the
reports either vertically or horizontally.
Press F1 while within the data cells to display help information. You can delete the input
information by highlighting the selection and pressing Delete. The software supports many
standard Windows commands, such as Cut and Paste, on a box-by-box basis.
If you edit input data on a List dialog box, the software updates the Classic Piping Input dialog
box as well. The software indicates values that carry forward on the Classic Piping Input dialog
box by displaying the value in red if there is a change to the data value. For example, in the
example shown above, the PIPE OD value changes from 8.6250 inch to 6.6250 inch on the
element From Node 30 to To Node 50. The software displays the first element in the list with
the new value in red. Note that elements 2 through 3 inherit the value of element 1
automatically. In this example, the value of the PIPE OD does not change until you enter a new
value for element 4. All elements below element 4 inherit that value unless a new value is
entered.
242

Other options from the Elements dialog box include the following:
Find the Current Node
Use the Find command (started with Ctrl F or Edit > Find) to quickly jump to the element
where the given node is located. Find remembers the last node number that you typed, so
subsequent searches of the same node can be accomplished by pressing Ctrl F.
Perform Global (Block) Operations
Perform global editing operations on selected parts of the piping system by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation and one of
the global (block) options. These options include varieties of rotations, deletions,
duplications, node renumbering, and status reporting. For more information on the block
operations, see Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356).
Access Element Auxiliary Data
Access the Auxiliary Data dialog boxes located on the piping input by highlighting an
element row, right-clicking on an element line, and selecting Block Operation > Aux
Screens. By single-clicking on any checked items from the dialog box shown below the
appropriate Auxiliary Data box displays. You can edit the data in the Auxiliary Data box,
which updates the input dialog box. Additionally, you can type new data by double-clicking
on any of the unchecked boxes to open the Auxiliary Data dialog box. You can delete an
entire Auxiliary Data box by double-clicking on the checked item. A prompt warns you of
the operation.
Display Block Status

View Block Status dialog box, which shows the piping data in the current job and in the
block.
243
Next Element
Skips to the next element.
Previous Element
Skips to the previous element.
First Element
Skips to the first element.
Last Element
Skips to the last element.
Undo
Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by pressing Ctrl-Z.
You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the amount of available
memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the undo function resets the redo function.
Redo
Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is limited by
the amount of available memory.
Making any input change while in the middle of the redo function resets the undo function.
Edit Static Load Cases

Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box. For more information, see
Static Analysis (on page 522).
Edit Dynamic Load Cases

Displays the Dynamic Analysis dialog box displaying static load information. For more
information, see Dynamic Analysis Overview (see "Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems" on page
628).
244
Review Units
Displays the Review Current Units dialog box. This dialog box displays the units used to create
the report file. Changing the units in the configuration does not affect the input. To change the
input units, click Tools > Change Model Units.
Model Menu
Performs actions associated with modeling, as well as specifying associated system-wide
information.
Break
Divides an element into two or more individual elements.
Click Model > Break on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. This command displays the
Break at element <node> - <node> dialog box.
Break at Element <node> - <node> Dialog Box

Controls options for breaking an element.
A straight run of pipe between two nodes needs to be broken to insert a restraint, or
some other change in properties.
A long straight run of pipe needs to be broken into multiple, uniform lengths of pipe with
similar support conditions on each length. For example, a long straight run of rack
piping, or a buried run with multiple soil supports at each point in the run.
245

The example above illustrates a single nodal insert between the nodes 10 and 20. The node to
be inserted is 15 and is 6 ft. from the node 10. Alternatively, you could insert node 15 an
appropriate distance from the To node 20. If there was some other node in the model with a
restraint (or imposed displacements), like the one to be put on the newly generated node 15,
then the node identifying that restraint location could be filled in at the line Get Support From
Node and the restraint would be automatically placed at 15. In this case, the +Y support at node
10 is copied to node 15.
For multiple inserts in a rack piping system the dialog box might appear as follows:
If you type the node where a +Y restraint has already been defined at the prompt for "support
condition", a +Y restraint is placed at all of the generated nodes, namely 110, 112, ... , 120. The
multiple insert Break is used primarily for three reasons:
Rack piping supports where the total length and node spacing is known and typed
directly when requested at the prompts.
Underground pipe runs where the overall length of the run is known, and the lengths of
the individual elements in the run are known.
To add mass points in order to refine a model for dynamic analysis.
Break does not work when the element is an expansion joint or the delta dimensions in
the DX, DY, and DZ boxes are blank or zero.
Insert Single Node
Indicates that only one node is inserted.
Insert Multiple Nodes
Indicates that more than one node is inserted.
246

Single Node Information
New Node Number
Indicates the node number for the inserted node.
Distance in (in.) from Node <node number>
Specifies the distance from the selected node.
Multiple Node Information

Total Number of Break Elements
Specifies the number of elements to insert.
Node Step
Specifies the increment between node numbers.
Length of each element
Displays the length of each element to insert.
Allow Duplicate Node Numbers
Indicates that duplicate node numbers are allowed.
Get Support From Node
Specifies the node from which to copy support information.
Valve
Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This command displays the Valve
and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box.
Valve and Flange Database: <database name> Dialog Box

There are currently four databases provided:
CRANE steel valves and total flange length
GENERIC valves and 2/3 flange length
Corner and Lada valves - no flanges
CADWorx Plant (this is the CAESAR II default)
CAESAR II automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve
-flange combinations when you select the Flange-Valve-Flange check box.
247

The CRANE database contains all flanged and welded fittings in the CRANE steel valve catalog.
The GENERIC database contains information from a variety of sources. In some cases, such as
weights for control valves, information from different sources was found to vary considerably. In
these cases the largest reasonable weight was selected for use in the database. In other cases
only the length of the fitting was available.
The default database, CADWorx Plant, is a subset of the full component database provided
with CADWorx Plant, Intergraph CAS's piping design and drafting software. This database
offers nine different component types (gate, globe, check, control, ball, plug, butterfly valves,
flange pair, and single flange) as well as four different end types (flanged, no-flanged, threaded,
or socket). Selection of flanged-end components or flanges themselves automatically provides
for gaskets.
248
Selecting flanged ends (FLG) for a valve simply adds the length and weight of two
flanges and gaskets to the valve length and weight. NOFLG selects a valve without including the
two mating flanges.
Rigid Type
Specifies the rigid type for the fitting.
End Type
Specifies the end type for the fitting.
Class
Specifies the class for the fitting.
Whole element
Indicates that the selections apply to the whole element.
From end
Indicates that the selections apply to the From end of the fitting.
To end
Indicates that the selections apply to the To end of the fitting.
Both ends
Indicates that the selections apply to both ends of the fitting.
Flange-Valve-Flange
Automatically generates data lengths and weights of rigid elements for flange-valve-flange
combinations.
249

Activate Flange Check
Turns on the flange check.
Add an Element from the Valve Flange Database

1. Type the node numbers for the rigid element in the From and To boxes on the Classic
Piping Input dialog box.
2. Click Valve/Flange
on the toolbar, or click Model > Valve from the menu.
3. Highlight blocks to select the fitting.

4. Select where to insert the new element.
Clicking the Flange Valve Flange check box enables CAESAR II to generate three
RIGID elements whose length and weight are automatically populated with data from the
Valve/Flange database.
5. Click OK to accept the selection.
If the particular selection is valid for the current line size, CAESAR II displays the length of
the element in the DX, DY, and DZ boxes, designates the element as RIGID, and inserts the
weight in the appropriate slot in the Auxiliary box.
The assumed orientation of the rigid is taken from the preceding element. CAESAR II is doing a
table lookup based on line-size and is inserting the selected table values into the dialog box.
Should the line size change at a later time, you must come back and ask CAESAR II to perform
another table look-up for the new size.
Use of the CADWorx Plant database offers several benefits over the use of other databases:
The CADWorx Plant database provides more accurate component lengths and weights
than those typically available in the GENERIC database.
Using the same component data for CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant modeling promotes
the efficiency of the bi-directional interface between them. Total sharing of data files and
specifications between CAESAR II and CADWorx Plant occurs when the CADWorx
installation option is saved in the registry. In that case, you should edit the third line of the
CADWORX.VHD file to name the actual CADWorx specifications. These specifications are
located in the CADWORX\SPEC subfolder. For more information on editing this file, see
below.
You can more easily modify the CADWorx Plant Valve and Flange database, because the
specification files and component data files are ASCII text files. This process, which involves
possibly editing the CADWORX.VHD, specification, and data files, is described below.
The CADWORX.VHD file is structured as follows:
The first line must read CADWORX.DAT. It must not be changed.
250
The second line is editable. It must begin with a zero. The second number on the line
designates the number of specifications to make available. It can be a maximum of 7.
The third line is editable. It lists the available specifications. Each specification name must
consist of 8 characters, padded by blanks on the right. The specification names designate
files with extension .SPC, located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR II or the CADWorx
Plant specification folder (if the CADWORX option is set in the registry).
The fourth line is editable. It designates whether each specification uses English or Metric
nominal pipe sizes. Seven blanks followed by a 1 indicate an English nominal, while seven
blanks followed by a 2 indicate a metric nominal.
The last five lines are not editable.
The specification files are located in the SPEC subfolder of the CAESAR installation folder. They
are designated by the extension .SPC. The specification files correlate pipe size and component
with the appropriate data file. Individual lines in the file list the library subfolder to the LIB_I or
LIB_M folder, depending on whether English or Metric units are in effect), file name (with an
extension equal to the library name), range of nominal pipe sizes for which the specified data file
applies. You can edit any of these items. The last item on the line is the component type
number, and should not be changed. Other items in the file pertain to CADWorx Plant and are
not significant to CAESAR II.
The data files hold the dimensional and weight values. Data files for different types of
components hold different types of data. The data columns are labeled. The only data with
significance to CAESAR II involves the weight and lengths. You can change these values. The
following is a typical component data file for weld neck flanges:
251
You can find more extensive information on editing these files in the CADWorx Plant User
Manual.
Expansion Joint
Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and Expansion Joint Modeler
dialog boxes.
Expansion Joint Dialog Box

CAESAR II automatically generates an expansion joint model from catalog data that you select.
The catalog used may be selected in the CAESAR II Configure/Setup routine. You decide where
in the model the expansion joint should go, that is, between which two nodes, and the modeler
assembles the completed joint. Selectable joint styles include Untied, Tied, Hinged, Gimbaled,
Untied-Universal, and Tied Universal expansion joints.
252

An example selection session is illustrated as follows. Of particular note are the following items:
You can select any of four material types. These material types are used to adjust the
bellows stiffnesses to the actual highest temperature in the model. This typically results in
higher stiffnesses than those shown in the vendor's catalog because the stiffnesses in the
catalog may be based on a higher design temperature.
You can select any combination of end types.
Bellows, liner, cover, rod, and hinge or gimbal assembly weights are looked up from the
stored database and automatically included in the expansion joint model.
For universal joints, the minimum allowed length is stored, but when the available space
exceeds the minimum allowed, you are prompted for the length that you want the expansion
joint assembly to occupy.
The last screen that follows shows the "proposed" model before it is inserted into the
CAESAR II input. This allows you to investigate the characteristics of several joints before
settling on one.
Actual maximum pressure ratings are also a part of the database, and in many cases
exceed the nominal pressure rating shown in the catalog. You can use pressures up to
these actual allowed maximums.
Allowed joint movements are also stored as part of the database and are printed with each
proposed model. These values should be recorded for use in checking the model after a
successful design pass has been completed.
Pressure thrust is included in the modeling considerations for each of the expansion joint
styles, removing this concern.
In the case of "tied" expansion joints, rigid elements are used to model the tie-bars.
Restraints with connecting nodes are used to contain the pressure thrust, and to keep the
ends of the expansion joint parallel.
253
254
Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To Nodes

Indicates whether the expansion joint assembly should be installed at the From end or the
To end of the current element if the length of the current element exceeds the length of the
expansion joint assembly.
255

Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin Axis
Specifies the direction cosines which define the axis of the hinge pin of the expansion joint
assembly. That is, the axis about which the joint can rotate.
For example, if the hinge can rotate about the X-axis, type:1.0 0.0 0.0
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar Plane

Specifies the direction cosines corresponding to a line drawn from the mid-point of one tie
rod to the mid-point of the other. If an expansion joint has only two tie rods permitting
rotation about the plane defined by the tie rods, type the direction cosines which, when
crossed with the axis of the expansion joint assembly, define the plane.
In this example, you would enter VX as1.000, VY as -0.000, and VZ as 0.000.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall Length

Specifies the length of the universal joint. Alternatively, select the check box to default the
joint length to the shortest recommended length. The length of a universal joint is variable
depending upon the length of the intermediate spool piece.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint Database

Specifies the database to use in the modeler. The current expansion joint vendor provides
multiple databases.
You can change the default expansion joint vendor in Expansion Joints (on page 59).
Torsional Spring Rates

Type a large value such as 1E10 if the torsional spring rate is unknown. This produces
conservative results. These results are conservative with respect to loads and
non-conservative with respect to displacements. It is very common to rate the bellows
allowed torsion by the amount of rotation that it experiences. Large torsional stiffnesses
result in small, seemingly satisfactory rotations. When results from a piping analysis are
communicated back to the expansion joint manufacturer, it is important to report both the
rotation and the stiffness used to produce that rotation. For more information, see Expansion
Joints (on page 885).
Expansion Joint Design Notes

It was common practice in the expansion joint industry to design expansion joint bellows and
hardware (restraints) for the system pressure, and pressure thrust only. Generally, no
consideration was given to the system deadweight or thermal forces. This poor practice was
tolerated before the wide-spread use of piping analysis software because:
The deadweight and thermal forces are normally small compared to the pressure
and pressure thrust.
Designers laid out expansion joints so that the thermal forces were very low and
therefore not significant.
The allowable stresses used in hardware designs have a significant safety factor.
256

The forces and moments generally were not known. Today, when an expansion joint is
modeled, it is recommended that al information relating to the joint be submitted to the
expansion joint manufacturer. This is especially true of the forces and moments resulting
from the operating loads, such as deadweight, thermal forces, and operating deflections.
Better evaluations of the loading conditions on the bellows and hardware simply help the
manufacturer make sure that his design is suited for the intended installation and service.
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler Results

Click Build to insert the proposed model of the expansion joint assembly into the piping
system model.
The Bellows Catalog Data (at the bottom of the Expansion Joint Modeler dialog box)
shows the bellows stiffness parameters and allowable movements from the vendor catalog.
Note the allowable movements for later evaluation of the expansion joint.
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes

Expansion joints cannot be inserted on an element that is either already rigid or an
expansion joint. Bends, however, can be at either end of the element where you are
inserting the expansion.
You do not have to give a length on the element where you are inserting the expansion joint.
The six types of expansion joint models supported currently by CAESAR II are:
Untied single bellows
Tied single bellows
Hinged single bellows
Gimbaled single bellows
Untied universal bellows
Tied universal bellows
The four possible joint end types are:
Welded-end
Slip-on flange
Weld neck flange
Plate flange
If the length of the element to receive the expansion joint model is given, then the expansion
joint assembly should fit within this length. If it does not, a warning message displays. If a
universal joint has been requested, the length of the receiving element should be at least
long enough to accept the smallest possible universal length, as defined by the minimum
spool piece size from the manufacturers' database. If the element to receive the universal
expansion joint model is zero, you are prompted for the expansion joint length. If the
element to receive the universal expansion joint model had an original length, then the
maximum possible space available for the universal is reported and you are asked for the
length. If the element to receive any expansion joint is longer than the expansion joint to be
inserted, you are prompted for the end of the element where the joint should be inserted.
Overall universal lengths should be limited to about 10 times the pipe diameter before the
center spool piece weight begins to become a problem.
257

If there is a bend at either the From or the To end of the element to receive the expansion
joint, then you must define the length of the element.
To find extra nodes needed for the expansion joint model, CAESAR II starts with the
element From node and increments by one until a sufficient number of nodes not used
elsewhere in the model are encountered. It is these nodes that are reported in the
Proposed-model dialog box.
Angular stiffnesses reported are given in the current set of units. Only the translational
stiffness label is found at the top of the bellows stiffness report. If you are unsure about the
rotational stiffness units, they may be seen either in the help screens or in the UNITS report
from the LIST option.
You are prompted to adjust the stiffness for the expansion joint if the highest operating
temperature is given and not equal to the expansion joint catalog design temperature. This
reduces bellows stiffnesses greater than those published in the catalog.
Bellows, tie-bar, and hinge/gimbal assembly weights are combined together and distributed
over the expansion joint rigid end pieces.
The expansion joint modeler makes every attempt possible to generate nodes in the model
that are unique. Inspect the nodes that are generated closely and make sure that you do not
use them unintentionally in any future model building.
Review the generated CAESAR II models and be sure that everything is consistent with
your intentions.
Expansion Joint Styles

The following six styles of expansion joints are built automatically by CAESAR II. With each
type is a brief discussion of its use when associated with hot, pressurized equipment
protection.
Untied
Specifies a single unrestrained expansion joint. This type of joint can absorb movement in
all directions. It also subjects the system to pressure thrust which must be designed for,
external to the expansion joint. This type of joint should almost never be used by the
expansion joint novice needing to protect hot, pressurized equipment. Guide restrictions
limiting displacements into the joint, regular maintenance problems because of all of the
support hardware away from the bellows, and pressure thrust make using and analyzing this
type of bellows difficult.
Tied
Specifies a tied single expansion joint that is capable only of transverse (lateral) movement.
Pressure thrust is restrained internally by the tie-bars. This is a good, dependable expansion
joint to use for several reasons:
You do not have to design for pressure thrust.
Tie rods provide stability to the overall joint. This makes working with it in the field
easier.
There is a single displacement mode (lateral). You can compare this mode directly
to the rated lateral movement in the catalog without the need for the relatively
complicated geometric calculations in the Expansion Joint Rating.
The disadvantages to the single tied expansion joint are:
258
They are fairly stiff in practice. This joint often does not provide the needed flexibility
to sufficiently reduce the loads on sensitive equipment.
The tie-bar assembly does provide some nonlinear restraining effect on flexibility
that is unaccounted for in the analysis. This may be appreciable when the bellows
displacement becomes large, such as when it is most critical that it perform as
predicted.
Hinged
Specifies a single hinged expansion joint. This type of joint can only angulate about one
axis. Pressure thrust is retained internally by the hinge mechanism. Hinge joints are often
used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in a single plane while transmitting very
little load to any attached equipment. The piping system must be designed to assure that
displacement into the hinges is planar for all types of thermal and occasional loadings to be
experienced by the system. Where pressure loads to be absorbed by the hinge mechanism
are high, considerable friction forces can be generated that somewhat limits further flexing
of the joint. This transmits larger loads than expected back into the piping system.
Gimbal
Specifies a single gimbal expansion joint. This type of joint can angulate about two axes.
Gimbaled joints restrain both pressure thrust and torsion by the gimbal mechanism. These
joints are often used in pairs to absorb considerable displacement in several directions,
while transmitting very little load to any attached equipment.
U-UNIV
Specifies an untied universal expansion joint. This type of unit is similar to a single
unrestrained expansion joint. It can absorb movement in all directions and normally has a
much higher capacity for transverse (lateral) deflection than a single bellows. An untied
universal subjects the system to pressure thrust loads which must be designed for external
to the expansion joint. Even when pressure is negligible, these joints can often be difficult to
use in practice unless proper guiding of the thermal displacement protects the joint against
unwanted movement.
T-UNIV
Specifies a tied universal expansion joint. This is similar to a tied single joint, except that the
tied universal has much higher transverse (lateral) movement capability. Pressure thrust
loads are restrained internally by the tie-bars. These types of joints are a good option where
vertical pipe runs close to the equipment are available. The tie-bars restrict movement to a
single mode (lateral) and eliminate the worry about pressure thrust design. Longer lengths
result in smaller lateral stiffnesses, but overall length is somewhat restricted by the weight of
the center spool. A good rule of thumb is to restrict the overall length of the assembly to ten
times the pipe diameter. Be careful not to put the assembly into compression, as the tie bar
mechanisms are not designed to take this load and damage to the bellows can result.
These six types of expansion joints are not all of the types available, but they are the most
common. If a joint is needed that is not covered by the above, select the style closest to that
required. Edit the resulting input after the EJ Modeler is complete and processing returns to
the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
259

Available Expansion Joint End-Types
The following expansion joint end-types are available in the CAESAR II modeler.
Welded
Indicates standard pipe beveled for welding.
Slipon
Indicates a slip-on flange.
WN
Indicates a weld neck flange.
Plate
Indicates a plate flange in accordance with the manufacturers catalog.
Slip-on, weld neck, and plate flanges may not be available in all diameters and pressure
ratings, such as over 24-in. diameters. Consult the catalog for specific interface dimensions,
codes, and materials. When you select a combination that is not available, you are warned
that there are no database values for his particular geometry and line size.
Bellows Application Notes

The following considerations are important when selecting the number of convolutions for a
particular application:
Movement Capability
The more convolutions selected, the greater the movement capacity of the bellows. It is a
common practice to perform a quick hand calculation to estimate the required movement
and then select the number of convolutions from the rated movements in the catalog. After
an analysis is performed, the exact evaluation of the bellows performance can be made
using the expansion joint rating module provided with CAESAR II.
Spring Forces
Specifies the spring forces. The more convolutions that you select, the lower the resulting
bellows spring forces become. This is particularly critical when the expansion joint is located
near rotating equipment.
260

Available Space
The more convolutions selected, the greater the required overall length. If working in a
confined area, the number of convolutions may be restricted by the space.
Pressure Rating
The pressure rating should be equal to, or larger than the design pressure of the system. In
many instances, larger pressures can be tolerated than the rated pressure shown. In many
small diameter expansion joints, the same bellows is used in 50, 150, and 300 psi-rated
joints. The CAESAR II modeler contains the true minimum pressure limits for all of the
bellows in the database, and checks the maximum pressure in the line (as specified) against
the allowed pressure. This allows you to select a smaller joint with more flexibility for certain
applications.
Materials
Bellows can be formed from most ductile materials that can be welded by the automatic
T.I.G. butt welding process and yield a homogeneous ductile weld structure. Because the
specific media content varies from system to system, and most media data specified prior to
system operation is approximate with considerable fluctuation possible, it is not feasible to
make specific recommendations concerning bellows materials. The following are the four
most common bellows materials that are supported by CAESAR II:
304SSA240 tp 304 Stainless Steel
316SSA240 tp 316 Stainless Steel
600IncInco 600 High Nickel
625IncInco 625 High Nickel
Liners
Internal liners smooth the flow through the expansion joint. The smooth flow reduces
pressure drop and also prevents flow-induced vibration of the bellows. Liners are generally
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds 1.3 ft./sec. as a minimum, and are definitely
recommended when the flow velocity exceeds about 25 ft./sec. Consult the manufacturers
catalog for additional information. Heavy gage liners should be used in high velocity or
turbulent flow systems. Also, heavy liners should be used when the media is abrasive.
Covers
External covers protect very thin bellows, (0.010 to 0.090 in.) from mechanical damage.
Covers are also recommended when the line is insulated.
261
Title Page
Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored with
the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and so
on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Control Data

Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model.
Hanger Design Control Data Dialog Box

Spring hanger design can be globally controlled by typing data into the Hanger Design Control
Data dialog box.
The Hanger Design Control Data dialog box contains five items that also appear on each
individual hanger design in your model. The software populates values you specify in this dialog
box on the individual Hangers auxiliary dialog box in the Classic Piping Input. However, you
can override those values on a hanger-by-hanger basis on the individual Hangers auxiliary
dialog box.
The hanger values you can set globally include:
Short-range springs
Rigid support displacement criteria
Maximum-allowed travel limit
Hanger table
Multiple load-case design option
262
You can specify the number of temperature cases the software uses in the hanger design in the
Hanger Design Control Data dialog box, and these values are used in the hanger design
algorithm. In addition, you can specify if the software calculates the actual cold loads. For
examples of incorporating spring hanger designs into your models, see the CAESAR II
Application Guide.
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load Cases

Specifies the number of load cases to be considered when designing spring hangers. This
value may be between 1 and 9 and corresponds to the number of thermal load cases to be
used in hanger design. If more than one operating case is to be considered in the hanger
design then you must also select the Multiple Load Case Design Option to use.
Calculate Actual Cold Loads

Indicates that CAESAR II makes one additional pass after the hanger design is completed
and the hangers are installed, to determine the actual installed loads that should be used
when the hangers are first installed and the load flanges adjusted in the field. This
calculation tends to be important in the following situations:
The stiffness of the piping system is small.
The stiffness of the hanger selected is high.
The hanger travel is large. This is usually more important in smaller diameter piping
systems that are spring supported away from equipment nozzles.
Actual cold loads should be calculated when springs in smaller diameter lines are to be
263

adjusted in the cold position.
Allow Short Range Springs

Indicates that hanger design allows short range springs.
CAESAR II gives you the option of excluding short range springs from consideration from
the selection algorithms. Short range springs are considered specialty items in some
instances and are not used unless their shorter length is required for clearance reasons.
Clear this check box in this case.
If this option is not selected, CAESAR II selects a mid-range spring over a short-range
spring, assuming that they are more standard, readily available, and in general cheaper than
their short-range counterparts.
If the default should be that short range springs are used wherever possible, then check the
box on the Hanger Design Control Data dialog box.
Allowable Load Variation (%)

Specifies the limit on the allowed variation between the hot and cold hanger loads. If this
value is not specified, the only limit on load variation is that inherent in the spring table. This
is approximately 100% when the hot load is smaller than the cold load and 50% when the
hot load is larger than the cold load. Hot loads are smaller than cold loads whenever the
operating displacement in the Y direction is positive. The default value for the load variation
is 25%.
The Allowable Load Variation value is the percentage variation from the hot load:
or as may be more familiar:
The Allowable Load Variation value is typed as a percentage. For example, type twenty
five percent as 25.0.
Rigid Support Displacement Criteria

Specifies the minimum amount of travel for hanger design. This is a cost saving feature that
replaces unnecessary springs with rigid rods.
The hanger design algorithm operates by first running a restrained weight case. The load to
be supported by the hanger in the operating condition is determined from this case. After the
hanger design load is known, the software runs an operating case with the hot hanger load
installed. This analysis determines the travel at the hanger location. If this determined
hanger travel is less than the Rigid Support Displacement Criteria, then a rigid Y-support
is selected instead of a spring for the location.
The software does not apply the criteria if you leave the Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria box blank or zero.
A typical value is 0.1 in.
You should insert a single directional restraint instead of a rigid rod in some
264

cases. Rigid rods are double-acting restraints. In some cases these can develop large hold
down forces that do not really exist because the support has lifted off, or because the rigid
rod has bowed slightly. When this condition develops, you should rerun the hanger design
inserting single directional restraints where rigid rods were put in by CAESAR II.
Do not replace hangers with rigid rods in very stiff parts of the piping system. These parts
are usually associated with rotating equipment or vessel nozzles that need to be protected.
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit

Specifies the maximum amount of travel for hanger design. CAESAR II selects a constant
effort support if the design operating travel exceeds this limit, even though a variable
support from the manufacturer table would have been satisfactory in every other respect.
You can design a constant effort hanger by specifying a very small number for the
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit. A value of 0.001 typically forces CAESAR II to select a
constant effort support for a particular location.
Hanger Table
Specifies the active hanger table.
The following spring tables are currently included in CAESAR II:
1. Anvil
2. Bergen Power
3. Power Piping
4. NPS Industries
5. Lisega
6. Fronek
7. Piping Technology
8. Capitol
9. Piping Services
10. Basic Engineers
11. Inoflex
12. E. Myatt & Co.
13. Sinopec
14. BHEL
15. CASTIM 2000 (formerly Flexider)
16. Carpenter & Paterson
17. Pipe Supports Ltd.
18. Witzenmann
19. Sarathi
20. Myricks
21. China Power
22. Pipe Supports USA
23. Quality Pipe Supports
24. PiHASA
25. Binder
26. Gradior
27. NHK
28. PSSI GmbH
29. Seonghwa
30. Mitsubishi
265

31. Yamashita
32. Sanwa Tekki
33. Techno Industry
34. Hesterberg
35. Spring Supports Mfg. Co.
36. Senior
37. Unison
38. Wookwang
Additional design options are invoked if you use the following check boxes.
Extended Range
Cold Load
Hot load centered (if possible)
You can globally set the hanger data for a model from the Hanger Design Control Data
dialog box (see "Hanger Design Control Data" on page 262), accessed by clicking Hanger
design criteria
in the piping input. Specify the default hanger table that appears in this
dialog by specifying the Default Spring Hanger Table configuration setting in
Configuration Editor > Database Definitions. For examples of incorporating spring
hanger designs into your models, see the Hangers section in the CAESAR II Application
Guide.
Extended Load Range Springs - CAESAR II includes the maximum load range to permit
the selection of less expensive variable support hangers in place of constant effort supports
when the spring loads are just outside the manufacturers recommended range. Extended
load ranges are the most extreme ranges on the spring load table. Some manufacturers
build double-spring supports to accommodate this range. Others adjust the top or bottom
travel limits to accommodate either end of the extended table. Make sure that the
manufacturer can supply the spring before you use the maximum ranges. Use of the
extended range often eliminates the need to go to a constant effort support.
Lisega springs do not support an extended range. If you select Extended Range for
a hanger with Lisega springs, CAESAR II returns the standard Lisega spring table and
ranges.
Cold Load Spring Hanger Design - Cold load spring hanger design is a method of
designing the springs in which the hot (or operating) load is supported in the cold (or
installed) position of the piping. This method of spring design offers several
advantages over the more usual hot load design:
Hanger stops are easier to remove.
There is no excessive movement from the neutral position when the system is cold
or when the stops are removed.
Spring loads can be adjusted before the system is brought up to temperature.
Some feel that the cold load approach yields a much more dependable design.
Operating loads on connected equipment are lower in some system configurations.

A hot vertical riser anchored at the bottom turning horizontally into a nozzle
connection is a typical configuration resulting in this load-reduction. The spring to be
designed is at the elbow adjacent to the nozzle. Operating loads are lower because
the difference between the hot and cold loads counters the moment produced by
the vertical thermal expansion from the anchor.
266

The disadvantages to cold load design are:
In some systems, the loads on rotating equipment may be increased by a value

proportional to the spring rate times the travel in the hot condition.
Most installations are done on a hot load design basis.
Middle of the Table Hanger Design (Hot Load Centered) - Many designers prefer that the
hot load be centered as closely as possible to the middle of the spring table. This provides
as much variability as possible in both directions before the spring bottoms out when the
system is hot. This design was necessary prior to effective computer modeling of piping
systems, when the weights at hangers were approximated by chart methods or calculated
by hand. Activating this option does not guarantee that spring hot loads are at the middle of
the spring table, but CAESAR II makes every effort to move the hot load to this position. The
CAESAR II design algorithm goes to a higher size spring if the design load is closer to the
middle of the larger spring's range, but never switches spring types. This option, when it is
effective, can only result in a one-size larger spring. CAESAR II attempts to move the hot
load to the next higher spring when it is within 10% of the maximum travel range for the
spring. If the new spring is not satisfactory, then CAESAR II uses the old one.
Multiple Load Case Design Options

Specifies the multiple load case design option. Whenever more than one thermal load case
is used in the hanger sizing algorithm, CAESAR II must know how you want to weigh the
results from the different cases. There are currently 13 different methods that you can use
for multiple load case hanger design selection. These 13 methods are described in greater
detail under the hanger auxiliary data section.
1. Design per Load Case #1
10. Design for the maximum operating load
11. Design for the maximum travel
12. Design for the average load and the average travel
13. Design for the maximum load and the maximum travel
267
Seismic Wizard
Selects a particular Seismic Code and its associated data.
The wizard computes the applicable g factor and fills in the appropriate data cells.
X-component is set into Vector 1, Y-component is set into Vector 2, and Z-component is set
into Vector 3; all other load components are set to zero.
A warning displays if the current element has uniform loads defined.
Because the wizard sets data in gravitational loading, you must verify other uniform load
definitions for correctness.
Seismic Design Code

Specifies the design code and edition for the current job. You can select from several different
seismic code standards.
See Also
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard (on page 268)
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard (see "NBC Static Seismic Wizard" on page 273)
NBC Static Seismic Wizard (on page 273)
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the ASCE 7 (or IBC) methodology. Select your Seismic
Design Code edition.
CAESAR II displays the calculated gravity factor on the Uniform Loads tab.
268
Uniform Loads Tab

Importance Factor I (ASCE)
Specifies the component importance factor from ASCE #7 Section 11.5.1. Type 1.5 for
life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or components that are
required for continuous operation. Type 1.0 for all others.
Response Factor R (ASCE)
Specifies the component response modification factor, from ASCE #7 Table 13.6-1. Type
12.0 for piping according to ASME B31 with joints made by welding or brazing. Type a value
range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE)
Specifies the maximum mapped MCE spectral response acceleration at short periods
according to Section 11.4.1, Chapter 22 Seismic Ground Motion and Long-period
Transition Maps provide values for Ss.
Site Class (ASCE)
Specifies the site class code. Based on the soil properties, the site is classified as Site Class
A, B, C, D, E, or F according to Chapter 20, Site Classification Procedure for Seismic
Design. If you do not know the soil properties in sufficient detail to determine the site class,
use Site Class D.
Component Elevation Ratio z/h (ASCE)
Specifies the ratio of height in structure at the point of attachment over the average height of
the supporting structure.
269

Component Amplification Factor ap (ASCE)
Specifies the component amplification factor from Table 13.6-1. Type 2.5 for distribution
system, such as piping. This term reflects the relationship of the piping response to the
structure response.
Long-Period Transition Period TL
Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7
Spectrum Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from new maps, which are similar to
zone maps, for all 50 states. The ASCE standard provides these maps in Figures 22-12
through 22-16 (ASCE 7-2010). In addition, Section 11.4.5 of ASCE 7-2010, discussions the
constant-displacement branch of the code.
ASCE Example
For further information on the Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IP = 1
Component Response Modification Factor RP = 12.0, from Table 13.6-1, "Piping in accordance
with ASME B31,"
Mapped MCE Spectral Response Acceleration S s = 1.552, Mapped MCE Spectral Response
Acceleration at short periods according to Section 11.4.1.
Site Coefficient (Fa) = 1.0 for Site Class D, according to Table 11.4-1.
Maximum Considered Earthquake MCE S MS - The MCE is adjusted for site class effects as
defined in Section 11.4.3,
SMS = Fa SS = 1.552
SDS - Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4.
SDS= 2/3 SMS = 2/3 * 1.552 = 1.0347
The appropriate seismic acceleration is aH
= [ (0.4aPSDS) / ( RP / IP )] ( 1 + 2z/h)
= [(0.4 x 2.5 x 1.0347)/(12.0/1.0)](1 + 2 * 0.5)
= 0.17245
Check limits on aH:
aH <= 1.6 * SDS* IP = 1.6 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 1.65552
aH >= 0.3 * SDS * IP = 0.3 * 1.0347 * 1.0 = 0.31041
aH = 0.31041
aH = 0.2 SDS= 0.2 * 1.0347 = 0.20694,
Section 13.1.7 states, "The earthquake loads determined in accordance with Section 13.3.1
shall be multiplied by a factor of 0.7."
aH = 0.7 * 0.31041 = 0.2173
av = 0.7 * 0.20694 = 0.1149
270

CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard
Computes the static g factor based on the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic Design
Manual) 1993 methodology.
CFE Sismo Seismic Wizard

Uniform Loads Tab
Seismic Zone (CFE)

Specifies the seismic zone. Zone D is the zone of highest seismic activity. Zone A is the
least active. For more information, review the Manual De Diseno por Sismo (Seismic
Design Manual). A map with different regions displays on page 1.3.29.
271

Structure Group (CFE)
Specifies the structural group as defined in the following table:
Group A
High Degree of Safety
Group B
Intermediate Degree of Safety
Group C
Low Degree of Safety
Soil Type (CFE)

Specifies the soil type as defined in the following table:
I Hard Soil
Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity bo = 700

m/s or modulus of rigidity >= 85000 t/m2
II Med. Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of

propagation which meets the condition: c5 5c cc
III Soft Soil
Ground deposits with fundamental period of effective vibration of propagation

which meets the conditions: c5 5c cc
First Mode Period (CFE)

Specifies the period of first natural mode of the piping system in seconds.
Increase Factor (CFE)
Specifies the increase factor. The Mexican Earthquake Code considers an SRSS type effect
on the structure. This value scales up the earthquake loads in a linear (Scalar) fashion. This
value is traditionally 1.118 and should always be greater or equal to 1.0.
CFE Sismo Example

For further information on CFE Sismo, see the example below.
For seismic zone D and soil type I, the following parameters are found in Table 3.1.
a0 = 0.50
C = 0.50
Ta (s) = 0.0
Tb (s) = 0.0
r=
If T> Tb , then
a = c ( Ta / Tb)r = 0.50 * (0.6 / 1.15) ^ 0.5 = 0.3612
For a structure group of A High Safety, the acceleration is multiplied by 1.5
272

a = 0.3612 * 1.5 = 0.5417
NBC Static Seismic Wizard

Computes the static g factor based on the NBC 2005 methodology.
273

Importance Factor IE (NBC)
Specifies the importance factor as defined in Article 4.1.8.5 as defined in the following table:
Importance Category
Importance Factor (IE)
Low
0.8
Normal
1.0
High
1.3
Post-disaster
1.5
Site Class (NBC)

Specifies the site classification for the seismic site response from Table 4.1.8.4.A.
Sa(0.2) (NBC)
Specifies the spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 seconds as defined in Paragraph
4.1.8.4.(1).
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn] (NBC)
Specifies the component elevation ratio. The values hx and hn are the height above the
base to level n or x respectively. The base of the structure is the level at which horizontal
earthquake motions are imparted to the structure.
Component Amplification Factor [Rp] (NBC)
Specifies the force amplification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Element or Component Factor [Cp] (NBC)
Specifies the component factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar] (NBC)
Specifies the component response modification factor from Table 4.1.8.17.
274

NBC Example
For further information on the use of the Static Seismic Wizard see the example below.
Importance Factor IE = 1.0 for a "Normal" category by Table 4.1.8.5.
The Site Class is "C" for "Very dense soil and soft rock" by Table 1.1.8.4.A:
Sa (0.2) = 0.55, spectral response acceleration value at 0.2 s, as defined in Sentence
4.1.8.4.(1).
According to Table 4.1.8.4.B.,Fa = 1.0:
Sp = Cp Ar Ax / Rp = 1 * 1 * (1 + 2 * 0.5) / 3 = 0.6667
Cp = 1, Ar = 1 and Rp = 3 according to Table 4.1.8.17.
The maximum value of Sp is 4.0 and minimum value of Sp is 0.7, therefore:
Sp = 0.7
aH= 0.3 * Fa Sa (0.2)IE Sp = 0.3 * 1.0 * 0.55 * 1.0 * 0.7 = 0.1155
Optimization Wizard
Assists with expansion loop design.
This wizard allows you to specify the element into which the loop should be incorporated, the
loop type, the item to be optimized - nodal stress or restraint load, and the target value to which
the item should be optimized. The optimization routines run the analysis several times to arrive
at an acceptable loop size such that the code stress or restraint load on the target element is at
the specified limit. Besides offering the opportunity to specify various loop configurations and a
selection of height to width ratios, the wizard also provides an option to allow CAESAR II to
select the most economical (based on length of pipe and number of bends) of those possible.
The Optimization Wizard automatically chooses the most economical loop solution
based on your target input. If there is an issue with the target input or loop sizing, the wizard
prompts you and attempts to insert the most ideal loop possible. However, you can always
revise your target input or loop sizing and re-run the wizard.
275

To use the optimization wizard, the job must be run at least once so that there is an issue, such
as an overstress, to resolve. These results must be current. The process is illustrated by the
example LOOP-WIZARD.C2, as displayed below.
Reviewing the results of the LOOP-WIZARD job shows that it is suffering an expansion
overstress of 46,741 psi. The allowable value at node 20 is 41,288 psi. This is due to the
expansion of the long run 60-140. A loop should be installed somewhere along that run. The
questions are where, and how big should it be?
Before you start the Loop Optimizer, examine the area of the plant surrounding the piping
system. To do this, import the CADWorx (or AutoCAD) plant model, using the CADWorx Model
command. In this case, import the ...\EXAMPLES\LOOP-WIZARD-PLANT\OVERALL.DWG
model. This model shows that there is a convenient area to place a loop beside element 60-70.
276
Select element 60-70 and then click Model > Optimization Wizard
Optimization Wizard. The Loop Design Wizard dialog box displays.
start the Loop
277
Using the Loop Optimization Wizard:

1. Loop 60-70 is already indicated as the element upon which the loop is installed. You can
change this value by selecting a different value from the list, or by selecting other elements
in the model.
2. Click Stress as the optimization type. Optionally, you can optimize restraint load
components as well.
3. Select EXP from the Load Case list. This fills in the element list showing stresses on the left
side of the dialog box.
4. Type 36,000 in the Stress box to define a target maximum stress. This value refines the
element list, so that it displays only those elements with stress levels higher than the target.
5. Select the Max Stress box to limit the maximum stress in the system to the target value.
6. Select the Loop Type from the available icons. For this example, select the first loop type.
7. Select <none> from the Height to Width Ratio list to allow the loop height to vary to any
size while keeping the width constant. In this case, the terminal run of pipe is set to one
bend radius with the loop width fixed to the remaining length of element 60-70.
278
At this point there are two alternatives to indicating where the loop should be placed.
8. Click Draw Cube to generate a transparent cube anchored on the selected element. You
can adjust the size and location of this cube by using the mouse. Use the corner points (Pt1
or Pt2) to adjust the major direction of the loop and the available space. Use the triangle to
adjust the minor axis of the loop and the available space. Drag the cube over the decking
adjacent to element 60-70 to build a cube with a Major dimension of 17ft 11 inches in the X
direction.
279
9. After the dialog box is complete, Click Design to start the optimization procedure.
The progress of the design scheme displays. After the loop is designed, you are informed of
how much pipe and how many bends were required to create the loop.
10. Click Undo
to restart the Loop Wizard using different loop types. You can use this
information to find the most economical implementation.
When the optimizer finishes, the new expansion loop is inserted into the selected element.
280
11. Run a final analysis to verify all results. There are instances where the optimizer reports an
error. Examples of such situations are: (a) requesting a loop insertion in an element that is
not long enough, or (b) setting an impossible target maximum.
Selecting the special loop type enables CAESAR II to select the best loop to reach the
indicated target. This loop type is indicated on the dialog box by a lightning bolt. The best
characteristic of each loop is based on the relative cost of bends to straight pipe. When you
select the lightning bolt loop type, the Bend Cost Factor box activates. The default value of
100 indicates that a bend costs 100 times as much as the equivalent length of straight pipe.
Adjust this value as necessary.
281

Loop Optimization Wizard Overview
The Loop Optimization Wizard automates the sizing of expansion loops in a piping system.
Optimization Type
Specifies the type of output value to optimize or reduce. You can use the Loop Design
Wizard to improve Stress levels or Restraint load components for any piping loop in a
model.
Load Case (for Design)
Specifies the load case for which to reduce an output value. Adding a loop may well solve a
problem in a displacement-driven load case (Operating or Expansion) but not in a
force-driven load case (Sustained or Occasional).
After you select the Load Case value, the software displays Stress or Restraint Load
output values for review and selection.
Target Stress
Specifies the target level to which you would like to reduce the output value. Typing a stress
value (or a Load, in conjunction with a Load Component type) acts as a filter, showing only
elements which have stress values exceeding that level. This target value also becomes the
stress or load for which the selected target (Maximum System Stress, Restraint Load
Component, or Node) is optimized.
Design is not activated until you designate both a Target and Optimization Type.
Max. Stress
Optimizes the maximum stress level in the system (as opposed to a stress level at a single
node) to the value in the Target Data box.
At Node
Specifies either the node at which the stress level is to be optimized (and the element upon
which that node is located) or the node at which a restraint load component is to be
optimized (along with the Load Component Type). Double-click one of the entries in the
Element/Node/Stress list or a Load Component in the Restraint Load to automatically fill
in these entries.
282

On Element
For Stress Optimization:
Specifies the element on which the node for which the stress level is to be optimized is
located. Double-click one of the entries in the Element/Node/Stress list to automatically fill
in this entry.
For Restraint Load Optimization:
Specifies the restraint load component which is to be optimized. Double-click one of the
Load Component entries in the Restraint Load list to automatically fill in this entry.
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load Component

Displays the items which you can double-click to automatically fill in the entries designating
the item (either nodal stress or restraint load component) for which the results should be
optimized.
Create Loop on Element

Specifies the element which is replaced by the loop. You can select the element from the list
or from the model. The Loop Optimization Wizard can only be used to substitute loops in
place of single elements.
Loop Type
Specifies the general configuration of the loop.
Type #1 - places the loop at the From end of the original element in the
plane of the Major Direction.
Type #2 - Places a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the From
end of the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the
plane of the Minor Direction.
Type #3 - Places the loop in the middle of the original element in the plane
of the Major Direction.
Type #4 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop in the middle of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.
283
Type #5 - Places the loop at the To end of the original element, in the plane
of the Major Direction.
Type #6 - Places 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop at the To end of
the original element, first in the plane of the Major Direction and then in the plane
of the Minor Direction.
Type # 7 - Builds a loop of the same size as the original element.
Type # 8 - Builds a 2-D (both dimensions the same size) loop of the same size
as the original element, first in the Major Direction and then in the Minor
Direction.
Type #9 - Causes CAESAR II to try all eight loop types and find the most
economically efficient solution based on total pipe length and number of bends.
Bend Cost Factor

Specifies the relative cost of a bend relative to straight pipe. This value is used when
CAESAR II is asked to select the most economic loop design. For example, if a bend
(including hardware, fabrication, and other costs) costs 100 times as much as the same
length of straight pipe, then the appropriate value would be 100.0.
Width to Height Ratio

Specifies the loop height to width ratio that should be maintained when building the loop.
Available options are 2.0, 1.0, 0.5, and none.
Select none if the segments of the selected loop configurations still coincide with the original
element run. For example, segment #4 of Loop Type #1, segment #6 of Loop Type #2,
segments #1 and #5 of Loop Type #3, segments #1 and #7 of Loop Type #4, or segment #1
of Loop Types #5 and #6 have a length equal to exactly the length of a long radius bend.
This entry does not apply in the event that Loop Types #7 or #8 were selected. In this case,
the height to width ratio is not used. The height varies as necessary and the width is held
constant to the length necessary to make up the original element length. This last option is
often preferable in areas where there is limited room for wide loops.
284

Draw Cube
Graphically creates the anticipated area where the loop is installed. This cube may then be
resized or moved to reflect the preferred area for the loop. The Loop Optimization Wizard
tries to design a loop that fits in the allocated space.
Major Direction
Specifies the direction and distance of the primary direction of the loop.
Minor Direction
Specifies direction and distance of the secondary direction of a 2-D loop.
Major Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the major direction.
Minor Direction Available Space

Specifies the maximum available space for the loop in the minor direction.
Design (Button)
Begins the loop optimization process. If an appropriate loop cannot be designed, you must
change some of the parameters and try again.
Line Numbers
Displays the Line Numbers dialog box.
Line Numbers Dialog Box

Controls options for line numbers. You can set visibility options for line numbers from the 3D
model on the piping input and the Graphical Output in the Static Output Processor.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers.
Create from Selection
Creates line numbers from the selected elements. You can only create line numbers for
selected elements from the piping input 3D model.
Remove Line Number
Deletes line numbers from the selected elements. You can only remove line numbers for
285

You can also right-click select Remove Line Number (in Piping Input only).
Reset Settings
Returns visibility settings to their default settings. Use the drop down to specify to Reset
Visibility, Reset Color, or All settings.
You can also right-click on a line and select one of the reset options.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those line numbers and
node numbers that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all elements. You
can search on a line number name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque. 0% indicates
that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name
Specifies the name of the element.
See Also
Line Number (on page 228)
Environment Menu
Performs actions associated with miscellaneous items.
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box. Access this function from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes or Intersection
SIF scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter intersection Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the number of the node
where you want to evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Intersection SIF's dialog box.
Review Intersection SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing intersection SIFs.
286

The boxes that display in this dialog box depend upon the piping code you select for the
job. The following list details all possible boxes that the software can display in this dialog box.
The first section shows the most common dialog boxes, but other code-specific inputs below
that.
Node
appropriate SIFs.
SIFs.
bend curvature.

Type
Specifies the type of tee or joint.
For non-FRP piping codes, there are six types of tees and ten types of joints. These
elements correspond to 1 to 6 and 7 to 16 in the Input Items Optionally Effecting SIF
Calculations (see "Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)*" on page 132) table.
For BS 7159 and UKOOA, there are two types of tees: Moulded and Fabricated.
Moulded tee corresponds to either the Welding (3) or Extruded (6) welding tee
Type. Fabricated tee corresponds to a tee Type of Reinforced (1).
287
For IGE/TD/12, there are 11 types of tees and joints. For specialized diagrams of
tee type with this code, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page 150).
For ISO 14692, there are three types of tee and joints: Tee (1), Qualified Tee (3),
and Joint (2). Select 1 - Tee for the software to use the method specified in the ISO
14692 code for non-qualified tees. Select 2 - Joint for CAESAR II to use the
calculations specified in the code for joints and fittings. Select 3 - Qualified Tee for
the software to use the code-specified calculation for qualified service stress for
tees (including the pressure stress multiplier, m pst).
ASME NC and ND piping codes do not include equations for SIFs with a tee Type
of Sweepolet (4), Weldolet (5), or Extruded (6). When you specify one of these tee
types, CAESAR II uses B31.1 equations.
Pad Thk
Specifies the thickness of the reinforcing pad for reinforced fabricated or full encirclement
tees (intersection type #1 and #17, respectively). The pad thickness is only valid for these
intersection types. If the thickness of a type #1 or type #17 intersection is left blank or the
value entered is zero, the software uses the SIFs for an unreinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the pad thickness is limited to 1.5 times the
nominal thickness of the header. This factor does not apply in BS 806 or Z184, and is 2.5 in
the Swedish piping code.
Ftg Ro
Specifies the fitting outside radius for branch connections. This option is used for reduced
branch connections in the ASME and B31.1 piping codes, Bonney Forge Insert Weldolets,
and for WRC 329 intersection SIF calculations. Configuration options exist to invoke the
WRC 329 calculations and to limit the application of the reduced branch connection rules to
unreinforced fabricated tees, sweepolets, weldolets, and extruded welding tees. If omitted,
Ftg Ro defaults to the outside radius of the branch pipe.
150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
288

150).
Weldoflange
150).
Crotch R
Specifies the crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee, intersection type 6.
This is also the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329 calculations. Specifying this
value can result in a 50% reduction in the stress intensification at the WRC 329 intersection.
If you attempt to reduce the stress riser at a fabricated intersection by guaranteeing that
there is a smooth transition radius from the header to the branch pipe, then you may reduce
the resulting stress intensification by a factor of 2.0.
Weld ID
IGE/TD/12
Weld(d)
Specifies the average circumferential weld mismatch measured at the inside diameter of the
pipe. This value is used for Butt Welds and Tapered transitions. This is the average; not the
maximum mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are
satisfied for your particular code.
Fillet
Specifies the fillet leg length. This option is used only in conjunction with a socket weld
component. This value is the length of the shorter leg for an unequal leg fillet weld. If a fillet
leg is given, both socket weld types result in the same SIF. See appendix D of the B31
piping codes for further clarification.
Header OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the header matching pipe.
Header Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
289

Branch OD
Specifies the actual outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Branch Thk
Specifies the actual wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Header SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the header.
Header SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the header.
Branch SIF(i)
Displays the SIF in-plane for the branch.
Branch SIF(o)
Displays the SIF out-of-plane for the branch.
Flexibility Characteristic
Displays the flexibility characteristic. For more information on how wall thickness is used in
the flexibility characteristic (h) equation, see Wall Thickness of Bend (on page 793).
Branch Section Modulus
Displays the branch section modulus.
Recalculate
Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the input data,
CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
Other Code-Specific Inputs

The following inputs appear only when you select certain piping codes.
Do/r3
page 150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
page 150).
Weldoflange
150).
290

T/Th/Tb
150).
Weldolet
page 150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
Weldoflange
page 150).
Te/Tb
150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
rp/do
Fabricated Tee
291

150).
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
r2/rc
Fabricated Tee
150).
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
292

r1/Tc/Lh
Fabricated Tee
150).
Specifies the Tc value. For more information on Tc, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
Sweepolet
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lh value. For more information on Lh, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
L1/Lb
Fabricated Tee
150).
Weldolet
150).
Drawn/Extruded Tee
Specifies the Lb value. For more information on Lb, see IGE\TD\12 Reference (on page
150).
150).
Weldoflange
150).
293

Ferric Material for Note 3673.2b-1.3
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed
on the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select
ASME NC and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes

Displays the Node Selection dialog box. Access this function from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box by clicking Environment > Review SIFs at Bend Nodes or
Bend SIF
scratchpad on the Input Tools toolbar.
Node Selection Dialog Box

Controls options for selecting the node.
Enter bend Node Number to be reviewed - Specifies the node number where you want to
evaluate the stress intensification factors.
OK - Displays the Review Bend SIF's dialog box.
Review Bend SIFs Dialog Box

Controls options for reviewing bend SIFs.
Node Displays the node number.
Bend Radius Displays the bend radius. CAESAR II assumes a long radius by default.
You can override this value. Alternatively, select a value from the list.
Long - Indicates a long radius bend. The radius is equal to 1.5 times the nominal
diameter.
Short - Indicates a short radius bend. The radius is equal to the nominal pipe
diameter.
Bend Type Specifies the bend type. For most codes, this refers to the number of attached
flanges and can be selected from the list. If there are no flanges on the bend, leave Type
blank. A bend should be considered flanged if there is any heavy or rigid body within two
diameters of the bend that significantly restricts the bends ability to ovalize.
When using the BS 7159 or UKOOA Codes with Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe,
this entry refers to the material laminate type and may be 1, 2, or 3. These laminate types
are
All chopped strand mat (CSM) constructing with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
The laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 and UKOOA Codes only.
294

For ISO 14692, only type 3 filament-wound laminate is considered.
Bend Angle Displays the bend angle.
Fitting Thickness Specifies the thickness of the bend if that thickness is different than the
thickness of the matching pipe. If the thickness is greater than the matching pipe wall
thickness, then the inside diameter of the bend is smaller than the inside diameter of the
matching pipe. CAESAR II calculates section modulus for stress computations based on the
properties of the matching pipe as defined by the codes.
The pipe thickness is used twice when calculating SIFs and flexibility factors; once as Tn,
and once when determining the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe in the equation for
the flexibility characteristic (h):
h = (Tn)(R) / (r2)
Tn = Thickness of bend or fitting
R = Bend radius
r = Mean cross-sectional radius of matching pipe
= (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter of matching pipe
WT = Wall Thickness of matching pipe
Most codes use the actual thickness of the fitting (this entry) for Tn, and the wall thickness of
the matching pipe for the calculation of the mean cross-sectional radius of the pipe (the WT
value). More specifically, the individual codes use the two wall thicknesses as follows:
Code
For Tn:
For Mean Radius Calculation:
B31.1
Fitting
Fitting
B31.3
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.4
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.5
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.8
Fitting
Matching Pipe
B31.8 Ch VIII
Fitting
Matching Pipe
SECT III NC
Fitting
Matching Pipe
SECT III ND
Fitting
Matching Pipe
Z662
Matching Pipe
Matching Pipe
NAVY 505
Fitting
Fitting
B31.1 (1967)
Fitting
Fitting
SWEDISH
Fitting
Matching Pipe
295

BS 806
N/A
N/A
STOOMWEZEN
N/A
N/A
RCC-M C/D
Matching
Pipe
Matching Pipe
CODETI
Fitting
Fitting
NORWEGIAN
Fitting
Fitting
FDBR
Fitting
Fitting
BS 7159
Fitting
Fitting
UKOOA
Fitting
Fitting
IGE/TD/12
Fitting
Fitting
EN-13480
Fitting
Matching Pipe
GPTC/Z380
Fitting
Matching Pipe
The bend fitting thickness (FTG) is always used as the pipe thickness in the stiffness matrix
calculations. However, the thickness of the matching pipe (WT) is always used in the bend
stress calculations.
Number of Miter Cuts Displays the number of cuts in the bend if it is mitered. When you
type a number, CAESAR II checks if the mitered bend input is closely or widely spaced. If
the bend is determined to be widely spaced, and the number of miter cuts is greater than
one, the bend should be broken down into n single cut widely spaced miters, where n is
the total number of cuts in the bend. The number of cuts and the radius of the bend are all
that is required to calculate the SIFs and flexibilities for the bend as defined in the B31
codes. The bend radius and the bend miter spacing are related by the following equations:
Closely Spaced Miters
R = S / (2 tan )
q = Bend Angle / (2 n) where n = number of miter cuts
Widely Spaced Miters
R = r2 (1.0 + cot q) / 2.0

r2 = (ri + ro) / 2.0
= Bend Angle / 2.0
Seam Weld Indicates that the bend is seam welded.
B31.3
If the B31.3 piping code is active, the Seam Welded check box is used to activate the
Wl box for bends. The Wl box is the weld strength reduction factor used to determine
the minimum wall thickness of the bend element.
296
IGE/TD/12
Used by IGE/TD/12 to calculate the stress intensification factors due to seam welded
elbow fabrication as opposed to extruded elbow fabrication. This option is only available
when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Matching Pipe OD Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe. This is used in
the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe
The B31.3 (1993) code defines r2 as the mean radius of matching pipe.
Matching Pipe Thk Specifies the match pipe wall thickness. You should not subtract any
corrosion. All SIF calculations are made ignoring corrosion. This wall thickness is used in
the mean radius (r2) calculation as defined in the piping codes.
Elastic Modulus Specifies the elastic modulus among EC, E1 to E9. This value is used
for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Pressure Specifies the pressures among PMax, P1 to P9, PHydro and none. This value
is used for the pressure stiffening calculations.
Bend In-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under in-plane bending.
Bend Out-of-Plane SIF Displays the SIF under out-of-plane bending.
In-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under in-plane bending.
Out-of-Plane Flexibility Factor Displays the flexibility factor under out-of-plane bending.
Flexibility Characteristic Displays the pipe factor.
Recalculate - Displays the SIFs after you enter a different set of data. If you change the
input data, CAESAR II allows you to transfer the data back to a CAESAR II model.
297
Special Execution Parameters

Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box. Click Environment > Special
Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for that particular job.
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion Joints

Indicates whether forces are printed on rigid elements and expansion joints. Forces and
moments are not normally printed for these elements because the forces that act on these
elements can usually be read directly from the forces that act on the adjacent pipe elements.
Select this option to cause forces and moments to be calculated and printed for all rigid
elements and expansion joints in the system.
298

Print Alphas and Pipe Properties
Indicates whether the software prints alphas and pipe properties. CAESAR II prints the
thermal expansion coefficients along with the pipe, insulation, fluid, and refractory weights in
the error checker. This report can be very useful during error checking to help identify
possible problems in the temperature or weight input specifications. Rigid elements and
expansion joints are treated the same as straight pipe. Rigid weights and insulation cladding
factors are not reflected in this table.
Activate Bourdon Effects

Specifies the Bourdon effects option to use. Choose the option from the drop list to activate
the Bourdon pressure effect. The Bourdon pressure effect causes straight pipes to elongate,
or displace along their axes, and causes curved pipes or bends to elongate along the line
that connects the bends near and far nodes. If the Bourdon effect is not activated, there are
no global displacements due to pressure. The Bourdon effect is always considered when
plastic pipe is used, regardless of the setting of the Activate Bourdon Effects option.
By default, CAESAR II does not include the Bourdon effect in the analysis of steel piping
systems. That is, there are no displacements of the system due to pressure.
As an option, you can include pressure displacement effects. These effects can be
appreciable in long runs of pipe or in high pressure, large diameter bends adjacent to
sensitive equipment.
Bourdon effects are almost always important in fiberglass reinforced plastic piping systems.
For this reason the Bourdon (Translational) is automatically turned on for all FRP pipe runs
and bends.
Two Bourdon options are available:
Use the Translation only option when the elbows in the system are forged or
welded fittings and can reasonably be assumed to have a circular cross section.
Use the Translational & Rotational option when the bends in the system are
fabricated by the hot or cold bending of straight pipe. In these cases the slight
residual ovalization of the bend cross section, after bending, causes the bend to try
to straighten out when pressurized. Fixed end moments are associated with this
opening. These fixed end moments do not exist when the original shape of the bend
cross-section is circular.
299

Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts
Specifies how branch error and coordinate prompts display. You are prompted for two
pieces of information:
The loop closure tolerance.
The global coordinates of the first point of the piping system and each following
piece of the piping system that is not connected to the first.
This data is needed the first time CAESAR II prepares a global geometry calculation. This
calculation is made on three different occasions:
Before preprocessor plots are generated.
Before global coordinate reports are built.
Before error checking is performed.
Alternatively, you can select Edit > Global and specify the global coordinates to avoid any
prompting.
There are several major uses for this flag:
Set the loop closure tolerance.
Define the elevation of the piping system for wind/wave load calculations.
Give the proper east-west or north-south coordinates for dimension checks.
Move parts of the system around in the plotted output for visual checking.
Whenever you create a physical loop in the piping system, there are at least two different sets of
dimensions between the same points. If the two dimensions are not within a certain tolerance of
each other, a fatal error occurs. You can set this tolerance interactively or in the configuration
file. Select Both for the Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts option to cause CAESAR II to
interactively prompt for this tolerance.
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature

Specifies the temperature differential which exists between the top of the pipe and the
bottom of the pipe. This differential is used to compute an elemental load. It is added to
each temperature case for horizontal pipes.
This entry is computed from the equation:
dT = Ttop - Tbottom
For example, consider a horizontal pipe where the temperature on the top is 20 degrees
hotter than the temperature on the bottom. The proper value to type in this box is 20, not
-20.
300

Liberal Stress Allowable
Indicates whether or not to use liberal stress allowable. Conservative formulation of the
allowable expansion stress range for many codes in CAESAR II is calculated from:
f ( 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh )
When select this option, the difference between Sh and Sl, provided Sh > Sl, is added to the
term inside the parenthesis. That is:
SA(Liberal) = f[ 1.25 Sc + .25 Sh + ( Sh - Sl) ]
The liberal expression is only used when there is at least one sustained stress case in the
load set. If there is more than one sustained stress case in a single problem, then the
largest of Sl, considering all of the sustained cases, for any single element end is chosen to
subtract from Sh. Because the sustained stress varies from one pipe to another, the
allowable expansion stress also varies.
By default, CAESAR II uses the liberal stress allowable setting in the configuration file in
its computation of the expansion stress allowable. New models are created using this
configuration setting. If you do not want to use this default setting for calculating the
expansion, clear this check box.
Uniform Load in G's

Specifies whether to use a magnifier of gravitational loading for the uniform load. Uniform
load can be defined either in terms of force per unit length or in terms of a magnifier of
gravitational loading. Uniform load in G's is used most often for static earthquake loadings.
Earthquake loads are occasional loadings and as such are not directly addressed
by the CAESAR II recommended load case logic. You must form your own
combination cases at the output processor level that represent the algebraic sum of
the stresses due to sustained and occasional loads. For more information, see
Occasional Load Factor (on page 94).
When you select this option, the in Gs radio button is activated on the first Uniform
Load auxiliary dialog box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can override
this option by selecting the in F/L option.
301

Ambient Temperature
Specifies the actual ambient temperature. The default ambient temperature for all elements
in the system is 70F/21C. If this does not accurately represent the installed, or zero
expansion strain state, then type the actual value in this box. The ambient temperature is
used in conjunction with the specified hot temperature and the interpolated expansion
coefficient to calculate the thermal expansion per inch of pipe length experienced by the
element when going from the ambient temperature to the hot temperature.
A default ambient temperature can be defined in the configuration file. For more information,
see New Job Ambient Temperature (on page 54). The software uses this configuration file
value to set the ambient temperature when you create a new model.
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x 1,000,000 )

Specifies the thermal expansion coefficient. The default thermal expansion coefficient for
fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe is 12.0E-6 in./in./deg.F. If you have a more suitable value
for the particular composite, type that value in this box. For example, if the improved value
was: 8.5E-6 in./in./deg. F., then type 8.5 in this box. The exponent (E-6) is implied. This
expansion coefficient is used in conjunction with the temperatures on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box for each plastic pipe element to calculate the thermal expansion for the
element.
This method does not provide for any variation in the thermal expansion coefficient as a
function of temperature. This could prove limiting should there be parts of the system at
different non-ambient temperatures. In this case, you can always calculate the thermal
expansion at temperature in inches per inch and input this value directly into the
Temperature box on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod Axial

Specifies the ratio of the shear modulus to the modulus of elasticity in the axial direction of
the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe. For example, if the material modulus-of-elasticity
(axial) is 3.2E6 psi, and the shear modulus is 8.0E5 psi, type 0.25 as the ratio of these two.
For new models, the default value is obtained from the configuration file.
302

FRP Laminate Type
Specifies the default laminate type as defined in the BS 7159 code for the fiberglass
reinforced plastic pipe. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving
Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external
CSM and Multi-filament
Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface
tissue reinforced layer.
CSM
All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue reinforced
layer.
The software uses this entry to calculate the flexibility and stress intensity factors of bends;
therefore, this default entry may be overridden using the Type field on the bend auxiliary
dialog boxes.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that the Z axis is vertical. Traditionally CAESAR II has used a coordinate system
where the Y-axis coincides with the vertical axis. In one alternative coordinate system, the
Z-axis represents the vertical axis (with the X axis chosen arbitrarily, and the Y-axis being
defined according to the right hand rule. CAESAR II now gives you the ability to model using
either coordinate system. You can also switch between the systems in most cases.
You can specify that CAESAR II start with the Z axis vertical. For more information, see
Z-Axis Vertical (see "New Job Z-Axis Vertical" on page 70).
A new piping model determines its axis orientation based on the setting in the
Configure/Setup module. An existing piping model uses the same axis orientation under
which it was last saved. You can change the axis orientation from Y-Axis to Z-Axis vertical
by clicking the check box on the Environment-Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Clicking this check box causes the model to immediately convert to match the new axis
orientation. That is, Y-values become Z-values or the reverse. There is no change in the
model; only the representation changes.
This allows any piping input file to be immediately translated from one coordinate system
into the other.
When including other piping files in a model, the axis orientation of the included files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
When including structural files in a piping model, the axis orientation of the include files need
not match that of the piping model. Translation occurs immediately upon inclusion.
The axis orientation on the Static Load Case Builder (such as wind and wave loads), the
Static Output Processor, The Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output Processor is
dictated by the orientation of the model input file.
303

Bandwidth Optimizer Options
Orders the set of equations that represent the piping system for both static and dynamic
analyses. The optimizer may be run with a variety of different switch settings. The default
settings were chosen for their combination of ordering efficiency and speed. These settings
should suffice for the majority of piping systems analyzed. For systems having greater than
100 nodes, or that are highly interconnected, the following optimum parameters should be
used.
Optimizer Method = Both
Next Node Selection = Decreasing
Final Ordering = Reversed
Collins Ordering = Band
Degree Determination = Connections
User Control = None
If the User Control is set to Allow User Re-looping, CAESAR II lets you interactively try as
many different combinations of switch settings as needed. When the most efficient ordering
is obtained, you can continue on with the analysis. This interactive prompting for
optimization parameters is done in the analysis level processing.
Include Piping Input Files

Includes other piping models in the current piping model. Piping models added may have a
node offset applied and can optionally be rotated about the Y-axis before being added.
Include Piping Files Dialog Box

File Name - Displays the file to include. Click Browse to browse for the file name. The file need
not reside in the current data directory.
Read Now - Specifies whether or not the file is read immediately. Select Y if the file is to be read
immediately and stored as part of the current input. The file read may be edited as part of the
current job. Select N, if the file is to be read for plotting and fully processed only during error
checking. The file read may not be edited as part of the current job.
RotY - Specifies the angle about the Y axis to rotate the model before including it in the current
job. The rotation applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
Restraints, uniform loads, and concentrated forces are not rotated. Additionally, the
rotation of the model can be accomplished from the List utility For more information, see Rotate
(on page 334).
Inc - Specifies the increment to be added to all of the nodes in the model before including it in
the current job. The node increment applies regardless of the Read Now setting.
304
Including Structural Input Files

Includes existing structural model into the current job. The structural model must have been
built and successfully error checked in the structural steel preprocessor accessed from the
CAESAR II menu. For more information, see Structural Steel Modeler (on page 397).
After a structural model has been built, you can include it into any piping input. You can include
the names of up to 20 different structural models. After this is done, you can plot and analyze
the structural model with the piping model. The structural models need not reside in the current
folder.
Piping systems are usually tied to structural steel models by the use of restraints with
connecting nodes. Make absolutely sure there are no node number conflicts between structure
and pipe models. After you define a restraint with a connecting node between the pipe and
structure, CAESAR II knows where to put the structure in the resulting preprocessor plot. If no
connection between the pipe and the structure is given, the structure is plotted starting from the
origin of the piping system. In this case, the resulting plot may not meet your expectations.
Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) option provides an interactive, customizable way of
importing Piping Component Files (PCFs) to the CAESAR II piping environment.
Provides more control and flexibility over element sequencing and node numbering
Provides the capability to build and verify the model in an incremental way
Provides the capability to selectively update the CAESAR II model
An interactive interface is built directly into the CAESAR II input environment that:
Does everything that the PCF batch process does (See PCF/Intergraph Smart 3D PCF doc
in External Interfaces section)
Builds the piping input model on a line-by-line basis if needed
Provides the ability to define and control node numbering
Uses the Block Operations modeling tools to ease modeling changes.
You can perform the APCF function to create a new model or add to any existing job model. The
CAESAR II input model constructed from the PCFs assumes the Units System of the current
job, plus automatically attach/intersect the piping generated from the PCF to the existing piping,
if appropriate.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. A PCF is a
flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
Converting the PCF

1. Before you begin the conversion, determine:
Which files will be converted
How they should be combined
305
How they should be numbered on the first conversion process.
2. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) to begin the conversion of a PCF(s)
to a CAESAR II Piping Input file.
The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
3. Click Choose Files.

4. Select the PCF(s) to convert.
A PCF has a file extension of .pcf.
306

PCFs may be selected all at once or each one may be added to the conversion list just prior
to being converted. Only those files with the check box selected are processed.
Files can be arranged in the order you want to process them by dragging-and-dropping the
file names in the conversion list.
In the example, the elements of the header, which includes files TPA-551-0012, 551-00513,
521-90100_BL, 521-90100, and 521-90102, are processed first.
Vents off of that header are processed next (in the example, 521-12101, 521-12113,
521-12112, 521-12111, 521-12138, 521-12137, 521-10103, 521-10104, 521-90461).
Finally, the separate detached section files (551-0012, 551-0041) are processed last.
5. Set the conversion options listed in the lower left-hand pane.
Condense Options
CAESAR II Element Properties
307

The options can be set identically for all conversion passes, or they can be changed for
each pass. The example uses Piping Materials based on Pipe Spec and also set a Diameter
Limit (exclude pipes below 3" nominal) as well as condense rigids, tees, and bends.
In this example, clear the check boxes for all files except those comprising the header. This
converts the header files. To process them together, define a Start Node of 0 for files 2
through 5 ("0" signifies "carry on numbering with the next available number"). Start
numbering the system with node 1000 and continue with an increment of 10.
This means that all of the elements from all of the files are combined, sorted, ordered,
numbered, and so forth. For example, a header from the first five files is processed before
adding branches from the first file as though they came from a single large PCF. This is
assured by processing a group of files together during the same process, and defining the
Start Node for files after the first in the group as "0". Processing files individually or entering
a Start Node (or changing the Node Increment) for specific files in the group being
processed causes those files to be processed individually.
6. Begin the conversion by clicking the Begin Processing button.
This creates the first portion of the CAESAR II piping input model.
At this point, all CAESAR II functions (3D graphics pane, Classic Input Piping dialog box,
Elements dialog box) are available for examining the resultant piping input model.
Remember that you can use the Undo button.
7. In the example, you can select the vent lines to be processed separately, each with their
own numbering system.
8. In the example, check each of the next 9 file names, plus define the Start Node for each.
308

This causes each individual vent line to be fully processed before proceeding to the next.
Alternatively these files could be processed individually simply by running them one at a
time.
The vents are processed as requested.
309

Undo is available.
310

9. Process the second detached section, with both files processed together, and the Start
Node set at node at 10000.
311

After the conversion processing completes, the CAESAR II piping input model looks like this
in the example.
At this point, the entries for Delta Coordinates, Temperatures, Pressures, and so forth may
contain values calculated to several decimal places due to repetitive unit conversions and
other calculations during the conversion process. For example, see the DX = -5390.7523
mm and the Temp 1 = 250.0214C.
These entries can be automatically rounded to the nearest integer by closing the APCF
Import dialog box using the "X" in the right top corner.
We recommend that this round-off process not be done until all PCFs have been
imported. This is because connectivity is determined based upon sharing global
coordinates. If element delta coordinates get rounded off, then nodal global coordinates may
get changed enough that they fall outside of the connection tolerances.
312
Warnings in Log.RTF file

During the conversion process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower right
of the dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file (in the case where
many PCFs are being combined into a single CAESAR II model) or the first CAESAR II file in
the list (where one or more PCFs are being combined into individual CAESAR II models).
1. Click Save Warnings to save the warnings to a different file.
Topics
PCF Interface Custom Attributes..................................................313
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) ............................328
PCF Interface Custom Attributes

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing

components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
313

You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit
Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit
Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF
Displays the conversion factor used to convert the

user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
This is an optional task. You can review the default file and determine if you need to
make changes to fit your model.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
314

An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
3. Save, and close the file.
PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
315

1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping
The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
316

The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
317

Syntax for each support type is:
<Support Name>
<N->
<Restraint Function>
<MU=>
<GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that
contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support
Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register
as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N> - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed
on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and
so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint,
Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger, respectively. The last two create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".
318
A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the

support/pipe installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to
the "direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and
B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with +
or -. See the figure below.
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
319

Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
320

Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
321

These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B
MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE
GUI
MU=0.3
or
322

UGUIDE
C
MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
This restraint maps to two functions:
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL
VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL
B
MU=0.3
MU=0.3
323
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL
+VERT
MU=0.3
LIM
MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL
+VERT
MU=0.3
MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT
324

These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION
+C
GAP=aMM
-C
GAP=bMM
325

-VERT
GAP=cMM
+VERT
GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.
PCF Stress Intensification Factor Mapping

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS
PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE
Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as

shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS
(optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the

applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX
(optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
Io=X.XX
(optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)
326
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF
PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 316) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the PCF
menu command.
327

1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

How to Use the Advanced PCF Import (APCF)

1. Click Environment > Advanced PCF Import (APCF) from the Piping Input menu.
328

The Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box displays.
2. Click the Choose Files button.
A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.
You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
Remove PCF(s) from the File Name list by pressing Delete on the keyboard.
The selected file(s) displays in the File Name portion of the dialog box.
3. Enter the Start Node and Increment value for each of the file names.
4. Change any of the Conversion Options in the lower left-hand pane as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 331)
Condense Tees (on page 1162)
Condense Elbows (on page 332)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 332)
Combine PCF Files (on page 332)
329
Model Rotation (on page 332)
Diameter Limit (on page 333)
Material Number (on page 333)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 333)
5. Click the Begin Processing button to initiate the conversion process.

During the Conversion Process, Status Messages display in the Message Area in the lower
right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG.RTF, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the Combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
6. View your new CAESAR II input model.
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:
Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
330
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
Restraints
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections transfer (in

this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). The user can easily change the
thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
Phantom components (PCF items marked as "CONTINUATION" or "STATUS DOTTED"

or "MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE") are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 331) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 331) to
zero.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
The default value is TRUE.
331

Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
Use Pipe Materials Only
Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files
Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Model Rotation
The rotation of the +X-axis of the CAESAR II model should be rotated about the vertical axis
away from the PCF's East compass point. The default setting is zero, which imposes no rotation.
Select +90 to rotate the model a positive 90-degrees. Select -90 to rotate the model a negative
90-degrees.
Z can also be vertical based on special execution setting.
Alternatively, you can rotate the model after importing it to CAESAR II. Use the Rotate
command on the Block Operations toolbar.
332

Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.
Show Informational Messages

Displays informational messages upon the conversion of nominal to actual diameters, schedule
to wall thickness, and specific gravity to density. Click Environment > Show Informational
Messages.
Clear the check box to suppress these messages.
Reset View on Refresh

Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When this option is
turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
CAESAR II Configuration
Opens the configuration file for review and editing. For more information, see Configuration and
Environment (on page 48).
333
Global Menu
Performs actions associated with commands you can perform on a group of elements, such as
the block operations (Rotate, Invert, and so forth).
Rotate
Rotates elements defined in the block.
Displays the Block Rotate dialog box. This dialog box rotates the block through some angle
about the X, Y, or Z axis. For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).
Unskew
Returns skewed geometry to an orthogonal orientation.
Setup
Determines what in the block should be rotated, including restraints, displacements,
force/moments, uniform loads, flexible nozzles, flanges, and element characteristics. The
default is for all items that appear in the block to be rotated with the block.
Degrees
Specifies the degrees of the rotation.
Add Bends
Specifies that the software includes bends in the block rotation.
Delete
Deletes the selected block of elements.
A confirmation message displays before the delete action is taken.
For more information, see Performing Block Operations (on page 377).
Duplicate
Duplicates elements in a block.
Displays the Block Duplicate dialog box. You can make identical copies of the block. You can
also make a mirror image by flipping the chosen elements in one of the orthogonal planes.
Mirror imaging is done on the piping delta dimensions only. That is, restraints are copied but not
mirror imaged. A +Y restraint does not become a -Y restraint when mirrored in the XZ plane.
334
Setup - Restraints, displacements, forces/moments, uniform loads, nozzles, flanges, and

element characteristics can be individually included or excluded from the duplication.
After the type of duplication is determined, you must decide the following:
Where in the Elements List to put the duplicated group of elements, either at the end of the
current block, the end of the input file, or after a specific element in the model.
What node increments to add to the nodes in the block so that they define unique pipe
elements. Be sure this increment is large enough to avoid any duplication of node numbers.
335
Renumber
Rearrange the node numbers in the block.
Why use the Renumber command?
You can use this feature to clean up part or all of the piping system. It is not unusual to put the
entire model in one block and do a full renumber of all of the nodes.
To renumber the node numbers in a block

Make copies of any large jobs before renumbering them. Be particularly careful when
renumbering systems containing large numbers of interconnected restraints with CNodes.
Select the block of nodes you want to renumber from the 3D Graphics pane or in the Elements
dialog box.
Click the
Renumber icon in the Block Operations toolbar.
The Block Renumber dialog box displays.
Select whether you want the software to increment or renumber the block nodes.
Select Increment to renumber the selected block of nodes by the Node Increment you specify.
For example, if you have nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25 and 670 in a block, and you select Increment
and specify a Node Increment of 100, the software changes the node numbering in the block to
110, 130, 700, 125 and 770, respectively.
Select Renumber to activate the Start Node box and renumber the selected block of nodes
from the Start Node number by the Node Increment that you specify. For example, if you have
nodes of 10, 30, 600, 25, and 670 in a block, and you select Renumber and specify a Start
336

Node of 100 and a Node Increment of 10, the software changes the node block numbering to
100, 110, 120, 130, and 140, respectively.
Be sure that the Start Node and Node Increment values results in unique node
numbers for the elements being renumbered.
If you want to renumber the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block,
leave the Renumber the boundary nodes check box selected.
CAESAR II renumbers the nodes of the elements that are connected to the selected block and
the model remains connected in the same way as it was before the renumber. The boundary
nodes include the From and To nodes of the elements connected to the selected block, plus the
nodes of the auxiliary data block that are connected to the selected block.
The software renumbers every node in the selected block on the model.
If you clear the Renumber Boundary Nodes check box, the software does not apply the
increment or renumber action to restraints, displacements and branch connections in the
selected block of nodes.
CAESAR II does not typically renumber a CNode in a block, because the CNode is connected to
a node outside the block. The software does not renumber CNodes if they do not connect to a
node in the block and on the piping system.
To avoid any confusion in these instances, start the renumbering at a node greater than the
largest node in the model. If all of the nodes renumber successfully (that is, there are not any
dangling CNodes), then you can specify a Node Increment with a negative increment to shift
the newly renumbered nodes back into the original range.
Typically, you may graphically select multiple blocks to renumber. However CAESAR II can only
perform the renumber operation for the first block. In this case, CAESAR II displays a message
box with information about which block that is renumbered. You can then continue to renumber
the second block and so on until all blocks are renumbered.
Invert
Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The Invert
command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the node
numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements dialog
box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
337

Why use the Invert command?
The Invert command can be very helpful when you have imported a new piping input model from
an external source, such as a Piping Component File (PCF), and you want to re-assign node
numbers. For example, for an imported run from a termination to a tee, invert it to run from the
tee to the termination.
To invert a block of elements

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) you want to invert, either from the Elements dialog box
or from the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers dialog box.
If you select a block of elements from the Elements dialog box or from the Line
Numbers dialog box, the corresponding elements are selected (highlighted) in the 3D
Graphics panel.
If you select a block of elements in the 3D Graphics pane or from the Line Numbers
dialog box, the corresponding elements are NOT selected (highlighted) in the Elements
dialog box.
2. Click the
Invert icon on the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternatively, right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu and click Block
Operation > Invert.
The node numbers are reversed.
Notice that nothing changes in the 3D Graphics pane- only the node numbers are
changed.
3. Review the Elements dialog box to verify the new node number assignments.
The From Node and To Node values are renumbered for the selected elements.
For example:
Element Number
Original node numbers
New node number
21
95 - 100
115 - 110
22
100- 105
110 -105
23
105 - 110
105 - 100
24
110 - 115
100 - 95
Change Sequence
Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while preserving the geometry.
338

Why use the Change Sequence command?
Typically, the Elements dialog box displays by the order of elements entered during the input
process. The order in the list is important because when you specify some particular input
values for an element in the list, that value propagates to all the elements in the list following it
UNTIL the value is explicitly changed.
When you import piping model data (in the form of PCFs) from other piping input design
software such as Intergraph Smart3D, CAESAR II imports the elements in one sequence.
However, that sequence may not be what you want. For example, you may want all the high
pressure elements to be listed together. This reduces the number of unique input fields to verify
and can help you to logically organize the model. You can re-organize elements in a way so that
those with similar carry-forward properties are placed consecutively.
To change the sequence of elements

1. Select the block of elements (nodes) whose sequence you want to change, either from the
Elements dialog box, from the 3D Graphics pane, or from Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Click Change Sequence
in the Block Operations tool bar.
Alternately, you can right-click in the Elements dialog box, and then click Block Operations
> Change Sequence.
The Change Sequence dialog box displays.
3. Choose where in the list you want to move the selected block.
To move the selected block after a given element, click Follow.
To move the selected block before a given element, click Precede.
The cursor changes to indicate the operation is in progress.

4. From the Elements dialog box, position the cursor in the line where you want the selected
block to be placed. Alternatively, you can select elements in the 3D Graphics pane and then
click on the element where you want to move them.
The selected block of elements displays in the new order.
The 3D graphics model does not change. This command only affects the Elements
dialog box display contents. Remember that this command provides you with the capability
of organizing "like" types of elements together.
To re-store the order of the Elements dialog box to the original list, use the
Undo button.
339
Options Menu
Performs actions associated with the display of the model.
Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box
Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. Click the arrow on the icon to
indicate what size you want the restraints to display on your model , as well as whether or not
the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
as well as whether or not the software displays anchors with or without connecting nodes
(CNodes).
340
Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.
Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the hangers to display on your model ,
(CNodes).
Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
341
Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.
Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
You can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only
anchors by selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar
in piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
model, and not the node numbers.
Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
the assigned colors to meet your needs.
342
Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
colors to meet your needs.
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
343
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insulation Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
assigned colors to meet your needs.
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
344
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
View Menu
Performs actions associated with viewing the model.
Toolbars
Changes the toolbars. The toolbars can be displayed or hidden by clicking View > Toolbars and
checking or unchecking the toolbar.
You can customize where toolbars display and their locations. Click View > Toolbars, or
right-click the toolbar, and then select Customize. You can also customize toolbars by pressing
Shift and dragging buttons to new positions.
Customize Dialog Box
Controls options for customizing the CAESAR II interface.
Click Reset on the Customize dialog box to undo changes.
Toolbars Tab (Customize Dialog Box)

Commands Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Options Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Keyboard Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
Menus Tab (Customize Dialog Box)
The Classic Piping Input and the 3D Model include the following toolbars.
Standard Toolbar (on page 346)
Standard Operators Toolbar (on page 347)
Standard Views Toolbar (on page 348)
Display Options Toolbar (see "Display Options" on page 349)
345
Cutting Planes Toolbar (on page 350)
Markups Toolbar (see "Markups" on page 349)
Plot Tools Toolbar (on page 350)
Legends Toolbar (on page 351)
Edit Mode Toolbar (on page 352)
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar (on page 353)
Navigation Tools Toolbar (on page 353)
Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar (on page 354)
List Operations Toolbar (on page 354)
Input Tools Toolbar (on page 355)
Block Operations Toolbar (on page 356)
Aux Tools Toolbar (on page 357)
Edit Tools Toolbar (on page 358)
Reference CAD Models Toolbar (on page 359)
Wizards Toolbar (on page 359)
Import Model Toolbar (on page 359)
Organization Tools Toolbar (on page 360)
Input Card Toolbar (on page 360)
Standard Toolbar
The Standard toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains the following functions.
New - Starts a new piping job. You can also click File > New on the main menu. CAESAR II
opens the New Job Name Specification dialog box.
Open - Opens a different piping input job. You are prompted for the file to open.
Save - Saves the selected piping input job. You are prompted for the file name.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the
Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location
Print - Prints the selected piping input job.
346

Standard Operators Toolbar
The Standard Operators toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another
operator. (For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you specify.
Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a box
diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Selection - Fits the selected element in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow keys
on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start a
bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D
Graphics" on page 381). During rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of the
geometry details may disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display speed.
The actual conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the rotation is
complete, the model returns to its original state.
Orbit Vertical- Rotates the model on the vertical axis only.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding down
the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active by
holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse. This provides
the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either side.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or down
holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom. Alternatively,
press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the model while in
another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Walkthrough - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application. This
command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information, see
Walking Through the Model (on page 388).
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the model
to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or remove
elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
347

Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
information items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette, or a two-line plot. Restraints and other
element information items display.
Translucent Objects - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other
element information items display. You can select Translucent Objects with any of the
other display options (Shaded View, Hidden Line Wire Frame, Wire Frame, Silhouette,
Center Line View). Select a different type of operator to deactivate Translucent Objects.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Standard Views Toolbar

The Standard Views toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
348

Display Options
The Display Options toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
Plot Properties - Opens the Plot Settings dialog where you can adjust properties for the
current model.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
Markups
The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
349

Cutting Planes Toolbar
The Cutting Planes toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
3D Cutting Plane - Defines the cutting plane for the model. This option is useful when
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers are
not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the model at
a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If cutting
the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom command to
expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command again.
This command can be used along any of the three axes.
Plot Tools Toolbar

The Plot Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Restraints - Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Restraints.
Anchors - Turns the display of anchors on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Anchors (on page 340).
Hangers - Turns the display of hangers on or off on the current model. For more
information, see Hangers (on page 341).
Displacements - Turns the display of displacements on or off on the current model.
Nozzles - Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off on the current model.
Flanges - Turns the display of flanges on or off on the current model.
Nozzle Limits - Turns nozzle checking on or off on the current model. You can also specify
the size the nozzle limit that displays on the model by clicking the arrow on the icon and
choosing a size.
Expansion Joints & Rigids - Turns the display of expansion joints or rigid elements on or
off on the current model.
Tees - Turns the display of Tees on or off on the current model.
Compass - Turns the display of the orientation compass on or off on the current model. The
compass indicates the X, Y and Z axis direction of the model.
350

Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. You
can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only anchors by
selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar in
piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
Lengths - Turns the display of element lengths on or off on the model. Alternatively, press
L.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when
you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This
command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U. For more information, see
Range (on page 340).
Find Node - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You can
enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only the From
node number, the software searches for the first available element that starts with that node
number. If you enter only the To node number, the software searches for an element ending
with that node number. When the software locates the element it highlights the element and
fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better identify the location of the highlighted element
within the model.
Legends Toolbar
The Legends toolbar lets you quickly view legends for areas of the model input. You can access
this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
following functions.
Materials- Opens the Materials legend, where you can make changes to the color display
settings for materials on the model.
Piping Codes - Opens the Piping Codes legend, where you can view and make changes to
the color display settings for piping codes on the model.
Insulation - Opens the Insulation legend, where you can view and make changes to the
color display settings for insulation on the model.
Diameter - Opens the Pipe Diameters legend, where you can view pipe diameter
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for pipes on the model.
Wall Thickness - Opens the Wall Thickness legend, where you can view wall thickness
dimensions and make changes to the color display settings for wall thicknesses on the
model.
Forces - Opens the Forces/Moments legend, where you can view the forces and moments
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for forces and
moments on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the
various forces and moments.
351

Uniform Loads - Opens the Uniform Loads legend, where you can view the uniform loads
applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for uniform loads on
the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
uniform loads.
Wind/Wave - Opens the Wind/Wave Loads legend, where you can view the the wind or
wave loads applied to each node and make changes to the color display settings for loads
on the model. Click the arrow buttons at the top of the legend to scroll through the various
wind or wave loads.
Show Temps- Opens the Temperatures legend, where you can view the temperatures of
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for temperatures.
Show Pressures- Opens the Pressures legend, where you can view the pressures on
model elements and make changes to the color display settings for pressures.
Corrosion - Opens the Corrosion legend, where you can view the elements that have
corrosion specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing corrosion.
Pipe Density- Opens the Pipe Density legend, where you can view the elements with pipe
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing pipe density.
Fluid Density- Opens the Fluid Density legend, where you can view the elements with fluid
density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing fluid density.
Insulation Density- Opens the Insulation Density legend, where you can view the elements
with insulation density specified and make changes to the color display settings for showing
insulation density.
Edit Mode Toolbar

The Edit Mode toolbar lets you move selected elements on the model. You can access this
toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the
Move Geometry - Moves selected elements to a new location in the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the x-axis on the model.
Move Geometry {Y-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the y -axis on the model.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Moves selected elements along the z-axis on the model.
For more information, see Moving Elements (on page 389).
352

CAESAR II Tools Toolbar
The CAESAR II Tools toolbar contains common functions to the CAESAR II software. You can
access this toolbar from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar
contains the following functions.
CAESAR II Configuration - Contains instructions specifying how CAESAR II operates on a
particular computer and how it performs a particular analysis. Each time that you open the
software, it searches for this configuration file in the current data directory and uses it to
perform the analysis. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page
48).
Start/Run (Error Checker) - Sends the model through interactive error checking. This is the
first step of analysis. When the error check is complete, the Errors and Warnings dialog
box displays the results. For more information, see Error Checking (on page 522).
Batch Run - Error checks the model in a non-interactive way. This process halts only for
fatal errors. It uses the existing or default static load cases and performs the static analysis.
Edit Static Load Cases - Displays the Static Analysis dialog box. For more information on
static analysis, see Static Load Case Editor.
View Static Results - Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open
job. The Static Output Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a
static analysis. For more information, see Static Output Processor (on page 575).
Dynamic Analysis - Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics. For more information, see Dynamic Analysis
Workflow (on page 635).
Navigation Tools Toolbar

The Navigation Tools toolbar contains functions that help you move about the Classic Piping
Input dialog box or the 3D Model. This toolbar contains the following functions.
First Element - Skips to the first element.
Previous Element - Skips to the previous element.
Next Element - Skips to the next element.
Last Element - Skips to the last element.
Continue - Moves the dialog box to the next element in the model. The software adds a
new element if there is no next element.
353

Duplicate Element - Duplicates the last element in a model so that you can quickly
continue building the model. Select the last element, and then click Duplicate Element. For
more information on duplicating groups of elements in a model, see Duplicate (on page
334).
If you select an element that is not at the end of the model and click Duplicate
Element, the software continues to the next element in the model without duplicating the
selected element.
Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar

The Reset and Refresh Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box, the 3D Model, and the Structural Modeler, contains the following functions.
Reset Plot - Resets the view to the default settings.
Reset Plot is not available on the Structural Modeler.
Reset View - Controls the way graphics behave when you add or modify elements. When
this option is turned on, CAESAR II resets the plot to the default view each time you refresh.
Lock Graphics - Locks the 3D model so you cannot make any graphics updates. When the
graphic is locked, the icon displays highlighted in the toolbar. Click Lock Graphics again to
unlock the model for updating.
Lock Graphics is not available on the Structural Modeler.
List Operations Toolbar

The List Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
List Input - Displays the model in a spreadsheet view at the bottom of the Classic Piping
Input dialog box. From this view, you can quickly review and enter input data. Additionally,
you can rotate the 3D model along the various axes and duplicate input values from the List
Input view.
354

Input Tools Toolbar
The Input Toolbars toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains the following functions.
Archive - Assigns a password to the job to prevent inadvertent alteration of the model or to
type the password to unlock the file. Archived input files cannot be altered or saved without
this password; however, they can be opened and reviewed. For more information, see
Archive Dialog Box (on page 232).
Insert - Inserts an element. For more information, see Insert Element Dialog Box.
Delete - Deletes the current element.
Break - Divides an element into two or more individual elements. For more information, see
Break (on page 245).
Global Coordinates - Specifies the absolute (global) coordinates for the start node of each
discontiguous system segment. For more information, see Global (on page 238).
Close Loop - Closes a loop by filling in the delta coordinates between two nodes in the
model.
Increment Node - Specifies the increment between nodes. CAESAR II uses the nodal
increment set in Configure/Setup when generating the From and To nodes for new
elements. You can override this behavior by typing a different value in this dialog box. For
more information, see Auto Node Number Increment (on page 69).
Distance - Finds the distance between two specified nodes or between any two points you
select on the model.
Valve Flange Database - Provides access to the valve and flange databases. This
command displays the Valve and Flange Database: <database name> dialog box. For
more information, see Valve (on page 247).
Expansion Joint Modeler - Displays the Expansion Joint Database <data file> and
Expansion Joint Modeler dialog boxes. For more information, see Expansion Joint (on
page 252).
Title - Displays the title page of the current job. This is up to 60 lines of text that is stored
with the problem, and may be used for detailing run histories, discussing assumptions, and
so on. These lines may be printed with the output report through the input echo.
Hanger Design Criteria - Specifies hanger design criteria for the current model. For more
information, see Hanger Design Control Data (on page 262).
Intersection SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification
factors (SIFs) for various intersection configurations under different codes. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 783).
355

Bend SIF Scratchpad - Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors
(SIFs) for various bend configurations under different codes. You can access this
scratchpad by selecting Analysis > SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad
option on the Classic Piping input or on the 3D model.
Special Execution Options - Displays the Special Execution Parameters dialog box.
Click Environment > Special Execution Parameters. These parameters remain set for
that particular job.
Undo - Reverses or cancels any modeling steps. This can also be accomplished by
pressing Ctrl-Z. You can undo an unlimited number of steps. Undo is limited only by the
amount of available memory.
Redo - Repeats the last step done You can redo an unlimited number of steps. Redo is
limited by the amount of available memory.
Block Operations Toolbar

The Block Operations toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box
or the 3D Model, contains the following functions. For more information, see Performing Block
Operations (on page 377).
Rotate- Rotates elements defined in the block. For more information, see Rotate (on page
334).
Duplicate- Duplicates elements in a block. For more information, see Duplicate (on page
334).
Delete - Deletes the selected block of elements.
Renumber - Rearrange the node numbers in the block. For more information, see
Renumber (on page 336).
Invert- Assigns new From Node and To Node values to the selected block of elements. The
Invert command reverses the order of the elements in the selected group as well as the
node numbering while preserving the geometry of the input model.
Contiguous segments (sets of elements) may be selected in either the Elements
dialog box, the 3D Graphics pane, or the Line Numbers dialog box.
For more information, see Invert (on page 337).
Change Sequence - Changes or rearranges the sequence (order) of elements while
preserving the geometry. For more information, see Change Sequence (on page 338).
356

Aux Tools Toolbar
The Aux Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains auxiliary data functions most often used in piping input. Use this toolbar to
quickly access the Auxiliary Data dialog box found in the piping input. This toolbar includes the
Bend - Puts a bend at the To node of every element that you have selected on
the model. Select an element(s) on the model and click Bend to view the Bends
tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the
down arrow to change the icon function to delete all bends or toggle between the
select and delete functions.
Rigids - Replaces the element(s) that you selected with a rigid. Select an
element(s) on the model and click Rigids to view the Rigids tab on the Auxiliary
Data dialog box of the current piping input job. Click the down arrow to change
the icon function to delete all rigid elements or toggle between the select and
delete functions.
Expansion Joint - Replaces the currently selected element with an expansion
joint. Select an element(s) on the model and click Expansion Joint to view the
Expansion Joints tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input
job. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all expansion joints
or toggle between the select and delete functions.
Reducer - Select an element(s) on the model and click Reducer to view the
Reducers tab on the Auxiliary Data dialog box of the current piping input job.
Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all reducers or toggle
between the select and delete functions (Toggle).
SIFs/Tees - Inserts a SIF or Tee at the end of the selected elements on the
model.
Restraints - Adds a restraint to each of the selected elements on the model.
Hangers - Adds a hanger to each of the selected elements on the model. Click
the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all hangers or toggle
between the select and delete functions.
Nozzles - Adds a nozzle to each of the selected elements on the model.
Displacements - Adds a displacement at each of the selected elements on the
model.
Forces/Moments - Adds a forces and moments at each of the selected elements
on the model.
Wind/Wave - Adds wind or wave details to each of the selected elements on the
model.
357

Uniform Loads - Adds a uniform load to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Allowables - Adds an allowable stress at each of the selected elements on the
model.
Node Names - Adds a node name to each of the selected elements on the
model.
Offsets - Adds an offset to each of the selected elements on the model.
Flange - Adds a flange to either end or both ends of the selected elements on the
model. Click the down arrow to change the icon function to delete all flanges or
toggle between the select and delete functions.
Edit Tools Toolbar

The Edit Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
3D Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used editing windows in piping
input. This toolbar includes the following functions.
Node Number Edit Window- Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box. For more
information, see Node Numbers (on page 108).
Mini-Delta Box - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box. For more information, see Deltas
(on page 110).
Mini-Pipe Size Box - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box. For more information, see
Pipe Sizes (on page 113).
Mini-Temps and Pressures Box - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions dialog box.
For more information, see Temperatures (on page 117).
Mini-Material Box - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box. For more information, see
Materials (on page 199).
Mini-Elastic Properties Box - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog box. For more
information, see Material Elastic Properties (on page 222).
Mini-Densities Box - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box. For more information, see
Densities (on page 224).
Mini-Aux Screens Box - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box. For more information,
see Auxiliary Element Data (on page 1045).
358

Reference CAD Models Toolbar
The Reference CAD Models toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input
dialog box or the 3D Model, contains icons that let you import CAD-based models into the piping
CADWorx Model - Opens a CADWorx model for use with this model. If you have already
opened a CADWorx model, click the down arrow on the icon to select Load CWx Model.
For more information, see Open CADWorx Model (on page 231).
S3D/SPR Model - Opens the Load S3D/SPR Model (see "Load an S3D/SPR Model" on
page 390) dialog box. If you have already opened a S3D or SPR model, click the down
arrow on the icon to select other options, including the Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model, Dim
S3D/SPR Model, S3D/SPR Visibility Options. These options only display when you have
a S3D/SPR model already open. For more information, see S3D/SPR Import View (see
"S3D/SPR Model View" on page 390) and S3D/SPR Visibility Options (on page 395).
Wizards Toolbar
The Wizards toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the 3D
Model, contains icons that let you access the most commonly used wizards in piping input. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Static Seismic Wizard - Opens the Seismic Wizard, which selects a
particular Seismic Code and its associated data. For more information,
see Seismic Wizard (on page 268).
Optimization Wizard - Opens the Optimization Wizard, which assists
with expansion loop design. For more information, see Optimization
Wizard (on page 275).
Import Model Toolbar

The Import Model toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or
the 3D Model, contains functions that let you access various import dialog boxes used in piping
Include Piping Files - Opens the Include Piping Files dialog box, which lets you include
other piping models into the current piping model. For more information, see Include Piping
Input Files (on page 304).
359
Include Structural Files - Opens the Include Structural Files dialog box, , which lets you
include structural models into the current job. For more information, see Including
Structural Input Files (on page 305).
APCF - Opens the Advanced PCF Import (APCF) dialog box, which provides an
interactive, customizable way to import Piping Component Files (PCFs) into the CAESAR II
piping environment. For more information, see Advanced PCF Import (APCF) (on page
305).
Organization Tools Toolbar

The Organization Tools toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box or the 3D Model, contains functions let you organize or move the elements on a model. This
toolbar includes the following functions.
Move Geometry - Selects or moves nodes or node groups on the model.
Move Geometry (X-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the X axis.
Move Geometry (Y-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Y axis.
Move Geometry (Z-Axis) - Restricts mouse movement on the model to the Z axis.
Input Card Toolbar

The Input Card toolbar, which you can access from the Structural Modeler, contains the
Copy the selected card - Copies the selected card from current card stack.
Paste the previously copied card - Pastes the card you previously copied into the card
stack.
Delete selected card - Deletes the selected card from the current card stack.
360
Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 340).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
Remove an existing line number.
Set and reset visibility options to hide and unhide elements.
Assign a color to an individual line number.
To reassign one or more elements from one line number to another existing line
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
361
Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.
Toggle Graphics Update

Turns graphics updating on or off.
Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
362
Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Review Error Report

Displays the Errors and Warnings dialog box. This option is only available if you have run the
File > Error Check command. For more information, see Error Check (on page 232).
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Review Static Results

Displays the results of the static load analysis. This option is only available if you have run
the Edit > Edit Static Load Cases command. For more information, see Edit Static Load
Cases.
Tools Menu
Performs actions associated with toolbars, mini-windows, and importing and exporting
displacements.
363
Reset Toolbar Layout

Sets toolbars to the default layout.
Mini-windows
Displays a list of mini-windows that you can display. Mini-windows provide a quick way to
provide specific types of data.
Node Numbers - Displays the Edit Node Numbers dialog box.
Edit Deltas - Displays the Edit Deltas dialog box.
Pipe Sizes - Displays the Edit Pipe Sizes dialog box.
Temps & Pressures - Displays the Edit Operating Conditions
dialog box.
Materials - Displays the Edit Materials dialog box.
Elastic Properties - Displays the Edit Elastic Properties dialog
box.
Densities - Displays the Edit Densities dialog box.
Auxiliary Data - Displays the Auxiliary Data dialog box.
Classic Input - Displays the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Import/Export Displacements from File

Imports or exports nodal displacements from a file.
CAESAR II Versions 5.10 and later enables you to import and export displacements to and from
a text file. This feature is very useful in situations where you need to define several
displacements in a CAESAR II model. You can import the displacements into a CAESAR II
model with a few mouse clicks instead of manually typing all the displacements in the Classic
Piping Input. A displacements file in the specified format must exist.
This feature works only on From and To nodes using a fixed file (.disp) format for
versions 5.10 and 5.20.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) , this feature works on the From and To nodes, CNodes, and
Bend middle nodes in either the fixed file format (.disp), or the comma separated value (.csv)
format. You can easily generate and maintain a displacement file in .csv format using Microsoft
Excel.
364

Import/Export Displacements Dialog Box
Controls parameters for importing and exporting nodal displacements.
Export Displacements To a File
Specifies the file name for the export. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Export
Exports the nodal displacements to the specified file.
Import Displacements From a File
Specifies the file name for the import. Type the full path to the file, or use the browse button
to browse to the file.
Import
Imports the specified nodal displacement file.
Displacement File Formats

A displacement file is a flat text file in (versions 5.10 and 5.20), which can be created and edited
by any text editor such as Notepad.
In CAESAR II Version 2016 (8.0) a displacement file can be in either fixed format .disp or
comma separated value format .csv.
For both formats, use * to indicate a comment line in the displacement file. You can type
anything on the line following the *.
Displacement files can have as many comment lines as necessary.
The comment line is not counted in line numbering in the file format descriptions.
Fixed Format
A fixed format displacement file has the .disp extension and this format:
1. The first line has only one the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the
translational displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line must have 58 values: Node X, Y, Z and 54 displacements for the nodes (6
degrees of freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number.
c.
The following three values, the three coordinates of a node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9.
365

e. The first character space is reserved for the comment "*", each of the 58 values must be
12 characters long so the total length of a displacement data line should be 697
(1+58x12) characters long.
f.
The position of each of the 54 displacement values is used to determine its location in a
CAESAR II model. For example, values at position 5, 8, 55 and 58 correspond to DX1,
and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model.
g. A value must occupy a 12 character field. When a value has fewer than 12 characters,
you must pad either to the left or right of the blanks to make it 12 characters in length. If
there is no displacement value, a 12 character blank field must be reserved for it.
When creating the blank space use the Space Bar. Do not use the Tab key.
Comma Separated Value Format

A comma separated value format displacement file has the .csv extension and follows this
format:
1. The first line has only the conversion factor value, which is used to divide the translational
displacements (DX, DY, and DZ) to convert them to the internal unit of inches.
2. The second line is either Y axis up or Z axis up to indicate the CAESAR II Coordinate
System that the following displacement data corresponds to.
3. All the remaining lines are displacement data lines:
a. Each line could have 58 values: Nodes X, Y, Z and the 54 displacements for the node (6
degrees-of-freedom times 9 vectors is 54).
b. The first value is a node number, which is required.
c.
The following three values, the three coordinates of the node, are ignored.
d. The final 54 values are displacements of the node, in the order: DX1, DY1, DZ1, RX1,
RY1, RZ1... DX9, DY9, DZ9, RX9, RY9, RZ9. They are optional. You can specify all 54
values, or not a single value, or any number of values in between.
e. Values are separated by commas. The length of a displacement data line is not fixed.
f.
Because each value is followed by a comma, a comma counter is used to determine the
placement of the value in a CAESAR II model. For example, values at positions 5, 8, 55
and 58 correspond to DX1, and RX1, DZ9, and RZ9 of the node in the model,
respectively.
g. A value can be any number of characters in length. When there is no displacement

value, you can use a zero length or blank field. For example, if a comma is followed by a
comma, or if a comma is followed by blank spaces and then a comma, it means that its
corresponding location in a CAESAR II model has no displacement value.
Generally, the csv format is recommended for a displacement file because it is relatively easy to
generate and maintain in Microsoft Excel. The fixed format of a displacement file is more
difficult to maintain.
A displacement file from version 5.10 or 5.20 cannot be used directly in CAESAR II
Version 2016 (8.0) because the formats are different.
366

Warning Messages
There are three kinds of warning messages:
1. Node xxx is not in the model - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does not exist in
the CAESAR II model.
2. Node xxx could not find an empty location - Indicates that a node in the displacement file
exists in the CAESAR II model but that the software thinks that all displacement slots in the
model have already been occupied by other nodes. In this case, it is still possible for you to
input displacements for the node through the CAESAR II Classic Piping Input dialog box.
3. Node xxx does not have displacements - Indicates that a node in the displacement file does
not have a displacement value.
where xxx denotes a node number such as 100.
Generally, when a warning message is issued it indicates that an error exists either in the
displacement file or in the corresponding CAESAR II model. Carefully examine the offending
node in the displacement file or in the corresponding model and correct the error.
Summary Report
The Import and Export Summary reports are generated in the import and export operations.
The reports provide information about the nodes in a displacement file just imported into a
CAESAR II Import model:
1. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import.
2. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import.
3. The number of displacement nodes that have been read in.
4. The number of displacement nodes that are not in the model.
5. The number of displacement nodes that cannot find empty locations in the model.
6. The number of displacement nodes that do not have displacements.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model.
8. The number of displacement nodes that are replacing values in the model.
9. The number of displacement nodes that are new in the model.
Similar in operation to the warning messages, the summary report can help you identify potential
problems in a displacement file. However, you should remember the following points:
1. Because every displacement data line in a displacement file has a node number, the total
number of nodes processed is equal to the total number of displacement data lines in the
file.
2. Each displacement data line should have a unique node number. However, if the same
node number appears in many data lines, it would be counted many times. In this case, the
displacement values in the last data line are used in the model, overwriting the previous
values.
3. If no node number appears in a displacement data line, CAESAR II indicates the
corresponding data line number and stops the import process.
367

4. If there is a node in a displacement file that is not in the model, or cannot find a slot in the
model, or does not have a displacement, the displacement file or the model should be
checked carefully to understand the reasons behind it.
5. If a displacement node exists both in the model and the displacement file, the displacement
values from the file are used to overwrite the ones in the model, and this node is counted as
a replacement node.
6. The number of displacement nodes existing in the model after import should be equal to the
number of displacement nodes existing in the model before import, plus the number of new
displacement nodes.
7. The number of displacement nodes that have stored displacements in the model should be
equal to the number of replacement nodes, plus the number of new displacement nodes.
Exporting Displacements to a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of a displacement file in the Export Displacements To a File box,
or click ... to browse to the file.
3. Click Export to send the nodal displacements to the selected file.
4. Click Done to exit the Import/Export Displacements dialog.
If there are no displacements in a CAESAR II job, an export operation creates a
displacement template file in which all nodes are listed according to the element list.
Importing Displacements from a File

1. Click Tools > Import/Export Displacements from File.
The Import/Export Displacements dialog box displays.
2. Type the path and name of the displacement file in the Import Displacements From a File
box, or click ... to browse to the file.
The Open dialog box displays.
368
Two file formats can be used to create a displacement file:

Fixed format with a .disp file extension.
Commas Separated Value format with a .csv file extension.
By default, displacement files display in comma separated values format(.csv).
You can also choose displacement files with the fixed format (.disp) by clicking
Displacement Import File (*.dsp) from the Files of type list.
3. Select the displacement file.

4. Click Open.
369

5. Click Import.
During the import process, if an erroneous condition is detected for a displacement node a
warning message displays. A summary report is generated after all displacement data is
processed.
For more details about warning messages and the summary report, see Imposed Loads.
6. After reviewing warning messages and a summary report, click Done.
The first two figures show displacement files Notepad for disp and csv formats. The third
and fourth figures show displacement files in Microsoft Excel.
For a detailed description of both file formats, see Displacement File Formats (on page 365).
370
Notepad Example (*.disp) format
Notepad Example (*.csv) format
Excel Example (*.csv) format

If a CAESAR II job has no displacements the displacement export operation creates a
displacement template file as shown below.
371
Excel Example (*.csv) format Displacement File Template
3D Modeler
When you start CAESAR II and start the piping input processor, the software automatically
displays a graphic representation of the model to the right of the Classic Piping Input dialog
box. To increase the window space available for graphics you can hide the Classic Piping
Input dialog box by clicking . The initial view for a job that has never been plotted displays
according to the configuration defaults. These defaults include:
A rendered view - restraints shown
XYZ compass - isometric view
Tees and nozzles highlighted - orthographic projection
The plotting begins by displaying the model in centerline/single line mode to speed up the
process. Then all the elements are rendered one-by-one. Later, the restraints and other relevant
items are added.
The model is fully operational while it is being drawn. You can apply any available option
to the model at any time. The status bar at the bottom displays the drawing progress in the form
372

of Drawing element X of Y. When the plot operation is complete the status message changes
to Ready.
When you hover the cursor over a button, the name of the button and a short description of the
functionality displays in the status bar at the bottom of the view window.
There are several methods of accomplishing nearly every command in the Input Plot utility. You
can access commands by clicking buttons, by selecting menu items, or by using hot keys.
Center Line View - Displays model data in single line mode. This often makes the view
clearer. In this mode, restraints and other element information items display. Display the
volume or double line plot by clicking the corresponding button. Press V to switch among
the views in the following order: Shaded View (rendered mode) / Two Line Mode / Center
Line View.
Shaded View - Displays the model as shaded 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Silhouette - Displays the model as a silhouette. Restraints and other element information
items display.
Hidden Line Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame with hidden lines removed.
Restraints and other element information items display.
373

Wire Frame - Displays the model as a wire frame. Restraints and other element
Translucent - Displays the model as translucent 3D shapes. Restraints and other element
Front - Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back - Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top - Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom - Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left - Displays the model from the left. Alternatively, press X.
Right - Displays the model from the right. Alternatively, press Shift + X.
Southeast ISO View - Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively,
press F10.
Node Numbers - Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N. Click
the down arrow to display node numbers for a specific element, such as for only restraints
or only anchors. Select Names Only to display only the node names on the model, and not
the node numbers.
Length - Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Select Element - Select a single element in the model. Hover over an element in the
model to display information about that element. Press Ctrl when you select to add or
remove elements from the selection.
Select Group - Select a group of elements in the model by dragging a window around
them. You can add elements to the selection by pressing Ctrl while dragging the window.
Remove elements from the selection by pressing Shift while dragging the window.
Perspective - Displays the model in perspective mode.
Orthographic - Displays the model in orthographic mode.
You can turn off the display of node numbers (for restraints, hangers, and anchors) for a
clearer view. The size of boundary condition symbols (such as restraints, anchors, and hangers)
is relative to the pipe size outer diameter. You can change the size of these symbols clicking the
black arrow to the right of the relevant button and selecting a size from the list.
You can adjust the color of the node numbers, lengths, elements, boundary conditions, and so
on by clicking Change Display Options . For more information, see 3D Graphics
Configuration (see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
374

Reset - Returns the model returns to its default state as defined by the configuration. Any
elements hidden by the Range command are restored.
Zoom - Increases or decreases the magnification of the model. Move the cursor up or
down holding the left mouse button. Release the mouse button to stop the zoom.
Alternatively, press + and - to zoom in and out. You can change the zoom level of the
model while in another command by rotating the mouse wheel.
Zoom to Window - Changes the magnification of the model to fit an area that you
specify. Click one corner of the area and then while holding the mouse button, stretch a
box diagonally to the opposite corner of the area
Zoom to Extents - Fits the entire model in the view.
Orbit - Rotates the model interactively. Rotate the model using the mouse or the arrow
keys on the keyboard. To use the mouse, click the left mouse button on the model to start
a bounding box. Hold the left mouse button and move the mouse to the other end of the
bounding box. Release the mouse button to update the view. If the bounding box is not
visible, check the corresponding box on the User Options tab of the Plot Configuration
dialog box For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D
Graphics" on page 381). During rotation, the model may in centerline mode, or some of
the geometry details may disappear or become distorted. This is to improve the display
speed. The actual conversion depends on the size and complexity of the model. After the
rotation is complete, the model returns to its original state.
Pan - Pans the model. The cursor changes to a hand. Move the cursor while holding
down the left mouse button. You can also pan the view while another command is active
by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving the mouse.
Walk Through - Explores the model with a setup similar to a virtual reality application.
This command produces the effect of walking towards the model. For more information,
see Walking Through the Model (on page 388).
Load CADWorx Model - Displays the model in CADWorx.
375
Building Models Quickly

CAESAR II has several features that help you build models more quickly from the 3D model.
Select one or groups of elements and right-click the model to access context menus so you
can quickly perform some of your most common tasks. See Performing Single-Element
Operations (on page 376) and Performing Block Operations (on page 377) for more
information.
Limit the items you display on the model to simplify the functions you need to use. See
Limiting the Display (on page 360) for more information.
Use legends to update properties across the current model. See Updating Properties from
the 3D Model (on page 380) for more information.
Performing Single-Element Operations

Access the most frequently used commands through a right-click Element context menu, all
without ever leaving your 3D model. These commands include:
Insert, break, or delete elements
Insert, delete, and edit restraints
Look up valve and flange data from the Valve and Flange Database
Insert or delete rigid elements (such as valves and flanges)
To quickly access single element commands from the 3D model

1. Select any element on the model and right-click the element to see the commands available
from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click menu. You must also
right-click directly on the element selected to access the Element context menu.
1. Select the element command that you want to perform.
The software completes the action and moves the cursor to the next logical box on the
piping input.
376
Performing Block Operations

Perform block (global) operations to elements in the model using one of the following methods:
To access Block Operations commands from the 3D model

1. Access the Block Operations commands from one of the following options:
a. Click the Block Operations toolbar, or
b. Select more than one element on the model and right-click to see the block operations
available from the context menu.
You must unlock the 3D model to access the right-click element context menu.
2. Select one of the following options:
Rotate
Duplicate
Delete
Renumber
Invert
Change Sequence
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To access Block Operations commands from the Elements dialog box

1. Right-click in the Elements dialog box to display the menu.
2. Click Block Operation.
3. Select one of the sub-menu items to perform the indicated operation.
Rotate
Delete
Duplicate
Nodes
377
Invert
Change Sequence
Status
You can also access block operation commands from the Global menu in piping input.
To define a block of elements in the 3D model

1. Click Select Element
the 3D model.
on the Standard Operators toolbar and select a single element on
The selected element highlights.

To select more than one element, press the Shift key while clicking the additional
elements.
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.
Alternatively, you can click Select Group
box around the items you want to select.
on the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a
The highlighted elements define the set that any Block Operations command affects. A block
can contain any number of elements, from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements from the Elements dialog box

1. Move the cursor to the first element in the group (block) to be operated on and click the row
number for that item on the far left of the dialog box.
The software highlights the row for the element highlights in the Element dialog box and in
the 3D Graphics pane.
2. Move the cursor to the last element in the group (block) to be operated on, press Shift and
click the corresponding row number.
3. Alternatively, you can Select Group
around the items you want to select.
in the Standard Operators toolbar and draw a box
The entire group (block) of elements highlights.

The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations affect. A block may contain
any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
To define a block of elements by selecting by Line Number

1. Display the Line Numbers dialog box.
2. Select the element or block of elements for which you want to perform a block operation.
The corresponding element(s) highlight in the 3D Graphics pane.
The highlighted rows define the elements that any block operations change. A block may
contain any number of elements from a single element to every element in the model.
378
Limiting the Display

Sometimes it is necessary to limit the amount of information displayed on the screen. This may
be useful when the model is large, or if it has many similar looking branches.
Find - Displays a specific element in the view. This command displays a dialog box
that allows you to specify the From and To nodes for which you want to search. You
can enter the node numbers in either of the two fields, or in both. If you entering only
the From node number, the software searches for the first available element that
starts with that node number. If you enter only the To node number, the software
searches for an element ending with that node number. When the software locates
the element it highlights the element and fits it in the view. You can zoom out to better
identify the location of the highlighted element within the model.
trying to emphasize a specific element. In many cases, the elements or node numbers
are not defined consecutively. Because of this, it may be easier to cut a portion of the
model at a certain location to see more details.
When the cutting plane displays, use the handles to move and or rotate the planes. If
cutting the plane's handles are not visible, or the display goes blank, use the Zoom
command to expand the view. To disable the cutting plane, select the command
again.
Range - Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful
when you need to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large
model. This command displays the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
For more information, see Range (on page 340).
Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers pane which allows graphical editing of
line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected on the
3D graphical display.
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line Numbers in
the Line Numbers pane.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number pane, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to perform
Block operations.
379
Updating Properties from the 3D Model

You can update many of the piping input properties globally from within the Legends dialog box
in the 3D model.
To update a piping input property from the 3D model

1. Select the property you want to update using the Legends toolbar in 3D model.
You can also update many of these properties by right-clicking, selecting Highlights from
the context menu, and then specifying the property that you want to edit.
The Legend dialog box opens with the selected property displayed.
2. Double-click on the property value in the left column to open the Edit box.
3. Type a new value in the Edit box and press ENTER or click anywhere in the dialog box.
The software updates all elements that have the same property value, represented in the
Legend dialog box, on the 3D model, and in the List dialog box.
Currently, the software does not include global update functionality for the following
piping input properties:
Materials
Piping Codes
Forces
Uniform Loads
Wind/Wave Data
Displacements
Pipe Density
380
Configuring 3D Graphics
The CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine remembers the state of the model between sessions.
When you exit and return, the model displays in the same state in which it was last viewed.
To obtain a more uniform look for the graphics, change the color and font options:
1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup on the main menu to display the CAESAR II Configuration
Editor dialog box.
2. Open the Graphics Settings category.
3. Set the Always Use System Fonts and Always Use System Colors options to True under
the Visual Options section.
These settings are stored in the computer's registry and CAESAR II always displays the
graphics according to these settings.
If the settings are set to False, then the state of each model is maintained individually as an
XML data file (jobname.XML) in the current data folder. After starting another input session,
CAESAR II reads this XML file and restores the 3D graphics to its previous state. This includes
the rotation and zoom level of the model; color settings, data display, and the current graphics
operator.
381

Option
Description
Colors
Select any color item in the list, then click

to display a Windows color selection
tool. Select the new color. Click Reset All to return all of the settings to CAESAR II
defaults, as defined in configuration,.
Fonts
Selecting any font item in the list, then click

to display the standard Windows
font selection tool. Set the options to meet your requirements and click OK.
Changing the Model Display

You can specify the way the model displays when you open a file. The session can start with a
preset command active (such as Zoom), or start with the last command still active. Similarly, the
graphics can start in a preset view (such as isometric), or in the last rotated zoomed position.
Option
Description
Show Bounding Box
Determines if rotations using the mouse include an outline box

surrounding the model.
382

Hide Overlapped
Text
Prevents text from appearing on top of other text items.
Restore Previous
Operator
Determines whether the software remembers your last command

(operator) between sessions or always defaults to a specified
command.
Restore Previous
View
Determines whether the graphics engine remembers the last displayed

view of the model, or defaults to a specified view.
Default Projection
Mode
Determines the initial projection style of the model.
Visibility
Alters the degree of transparency when translucent pipe is activated.

Increasing this value makes it easier to see through the pipe elements.
The Visibility option is only effective when viewing the model in
rendered mode.
Markers
Displays a symbol denoting the elements end points.
Highlighting Graphics
You can review the piping model in the context of certain data such as by diameter, wall
thickness, temperature, or pressure.
You can make changes to some piping input properties from the Legends dialog box. The
software updates all elements that have the same property value in the model. For more
information, see Updating Properties from the 3D Model (on page 380).
Command
Description
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this
option to see the diameter variations throughout the system or to verify
that diameter changes have been made. Alternatively, press D. A color
key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change the
Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color.

Use this option to see the wall thickness variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. Alternatively, press
W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Insulation
Thickness
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the insulation thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in
the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
383

You can change the display to cladding thickness or refractory
thickness by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the cladding thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or refractory
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different

color. Use this option to see the refractory thickness variations
throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation thickness or cladding
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this
option to see the material variations throughout the system or to verify
that changes have been made. Alternatively, press M. A color key
displays the materials defined in the model. You can change the
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use
this option to see the piping code variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made.
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different

color. Use this option to see the corrosion variations throughout the
system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use
this option to see the pipe density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the pipe
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use
this option to see the fluid density variations throughout the system or
to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays the fluid
densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
384

Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color.

Use this option to see the insulation density variations throughout the
the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to cladding density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color.

Use this option to see the cladding density variations throughout the
the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a
different color. Use this option to see the variations throughout the
the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can
You can change the display to insulation density, cladding density, or
refractory density by selecting that option from the list.
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color.

Use this option to see the refractory density variations throughout the
the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the
You can change the display to insulation density, insulation or cladding
unit weight, or insulation density by selecting that option from the list.
The Legend dialog box can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page, even if the actual legend window has been dragged away from the
view.
385
Manipulating the Toolbar

You can rearrange or remove buttons on toolbars. There are two methods to make these
adjustments.
Right-click the toolbar, and click Customize.
Remove or reposition the button using drag and drop.
To remove buttons from the toolbar click the down arrow located at the end of each toolbar and
then click Add or Remove Buttons. Turn on the check box to add buttons to the toolbar. Clear
the check box to remove buttons. To rearrange buttons, press ALT and then drag the button to
a different location. To restore the CAESAR II default toolbar configuration, click Reset .
For more information, see Toolbars (on page 345).
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform Loads, and

Wind/Wave Loads
You can display applied or predefined displacements, forces, uniform loads, or wind and wave
loads in a table. You can scroll the display windows vertically and/or horizontally to view all node
points where data has been defined. To move through the defined displacement or force vectors
1 through 9, click Next >> and Previous <<. The color key assists you in locating the node
points on the model when the model geometry is complex.
The displacements window shows user-specified values as well as free or fixed degrees of
freedom (DOF). In this case, a DOF is free if a displacement value is not specified in any of the
displacement load vectors. If a DOF has a specified displacement in at least one of the load
vectors, then it is fixed in all other load vectors.
Forces - Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to
see the force variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the force defined in the model. You can change the
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Uniform Loads - Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use
this option to see the uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that
changes have been made. A color key displays the uniform loads defined in the model.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the
data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the displacement or force
vectors.
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node
number where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates
throughout the model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave - Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color.
Use this option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes
have been made. A color key displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
386

The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of
the data. Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data
defined display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
The legend window can be resized, docked, or removed from view.
You can still zoom, pan, or rotate the model while in highlight mode. You can also use any of
orthographic projections and single line or volume modes without affecting the model
highlighted state.
Clicking one of the highlight commands a second time cancels the coloring effect.
If you print the model while it is in highlight mode, the color key legend displays in the upper
left corner of the page. This is true even if the actual legend window has been dragged away
from the view.
You can display predefined displacements by pressing F3. You can display forces/moment
vectors by pressing F5.
Select Element displays element data. When this command is active, hovering the cursor
over a pipe element displays the element's nodes, delta dimensions, and pipe size data.
Clicking an element highlights the element and updates the information on the dialog box.
Click in the empty space of the graphics view to unhighlight the element. The dialog box still
contains the information from the last element that you selected.
Saving an Image for Later Presentation

Occasionally, it is necessary to add a graphical representation of a model to the CAESAR II
Stress reports. The graphics view can be saved as a graphic by clicking File > Save As
Graphics Image. The model geometry, colors, highlighting, Plot Settings legend, as well as
restraints and most of the other options are transferred to the graphic. The default graphic file
name is the job name with an extension .TIF. This is a standard Windows-supported image file
extension that can be opened for viewing. The image resolution can also be changed in the
Save Image dialog box.
This is a static graphic file.
You also have the option to save the graphics as .HTML file. After saving as .HTML CAESAR II
creates two files in the current data directory using the current job name: *.HTML and *.HSF.
Opening the .HTML file displays the corresponding .HSF file.
This is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II-created .HTML file is opened with an Internet browser, you receive a
message asking you to download a control from Tech Soft 3D. Answer Yes to allow the
download, and the image displays. After the model displays, right-clicking the model shows the
available viewing options such as orbit, pan, zoom, different render modes, and so on. The
image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Internet Explorer (IE) version 5.0 and earlier may not display the image properly.
Intergraph CAS recommends IE6 or later.
You can use the Markups toolbar functions to add additional lines or annotations to the image.
387

The Markups toolbar, which you can access from the Classic Piping Input dialog box or the
Freehand Markup - Draws a line in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the line.
Rectangle Markup - Draws a rectangle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the
rectangle.
Circle Markup - Draws a circle in the model. Click and drag the mouse to draw the circle.
Annotate - Adds a brief description to the model. The annotation may be especially useful
in the output processor. The annotation text box is a single line. Annotation is printed and
saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not saved to HTML.
Annotate w/Leader - Adds a brief description to the model. This annotation includes a
leader line. Drag the annotation box to extend the leader. The annotation text box is a single
line. The annotation with a leader stays with the model when you zoom, pan, rotate, or use
any of the highlight options. Annotation is printed and saved to the bitmap. Annotation is not
saved to HTML.
The markup annotation text box is a single line. The color and the font face/size cannot be
changed. The default color is red.
Markup annotations are saved to the .TIF file and spooled to the printer.
The geometry and the text of the markup annotations are temporary. They are not saved
with the model. These graphics and disappear from view with any change such as zoom,
rotate, pan, or reset all.
The color, font face, and size of the annotation text can be changed by clicking Tools >
Configure/Setup on the main menu. For more information, see 3D Graphics Configuration
(see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
When you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator. (For
example, Freehand Markup stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
Walking Through the Model

CAESAR II lets you explore the model with a feature similar in operation to a virtual reality
game. It produces the effect of walking towards the model. After you are close to or inside the
model, you can look left, right, up, and down, step to a side, or ride an elevator up and down.
Walk Through is useful in providing a real-time interactive view of the model.
Click Walk Through
to display the cursor as a pair of feet.
Walking Around
You can begin walking by clicking and holding the left mouse button. Move forward by moving
the mouse toward the top of the window. Move back by doing the opposite.
You can also pan the view by holding the center mouse button (or wheel) down while moving
the mouse. This provides the panning effects of riding the elevator up/down or stepping to either
side.
388

Walk Through also provides an additional control
that aids in navigation. Clicking the
various hot spots on the control duplicates mouse movements with the added benefit of
providing the ability to move in a perfectly straight line.
In addition, Walk Through also provides you with the added functionality of determining the
walking speed. In general, walking speed is determined by the distance between where you first
click and how far you move the mouse. The keys below which, if held down while walking, effect
walk through's operation:
Shift - Changes the walk mode to run mode, effectively doubling the walk speed.
Ctrl - Changes the walk mode to slow mode, effectively halving the walk speed.
Alt - Enables you to look left or right without changing the walk path. Releasing the key,
automatically returns your viewpoint to looking forward.
To exit from this command, click any other command.
Moving Elements
The Move Geometry
commands, located in the Edit Mode toolbar, let you select and move
nodes or elements along a specified axis. Select the node or element, and then press Tab or
click to select the x-, y-, or z-axis option (located next to the Move Geometry option in the
toolbar). The software defaults to the X-Axis.
For example, to move a restraint along a corresponding pipe centerline, select Move Geometry
and specify the direction of the axis for the line. Or, if your model includes an expansion loop,
select Move Geometry to change the length or depth of the loop in the direction of the specified
axis.
After you select an operator, the software keeps it active until you click another operator.
(For example, Move Geometry stays selected until you select Orbit or Pan.)
To move elements on the 3D model

1. Click Move Geometry
to display marker control points at all nodes and tangent points.
On bends, the marker control points display on the far weld-line.
2. Click and drag the cursor to select the nodes to move.
3. Click any of the selected nodes.
The mouse is in move mode. The mouse movement is clamped to either the x, y, or z axis.
4. To change the axis, press Tab or click one of the Axis commands on the Edit Mode
toolbar.
5. Click to specify the new location.
The model geometry is updates.
6. Alternatively, you can type the magnitude of the movement. If you type a single number, the
movement is applied to the currently selected axis. You can move in multiple directions at
once by typing <x-value>, <y-value>, <z-value>.
389
SECTION 5
S3D/SPR Model View

CAESAR II provides functionality to load Smart 3D (S3D) or SmartPlant Review (SPR)
reference models either partially or in full. You can then rotate and/or filter the loaded S3D/SPR
graphic models to adjust the visibility or isolate specific component classes. This functionality
allows you to interpret the design environment surrounding the piping system and use this
knowledge to readily identify optimal support point and expansion loop locations, judge available
clearances, and so forth. Generally, this functionality provides a more seamless means of
communication across all disciplines involved in the design process when Smart 3D is used as
the overall design platform.
Click S3D/SPR Model
in the Reference CAD Models toolbar in the Classic Piping Input
and select one of the following drop-down menu options:
Load S3D/SPR Model
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model
Dim S3D/SPR Model
S3D/SPR Visibility Options
Load an S3D/SPR Model

To Load a Full Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model from a VUE or HSF file
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
Alternatively, you can type the path name in the field.
3. Select Full Load.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Click Load File to display the graphic file in the CAESAR II 3D Graphics pane.
You can return to the dialog box and select another angle from the Model Rotation.
The software displays the rotation immediately on the 3D graphics pane so that you can
review the rotation before you click Load File.
To Load a Partial Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review model using the Bounding Box
The bounding box functionality allows you to specify which portion of the graphic model to
import into your CAESAR II model.
You can either define the bounding box to the boundaries of the existing CAESAR II model or
select part of the existing CAESAR II model using the Select Group option on the Standard
390

Operators toolbar. Then, click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box, and adjust as
needed.
1. From the piping input, click S3D/SPR Model
The software opens the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the VUE or HSF file you want to display and
click Open.
3. Select Partial Load.
Select Re-Import if you need to refresh or change your visibility settings.
4. Select the degree to rotate the model, if necessary, from the Model Rotation.
The software rotates the model to the angle you specify based on the original angle
of the model when you loaded it.
5. Select the Use Model Bounding-Box option.
Alternatively, select elements in the area of interest by drawing a selection window

around them using the Selection Group option in the Standard Operators toolbar. Then,
select Bounding Box from Selection in the Bounding Box Coordinates.
6. Click Draw Cube at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can then resize or pan the cube in all six dimensions (up, down, left, right, front, back)
until you have enclosed all the parts of the graphic model you want to load into a CAESAR II
model.
As shown in the figure above, the bounding box has six markers:
Anchor Marker - Indicates the starting point of the bounding box (shown in red). You
cannot resize the model using this marker.
391

The three faces to which the anchor marker is connected are fixed (cannot be moved
via any of the markers). You can move the whole bounding box by panning it.
Top Face Marker - Moves the top face (for example, the face that is perpendicular to
top-view-axis of the model, such as Y_Up, Z_Up).
Base Markers - Allows you to re-size the bounding box by selecting any one of three
markers and dragging the mouse.
Base Marker 1 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 3.
Base Marker 2 - Moves these two faces simultaneously.
Base Marker 3 - Moves the rest of the two faces along with Base Marker 1.
Centroid Marker - Sits at the center of the bounding box volume and moves the whole
bounding box from one position to another.
The values for the X, Y, and Z axes display in the Starting Point boxes, depending
on how you manipulate the size and shape of the cube with the graphics markers. The
Starting Point boxes are view-only boxes that are for informational purposes only.
7. Click Load File.
The software loads all components that are inside the bounding box into your model. A
component that originates within the bounding box and extends beyond the boundaries of
the bounding box displays in its entirety. A component that lies completely outside of the
bounding box is totally excluded from the view.
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar of piping input, click S3D/SPR Model
392

The Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box displays.
You can load a partial or a full VUE or HSF model. From the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box,
you can specify to rotate the model upon import into CAESAR II, if needed. You can also specify
a bounding box area, which indicates a section of the model that you want to load into CAESAR
II.
Select a File
Select a Smart 3D or SmartPlant Review VUE or a HOOPS Stream File (HSF) file from your
hard drive.
Alternatively, you can type the path name to the location of your graphics file.
Full Load
Select to load the entire S3D or SPR model from the selected VUE file or HSF.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
393

Partial Load
Select if you want to load a specified portion of the S3D or SPR model from the selected
VUE file or HSF. This option allows you to use the bounding box to specify the section of the
graphic model to load into your CAESAR II model.
You can select either Full Load or Partial Load as one of the VUE Loading Options.
Re-Import
Select to re-import the VUE file or HSF.
Model Rotation
Specifies the degree to which the software rotates a graphics model before loading it into the
current CAESAR II model.
The software rotates the model to the specified angle from its original state. In other
words, if you return to the Load S3D/SPR Model dialog box and select a new angle of rotation,
the software rotates based on the original angle in which the model was loaded.
Use Model Bounding Box

Select to use the boundaries of your existing CAESAR II model for the graphic model you
are loading.
Bounding Box from Selection

Select to define a bounding box for a selected part of the graphic model in which you are
loading.
Starting Point X
Displays the values for the X, Y, and Z axes, depending on how you manipulate the size and
shape of the cube with the graphics tools. Starting Point boxes are for informational
purposes only and are not editable.
Starting Point Y
394

Starting Point Z
Bounding Volume - Width

Specifies the width of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Height

Specifies the height of the bounding box volume.
Bounding Volume - Depth

Specifies the depth of the bounding box volume.
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model

In the Reference CAD Models toolbar, click S3D/SPR Model
from the drop-down list.
and select Show 3D Model
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
Dim S3D/SPR Model

from the drop-down list.
and select Dim 3D Model
This option is available if there is a S3D model to display.
S3D/SPR Visibility Options

Visibility Options from the drop-down list.
and select S3D/SPR
This option is available if there is a S3D/SPR model to display. You can then modify the
graphics to display/hide types of components from the S3D/SPR graphic model.
395
S3D Graphics Environment Dialog Box

Allows you to hide details of the S3D/SPR graphic model that are not needed or could be
distracting while you are working with the model in CAESAR II. For example, if you import a
Smart 3D model using the CAESAR II APCF or PCF import functions and want to reference the
S3D/SPR graphic model for context, the piping elements in the CAESAR II model and the
S3D/SPR graphic reference model can overlap and cause confusion. You can turn off the
display of piping elements from the S3D/SPR Visibility Options, which enables you to compare
the changes more easily.
To Edit S3D/SPR Visibility Options for a loaded VUE file or HSF model:
1. Select S3D/SPR Visibility Options from the S3D/SPR Model
piping input.
drop-down list in the
The S3D/SPR Visibility Options dialog box displays.
2. Select a Visibility percentage from 0% to 100% for each of the five categories of
components in a S3D or SPR model.
The Visibility percentage indicates the percentage of light allowed to pass through the
object. For example, a low percentage value indicates the graphics elements are nearly
invisible.
3. Check the corresponding check box(es) to display the elements for a given category or
select the top check box to display all the categories.
The graphic on the loaded model display based on the specified visibility values.
4. Click the
Hide/show icon to hide or display the S3D/SPR model graphic.
5. Click the
refresh visibility icon to refresh the S3D/SPR model graphic and display the
revised visibility settings.
396
SECTION 6
Structural Steel Modeler

Structural Input or Input > Structural Steel adds structural elements to a model. Using the
modeler, you can perform the following functions:
Open and view structural files.
Enter command and parameter data to build structural models.
In This Section
Structural Steel Model Basics ......................................................397
Structural Steel Graphics .............................................................402
CAESAR II Structural Input ..........................................................403
Structural Steel Input Examples ...................................................406
Insert Menu .................................................................................433
Commands Menu ........................................................................433
Structural Databases ...................................................................474
Structural Steel Model Basics
397

Start the Structural Steel Modeler from the CAESAR II main menu by opening a structural file,
and then choosing Input > Structural Steel. The software opens the CAESAR II Structural
Input dialog box.
Define the structural steel model

The Structural Steel Modeler features an interactive interface, the CAESAR II Structural Input
dialog box, where you use commands to define parameters. If you are not familiar with the
command input, refer to Structural Steel Input Examples (on page 406), and use F1 to launch
help.
The following example shows a structural steel model with two sections and multiple elements
defined.
FIX 5 ALL - Fixes node 5, all degrees of freedom.
SECID=1,W10X49 - Defines properties for section #1 (a 20-inch wide flange of 49 pounds per
foot).
398

EDIM 5 10 DY=12-0 - Defines a vertical element from 5 to 10.
Because many structures have a considerable degree of repeatability, there are various forms,
options, and deviations for these commands to help you generate large structural models. The
method of single element generation is well suited to the needs of most pipers.
Create new lines by selecting a keyword command from the Edit menu or from the toolbar. The
most typically used commands are as follows:
EDim (on page 447) - Defines structural elements.
Fix (on page 437) - Defines structural anchors (ALL) or restraints.
Load (on page 454) - Defines concentrated forces.
Unif (on page 450) - Defines uniform loads.
Secid (on page 459) - Defines cross-section properties.
From the Edit menu, you can complete other frequently used functions, including:
Edit > Undo - Reverse the last action.
Edit > Copy Card - Copies an existing command. You must first select the command to
copy.
Edit > Paste Card - Pastes a command in the model at the location specified from the
Insert menu.
Edit > Delete Card - Deletes an existing command. You must first select the command to
delete.
Certain commands set parameters that the software uses for all future element generations:
Default (on page 471) - Sets the default Section ID and Material ID.
Angle (on page 449) - Sets the default element orientation.
Beams (on page 463), Braces (on page 466), and Columns (on page 468) - Sets the
default end connection type.
399

Before you start working with structural models in CAESAR II, you must specify the database for
upon which the software bases the model.
Select the database for a structural steel model

The full AISC database with more than 900 cross-sectional shapes is available on a
per-member-name basis. Additionally, you can define any arbitrary cross-sectional shapes.
1. Open the CAESAR II Configuration Editor to select the proper database before starting
the construction of a structural model.
2. Click Database Definitions in the CAESAR II Configuration Editor, and then click
Structural Database. Refer to Structural Databases (on page 474) for information on the
structural databases available in the software.
Click Save
to save the configuration settings.
AISC database names should be typed exactly as shown in the AISC handbook with the
exception that fractions should be represented as decimals to four decimal places. Input is
case-sensitive. For example, the angle L6X3-1/2X1/2 would be entered L6X3.5X0.5000.
Member-end connection freedom is a concept used quite frequently in structural analysis
that has no real parallel in piping work. Several of the structural examples contain free-end
connection specifications (such as Column, Beam, and Brace), so you should study these
examples for details.
Structural models may be run alone (singularly), or may be included in piping jobs.
Run the structural model without piping (singularly)

1. Open the structural file.
2. Click Input > Structural Steel.
3. Enter the structural steel model.
400

4. Click File > Save to exit the model.
5. Click Yes.
The software saves, error checks, and builds the CAESAR II modules automatically, and
then opens the Model Generation Status dialog box.
6. Click OK, and close the CAESAR II Structural Steel dialog box to return to the main menu.
7. Click Analysis > Statics to start CAESAR II at the analysis level.
8. Select the load cases you want to analyze.
CAESAR II recommends the weight only (W) load case. If needed, create additional load
cases to address other input loads or concentrated forces.
9. Click Run Analysis
to begin the analysis, and then click OK.
When the analysis finishes, the software opens the Static Output Processor. You can also
click
Static Output to view or print output reports.
10. Close the Static Output Processor.
If needed, click Analysis > AISC to open and independently run a Unity Check (stress
evaluation) for the most heavily loaded elements, as defined by the American Institute of Steel
Construction (AISC). Displacements, forces, and moments are available for each structural
element.
Include the structural model in a piping job

Use caution when establishing steel node numbers. Common nodes with piping have
the steel anchored to the corresponding pipe node. Usually, piping is connected to steel through
restraints with connecting nodes (CNodes).
1. Complete steps 1 through 6 from the previous section for running a structural model without
piping.
2. Click File>Open and select to open a piping input file.
3. Edit the piping file to meet your requirements.
4. Click Environment > Include Structural Input Files from the Classic Piping Input dialog
box.
The Include Structural Files dialog box displays.
5. Click Browse to select the structural files to include in the piping job, and then click Open.
You can browse and select up to 10 structural input files.
6. Click OK.
The selected structural models display on the piping input model.
7. Click Batch Run
to begin error checking the model. After you resolve and eliminate any
warnings and errors, you can run the entire model successfully.
The software includes the structural elements in the model for the flexibility calculations.
These elements appear as any other piping element, except that CAESAR II does not
calculate stresses for structural elements.
401

You can use stand-alone AISC Code Check software to verify that forces and moments
on standard structural shapes do not exceed the various allowable stress limits as defined by
the American Institute of Steel Construction.
Structural Steel Graphics

The graphical view of the model in the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box lets you verify
the model geometry for completeness and accuracy. As you enter and update the element data
on the interactive Card Stack pane on the left, the graphical view on the right instantly displays
any changes.
The Structural Steel Modeler 3D graphics engine shares the same general capabilities as the
graphics model in the Classic Piping Input. The software displays many of the same toolbars
as in the piping input, which let you zoom, orbit, pan, and perform several other actions on the
model. You also have the ability to switch between orthographic and perspective views as well
as alternate between volume to a single line mode.
From the model, you can show or hide the supports and restraints, anchors, the compass, node
numbers, and element lengths.In addition, you can change the size of restraints relative to the
structural elements.
The graphics view displays in the right pane when you define enough information in the
Card Stack pane. For example, if you specify the method as Method 2 - Node/Element
Specifications in the Structural Steel Wizard, and you have only specified the Nodes in the
list of commands, the software does not display anything in the graphical view because there is
not yet a model to show. However, after you define a single element (Elem) between two points
in space, the software displays the corresponding element in the graphical view. When using
Method 1 - Element Definitions (EDIM), which is similar to defining elements in the CAESAR II
402

Classic Piping Input, the corresponding graphic element displays after you specify the EDim
command parameters.
You can resize or disable the Card Stack pane to allow the graphical view to fill the entire
screen. Additionally, you can dock the Card Stack pane on or off of the main window. After you
dock the pane, you can remove it completely from the view or close it. To show or hide the Card
Stack pane, click .
The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has a Change Display Option that lets you
change the default colors for all steel elements and restraints. For more information, see 3D
Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on page 381).
Loads, such as uniform or wind, are not available in graphics mode in the Structural Steel
Modeler.
You can also flip the coordinate system automatically between displaying the Y-axis up (or Y-up)
to the Z-axis up (or Z-up) in the Structural Steel Modeler. The software modifies all relevant data
match with the new coordinate system. Click Vertical
to insert the VERTICAL command
into the command list, and then select Y or Z-from the axis parameter options.
CAESAR II Structural Input

Click Structural Input
on the CAESAR II main menu to enter information to build your
structural model. The CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box has two sections. The Card
Stack pane displays model parameters and commands on the left, and the graphical view of the
model displays on the right.
The Card Stack pane is sub-divided into two columns. The first column displays commands and
parameters. Click the arrow to the left of any command to view the parameter data in the second
column of the pane.
To add a command to the model, select the command from either the Commands menu or the
Commands toolbar. For more information, see Commands Menu (on page 433).
Click + to expand command and view the parameters available. Type or select the values in the
second column. Add all the commands to the structural model, and then click Save
to
generate the structural model.
403

Card Stack, List Options, and Errors tabs at the bottom of the Card Stack pane display mode,
keyword and error information for the model. Click Auto Hide to collapse the tabs to the left
side of the window and expand the graphical view. Click Close X to hide the tabs.
The Errors tab does not display when there are no errors in the model.
Use the Input Card Toolbar (on page 360) functions to copy, paste, or delete commandsd from
the structural model.
Create a model using the Structural Steel Wizard

Define job parameters for a new model using the Structural Steel Wizard.
Create a new job file

1. Click File > New.
The New Job Name Specification dialog box appears.
2. In the Enter the name for the NEW job file box, type the name of the structural steel file
you want to create.
You must give files a different name than any piping files, even if you plan to
combine the files for analysis.
3. Select Structural Input.
4. In the Enter the data directory box, type the directory name or browse for a directory.
5. Click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Select a units file

Use the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to view the units file the software
uses with your new model. For more information, see Unit (on page 473).
The software automatically selects the units based on the units you specified in the
CAESAR II Configuration Editor.
Select Accept defaults and finish to use all structural options previously selected in Tools
> Configure/Setup.
1. Click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Select a vertical axis

Use the Vertical Axis Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify which is the
veritical axis for your model.
1. In the Select which axis is vertical for this box, select Y or Z.
2. Click Next.
404

The software displays the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Select material properties

Use the Material Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify material properties
for the structural steel models.
1. Type values for Density, Yield Strength, Young's (Young's Modulus), Poisson's Ratio,
and Shear Modulus.
2. Optionally, type one or more thermal expansion coefficient values for Expansion
Coefficients.
You can have up to nine Expansion Coefficient values and use a separate Material
ID for each coefficient.
3. Click Add Another Material if you need to define additional material properties.
The software automatically increases the value of the Material ID by one.
4. Click Next.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Material to scroll through all
materials.
Define a cross-section
Use the Cross Section Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to specify the
cross-sections in the model.
1. Click Select Section ID.
The Section ID Selection dialog box appears.
The software defaults the Section ID to 1, but you can type a new ID.
2. Expand the hierarchy as needed, select a cross section and click OK.
You can also type a cross section name in the NAME box. For more information, see
Structural Databases (on page 474) for cross section names in the CAESAR II databases.
3. Optionally, select User Defined? to create a custom cross section. Type values for Area,
Ixx (moment of inertia about the strong axis), Iyy (moment of inertia about the weak axis), J
(torsion) (torsional resistivity constant), BoxH (overall height) and BoxW (overall width).
4. Click Add Another Section if you need to define additional cross-sections.
The value for the Section ID increases by one.
Use the up and down arrows next to Add Another Section to scroll through all
sections.
5. Click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural
Steel Wizard.
405
Select the model definition method

Use the Model Definition Method Selection page of the Structural Steel Wizard to select the
method you need to build your model.
1. Review the method options and select Method 1 - Element Definitions or Method 2 Node / Element Specifications.
2. Click Finish.
The Structural Steel Wizard closes and the new job file opens in the Structural Steel
Modeler window.
For more information on actions you can perform from the wizard, see Insert Menu (on page
433) and Commands Menu (on page 433).
Structural Steel Input Examples

This section contains structural steel examples. Follow the input steps in these examples to
learn how to use the Structural Steel Modeler.
Structural Steel Example #1

Determine the stiffness of the structural steel support shown below. Use the estimated rigid
support piping loads from the piping analysis to back-calculate each stiffness.
406

A U-bolt pins the pipe to the top of the channel at node 20. The piping loads output from the pipe
stress program are:
Fx= -39.0 lbs.
Fy= -1975.0 lbs.
Fz= 1350.0 lbs.
Complete the initial specifications for Example #1

1. Click File > New from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Enter a job name (for example, SUPP), click the Structural Input option, and browse to
select the data directory. Then, click OK.
The software displays the Units Selection page.

3. Specify the units to use with this job, then click Next.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
4. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the Y-axis, and then click Next. Selecting the Y-axis
means that the gravity works in the Y--axis direction on this model.
Be sure this coordinate system matches the piping model.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
5. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
407

The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
6. Specify the cross section by typing in the name exactly as it appears (including exact
capitalization and trailing zeros) or by clicking Select Section ID and selecting the name
from the list.
For this example, enter the Section ID 1 name as W16X26.
7. Click Add Another Section to create other cross sections. Enter Section ID 2 as MC8X22.8
and Section ID 3 as L6X4X0.5000. Repeat this until you have three sections specified in this
example, then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
8. Select Method 1 - Element Definitions Method Selection (the default setting) to use the
Element Dimension (EDim) option to define individual elements that span between two node
points. Then, click Finish. This input works similarly to piping input, where elements are
defined by their end points and delta X, Y, Z distances between those end points.
The Method 2 - Node/Element Specifications option uses commands to define an array of
nodes in space and commands to add elements bounded by these nodes.
408

The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
Specify the structural steel model input for Example #1

1. Click on the Commands toolbar to enter commands and parameters that define the model
input.
409

2. Click
EDim to add the first element to the end of the list, then click the arrow to the left
to expand the data for that group, and enter the column data.
Notice that the first element is at node 5 to node 10 and runs 12 feet in the Y direction and
has a section number of 1 (the default section).
Press TAB to move quickly from one Card Stack box to the next.
410

3. When you complete the first element, click
the next four elements.
EDim and repeat the entry process to add
Use the Input Card Toolbar (on page 360) functions to copy, paste, or delete a card
from the Structural Modeler. Alternatively, you can copy or delete a card element by
selecting Edit > Copy Card or Edit > Delete Card.
411

After you complete the element entry, the software displays the current model.
Select
Reset View to return the model to a default view each time the model
refreshes. When activated, this function appears highlighted. You can use Reset View to
zoom in and out on the model to make changes, and then quickly return to your default
view.
412

4. Click
Fix to add the restraint at the base of the column.
5. Click
Loads to enter the loads on this support. You can use a previous CAESAR II
analysis for these loads.
6. Enter the loads at Node 20 [(FX, FY, FZ)=(-39, -1975, 1350)].
413

The software displays the completed model.
7. Add comments to the model by first setting where CAESAR II inserts comments from the
Insert menu option. You can specify for comments to appear before or after the currently
selected element, or at the end of the model elements list. Click
Comment to add
comments to the model.
414

After you insert a comment, you must click the down arrow to expand the comment
element and add the comment text. The following example shows the completed model with
new comments inserted.
8. Click File > Save to check and save the model. Then, click OK.
CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model by itself.
9. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
10. With the SUPP file still open as the current model, click Analysis > Statics on the toolbar.
Remember to replace the Weight load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied
loads).
11. Click
Run the Analysis.
CAESAR II performs the structural steel analysis, just as a piping analysis.
415

The output from a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments. The
results from the analysis of the SUPP model show the displacements at Node 20.
These displacements are excessive for a support, which is to be assumed rigid in another
analysis. The translational stiffness for the support can be computed as follows:
Kx = 39 lb. / 10.125 in. = 3.85 lb./in
Ky = 1975 lb. / 0.4228 in. = 4671 lb./in.
Kz = 1350 lb. / 0.8444 in. = 1599 lb./in.

Design a support to limit the loads on the waste heat boilers flue gas nozzle connection. The
maximum allowable loads on the nozzle are as follows:
Faxial =
Fshear =
Mtorsion
Mbending
1500 lb.
500 lb.
= 10000 ft. lb.
= 5000 ft. lb.
In this example, create the structural steel input file, SUPP2.str, from a text file. The structural
steel preprocessor converts this file to the CAESAR II model.
416

Check the piping and structure shown in the following four figures:
417
418
Create the structural input file using a text editor

1. Using a text editor, enter the following input parameters for the model:
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
;DEFINE SECTIONS
SECID 1 W24X104
SECID 2 W18X50
;DEFINE MATERIALS
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
;COLUMN STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=90
;VERTICAL COLUMNS
EDIM 230 235 DY=10EDIM 235 220 DY=13-10
EDIM 200 205 DY=10EDIM 205 210 DY=13-10
;SLOPED COLUMNS
EDIM 245 250 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 260 255 DX=8.392- DY=10EDIM 250 220 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
EDIM 255 210 DX=11.608- DY=13-10
MAKE BEAMS DEFAULT SECTION
DEFAULT SECID=2;
EDIM 235 240 DZ=-2.5EDIM 240 205 DZ=-2.5EDIM 220 215 DZ=-2.5EDIM 215 210 DZ= -2.5EDIM 250 255 DZ=-5-
419

;THE FINAL SET OF HORIZONTAL BEAMS
;ALONG THE X AXIS HAVE A
;STANDARD STRONG AXIS ORIENTATION
ANGLE=0
EDIM 250 235 DX=11.608EDIM 255 205 DX=11.608;ANCHOR THE BASE NODES
FIX 200 TO=260 BY=30 ALL
FIX 245 ALL
After the data is processed, this file does not display the line breaks in Microsoft's
Notepad text editor, but the data remains valid. Use a more robust editor to display the
individual lines.
2. Name and save the file as SUPP2.str.
Import the structural input file into the Structural Steel Modeler
1. Click File > Open from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. Change File of type to Structural (*.str)
SUPP2.str. Then, click Open.
and navigate to the file you created,
3. Click Input > Structural Steel from the CAESAR II main menu.
The software opens the structural model for SUPP2.str.
4. After you have confirmed that the model is correct, click File > Save, and click Yes to save
the model.
5. Select all the check boxes in the Model Generation Status dialog box, and click OK.
420

CAESAR II checks the input. If the error checker does not find any fatal errors, CAESAR II
writes the execution files and you can use the model in a piping analysis or you can analyze
the model singularly. For the purposes of this example, you will analyze the model with a
piping model.
6. Close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler dialog box and return to the CAESAR II main
menu.
Input piping data for Example #2

Next, enter the input for the piping system to be analyzed in a new piping job.
2. Change File of type to Piping Input (*.c2)
purposes of this example).
, enter the file name as PIPE2 (for the
3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software opens the Review Current Units dialog box.
4. Verify the current units are English, then click OK.
The software opens the piping input for PIPE2.c2.
5. Click the Classic Piping Input tab on the left of the graphical display.
Enter the piping input data using the Input Echo report data shown below. For more information
on how to quickly enter piping input data, see Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog Box
using the Function Keys (on page 108).
PIPE DATA
From 5 to 10 DX= 6.417 ft.
PIPE
Dia = 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
GENERAL
T1= 850 F
Mat= (186)A335 P5
Insul Thk= .000 in.
BEND at "TO" end
Radius= 45.000 in. (LONG)
RESTRAINTS
Node 5 ANC
ALLOWABLE STRESSES
B31.3 (2008)
---------------------------------------------------------From 10 to 15 DY= -8.000 ft.
---------------------------------------------------------From 15 to 20 DY= -13.833 ft
---------------------------------------------------------From 20 to 25 DY= -8.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
---------------------------------------------------------From 25 to 30 DX= 10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 30 +Y
421

---------------------------------------------------------From 30 To 35 DX= 30.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 35 +Y
---------------------------------------------------------From 35 To 40 DX= 10.000 ft.
BEND at "TO" end
---------------------------------------------------------From 40 To 45 DZ= -3.750 ft.
---------------------------------------------------------From 45 To 50 DZ= -4.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
REDUCER
Diam2= 36.000 in.
Wall2= .375 in.
---------------------------------------------------------From 50 To 55 DZ= -20.000 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 36.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
---------------------------------------------------------From 55 To 60 DZ= -20.000 ft.
---------------------------------------------------------From 60 To 65 DZ= -10.000 ft.
RESTRAINTS
Node 65 ANC
---------------------------------------------------------From 15 To 115 DX= -2.500 ft.
PIPE
Dia= 30.000 in.
Wall= .375 in.
Insul Thk= .000 in.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 115 X
Cnode 215
Node 115 Z
Cnode 215
---------------------------------------------------------From 20 To 120 DX= -2.500 ft.
RIGID Weight= .00 lb.
RESTRAINTS
Node 120 X
Cnode 240
In this piping input example, there are two weightless, rigid elements at nodes 15 to 115 and 20
to 120 that run out from the pipe centerline to the connecting points of the structure.
422

The two restraint sets at the end of the data115 and 120are pipe nodes and their
CNodes215 and 240are structural steel nodes in SUPP2.
Connect the pipe to the structure

1. From the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click Environment > Include Structural Input
Files.
The software opens the Include Structural Files dialog box.
2. Enter the name of the structural steel model to be included (in this example, SUPP2).
You can type the name and click Add, or click Browse to search for the file (which has
the .str or the compressed .c2s extension), select the file, and click OK.
3. If the pipe and structure do not plot properly relative to one-another, then one of the
following situations may have occurred:
a. The connecting nodes were not defined correctly.
b. The Connect Geometry Through CNodes option was not set to True in the
Configuration Editor. For more information, see Connect Geometry Through CNodes
(on page 69) in the Configuration Options.
423

Refer to the Pipe2 plotted pipe and structure shown below:
4. After the software plots the pipe and structure relative to one another, exit the Piping Input
(see "Piping Input generation" on page 31) dialog box and run the error check.
The error checker includes the pipe and structure together during checking. The execution
files that the software writes also include the structural data.
5. Run the analysis using the default load cases.
424

The following shows the restraint report for Load Case 1, W+T1 (OPE):
The loads on the anchor at 5 are excessive. The structural steel frame and pipe support
structure as shown are not satisfactory.
In this example, displacement of the structure is small relative to the displacement of the pipe.
The pipe is thermally expanding out away from the boiler nozzle and down, away from the boiler
nozzle.
425

The pipe is pulling the structure in the positive X direction at the top support and pushing the
structure in the negative X direction at the bottom support. These displacements result in higher
loads on the boiler nozzle. The vertical location of the structural supports should be studied
more closely.
You could add vertical springs at 30 and 35, which might help, along with a repositioning of the
structural supports vertically. For example, the support at node 120 should be moved down so
that its line of action in the X direction more closely coincides with the center line of the pipe
between nodes 25 and 40.

Estimate the X, Y, and Z stiffness of the structure at the point 1000. In general, the stiffness of a
three-dimensional structure, condensed down to the stiffness of a single point, must be
represented by a 66 stiffness matrix. Initially, you can estimate only the on-diagonal,
translational stiffnesses.
Specify the structural input data for Structural Steel Example #3

2. Select Structural Input as the file type, and enter the file name as SUPP3 (for the purposes
of this example).
426

3. Navigate and select the CAESAR II data folder, and click OK.
The software displaysthe Units Selection page.
4. Click Next to accept ENGLISH,FIL, the default value for current units.
The software displays the Vertical Axis Selection page.
5. Verify that the vertical axis is set to the y-axis, and then click Next.
The software displays the Material Selection page.
6. Click Next in the Material Selection dialog box to use default material properties.
The software displays the Cross Section Selection page.
7. Specify the two cross sections, Section ID 1 as W12X65 and Section ID 2 as W10X22, and
then click Next.
The software displays the Model Definition Method Selection page.
Select Method 1 - Element Definitions (the default setting) to use the element dimension
(Edim) method of input. Then, click Finish.
The software opens the CAESAR II Structural Input dialog box, where you can
interactively input data. Click the arrow on each line in the modeler to expand or condense
the information.
8. Use the interactive input processor to input the following commands.
You can also import these commands by inputting them in a text editor and then
importing the .str file into the model. For more information, see Structural Steel Example 2
(see "Structural Steel Example #2" on page 416).
UNIT ENGLISH.FIL
VERTICAL=Y
MATID 1 YM=29E6 POIS=0.3 G=11.6E6 DENS=0.283
SECID 1 W12X65
SECID 2 W10X22
; Preceding entries completed by opening dialog
; Columns have strong axis in Z (Default is X)
ANGLE=90
; Generate all columns
EDIM FROM=5 TO=10 BY=5 LAST=20 DY=12EDIM 25 30 BY=5 LAST=40 DY=12EDIM 45 50 BY=5 LAST=60 DY=12EDIM 65 70 BY=5 LAST=80 DY=12; Beam orientation is standard
ANGLE=0
; Set the default Section ID to 2
DEF SECID=2
; Beams are pinned, both ends are free to rotate
BEAM FREE FBNDSTR FBNDWEAK FTORS TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TTORS
; Define most beams
EDIM 10 30 5 LAST=35 DZ=-14EDIM 30 50 5 LAST=60 DX=-10EDIM 50 70 5 LAST=80 DZ=14EDIM 70 10 5 LAST=20 DX=10; Node 1000 will be fixed in rotation
427

BEAM FIX FAXIAL FSHRSTR FSHRWEAK TAXIAL TBNDSTR TBNDWEAK TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK TTORS
; Add midpoint 1000 on top beam
EDIM 20 1000 DZ=-7EDIM 40 1000 DZ=7; Define anchors at the bottom of each column
FIX 5 65 BY=20 ALL
; Set representative loads
LOAD 1000 FX=0000 FY=10000 FZ=10000
9. After you enter all of the model data, the SUPP3 structural model appears as follows:
10. When you are satisfied that the model has been entered properly, click File > Save to check
and save the model.
CAESAR II checks the input. If no fatal errors are found, the software writes the CAESAR II
Execution files. The model may now be used in a piping analysis or analyzed by itself. For
the purposes of this example the model will be analyzed by itself.
11. Click OK, and then close the CAESAR II Structural Modeler Input dialog box.
12. Return to the CAESAR II Main menu.
428

Analyze the structural model for Structural Steel Example #3
The structural input processor generates a number of lists you can use for documentation and
checking.
1. With the SUPP3 job still open in the CAESAR II Main menu, click Analysis > Statics.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.
2. Replace the Weight (W) load in Load Case 1 (L1) with F1 (the applied loads).
You can type FI directly in the Load Cases box.
From this point, structural steel analysis is performed just like a piping analysis. Output from
a structural analysis is comprised of displacements, forces, and moments.
3. Click Run the Analysis
, and then click OK.
The software displays the Static Analysis dialog box.

4. Select the F1 load case in the Load Cases Analyzed box and Displacements and Global
Element Forces in the Standard Reports.
5. Click Add and then Finish to generate the reports.
The Displacements and Global Element Forces reports for the F1 load case displays as
follows.
429
430
431
Notice that the structure is more stiff in the X direction, even though the Z dimension is greater,
due to the orientation of the columns. The Global Element Forces (which displays forces and
moments) report is particularly interesting because all of the beams have pinned ends. Most of
the beams carry no load. This is because the transfer of the load to the beams in this model is
due to rotations at the column ends, and not translations.
By adding cross-braces you can eliminate this problem and cause the beams to pick up more of
the load. The 1000 end node of the elements from 20-1000 and from 40-1000 carries a moment
because it is not a pinned end connection. The 1000 end node is just a point at midspan for the
application of the load.
432

Kx = 10,000 lb. / 7.0909 in. = 1410 lb./in
Ky = 10,000 lb. / 0.2828 in. = 35360 lb./in.
Kz = 10,000 lb. / 25.7434 in. = 388 lb./in.
Insert Menu
Use the Insert menu to specify where to place a command from the Command menu in the
Card Stock pane.
Before Current Element

Places a new card above the selected card in the Card Stack.
After the Current Element

Places a new card below the selected command in the Card Stack.
At End of Model
Places a new card at the end of the model (that is, at the bottom of the Card Stack).
Commands Menu
Use the Commands Menu to add cards in the Card Stack pane. The cards define parameters
used in the structural model.
Node
Node or Commands > Node defines the coordinates of a point in global X, Y, and Z space
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Define the coordinates

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NODE command in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Node
The NODE card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the NODE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NODE properties.
433

6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically checks the model for errors.
node number
Specifies the node number.
x, y, z
Specifies the global coordinates.
NFill
NFill or Commands > NFill defines evenly spaced nodes between two end points and
places the following card in the Card Stack:
Add a node between defined end points

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack.
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NFILL card in the needed
position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Nfill
The NFILL card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the NFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NFILL properties.

6. Click
Save if you are finished.
from
Specifies the from node number.
434
to
Specifies the to node number.
by
Specifies the increment in the range.
NGen
NGen or Commands > NGen duplicates patterns of nodes and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
The first and last node in the base node pattern must exist before you can use NGen. Other
nodes not previously defined in the base node pattern are evenly spaced by a defined increment
between the first and last node. Subsequent nodal patterns start from the base pattern. DX, DY,
and DZ offsets define nodes duplicated from the base pattern of nodes.
Duplicate node
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the NGEN card in the needed
3. Click NGen
The NGEN card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click to
expand the NGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the NGEN properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
435
from
Specifies the first node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
to
Specifies the last node in the base node pattern. You must enter a value for an existing node
before you can use NGen.
inc
Specifies a value for the increment you want to use in the base node pattern between the first
node and the last node. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
last
Specifies the number of times to duplicate the base node pattern. If you do not enter a value,
single pattern duplication occurs.
nodeInc
Specifies a value for the increment that you want to use in the base node pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern and so forth.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
Example
The nodes from 1100 to 2000 with an increment of 100 are duplicated twice. Each new pattern
is offset by 10 ft. in the Z-direction. The new nodes created are from 2100 to 3000 and also from
3100 to 4000.
436
Fix
Fix or Commands > Fix defines the restraint boundary conditions at the structural member
end points and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Define restraint boundary conditions

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FIX card in the needed
3. Click Fix
The FIX card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the FIX card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FIX properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker automatically begins to check the model for errors.
If needed you can enter the stiffness in the field following the fixity indicator. If you omit the
stiffness value, the fixity is considered to be rigid.
437
from
Specifies the first node number in the range.
If you are using FIX to define a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the last node number in the range.
by
all
Specifies that all six degrees of freedom (DOF) are Free or Fixed.
This parameter is the equivalent of an anchor.
all stiffness
Specifies the same stiffness value for all six degrees of freedom (DOF).
x
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the x direction.
x stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the x direction.
y
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the y direction.
438
y stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the y direction.
z
Specifies the Free or Fixed value in the z direction.
z stiffness
Specifies the value for the translational stiffness in the z direction.
rx
Specifies the value for the rotation in the x direction.
rx stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the x direction.
ry
Specifies the value for the rotation in the y direction.
ry stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the y direction.
rz
Specifies the value for the rotation in the z direction.
rz stiffness
Specifies the value for the rotational stiffness in the z direction.
439
Example
1. FIX 1 ALL. Fix all degrees of freedom at node #1.
2. FIX 5 X1000 Y1000 Z1000. Fix X, Y and Z degrees of freedom at node #5, and use 1,000
lb./in. springs.
3. FIX 100 TO 110. ALL Fix rigidly all degrees of freedom for the nodes from 100 to 110. The
increment between 100 and 110 defaults to 1. Eleven nodes have their fixities defined here.
4. FIX 105 TO 125 BY 5 X1000,1000,1000 Fix X, Y, and Z degrees of freedom for the nodes:
105, 110, 115, 120, and 125, and use 1,000 lb./in. springs.
5. FIX (1) to (10) ALL Fix all degrees of freedom for the first 10 nodes in the node list.
Elem
Elem or Commands > Elem defines a single element between two nodes and places the
following card in the Card Stack pane:
You can use a section identifier and a material identifier for the element. If you omit the section
and/or material IDs the program uses the current default.
Define an element between two elements

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ELEM card in the needed
3. Click ELEM
The ELEM command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the ELEM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ELEM properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
440
from
Specifies the from node number.
to
Specifies the to node number.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
EFill
EFill generates a consecutive string of elements and places the following card in the Card
Stack pane:
You can use the EFill command at any time, none of the elements generated need to exist
prior to adding the EFill command.
Add consecutive elements

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EFILL card in the needed
3. Click EFill
The EFILL card is added to the card stack.

4. Click
to expand the EFILL card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EFILL properties.

6. Click Save
to finish adding cards to the Card Stack.
The stack is saved and the Error Checker checks your model for errors
441
from
Specifies the from node number on the first element generated.
to
Specifies the to node number on the first element generated.
inc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element to the from node on the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 1.
incTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node of the first element to the to node of the
second element. If you do not enter a value, the value of inc is used.
last
Specifies the to node on the last element generated.
secId
Specifies the Section ID for the first element generated.
matId
Specifies the Material ID for the first element generated.
insecid
Specifies the increment to use to get from the Section ID for the first element to the Section ID
for the second element. If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the increment to get from the Material ID for the first element to the Material ID for the
442
Example
Elements are generated between each pair of nodes between nodes 1200 and 2000. The
increment between From nodes and To nodes is 100. Nine elements are created in this
example.
Elem was not necessary here. Create all nine elements using EFill and by substituting node
1100 in place of node 1200 in the from field.
EGen
EGen or Commands EGen duplicates patterns of elements and places the following card in
the Card Stack pane:
Existing elements in the base pattern are redefined during generation.
Duplicate elements
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EGEN card in the needed
3. Click EGen
The EGEN card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the EGEN card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EGEN properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
The CAESAR II Error Checker checks the model for errors.
443
from
Specifies the from node on the first element in the base pattern.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element in the base pattern.
inc
Specifies the increment to use to get from the from node on the first element in the base pattern
to the from node on the second element in base pattern. If you do not enter a value, the default
is 1.
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element in the base pattern. The software generates multiple
copies from the base pattern of elements.
genInc
Specifies the increment to get from the from node on the first element in the base pat\-tern to
the from node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern.
genIncTo
Specifies the increment to use to get from the to node on the first element in the base pattern to
the to node on the first element in the first duplicate pattern. If you do not enter a value, the
value of genInc is used.
genLast
Specifies the to node on the last element in the last pattern to be duplicated from the base
pattern.
444
secId
Specifies the Section ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 471).
matId
Specifies the Material ID to use for the elements in the base pattern. If you do not enter a value,
the value from the Default card is used. For more information, see Default (on page 471).
inSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use between patterns. For example, the first pattern of
elements generated from the base pattern of elements has a Section ID of SECID + INCSECID.
If you do not enter a value, the default is 0.
incMatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to use between patterns. If you do not enter a value, the
default is 0.
445
Example
Building on the Example for EFill (see "Example" on page 443). The base element pattern from
1100 to 2000 is reproduced two additional times, from 2100 to 3000 and from 3100 to 4000.
Each element has nodal increments of 100. The increment between the Base Element and the
Next Element is 1000 and the last node in the last pattern is 4000. The cross members are
created using the base pattern from 1100 to 2100 and reproducing it in nodal increments of 100
until node 4000 is reached.
446
EDim
EDim or Commands > EDim defines elements using the dimensions of the element instead
of references to nodes and places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Any existing elements encountered are redefined. If you are defining a single element, do not
enter values for inc, incto, and last.
Define elements using element dimensions

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the EDIM card in the needed
3. Click EDim
The EDIM card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the EDIM card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the EDIM properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element to be defined.
447
to
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to be defined.
dx, dy, dz
Specifies the global coordinate offsets to get from the nodes in the base pattern to the nodes in
the first generated pattern, and then from this pattern to the next generated pattern, and so forth.
secID
Specifies the Section ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
matID
Specifies the Material ID for the first element. If you do not enter a value, the current default is
used.
incSecId
Specifies the Section ID increment to use to get from the Section ID of the first element to the
Section ID of the second element.
448
incmatId
Specifies the Material ID increment to get from the Material ID of the first element to the
Material ID of the second element.
Example
1. EDIM 5 to 10 DY = 12-3 SECID=2. Column 12-3 high from 5 to 10.
2. EDIM 5,10 DY=12-3,2. Same column
3. EDIM 2 TO 3 LAST=8 DX=13-3. Defining beams 13-3 long and elements 2-3, 3-4, 4-5, 5-6,
6-7, and 7-8. INC defaults to 1.
Angle
Angle or Commands > Angle defines the default element strong axis orientation and
places the following card in in the Card Stack pane:
Define the element strong axis

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ANGLE card in the needed
3. Click Angle
The ANGLE card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the ANGLE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ANGLE properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
Define structural columns when the strong axis is not parallel to the global X-axis
Use Angle
with a structural column when the strong axis of the column is not parallel to the
global X-axis. When the strong axis of the column is parallel to the global Z-axis, redefine the
default orientation to ANGLE=90. Define the column elements then use ANGLE again to reset
the default orientation to its original value of ANGLE=0.0.
Define the angle of rotation

Orient
and Angle
both define the angle of rotation in degrees about the element center
line from the standard orientation to the element strong axis. Use Orient
to define this angle
for a single element or for a group of elements, and Angle
to define the default orientation
to its original value, such as, ANGLE=0.0.
The default orientation angle is 0.
449

Find the positive angular rotation
Use the right hand rule to find positive angular rotation. Extend the thumb along the element in
the direction of the to node. The fingers of the right hand circle in the direction of a positive
orientation angle.
Determine the default element orientation
If the member is vertical, then the default strong axis is along the global-X axis.
If the member is non-vertical then the default strong axis is perpendicular to the center line
of the member and in the horizontal plane of the member.
The strong axis for the WF shape is:
angle
Specifies a value for the default Strong Axis Orientation Angle to use for all subsequent
defined elements.
Unif
Unif or Commands > Unif defines a constant uniform load that acts over the full length of
the member and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Uniform loads can have special meanings when used in CAESAR II Piping runs.
If you are defining a uniform load that acts on a single element only, do not enter values for
inc, incTo, and last.
Define a uniform load

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the UNIF command in the needed
450

3. Click Unif
The UNIF card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the UNIF card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the UNIF properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element this uniform load is to act on.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element this uniform load is to act on.
ux, uy, uz
Specifies the magnitude of the uniform load in the global X, Y, and Z directions. Unless used in
a piping analysis using G loads, use uniform loads in units of force per unit length of member.
When used in a piping analysis with G loads the uniform loads are in units of gravitational
acceleration, for example, uy=-1 would define a uniform load identical to the member weight
load.
451
Examples
1. UNIF 1 TO 2 UY=-2.3 On the element from 1 to 2 a uniform load with a magnitude of 2.3
lbs. per inch acts in the -Y direction.
2. UNIF 1, 2, UY -2, 3 Same
3. UNIF 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 UX=0.03, -1, 0.03 There are uniform loads acting on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500 with a small horizontal component and a -1 load in the Y. It looks like
you have G load input for the piping problem.
5. UNIF (1) to (30) UY=-2.3 The first thirty elements in the element list have a uniform load of
-2.3 pounds per inch acting in the -Y direction.
Orient
Orient or Commands > Orient defines the element strong axis orientation and places the
Define the element strong axis orientation

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the ORIENT card in the needed
position in the Card Stack. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Orient
The ORIENT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the ORIENT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the ORIENT properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
452
from
Specifies the from node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for from.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element.
You can use node numbers or element indices as values for to.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node on the last element to have its orientation angle defined.
angle
Specifies the rotation in degrees from the default position to the actual position of the member
strong axis.
Examples
1. ORIENT 1 TO 2 ANGLE=90. The strong axis for the element from 1 to 2 is 90 away from
the default position.
2. ORIENT 5 TO 10 INC=5 LAST=30 ANGLE=90. The vertical column elements: 5-10, 10-15,
15-20, 20-25, and 25-30 have their strong axes 90 away from the default position. Their
new strong axis is along the Z axis. With their new orientation, the columns are better suited
to take X direction forces.
3. ORIENT 1 TO (20) ANGLE=90. The first twenty elements in the element list have their
strong axes 90 away from the default position.
453
Load
Load or Commands > Load defines concentrated forces and moments that act at
structural member end points. It places the following card in the Card Stock pane:
Define concentrated forces and moments

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the LOAD card in the needed
3. Click Load
The LOAD command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the LOAD card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the LOAD properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the load is to act on.
If you are defining a load for a single node point, you do not need values for to and by.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the load is to act on.
454
by
fx, fy, fz
Specifies the magnitude of concentrated forces in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
mx, my, mz
Specifies the magnitude of the moments in the global X, Y, and Z directions.
Examples
1. LOAD 305 FY-1000. Have a minus 1,000 lb. Y direction load acting at the structural node
#305.
2. LOAD 10 TO 18 BY=1 FX=707, FZ=707. Have skewed loads in the horizontal plane acting
at each of the nodes 10, 11,...,17, 18. You do not have to use by here, the default is 1.
3. LOAD (15) to (25) FY=-383. A load of 383 pounds acts in the -Y direction on the 15th
through the 25th nodes in the Node list.
Wind Loads
Wind or Commands > Wind defines the magnitude of the wind shape factor for the
structural elements and places a card in the Card Stack pane:
Define wind shape factor

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the WIND card in the needed
3. Click Wind
The Wind card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the WIND card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the WIND properties.
455

6. Click Save
to finish.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element the wind load is to act on.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies the to node of the last element the wind load is to act on.
shape
Specifies a value for the magnitude of the wind shape factor. For structural steel members this
value is usually 2.0. For elements not exposed to the wind, disable wind loading on the structure
by resetting this value to 0. This value populates to all subsequently defined elements. If you do
not enter a value, the default is 2.0.
Examples
1. WIND 1 TO 2 SHAPE=2.0. The element from 1 to 2 has a shape factor with a magnitude of
2.0 applied. This value is applied to all the following elements.
2. WIND 1, 2, SHAPE 2.0. Same
3. WIND 100 TO 200 INC=2 INCTO=3
4. LAST=500 SHAPE=1.8 There is a wind shape factor of 1.8 on elements 100-200,
102-203,...,300-500.
456
GLoads
GLoad or Commands > GLoad processes all specified uniform loads as G loads instead of
force/length loads and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot use this command with any other parameters.
If structural and piping models are mixed, the GLOADS cards must match. For example,
uniform loads in the piping model must be designed as G loads in the special execution
parameters.
Specify GLoads
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the GLOADS card in the needed
3. Click GLoad .
The GLOADS card is added to the card stack.
4. Click Save
to finish.
MatId
MatId or Commands > MatId specifies material properties that correspond to a Material ID
number and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
You must have at least one valid material specification in the input file. For more information,
see Material Properties (on page 223).
457

Add material properties
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the MATID card in the needed
3. Click MatId
The MATID card is added to the Card Stack.

You can use one Matid for a group of elements that has many Section IDs (Secid).
4. Click
to expand the Matid card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the Matid properties.

Use Matid 1 for default A-36 structural steel properties.
6. Click Save
to finish.
matId
Specifies a Material ID number. This number is usually 1, and numbered sequentially for
additional materials.
You can change the value assigned by the model input file.
ym
Specifies a value for Youngs Modulus of Elasticity. The default value is 30,000,000 (30x106) psi
for A-36 structural steel.
pois
Specifies a value for Poissons Ratio. The default value is 0.3 for A-36 structural steel.
g
Specifies a value for the shear modulus. The default value is 11,000,000 (11x106) psi for A-36
structural steel and is typically about one-third the value of Young's Modulus.
458
ys
Specifies a value for the yield strength. The default value is 36,000 (36x103) psi for A-36
structural steel. This property is currently not used.
dens
Specifies a value for the material density. The default value is 0.283 for A-36 structural steel.
Alpha [x]
Specifies from one to nine values for the coefficients of thermal expansion.
Enter values for Alpha after entering a value for dens.
SecId
SecId or Commands > SecId assigns member cross-section properties to the Section ID
numbers and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
Add cross-section properties

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the SECID card in the needed
3. Click SecId
The SECID card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the SECID card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the SECID properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
459
section Id
Specifies a user-defined Section ID for this set of cross-section properties. Section IDs usually
start at 1 and increase incrementally by one, but you can assign values in any order.
name
Specifies an American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) shape name. For a user-defined
shape, type USER. You must enter the AISC names exactly as shown in the AISC handbook
with the exceptions:
Enter fractions as decimals. For example, type LX6X3-1/2X1/2 as L6X3.5X0.5
Omit all leading or trailing zeros.
You can select the section name from the window after clicking the Select Section ID
button.
User-Defined
Specifies a user-defined shape. You must enter values for the additional parameters to define a
user-defined cross-section.
area
Specifies the cross-section area (in length 2 units).
lxx
Specifies the strong axis moment of inertia (in length 4 units).
lyy
Specifies the weak axis moment of inertia (in length4 units).
torsion
Specifies the torsional resistivity constant (in length 4 units).
460

boxH
Specifies the height (along the weak axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
boxW
Specifies the width (along the strong axis) of a rectangular box for plotting.
Free End Connections - FREE

Free or Commands > Free defines the free element end connection types and places the
For example, use Free

to describe the element ends in a structure that has pinned-only
beam-to-column connections.
You can also use Beams , Braces , and Columns to set the free end connection
defaults for certain types of members. For more information, see Beams (on page 463), Braces
(on page 466), and Columns (on page 468).
After you define each element and set the defaults, the program automatically adds a card
to the Card Stack and adds values to FREE parameters. Use this to help keep track of the
connections and nodes that define the element.
Define Free End connection types

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the FREE card in the needed
3. Click Free
461

The Free command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the FREE card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the FREE properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
from
Specifies the from node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
to
Specifies the to node on the first element that this FREE command is to apply to.
inc
incTo
last
Specifies a value for the to node on the last element this FREE command is to apply to. You
can omit last, inc, and incTo if the FREE command is only to apply to a single element.
Parameters for Degrees of Freedom

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at the element end that is free.
Any combination can be used.
At the from node

FAXIAL
Axial translational DOF
FSHRSTR
Strong axis shear translational DOF
FSHRWEAK
Weak axis shear translational DOF
FTORS
Torsional DOF
FBNDSTR
Strong axis bending DOF
FBNDWEAK
Weak axis bending DOF
462

At the to node
TAXIAL
TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK
TTORS
Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR
TBNDWEAK
Examples
1. A small WF shape has a pinned connection to a large I-beam. The weak axis bending of the
WF shape is not transmitted to the web of the I-beam. If the element defining the WF shape
uses nodes 1040 to 1045 then the FREE card for this element has the following format:
FREE 1040 TO 1045 fbndweak, tbndweak
2. The westward side of a building has a row of beams on the ground floor that are attached
rigidly to columns at the other end. The beams are identified by the pattern of nodes:
610-710, 620-720, 630-730, ..., 690-790. There are eight beams in this group. The 600 end
is pinned. The FREE cards for this group have the following format:
FREE 610 TO 710 INC=10 LAST=790 ftors, fbndstr, fbndweak
Beams
Beams or Commands > Beams defines default end connection types for members identified
by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
463

A beam is any member whose center line lies completely along either the global X or global Z
axis. After you use Beams to define the element end connections, any element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
Use the standard structural element connections Beams , Braces , and Columns
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Braces (on page 466), and Columns (on page 468).
Add beam element connections

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BEAMS card in the needed
3. Click Beams .
The BEAMS card is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the BEAMS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BEAMS properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.
mode
Defines the beams end connection type:
Free - Releases end connections.
Fix - Resets released end connections.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Beams, then all degrees of freedom for the beam
are fixed.

The following parameters define the degrees of freedom (DOF) at each element end. Any
combination can be used. By default, each end is fixed in all six degrees of freedom.
At the from node

FAXIAL
FSHRSTR
FSHRWEAK
FTORS
Torsional DOF
FBNDSTR
464

FBNDWEAK
At the to node
TAXIAL
TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK
TTORS
Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR
TBNDWEAK
Examples
1. A group of beams that has both ends pinned must use the Free command. The BEAMS
card for this group has the following format:
Beams FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end beams must be returned to end connection default values. The BEAMS card for
this group has the following format:
Beams FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
465
Braces
Braces or Commands > Braces defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
A brace is any member whose center line does not completely lie along any of the global axes.
After you use Braces
to define element end connections, any brace element subsequently
defined inherits those end connection conditions.
to define default end connection types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 463) and Columns (on page 468).
Add Braces
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the BRACES card in the needed
3. Click Braces
The BRACES command is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the BRACES card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the BRACES properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.
466
mode
Defines the braces end connection type:
If fix is the only parameter defined for Braces, then all degrees of freedom for the brace
are fixed.

At the from node

FAXIAL
FSHRSTR
FSHRWEAK
FTORS
Torsional DOF
FBNDSTR
FBNDWEAK
At the to node
TAXIAL
TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK
TTORS
Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR
TBNDWEAK
467
Examples
1. A group of braces that has both ends pinned to adjoining columns must use the Free
command. The BRACES card for this group has the following format:
Braces FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end braces must be returned to end connection default values. The BRACES card
for this group has the following format:
Braces FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix appears on the line following Braces then all end connections for the brace are
fixed.
Columns
Columns or Commands > Columns defines default end connection types for members
identified by the orientation of their center lines. It places the following card in the Card Stack
pane:
468

A column is any member whose centerline is completely vertical. After you use Columns
define the element end connections, any element subsequently defined inherits those end
connection freedoms.
to
to define default end connections types for members identified by the orientation of their center
line. For more information, see Beams (on page 463) and Braces (on page 466).
Add columns
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COLUMNS card in the needed
3. Click Columns .
The Columns command is added to the Card Stack.
4. Click
to expand the COLUMNS card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the COLUMNS properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the
column are fixed.
mode
Defines the columns end connection type:
If fix is the only parameter defined for Columns, then all degrees of freedom for the column are
fixed.

At the from node

FAXIAL
FSHRSTR
FSHRWEAK
FTORS
Torsional DOF
469

FBNDSTR
FBNDWEAK
At the to node
TAXIAL
TSHRSTR
TSHRWEAK
TTORS
Torsional DOF
TBNDSTR
TBNDWEAK
Examples
1. A group of corner columns that are pinned at their to ends must use the Free command.
The COLUMNS card for this group has the following format:
Columns FREE
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
2. Pinned-end columns must be returned to end connection default values. The COLUMNS
card for this group has the following format:
Columns FIX
ftors
fbndstr
fbndweak
tbndstr
tbndweak
If Fix is all that appears on the line following Columns, then all end connections for the
column are fixed.
As a general rule an element cannot undergo rigid body motion. Therefore, an element cannot
have both ttors and ftors released at the same time. Additionally beams typically have moment
releases only at their ends, not at intermediate nodes used to apply loads or connect bracing.
470
Default
Default or Commands > Default specifies the default values of the Section ID and the
Material ID and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
If you create an element without a Section ID or Material ID, the default values defined here are
used.
Set the default Section ID or Material ID

2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the DEFAULT card in the needed
3. Click Default
The DEFAULT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the DEFAULT card and view the properties.
5. Add values to the DEFAULT properties.

6. Click Save
to finish.
Comment
Comment or Commands > Comment adds a comment card to the Card Stack pane:
Add a comment
2. Use the needed command from the Insert menu to place the COMMENT card in the
needed position. For more information, see Insert Menu (on page 433).
3. Click Comment
The COMMENT card is added to the Card Stack.

4. Click
to expand the COMMENT card.
5. Type the information to add.

6. Click Save
to finish.
471
Vertical
Vertical or Commands > Vertical specifies the axis orientation of a new or existing model
and places the following card in the Card Stack pane:
The axis orientation of the Static Load Case Builder, (for example in wind and wave loads),
the Static Output Processor, the Dynamic Input Module, and the Dynamic Output
Processor is specified only by the orientation in the input file. For more information, see
Select a Vertical Axis (on page 404).
Unlike the piping and equipment files elsewhere in CAESAR II, changing this command
does not change the orientation of the structural input file. It rotates the model into the new
coordinate system.
When you include the structural files in a piping model, the axis orientations of the structural
files do not have to match the orientation of the piping model. The software translates the
orientation.
Specify the axis orientation

1. Select the appropriate row in the Card Stack pane and use the needed command from the
Insert menu to place the VERTICAL card in the needed position. For more information, see
the Insert Menu (on page 433).
2. Click Vertical
The Vertical command is added to the Card Stack.

3. Select Y or Z as the vertical axis.
Find the axis orientation of a new model

In the main CAESAR II window, click Tools > Configure/Setup to determine the axis
orientation of a new structural model based on the selected setting.
Find the axis orientation of an existing model

Open an existing model and check the last saved axis orientation to visually determine the axis
orientation.
472
Unit
Unit displays the units file you specified in the Units Selection page of the Structural Steel
Wizard in the Card Stack pane:
You cannot change the units from the Card Stack pane. The structural file uses the units file
specified in the wizard as the unit of measure.
You do not have to choose the same file selected in configuration setup. For more
information, see Select a units file (on page 404).
List Options
List Options displays node and coordinate data, specifies node ranges, and selects reports.
Click ALL to display a copy of each report.
View reports
1. Click the List Options tab located at the bottom of the Card Stock.
The List Options pane appears.
2. Select the report you want to see.
The selected report appears in the Report pane.
473
Structural Databases
The CAESAR II Structural databases contain over 20 different properties for each crosssection. For the finite element solution, only six of these items are employed:
Area
Strong axis moment of inertia
Weak axis moment of inertia
Torsional resistivity constant
Member section height
Member section depth
There are seven different structural databases included in CAESAR II
AISC 1977
AISC 1989
German 1991
Australian 1990
South African 1992
Korean 1990
UK 1993
AISC 1977 Database

W36X300 W36X280 W36X260
W36X245 W36X230
W36X210
W36X194 W36X182 W36X170
W36X160 W36X150
W36X135
W33X241 W33X221 W33X201
W33X152 W33X141
W33X130
W33X118 W30X211 W30X191
W30X173 W30X132
W30X124
W30X116 W30X108 W30X99
W27X178 W27X161
W27X146
W27X114 W27X102 W27X94
W27X84
W24X162
W24X146
W24X131 W24X117 W24X104
W24X94
W24X84
W24X76
W24X68
W21X147 W21X132
W21X122
W21X111 W21X101 W21X93
W21X83
W21X73
W21X68
W21X62
W21X44
W18X119
W18X106
W24X62
W21X57
W24X55
W21X50
474

W18X97
W18X86
W18X76
W18X71
W18X65
W18X60
W18X55
W18X50
W18X46
W18X40
W18X35
W16X100
W16X89
W16X77
W16X67
W16X57
W16X50
W16X45
W16X40
W16X36
W16X31
W16X26
W14X730
W14X665
W14X605 W14X550 W14X500
W14X455 W14X426
W14X398
W14X370 W14X342 W14X311
W14X283 W14X257
W14X233
W14X211 W14X193 W14X176
W14X159 W14X145
W14X132
W14X120 W14X109 W14X99
W14X90
W14X82
W14X74
W14X68
W14X61
W14X53
W14X48
W14X43
W14X38
W14X34
W14X30
W14X26
W14X22
W12X336
W12X305
W12X279 W12X252 W12X230
W12X210 W12X190
W12X170
W12X152 W12X136 W12X120
W12X106 W12X96
W12X87
W12X79
W12X72
W12X65
W12X58
W12X53
W12X50
W12X45
W12X40
W12X35
W12X30
W12X26
W12X22
W12X19
W12X16
W12X14
W10X112 W10X100
W10X88
W10X77
W10X68
W10X60
W10X54
W10X49
W10X45
W10X39
W10X33
W10X30
W10X26
W10X22
W10X19
W10X17
W10X15
W10X12
W8X67
W8X58
W8X48
W8X40
W8X35
W8X31
W8X28
W8X24
W8X21
W8X18
W8X15
W8X13
W8X10
W6X25
W6X20
W6X16
W6X15
W6X12
W6X9
W5X19
W5X16
M8X6.5
M6X20
M6X4.4
W4X13
M14X18
M12X11.8 M10X9
M5X18.9
M4X13
475
S24X121
S24X106 S24X100
S24X90 S24X80
S20X86
S20X75
S18X70 S18X54.7 S15X50
S20X66
S20X96
S15X42.9 S12X50
S12X40.8 S12X35 S12X31.8 S10X35
S10X25.4 S8X23
S8X18.4
S7X20
S7X15.3
S6X17.2
S6X12.5
S5X10
S4X9.5
S4X7.7
S3X7.5
S5X14.7
S3X5.7
C15X50
C15X40
C15X33.9
C12X30
C12X25
C12X20.7
C10X30
C10X25
C10X20
C10X15.3
C9X20
C9X15
C9X13.4
C8X18.7
C8X13.7
C8X11.5
C7X14.7
C7X12.2
C7X9.8
C6X13
C6X10.5
C6X8.2
C5X9
C5X6.7
C4X7.25
C4X5.4
C3X6
C3X5
C3X4.1
MC18X58
MC18X51.9
MC18X45.8
MC18X42.7 MC13X50
MC13X40
MC13X35
MC13X31.8
MC12X50
MC12X40
MC12X35
MC12X37
MC12X32.9 MC12X30.9
MC12X10.6
MC10X41.1
MC10X33.6
MC10X28.5 MC10X28.3
MC10X25.3
MC10X24.9
MC10X21.9
MC10X8.4
MC10X6.5
MC9X25.4
MC9X23.9
MC8X22.8
MC8X21.4
MC8X20
MC8X18.7
MC8X8.5
MC7X22.7
MC7X19.1
MC7X17.6
MC6X18
MC6X15.3
MC6X16.3
MC6X15.1
MC6X12
MC12X45
WT18X150
WT18X140
WT18X130
WT18X122.5
WT18X115
WT18X105
WT18X97
WT18X91
476

WT18X85
WT18X80
WT18X75
WT18X67.5
WT16.5X120.5
WT16.6X110.5
WT16.5X100.5 WT16.5X76
WT16.5X70.5
WT16.5X65
WT16.5X59
WT15X105.5
WT15X95.5
WT15X86.5
WT15X66
WT15X62
WT15X58
WT15X54
WT15X49.5
WT13.5X89
WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5X73
WT13.5X57
WT13.5X51
WT13.5X47
WT13.5X42
WT12X81
WT12X73
WT12X65.5
WT12X58.5
WT12X52
WT12X47
WT12X42
WT12X38
WT12X34
WT12X31
WT12X27.5
WT10.5X73.5
WT10.5X66
WT10.5X61
WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5X50.5
WT10.5X46.5
WT10.5X41.5
WT10.5X36.5
WT10.5X34
WT10.5X31
WT10.5X28.5
WT10.5X25
WT10.5X22
WT9X59.5
WT9X53
WT9X48.5
WT9X43
WT9X38
WT9X35.5
WT9X32.5
WT9X30
WT9X27.5
WT9X25
WT9X23
WT9X20
WT9X17.5
WT8X50
WT8X44.5
WT8X38.5
WT8X33.5
WT8X28.5
WT8X25
WT8X22.5
WT8X20
WT8X18
WT8X15.5
WT8X13
WT7X365
WT7X332.5
WT7X302.5
WT7X275
WT7X250
WT7X227.5
WT7X213
WT7X199
WT7X185
WT7X171
WT7X155.5
WT7X141.5
WT7X128.5
WT7X116.5
WT7X105.5
WT7X96.5
WT7X88
WT7X79.5
WT7X72.5
WT7X66
WT7X60
WT7X54.5
WT7X49.5
WT7X45
WT7X41
WT7X37
WT7X34
WT7X30.5
WT7X26.5
WT7X24
WT7X21.5
WT7X19
WT7X17
WT7X15
WT7X13
WT7X11
WT6X168
477

WT6X152.5
WT6X139.5
WT6X126
WT6X115
WT6X105
WT6X95
WT6X85
WT6X76
WT6X68
WT6X60
WT6X53
WT6X48
WT6X43.5
WT6X39.5
WT6X36
WT6X32.5
WT6X29
WT6X26.5
WT6X25
WT6X22.5
WT6X20
WT6X17.5
WT6X15
WT6X13
WT6X11
WT6X9.5
WT6X8
WT6X7
WT5X56
WT5X50
WT5X44
WT5X38.5
WT5X34
WT5X30
WT5X27
WT5X24.5
WT5X22.5
WT5X19.5
WT5X16.5
WT5X15
WT5X13
WT5X11
WT5X9.5
WT5X8.5
WT5X7.5
WT5X6
WT4X33.5
WT4X29
WT4X24
WT4X20
WT4X17.5
WT4X15.5
WT4X14
WT4X12
WT4X10.5
WT4X9
WT4X7.5
WT4X6.5
WT4X5
WT4X12.5
WT4X10
WT4X7.5
WT3X8
WT3X6
WT3X4.5
WT2.5X9.5
WT2.5X8
WT2X6.5
MT7X9
MT6X5.9
MT5X4.5
MT4X3.25
MT3X10
MT3X2.2
MT2.5X9.45
MT2X6.5
ST12X60.5
ST12X53
ST12X50
ST12X45
ST12X40
ST10X48
ST10X43
ST10X37.5
ST10X33
ST9X35
ST9X27.35
ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45
ST6X25
ST6X20.4
ST6X17.5
ST6X15.9
ST5X17.5
ST5X12.7
ST4X11.5
ST4X9.2
ST3.5X10
ST3.5X7.65
ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25
ST2.5X7.375
ST2.5X5
ST2X4.75
ST2X3.85
ST1.5X3.75
ST1.5X2.85
478

Double Angle - Long Legs Back - to - Back
D8X8X1.1250
D8X8X1.0000
D8X8X0.8750
D8X8X0.7500
D8X8X0.6250
D8X8X0.5000
D6X6X1.0000
D6X6X0.8750
D6X6X0.7500
D6X6X0.6250
D6X6X0.5000
D6X6X0.3750
D5X5X0.8750
D5X5X0.7500
D5X5X0.5000
D5X5X0.3750
D5X5X0.3125
D4X4X0.7500
D4X4X0.6250
D4X4X0.5000
D4X4X0.3750
D4X4X0.3125
D4X4X0.2500
D3.5X3.5X0.3750
D3.5X3.5X0.3125 D3.5X3.5X0.2500
D3X3X0.5000
D3X3X0.3750
D3X3X0.3125
D3X3X0.2500
D3X3X0.1875
D2.5X2.5X0.3750
D2.5X2.5X0.3125
D2.5X2.5X0.2500 D2.5X2.5X0.1875
D2X2X0.3750
D2X2X0.3125
D2X2X0.2500
D2X2X0.1875
D2X2X0.1250
D8X6X1.0000
D8X6X0.7500
D8X6X0.5000
D8X4X1.0000
D8X4X0.7500
D8X4X0.5000
D7X4X0.7500
D7X4X0.5000
D7X4X0.3750
D6X4X0.7500
D6X4X0.6250
D6X4X0.5000
D6X4X0.3750
D6X3.5X0.3750
D6X3.5X0.3125
D5X3.5X0.7500
D5X3.5X0.5000
D5X3.5X0.3750
D5X3.5X0.3125
D5X3X0.5000
D5X3X0.3750
D5X3X0.3125
D5X3X0.2500
D4X3.5X0.5000
D4X3.5X0.3750
D4X3.5X0.3125
D4X3.5X0.2500
D4X3X0.5000
D4X3X0.3750
D4X3X0.3125
D4X3X0.2500
D3.5X3X0.3750
479

D3.5X3X0.3125
D3.5X3X0.2500
D3.5X2.5X0.3750
D3.5X2.5X0.3125 D3.5X2.5X0.2500
D3X2.5X0.3750
D3X2.5X0.2500
D3X2.5X0.1875
D3X2X0.3750
D3X2X0.3125
D3X2X0.2500
D3X2X0.1875
D2.5X2X0.3750
D2.5X2X0.3750
D2.5X2X0.2500
D2.5X2X0.1875
Double Angle - Short Legs Back - to - Back

B8X6X1.0000
B8X6X0.7500
B8X6X0.2500
B8X4X1.0000
B8X4X0.7500
B8X4X0.5000
B7X4X0.7500
B7X4X0.5000
B7X4X0.3750
B6X4X0.7500
B6X4X0.6250
B6X4X0.5000
B6X4X0.3750
B6X3.5X0.3750
B6X3.5X0.3125
B5X3.5X0.7500
B5X3.5X0.5000
B5X3.5X0.3750
B5X3.5X0.3125
B5X3X0.5000
B5X3X0.3750
B5X3XO.3125
B5X3X0.2500
B4X3.5X0.5000
B4X3.5X0.3750
B4X3.5X0.3125
B4X3.5X0.2500
B4X3X0.5000
B4X3X0.3750
B4X3X0.3125
B4X3X0.2500
B3.5X3X0.3750
B3.5X3X0.3125
B3.5X3X0.2500
B3.5X2.5X0.3750
B3.5X2.5X0.3125
B3.5X2.5X0.2500
B3X2.5X0.3750
B3X2.5X0.2500
B3X2.5X0.1875
B3X2X0.3750
B3X2X0.3125
B3X2X0.2500
B3X2X0.1875
B2.5X2X0.3750
B2.5X2X0.3125
B2.5X2X0.2500
B2.5X2X0.1875
480
AISC 1989 Database

W44X285
W44X248 W44X224
W44X198 W40X328 W40X298
W40X268
W40X244 W40X221
W40X192 W40X655 W40X593
W40X531
W40X480 W40X436
W40X397 W40X362 W40X324
W40X297
W40X277 W40X249
W40X215 W40X199 W40X183
W40X167
W40X149 W36X848
W36X798 W36X720 W36X650
W36X588
W36X527 W36X485
W36X439 W36X393 W36X359
W36X328
W36X300 W36X280
W36X260 W36X245 W36X230
W36X256
W36X232 W36X210
W36X194 W36X182 W36X170
W36X160
W36X150 W36X135
W33X619 W33X567 W33X515
W33X468
W33X424 W33X387
W33X354 W33X318 W33X291
W33X263
W33X241 W33X221
W33X201 W33X169 W33X152
W33X141
W33X130 W33X118
W30X581 W30X526 W30X477
W30X433
W30X391 W30X357
W30X326 W30X292 W30X261
W30X235
W30X211 W30X191
W30X173 W30X148 W30X132
W30X124
W30X116 W30X108
W30X99
W27X494
W27X448 W27X407
W27X368 W27X336 W27X307
W27X281
W27X258 W27X235
W27X217 W27X194 W27X178
W27X161
W27X146 W27X114
W27X102 W27X94
W24X492
W24X450 W24X408
W24X370 W24X335 W24X306
W24X279
W24X250 W24X229
W24X207 W24X192 W24X176
W24X162
W24X146 W24X131
W24X117 W24X104 W24X103
W24X94
W24X84
W24X68
W24X76
W30X90
W24X62
W27X539
W27X84
W24X55
481

W21X402
W21X364 W21X333
W21X300 W21X275 W21X248
W21X223
W21X201 W21X182
W21X166 W21X147 W21X132
W21X122
W21X111 W21X101
W21X93
W21X83
W21X73
W21X68
W21X62
W21X50
W21X44
W18X311
W18X283
W18X258 W18X234
W18X211 W18X192 W18X175
W18X158
W18X143 W18X130
W18X119 W18X106 W18X97
W18X86
W18X76
W18X71
W18X65
W18X60
W18X50
W18X46
W18X40
W18X35
W16X100 W16X89
W21X57
WT18X115
WT18X128
WT18X116
WT18X105
WT18X97
WT18X91
WT18X85
WT18X80
WT18X75
WT18X67.5
WT16.5X177
WT16.5X159
WT16.5X145.5 WT16.5X131.5
WT16.5X120.5
WT16.5X110.5 WT16.5X100.5
WT16.5X84.5
WT16.5X76
WT16.5X70.5
WT16.5X65
WT16.5X59
WT15X117.5
WT15X105.5
WT15X95.5
WT15X86.5
WT15X74
WT15X66
WT15X62
WT15X58
WT15X54
WT15X49.5
WT13.5X108.5
WT13.5X97
WT13.5X89
WT13.5X80.5
WT13.5X73
WT13.5X64.5
WT13.5X57
WT13.5X51
WT13.5X47
WT13.5X42
WT12X88
WT12X81
WT12X73
WT12X65.5
WT12X58.5
WT12X52
W18X55
482

WT12X51.5
WT12X47
WT12X42
WT12X38
WT12X34
WT12X31
WT12X27.5
WT10.5X83
WT10.5X73.5
WT10.5X66
WT10.5X61
WT10.5X55.5
WT10.5X50.5
WT10.5X46.5
WT10.5X41.5
WT10.5X36.5
WT10.5X34
WT10.5X31
WT10.5X28.5
WT10.5X25
WT10.5X22
WT9X71.5
WT9X65
WT9X59.5
WT9X53
WT9X48.5
WT9X43
WT9X38
WT9X35.5
WT9X32.5
WT9X30
WT9X27.5
WT9X25
WT9X23
WT9X20
WT9X17.5
WT8X50
WT8X44.5
WT8X38.5
WT8X33.5
WT8X28.5
WT8X25
WT8X22.5
WT8X20
WT8X18
WT8X15.5
WT8X13
WT7X365
WT7X332.5
WT7X302.5
WT7X275
WT7X250
WT7X227.5
WT7X213
WT7X199
WT7X185
WT7X171
MT7X9
MT6X5.9
MT5X4.5
MT4X3.25
MT3X2.2
ST12X60.5
ST12X53
ST12X50
ST12X45
ST12X40
WT7X155.
MT2.5X9.
45
ST10X48
483

ST10X43
ST10X37.5
ST10X33
ST9X35
ST9X27.35
ST7.5X25
ST7.5X21.45
ST6X25
ST6X20.4
ST6X17.5
ST6X15.9
ST5X17.5
ST5X12.7
ST4X11.5
ST4X9.2
ST3.5X10
ST3.5X7.65
ST3X8.625
ST3X6.25
ST2.5X7.375
ST2.5X5
ST2X4.75
ST2X3.85
ST1.5X3.75
ST1.5X2.85
484
485
486
Australian 1990 Database

UB760X244 UB760X220 UB760X197 UB760X173 UB760X148
UB690X140
UB690X125 UB610X125 UB610X113 UB610X101 UB530X92
UB530X82
UB460X82
UB460X74
UB460X67
UB410X60
UB410X54
UB360X57
UB360X51
UB360X45
UB310X46
UB310X40
UB250X37
UB250X31
UB200X30
UB200X25
UB180X22
UB180X18
UB150X18
UB150X14
UC310X283 UC310X240
UC310X198 UC310X158 UC310X137
UC310X118
UC310X97
UC250X89
UC250X73
UC200X60
UC200X46
UC150X37
UC150X30
UC150X23
UC100X15
UBP310X79 UBP250X85
UC200X52
UBP250X63
TFB125X65 TFB100X45
TFC125X65 TFC100X50 TFC75X40
PFC380X100
PFC300X90 PFC250X90 PFC230X75 PFC200X75
PFC180X75
PFC150X75
EL200X200X26 EL200X200X20
EL200X200X18
EL200X200X16 EL200X200X13
EL150X150X19
EL150X150X16 EL150X150X12
EL150X150X10
EL125X125X16 EL125X125X12
EL125X125X10
487

EL125X125X8
EL100X100X12
EL100X100X10
EL100X100X8
EL100X100X6
EL90X90X10
EL90X90X8
EL90X90X6
EL75X75X10
EL75X75X8
EL75X75X6
EL75X75X5
EL65X65X10
EL65X65X8
EL65X65X6
EL65X65X5
EL55X55X6
EL55X55X5
EL50X50X8
EL50X50X6
EL50X50X5
EL50X50X3
EL45X45X6
EL45X45X5
EL45X45X3
EL40X40X6
EL40X40X5
EL40X40X3
EL30X30X6
EL30X30X5
EL30X30X3
EL25X25X6
EL25X25X5
EL25X25X3
UL150X100X12 UL150X100X10
UL150X90X16
UL150X90X12
UL150X90X10
UL150X90X8
UL125X75X12
UL125X75X10
UL125X75X8
UL125X75X6
UL100X75X10
UL100X75X8
UL100X75X6
UL75X50X8
UL75X50X6
UL75X50X5
UL65X50X8
UL65X50X6
UL65X50X5
German 1991 Database

I80
I100
I120 I140
I160
I180
I200
I220
I240 I260
I280
I300
488

I320
I340
I360 I380
I400
I450
I475
I500 I550
I600
I425
IPE80
IPE100
IPE120 IPE140 IPE160 IPE180
IPE200
IPE220
IPE360
IPE400
IPEO180 IPEO200 IPEO220 IPEO240 IPEO270 IPEO300

IPEO330 IPEO360 IPEO400 IPEO450 IPEO500 IPEO550
IPEO600
IPEV400 IPEV450
IPEV500
IPEV550
IPEV600
IPBI-100 IPBI-120
IPBI-140
IPBI-160
IPBI-180
IPBI-200
IPBI-220 IPBI-240
IPBI-260
IPBI-280
IPBI-300
IPBI-320
IPBI-340 IPBI-360
IPBI-400
IPBI-450
IPBI-500
IPBI-550
IPBI-600 IPBI-650
IPBI-700
IPBI-800
IPBI-900
IPBI-100
0
IPB-100
IPB-120
IPB-140
IPB-160
IPB-180
IPB-200
IPB-220
IPB-240
IPB-260
IPB-280
IPB-300
IPB-320
IPB-340
IPB-360
IPB-400
IPB-450
IPB-500
IPB-550
IPB-600
IPB-650
IPB-700
IPB-800
IPB-900
IPB-1000
U30X15
U30
U40X20
U40
U50X25
U50
489

U60
U65
U80
U100
U120
U140
U160
U180
U200
U220
U240
U260
U280
U300
U320
U350
U380
U400
T20
T25
T30
T35
T40
T45
T50
T60
T70
T80
T90
T100
T120
T140
South African 1992 Database
490
491
Korean 1990 Database

W594X302
W588X300
W582X300
W612X202
W606X201
W600X200
W596X199
W488X300
W482X300
W506X201
W500X200
W496X199
W440X300
W434X299
W450X200
W446X199
W390X300
W386X299
W404X201
W400X200
W396X199
W350X350
W344X354
W344X348
W336X249
W354X176
W350X175
W346X174
W310X310
W310X305
W304X301
W300X305
W300X300
W298X299
W294X302
W298X201
W294X200
W300X150
W298X149
W250X255
W250X250
W248X249
W244X252
W244X175
W250X125
W248X124
W208X202
W200X204
W200X200
W194X150
W200X100
W150X150
W148X100
W150X75
W125X125
W100X100
W340X250
L250X250X35 L250X250X25 L200X200X25
L200X200X20 L200X200X15
L175X175X15 L175X175X12 L150X150X19
L150X150X15 L150X150X12
L150X150X10 L130X130X15 L130X130X12
L130X130X10 L130X130X9
L120X120X8
L100X100X13 L100X100X10
L100X100X8
L100X100X7
L90X90X13
L90X90X10
L90X90X9
L90X90X8
L90X90X7
L90X90X6
L80X80X7
L80X80X6
L75X75X12
L75X75X9
L75X75X6
L70X70X6
L65X65X8
L65X65X6
L65X65X5
L60X60X6
L60X60X5
L60X60X4
L50X50X6
L50X50X5
L50X50X4
L45X45X5
L45X45X4
L40X40X5
492

C300X90
C300X91
C300X92
C125X65
C100X50
C75X40
M300X150
M250X125
M200X100
C300X93
C300X94
M150X75
M125X75
UK 1993 Database
493
SECTION 7
Buried Pipe Modeler

Buried Pipe Modeler or Input > Underground takes an unburied layout and buries it. The
modeler performs the following functions:
Allows the direct input of soil properties. The modeler contains the equations for buried pipe
stiffnesses. These equations are used to calculate the stiffnesses on a per length of pipe
basis and then generate the restraints that simulate the discrete buried pipe restraint.
Breaks down straight and curved lengths of pipe to locate soil restraints using a zone
concept. Where transverse bearing is a concern near bends, tees, and entry/exit points, soil
restraints are located in close proximity.
Breaks down straight and curved pipe so that when axial loads dominate, soil restraints are
spaced far apart.
Allows the direct entry of user-defined soil stiffnesses on a pipe-length basis. Input
parameters include axial, transverse, upward, and downward stiffnesses, as well as ultimate
loads. You can specify stiffnesses separately or in conjunction with CAESAR IIs
automatically generated soil stiffnesses.
The Buried Pipe Modeler is designed to read a standard CAESAR II input data file that
describes the basic layout of the piping system as if it was not buried. From this input, the
software creates a second input data file that contains the buried pipe model. This second input
file typically contains a much larger number of elements and restraints than the first job. The first
file that serves as the pattern is called the original job. The second file that contains the element
mesh refinement and the buried pipe restraints is called the buried job. CAESAR II names the
buried file by appending the letter B to the name of the original job.
The original job must already exist. During the process of creating the buried model, the
modeler removes any restraints in the buried section. Any additional restraints in the buried
section can be entered in the resulting buried model. The buried job, if it exists, is overwritten by
the successful generation of a buried pipe model. It is the buried job that is eventually run to
compute displacements and stresses.
Typical buried pipe displacements are considerably different than similar above-ground
displacements. Buried pipe deforms laterally in areas immediately adjacent to changes in
directions, such as those found in bends and tees. In areas far removed from bends and tees,
the deformation is primarily axial. The optimal size of an element, that is, the distance between a
single FROM and a TO node, is dependent upon which of these deformation patterns is to be
modeled. Because there is no continuous support model, the software must locate additional
point supports along a line to simulate this continuous support. These additional point supports
can also be user-defined. For a given stiffness per unit length, one of the following must be
added:
Several closely spaced, low stiffness supports
A limited number of distant and high stiffness supports
Where the deformation is lateral, smaller elements are needed to properly distribute the forces
from the pipe to the soil. The length over which the pipe deflects laterally is called the "lateral
bearing length" and can be calculated using the following equation:
494
Buried Pipe Modeler

Lb = 0.75() [4EI/Ktr] 0.25
Where:
E
Pipe modulus of elasticity
Pipe moment of inertia
Ktr =
Transverse soil stiffness on a per length basis
CAESAR II places three elements in the vicinity of this bearing span to properly model the local
load distribution. The bearing span lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 1 lengths. The
intermediate lengths in a piping system are called Zone 2 lengths, and the axial displacement
lengths in a piping system are called the Zone 3 lengths. To properly transmit axial loads, Zone
3 element lengths are computed using 100 x Do, where Do is the outside diameter of the piping.
The Zone 2 mesh consists of four elements of increasing length; starting at 1.5 times the length
of a Zone 1 element at its Zone 1 end, and progressing in equal increments to the last which is
50 x Do long at the Zone 3 end. CAESAR II views a typical piping system element breakdown or
mesh distribution as shown below. All pipe density is set to zero for all pipe identified as buried
so that deadweight causes no bending around these point supports.
CAESAR II automatically puts a Zone 1 mesh gradient at each side of the pipe framing
into an elbow. You must tell CAESAR II where the other Zone 1 areas are located in the piping
system.
A critical part of the modeling of an underground piping system is the proper definition of Zone
1or lateral bearing regions. These bearing regions primarily occur:
On either side of a change in direction.
For all pipes framing into an intersection.
At points where the pipe enters or leaves the soil.
495
Buried Pipe Modeler
Using any user-defined node within or near Zone 1.
Data Conversion
CAESAR II converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the existing elements and
adding soil restraints. The conversion process creates all of the necessary elements to satisfy
the Zone 1, Zone 2, and Zone 3 requirements, and places restraints on the elements in these
zones. All elbows are broken down into at least two curved sections, and very long radius
elbows are broken down into segments whose lengths are not longer than the elements in the
immediately adjacent Zone 1 pipe section. Node numbers are generated by adding 1 to the
elements FROM node number. The software checks a node number to make sure that is
unique in the model. All densities on buried pipe elements are zeroed to simulate the continuous
support of the pipe weight. A conversion log is also generated, which details the process in full.
See also
Buried Pipe Modeler Window (on page 496)
Soil Models (on page 501)
Buried Pipe Modeler Window

To start the Buried Pipe Modeler, click Underground Pipe Modeler
displays:
. The following window
Alternatively, you can click Input > Underground.

The Buried Pipe Modeler window is used to enter the buried element descriptions for the job
and allows you to define:
Which part of the piping system is buried
Mesh spacing at specific element ends
Soil stiffnesses
The first two columns of the data input grid contain element node numbers for each piping
element included in the original system. The next three columns allow you to describe the
sections of the piping system that are buried and to define any required fine mesh areas.
496
Buried Pipe Modeler

A finer mesh area is necessary for buried areas that will need to undergo lateral
displacements.
The remaining eight columns are used to define soil stiffnesses and ultimate loads.
Buried Pipe Modeler Toolbar

The Buried Pipe Molder toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Open - Opens an input data file that will serve as the original job.
Save - Creates an input data file that contains the buried pipe model. By
default, the software appends the filename of the original job with the letter B
to create the second input data file (the buried job).
Print - Prints the data input from the Buried Pipe Modeler window.
Soil Models - Opens the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box in which you
specify soil properties for the CAESAR II buried pipe equations used by the
software to generate one or more soil restraint systems. For more
information, see Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 507).
Convert - Converts the original job into the buried job by meshing the
existing elements and adding soil restraints.
Find - Activates the search feature.
Change the Name of a Buried Pipe Job

1. Click File > Change Buried Pipe Job Name.
2. In the Change Job Name dialog box, type a new name for the buried pipe job and click OK.
The software updates the name of the job.
From Node
Displays the node number for the starting end of the element
To Node
Displays the node number for the end of the piping element.
497
Buried Pipe Modeler
Soil Model No.

Defines which of the elements in the model are buried.
If you enter 0, the element is not buried.
If you enter 1, then specify the buried soil stiffnesses per length basis in columns 6 through
13.
If you enter a number greater than 1, the software points to a CAESAR II soil restraint model
generated using the equations outlined in Soil Models (on page 501).
You can specify soil properties, such as buried depth, friction factor, undrained shear
strength, using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 507). The software uses these
properties to calculate the buried soil stiffnesses on a stiffness per length basis. Because
the soil properties can change from point-to-point along the pipeline, several different soil
models can be entered for a single job. Each different soil model is given a unique soil
model number starting with 2. Consider the following example:
From Node
To Node
Soil Model No.
10
10
15
15
20
20
25
25
30
30
35
35
40
The pipe from nodes 5 through 15 is not buried. From nodes 15 through 30, you will specify
your own stiffnesses (using columns 6 through 13 of the data input area). From nodes 35
through 40, the software will use the property values indicated in the corresponding soil
model number to generate stiffnesses.
From/To End Mesh

Indicates a fine mesh is needed at the From or To element end.
Long, single elements that you enter need to be broken down into smaller elements to properly
distribute the soil forces. The software performs this breakdown automatically. If the particular
end of an element will undergo lateral displacement, it must have a finer mesh than an element
end that only undergoes axial displacements.
Axial displacement ends are at the end of a virtual anchor length.
Element ends undergo lateral displacements wherever there is a bend at the end of the element.
In this case, the software automatically places a fine mesh along the element entering the bend
498
Buried Pipe Modeler

and along the element leaving the bend. At all other locations, you must tell the software where
the fine meshes must go. These locations include:
1 - Element ends that frame into intersections.
2 - Element ends that enter or exit from the soil.
3 - Element ends where there is any change in direction not defined by a bend.
Follow the rule that too many mesh elements will never hurt the solution, whereas too
few may produce incorrect results. Thus, always check the appropriate box if you are uncertain.
Consider the following example:
CAESAR II places a fine mesh at the 5 end of the element because the pipe enters the soil at 5
and there are probably some displacements there. The software automatically places fine
meshes at element ends where there are bends, so checking the FROM END MESH/TO END
MESH boxes is not needed on the 10-15 element. A fine mesh is also placed at each element
end that frames into the intersection at 20. Finally, a fine mesh is placed at the terminal points
35 and 30.
User-Defined Lateral "K"

Specifies the soil stiffness perpendicular to the pipe axis on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions perpendicular to the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
The smallest allowable non-zero value is 0.5.
Ultimate Lateral Load

Specifies the ultimate lateral load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
User-Defined Axial Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness along the axis of the pipe on a stiffness per length basis. This
stiffness value acts in both directions along the axis of the pipe. This option is required if Soil
Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option blank.
To simulate a rigid, perfectly plastic soil for axial pipeline deformation, enter 1.0E12.
499
Buried Pipe Modeler
Ultimate Axial Load

Specifies the ultimate axial load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. It is at
this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
User-Defined Upward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the upward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value that
you enter is the stiffness that will resist upward displacement of the pipeline. This option is
required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this option blank.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one--the stiffness value that is not entered defaults to the stiffness value that is entered.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif and User-Defined Downward Stif (on page 500) are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
Ultimate Upward Load

Specifies the ultimate upward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis. The
value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to an upward displacement of the pipeline.
It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic. This option is
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load and Ultimate Downward Load (on page 501) are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
User-Defined Downward Stif

Specifies the soil stiffness in the downward direction on a stiffness per length basis. The value
that you enter is the stiffness that will resist downward (-Y) displacement of the pipeline. This
option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, you can leave this
option blank.
If the upward and downward stiffnesses are equal, then you need only enter a value for one.
The other stiffness defaults to the entered value.
If both User-Defined Upward Stif (on page 500) and User-Defined Downward Stif are set
to 0 or left blank, a fatal error results.
500
Buried Pipe Modeler
Ultimate Downward Load

Specifies the ultimate downward load carrying capacity of the soil on a force per length basis.
The value you enter is the maximum resistance of the soil to a downward (-Y) displacement of
the pipeline. It is at this point in the loading where the soil behavior becomes perfectly plastic.
This option is required if Soil Model No. (on page 498) is set to 1; otherwise, leave this option
blank.
If the upward and downward ultimate loads are equal, then you need only enter a value for
one. The other load defaults to the entered value.
If both Ultimate Upward Load (on page 500) and Ultimate Downward Load are set to 0 or
left blank, a fatal error results.
Soil Models
Only use the following procedures for estimating soil distributed stiffnesses and
ultimate loads when you do not have better available data or methods suited.
The soil restraint modeling algorithms used by the software are based on the following:
CAESAR II Basic Model - Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipelines, L.C. Peng,
published in 1978 in Pipeline Industry. For more information, see CAESAR II Basic Model
(on page 502).
American Lifelines Alliance - "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from the

Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). For more information, see
American Lifelines Alliance (see "American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model" on page 503).
Soil supports are modeled as bi-linear springs having an initial stiffness, an ultimate load, and a
yield stiffness. The yield stiffness is typically set close to zero. After the ultimate load on the soil
is reached, there is no further increase in load even though the displacement may continue. The
axial and transverse ultimate loads must be calculated to analyze buried pipe. Many researchers
differentiate between horizontal, upward, and downward transverse loads, but when the
variance in predicted soil properties and methods are considered, this differentiation is often
unwarranted.
The software allows the explicit entry of these data if it is necessary to your specific
project.
After the axial and lateral ultimate loads are known, the stiffness in each direction can be
determined by dividing the ultimate load by the yield displacement. Researchers have found that
the yield displacement is related to both the buried depth and the pipe diameter. The calculated
ultimate loads and stiffnesses are on a force per unit length of pipe basis.
See also
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box (on page 507)
501
Buried Pipe Modeler
CAESAR II Basic Model

The following recommendations apply when you select CAESAR II Basic Model as the
Soil Model Type in the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box. For more information about the dialog
box and the available soil properties, see Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 507).
Either FRICTION COEFFICIENT or UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH may be left blank. With
clays, the friction coefficient is typically left blank and is automatically estimated by CAESAR II
as Su/600 psf. Both sandy soils and clay-like soils can be defined here.
The soil restraint equations use these soil properties to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. Defining a value for TEMPERATURE CHANGE is optional. If entered the thermal
strain is used to compute and print the theoretical virtual anchor length. These equations are:
Axial Ultimate Load (Fax)
Fax = D[ (2sH) + (pt) + (f)(D/4) ]
Where:
D = Friction coefficient, typical values are:
0.4 for silt
0.5 for sand
0.6 for gravel
0.6 for clay or Su/600
s= Soil density
H = Buried depth to the top of pipe
p= Pipe density
t = Pipe nominal wall thickness
f= Fluid density
D = Pipe diameter
Su = Undrained shear strength (specified for clay-like soils)
Transverse Ultimate Load (Ftr)
Ftr = 0.5s(H+D)2[tan(45 + /2)]2OCM
If Su is given (that is, the soil is clay), then Ftr as calculated above is multiplied by Su/250 psf.
502
Buried Pipe Modeler

Where:
= Angle of internal friction, typical values are:
27-45 for sand
26-35 for silt
0 for clay
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER (OCM) is an artificial CAESAR II term that

allows you to take a conservative approach when modeling uncertain soil response.
Because a higher stiffness generally produces conservative results, you may wish to
increase the transverse soil stiffness. CAESAR II uses the OCM to serve this purpose.
You can reduce the OCM from its default of 8 to values ranging from 5 to 7, depending on
the degree of compaction of the backfill. There is no theory which suggests that the OCM
cannot equal 1.0.
For a strict implementation of Peng's Theory as discussed in his articles (April 78 and May
78 issue of Pipeline Industry), use a value of 1.0 for the OCM.
Yield Displacement (yd):
yd = Yield Displacement Factor(H+D)
The Yield Displacement Factor defaults to 0.015(suggested for H = 3D).
Axial Stiffness (Kax) on a per length of pipe basis:
Kax=Fax / yd
Transverse Stiffness (Ktr) on a per length of pipe basis:
Ktr=Ftr / yd
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model

The following information references "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" in
the American Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe
(http://www.americanlifelinesalliance.org/pdf/Update061305.pdf). This document provides
bilinear stiffness of soil for axial, lateral, uplift and bearing. Each stiffness term has a component
associated with sandy soils (subscripted q) and a component associated with clays (subscripted
c). Data can be entered for pure granular soils and pure clays.
Soil stiffness for both clay and sand (cohesive and granular soils, respectively) are defined
through the following user-defined parameters:
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill
H = soil depth to top of pipe (this is converted by C2 to depth to pipe centerline in ALA
calculations)
= effective unit weight of soil
= total dry unit weight of fill
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest (can be calculated based on internal friction angle of
soil)
503
Buried Pipe Modeler

f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle at
the soil-pipe interface
= internal friction angle of soil
Elastic range of soil is either fixed or a function of D & H with limits based on D.
Yield Displacement
Factor
Entry
Limited by
t (dT) Axial
Length units
p (dP) Lateral
Multiple of D
0.04(H+D/2)
qu (dQu) Upward
Multiple of H
Minimum
qu (dQu) Upward
Multiple of D
qd (dQd) Downward
Multiple of D
Axial
Tu = peak friction force at pipe-soil interface maximum axial soil force per unit length that can be
transmitted to pipe)
504
Buried Pipe Modeler

D = pipe OD
= adhesion factor (for clays only)
c = soil cohesion representative of the soil backfill (undrained shear strength)

H = depth of cover to pipe centerline
= effective unit weight of soil
Ko = coefficient of earth pressure at rest
The ratio of the horizontal effective stress acting on a supporting structure and the vertical
effective stress in the soil at that point. At rest indicates the pipe does not move for this
calculation.
= interface angle of friction for pipe and soil, = f
f = coating-dependent factor relating the internal friction angle of the soil to the friction angle
at the soil-pipe interface
Pipe Coating
Concrete
1.0
Coal Tar
0.9
Rough Steel
0.8
Smooth Steel
0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy
0.6
Polyethylene
0.6
= internal friction angle of soil

t = axial displacement to develop
Tu = 0.1 inch for dense sand, 0.2 inch for loose sand, 0.3 inch for stiff clay, and 0.4 inch for
soft clay
Lateral
Pu = maximum horizontal soil bearing capacity (maximum lateral soil force per unit length that
can be transmitted to pipe)
Nch = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
505
Buried Pipe Modeler

Nqh = horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (0 for =0)
Factor
Nch
H/D
6.752
0.065
-11.063
7.119
--
Nqh
20
H/D
2.399
0.439
-0.03
1.059E-3
-1.754E-5
Nqh
25
H/D
3.332
0.839
-0.090
5.606E-3
-1.319E-4
Nqh
30
H/D
4.565
1.234
-0.089
4.275E-3
-9.159E-5
Nqh
35
H/D
6.816
2.019
-0.146
7.651E-3
-1.683E-4
Nqh
40
H/D*
10.959
1.783
0.045
-5.425E-3 1.153E-4*
*
Nqh
45
H/D*
17.658
3.309
0.048
-6.443E-3 1.299E-4*
*
*CAESAR II limits the height/diameter (H/D) ratio to a maximum of 20 for angles at 40 to 45 degrees. The software
calculates any values specified that result in a ratio that is greater than 20 as equal to 20.
**The American Lifelines Alliance standard lists the horizontal soil bearing capacity factor for sand (N qh) as a negative
value for both 40 and 45 degree angles. This results in negative yield load values. CAESAR II calculates these values as
a positive value, as shown in the previous table.
Nqh can be interpolated for between 20and 45.
Vertical Uplift
Qu = maximum vertical upward soil bearing capacity (maximum vertical uplift soil force per unit
length that can be transmitted to pipe)
Ncv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for clay (0 for c=0)
506
Buried Pipe Modeler
Nqv = vertical upward soil bearing capacity factor for sand
= 0.01H to 0.02H for dense to loose sands < 0.1D

= 0.1H to 0.2H for stiff to soft clays < 0.2D
Vertical Bearing
Qd - maximum vertical bearing soil force per unit length that can be transmitted to pipe.
Nc, Nq, N = vertical downward soil bearing capacity factors
= total dry unit weight of fill

qd = vertical displacement to develop Q d
= 0.1D for granular soils
= 0.2D for cohesive soils
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box

Soil Models specifies options for the soil model method to use and defines basic soil
properties, such as undrained sheer strength, friction angles, and so forth. The modeler uses the
values that you define to compute axial, lateral, upward, and downward stiffnesses, along with
ultimate loads. Each set of soil properties is identified by a unique soil model number, starting
with the number 2. The soil model number is used in the buried element descriptions to tell
CAESAR II in what type of soil the pipe is buried. You can enter up to 15 different soil model
numbers in any one buried pipe job.
Soil model number 1 is reserved for user-defined values.
The soil models you enter do not have to be used in the current job. This provides a
convenient mechanism for soil property range studies.
507
Buried Pipe Modeler
Soil Model Type and Classification

Select the soil model method on which the software will base its calculations. Three different soil
model methods are available, each with its own set of soil properties.
American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel) - This is the default model is that is presented
for granular soils in "Appendix B" of the America Lifelines Alliance document Guidelines for
the Design of Buried Steel Pipe. This model was developed jointly by the American Society
of Civil Engineers and the Federal Emergency Management Agency in July 2001 (addenda
through February 2005.
American Lifelines Alliance (Clay) - This model is for clay soils and from the same
document as American Lifelines Alliance (Sand/Gravel).
CAESAR II Basic Model - A modified implementation of the method described by L.C. Peng
in his two-part article "Stress Analysis Methods for Underground Pipe Lines", published in
Pipe Line Industry (April/May 1978).
For more information, see Soil Models (on page 501).
ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR

Specifies the soil adhesion factor. This option displays only when you select American
Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil Classification.
If no value is defined, the soil adhesion factor is calculated using C - SOIL COHESION OF
BACKFILL based upon the following equation:
Alpha = 0.608-0.123C-0.274/(C**2+1)+0.695/(C**3+1)
Where C is in kips/sq.ft.
Possible values are listed in Figure B.2, "Appendix B: Soil Spring Representation" from
the Guidelines for the Design of Buried Steel Pipe by the American Lifelines Alliance
C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL

Specifies the soil cohesion representative of the backfill. This option displays only when you
select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Clay as the Soil
Classification.
Typical values for cohesive soils are between 2.5 and 20 psi (18 and 140kPa).
508
Buried Pipe Modeler
dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate lateral restraint load is
developed. This is calculated using as the following equation:
dP = 0.4 (H + D/2)
However, the calculated value must be limited to a maximum multiple for the pipe outer diameter
(D). Typical values are between 0.1 and 0.15.
dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN, MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate downward restraint load is
development. This value is calculated as a multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D). Typical
values are as follows:
Granular soils - 0.1
Cohesive soils - 0.2
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX MULTIPLE OF D

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu = MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D)
The maximum multiple of the pipe outer diameter (D), must be entered here. Typical values are
as follows:
Sand - 0.1
Clay - 0.2
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD, MULTIPLE of H

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate upward restraint load is
developed. This value is calculated as per the following equation:
dQu - MIN (MULTIPLE OF H) * H, (MULTIPLE OF D) * D
The maximum multiple of the pipe buried depth (H) must be entered here. Typical values are as
follows:
Dense Sand - 0.01
Loose Sand - 0.02
Stiff Clay - 0.1
Soft Clay - 0.2
509
Buried Pipe Modeler
dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL

Specifies the value of the soil displacement at which the ultimate axial restraint load is
developed. This option displays only when you select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil
Model Type list.
Typical values are as follows:
Dense Sand - 0.1 in. (2.5 mm.)
Loose Sand - 0.2 in (5.0 mm.)
Stiff Clay - 0.3 in. (7.5 mm.)
Soft Clay - 0.4 in. (10 mm.)
GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the dry density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only if you
select American Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil
Classification.
Typical soil densities are listed below:
Soil
Dry Density
4.33E-2
lb/cu.in.
Clay
Very Loose Sand
<=
5.79E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.200E-3
kg/cu.cm.
<=
1.606E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Loose Sand
6.08E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.686E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Medium Sand
6.48E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.797E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Dense Sand
6.66E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.847E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Very Dense Sand
>=
6.95E-2
lb/cu.in.
>=
1.928E-3
kg/cu.cm.
510
Buried Pipe Modeler
GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL DENSITY

Specifies the effective density of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This option displays only
when you select American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The effective density of the soil may differ from the dry density if the soil is wet, and thus less
buoyant. The effective density of the soil is less than the dry density of the soil. If the water table
may engulf the pipe even for a short time, then it is probably appropriate to enter a wet effective
density. If the soil is expected to remain dry, then enter the dry soil density. The following tables
list some typical soil densities:
Soil
Dry Density
Clay
Very Loose Sand
<=
4.33E-2
lb/cu.in.
<=
1.200E-3
kg/cu.cm.
5.79E-2
lb/cu.in.
<=
1.606E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Loose Sand
6.08E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.686E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Medium Sand
6.48E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.797E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Dense Sand
6.66E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.847E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Very Dense Sand
>=
Soil
>=
1.928E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Wet (Buoyant) Density

2.73E-2
lb/cu.in.
Clay
Very Loose Sand
6.95E-2
lb/cu.in.
<=
3.62E-2
lb/cu.in.
7.572E-4
kg/cu.cm.
<=
1.005E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Loose Sand
3.80E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.055E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Medium Sand
4.05E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.123E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Dense Sand
4.17E-2
lb/cu.in.
1.155E-3
kg/cu.cm.
Very Dense Sand
>=
4.35E-2
lb/cu.in.
>=
1.206E-3
kg/cu.cm.
511
Buried Pipe Modeler
F - COATING FACTOR
Specifies the coating dependent factor that relates the internal friction angle of the soil to the
friction angle at the soil-pipe interface. This option displays only if you select American Lifeline
Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values for external pipe coatings are:
Concrete - 1.0
Coal Tar - 0.9
Rough Steel - 0.8
Smooth Steel - 0.7
Fusion Bonded Epoxy - 0.6
Polyethelyne - 0.6
FRICT. ANGLE
Specifies the internal friction angle of the soil. Typical values are:
Clay - 0
Silt - 26-25
Sand - 27-45
For the American Lifelines Alliance soil model, this entry must be between 20- and
45-degrees.
For the CAESAR II basic soil model, this entry is used in the soil restraint equations to
generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses.
FRICTION COEFFICIENT
Specifies the coefficient of friction between pipe and soil. If the undrained shear strength (on
page 514) is entered, the friction coefficient may be left blank. The friction coefficient is
calculated using the following equation:
Friction Coeffecient = Su/0.4167E + 1
Typical friction coefficient values are:
Silt - 0.4
Sand - 0.5
Gravel - 0.6
Clay - 0.6 or Su/ 0.4167E + 1
This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
512
Buried Pipe Modeler
H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF PIPE

Specifies the buried pipe depth to the top of the pipe. This option displays only when you select
American Lifelines Alliance in the Soil Model Type list.
The American Lifetime Alliance method actually defines H as "depth to pipe centerline".
CAESAR II automatically converts this based upon the individual pipe sizes.
Upward soil stiffness calculations are considered to be applicable for H/D ratios of 10 and
below.
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT REST

Specifies the coefficient of earth pressure. This option displays only if you select American
Lifeline Alliance in the Soil Model Type list and Sand/Gravel as the Soil Classification.
Typical values are on the order of 1.0. If left blank, K0 defaults to the following:
K0 - 1.0 - sin(internal friction angle of the soil)
The internal friction angle of the soil is defined by FRICT. ANGLE (Sand=27-45;
Silt=26-35; Clay=0) (deg.) (see "FRICT. ANGLE" on page 512).
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION MULTIPLIER

Specifies the factor by which the transverse ultimate load is multiplied. This option displays only
when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
This value is used in the soil restraint equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and
stiffnesses. The default value is 8. This number can be reduced depending on the degree of
compaction of the backfill. Backfill efficiency can be approximated using the proctor number,
defined in most soils text books. Standard practice is to multiple the proctor number by 8 and
use the result as the compaction multiplier.
SOIL DENSITY
Specifies the weight of the soil on a per unit volume basis. This value is used in the soil restraint
equations to generate restraint ultimate loads and stiffnesses. This option displays only when
you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
513
Buried Pipe Modeler
TEMPERATURE CHANGE
Specifies the installed to operating pipe temperature difference.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
THERMAL EXPANSION COEFFICIENT

Specifies the pipe thermal expansion coefficient multiplied by 1E06.
The thermal expansion coefficient and the temperature change inputs are required if you want
CAESAR II to calculate and display the virtual anchor length.
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH

Specifies the undrained shear strength. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II
Basic Model in the Soil Model Type list.
You can leave this option blank if Friction Coefficient is defined.
YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR

Specifies the value used to calculate the soil restraint stiffness. This value must be greater than
0.0. This option displays only when you select CAESAR II Basic Model in the Soil Model Type
list.
The yield displacement factor is inversely proportional to the soil restraint stiffness. By default,
the yield displacement depth of 1.5% of the buried depth is used, which translates to a yield
displacement factor of 0.015.
Model an underground piping system

The recommended workflow for using the Buried Pipe Modeler is outlined in the steps below.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design. For
more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 515).
1. Click Underground Pipe Modeler
Underground to open the modeler.
on the CAESAR II toolbar or click Input >
2. Click File > Open on the Buried Pipe Modeler main menu and select the original unburied
job.
The original job serves as the basis for the buried pipe model. It must already exist
and need only contain the basic geometry of the piping system. The modeler will remove
any existing restraints in the buried portion.
3. Click Soil Models
on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar.
4. In the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box, select a Soil Model Type.
The software populates the dialog box with soil data properties specific to the soil model you
select.
514
Buried Pipe Modeler

5. Enter the necessary soil data and click OK to exit the dialog box.
To enter additional soil models, click Add New Soil Model.
The software saves the soil data in a file with the extension SOI.
6. In columns 1-5 of the buried element data input area, describe the sections of the piping
system that are buried and define any required fine mesh areas and click Save
.
User-defined soil data can be entered in columns 6-13.
7. On the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar, click Convert
to convert the original model into the
buried model. This step produces a detailed description of the conversion.
By default, the software appends the name of the job with the letter B. For example, if the
original job is named UndergroundPipe, the software saves the second input file with the
name UndergroundPipe B. If the default name is not appropriate, click File > Change
Buried Pipe Job Name and rename the buried job.
8. Click File > Exit to return the CAESAR II main window. From here, you can use Input >
Piping to review and edit the buried model, add any additional underground restraints (such
as thrust block) to the buried model, and perform the analysis of the buried pipe job.
A buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the modeler. This
example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping design.
For more information, see Buried Pipe Example (on page 515).
Buried Pipe Example

The following buried pipe example problem is provided to illustrate the features of the
modeler. This example should not be considered a guide for recommended underground piping
design.
Consider the following example:
515
Buried Pipe Modeler

The following input listing represents the unburied model shown above.
Terminal nodes 100 and 1900 are above ground. Nodes 1250 and 1650 (on the sloped runs)
mark the soil entry and exit points.
516
Buried Pipe Modeler

Using the Basic Soil Modeler dialog box (on page 507), Soil Model Number 2 properties for a
sandy soil is defined.
Elements 1250-1300 through 1600-1650 are buried using soil model number 2. Zone 1 meshing
is indicated at the entry and exit points.
517
Buried Pipe Modeler

Clicking Convert
model.
on the Buried Pipe Modeler toolbar begins the conversion to a buried
518
Buried Pipe Modeler

The screen listing can also be printed.
519
Buried Pipe Modeler

The original unburied model is shown along with the buried model below. Restraints have been
added around the elbows and along the straight runs.
Bi-linear restraints have been added to the buried model. The stiffness used is based upon the
distance between nodes.
520
Buried Pipe Modeler

The first buried element, 1250-1251, has no density.
You can now analyze the buried job.
521
SECTION 8
Static Analysis
Displays the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
In This Section
Static Analysis Overview ............................................................. 522
Working with Load Cases ........................................................... 528
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box............................. 544
Static Analysis Overview

During static analysis, CAESAR II assesses all of the piping data and processes the information
for meaningful reporting later. The software creates element stiffness matrices and load vectors,
as well as solves for displacements, forces and moments, reactions, and stresses. In addition,
you can design specific load cases for analysis, select and design spring hangers, and evaluate
environmental loads.
You must run error checking prior to performing static analysis. If CAESAR II does not find any
errors, the software displays a center of gravity report and generates the analysis data files, and
can then commence the solution and reporting phase.
If the software finds errors with the piping data, it does not continue analysis. You must make
corrections and rerun the Error Checker until no errors exist before the software can complete
analysis.
After error checking, you can specify the load cases to analyze. CAESAR II recommends an
initial set of load cases that you can accept or modify.
Error Checking
You must successfully complete the error checking portion of the piping input before you can
perform static analysis. When error checking completes, the software creates the required
analysis data files. Any changes that you make to the model are not reflected in the analysis
unless you rerun the error checking. If the piping input has changed, CAESAR II does not allow
an analysis to take place until you successfully run the error checker.
Error Check
Saves the input and starts the error checking procedure. You can access the Error Check
command only from the Classic Piping Input or CAESAR II Structural Input dialog boxes.
Batch Run
Checks the input data, analyzes the system, and presents the results without any additional
actions from you.
The software assumes that the load cases associated with the current job do not
need to change, and that the default account number (if Accounting is active) is correct. These
criteria are usually met after the first pass through the analysis.
522
Static Analysis
During error checking, the software reviews the CAESAR II model and alerts you to any possible
errors, inconsistencies, or noteworthy items. These items display in a grid as errors, warnings,
or notes.
Errors and Warnings Dialog Box
Displays the total numbers of errors, warnings, or notes for the current job. You must resolve all
errors for the software to run the analysis. Warnings and notes are for reference and do not
prevent analysis.
Double-click the row number of the message, and the software takes you to the element in the
piping input that pertains to the error, warning, or note. Click the tabs at the bottom of the
window to alternate between the Classic Piping Input and the Errors and Warnings dialog
boxes.
Double-click the column headers to sort the messages by Message Type, Message Number,
or Element/Node Number. Click File > Print to print the messages.
Error Message Type

The software reports an error when the analysis cannot continue. Errors can be caused by a
problem in the model, such as a piping element with no defined length. You must correct all
errors before the software allows you to continue the analysis.
Warning Message Type
Warning Message TypeThe software reports a warning when there is a problem that can be
overcome using some assumptions. An example of this is the wall thickness of an element
that is insufficient to meet the minimum wall thickness for the given pressure (hoop stress).
You do not have to correct warnings to get a successful analysis, but you should carefully
review them.
Note Message Type
The software reports a note to inform you of a fact related to the model. An example of a
note is the number of hangers to be designed by CAESAR II or the Center of Gravity report
generated after analysis. Note messages are just informational, and there is no action
required.
523
Static Analysis
What is a Load Case?

In CAESAR II, a load case is a group of piping system loads that are analyzed together and
occur at the same time. An example of a load case is an operating analysis composed of the
thermal, deadweight, and pressure loads together. Another example is an as-installed analysis
of deadweight loads alone.
A load case can also be composed of the combinations of the results of other load cases. For
example, a load case can be the difference in displacements between the operating and
installed cases.
No matter what the contents of the load case, it always produces a set of reports, which list
restraint loads, displacements and rotations, internal forces, moments, and stresses. Because of
piping code definitions for calculation methods and/or allowable stresses, CAESAR II also tags
load cases with a stress type. For example, the combination mentioned previously might be
tagged as an expansion stress case (EXP).
Piping System Loads

The piping system loads that compose the basic non-combination load sets relate to various
input items found on the Classic Piping Input dialog box. The following tables list the individual
load set designations, their names and the input items, which make them available for analysis.
Designation
Name
Input items which activate this

load case
Deadweight
Pipe Weight, Insulation Weight,

Refractory Weight, Cladding
Weight, Fluid Weight, Rigid Weight
WNC
Weight No fluid Contents

Weight, Rigid Weight
WW
Water Weight

Weight, Water-filled Weight, Rigid
Weight (usually used for Hydro
Test)
T1
Thermal Set 1
Temperature #1
T2
Thermal Set 2
Temperature #2
T3
Thermal Set 3
Temperature #3
T9
Thermal Set 9
Temperature #9
P1
Pressure Set 1
Pressure #1
P2
Pressure Set 2
Pressure #2
524
Static Analysis
P3
Pressure Set 3
Pressure #3
P9
Pressure Set 9
Pressure #9
HP
Hydrostatic Test Pressure
Hydro Pressure
D1
Displacements Set 1
Displacements (1st Vector)
D2
Displacements Set 2
Displacements (2nd Vector)
D3
Displacements Set 3
Displacements (3rd Vector)
D9
Displacement Set 9
Displacements (9th Vector)
F1
Force Set 1
Forces/Moments (1st Vector)
F2
Force Set 2
Forces/Moments (2nd Vector)
F3
Force Set 3
Forces/Moments (3rd Vector)
F9
Force Set 9
Forces/Moments (9th Vector)
WIN1
Wind Load 1
Wind Shape Factor
WIN2
Wind Load 2
Wind Shape Factor
WIN3
Wind Load 3
Wind Shape Factor
WIN4
Wind Load 4
Wind Shape Factor
WAV1
Wave Load 1
Wave Load On
WAV2
Wave Load 2
Wave Load On
WAV3
Wave Load 3
Wave Load On
WAV4
Wave Load 4
Wave Load On
U1
Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads (1st Vector)
U2
Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads (2nd Vector)
U3
Uniform Loads
Uniform Loads (3rd Vector)
CS
Cold Spring
Material # 18 or 19
Hanger Initial Loads
Hanger Design or Prespecified

Hangers
Available piping system loads display on the left side of the Static Analysis dialog box.
525
Static Analysis
Basic Load Cases
Load cases are comprised of one or more major load types as defined in the input. Major load
cases are load cases that require a solution to the matrix equation [K]{x} = {f}.
For example:
W+T1+P1+F1 (OPE) is a major load case
W+P1+F1 (SUS) is a major load case
Basic load cases can consist of a single load, such as WNC for an as-installed weight analysis.
A basic load can also include several loads added together, such as W+T1+P1+D1+F1 for an
operating analysis. The stress type categories sustained (SUS), expansion (EXP), occasional
(OCC), operating (OPE), and fatigue (FAT) are specified at the end of the load case definition.
The definition of the two examples is: WNC (SUS) and W+T1+P1+D1+H (OPE). Enter each
basic load case in this manner.
Load components, such as W, T1, D1, WIN1, can be preceded by scale factors such as 2.0,
-0.5, and so forth. Likewise, you can precede references to previous load cases by scale factors
when you build combination cases.
This provides you with several benefits.
If one loading is a multiple of the other (such as Safe Shutdown Earthquake being two times
Operating Basis Earthquake) you only have to type one loading in the Classic Piping Input
dialog box. You can use this loading in a scaled or unscaled form in the Static Analysis Load Case Editor dialog box.
If a loading can be directionally reversible, such as wind or earthquake, you only have to
type one loading in the Classic Piping Input dialog box. You can use this loading preceded
by a + or a - to switch the direction.
Load Rating Design Factor (LRDF) methods can be implemented by scaling individual load
components by their risk-dependent factors. For example:
1.05W + 1.1T1+1.1D1+1.25 WIN1
You can select the stress type from the list on each line.
Combination Load Cases

You can combine the results of the basic load cases by using combination load cases. Always
type these combinations after the last of the basic load cases. Designate combinations of basic
load cases by using the prefix L1, L2, and so on.
Algebraic combination load cases are combinations of previously-solved major load cases. For
example:
L1-L2 (EXP) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and stresses
using a combination method that you select.
L4+L6+L8 (OCC) is a combination case which combines the displacements, forces, and
stresses using a combination method that you select.
The + and - signs are unary operators/sign of multiplier. If no value precedes the load for
major load cases or the load case for combination cases, then the multiplier is +1.0 or -1.0. If a
value precedes the load or the load case, then the multiplier is +value or -value.
526
Static Analysis
You must specify the expected number of load cycles for all load cases with stress type
fatigue (FAT).
The following family of load cases provides an example of algebraic combinations.

Load
Case
Designation
Comments
W+T1+P1+H+0.67C Hot operating. The 0.67scale factor takes credit only for 2/3
S (OPE)
of the cold spring.
W1+P1+H+0.67CS( Cold operating with cold spring included.

OPE)
W1+P1+H(SUS)
Traditional sustained case.
WIN1(OCC)
Wind case. This will be manipulated later to represent

average wind 1X, maximum wind 2X (in the positive and
negative directions).
L1-L2(EXP)
Traditional cold to hot expansion case. Use L for load,

rather than DS.
527
Static Analysis
Load
Case
Designation
Comments
L1-L2(FAT)
Same case evaluated for fatigue at 10,000 cycles.
L1+L4(OPE)
Hot operating with average wind (in positive direction).
L1-L4(OPE)
Hot operating with average wind (in negative direction).
L1+2L4(OPE)
Hot operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
10
L1-2L4(OPE)
Hot operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
11
L2+L4(OPE)
Cold operating with average wind (in positive direction).
12
L2-L4(OPE)
Cold operating with average wind (in negative direction).
13
L2+2L4(OPE)
Cold operating with maximum wind (in positive direction).
14
L2-2L4(OPE)
Cold operating with maximum wind (in negative direction).
15
L3+L4(OCC)
Occasional stress case, sustained plus average wind.
16
L3+2L4(OCC)
Occasional stress case, sustained plus maximum wind.
17
L9+L10+L11+L12(O Maximum restraint load case. The combination option

PE)
should be MAX.
CAESAR II permits the specification of up to 999 load cases for analysis. Copy the model
to a new file to specify the additional load cases if more cases are required.
Working with Load Cases

From the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, you can create and edit load cases
for analysis. A load case is a group of piping system load primitives that are analyzed together.
The dialog box features two views that you select from the upper right corner of the dialog box.
List View - The default view for editing load cases, shows all load cases associated with the job.
From this view, you can edit individual load cases, create new load cases by typing in the
primitives, and drag and drop from the Loads Defined in Input or the load case identifier to
build load cases or create combination load cases.
Other List view functionality includes:
Group By functionality - Click a column heading and drag it to the top to sort the list of load
cases by that column.
Filter functionality on columns - Select the column head filter control and choose the filter
options for the selected column.
Static columns - See the load case identifier, definition and name even when you scroll to
set additional load case options.
528
Static Analysis
Column re-ordering - Click and drag to change the order of the List view columns.
Load Case Editor context menu - Right-click any load case and insert a blank new load
case above or below it, or delete the selected load case without having to click outside of the
list.
CAESAR II saves the grouping, filtering, and column re-ordering settings for the current
session only.
Group Edit View - A group (or bulk) editing view lets you select multiple load cases and make
changes to options all at once. For more information, see Editing Multiple Load Cases (on page
529).
Editing Multiple Load Cases

Use the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor to update values on
multiple load cases at one time. This view saves you valuable time as you can make global
changes to load cases, rather than having to edit each load case individually.
To perform a group edit of multiple load cases

1. Open a CAESAR II job.
2. Run error checking or the analysis, and then select Static Analysis.
3. Click Group Edit in the upper-right corner of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
From the Group Edit view of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor, you can see the
Loads Defined in Input list, the existing load cases already defined for the job, and the
available options that you can globally change.
4. CTRL+click to select random load cases or SHIFT+click to select a group of load cases for
which you want to set options.
CAESAR II deactivates any boxes for options that already have differing values in the load
cases. The software immediately applies all changes made to the active boxes to the
selected load cases.
Building Static Load Cases

The CAESAR II load case editor combines native and combination loads as needed by the
various piping codes that CAESAR II supports.
This section describes which load cases to use in a variety of situations. If you need assistance
in load case definition for a situation not covered here, or if you need further clarification of the
load cases described, please contact ICAS Technical Support by e-mail at
caesarii@intergraph.com.
Standard load cases for B31.1, B31.3, ASME SECT III Class 2 & 3, NAVY 505, B31.4, B31.5,
B31.8, B31.9, B31.11, Canadian Z662, RCC-M C & D, Stoomwezen, CODETI, Norwegian,
FDBR, BS 806 piping codes are as follows
Standard load cases for situations where you have weight, temperature, and pressure:
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
529
Static Analysis
L2
W+P1
(SUS)
L3
L1-L2
(EXP)*
* Use the algebraic combination method on the Load Cases tab for the expansion case.
Some of the piping codes perform a code stress check on the operating case and some
do not. For more information, see the CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for the equations used
by the various piping codes to obtain code stress and allowable stress.
The expansion case is a combination case that results from subtracting the sustained case from
the operating case. Because of this, the expansion case represents the change in the piping
system due to the effect of temperature, but in the presence of other loads. This is important
because the restraint status of the operating and sustained cases can be different if there are
nonlinear restraints (such as +Y, -Z, any restraint with a gap, and so on) or boundary conditions
(such as friction).
Standard load cases for B31.4 Ch IX, B31.8 Ch VIII, and DNV codes:
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+P1
(SUS)
No expansion stress is calculated for these piping codes.

Standard load cases for BS7159 and UKOOA piping codes:
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
No expansion or sustained stress is calculated for these piping codes.
Recommended Load Cases

When you initially open the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box, the software
recommends three types of load cases, based on the loads defined in the model: Operating,
Sustained, and Expansion. The software does not recommend Occasional load cases.
Operating load cases represent the loads acting on the pipe during hot operation. These load
cases include primary loadings (weight pressure, and force), secondary loadings (displacements
and thermal expansions). Operating cases are used to find hot displacements for interference
checking, and to find hot restraint and equipment loads. CAESAR II combines weight, pressure
case, and hanger loads with each of the thermal load cases when recommending operating load
cases. For example, the software combines the first displacement set with the first thermal set,
the second displacement set with the second thermal set, and so on. Then, the software
combines any cold spring loads.
Sustained load cases represent the primary force-driven loadings acting on the pipe. This case
is weight and pressure alone. This usually coincides with the cold as-installed load case.
Sustained load cases are used to satisfy the code sustained stress requirements, as well as to
calculate as-installed restraint and equipment loads. Sustained load cases are generally built by
combining weight with each of the pressure and force sets, and then with any hanger loads.
530
Static Analysis
Expansion load cases represent the range between the displacement extremes usually between
the operating and sustained cases. Expansion load cases are used to meet expansion stress
requirements. Generally, when you specify only one temperature and one pressure, the
recommended cases look similar to the following:
Case 1
W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)
Operating
Case 2
W+P1+H (SUS)
Sustained load case
Case 3
L1-L2 (EXP)
Expansion load case
Review any load recommendations made by CAESAR II.

CAESAR II does not recommend any occasional load cases. Definition of these is your
responsibility.
If the recommended load cases do not satisfy the analysis requirements, you can delete or
modify them. Conversely, you can reset the load cases at any time to the software
recommended set.
If you have an operating temperature below ambient in addition to one above ambient you
should add another expansion load case as follows:
Case 1
W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)
Operating
Case 2
W+D2+T2 +P1+H (OPE)
Operating
Case 3
W+P1+H (SUS)
Sustained load case
Case 4
L1-L3 (EXP)
Expansion load case
Case 5
L2-L3 (EXP)
Expansion load case
Case 6
L2-L1 (EXP)
Expansion load case
Static Seismic Load Cases

In the Classic Piping Input dialog box, click the Uniform Loads auxiliary panel and select the
in G's option. On the first element, type the seismic load in Gs. Enter the X-direction
acceleration in the Vector 1 box, the Y-direction acceleration in the Vector 2 box, and the
Z-direction acceleration in the Vector 3 box. This makes load case generation easier.
Because a seismic event is likely to occur while the piping system is in operation, an operating
case should have all operating loads plus the seismic load. This load case is then used with the
standard operating case to segregate the effect of the seismic load. The seismic load is then
combined with the static sustained load case for code compliance considerations.
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T1+P1+U1
(OPE)
531
Static Analysis
L3
W+T1+P1-U1
(OPE)
L4
W+T1+P1+U2
(OPE)
L5
W+T1+P1-U2
(OPE)
L6
W+T1+P1+U3
(OPE)
L7
W+T1+P1-U3
(OPE)
L8
W+P1
(SUS)
L9
L1-L8
(EXP)
L10
L2-L1
(OCC)
L11
L3-L1
(OCC)
L12
L4-L1
(OCC)
L13
L5-L1
(OCC)
L14
L6-L1
(OCC)
L15
L7-L1
(OCC)
L16
L8+L10
(OCC)
L17
L8+L11
(OCC)
L18
L8+L12
(OCC)
L19
L8+L13
(OCC)
L20
L8+L14
(OCC)
L21
L8+L15
(OCC)
Load cases 2 through 7 include all the loads and call these operating cases. The subtracted
uniform load vectors reverse the direction of the uniform load applied. Use these load case
results for occasional restraint loads and occasional displacements. Load cases 10 through 15
signify the segregated occasional loads. These are called occasional load cases, but you do not
need a code stress check here because these are only part of the final solution for code
compliance. Because of this, you can select the Suppress option for the Output Status. Also,
these combination load cases all use the Algebraic Combination Method on the Load Cases
tab. Load cases 16 through 21 are all used for code compliance. Add the segregated occasional
results to the sustained case results and use either the Scalar or ABS Absolute Value
Combination Method. Both scalar and absolute will give the same code stress results although
the displacements, forces, and moments could be different. Because you do not use any results
532
Static Analysis
except the stresses for combination cases, it does not matter which combination method you
use.
Sometimes you want to combine the results of vertical g-loads with horizontal g-loads. A factor
is often applied to the vertical g-load component of the combined load. You can accomplish this
when you type the Uniform Load data on the Classic Piping Input dialog box for the vertical
component, or you can do this directly in the load case editor as shown below. Using the
previous example, combine .67 vertical g-load with each horizontal component.
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T1+P1+U1+0.67U2
(OPE)
L3
W+T1+P1-U1+0.67U2
(OPE)
L4
W+T1+P1+U1-0.67U2
(OPE)
L5
W+T1+P1-U1-0.67U2
(OPE)
L6
W+T1+P1+U3+0.67U2
(OPE)
L7
W+T1+P1-U3+0.67U2
(OPE)
L8
W+T1+P1+U3-0.67U2
(OPE)
L9
W+T1+P1-U3-0.67U2
(OPE)
L10
W+P1
(SUS)
L11
L1-L10
(EXP)
L12
L2-L1
(OCC)
L13
L3-L1
(OCC)
L14
L4-L1
(OCC)
L15
L5-L1
(OCC)
L16
L6-L1
(OCC)
L17
L7-L1
(OCC)
L18
L8-L1
(OCC)
L19
L9-L1
(OCC)
L20
L10+L12
(OCC)
L21
L10+L13
(OCC)
533
Static Analysis
L22
L10+L14
(OCC)
L23
L10+L15
(OCC)
L24
L10+L16
(OCC)
L25
L10+L17
(OCC)
L26
L10+L18
(OCC)
L27
L10+L19
(OCC)
Sometimes you need to combine the horizontal and vertical components of seismic loading. You
can do this from the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Set up the static seismic load cases
as shown in the first example, then combine the segregated horizontal and vertical load cases
together using the SRSS Combination Method. Add these results to the sustained case.
L1
W+T1+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T1+P1+U1
(OPE)
L3
W+T1+P1-U1
(OPE)
L4
W+T1+P1+U2
(OPE)
L5
W+T1+P1-U2
(OPE)
L6
W+T1+P1+U3
(OPE)
L7
W+T1+P1-U3
(OPE)
L8
W+P1
(SUS)
L9
L1-L8
(EXP)
L10
L2-L1
(OCC) *
L11
L3-L1
(OCC) *
L12
L4-L1
(OCC) *
L13
L5-L1
(OCC) *
L14
L6-L1
(OCC) *
L15
L7-L1
(OCC) *
L16
L10+L12
(OCC) **
534
Static Analysis
L17
L10+L13
(OCC) **
L18
L11+L12
(OCC) **
L19
L11+L13
(OCC) **
L20
L14+L12
(OCC) **
L21
L14+L13
(OCC) **
L22
L15+L12
(OCC) **
L23
L15+L13
(OCC) **
L24
L8+L16
(OCC) ***
L25
L8+L17
(OCC) ***
L26
L8+L18
(OCC) ***
L27
L8+L19
(OCC) ***
L28
L8+L20
(OCC) ***
L29
L8+L21
(OCC) ***
L30
L8+L22
(OCC) ***
L31
L8+L23
(OCC) ***
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the SRSS combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
*** Use the ABS or Scalar combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
Change the operating load cases that include seismic loads to OCC for piping codes that
do not perform a sustained code stress check. Use these cases for code compliance. The
combination cases are not needed in such cases.
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger Selection

CAESAR II must analyze two additional load cases to get the data required to select a variable
support, if you want to let the software design spring hangers. The two basic requirements for
sizing hangers are the deadweight carried by the hanger, which is hanger hot load, and the
range of vertical travel to be accommodated.
The first load case, traditionally called restrained weight, consists of only deadweight (W). For
this analysis, CAESAR II includes a rigid restraint in the vertical direction at every location where
a hanger is to be sized. The load on the restraint from this analysis is the deadweight that must
be carried by the support in the hot condition.
535
Static Analysis
For the second load case, the hanger is replaced with an upward force equal to the calculated
hot load, and an operating load case is run. This load case, traditionally called free thermal,
includes the deadweight and thermal effects, the first pressure set if defined, and any
displacements, W+D1+T1+P1. The vertical displacements of the hanger locations, along with
the previously calculated deadweights, are then passed on to the hanger selection routine. After
the hangers are sized, the added forces are removed and replaced with the selected supports
along with their pre-loads cold loads designated by load component, H. Load component H can
appear in the load cases for hanger design if you have predefined any springs. In this case, it
would represent the pre-defined operating loads.
CAESAR II then continues with the load case recommendations as defined above. A typical set
of recommended load cases for a single operating load case spring hanger design is as follows:
Case 1
Weight for hanger loads
Case 2
W+D1+T1+P1
Operating for hanger travel
Case 3
W+D1+T1+P1+H (OPE)
Operating, hangers included
Case 4
W+P1+H (SUS)
Sustained load case
Case 5
L3-L4 (EXP)
Expansion load case
These hanger sizing load Cases 1 and 2 generally supply no information to the output reports
other than the data found in the hanger tables. Cases 3, 4, and 5 match the recommended load
cases for a standard analysis with one thermal and one pressure defined. The displacement
combination numbers in Case 5 have changed to reflect the new order. If multiple temperatures
and pressures existed in the input, they too would appear in this set after the second spring
hanger design load case.
Two other hanger design criteria also affect the recommended load cases. If the actual cold
loads for selected springs are to be calculated, one additional load case, WNC+H, would appear
before Case 3. If the hanger design criteria of the piping system is set so that the proposed
springs must accommodate more than one operating condition, other load cases must appear
before Case 3 above. You must perform an extra hanger design operating load case for each
additional operating load case used to design springs. See Load Cases with Hanger Design (on
page 536) for more information on these options.
Load Cases with Hanger Design

When CAESAR II designs spring hangers, two additional load cases are required. The letter H
designates the hanger installation load (pre-load) that is always present in a spring hanger.
L1
(HGR) *HS = Rigid
L2
W+T1+P1
(HGR) *HS = Ignore
L3
W+T1+P1+H
(OPE) *HS = As Designed
L4
W+P1+H
(SUS) *HS = As Designed
536
Static Analysis
L5
L3-L4
(EXP) **
*HS is the hanger stiffness specified in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
** Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
When you use only predefined spring hangers, there is no need for the first two load cases.
However, the letter H is still required in the operating and sustained load cases. Other hanger
load cases are required when you use multiple load case design. In such instances, let
CAESAR II recommend the load cases. You can then add or edit the non-hanger design load
cases as necessary.
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll

There is often platform movement, or relative movement, between two platforms with
inter-connected piping, in an offshore piping system. This also applies to FSPO and other
shipboard piping systems. Apply the pitch and roll displacements to CNodes on each affected
restraint. Use displacement vectors not already in use to describe thermal displacement
boundary conditions. There is usually a + displacement and a - displacement to describe the
peak pitch and roll conditions. Look at the state of the platform at its peaks to determine the
worst two conditions for relative displacement between piping separated by the largest distance
along the line of wave travel. D3 and D4 describe two peak pitch conditions. D1 is a thermal
displacement.
L1
W+T1+D1+D3+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T1+D1+D4+P1
(OPE)
L3
W+P1
(SUS)
L4
L1-L3
(EXP) *
L5
L2-L3
(EXP) *
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor.
It is likely that you will want to perform a fatigue analysis because of the large number of
displacement cycles common in pitch and roll situations. Select the appropriate fatigue curve on
the first piping input under the Allowable Stress area on the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Add the following cases to the previous example. Enter the number of cycles for each pitch
condition for fatigue stress type (FAT).
L6
L1-L3
(FAT)
21000000
L7
L2-L3
(FAT)
21000000
The 21000000 represents 21 million load cycles during the life of the piping system. Use the
number of cycles that you would expect to occur during the life of such a storm for large
displacements, such as those that occur during a 1-year, 30-year, or 100-year event. Multiply
this number by the number storms likely to happen during the lifetime of the piping system.
537
Static Analysis
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements

Thermal displacements are generally associated with specific operating conditions. D1 is
applied with T1, D2 to T2, and so on. When one temperature is below ambient, and one is
above ambient, you can determine the full expansion stress range.
L1
W+T1+D1+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T2+D2+P1
(OPE)
L3
W+P1
(SUS)
L4
L1-L3
(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1
L5
L2-L3
(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2
L6
L1-L2
(EXP) * full expansion stress

range
* Use the algebraic combination method in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Include the thermal displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping codes with
no expansion stress computation.
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements and Settlement

Use a CNode for settlement on any affected restraints. This CNode must be a node number that
is not used elsewhere in the model. Place the settlement on the CNode using a displacement
vector that is not already used for thermal displacements. This example uses D3 to describe
restraint settlement.
L1
W+T1+D1+D3+P1
(OPE)
L2
W+T2+D2+D3+P1
(OPE)
L3
W+P1
(SUS)
L4
W+P2
(SUS)
L5
L1-L3
(EXP) * effects of D1 and T1 and

settlement
L6
L2-L4
(EXP) * effects of D2 and T2 and

settlement
L7
L1-L2
(EXP) * full expansion stress range

between OPE1 and OPE2
Settlement is evaluated as an expansion load because it is strain related with a half-cycle.
538
Static Analysis
* Include the thermal and settlement displacements in the operating cases as shown for piping
codes with no expansion stress computation.
Providing Wind Data

If you specify the wind shape factor in the Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WIN1, WIN2, WIN3 and WIN4 as available loads in Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
dialog box. Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR
II activates the Wind Loads tab so that you can define the required wind load data.
You can specify up to four different wind load profiles. Omit any of them to exclude the data from
the analysis. CAESAR II supports thirteen wind codes. For more information, see Wind Loads
Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 554).
Select Wind Code or Profile

You can use the following wind codes to generate wind loads on piping systems. Refer to the
CAESAR II Quick Reference Guide for details on which versions of each code that CAESAR II
supports.
ASCE 7
IS 875
AS/NZS 1170.0
Mexico
539
Static Analysis
Brazil NBR 6123
NBC
BS 6399-2
UBC
China GB 50009
Wind Pressure vs Elevation (user defined)
EN 1991-1-4
Wind Velocity vs Elevation (user defined )
IBC
Providing Wave Data

If you specify the hydrodynamic coefficients in Classic Piping Input dialog box, CAESAR II lists
WAV1, WAV2, WAV3 and WAV4 as available loads in Static Analysis (Load Case Editor).
Because the software requires additional information to make an analysis, CAESAR II activates
the Wave Loads tab so that you can define the extra wave load data.
You can specify up to four different wave load profiles. Current data and wave data can be
specified and included together. Omit either of them to exclude the data from the analysis.
CAESAR II supports three current models and six wave models. For more information, see
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 570).
540
Static Analysis
Running the Static Analysis

The static analysis performed by CAESAR II follows the regular finite element solution routine.
The software combines element stiffnesses to form a global system stiffness matrix. Each basic
load case defines a set of loads for the ends of all the elements. These elemental load sets are
combined into system load vectors. Using the relationship of force equals stiffness times
displacement (F=KX), the software can calculate unknown system deflections and rotations. The
known deflections however, may change during the analysis as hanger sizing, nonlinear
supports, and friction all affect both the stiffness matrix and load vectors.
CAESAR II uses the root solution from this equation, the system-wide deflections and rotations,
with the element stiffnesses to determine the global (X, Y, Z) forces and moments at the end of
each element. The software translates these forces and moments into a local coordinate system
for the element from which it calculates the code-defined stresses. Forces and moments on
anchors, restraints, and fixed displacement points are summed to balance all global forces and
moments entering the node. Algebraic combinations of the basic load cases pick up this process
where appropriateat the displacement, force and moment, or stress level.
After the software completes the setup for the solution, it repeats the calculation of the
displacements and rotations for each of the basic load cases. During this step, the software
displays the Incore Solver dialog box.
541
Static Analysis
This dialog box serves as a monitor of the static analysis. The upper-left portion of the dialog
box reflects the job size by listing the number of equations to be solved and the bandwidth of the
matrix that holds these equations. Multiplying the number of equations by the bandwidth gives a
relative indication of the job size. This area also lists the current load case and the total number
of basic load cases the software has to analyze and solve. The iteration count, as well as the
current case number, shows how much work the software has completed. Load cases with
nonlinear restraints can require several solutions or iterations before the software confirms the
changing assumptions about the restraint configuration, such as resting or lifting off, active or
inactive, and so on.
In the lower-left corner of the Incore Solver dialog box are two bar graphs that indicate where
the program is in an individual solution. These bar graphs illustrate the speed of the solution. By
checking the data in this first box, you have an idea of how much longer to wait for the results.
The right side of the Incore Solver dialog box also provides information regarding the status of
nonlinear restraints and hangers in the job. For example, the software displays messages noting
the number of restraints that have yet to converge or any hangers that appear to be taking no
load here. You can step through nonlinear restraint status on an individual basis by pressing the
F2 through F4 keys.
After the analysis of the system deflections and rotations, the software post-processes the
results to calculate the local forces, moments, and stresses for the basic load cases and all
542
Static Analysis
results for the algebraic combinations (for example L1-L2). CAESAR II stores the total system
results in a file with the suffix _P (for example, TUTOR._P).
The _A (or input file), the _P (or output file), and the OTL (Output Time Link file) are all
that are required to archive the static analysis. The remaining scratch files can be deleted
without any impact on the completed work.
During this post-processing, the Status frame lists the element for which the forces and stresses
are being calculated. After the software calculates the last stresses of an element, the output
processor dialog box displays. Use this dialog box to review the graphic and tabular results of
the analysis. For more information on interactive processing of output results, see Dynamic
Input and Analysis.
Controlling Results
CAESAR II allows you to specify whether the software retains any or all of the load case results
for review in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor through two options: Output Status (on
page 549) and Output Type (on page 549). This helps ensure that the results you find most
meaningful are the ones the software displays.
543
Static Analysis
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box

Controls options for static analysis.
After error-checking your model, specify your static load cases using the Edit Static Load
Cases
command, which is only available after you have successfully error checked the
piping input file.
The Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box lists many details about the input, including
the following:
Available loads that are defined in the input.
Available stress types.
Current load cases offered for analysis.
CAESAR II lists recommended load cases if the job is entering static analysis for the first time.
The list displays loads saved during the last session if the job has been run previously.
Options
Save - Saves the load case and environmental data file. For more information, see Save
<filename> (on page 231).
Add a load case - Inserts a blank load case following the selected line in the list. If no line is
selected, the load case is added at the end of the list. To select a load case, click the number to
the left of the list.
544
Static Analysis
To add load cases quickly, right-click on a load case and select Insert Above or Insert
Below to add a blank load case to the list.
Delete a load case - Removes the current entry from the Load Cases list.
To delete load cases quickly, select the load case, right-click and choose Delete.
Recommend load cases - Replaces the current load cases with the CAESAR II
recommended load cases.
Import load cases - Copies the load cases from a file. The units and load types of the
copied file must match those of the current file.
Analyze load cases- Runs the static analysis.
Tabs
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545)
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 554)
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 570)
See Also
Working with Load Cases (on page 528)
Building Static Load Cases (on page 529)
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for editing load cases. You can define up to 999 load cases. Click a line in the
list to edit the load property. You can perform edits on groups of load cases by clicking the
Group Edit option in the right corner of the dialog box. For more information, see Editing
Multiple Load Cases (on page 529).
You must specify all basic (non-combination) load sets before you can declare any algebraic
combinations. This is true for both user-defined and edited load cases.
Drag basic load cases and drop them on other load cases to create algebraic combination
cases. CAESAR II prompts you for the combination type when necessary.
Select combination methods and other specifics pertaining to the load case in the boxes to the
right of the Loads Defined in Input list.
You can change the Stress Type value by clicking in the box and then selecting a different
value from the list. Stress type determines the stress calculation method and the allowable
stress to use.
When you define a fatigue (FAT) stress type for a load case, you must enter the number
of anticipated Load Cycles for that load case or the software prompts you before analysis.
545
Static Analysis
Recommend Load Cases

Displays the Recommended Load Cases dialog box. CAESAR II suggests the load cases that
you should run to satisfy the basic requirements of the piping codes. You can then choose to run
the load cases as recommended, or you can modify them to meet your requirements. Click Yes
to accept the recommended load cases (which you can later edit), or No to return to the Static
Analysis dialog box.
Recommended Load Cases Dialog Box

Displays a list of load cases that CAESAR II recommends to satisfy the expansion and
sustained code compliance requirements. You can choose to run the load cases as presented,
or you can modify the cases to meet your requirements.
Import Load Cases

Imports load cases from a CAESAR II file.
Make sure the units match between the two jobs files prior to importing. When you import
load cases from another job, you must verify the load case values, wind data, and wave data to
ensure data integrity.
Loads Defined in Input

Displays the load types available in the model input. For example, if T2 displays on the list then
the model has defined Operating Temperature 2. If T2 does not display then the model does
not include a second operating temperature.
The load types that can be defined are:
W - Weight including pipe, fluid, and insulation.
WW - Weight including pipe, water filled, and insulation.
WNC - Weight with no contents. Includes pipe and insulation.
T1 - Operating temperature 1.
T2 - T9 - Additional operating temperatures 2 through 9.
P1 - Operating pressure 1.
P2 - P9 - Additional operating pressures 2 through 9.
F1 - Concentrated force vector 1.
F2 - F9 - Additional force vectors 2 through 9.
D1 - Displacement vector 1.
D2 - D9 - Additional displacement vectors 2 through 9.
U1 - Uniform load vector 1.
U2 - U3 - Additional uniform load vectors 2 through 3.
WIN1 - Wind load vector 1
WIN2 - WIN4 - Additional wind load vectors 2 through 4.
546
Static Analysis
WAV1 - Wave load vector 1.
WAV2 - WAV4 - Additional wave load vectors 1 through 4.
CS - cold spring, material 18 or 19.
H - Hanger initial loads.
HP - Hydrostatic pressure.
Definition
Shows the current load cases offered for analysis. You can build load cases by dragging
components from the Loads Defined in Input list and dropping them on the Definition box or
by typing in the values.
Click the Definition box to edit the load case definition. You can only enter the load components
as they are listed in the Loads Defined in Input list. The options you select in the piping input
determine what load case values appear in this list.
For more information, see Building Static Load Cases (on page 529).
Load Case Name

Describes the CAESAR II load case. Specify your own names or labels for CAESAR II load case
definitions, which you can use for identification purposes when you review the output. Clear the
box to display the CAESAR II load case definition name.
Load case names cannot exceed 132 characters.
These user-defined load case names appear in the Load Case Report. For more information,
see Controlling Results (on page 543). You can use these names in place of the default load
case definition name anywhere in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor dialog box.
Stress Type
Displays the stress types. The stress type applies to the load cases. It defines how the element
stresses and allowables are computed. The available stress types are:
OPE - Operating case. For B31.1 and B31.3 (and similar codes) this case is not a code
compliance case. Allowable stresses are not reported.
SUS - Sustained case.
EXP - Expansion case.
OCC - Occasional load case.
FAT - Fatigue load case.
You must also specify the number of Load Cycles (on page 549) for load cases with a
Fatigue (FAT) stress type.
HGR - Spring hanger design. These are load cases that CAESAR II uses internally to design
and select spring hangers. Results are not available for these cases.
HYD - Hydro test. Select hanger status. For a hydrotest case, the default hanger status is rigid
or locked.
547
Static Analysis
Alternate SUS/OCC
Indicates that the load case is an alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case. Alternate SUS/OCC load cases are associated with preceding operating (OPE) load
cases.
Due to changes in the B31.3 code for the 2014 edition, the primary stress in each position of the
piping system must be evaluated. These alternate SUS/OCC load cases use the restraint status
from the previous OPE load case to evaluate the stresses induced by primary loads.
When you create a load case that follows an OPE load case and select a Stress Type of SUS
or OCC, the software activates the Alternate SUS/OCC check box, which you can select to
indicate that the case is an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case.
CAESAR II displays the number of the related OPE load case when you select the Alternate
SUS/OCC check box.
For more information, see Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC)
Load Cases (on page 548).
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS) and Occasional (OCC) Load

Cases
CAESAR II includes a new designation for static load cases, called an alternate load case. The
B31.3 2014 code edition merged the previous Appendix P from the code into the main body of
the standard. This appendix related to stresses due to sustained loads. Because of this change,
CAESAR II was modified to address these additional sustained conditions based on the support
configuration established by the preceding operating (OPE) case.
You now can associate a related alternate Sustained (SUS) or alternate occasional (OCC) load
case that uses the restraint status from the preceding operating (OPE) load case by selecting
the Alternate SUS/OCC check box in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. CAESAR II
uses the restraint configuration established from the OPE case to create the alternate SUS or
OCC load case. In addition, the software disables all load case options that are not applicable
on the alternate SUS or OCC load case.
Use this functionality in systems where supports are active in some conditions and inactive in
others (such as pipes lifting off supports).
The load case generates primary stress corresponding to the restraint configuration for the
previous operating (OPE) load case. However, the alternate sustained (SUS) or alternate
occasional (OCC) load case is not a valid structural representation of the system. When using
the alternate SUS or alternate OCC cases, keep the following in mind:
These alternate sustained cases determine the maximum sustained stress and are used in
calculation of the expansion stress range allowable.
CAESAR II does not generate restraint or displacement reports for alternate SUS and
alternate OCC load cases.
Do not use an alternate SUS or alternate OCC load case to establish the linear restraint
status used in dynamic analysis. Instead, use the corresponding operating case to get the
support configuration.
548
Static Analysis
Use one of the two new load case templates (.tpl files) when recommending load cases.
These templates include support for alternate SUS load cases. For more information, see
Load Case Template.
For more information on loading conditions and support scenarios that result in the greatest
sustained load (SL) for each operating condition, see Appendix S, Example S302 in the B31.3
code standard.
Load Cycles
Indicates the anticipated number of applications of this load on the system for load cases using
the Expansion (EXP) or Fatigue (FAT) stress types. The software uses this value to determine
the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material or the cyclic reduction factor for an
Expansion case. For static cases, the software calculates stresses at full range. For dynamic
cases, the software calculates stresses at half range, which is the amplitude of the full stress
range.
For load cases with an Expansion (EXP) stress type, you can enter a value of 1 in the Load
Cycles field (for B31.1 jobs) to indicate that the stress range is caused by noncyclic movements.
In this situation, the software replaces the allowable stress range value (Sa) with a special
noncyclic allowable calculation, as per the B31.1 code standard. The software continues to
calculate the displacement stress range (Se) as defined by the applicable piping code.
Output Status
Controls the disposition of the load case results. The available options are Keep or Suppress.
Use Keep when the load case is producing results that you want to review. The default for
all new cases (except for HGR load cases) is Keep.
Use Suppress for artificial cases such as the preliminary hanger cases, or intermediate
construction cases. Load cases used for hanger design, that is, the weight load case and
hanger travel cases designated with the stress type HGR, must be designated as Suppress.
For example, a wind only load case could be designated as Suppress because it was built only
to be used in subsequent combinations and has no value as a standalone load case. For all load
cases created under previous versions of CAESAR II, all load cases except the HGR cases are
converted as Keep.
Output Type
Designates the type of results available for load cases that have a Keep status. Use this field to
help minimize clutter on the output and to ensure that only meaningful results are retained. The
available options are:
Disp/Force/Stress - Provides displacements, restraint loads, global and local forces, and
stresses. This is a good choice for operating cases where you are designing to a code which
does a code check on operating stresses, because the load case is of interest for
interference checking (displacements) and restraint loads at one operating extreme (forces).
Disp/Force - Provides displacements restraint loads, global and local forces. This is a good
choice for OPE cases where you are designing for those codes which do not do a code
check on OPE stresses.
549
Static Analysis
Disp/Stress - Provides displacements and stresses only.
Force/Stress - Provides restraint loads, global and local forces, and stresses. This is a good
choice for the Sustained (cold) case, because the load case would be of interest for restraint
loads at one operating extreme (forces), and code compliance (stresses). FR combination
loads cases developed under previous versions of CAESAR II are converted with this
force/stress type.
Disp - Provides displacements only.
Force - Provides restraint loads, global, and local forces only.
Stress - Provides stresses only. This is a good choice for a sustained plus occasional load
case (with Abs combination method), because this is an artificial construct used for code
stress checking purposes. ST combination load cases developed under previous versions of
CAESAR II are converted with this stress type.
Combination Method
Specifies the combination method to use for combination cases only. Load cases to combine
are designated as L1, L2, and so on. Select the combination method from the list.
Load case results are multiplied by any associated scale factors before performing the
combination and comparison.
The available methods are:
Algebraic - Indicates a signed algebraic combination of displacement and force level. This
method combines the displacement vectors and the force vectors algebraically and then
calculates the stresses from the combined forces. Displacements are the algebraic combination
of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the force vectors. Stresses
are not combined. Stresses are calculated from the algebraically combined forces. The
Algebraic method would typically be used to calculate EXP code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods DS and FR used an Algebraic combination
method. Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the DS and FR
methods are converted to the Algebraic method. Also, new combination cases automatically
default to this method, unless you change them.
Algebraic combinations can be built only from basic load cases. Basic load cases are
non-combination load cases or other load cases built using the Algebraic combination method.
Scalar - Indicates a signed combination of displacement, force, and stress level. This method
combines the displacement vectors, force vectors, and stress scalars. Displacements are the
algebraic combination of the displacement vectors. Forces are the algebraic combination of the
force vectors. Stresses are the scalar combination of the stress scalars.
The combination of displacements and forces are the same for ALG and Scalar methods. The
combinations of stress levels are different between ALG and Scalar methods because the
stresses are calculated from the combined forces in the ALG method and summed in the Scalar
method. .
For example:
Load Case 1: bending stress = 100 psi, due to X-moment
Load Case 2: bending stress - 100 psi, due to Z-moment
Algebraic (vectorial) sum = square root of (100*100 + 100*100) = 141.4 psi
Scalar sum = 100 + 100 = 200 psi
550
Static Analysis
Scalar is typically used to sum (SUS + OCC) code stresses.
The obsolete CAESAR II combination methods ST used a Scalar combination method.
Therefore, load cases built in previous versions of CAESAR II using the ST method are
converted to the Scalar method.
SRSS - Indicates a combination of the square root of the sum of the squares of quantities, such
as the displacements of the forces or the stresses. Displacements are the square root of the
sum of the squares of the displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the
square root of the sum of the squares of the forces of all cases included in the combination.
Stresses are the square root of the sum of the squares of the stresses of all cases included in
the combination. This method is typically used to combine seismic directional components.
ABS - Indicates a combination of the absolute values of quantities, such as the displacements,
the forces, or the stresses. Displacements are the sum of the absolute value of the
displacements of all cases included in the combination. Forces are the sum of the absolute
value of the forces of all cases included in the combination. Stresses are the sum of the
absolute value of the stresses of all cases included in the combination. This method is typically
used to combine SUS cases with OCC cases for occasional stress code check.
For flange checks that use the ABS load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the absolute sum of these values from all load cases
included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the sum of resultant bending moments from all load cases
included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum force,
and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the maximum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the maximum absolute values of all
the load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the maximum
absolute values of all the load cases included in the combination. This method is typically used
to report the greatest restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
For flange checks that use the MAX load case combination method (specified in CAESAR II
piping input), the software uses the following calculated (local) values:
The axial force and torsion, which is the maximum magnitude of these values from all load
cases included the combination.
The bending moment, which is the maximum resultant bending moment from all load cases
included in the combination.
The flange pressure, which is the maximum pressure defined in the load cases included in the
combination.
MIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force, and
the minimum stress value of the cases combined. This method retains the original sign.
Displacements are the displacements having the minimum absolute values of all the load cases
included in the combination. Forces are the forces having the minimum absolute values of all the
load cases included in the combination. Stresses are the stresses having the minimum absolute
values of all the load cases included in the combination.
551
Static Analysis
SIGNMAX - Indicates a combination that reports the maximum displacement, the maximum
force, and the maximum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the
comparison. Displacements are the maximum signed values of all the displacements from each
case included in the combination. Forces are the maximum signed values of all the forces from
each case included in the combination. Stresses are the maximum signed values of all the
stresses from each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in
conjunction with SignMin to report the envelope of restrain loads from among a selected set of
load cases.
SIGNMIN - Indicates a combination that reports the minimum displacement, the minimum force,
and the minimum stress value of the cases combined. The sign is considered in the comparison.
Displacements are the minimum signed values of all the displacements from each case included
in the combination. Forces are the minimum signed values of all the forces from each case
included in the combination. Stresses are the minimum signed values of all the stresses from
each case included in the combination. This method is typically used in conjunction with
SignMax to report the envelope of restraint loads from among a selected set of load cases.
Snubbers Active
Indicates whether snubbers are active. Select the check box to indicate that snubbers are
considered to be rigid restraints for the load case. By default, Occassional (OCC) load cases
activate this option while other types of load cases clear this option.
Hanger Stiffness
Specifies the hanger stiffness for the load case. The three options are: As Designed, Rigid,
and Ignore.
As Designed - Causes the software to consider the actual spring hanger stiffnesses. Use this
option for most real (non-hanger design) load cases.
Rigid - Causes the software to model the spring hangers as rigid restraints. Use this option for
restrained weight cases and hydrotest cases if the spring hangers are pinned.
Ignore - Causes the software to remove the spring hanger stiffnesses from the model. Use this
option for hanger travel cases, unless you want to include the stiffness of the selected spring in
the operating for hanger travel case and iterate to a solution. In that case, select As Designed.
You must also adjust the hanger load in the cold case (in the physical system) to match the
reported hanger cold load.
User-defined hangers are not made rigid during restrained weight cases.
Elastic Modulus
Designates use of Cold (EC) or any of the nine (EH1-EH9) hot elastic moduli to determine
results on a load case per condition basis.
EC - Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1.
EH2 - EH9 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T2 through T9.
552
Static Analysis
Elbow Stiffening Pressure

Specifies the pressure used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors.
Pmax - Maximum of P1 through P9.
None - No pressure stiffening for the elbow.
P1 - P9 - Operating pressures 1 through 9.
Phydro - Hydrostatic pressure.
Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus

Specifies the elastic modulus is used to determine the modifiers for the SIF and k factors.
EC - Cold elastic modulus.
EH1 - EH9 - Hot elastic modulus corresponding to T1 through T9.
SUS Case Sh
Designates the use of a hot allowable stress (Sh) to determine the results on a per-load case
basis. Use this option for sustained (SUS) and occasional (OCC) load cases.
Sh_min - Minimum of Sh1 through Sh9.
Sh1 - Sh9 - Hot allowable stresses corresponding to T1 through T9.
The SUS Case Sh option applies only to B31.3 2010 Edition codes and later.
Friction Multiplier
Specifies the multiplier of friction factors used in this particular load case. The friction factor (Mu)
used at each restraint is this multiplier times the Mu factor at each restraint. Set this value to
zero to deactivate friction for this load case.
OCC Load Factor

Displays/overrides the Occasional load factor defined in the configuration. The default value
changes according to the piping code and the frequency of occurrence.
ISO-14962 - Occasional load factors are defined differently for different load cases (Operating,
Sustained, Occasional, and Hydrotest). The default occasional load factors for these load
cases are:
1.0 - Sustained load cases
1.25 - Operating load cases
1.33 - Occasional and Hydrotest cases
The Occasional load factor and the System design factor from the Allowable Stress dialog
box are multiplied together to generate the Part Factor for Loading (f2) as defined in
ISO-14692. As an example, using a default system design factor of 0.67 with the above default
occasional load factors results in the following default values for the part factor for loading:
553
Static Analysis
Load Case
Type
System Design
Factor
Occasional Load
Factor
Part Factor for

Loading
Sustained (SUS)
0.67
1.00
0.67
Operating (OPE)
0.67
1.24
0.83
Occasional (OCC)
0.67
1.33
0.89
Hydrotest (HYD)
0.67
1.33
0.89
Flange Analysis Temperature

Specifies the temperature used to determine the flange allowable.
None No flange analysis.
T1 - T9 - Operating temperatures 1 through 9.
Tmax - Maximum of T1 through T9.
TAmb Ambient temperature.
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wind loads. For more information, see the input descriptions for this tab or
Wind Loads (on page 901).
Editing Wind Case

Specifies the wind case to edit. The first box indicates the active wind case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
Select Wind Code or Profile

Specifies the wind code or one of the user-defined (velocity or pressure) profiles. The software
updates the dialog box depending on the selection you choose. For more information, see the
specific wind code options or Wind Loads (Technical Discussions) (see "Wind Loads" on page
901).
See Also
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options (on page 555)
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options (on page 557)
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options (on page 558)
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options (on page 561)
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options (on page 562)
EN Wind Code Options (on page 562)
554
Static Analysis
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options (on page 563)
IS 875 Wind Code Options (on page 564)
Mexico Wind Code Options (on page 566)
NBC Wind Code Options (on page 568)
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined) (on page 569)
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options

Wind Load Parameters
Basic Wind Speed - Specifies the three-second gust speed at 33 ft. (10 m.) above ground for
Exposure C category as determined according to Section 6.5.6.3.
According to ASCE 7, the following are typical basic wind-speed values:
California and West Coast Areas -124.6 ft./sec. (85 mph)
Rocky Mountains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Great Plains - 132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Non-Coastal Eastern United States -132.0 ft./sec (90 mph)
Gulf Coast - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Florida-Carolinas - 190.6 ft./sec (130 mph)
Miami - 212.6 ft./sec (145 mph)
New England Coastal Areas - 176.0 ft./sec (120 mph)

Wind Exposure - Specifies the wind exposure. This value is the exposure category that
adequately reflects the characteristics of ground surface irregularities. The ASCE 7 code
standard (found in ASCE 7 2005, Section 6.5.6.3 and ASCE 7 2010, Section 26.7.3) defines
exposure categories as follows:
2 - Exposure B - Urban, suburban, and wooded areas, prevailing. For upwind distance
requirements, refer to the code standard.
3 - Exposure C - All cases where exposures B and D do not apply.
4 - Exposure D - Flat coastal areas, prevailing. Urban, suburban, wooded, or open terrain
areas with scattered obstructions. For upwind or downwind requirements, refer to the code
standard.
Wind Exposure options 2, 3 and 4 correlate to ASCE 7 exposure categories B, C, and D.
See ASCE 7 2005 (Section 6.5.6.3) and ASCE 7 2010 (Section 26.7.3) for any exceptions on
wind exposures.
Structural Damping Coef. - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
percentage of critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load
calculations.
Structural Classification - Specifies the classification of buildings and structures based on the
type of occupancy.
ASCE 7-2005 Table 1-1, classification is as follows:
555
Static Analysis
1 - Category I - Failure represents low hazard.
2 - Category II - All structures except 1, 3, and 4.
3 - Category III - Primary occupancy more than 300 people.
4 - Category IV - Essential facilities (Hospitals, and so forth)
1, 2, 3 and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV defined in ASCE 7.
Importance Factor - Specifies the importance factor (I). This value is used to calculate the
velocity pressure for wind load calculations. The importance factor depends on the structural
classification and whether or not the region is prone to hurricanes, as shown below.
For ASCE 7 2010, CAESAR II sets the importance factor to 1, as the code standard no longer
addresses this factor.
For ASCE 7 2005, set the importance factor as per the code standard in Table 6-1.
Category
Non-Hurricane
Hurricane Prone
1-I
0.87
0.77
2-II
1.00
1.00
3-III
1.15
1.15
4-IV
1.15
1.15
1, 2, 3, and 4 are the options for structural classification categories, and are equivalent to
categories I, II, III and IV, defined in ASCE 7.
Structure Natural Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic
wind gust effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
If the natural frequency is zero CAESAR II uses a gust effect factor 0.85.
Topographic Factor Parameters

Height of Hill or Escarpment - Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is
the height relative to the upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of
structures sited on the upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Crest Distance - Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment.
Distance from Crest to Site - Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the
building site.
Hill Type - Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill
556
Static Analysis
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the AS/NZS 1170.2 wind code.
Design Wind Speed - Design Wind Speed Vr. This is the regional wind speed described in
section 3.2 of the code.
Wind Region -Wind region. The wind region is determined from the geographic locations for
Australia and New Zealand. The maps of these locations are in Figure 3.1 of the code.
Terrain Category - Value discussed in section 4.2.1 of the code. These categories are defined
as:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and water surfaces at
serviceable wind speeds
Category 2 - Water surfaces, open terrain, grassland with few, well-scattered obstructions
having heights generally from 1.5 m to 10 m.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions 3 m to 5 m high such as

areas of suburban housing
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous large, high (10 m to 30 m high) and closely spaced
obstructions such as large city centers and well-developed industrial complexes
Choose the terrain category with due regard to the permanence of the obstructions that
constitute the surface roughness. In particular, vegetation in tropical cyclonic regions cannot be
relied upon to maintain surface roughness during wind events.
Lee Effect Multiplier (Mlee) - Specifies the Lee Effect Multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
Paragraph 4.4.3 discusses the issue of the lee effect multiplier. In the case of New Zealand,
reference is made to the New Zealand site map. For all other sites, it shall be taken as 1.0.
Hill Shape Factor (Mh) - Specifies the appropriate hill shape factor, which can be obtained from
Table 4.4 of the code. Please refer to paragraph 4.4.2 which gives precise details for the
derivation of the hill shape factor.
Upwind Slope
(H/2Lu)
Mh
< 0.05
1.00
0.05
1.8
0.10
1.16
0.20
1.32
0.30
1.48
>= 0.45
1.71
Wind Direction Multiplier (Md) - Specifies the wind direction multiplier. The default value is 1.0.
The wind direction multiplier is detailed in paragraph 3.4 of the code, specifically Table 3.2. As
the wind multiplier is determined from the cardinal wind directions (N, NE, E, SE, S SW, W and
557
Static Analysis
NW), the value for any direction is specified in the table as 1.0. We recommend this value be
used for all cases.
Convert to Permissible Stress Gust Wind Speed - In the standard AS/NZS 1170.2 Supp
1:2002 Section C3, there is a discussion regarding the division of the wind speed given in the
standard by the square root of 1.5. Checking the box converts the wind speed given to a
permissible stress basis. Doing this lowers the wind loads on the vessel.
Surface Roughness Height (hr) - This value is used to compute the ratio hr/d which is then
used to compute the drag force coefficient (Cd) for rounded cylindrical shapes per Table E3. For
pressure vessels, this value ranges from 0.003 mm for painted metal surfaces to 15 mm for
heavily rusted surfaces. Light rust has a value of 2.5 mm while galvanized steel has a value of
0.15 mm.
The ratio hr/d is taken to be unitless (mm/mm).
Site Elevation (E) Specify the height of the site above the mean sea level, E.
Average Spacing of Shielding Buildings - Specifies the average spacing of the shielding
buildings. This is discussed in paragraph 4.3.3 of the code.
Average Breadth of Shielding Buildings (bs) - Specifies the average breadth of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Average Height of Shielding Buildings (hs) - Specifies the average height of the buildings
that shield the piping.
Number of Upwind Bldgs at 45 degs - Specifies the number of upwind buildings within a 45
degree arc. The upwind buildings are the ones shielding the piping.
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the BS-6399-2 British Wind Code.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. These vary according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards. Here are a few typical
wind speeds in miles per hour. Typical wind speeds are shown in Figure 6 of BS-6399-2. The
wind speeds are only relevant to the United Kingdom. The wind speeds vary typically from 20
m/sec to 31 m/sec (44.7 mph to 69.3 mph).
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following, because the wind
design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Site Elevation - delta s - Enter the site altitude above mean sea level (paragraph 2.2.2.2 of the
code). Use this value plus the Base Elevation to calculate the height of each point in the vessel
above mean sea level. For example, if the vessel is installed on a site that is 100 m (328 ft)
above sea level, it is exposed to a higher wind pressure (P) than if installed on the beach (at
mean sea level).
Upwind Building Height (Obstruction Height) - Ho - For buildings in town terrain, type the
average height of the building upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the
wind). To be conservative, this value can be zero, so the piping takes the full force of the wind.
Ho is used to modify the effective piping wind height (He) for any piping element. See paragraph
1.7.3.3 of BS-6399-2.
Upwind Building Spacing - X - For buildings in town terrain, type the average spacing of the
buildings upwind of the piping (as they tend to shield the piping from the wind). If the buildings
are closer together, they provide greater protection from the wind. See paragraph 1.7.3.3 of
BS-6399-2.
558
Static Analysis
Pipe Location - Specifies the location where the system is installed, either in the country, or in a
town. The BS-6399-2 factors in Table 4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting
on any element of the piping is determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in
the country or a town, and the effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by
internally.
Distance to Coastline - Specifies the distance the vessel is located from the coast in
kilometers. This distance affects the corrected wind speed (Ve). The BS-6399-2 factors in Table
4 modify the wind velocity. The final wind pressure acting on any element of the vessel is
determined by the distance from the coast, whether located in the country or a town, and the
effective height (He). This table derives Sb, which is calculated by internally.
Size Effect Factor - Ca - Specifies the size effect factor Ca. This value is normally taken from
Figure 4 of BS-6399-2. This factor generally ranges from 0.53 to a maximum value of 1.0. The
size effect factor is a function of the diagonal dimension a, the effective height, the site in the
town or country and the distance to the sea.
Factor Kb from Table 1 - Kb - Specifies the 'Building-type factor Kb' taken from Table 1 of
BS6399. Choose from one of five values: 8, 4, 2, 1 or 0.5. CAESAR II sets the default to 2, but
any other value may be chosen. Please note the following limitations of Kb based on the vessel
height:
Kb
Maximum Vessel Total Height
23 m (75.4 ft)
75 m (246 ft)
240 m (787 ft)
300 m (984 ft)
0.5
300 m (984 ft)
Designing towers over 75 meters in height is unlikely and you would need to consider many
other things.
BS 6399 Table 1. Building-type Factor Kb
8
Welded Steel unclad frames
Bolted steel and reinforced concrete unclad frames
Portal sheds and similar light structures with few internal walls
Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs only (e.g. office
buildings of open plan or with partitioning)
0.5
Framed buildings with structural walls around lifts and stairs with additional
masonry subdivision walls (for example, apartment buildings), building of masonry
construction and timber-framed housing
Annual Probability Factor - Q - Calculates the final probability factor (Sp) associated with the
likelihood of high velocity gusts occurring over certain periods such as 50 years. The default
559
Static Analysis
value is Q = 0.02. The code sets 0.02 as a standard value for a mean recurrence value of 50
years. Annex D of BS-6399-2 should be consulted for a fuller explanation.
Q
Explanation
0.632
NOTE 1: The annual mode, corresponding to the most likely annual

maximum value. (Sp = 0.749)
0.227
NOTE 2: For the serviceability limit, assuming the partial factor for loads for
the ultimate limit is f = 1.4 and for the serviceability limit is f = 1.0, giving Sp
= Sqrt(1 / 1.4) = 0.845. (Sp = 0.845)
0.02
NOTE 3: The standard design value, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.000)
0.0083
NOTE 4: The design risk for bridges, corresponding to a mean recurrence

interval of 50 years. (Sp = 1.048)
0.00574
NOTE 5: The annual risk corresponding to the standard partial factor for
loads, corresponding to a mean recurrence interval 1754 years. This is
back-calculated assuming the partial factor load for the ultimate limit is ?f =
1.4 and all risk is ascribed to the recurrence of wind. (Sp = Sqrt(1.4))
0.001
NOTE 6: The design risk for nuclear installations, corresponding to a mean

recurrence interval of 10,000 years. (Sp = 1.263)
Seasonal Factor - Ss - BS6399 in paragraph 2.2.2.4 states: "...For permanent buildings and
buildings exposed for continuous periods of more than 6 months a value of 1.0 should be used
for Ss..." PV Elite uses 1.0 as the default value for this reason. Using a value of less than 1.0 is
not recommended, or should only be used with solid research.
Directional Factor - Sd - Taken from Table 3 of BS6399. Because a tower is symmetrical about
its central axis, the default value has been taken as 1.0. It is recommended that this value not be
reduced other than for exceptional circumstances. For other values, please consult Table 3. The
values in that table range between 0.73 and 1.00.
Pipe Surface Type - Specifies the pipe surface condition. The three options are: 1 Smooth, 2
Rough, and 3 Very Rough.
Total Wind Height - Specifies the total height of the building or structure, which CAESAR II
uses in wind force equations. For piping systems, consider using the maximum height of the
piping system. Refer to the particular wind code standard for more information on this value.
560
Static Analysis
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the Brazil NBR 6123 wind code.
Basic Wind Velocity (Vo) - Velocity from a three second gust, exceeded only once in 50 years.
It is measured at 10 meters over smooth open ground and depends on the plant location. As a
general rule, the wind may blow in any horizontal direction. This velocity is taken from Figure 1,
and item 8 which shows the iso-velocities over Brazil. The referred to Figures and Tables are
found in the Petrobras document BPE-500-P4-19i and the Brazilian Wind Code NBR 6123.
Topographical Factor (S1) - Accounts for the variations and profile of the land. For plain or
slightly uneven ground, use a value of 1. The larger this value is, the greater the final computed
wind pressure is. If the vessel is on a hill top, this value should be computed according to
section 5.2 of NBR 6123.
Roughness Category (S2) Category
Description
Plain ground with large dimensions (more than 5 km of extension)
Plain (or slightly uneven) ground with few, and separated, obstacles
Plain or uneven ground obstructed by obstacles (walls or separated low

buildings)
Ground with many grouped obstacles in industrial or urban areas
Ground with many grouped and tall obstacles (such as developed

industrial areas)
Using Category I produces a higher wind load than Category II and so forth.
Dimension Class Class
Description
Greatest dimension is less than or equal to 20 meters
Greatest dimension is greater than 20m and less than 50 meters
Greatest dimension is greater than or equal to 50 meters
Statistical Factor (S3) - Accounts for security and the expected life of the equipment. For
industrial plants S3 is generally taken to be 1.0.
Pipe Surface Condition - Vessel surface condition can be classified as smooth or rough. A
selection of rough results in an increased value of the shape coefficient. Using a rough
classification generates a higher wind load on the vessel as there is more drag. The shape
coefficient is computed based on the height to diameter ratio of the vessel.
Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust effect
factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
561
Static Analysis
Total Wind Height - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the percentage of
critical damping and is used to calculate the gust factor for the wind load calculations.
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options

For details on the China GB 5009 wind code parameters used in CAESAR II, refer to the China
GB 5009 wind code standard.
EN Wind Code Options

Ref. Wind Velocity [Vb,0] - Specifies the fundamental value of the basic wind velocity of the
area where the equipment is situated. Vb,0 is used along with C Dir and C Season to compute
Vb.
Terrain Category - Select the appropriate terrain category from the table below. Category 0
generates the highest wind loads while category 4 produces the lowest wind loads.
Terrain Category Description
0
Sea or Coastal area exposed to the open sea
Lakes or flat and horizontal areas with negligible vegetation and without
obstacles
Area with low vegetation such as grass and isolated obstacles (trees,
buildings) with separations of at least 20 obstacle heights
Area with regular cover of vegetation or buildings or with isolated obstacles

with separations of maximum 20 obstacle heights (such as villages,
suburban terrain, permanent forest)
Area in which at least 15% of the surface is covered with buildings and
their average height exceeds 15 m
Directionality Factor [C Dir] - Value of the directional factor, C Dir, found in the National
Annex. The recommended value is 1.0.
Season Factor [C Season] - Value of the season factor, C Season, found in the National
Annex. The recommended value is 1.0.
Structural Factor [CsCd] - Structural factor used to determine the force on the vessel. This
value is defined in Section of the EN 1991-1-4:2005(E) Wind load specification in Annex D. This
value normally ranges between 0.90 and 1.10. The greater the structural factor value, the higher
the element load.
Force Coefficient [Cf] - Force coefficient which accounts for the fact that the vessel is circular
in cross section. This value modifies the area of the vessel that the wind is blowing against. This
value is often specified in the design specifications or can be computed based on the
methodology given in Section 7.9 for circular cylinders. A typical value for Cf would be between
0.7 and 0.8.
Structure Damping Coefficient - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
calculations.
562
Static Analysis
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options
Specifies options for the UBC and IBC wind codes.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards.Typical wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Exposure Constant - Specifies the exposure factor, as defined in UBC-91 Section 2312 or the
IBC Exposure Constant:
Exposure B - Terrain with building, forest or surface irregularities 20 feet or more in height
covering at least 20 percent or the area extending one mile or more from the site.
Exposure C - Terrain which is flat and generally open, extending one-half mile or more from
the site in any full quadrant.
Exposure D - The most severe exposure with basic wind speeds of 80 mph or more. Terrain
which is flat and unobstructed facing large bodies of water over one mile or more in width
relative to any quadrant of the building site. This exposure extends inland from the shoreline
1/4 mile or 0 times the building (vessel) height, whichever is greater.
Most petrochemical sites use a value of 3, exposure C. This value is used to set the Gust
Factor Coefficient (Ce) found in Table 23-G.
Importance Factor (IBC) - This is the Occupancy Importance Factor, IE, as defined in Section
1616.2 and shown in Table 1604.5. The calculated spectrum accelerations will be multiplied by
this value to generate the shock spectra. Values range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of
the structure.
Importance Factor (UBC)- Specifies the importance factor. The software uses this value directly
without modification. This value is taken from Table 23-L of the UBC standard. Followings are
the context of Table 23-L:
Category
Value
I - Essential facilities
1.15
II - Hazardous facilities
1.15
III - Special occupancy structures
1.00
IV - Standard occupancy structures
1.00
Height of Hill (IBC) - Specifies the height of hill or escarpment value. This value is the height
relative to the upwind terrain. It is used in calculations of the topographic factor of structures
sited on the upper half of hills and ridges or near the edges of escarpments.
Distance to Site (IBC) - Specifies the distance upwind or downwind from the crest to the building
site.
Crest Distance - Specifies the distance upwind of crest to where the difference in ground
elevation is half the height of hill or escarpment.
563
Static Analysis
Hill Type - Specifies the hill type. This value is the hill type is defined as follows:
0 - No Hill
1 - 2D Ridge
2 - 2D Escarpment
3 - 3D Axisymmetric Hill
Structure Damping Coeff. (IBC)/Beta (UBC) - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. Type
the value of structural damping coefficient (percentage of critical damping) beta. The default
value is 0.01.
This value is used to compute the dynamic gust effect factor G as outlined in the commentary
section 6.6 page 158 of ASCE 95 or section 6.5.8 pages 29-30 of the 98 standard. If your design
Code is not ASCE, then the software uses the damping coefficient in accordance with that
particular wind design code.
If your design specification does not call out for a specific value of beta, then leave the value of
0.01 in this cell. Please note that other values of beta can be specified for the filled case and the
empty case. Again if the specifications do not supply these values for empty and filled leave
these cells blank.
Natural Frequency (IBC)- Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind
gust effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
IS 875 Wind Code Options

Specifies options for the Indian Standard, IS-875 (Part 3), wind code. IS-875 is the standard in
India for design loads (other than earthquake) for buildings and structures.
Basic Wind Speed - Basic wind speed as applicable to 10 m height above mean ground level
for different zones in the country can be directly calculated if the proper value is defined in the
Wind Zone Number box. Alternatively, wind speed can be defined here. Basic wind speed
should be based on peak gust velocity averaged over a short time interval of about 3 seconds
and correspond to mean heights above ground level in an open terrain. This box is optional.
Wind Zone Number - Figure 1 of IS-875 shows different Wind Zones of the country. Various
zone numbers and corresponding Basic Wind Speed values are:
Zone 1
33 m/sec 73.82 miles/hour
Zone 2
Zone 3
Zone 4
Zone 5
Zone 6
The value typed here must be between 1 and 6. The zone the vessel is in is determined from a
map of India showing the various wind zones.
564
Static Analysis
Optionally, you can define the basic wind speed directly in the Basic Wind Speed box. If the
wind speed is specified, it overrides the value of wind speed and zone based on the table
above.
Risk Factor (K1) - Assuming the mean probable design life as 100 years, the corresponding
risk coefficient values for various wind zones are:
Zone
K1
Zone 1
1.05
Zone 2
1.06
Zone 3
1.07
Zone 4
1.07
Zone 5
1.08
Zone 6
1.08
Terrain Category - Terrain in which specific equipment is assessed as one of the following
categories:
Category 1 - Exposed open terrain with few or no obstructions and in which the average
height of any object surrounding the equipment is less than 1.5 m. This category includes
open sea - coasts and flat treeless plains.
Category 2 - Open terrain with well scattered obstructions having height generally between
1.5 to 10 m. This includes airfields, open parklands and undeveloped sparsely built up
outskirts of towns and suburbs. This category is commonly used for design purpose.
Category 3 - Terrain with numerous closely spaced obstructions having the size of buildings
and structures up to 10 m in height. This includes well wooded areas, towns, and industrial
areas full or partially developed.
Category 4 - Terrain with numerous tall, closely spaced obstructions. This includes large
city centers, generally with obstructions above 25 m, and well developed industrial
complexes.
Equipment Class - Equipment and structures are classified into following classes depending
upon their size.
Class A - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) less than 20 m.
Class B - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) between 20 and 50 m.
Class C - Equipment and components having a maximum dimension (greatest horizontal or

vertical dimension) greater than 50 m.
Topography Factor - The topography factor ranges between 1.0 and 1.36. This factor takes
care of local topographic features such as hills, valleys, cliffs, ridges and so on, which can
significantly affect wind speed in their vicinity. The effect of topography is to accelerate wind
near summits of hills or crests of cliffs and decelerate the wind in valleys or near the foot of cliffs.
Effect of topography is significant if upwind slope is greater than about 3 degrees. Below 3
565
Static Analysis
degrees, the value of K3 can be taken as 1.0. For slopes above 3 degrees, the value of K3
ranges between 1.0 and 1.36.
Use Gust Response Factor - If this box is checked, the software calculates the gust response
factor per IS-875 and uses it in the appropriate equations. Experience has shown that these
gust response factors are very conservative. Select this box only if the design specifications and
the customer or owner explicitly require you to do so.
Mexico Wind Code Options

Specifies the options available for the Mexico wind code.
Design Wind Speed - According to Paragraph 4.6.2, Isotach Maps. Regional Velocity (VR) , the
velocity of the wind, VR, is the maximum mean velocity likely to occur within a certain
recurrence period in a determined zone or region of the country.
The Isotach maps that are included in this clause with the different periods of return, such
velocities refer to homogenous conditions that correspond to a height of 10 meters over the
surface of the floor in the flat terrain (Category 2 per Table I.1). It does not consider the local
terrain roughness characteristics or the specific topography of the site. Therefore, such velocity
is associated with three-second wind gusts and it takes into account the possibility that there
might be hurricane winds present in the coastal zones.
The regional velocity, VR, is determined by taking into account the geographic location of the
site of the building's uproot and its destination.
In Figures I.1 through I.4, the Isotach regional maps are shown, corresponding to the periods of
recurrence for 200, 50, and 10 years.
The importance of the structures (Paragraph 4.3) dictates the periods of recurrence which
should be considered for the wind design. From this, the groups A, B and C associate
themselves with the periods of return of 200, 50 and 10 years, respectively. The uproot site is
located in the map with the recurrence period which corresponds to the group to which the
building belongs to, in order to obtain the regional velocity. In the Tomo III from Ayudas de Dise
O a table is shown with the main cities in the country and their corresponding regional velocities
for the different periods of return.
Structural Classification - Specifies the structural classification.
Class
Description
Every remote structural element exposed directly to the wind action.

Horizontal or vertical structures that measure less than 20 meters of
length.
Horizontal or vertical structures that measure between 20 and 50

meters of length.
Horizontal or vertical structures that measure more than 50 meters of

length.
566
Static Analysis
Terrain Category - Defined in Table I.1, based on the type of soil and roughness.
Category
Description
Open terrain, practically smooth, without obstructions.
Flat or undulating soil, with few obstructions.
Terrain covered by many obstructions narrowly spaced.
Terrain with many big, tall, narrowly spaced obstructions.
Topographic Factor (Ft) (Paragraph 4.5.4) - This factor takes into account the local
topographic effect from the place in which the structure uproots. For example, if the building is
found on the hillsides, on top of hills or on mountains at important heights with respect to the
general level of the terrain of its outskirts, it is probable that wind accelerations generates and
the regional velocity should be increased.
Damping Factor (Zeta) - Typically, this value is 0.01.
Drag Coefficient (Ca) - (Table 1.28), as shown below.
Cross Section
Type of Surface
H/b
1
25
40
Smooth or little rough

(d'/b 0.0)
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.7
Rough (d'/b 0.02)
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.2
Very rough (d'/b 0.08)
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.2
Circular
(bVD 6 m2/s)
Any
0.7
0.8
1.2
1.2
Hexagonal or octagonal
Any
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.4
Square (wind normal to a

face)
Any
1.3
1.4
2.0
2.2
Square (wind on a corner) Any
1.0
1.1
1.5
1.6
Circular
(bVD 6 m2/s)
where:
b is the diameter or the horizontal dimension of the structure, including the roughness of the
wall; to determine the product bV D, this diameter is the one that is located at two thirds of the
total height, from the level of the land, in m
d' is the dimension that exceeds from the roughness, such as ribs or "spoilers", in m
VD is the velocity of the wind of design (4.6), in m/s, and it is valued for the two thirds of the
total height
For intermediate values of H/b and d'/b lineal interpolation is permitted.
567
Static Analysis
Strouhal Number (St) - The Strouhal number is unitless; 0.2 for circular sections and 0.14 for
rectangular sections.
Barometric Height (Omega) - - Indicates the barometric pressure in mm Hg, as shown below:
Height
Barometric Pressure (mm Hg)
760
500
720
1000
675
1500
635
2000
600
2500
565
3000
530
3500
495
Ambient Temperature - Indicates the ambient temperature in degrees Celsius.

Frequency - Specifies the fundamental frequency time interval, in Hz.
NBC Wind Code Options

Reference Wind Pressure or Design Wind Speed - Specifies the NBC Reference Wind
Pressure. The reference velocity pressure q is the appropriate value determined in conformance
with Subsection 1.1.3 (based on probability) or Table C-1.
Design Wind Speed - Specifies the design value of the wind speed. This varies according to
geographical location and according to company or vendor standards.Typical wind speeds in
miles per hour are 85.0, 100.0, 110.0, and 120.0.
Type the lowest value reasonably allowed by the standards you are following because
the wind design pressure (and thus force) increases as the square of the speed.
Importance Factor (Iw) - Specifies the NBC importance factor. This value is the importance
factor for wind taken from the table below. This is table 4.1.7.1 on page 4-17 of Division B of
NBC 2005.
Importance Category
Importance Factor, Iw
ULS
SLS
Low
0.8
0.75
Normal
1.0
0.75
High
1.15
0.75
568
Static Analysis
Post Disaster
1.25
0.75
Exposure Constant - based on the profile of mean wind speed, the Exposure Constant varies
considerably with the general roughness of the terrain over which the wind has been blowing
before it reaches the building. These exposures are applicable only under the dynamic (detailed)
method, whereas the terms open and rough were used for the static (simplified)
method.
Exposure A - (Open or Standard Exposure) - indicates open-level terrain with only
scattered buildings, trees, or other obstructions, open water or shorelines. Reference wind
speeds are based on Exposure A.
Exposure B - (Rough Exposure) - indicates rough terrain, such as large cities with several
and dense high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 20 times the
building height. Prior to NBC 2010, referred to winds that persist in the upward direction for
1.0 km or 10 times the building height, whichever is larger.
Exposure C - (NBC 2005 only) - Rough terrain, such as large cities with several and dense
high-rise buildings, which persists in the upwind direction for at least 1.0 km or 10 times the
building height, whichever is larger.
Roughness Factor - Specifies the Roughness Factor:
1 - Round, moderately smooth
2 - Round, rough (D'/D = 0.02)
3 - Round, very rough (D'/D = 0.08)
Height of the Windward Face - Specifies the height of a piping section that is exposed to wind
blow.
Structural Damping Coefficient - Specifies the structural damping coefficient. This value is the
calculations.
Natural Frequency - Specifies the natural frequency used to calculate the dynamic wind gust
effect factor for dynamically sensitive structures. (f < 1 Hz. )
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation (User-Defined)

Allows you to indicate your own wind profiles, based on one of two options:
Wind Pressure vs. Elevation
Wind Velocity vs. Elevation
When you select a user-defined wind code (Wind Pressure vs. Elevation or Wind Velocity vs.
Elevation), enter the corresponding pressure or velocity values. Enter a single entry in the table
if a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
The software acquires the pressure/velocity and elevation values from the piping input.
They do not necessarily match the current setting in the configuration file.
569
Static Analysis
Copy Wind Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box, which is used to copy the wind
data from any defined wind case to any remaining wind case. This is especially useful for large
wind pressure or Velocity versus Elevation tables.
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.
Wind Direction Specification

Specifies the direction vector (cosine) which defines the direction of the wind. The magnitude of
the vector is not significant. For example:
Wind in X direction, vector is 1, 0, 0
Wind in Z direction, vector is 0, 0, 1
Wind at 45 degrees, vector is .707, 0, .707
You only need to specify the method and the wind direction if you are using a pressure or
velocity versus elevation table. After clicking User Wind Profile, a dialog box prompts you for
the corresponding pressure or velocity table. You only need to make a single entry in the table if
a uniform pressure or velocity is to act over the entire piping system. Otherwise, type the
pressure or velocity profile for the applicable wind loading.
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog

Box)
Controls options for wave loads.
Editing Wave Case

Specifies the wave case to edit. The first box indicates the active wave case. The second box
displays the total number of defined cases.
570
Static Analysis
Copy Wave Vector

Displays the Copy Environmental Loading Data dialog box.
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog Box

Copies the wind or wave data from the current wind or wave case to any specified remaining
wind or wave case. Use this feature when there is large wind or wave pressure or with Velocity
versus Elevation tables.
Current Profile Type

Specifies the means of modeling the current speed against the depth profile. Available current
profiles are:
Power Law - Current speed decays with depth to the 1/7 power.
Linear Table - Define the depth versus. speed table
Linear - Current speed decays linearly with depth becoming zero at the sea bottom.
Surface Velocity
Specifies the current speed at the free surface elevation, excluding the wave. This value is
superseded by the entries in a depth versus speed table.
Direction Cosines
Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the current. The current direction may
differ from the direction of any accompanying wave.
Wave Theory
Specifies the wave theory by which to model any wave effects. The available theories are:
Stream Function - Dean's stream function theory
Stream Function, Modified - Dean's stream function theory modified to include a shear
current. This shear current is assumed to vary linearly from the surface speed to the bottom
speed. Therefore, this option only works with the Linear current profile.
STOKE'S 5th - Stoke's 5th order wave theory.
STOKE'S 5th, Modified - Stoke's 5th order wave theory modified to address particle data
above the mean sea level.
AIRY - Basic linear wave theory.
AIRY, Modified - Basic linear wave theory modified to address particle data above the mean
sea level.
571
Static Analysis
Stream Function Order

Specifies the order of the stream function when using the stream function wave theory. Typical
values are from 5-21.
Water Depth
Specifies the water depth at this location.
Wave Height
Specifies the wave height (the crest to trough distance).
Wave Period
Specifies the wave period. That is, the time it takes for successive crests to pass a fixed
reference point.
Wave Kinematics Factor

Specifies the wave kinematics factor. According to Section 2.3.1b of API RP 2A-WSD
"Recommended Practice for Planning, Designing and Constructing Fixed Offshore Platforms -Working Stress Design", the horizontal wave velocities calculated by the Stream Function or
Stokes 5th wave theories may be multiplied by this factor in order to fit them to the wave
spreading and other irregularities associated with real world wave characteristics.
Typical ranges for this factor are 0.85 to 0.95 for tropical storms and 0.95 to 1.0 for extra-tropical
storms. For particular recommendations for Gulf of Mexico and other U.S. waters, refer to
Sections 2.3.4d.1 and 2.3.4f.1 of API RP 2A-WSD.
Wave Direction Cosines

Specifies the X- and Z- cosines defining the direction of the wave. The wave direction may differ
from the direction of any accompanying current.
Wave Phase Option

Indicates whether all elements of the model should be simultaneously loaded with the same
phase of the wave (typically the phase of maximum loading) or whether each element
experiences a different loading phase, based upon its location relative to the model origin.
572
Static Analysis
Phase Angle
Specifies the wave phase angle to use to calculate the wave loadings at either:
every element
model origin.
Free Surface Elevation

Specifies the elevation of mean sea level, in terms of model elevation. This submerges the
elements of the model to the appropriate level.
Kinematic Viscosity
Specifies the kinematic viscosity of the fluid. Typical values for seawater are:
Temp (F)
v(in-in/sec)
Temp (C)
v(mm-mm/sec)
60
1.81e-3
15.556
1.171
50
2.10e-3
10.000
1.356
40
2.23e-3
4.444
1.440
30
2.88e-3
-1.111
1.858
Density
Specifies the density of the sea water. A typical value for salt water is 0.037 (lb/cu.in.) or
0.00103 (kg/cu.cm.)
Current Table Depth

Displays the depth values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to 10 depths. A
value of 0.0 indicates the surface. Positive numbers indicate distance downward from the
surface.
573
Static Analysis
Current Table Velocity

Displays the velocity values. When using Linear Table Current Model, type up to the current
speeds corresponding to the specified depths. Current speed typed in this table overrides the
Surface Velocity value.
574
SECTION 9
Static Output Processor

Provides an interactive review of static analysis results for the open job. The Static Output
Processor window automatically displays upon completion of a static analysis. You can also
select Output > Static from the main CAESAR II menu to open the window anytime after an
analysis has been completed.
The Static Output Processor window displays analysis results in a tabular form, in a graphical
animated form, or a combination of the two. Use commands in the Static Output Processor
window to:
Interactively review reports for any selected combination of load cases and/or report types.
Print or save to file copies for any combination of load cases and/or report types.
Add title lines to output reports.
Select extended or summarized versions of most standard reports.
Load Cases Analyzed - Lists all of the load cases which have been analyzed for the current
job. The cases are numbered, and labeled with the type (load category) addressed by the case.
Load types are:
OPE - operating, not a stress compliance case for B31.1/B31.3 and similar codes.
SUS - sustained, stress compliance for primary loads.
EXP - expansion, stress compliance for secondary loads.
OCC - occasional, stress compliance for occasional loads.
FAT - fatigue, stress compliance for cumulative damage.
HAR - harmonic case for dynamic evaluation of harmonic loads.
HGR - construction case used for spring hanger design - results are not available for these
load cases.
The load case description also includes the individual load components that contributed to the
load case.
The results for a load case can be viewed by selecting the load case. Multiple load cases can be
selected using the <Shift> and <Ctrl> keys in combination with the mouse. Load cases can be
cleared by using the <Ctrl> key in combination with the mouse.
Standard Reports - Lists the available reports associated with those load cases. For more
information, see Work with Reports (on page 576) and Standard Reports (on page 584).
General Computed Results - Lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
that are not associated with load cases. For more information, see General Computed Results
(on page 596).
Custom Reports - Lists generated or imported custom reports. For more information, see Work
with Reports (on page 576) and Report Template Editor (on page 603).
575

Output Viewer Wizard - Selects specific reports and reviews their order before sending the
output to the selected device. To close the Output Viewer Wizard, click Less <<. For more
information, see Output Viewer Wizard (on page 602).
Work with Reports

When generated, a report displays in a tabbed Reports Viewer window. You can detach
individual reports from the tabbed view, and position them around the screen. Additionally, you
can dock a report next to other opened reports for a comparison view. Select the tab at the
bottom of the report, and while holding down the mouse, move the report. The outline shadow
shows the new location of the report. Release the mouse button to place the report in the new
location.
When a report is open, you can double-click the column headings to sort the report by
ascending or descending value order. Column order can be re-arranged by dragging columns to
another location. You can also adjust the column size or hide the column altogether. All changes
are for the current report in the current viewing session. To make permanent changes to the
report, use the Report Template Editor (on page 603).
You can print or save individual reports to a text file or to Microsoft Word or Microsoft Excel by
selecting Send Report To or Send All To from the right-click menu.
While the report is active, you can adjust the display properties available from the View menu,
change the background color, and turn on horizontal and vertical grid lines. Grid lines can help
in generating better print results.
576

Click View > Change Page Break to adjust the page configuration for an active report. You can
also scale the report to fit on one page, or adjust it to fit on a specified number of pages by using
the Allow Adjustment of Page Breaks and Show Page Break Lines options.
Filter Reports
One of the most powerful features of the Static Output Processor is the ability to filter your
output reports. Filtering lets you customize output to just the information you want to see.
Select Filters from the Static Output Processor menu to set filters on your output reports.
Certain filters can apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you generate from
the Output Processor) or specific to a report type (such as only to restraint reports).
Report-Specific Filters
Global Filters
Report-Specific Filters
Apply report-specific filters when you want the software to filter only reports that are related to
the filter setting. For example, if you wanted to generate a report to see all the allowable
stresses in a piping system that are greater than 80 percent, set the Percent box on the
Stresses tab to >80. Then, when you generate any of the stress-related reports in the Output
Processor, the software filters the data to show only those stresses greater than 80 percent.
577

Global Filters
Apply global filters to node number or line number ranges for the software to filter all reports that
include the node or line numbers specified. For example, if you filter on node numbers from 10
to 100, then for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and
shows only the data that is applicable to nodes 10 to 100.
Filters do not apply to the summary information that appears at the top of a report.
The software shows the filters applied near the top of the output report, as shown below.
Output Reports Show Filters Used
To filter reports
1. Select Filters on the Output Processor menu.
2. Choose any global filter options. Global filters apply to all reports generated in the Output
Processor. For more information on the global filters, see Filter Options Tab (on page 580)
and Filters Dialog Box (on page 579).
a. To apply a global filter based on node numbers, type the From node and To node
numbers.
b. To select other global options for filters, click the Filter Options tab.
3. Choose report-specific filter details on each of the class tabs. Each tab contains related
fields with a drop box and an edit box. Each corresponding edit box displays the value in
which to compare.
Each of the drop boxes has a list of comparison operators:
578

Operator
Description
>
Greater than
>=
Greater or Equal
<
Less than
<=
Less or Equal
==
Equal
\=
Not Equal
1. Click Apply to define the filter.
See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 580)
Displacements Tab (see "Restraints Tab" on page 581)
Restraints Tab (on page 581)
Forces Tab (on page 582)
Stresses Tab (on page 582)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 582)
Flange Peq (see "Flange Peq Tab" on page 583)
Flange NC-3658.3 (see "Flange NC-3658.3 Tab" on page 583)
Filters Dialog Box

Allows you to put specifications on report results so that you can see just the information that
you need. Certain filters apply to output reports globally (meaning any kind of report you
generate from the Output Processor) while others apply to a specific report type (such as only
to restraint reports). For more information on filtering, see Filter Reports (on page 577).
See Also
Filter Options Tab (on page 580)
Displacements Tab (on page 581)
Restraints Tab (on page 581)
Forces Tab (on page 582)
Stresses Tab (on page 582)
Line Numbers Tab (on page 582)
Flange Peq Tab (on page 583)
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab (on page 583)
579
Filter Options Tab

Select filter options that the software applies to all reports generated in the Output Processor.
You set filter options from the Filter Options tab on the Filters dialog box, which you can
access by selecting Filters in the Output Processor menu. You can specify filter settings, such
as setting the signed value or the combination of fields filtered, which the software applies
globally to all reports you generate.
From Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. In other words, only one of the node pair has to fall within the
specified range. If you enter just a From node number, then the software displays the From
node and all nodes greater than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
To Node
Enter both a From and To node number and the software filters based on nodes in the
specified range display. If you enter just a To node number, then the software displays the
To node and all nodes less than it. The software filters and displays all node pairings that
have at least one node (To or From) in the filter setting for the node range.
Filter Options
Select the appropriate filter option for values: Absolute Value or Signed Value. The
software defaults to filtering by the magnitude, regardless of the sign or direction. You can
filter by a specific direction of load or displacement. This feature is particularly useful when
looking for lifting off the supports in directional restraints (such as +Y).
Combinations (Fields or Classes)
Select the appropriate filter option for field or class combinations. Fields refer to the
particular data inputs (boxes) in each tab class. Classes refers to the major types of output,
for example Displacements, Restraints, Forces, or Stresses. Classes have separate tabs
in the Filters dialog box. For example, DX and RZ are fields in the Displacements class,
FX and MZ are fields in the Restraints class, and Code Stress and Bending Stress are
fields in the Stresses class.
Reset Filter
Select to reset the filter settings for the currently-active tab.
Reset All Filters
Select to reset all the filter settings for all of the filters, including the options and the
report-specific filter classes.
580
Displacements Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to displacements. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, to look at any place in the model where the pipe is lifting off of the support, set the
Displacements filter class to a positive value of greater than one inch in the Y-axis direction
(DY) to show which pipes have lifted off of the support vertically by more than an inch.
When you run the Displacements output report, the software shows only those pipes in your
model that have been displaced by more than an inch. You can also set the Filter Options
Classes to AND, and then generate the Restraints Summary Extended report to show all
restraints with a displacement off of the pipe of one inch or more.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page 579) and Filter
Reports (on page 577).
The software does not apply report-specific filter criteria to custom reports that use
combination classes.
Restraints Tab
Specifies filter criteria for all reports relating to restraints. Use the operator boxes to specify
comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Restraints filter class to show all restraints with forces greater than
10,000 lbs on the y-axis (FY), then the software shows only restraints that have FY values
greater than 10,0000 lbs on the Restraints, Local Restraints, or Restraints Summary output
reports.
You can also select one of the Include radio buttons to filter and include all restraints in your
results, include all restraints that do not have CNodes (None with CNodes), or include all
restraints with only CNodes (Only with CNodes).
For example, you can select to include None with CNodes, if you want to filter out internal load
on a CNoded restraint. This lets you see the total dead weight of a pipe model.
Select Bi-Linear for buried pipe models that also go above ground. In most cases, you do not
need to select this filter option.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box (on page ) and Filter
Reports (on page ).
581
Forces Tab
Specifies filter criteria that the software applies to all reports relating to force. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Forces filter class to all forces in the Y-axis direction greater than
10,000 pounds, the software shows only y-axis forces (FY) greater than 10,000 pounds on the
Local Element Forces and Global Element Forces output reports.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 577).
combination classes. This filter applies only to internal forces and moments.
Stresses Tab
Specifies filter criteria for the various stress output reports (Stresses, Stresses Extended, and
Stress Summary). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial, Bending, Torsion, Hoop, Max
3D, Code and Allowable stress factors in combination with the magnitude. In addition, you can
filter stress data on the reports based on SIFs (in- and out-of-plane), and based on a percentage
of stress. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you set the Stresses filter class Percent box to >70, the software filters the
stress-related reports to show only elements having greater than a 70 percent stress.
Line Numbers Tab

Assigns filter criteria based on line numbers that the software applies globally for all output
reports. If the model has assigned line numbers, you can set up filter criteria based on those
numbers to look at output results for only certain parts of the model.
For example, apply line number ranges for the software to filter reports to only include elements
that elong to a particular line number. For example, if you filter based upon line numbers, then
for any report you generate in the Output Processor, the software filters and shows only the
data that includes information on systems with the specified line numbers. When the software
shows the Line Number box as Unassigned, it means the model did not have any line
numbers assigned and cannot be filtered based on that information.
582
Flange Peq Tab

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to the Kellog Equivalent Pressure Method
(Peq). You can set up filter criteria based on Axial Force, Bending Moment, Gasket Diameter,
PEquivalent, Rating Temperature, Allowable Pressure, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator
boxes to specify comparison operators for the filter values.
For example, if you specify the Flange Peq filter class to filter based on a Ratio of 20 percent,
then the software filters output reports to only show equivalent pressures for flanges that are 20
percent of the maximum rated pressure. This information indicates how close you are to the
edge of the flange.
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab

Specifies filter criteria for flange output reports related to ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection
NC-3658.3 Method (NC-3658.3). You can set up filter criteria for all NC-3658.3 reports based on
Torsion Moment, Bending Moment, Bolt Circle Diameter, Bolt Area, Flange Stress,
Allowable Stress, and a Ratio factor. Use the operator boxes to specify comparison operators
for the filter values.
For example, if you specify for the Flange NC-3658.3 filter class to with a Ratio of 30 percent or
greater, then the software reports on only flanges of the NC method that are 30 percent of the
maximum rated equivalent pressure for the flange.
For more information on filtering output reports, see Filters Dialog Box and Filter Reports (on
page 577).
Print or Save Reports to File Notes

The tabular results brought to the screen may be sent directly to a printer. Different
combinations of load cases and report types may be chosen, each followed by the File-Print
command, to create a single report.
Prints copies of the reports. To print copies of multiple reports as a single report,
use the Output Viewer Wizard to populate the report order tree, click Send To
Printer and then Finish.
Sends reports to a file (in ASCII format) rather than the printer. After selection, a
dialog displays where you select the file name. To change the file name for a new
report, select FILE-SAVE AS.
583

Typically, the set of output reports to print out for documentation purposes is:
Load Case
Report
Purpose
SUSTAINED
STRESS
Code compliance
EXPANSION
STRESS
Code compliance
OPERATING
DISPLACEMENTS
Interference checks
OPERATING
RESTRAINTS
Hot restraint, equipment loads
SUSTAINED
RESTRAINTS
As-installed restraint, equipment loads
Load cases used for hanger sizing produce no reports. Also, the hanger table and hanger
table with text reports are printed only once even though more than one active load case may be
highlighted.
To save multiple reports as a single report to a file, use the Output Viewer Wizard.
The signs in all CAESAR II Reports show the forces and moments that act "ON" something.
The Element Force/Moment report shows the forces and moments that act "ON" each
element to keep that element in static equilibrium. The Restraint Force/Moment report shows
the forces and moments that act "ON" each restraint.
When sending reports to MSWord, if a file named "header.doc" exists in the \caesar\system
directory, its contents are read and used as the page header when CAESAR II exports the
report to MSWord. The intent is that "header.doc" contains the company logo, address
details and formatting for tables. The interface uses a style names "report table" which you
can set up in "header.doc".
Standard Reports
For most load cases, except hanger design and fatigue, there are a variety of different report
options that can be selected for review.
Most standard reports have short and long versions, designated by the word Extended.
The extended reports usually have more data items available and may require a landscape
option when printed.
Displacements - Shows the nodal translations and rotations at each of the nodes. These
values represent the solution vector for each load case. For more information, see
Displacements (on page 585).
Restraints - Shows the loads imposed on the system supports for each load case. For more
information, see Restraints (on page 586).
Restraint Summary - Combines the restraint reports for any number of (user selected) load
cases. This provides a concise summary of the loads on the restraints, across load cases.
For more information, see Restraint Summary (on page 589).
584
Global Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the global coordinate system, and
represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Global Element Forces
(on page 592).
Local Element Forces - Shows the element forces and moments acting on the ends of the
element. These forces and moments are aligned with the local element coordinate system,
and represent the element free-body diagram. For more information, see Local Element
Forces (on page 592).
Stresses - Shows the element stresses acting on the ends of the elements. This report
also includes codes SIFs, code allowables, and the "code" stress when applicable. For more
information, Stresses (on page 593).
Cumulative Damage - Lists the combined fatigue stresses for all selected fatigue load
cases and compares it to the corresponding allowable for each node of each element. Note
that this report is only available for those jobs that include fatigue cases. For more
information, see Cumulative Usage Report (on page 596).
Displacements
Translations and rotations for each degree of freedom are reported at each node in the model.
Use the Filters feature to sort reports containing fields from more than one class. For
more information, see Filter Reports (on page 577).
585
Restraints
Forces and moments on each restraint in the model are reported. There is a separate report
generated for each load case selected.
586
Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates

It is possible to generate a restraint report where the loads and moments are aligned with the
local element coordinate system. This is particularly useful when addressing skewed nozzles,
where the axial, longitudinal and circumferential results are needed. As an example, consider
the small system shown below:
587

This system consists of two small horizontal lines anchored at both ends. The last element of
each line is skewed 45 degrees in the X-Z plane. At the end of this skewed line is an axial
restraint, as illustrated in the following figure:
The typical Global Restraint report for this system displays in the following table. At node 140,
this report shows two equal loads in the (global) X and Z directions. These values (24,463) are
the global component loads acting on the skewed restraint. The actual magnitude of the restraint
load, acting in-line with the pipe can be found by performing the SRSS of these component
loads, which yields 34595. This value is the load on the restraint acting axially with the pipe.
Operating Case Restraint Loads Global Coordinate System
NODE
FX lb.
FY lb.
FZ lb.
MX ft.lb.
MY ft.lb.
MZ ft.lb.
100
-24463
-514
66
1340.5
-273.3
-6418.6
Rigid ANC
119
-24528
0.0
0.0
0.0
Rigid Z
140
24463
24463
0.0
0.0
0.0
Flex X
200
-24463
-514
66
1340.5
-273.3
-6418.6
Rigid ANC
219
-24528
0.0
0.0
0.0
Rigid Z
240
24463
24463
0.0
0.0
0.0
Flex X
The process of performing SRSS or sine/cosine operations to obtain restraint loads in the
element coordinate system can be tedious. As an alternative, generate a restraint report where
all of the loads are aligned with the associated element coordinate system. The report for the
same small job displays in the table below.
588

Operating Case Restraint Loads Local Element Coordinate System
NODE
fx lb.
fy lb.
fz lb.
mx ft.lb.
my ft.lb.
mz ft.lb.
100
-24463
66
514
1340.5
-6418.6
273.3
Rigid ANC
119
-24528
0.0
0.0
0.0
Rigid Z
140
34595
0.0
0.0
0.0
Flex X
200
-24463
66
514
1340.5
-6418.6
273.3
Rigid ANC
219
-17344
-17344
0.0
0.0
0.0
Rigid Z
240
34595
0.0
0.0
0.0
Flex X
In reviewing the relationship between the local versus global restraint loads note the following:
The global FY (vertical) load at node 100 of -514 translates to a local fz load. For details on the
global to local coordinate system relations, see Technical Discussions (on page 879). (These
two values are shown in the tables in bold.)
At node 140, the skewed axial restraint, the first table showing the global coordinate system
loads, reports the two equal component loads. The second table showing the local loads,
reports only the resultant axial load at the restraint. (These values are shown in the tables in
bold.)
Restraint Summary
Similar to the restraint report, this option provides force and moment data for all valid selected
load cases together on one report.
589
Nozzle Check Report

The Nozzle Check report defines the appropriate force/moment limits on a specified nozzle.
Data for each load case reported is a result of calculation (and can also be viewed on a Local
Restraints report). The Limits shown in the report are the values from the input. Similarly, the
Comparison method also reflects the input setting. The loads shown are the loads on the
nozzle for the indicated load cases. If any load exceeds its corresponding allowable load, then
the entire line is shown in red (with an asterisk at the far right in the event the report is printed in
black and white.)
The Resultant column reports the resultant forces and moments for the SRSS Comparison
method, and the unity check value for the Unity Check method.
Flange Reports
Flange Reports are available after completing the In-line Flange Evaluation analysis. There
are two methods and two corresponding reports for evaluating flanges under load: Kellogg
Equivalent Pressure Method (Peq) and ASME B&PVC Section III Subsection NC-3658.3
Method (NC-3658.3).
590

The reports display some of the relevant input items along with the calculated corresponding
moments and stresses or equivalent pressure for each node where the flange evaluation was
requested. This is an elemental type report, and the flanges may be defined on either end of the
element. Because of this, some lines in the report with no corresponding output are blank.
591
Global Element Forces

Forces and moments on the piping are reported for each node in the model.
Local Element Forces

These forces and moments have been transferring into the CAESAR II Local Coordinate
system. For more information, see Technical Discussions (on page 879).
592
Stresses
SIFs and code stresses are reported for each node in the model. The code stresses are
compared to the allowable stress at each node as a percentage. Stresses are not computed at
nodes on rigid elements or on structural steel elements.
593
Stress Summary
The highest stresses at each node are presented in summary format for all selected load cases.
594
Code Compliance Report

Stress checks for multiple load cases can be included in a single report using the Code
Compliance report. The report shows the stress calculation for all selected load cases together,
on an element-by-element basis.
595
Cumulative Usage Report

The Cumulative Usage report is available only when there are one or more fatigue-type load
cases present. After the Cumulative Usage report is generated, regardless of the number of
load cases selected, the report shows the combined impact of simulating selected fatigue
loadings.
General Computed Results

General Computed Results lists reports, such as input listings or hanger selection reports,
which are not associated with load cases.
Topics
Load Case Report ....................................................................... 597
Hanger Table with Text ............................................................... 598
Input Echo .................................................................................. 599
Miscellaneous Data..................................................................... 600
Warnings .................................................................................... 601
596
Load Case Report

The Load Case Report documents the Basic Names (as built in the Load Case Builder),
User-Defined Names, Combination Methods, Load Cycles, and Load Cases (Output Status,
Output Type, Snubber Status, Hanger Stiffness Status, and Friction Multiplier) of the static load
cases. This report is available from the General Computed Results column of the Static
Output Processor.
597
Hanger Table with Text

The Hanger Table and Hanger Table with Text reports provide basic information regarding
spring hangers either selected by CAESAR II or by you. Information provided includes the node
number, the number of springs required, the hanger table figure number and size, the hot load,
the theoretical installed load (which is what the hangers are set to in the field prior to pulling the
pins), the actual installed load (which is the load on the hanger when the pipe is empty), the
spring rate from the catalog, and the horizontal movement determined from the CAESAR II
output. If constant effort supports are selected, then the hanger constant effort force is reported.
Hanger Table with Text has additional information about variable support spring designed,
maximum and minimum allowed single spring load, and recommended installation clearance as
read from the catalogs.
598
Input Echo
The Input Echo option allows you to select which portions of the input are reported in this
output format. All basic element data (geometry), operating conditions, material properties, and
boundary conditions are available in this report option. Select what you want to see, and then
click OK.
599
Miscellaneous Data
The Miscellaneous Data report displays SIF and Flexibility data for Bends and Tees, Allowable
Stress Summary, Reducers report, Nozzles Flexibility data, Pipe Properties report with weights
and minimum calculated wall thickness for each element, Thermal Expansion Coefficients for
each element as used during analysis, Center-of-Gravity report (C.G.), Bill of Materials (B.O.M.),
Wind, and Wave input data.
600
Warnings
All warnings reported during the error checking process are summarized here.
601
Output Viewer Wizard

After clicking More >> in the lower right corner of the Static Output Processor, the Output
Viewer Wizard dialog box displays. The Output Viewer Wizard can be hidden again by clicking
Less <<.
The Output Viewer Wizard consists of the Report Order window and auxiliary operational
buttons. You can add any report to the view by clicking Add. You can delete any report by
clicking Remove. You can arrange the order of the reports by highlighting the report and then
moving it up or down by clicking Move Up or Move Down.
You can send a report to the screen or to a printer by selecting the appropriate radio button in
the upper section of the Output Viewer Wizard dialog box. After clicking Finish, the reports are
automatically sent to the specified device in the order displayed in the Report Order window.
To generate a table of contents, select Generate Table of Contents (TOC).
602

The Table of Contents does not display if Send to Screen is selected, regardless if the
Generate Table of Contents (TOC) check box was selected or cleared.
Report Template Editor

You can create your own reports or edits existing reports using the Report Template Editor. To
create a new report, select one or more load cases, and then click Add New Custom Report
Template
(Options > Custom Reports > New on the menu). You can also customize an
existing report by selecting the load case, a standard or custom report name, and then clicking
Edit an Existing Custom Report Template
(Options > Custom Reports > Edit on the
menu).
The Report Template Editor dialog box consists of two sections: the template editor to the left
and the preview grid to the right.
The template editor has a tree-like structure and resembles Window Explorers folder view.
There are 11 major categories available: Template Name and Template Settings for general
report editing, and several output fields; Displacements, Restraints, Local Restraints, Equipment
Nozzle Checks, Global and Local Forces, Flange Evaluation, Stresses, and Hanger Table Data.
The Template Name category allows you to specify the report name, enter a brief description of
the report, and select the report type. The report name followed by the template description
displays on the preview grid if the Include Report Name option is checked under the Template
Settings category.
There are three report types available:
Individual - Generates output reports, one per selected load case, in a format similar to the
standard Displacements or Restraints reports.
603
Summary - Generates a single output report for all the specified load cases as a sum\-mary,
in a format similar to the standard Restraint Summary report.
Code Compliance - Generates an output stress check report for multiple load cases as a
single report, similar to the standard Code Compliance report.
Actual columns and their order on the reports are controlled solely by you. Data from
various categories can be customized on a single report to suit your needs.
The Template Settings category provides options for the report header and the report body
text, formatting, and alignment. You can also set the font face, size, and color for the header and
the report body. You can include or remove specific header text (such as Report Name, Job
Title or Filters Description) by selecting and clearing the check box next to the corresponding
item. Report Line Spacing changes the spacing between lines of text. The Summary Line
check box (used with Summary-type reports) toggles the appearance of the summary line with
MAX values for each field or column per node. Select the Node Number/Name check box (used
with Summary-type reports) to repeat the Node information on each Loadcase line. If you clear
this option, then the node will appear on the separate line above the data for load cases. These
two options may help with later data manipulations when sending the reports to a Microsoft
Excel spreadsheet
Any changes in the editor are immediately reflected in the preview window.
Each of the following categories consists of related output data. For example, the
Displacements category contains three translational (DX, DY, and DZ) and three rotational
(RX, RY, and RZ) fields, Stresses contains Axial, Bending, and Code stresses among other
stress related fields. A number next to the field name indicates the Column Order this field will
be placed in. When nothing or a zero value is specified, this column will not be included in the
current report.
Each field contains the following information:
Field Name
Description
Column Number
Indicates the order of the fields in the output report.
Precision
Indicates the number of decimal places to be displayed.
Sort Order
Specifies whether the data in the column is in ascending,

descending, or in no order. This gives you flexibility of reviewing
reports for maximum (or minimum) values.
Font
Specifies the text font face, size and color for this field whenever
special formatting is required. Set the generic font settings for the
entire report at the Template Settings > Body category.
Align Values
Controls left, right, or center alignment of the values in the

column.
Field Caption
Customize the name of the field as it appears on the report. This

may be useful to customize the display of the output
displacements in the report to reflect the plant
North/South/East/West directions or vertical and Horizontal
notations instead of generic X, Y, Z.
604

Field Name
Description
Column Width
Controls the size of the column in terms of the number of

displayed characters or digits. In addition, resizing the columns in
the Preview Grid adjusts the Column Width value. Type 0 to
close the column and remove it from the report. Type -1 to size
the column to the predefined default size.
Units Based
Precision
Indicates whether to enable the automatic control of the displayed

number of decimal places to be calculated based on the selected
display units. This value is used together with the Units
Conversion Label value. The Precision value is ignored in this
case. When set to No, the Precision value takes place.
When a category or any particular field is highlighted in the editor, the help text for this
field displays in the Help box at the bottom of the editor window.
The Preview Grid on the right of the Custom Report Template Editor dialog is interactive. You
can drag the columns by their heading to arrange the order of the fields in the reports.
Double-clicking the column header sorts that columns values in ascending or descending order.
The dragged column number or sorted order value will automatically be saved in the Column
Number or Sort Order entry of that field in the editor tree. Click the column header once to
highlight that field in the editor tree, extend its contents and scroll it to view.
The Preview Grid is limited to the first 50 lines. The entire report is available after you
select the appropriate load cases and custom report name on the Static Output Processor
dialog box and click View Report.
Any current changes to the custom report template can be saved by clicking Save. The custom
report template can also be saved under a different name by clicking Save As... The Save As...
dialog box prompts you to enter the new template name, a brief description, and the report type.
Click Preview Report to remove the grid lines from the Preview Grid. Click the same button
again to add the grid lines for editing.
Available Commands
The Static Output Processor window menus and toolbars provide commands to review,
create, and modify reports. The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars navigate and display report
information in graphics mode.
Topics
View Menu .................................................................................. 606
Options Menu ............................................................................. 610
Plot Options Menu ...................................................................... 618
Plot View Menu ........................................................................... 624
Element Viewer Dialog Box ......................................................... 626
605
View Menu
Activates and disables toolbars.
Topics
Standard Toolbar ........................................................................ 606
Displacements Toolbar ............................................................... 607
Grow Toolbar .............................................................................. 607
Restraints Toolbar ...................................................................... 608
Stresses Toolbar......................................................................... 608
Reports Navigation Toolbar......................................................... 609
Custom Reports Toolbar ............................................................. 610
Standard Toolbar
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for the file to
open.
Save - Saves the selected reports to a text file. You are prompted for the file
name. A table of contents for all currently selected reports is added to the end of
the text file.
Load Case Name - Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or
the User-Defined Load Case Names for output reports. The selected name also
displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list box in the Static Output Processor
window. You enter user-defined load case names in the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see Load Cases Tab
(Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545).
Node Name - Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for
generated reports. Select the format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog
box.
Title Lines - Inserts report titles for a group of reports. For more information, see
Title Lines (on page 618).
Return to Input - Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see
Piping Input Reference (on page 106).
View Animation - Shows animation of the displacement solution. For more
information, see View Animations (on page 615).
Graphical Output - Superimposes analytical results onto a plot of the system
model. For more information, see Graphical Output (on page 616).
Print - Prints the selected reports. After closing, or exiting, a Table of Contents is
printed.
606

Using Microsoft Word - Send the report directly to Microsoft Word. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Word (on page 611).
Using Microsoft Excel - Sends output reports directly to Excel. For more
information, see Using Microsoft Excel (on page 612).
On Screen - Displays the selected reports in a window on the computer screen.
For more information, see On Screen (on page 611).
Displacements Toolbar
Maximum Displacements - Places the actual magnitude of the X, Y, or
Z displacements on the currently displayed model.
The element containing the displaced node is highlighted, and the
camera viewpoint is repositioned preserving the optical distance to the
model. This brings the displaced node to the center of the view.
1. The software starts with the highest value for the given direction.
After you press Enter, the remaining values are placed in a similar
manner until all values become zero.
2. Click Maximum Displacements again to clear the view of the
displayed values and highlighting.
Click Show > Displacement > Maximum Displacement >X, Y, or
Z to access this command from the menu. If Show Element Viewer
Grid is selected, then the viewer displays the Displacements report for
the selected load case and highlights the column and row to represent
the displacement direction and current node.
Grow Toolbar
Deflected Shape - Overlays the scaled geometry with a different color into the
current plot for the selected load case. Click the down arrow to display an
additional menu with the selected feature checked and the Adjust Deflection
Scale option.
Adjust Deflection Scale - Specifies the deflected shape plot scale factor. You
may not be able to see the deflected shape if the value is too small. If you enter
a scale value that is too large, the model may be discontinued. Select Show >
Displacement > Scale to access this command from the menu.
Grow - Displays the expansion of a selected pipe due to the addition of heat.
607
Restraints Toolbar
Output Restraints Symbols - Adds restraint symbols to the plot.
Restraints are plotted as arrowheads with the direction of the arrow
indicating the direction of the force exerted by the restraint on the piping
geometry.
Maximum Restraint Loads - Places the actual magnitude of the
calculated restraint loads for a selected load case on the currently
displayed geometry. Maximum Restraints Loads displays the load
magnitude value next to the node, highlights the element containing the
node, and is brought to the center of the graphics view. The Zoom to
Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options are still available. After
pressing Enter, any remaining values are placed in a similar manner.
Stresses Toolbar
Overstress - Displays the overstressed point distribution for a particular load
case. Nodes with a calculated code stress to allowable stress ratio of 100%
or more display in red. The remaining nodes or elements display in the color
selected for the lowest percent ratio. This feature is useful to quickly observe the
overstressed areas in the model.
Overstressed conditions are only detected for load cases where a code
compliance check was done (such as where there are allowable stresses
available).
Overstressed nodes display in red in the Event Viewer dialog box (if it is
enabled).
The model is still fully functional. You can zoom, pan, or rotate it.
Maximum Code Stress - Displays the stress magnitudes in descending order.
Maximum Code Stress operation is similar to Maximum
Displacements. The stress value is displayed next to the node, and the element
containing the node is highlighted and moved to the center of the view.
If needed, use the Zoom to Selection and Show Event Viewer Grid options.
Press Enter and the next highest value is placed with corresponding element
highlighting.
In addition to the numbers that could be found in a corresponding report, this
command provides a graphical representation and distribution of large,
calculated code stresses throughout the system.
608

Code Stress Colors by Value - Displays the piping system in a range of colors
where the color corresponds to a certain boundary value of the code stress. Use
this feature to see the distribution of the code stresses in the model for a
particular load case.
In addition to the model color highlight in the graphics view, the corresponding
color key legend window is displayed in the top left corner of the graphics view.
The legend window can be resized and moved.
The colors and corresponding stress levels can be set in the
Configuration/Environment. For more information, see Configuration and
Code Stress Colors by Percent - Displays the piping system in a range of
colors, where the color corresponds to a certain percentage ratio of code stress
to allowable stress. This option is only valid for load cases where a code
compliance check was done such as where there are allowable stresses.
Use Code Stress Colors by Percent to see the distribution of the code stress to
allowable ratios in the model for a particular load case. The legend window with
the corresponding color key also displays in the upper-left corner of the graphics
view. The legend window can be resized and moved.
Clicking the arrow to the right of the button displays an additional menu with two
options: Display and Adjust Settings. Selecting the Display option displays the
color distribution. Selecting the Adjust Settings option displays the Stress
Settings dialog box where values and corresponding colors can be set or
adjusted. These settings are related to the particular job for which they are set,
and are saved in the corresponding job_name.XML file in the current job data
directory (see 3D Graphics Configuration (see "Configuring 3D Graphics" on
page 381)).
Reports Navigation Toolbar

Navigation commands in this toolbar become enabled by selecting at least one report.
/
View Previous Report / View Next Report - Navigates through the

report tabs.
Go To - Displays the list of currently-opened reports in alphabetical order
so that you can quickly and conveniently display the required report.
Find in Report - Provides search capabilities for a specific node number,
maximum values of any of the report fields, of for any text or number.
Zoom In / Zoom Out - Zooms the view in or out without affecting the
actual report font or formatting. The zoom level can also be controlled
from the right-mouse-click context menu. The zoom level is applied to the
current report and is temporal until the report is closed.
609

Save Current Custom Report Template - Saves the changes to the
custom report when the Report Template Editor is opened.
Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name - Enables
keeping the original report and saving the changes to another report
when the Report Template Editor is launched.
Preview Report - Removes the grid lines from the Preview Grid.
Clicking the button again adds the grid lines.
Custom Reports Toolbar

Commands in the Custom Reports toolbar enable you to manipulate the generated reports.
Add New Custom Report Template - Creates a new custom report. For more
information, see New Custom Report Template (on page 612).
Edit Existing Custom Report Template - Modifies an existing custom report. For
more information, see Edit Custom Report Template (on page 613).
Delete Custom Report Template - Deletes a custom report. For more
information, see Delete Custom Report Template (on page 613).
Reset Default Custom Report Templates - Replaces the current custom report
templates with the default templates. For more information, see Reset Default
Custom Report Templates (on page 614).
Import Custom Report - Imports a custom report template. For more information,
see Import Custom Report (on page 614).
Export Custom Report - Saves any custom generated report to a text file. For
more information, see Export Custom Report (on page 614).
610
Options Menu
Specifies common settings that are available on all reports such as how node numbers display
and title information.
Topics
On Screen .................................................................................. 611
Set Report Font .......................................................................... 611
Using Microsoft Word.................................................................. 611
Using Microsoft Excel ................................................................. 612
New Custom Report Template .................................................... 612
Edit Custom Report Template ..................................................... 613
Delete Custom Report Template ................................................. 613
Reset Default Custom Report Templates .................................... 614
Import Custom Report................................................................. 614
Export Custom Report ................................................................ 614
View Animations ......................................................................... 615
Graphical Output......................................................................... 616
Title Lines ................................................................................... 618
Load Case Name ........................................................................ 618
Node Name ................................................................................ 618
Return to Input ............................................................................ 618
On Screen
Displays the selected reports on the monitor. This permits the analysis data to be reviewed
interactively in text format. After selecting the combination of one or more active load cases with
any combination of report options, select Options > View Reports > On Screen. Each report is
presented one at a time for inspection. You can scroll through the reports vertically and
horizontally. You can also click On Screen
on the toolbar.
Set Report Font

Activates the Font dialog box used to define the text font, font style, and font size. You can
select this command from Options > View Reports > Set Report Font on the Static Output
Processor window menus, or by clicking the small down arrow next to On Screen
on the
standard toolbar. Some fonts that you can display reports in to the screen may not be available
on your printer. If the font is not available for your printer, the closest matching font on your
printer is used.
Using Microsoft Word

Send output reports directly to Microsoft Word, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Word
formatting features (font selection, margin control, and so forth) and printer support from
CAESAR II. Select Options > View Reports > Using Microsoft Word or click
on the
toolbar.
Word is available as an output device to the Static Output Processor and the Dynamic
Output windows. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
611

1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports Using Microsoft Word
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.

A table of contents, reflecting the cumulatively produced reports, displays on the first page of the
Microsoft Word document.
Using Microsoft Excel

Sends output reports directly to Excel, which permits the use of all of Microsoft Excels
features and printer support from CAESAR II. Excel is available as an output device to the
Static Output Processor window. You can append multiple reports to form a final report by:
1. Select the required reports.
2. Click View Reports using Microsoft Excel
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to add more reports.

Each report displays in a separate spreadsheet with the corresponding report name. There is no
generated table of contents.
New Custom Report Template

Creates a new custom report using the Report Template Editor dialog box. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 603). You must select at least one load case
from the Load Cases Analyzed list before you can create a new report template.
1. From the Load Cases Analyzed list, select the load case for the custom report template.
2. Click Options > Custom Reports > New
3. In the Template Name box, enter a name for your custom report.
4. In the Template Description box, enter a description.
5. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, create your custom report.
6. Click Save Current Custom Report Template
on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
612

Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
Your report appears in the Custom Reports list.
Edit Custom Report Template

Modifies and saves existing custom reports using the Report Template Editor. For more
information, see Report Template Editor (on page 603).
1. Select one or more load cases from the list.
2. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to edit.
3. Select Options > Custom Reports > Edit
4. Using the Report Template Editor dialog box options, edit your custom report.
5. Click Save Current Custom Report Template
on the Reports Navigation toolbar.
Do not use File > Save or the Save command on the main toolbar.
- OR Click Save Current Custom Report Template with a New Name
new custom report leaving the original report unchanged.
to save your edit to a
Delete Custom Report Template

Deletes a custom report template. You cannot delete a standard delivered report using this
command.
You cannot undo the deletion of a custom report template.
1. From the Custom Reports list, select the report to delete.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Delete
3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the report.
613
Reset Default Custom Report Templates

Replaces the current report templates, both CAESAR II delivered and custom defined
reports, with the default report templates delivered with CAESAR II. Use this command if you
received a new version or a patch of CAESAR II and want to use the new reports.
Make sure that you export any custom reports that you want to keep before using
this command. This command affects ALL jobs system-wide and cannot be undone. For more
information about exporting custom reports, see Export Custom Report (on page 614).
Import Custom Report

Imports a custom report template that was exported earlier using Options > Custom
Reports > Export
.
The report template file extension is *.C2RPT and can be read from any network location. After
the report template file is imported, it becomes a part of the current configuration. The new
report is appended to the Custom Reports list of the Static Output Processor window. The
default name of the template file corresponds to the custom report name. You can also access
this feature by selecting Options > Custom Reports > Import.
Export Custom Report

Saves any custom generated report to a text file, which you can then share with others. The
report template file name extension is *.C2RPT and can be saved to any accessible location.
The default file name is the custom report name. Use Options > Custom Reports > Import
to import these saved custom reports.
1. In the Custom Reports list, select the report to export.
2. Select Options > Custom Reports > Export
3. Select a folder and enter a file name.

4. Click Save.
614
View Animations
Displays the piping system as it moves to the displaced position of the basic load cases. To
animate the static results, select Options > View Animations. The following screen appears:
The Animated Plot menu has several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion are the
commands to activate the animation. Motion uses centerline representation while Volume
Motion produces 3D graphics. Select the load case from the drop down list. Animations may be
sped up, slowed down, or stopped using the toolbars.
CAESAR II also enables you to save animated plots as HTML files by selecting File > Save As
Animation. After saving these files, you can view them on any computer outside of CAESAR II.
The corresponding animation graphics file <job_name>.HSF must be transferred along
with the HTML file for proper display.
615
Graphical Output
To support a graphics mode, the Static Output Processor window provides 3D/HOOPS
Graphics toolbars that contain commands to zoom, orbit, and pan, as well as provide the ability
to switch views and modes.
The 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbar commands include the display of displaced shapes,
highlighting and zooming to maximum displacements, restraint loads, and stresses of the model.
Another advantage provided by 3D/HOOPS graphics is the graphical representation of stresses
by value and by percentage use color.
A variety of CAESAR II Output Plot functions, accessed from the 3D/HOOPS Graphics toolbars
or the Show menu, are broken into submenus:
Displacements
Restraints
Forces/Moments
Stresses
Selection Options Toolbar

Show Event Viewer Grid - Shows or hides the Event Viewer on the plot. See
Event Viewer Dialog Box (see "Element Viewer Dialog Box" on page 626).
Organization Tools Toolbar

Line Numbers - Displays the Line Numbers dialog box, which allows graphical
editing of line numbers. You can do the following from this pane.
Assign a new line number to the block of elements that have been selected
on the 3D graphical display.
number, simply drag-and-drop (move) the elements between existing Line
Numbers in the Line Numbers dialog box.
When you click the Line Number name in the Line Number dialog box, the
corresponding elements are highlighted in the 3D pane and are selected to
perform block (global) operations.
616

Line Numbers Dialog Box
Controls options for line numbers. You can set visibility options for line numbers from the 3D
model on the piping input and the Graphical Output in the Static Output Processor.
Press SHIFT + click to select multiple line numbers.
Create from Selection
Creates line numbers from the selected elements. You can only create line numbers for
Remove Line Number
Deletes line numbers from the selected elements. You can only remove line numbers for
You can also right-click select Remove Line Number (in Piping Input only).
Reset Settings
Returns visibility settings to their default settings. Use the drop down to specify to Reset
Visibility, Reset Color, or All settings.
You can also right-click on a line and select one of the reset options.
<type here to search>
Limits the elements that display in the Line Numbers dialog box to those line numbers and
node numbers that match the text in this field. Clear this field to display all elements. You
can search on a line number name or a node number.
Show/Hide
Turns the display of line numbers for elements on or off.
Visibility
Specifies the opacity of elements. 100% indicates that the element is opaque. 0% indicates
that the element is completely translucent, or invisible.
Color
Displays the Color dialog box from which you can specify a color for the element.
Name
Specifies the name of the element.
617
Title Lines
Inserts report titles for a group of reports. You can enter a two-line title or description for a
report. The title can be assigned once for all load case reports sent to the printer or a disk drive;
or the title can be changed for each individual report before it is moved to the output device.
The title line allows for 28 characters per line.
Load Case Name

Selects either the CAESAR II Default Load Case Names or the User-Defined Load Case
Names for output reports. The selected name also displays in the Load Cases Analyzed list
box in the Static Output Processor window. You enter user-defined load case names in the
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor on the Load Cases tab. For more information, see Load
Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545).
Node Name
Defines the formatting of the node numbers and names for generated reports. Select the
format to use from the Node Name Choice dialog box.
Return to Input
Opens the Piping Input Processor. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on
page 106).
618
Plot Options Menu

Performs actions associated with the display of the model. You must select Options >
Graphical Output
before these commands are available.
Topics
Range......................................................................................... 619
Restraints ................................................................................... 620
Anchors ...................................................................................... 620
Displacements ............................................................................ 620
Hangers ...................................................................................... 620
Nozzle Flexibility ......................................................................... 620
Flange Check ............................................................................. 620
Nozzle Check ............................................................................. 620
Forces ........................................................................................ 621
Uniform Loads ............................................................................ 621
Wind/Wave ................................................................................. 621
Compass .................................................................................... 621
Node Numbers ........................................................................... 621
Length ........................................................................................ 622
Tees ........................................................................................... 622
Expansion Joints......................................................................... 622
Diameters ................................................................................... 622
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 622
Corrosion .................................................................................... 622
Piping Codes .............................................................................. 622
Material ...................................................................................... 623
Pipe Density ............................................................................... 623
Fluid Density............................................................................... 623
Refractory Thickness .................................................................. 623
Refractory Density ...................................................................... 623
Insulation Thickness ................................................................... 623
Insulation Density ....................................................................... 624
Cladding Thickness..................................................................... 624
Cladding Density......................................................................... 624
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt................................................................. 624
Temperatures ............................................................................. 624
Pressures ................................................................................... 624
Range
Displays only the elements that contain nodes within a range. This is helpful when you need
to locate specific nodes or a group of related elements in a large model. This command displays
the Range dialog box. Alternatively, press U.
Using the Range command affects the display and operation of other 3D graphics
highlighting options. For example, if part of the model is not visible because of the use of the
Range command, then the Diameters command only highlights the elements that are
visible. Also, if using the Range command hides any nodes containing the predefined
619

displacements, the Displacements legend grid still displays, but the model may not highlight
correctly.
Find may not work properly for the part of the model that is hidden by the range. The
corresponding message displays in the status bar.
Range Dialog Box
Restraints
Turns the display of restraints on or off on the current model. Click the arrow on the icon to
indicate what size you want the restraints to display on your model , as well as whether or not
the software displays restraints with or without connecting nodes (CNodes).
Anchors
Turns the display of anchors on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the anchors to display on your model,
(CNodes).
Displacements
Turns the display of displacements on or off.
Hangers
Turns the display of hangers on or off.
Click the arrow on the icon to indicate what size you want the hangers to display on your model ,
(CNodes).
Nozzle Flexibility
Turns the display of nozzle flexibility on or off.
Flange Check
Turns flange checking on or off.
Nozzle Check
Turns nozzle checking on or off.
620
Forces
Updates the model to show each force in a different color. Use this option to see the force
variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key displays
the force defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to meet your needs.
The force parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click Next >>
and Previous << to move through the displacement or force vectors.
Uniform Loads
Updates the model to show each uniform load in a different color. Use this option to see the
uniform load variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the uniform loads defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
The uniform load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data. Click
Uniform Loads has three vectors defined. The Node column represents the start node number
where the uniform loads vector was first defined. Because the data propagates throughout the
model until changed or disabled, the model is colored accordingly.
Wind/Wave
Updates the model to show each wind or wave load in a different color. Use this option to
see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color key
displays the wind or wave loads defined in the model.
The wind and wave load parameters display in a table. Use the scroll bars to view all of the data.
Click Next >> and Previous << to move through the loads.
All the elements with wind defined display in red. All the elements with wave data defined
display in green. The legend grid shows the relevant data.
Compass
Turns the display of the orientation tee on or off.
Node Numbers
Turns the display of node numbers on or off. Alternatively, press N.
You can display node numbers for a specific element such as only restraints or only
anchors by selecting the down arrow from the Node Numbers option on the Plot Tools toolbar
in piping input. Select Names Only from the options to display only the node names on the
621
Length
Turns the display of element lengths on or off. Alternatively, press L.
Tees
Turns the display of tees on or off.
Expansion Joints
Turns the display of expansion joints on or off.
Diameters
Updates the model to show each diameter in a different color. Use this option to see the
diameter variations throughout the system or to verify that diameter changes have been made.
Alternatively, press D. A color key displays the diameters defined in the model. You can change
Wall Thickness
Updates the model to show each wall thickness in a different color. Use this option to see the
wall thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press W. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model. You can
Corrosion
Updates the model to show each corrosion allowance in a different color. Use this option to
see the corrosion variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the corrosion allowances defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Piping Codes
Updates the model to show each piping code in a different color. Use this option to see the
piping code variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
622
Material
Updates the model to show each material in a different color. Use this option to see the
material variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made.
Alternatively, press M. A color key displays the materials defined in the model. You can change
Pipe Density
Updates the model to show each pipe density in a different color. Use this option to see the
pipe density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the pipe densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Fluid Density
Updates the model to show each fluid density in a different color. Use this option to see the
fluid density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A color
key displays the fluid densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned colors to
meet your needs.
Updates the model to show each refractory thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the refractory thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
Refractory Density
Updates the model to show each refractory density in a different color. Use this option to see the
refractory density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the refractory densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Updates the model to show each insulation thickness in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have
been made. Alternatively, press I. A color key displays the thicknesses defined in the model.
623
Insulation Density
Updates the model to show each insulation density in a different color. Use this option to
see the insulation density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
made. A color key displays the insulation densities defined in the model. You can change the
Cladding Thickness
Updates the model to show each cladding thickness in a different color. Use this option to see
the cladding thickness variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been
Cladding Density
Updates the model to show each cladding density in a different color. Use this option to see the
cladding density variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the cladding densities defined in the model. You can change the assigned
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt.

Updates the model to show each insulation or cladding unit weight in a different color. Use this
option to see the variations throughout the system or to verify that changes have been made. A
color key displays the insulation or cladding unit weights defined in the model. You can change
Temperatures
Displays the temperature parameters that you have defined.
Pressures
Displays the pressure parameters that you have defined.
624
Plot View Menu

Performs actions associated with viewing the model. You must select Options > Graphical
Output
before these commands are available.
Topics
Reset .......................................................................................... 625
Front View .................................................................................. 625
Back View................................................................................... 625
Top View .................................................................................... 625
Bottom View ............................................................................... 625
Left-side View ............................................................................. 625
Right-side View ........................................................................... 626
Southeast ISO View .................................................................... 626
Southwest ISO View ................................................................... 626
Northeast ISO View .................................................................... 626
Northwest ISO View .................................................................... 626
4 View ........................................................................................ 626
Reset
Resets the view to the default settings.
Front View
Displays the model from the front. Alternatively, press Z.
Back View
Displays the model from the back. Alternatively, press Shift + Z.
Top View
Displays the model from the top. Alternatively, press Y.
Bottom View
Displays the model from the bottom. Alternatively, press Shift + Y.
Left-side View
Displays the model from the left side. Alternatively, press X.
625
Right-side View
Displays the model from the right side. Alternatively, press Shift + R.
Southeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southeast. Alternatively, press F10.
Southwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the southwest.
Northeast ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northeast.
Northwest ISO View

Displays the model isometrically from the northwest.
4 View
Displays the model in four windows.
This command automatically places the horizontal and vertical dividers, or splitter bars, and
changes the cursor to a four-way arrow. You can change the position of the splitter bars by
moving the mouse. Click to fix the position.
Drag the splitter bars to change the size of the windows. Drag the splitter bars out of the view to
remove those views. You can drag the splitter located at the top or left scroll bar to add views.
You can manipulate the image in any of these panes individually.
Element Viewer Dialog Box

Use options in the Element Viewer dialog box to navigate among the elements, navigate to
various reports within a load case, and view the reports for other load cases. This is done in the
Report Selection pane on the left in the dialog box.
The dialog box has a tree structure similar in operation to Windows Explorer.
Click the + sign for a particular load case expands the tree to show reports.
Select the report to display the data in the grid view to the right.
Select a node or an element in the grid view when Select Elements is enabled to highlight
the corresponding element on the graphics view.
Zoom to the selected element if the corresponding Zoom to Selection is enabled. Similarly,
click an element on the graphics view to highlight the corresponding data row in the report
view. This is a bi-directional connection.
626
Change the load case within the Element Viewer dialog box to update the graphics view (if
applicable), and the Load Case Selection box on the Load Case toolbar.
627
SECTION 10
Dynamic Analysis
Performs dynamic analysis on a piping model. This section introduces dynamic analysis
concepts and describes data input for each of the options available. The command is also
available from Analysis > Dynamics.
In This Section
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems .............................................. 628
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis ................................... 634
Dynamic Analysis Workflow ........................................................ 635
The Dynamic Analysis Window ................................................... 636
Excitation Frequencies Tab ......................................................... 639
Harmonic Forces Tab ................................................................. 641
Harmonic Displacements Tab ..................................................... 645
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab ....................................... 648
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab ..................................... 653
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab............................................... 668
Lumped Masses Tab .................................................................. 673
Snubbers Tab ............................................................................. 675
Control Parameters Tab .............................................................. 676
Advanced Tab ............................................................................ 708
Directive Builder.......................................................................... 712
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data ........................................................... 713
DLF/Spectrum Generator ............................................................ 714
Relief Load Synthesis ................................................................. 724
Analysis Results ......................................................................... 736
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems

A piping system can respond far differently to a dynamic load than it would to a static load of the
same magnitude. Static loads are those which are applied slowly enough that the system has
time to react and internally distribute the loads, thus remaining in equilibrium. In equilibrium, all
forces and moments are resolved (that is, the sum of the forces and moments are zero) and the
pipe does not move.
A dynamic load changes quickly with time. The piping system does not have time to internally
distribute the loads. Forces and moments are not always resolved, resulting in unbalanced loads
and pipe movement. Because the sum of forces and moments are not in equilibrium, the
internally-induced loads can be differenteither higher or lowerthan the applied loads.
The software provides several methods for analyzing different types of system response under
dynamic loads. Each method provides a trade-off of accuracy versus computing requirements.
The methods include modal natural frequency calculations, harmonic analysis, response
spectrum analysis, and time history analysis.
Modal natural frequency analysis measures the tendency of a piping system to respond to
dynamic loads. The modal natural frequencies of a system typically should not be too close to
628
Dynamic Analysis
equipment operating frequencies. As a general rule, higher natural frequencies usually cause
less trouble than low natural frequencies. CAESAR II provides calculation of modal natural
frequencies and animated plots of the associated mode shapes.
Harmonic analysis addresses dynamic loads that are cyclic in nature, such as fluid pulsation in
reciprocating pump lines or vibration due to rotating equipment. These loads are modeled as
concentrated forces or displacements at one or more points in the system. To provide the proper
phase relationship between multiple loads, a phase angle can also be used. Any number of
forcing frequencies can be analyzed for equipment start-up and operating modes. Harmonic
responses represent the maximum dynamic amplitude the piping system undergoes and have
the same form as a static analysis: node deflections and rotations, local forces and moments,
restraint loads, and stresses. For example, if the results show an X displacement of 5.8 cm at a
node, then the dynamic motion due to the cyclic excitation is from +5.8 cm. to -5.8 cm. at that
node. The stresses shown are one half of, or one amplitude of, the full cyclic stress range.
Response spectrum analysis allows an impulse-type transient event to be characterized by
response versus frequency spectra. Each mode of vibration of the piping system is related to
one response on the spectrum. These modal responses are summed together to produce the
total system response. The stresses for these analyses, summed with the sustained stresses,
are compared to the occasional stress allowables defined by the piping code. Spectral analysis
can be used in a wide variety of applications. For example, in uniform inertial loading, ground
motion associated with a seismic event is supplied as displacement, velocity, or acceleration
response spectra. The assumption is that all supports move with the defined ground motion and
the piping system catches up to the supports. It is this inertial effect which loads the system.
The shock spectra, which define the ground motion, can vary between the three global
directions and can even change for different groups of supports (such as independent or uniform
support motion). Another example is based on single point loading. CAESAR II uses this
technique to analyze a wide variety of impulse-type transient loads. Relief valve loads, water
hammer loads, slug flow loads, and rapid valve closure type loads all cause single impulse
dynamic loads at various points in the piping system. The response to these dynamic forces can
be predicted using the force spectrum method.
Time history analysis is one of the most accurate methods, because it uses numeric integration
of the dynamic equation of motion to simulate the system response throughout the load
duration. This method can solve any type of dynamic loading, but due to its exact solution,
requires more resources (such as computer memory, calculation speed and time) than other
methods. Time history analysis is not appropriate when, for example, the spectrum method
offers sufficient accuracy.
Force versus time profiles for piping are usually one of three types: Random (on page 630),
Harmonic (see Newsletter Index http://www.coade.com/Mechanical%20Engineering%20News%20Index.shtml), or Impulse (on
page 632). Each profile has a preferred solution method. These profiles and the load types
identified with them are described below.
629
Dynamic Analysis
Random
With this type of profile, the load unpredictably changes direction or magnitude with time. Even
with the unpredictability, some load characteristics can predominate. Loads with random
force/time profiles are best solved using a spectrum method or a static equivalent.
The major types of loads with random time profiles are wind and earthquake.
Wind
Wind velocity causes forces due to the decrease of wind momentum as the air strikes the pipe
creating an equivalent pressure on the pipe. Wind loadings, even though they can have
predominant directions and average velocities over a given time, are subject to gusting, such as
sudden changes in direction and velocity. As the time period lengthens, the number of wind
changes also increases in an unpredictable manner, eventually encompassing nearly all
directions and a wide range of velocities.
Earthquake
Seismic (earthquake) loadings are caused by the introduction of random ground motion, such as
accelerations, velocities, and displacements and corresponding inertia loads (the mass of the
system times the acceleration) into a structure through the structure-to-ground anchorage.
Random ground motion is the sum of an infinite number of individual harmonic (cyclic) ground
motions. Two earthquakes can be similar in terms of predominant direction (for example, along
a fault), predominant harmonic frequencies (if some underlying cyclic motions tend to dominate),
and maximum ground motion, but their exact behavior at any given time can be quite different
and unpredictable.
Harmonic
With this type of profile, the load changes direction and/or magnitude following a harmonic
profile, ranging from its minimum to its maximum over a fixed time period. For example, the load
can be described by a function of the form:
F(t) = A + B cos( t + )
Where:
F(t) = force magnitude as a function of time
A = mean force
B = variation of maximum and minimum force from mean
= angular frequency (radian/sec)
= phase angle (radians)
t = time (sec)
Loads with harmonic force/time profiles are best solved using a harmonic method. The major
types of loads with harmonic time profiles are equipment vibration, acoustic vibration, and
pulsation.
630
Dynamic Analysis
Equipment Vibration
If rotating equipment attached to a pipe is slightly out-of-tolerance (for example, when a drive
shaft is out-of-round), it can impose a small cyclic displacement onto the pipe at the point of
attachment. This is the location where the displacement cycle most likely corresponds to the
operating cycle of the equipment. The displacement at the pipe connection can be imperceptibly
small, but could cause significant dynamic-loading problems. Loading versus time is easily
predicted after the operating cycle and variation from tolerance is known.
Acoustic Vibration
If fluid flow characteristics are changed within a pipe (for example, when flow conditions change
from laminar to turbulent as the fluid passes through an orifice), slight lateral vibrations may be
set up within the pipe. These vibrations often fit harmonic patterns, with predominant
frequencies somewhat predictable based upon the flow conditions. For example, Strouhals
equation predicts that the developed frequency (Hz) of vibration caused by flow through an
orifice will be somewhere between 0.2 V/D and 0.3 V/D, where V is the fluid velocity (ft./sec) and
D is the diameter of the orifice (ft). Wind flow around a pipe sets up lateral displacements as well
(a phenomenon known as vortex shedding), with an exciting frequency of approximately 0.18
V/D, where V is the wind velocity and D is the outer diameter of the pipe.
Pulsation
During the operation of a reciprocating pump or a compressor, the fluid is compressed by
pistons driven by a rotating shaft. This causes a cyclic change over time in the fluid pressure at
any specified location in the system. Unequal fluid pressures at opposing elbow pairs or
closures create an unbalanced pressure load in the system. Because the pressure balance
changes with the cycle of the compressor, the unbalanced force also changes. The frequency of
the force cycle is likely to be some multiple of that of the equipment operating cycle, because
multiple pistons cause a corresponding number of force variations during each shaft rotation.
The pressure variations continue to move along through the fluid. In a steady state flow
condition, unbalanced forces may be present simultaneously at any number of elbow pairs in the
system. Load magnitudes can vary. Load cycles may or may not be in phase with each other,
depending upon the pulse velocity, the distance of each elbow pair from the compressor, and
the length of the piping legs between the elbow pairs.
For example, if the pressure at elbow a is Pa(t) and the pressure at elbow b is Pb(t), then the
unbalanced force acting along the pipe between the two elbows is:
F(t) = (Pa(t) - Pb(t)) A
Where:
A = internal area of the pipe
Assuming that the pressure peak hits the elbow "a" at time t = 0, Pa(t) is:
Pa(t) = Pavg + 0.5 (dP) cos t
Where:
Pavg = average pressure in the line
dP = alternating component of the pressure
= driving angular frequency of pulse
631
Dynamic Analysis
If the length of the pipe between the elbows is L, then the pressure pulse reaches elbow bts
after it has passed elbow a:
ts = L / c
Where:
c = speed of sound in the fluid
Therefore the expression for the pressure at elbow b is:
Pb(t) = Pavg + 0.5(dP) cos ( t - Q)
Where:
Q
= phase shift between the pressure peaks at a and b

= ts
Combining these equations, the unbalanced pressure force acting on an elbow pair is:
F(t) = 0.5(dP)A * [ cos t - cos (t - L/c) ]
Under steady-state conditions, a similar situation exists at all elbow pairs throughout the piping
system.
Impulse
With this type of profile, the load magnitude ramps up from zero to some value, remains
relatively constant for a time, and then ramps down to zero again. For rapid ramping times, this
type of profile resembles a rectangle. Loads with impulse force/time profiles are best solved
using time history or force spectrum methods. Major types of loads with impulse time profiles are
relief valve, fluid hammer, and slug flow.
Relief Valve
When system pressure reaches a dangerous level, relief valves are set to open in order to vent
fluid and reduce the internal pressure. Venting through the valve causes a jet force to act on the
piping system. This force ramps up from zero to its full value over the opening time of the valve.
The relief valve remains open (and the jet force remains relatively constant) until sufficient fluid
is vented to relieve the over-pressure condition. The valve then closes, ramping down the jet
force over the closing time of the valve.
Fluid Hammer
When the flow of fluid through a system is suddenly halted through valve closure or a pump trip,
the fluid in the remainder of the system cannot be stopped instantaneously. As fluid continues to
flow into the area of stoppage (upstream of the valve or pump), the fluid compresses causing a
high pressure situation. On the other side of the restriction, the fluid moves away from the
stoppage point, creating a low pressure (vacuum) situation. Fluid at the next elbow or closure
along the pipeline is still at the original operating pressure, resulting in an unbalanced pressure
force acting on the valve seat or the elbow.
The fluid continues to flow, compressing (or decompressing) fluid further away from the point of
flow stoppage, causing the leading edge of the pressure pulse to move through the line. As the
pulse moves past the first elbow, the pressure is now equalized at each end of the pipe run,
leading to a balanced (that is, zero) pressure load on the first pipe leg. The unbalanced
632
Dynamic Analysis
pressure, by passing the elbow, has now shifted to the second leg. The unbalanced pressure
load continues to rise and fall in sequential legs as the pressure pulse travels back to the
source, or forward to the sink.
The ramp up time of the profile roughly coincides with the elapsed time from full flow to low flow,
such as the closing time of the valve or trip time of the pump. Because the leading edge of the
pressure pulse is not expected to change as the pulse travels through the system, the
ramp-down time is the same. The duration of the load from initiation through the beginning of the
down ramp is equal to the time required for the pressure pulse to travel the length of the pipe
leg.
Slug Flow
Most piping systems are designed to handle single-phase fluids (that is, fluids that are uniformly
liquid or gas). Under certain circumstances, the fluid may have multiple phases. For example,
slurry systems transport solid materials in liquids and gases may condense, creating pockets of
liquid in otherwise gaseous media. Systems carrying multi-phase fluids are susceptible to slug
flow.
In general, fluid changes direction in a piping system through the application of forces at elbows.
This force is equal to the change in momentum with respect to time, or
Fr = dp / dt = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]1/2
Where:
dp = change in momentum
dt = change in time
= fluid density
= fluid velocity
= internal area of pipe
= inclusion angle at elbow
With constant fluid density, this force is normally constant and is small enough that it can be
easily absorbed through tension in the pipe wall. The force is then passed on to adjacent elbows
with equal and opposite loads, zeroing the net load on the system. Therefore these types of
momentum loads are usually ignored in analysis. If the fluid velocity or density changes with
time, this momentum load will also change with time, leading to a dynamic load which may not
be canceled by the load at other elbows.
633
Dynamic Analysis
For example, consider a slug of liquid in a gas system. The steady state momentum load is
insignificant because the fluid density of a gas is effectively zero. The liquid suddenly slug hits
the elbow, increasing the momentum load by orders of magnitude. This load lasts only as long
as it takes for the slug to traverse the elbow, and then suddenly drops to near zero again with
the exact profile of the slug load depending upon the shape of the slug. The time duration of the
load depends upon the length of the slug divided by the velocity of the fluid.
Where:
F1 = v2 A(1 - cos )
Fr = v2 A [2(1 - cos )]
F2 = v2 A sin
Model Modifications for Dynamic Analysis

To perform a dynamic analysis, the static model must first be created and error checked. The
model is also usually run through static analysis before the dynamic analysis begins, but this is
not required unless nonlinear supports or hanger selections are included in the model. If
nonlinear supports are present, the static analysis must be run and the results made available
before the dynamic analysis can be performed.
The dynamic analysis techniques used by CAESAR II require strict linearity in the piping and
structural systems. Dynamic responses associated with nonlinear effects are not addressed. An
example of a nonlinear effect is slapping, such as when a pipe lifts off the rack at one moment
and impacts the rack the next. For the dynamic model, the pipe must be either held down or
allowed to move freely. Nonlinear restraints used in the static analysis must be set to active or
inactive for the dynamic analysis. CAESAR II allows you to set the nonlinear restraints to any
configuration found in the static results by specifying the value of Static Load Case for Nonlinear
Restraint Status (on page 689) on the Control Parameters tab. You usually select the
operating case to set the nonlinear restraint configuration. For example, if a +Y support is active
in the static operating case and the operating case is used to set the status of the nonlinear
supports for dynamics, CAESAR II installs a double-acting Y support at that location for the
dynamic analysis. The pipe does not move up or down at that point regardless of the dynamic
load.
Another nonlinear effect is friction. Friction effects must also be linearized for use in dynamic
analysis. By default, CAESAR II excludes the effects of friction from the dynamic analysis. If
requested, CAESAR II can approximate the friction resistance to movement in the dynamic
model by including spring stiffness normal to the restraint line of action. For a Y restraint with
634
Dynamic Analysis
friction, the friction stiffness is added in the X and Z directions. You define the stiffness of these
springs as a function of the friction load calculated in the static analysis. CAESAR II calculates
the friction stiffness by multiplying the resultant force on the restraint from the selected static
case results, the friction coefficient, and the Stiffness Factor for Friction defined on the
Control Parameters tab. For example, if a normal force on the restraint from the static analysis
is 1000 lb and the friction coefficient (mu) is 0.3, then the total friction load is 300 lb. If Stiffness
Factor for Friction is 500, then springs having a stiffness of SQRT(1000^2 +
300^2)*0.3*500=156605 lb./in are inserted into the dynamic model in the two directions
perpendicular to the line of action of the friction restraint. Converting friction damping into
stiffness is not mathematically legitimate, but serves as a good engineering approximation for
dynamic friction in a wide variety of situations.
Dynamic Analysis Workflow

Before starting and error checking a dynamic analysis, develop dynamic analysis data using the
following steps. The steps can occur in any order.
Specify the loads

You do not need to specify dynamic loads if only natural frequencies are to be counted or
calculated. Harmonic analysis requires the driving frequencies and forces or displacements to
define and locate the sinusoidally varying point loads.
Creating the dynamic loads for spectra or time history analysis requires the most attention. The
response spectra or time history profile must be defined, built, or selected. Force sets are built
for force response spectra and time history analysis. Response spectra/time history and force
sets are combined with other data to build the load cases to be analyzed. Finally, additional load
cases may be constructed by combining shock results with static results to check code
compliance on occasional stresses. The software provides methods to simplify many of these
tasks.
Modify the mass and stiffness model

For dynamic analysis, CAESAR II converts each piping element from a continuous beam
element between two nodes to a stiffness between two masses. Additional stiffness is added at
the node points to model anchors, restraints, hangers, and other supports in the static analysis
model. The masses assigned to each node are one half the sum of all element masses framing
into the node. These masses are used as translational inertias only. Rotational moments of
inertia are ignored in the dynamic mass model. Their inclusion in the analysis would cause a
large increase in solution time without a corresponding improvement in the general accuracy of
the analysis.
In many instances, the mass and stiffness established in the static model is used without
modification in the dynamic analysis. Some situations, however, can be improved by the
deletion of mass points or degrees of freedom. This usually occurs in models with unnecessary
masses far from the area of interest or unnecessary degrees of freedom that do not act in the
direction of interest. Some piping systems have supports that are installed to suppress vibration
and do not affect the static analysis. If these shock absorbers or snubbers were not part of the
static model, they can be added to the dynamic model as additional stiffness.
635
Dynamic Analysis
Set the parameters that control the analysis
Options on the Control Parameters tab set the type of analysis to be performed: calculation of
natural frequencies and mode shapes, harmonic analysis, spectral analysis, or time history.
General settings for the analysis are also defined, such as maximum frequency cutoff, mode
summation methods, static configuration for nonlinear restraints, and the friction factor for
including friction in the dynamic analysis. The Advanced tab allows you to change the
parameters governing the eigensolution which does the modal extraction. These parameters
should only be altered under special circumstances.
For more information, see Control Parameters Tab (on page 676) and Advanced Tab (on page
708).
The Dynamic Analysis Window

After the basic model has been constructed, click Analysis > Dynamics or Dynamic Analysis
to perform a dynamic analysis. The Dynamic Analysis window opens.
Toolbar Commands
Analysis
Type
Specifies the type of analysis. Select Modal, Harmonic, Earthquake (spectrum),

Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), or Time History.
The window tabs change for each analysis.
Save Input and File > Save Input - Saves entered values to the CAESAR II file.
Check Input and File > Check Input - Opens the Dynamic Syntax Check dialog
box to check entered values for errors.
636
Dynamic Analysis
Run the Analysis and File > Run Analysis - Performs the error check and, if no
errors are found, performs the analysis the dynamic analysis for the selected
Analysis Type and the entered values. Analysis results are then available for review.
For more information, see Analysis Results (on page 736).
Add Entry and Edit > Add Entry - Adds a row to the table.
Delete Entry and Edit > Delete Entry - Deletes a row from the table.
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points - Specifies
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions. For
more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 713).
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator - Converts
spectrum time waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor
(DLF) curve or other response spectrum. For more information, see DLF/Spectrum
Generator (on page 714).
Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis - Calculates the
magnitudes of relieving thrust forces. For more information, see Relief Load
Synthesis (on page 724).
Cmt
Changes the selected row in the table to a comment line. You can add comment
lines anywhere in the table.
Modal Analysis (on page 637)

Harmonic Analysis (on page 638)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis (on page 638)
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 638)
Time History Analysis (on page 639)
Dynamic analysis uses the units from the piping input file or from the configuration file of a
structural-only analysis. For more information on dynamic load cases, data, and procedures, see
Interfaces (see "External Interfaces" on page 1039).
If the model contains spring hangers selected by the software or nonlinear boundary
conditions (such as single directional supports, gaps, rods, or friction), then a static analysis
must be performed before the dynamic analysis to determine how the nonlinear supports are
acting.
Modal Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Modal is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic
Analysis window.
Lumped Masses Tab (on page 673)
Snubbers Tab (on page 675)
Control Parameters Tab (on page 676)
Advanced Tab (on page 708)
637
Dynamic Analysis
Modal analysis extracts natural frequencies and shapes for the modes of vibration of the pipe
system. No loads are specified.
Harmonic Analysis
Enter values on the following tabs when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the
Dynamic Analysis window.
Excitation Frequencies Tab (on page 639)
Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 641)
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 645)
Earthquake Response Spectrum Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type
in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 648)
Spectrum Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 653)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 668)
For earthquake loads, you define one or more response spectra and apply them in a specified
direction over part or all of the piping system.
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Relief Loads (spectrum) or Water Hammer/Slug
Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 648)
Force Sets Tab (on page 658)
Spectrum Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 653)
Relief Loads
This method solves relief valve loading on a piping system through force spectrum analysis. The
force-time profile is estimated using relief load synthesis and then converted to a force multiplier
(dynamic load factor, or DLF) spectrum. The force is then applied in conjunction with this
spectrum.
638
Dynamic Analysis
Water Hammer/Slug Flow
This method solves water hammer or slug problems. It is similar to the force spectrum analysis
used for relief valve loadings, except that relief load synthesis is not required. The force-time
profile is estimated and then converted to a force multiplier spectrum. This is linked to force sets
in the load cases.
Force-time profile estimation methods are shown in the CAESAR II Applications Guide.
Steps proceed as described for relief loads.
Time History Analysis

Enter values on the following tabs when Time History is selected for Analysis Type in the
Time History Definitions Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab" on page 648)
Force Sets Tab (on page 658)
Time History Load Cases Tab (see "Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab" on page 653)
Time history analysis solves the dynamic equation of motion for extracted nodes of vibration.
The results are then summed to find the system results. Loadings are specified in terms of
force-time profiles and force sets. The force-time profile defines the load timing. The force set
defines the load direction and location. Either the profile or the force set can be used to define
the magnitude.
Excitation Frequencies Tab

This tab is available when Harmonic is selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
One or more individual frequencies or frequency ranges can be specified, one to a row.
CAESAR II performs a separate analysis for each frequency.
A frequency range has values for Starting Frequency, Ending Frequency, and Increment.
You can enter the number of anticipated load cycles for each frequency range. Load cases are
then calculated with a fatigue stress type. Otherwise, the load cases are calculated with an
occasional stress type.
Harmonic loads may be specified on the Harmonic Forces Tab (on page 641) or the
Harmonic Displacements Tab (on page 645).
Topics
Starting Frequency ..................................................................... 640
Ending Frequency....................................................................... 640
Increment ................................................................................... 640
Load Cycles ................................................................................ 641
639
Dynamic Analysis
Starting Frequency
Specifies the starting frequency for the analysis in Hertz (Hz). This is the frequency at which the
harmonic forces or displacements are applied.
Harmonic displacements and forces have the form:
A*cosine(t+ )
where A is the amplitude of the force or displacement, is the phase angle, and is the
frequency of the loading.
Real and imaginary solutions are developed for each frequency in the defined range, from which
any phased solution can be calculated. There must be a starting frequency for a frequency
range to be valid.
Ending Frequency
Specifies the ending frequency for a range of frequencies. Enter the frequency in Hertz (Hz).
The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each frequency between the Starting
Frequency (on page 640) and Ending Frequency according to the value specified for
Increment (on page 640). This is an optional value.
Increment
Specifies the frequency increment used to step from Starting Frequency (on page 640) to
Ending Frequency (on page 640). The harmonic forces or displacements are applied at each
frequency along the specified increment. This is an optional value. If no value is entered, the
software uses a default increment of 1.0 Hz.
The frequencies for harmonic excitation are taken from each defined frequency range. Individual
frequencies for excitation are calculated using a "do loop" type of logic to determine the
frequencies in a specified frequency range:
X = STARTING FREQUENCY
5
CONTINUE
COMPUTE SOLUTION FOR FREQUENCY "X"

X = X + INCREMENT
IF( X .LT. ENDING FREQUENCY+0.001) GO TO 5
The sign of the frequency increment may be modified by the software to properly step from the
starting frequency to the ending frequency. The starting frequency, the ending frequency, or the
increment may be given as a fraction.
Example
Find harmonic solutions for the following group of turbine equipment speeds:
Warm up speed: 100 rpm
Speed increments to bring turbine online: 400, 800, 1200, 1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200
rpm. Speeds are passed through very slowly while coming up to operating speed.
Operating speed: 3600 rpm
640
Dynamic Analysis
Convert rotations per minute to cycles per second (Hertz) by dividing by 60:
Warm up speed: 100/60
Speed increments: 400/60 to 3200/60 by increments of 400/60
Operating speed: 3600/60
A low frequency field vibration exists in the piping system at about 3 Hertz:
Approximate field-observed excitation frequency: 3 Hz
The response of the piping system when the dynamic load is applied at 3 Hz is almost zero. This
is true regardless of the magnitude of the dynamic load. The maxi\-mum varying pressure load
was applied, and there were still no appreciable dynamic displacements when the excitation
frequency was 3 Hz. Apply the dynamic load over a range of frequencies around 3 Hertz and
see if any dynamic response can be observed.
Group of field-observed frequencies: "Guessed"
Excitation frequency: 3 Hz
Defined by the input below are:

(2.5, 2.6, 2.7, ..., 3.3, 3.4, 3.5) Hz.
2.5 3.5 0.1
Load Cycles
Specifies the number of load cycles. If the harmonic load case is also subjected to fatigue
loading, enter the number of expected cycles. This is an optional value.
The load cycle value is the anticipated number of applications of the load on the system. This
value is used to determine the allowable stress from the fatigue curve for the material.
For static cases, the full range of calculated stresses is considered. For dynamic cases,
half the range (that is, the amplitude) of calculated stresses is considered.
Harmonic Forces Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
641
Dynamic Analysis
Force
Direction
Phase
Start Node
1500
10
1500
105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
Force
Direction
Phase
Start Node
1500
10
1500
180
105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Force .......................................................................................... 643
Direction ..................................................................................... 643
Phase ......................................................................................... 643
Start Node .................................................................................. 643
Stop Node .................................................................................. 644
Increment ................................................................................... 644
642
Dynamic Analysis
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the harmonic force to be applied.
The form of the harmonic forcing function is:
F(t) = A*cosine(t-)
where "F(t)" is the force as a function of time. "A" is the maximum amplitude of the dynamic
force. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is the phase angle
(in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the force. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or direction
vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for
direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the force in degrees.
Harmonic loading can start with its maximum load at time equal to zero, or the harmonic load
can start with its maximum at any time between zero and 2*/ seconds. The phase angle f is
the method used to specify this time shift in the dynamic load waveform. The phase angle is
calculated from the time shift using the equation:
(degrees) = 180t/
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
The phase angle is usually entered as either zero or 90. Use the phase specification when
defining eccentric loads on rotating equipment.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.
Start Node
Specifies the starting node number in the model at which the force is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
643
Dynamic Analysis
Stop Node
Specifies the ending node number in the model through which the force is applied. Used as a
part of a "range of nodes" force loading with Start Node and Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
that is incremented between the start and stop nodes is loaded with the value of Force. This
value is optional.
Example 1
A pressure pulse traveling in the line causes the line to shake at about 2 hertz. The magnitude
of the pressure loading is estimated to be about 460 lb. The pressure wave travels from 95 to
100. The harmonic force to model this load is shown as follows. The magnitude is divided by 2
because the total variation in the dynamic load is a function of the cosine, which varies from -1
to 1. To find the true response magnitudes from a positive-only harmonic load pulse, a static
solution with 460/2 lb. acting in the +X direction is superimposed on the static 460/2 lb. solution
to provide the constant shifting of the load axis. There is a negative load at node 95 due to the
negative sign on the cosine. The pressure pulse is always positive and a negative load never
exists. The superposition of the 460/2 static solution assures that the dynamic load (and
probably the resulting displacements) is always positive.
460 LB pressure load at 2 Hertz
460/2 X 0 95
Example 2
A pump is shaking in the X-Y plane. The pump axis is along the global Z axis. The magnitude of
the dynamic load is calculated to be 750 lb. from the manufacturer-provided masses and
eccentricities. Apply this rotating equipment load on the inline pump at node 350. The X and Y
loads are 90 degrees out of phase with one another. When the X load is at its maximum the Y
load is zero, and when the Y load is at its maximum the X load is zero.
Estimated eccentric load on inline pump DOH-V33203001
750 X 0 350
750 Y 90 350
644
Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic Displacements Tab

window.
Values must be entered on either the Harmonic Forces tab or the Harmonic
Displacements tab.
Harmonic Phasing
Phasing is important if more than one force or displacement is included. The phase angle
(entered in degrees) relates the timing of one load or displacement to another. For example, if
two harmonic loads act along the same line but at different nodes, the loads can be directed
towards each other (that is, in opposite directions), producing no net dynamic imbalance on the
system. The loads can also act in the same direction (that is, to the right or to the left together),
producing a net dynamic imbalance in the system equal to the sum of the two forces. The phase
angle determines this relationship. For example, the follow load data is entered for in-phase
loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with a 0 phase at nodes 10 and 105:
Force
Direction
Phase
Start Node
1500
10
1500
105
The follow load data is entered for out-of-phase loading of 1500 lbf in the X direction with the
phase in opposite directions at nodes 10 and 105, pulling the system apart:
Force
Direction
Phase
Start Node
1500
10
1500
180
105
The two most common phased loadings are those due to rotating equipment and reciprocating
pumps.
Rotating equipment can have an eccentricity, a speed, and a mass. These items must be
converted into a harmonic load acting on the rotor at the theoretical mass centerline. The
magnitude of the harmonic load is calculated from:
Fn = (mass)(speed)2(eccentricity)
where speed is the angular velocity of the shaft in cycles per second. This load is applied along
both axes perpendicular to the shaft axis and at a 90 phase shift.
In the case of a reciprocating pump, the pump introduces a pressure wave into the line at some
regular interval that is related to the pump valving and speed. This pressure wave moves away
from the pump at the speed of sound in the fluid. These pressure waves cause loads at each
bend in the piping system. The load on each subsequent elbow in the system, starting from the
first elbow, is phase-shifted by an amount that is a function of the distance between the elbows,
from the first elbow to the current elbow. The amount of phase shift between elbow-elbow pairs
645
Dynamic Analysis
produces the net unbalanced dynamic load in the piping. The phase shift, in degrees from the
first elbow, is calculated from:
phase = [(frequency)(length) / (speed of sound)]360
where frequency is the frequency of wave introduction at the pump, and length is the distance
from the first elbow to the current elbow under study. The magnitude of the pressure load at
each elbow is:
Harmonic Force = 0.5 (Pressure variation) (Area)
With phasing considerations, all specified loads are considered to act together at each
applied frequency.
Topics
Displacement .............................................................................. 646
Direction ..................................................................................... 646
Phase ......................................................................................... 646
Start Node .................................................................................. 647
Stop Node .................................................................................. 647
Increment ................................................................................... 647
Displacement
Specifies the magnitude of the displacement to be applied.
The form of the harmonic displacement function is:
D(t)=(A)*cosine(t-)
where "D(t)" is the displacement as a function of time, "A" is the maximum amplitude of the
dynamic displacement. "" is the frequency of the excitation (in radians per second), and "" is
the phase angle (in radians).
Direction
Specifies the direction of the displacement. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction cosines, or
direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as (0.707,0.0,0.707). The
format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Phase
Specifies the phase angle of the displacement in degrees.
Harmonic displacement can start with its maximum displacement at time equal to zero, or the
harmonic displacements can start with its maximum displacements at any time between zero
and t + 2 / seconds. The phase angle is the method used to specify this time shift in the
dynamic load waveform. The phase angle can be calculated from the time shift using the
equation:
(degrees) = 180t /
where t is given in seconds and is given in radians per second.
A value for Phase is required. If the phase angle is zero, you must enter 0.0.
646
Dynamic Analysis
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node in the model at which the displacement is applied.
If the node is a supported node, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to act at the support
point. If the node is not sup\-ported, then the dynamic displacement is assumed to describe the
exact motion of the pipe at that point. This differentiation only becomes important when the node
is supported by a flexible restraint. For example, node 55 is supported in the Y direction by a
restraint having a stiffness of 5,000 lb./in. A harmonic displacement is also specified at node 55
in the Y direction. In this case, the harmonic displacement does not describe the dis\-placement
that is attached to 55. Instead, the displacement creates a load in the Y direction at 55 equal to
the harmonic displacement times 5,000 lb./in.
If Start Node has a value but Stop Node and Increment do not, then the start node must exist
in the piping system. If all three have values, then the range of nodes identified in the range
must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model through which the displacement is
applied. Used as a part of a "range of nodes" displacement loading with Start Node and
Increment. This value is optional.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Each node
incremented between the start and stop nodes is displaced with the value of Displacement.
This value is optional.
Example 1
A large ethylene compressor shakes the node exiting the compressor flange a field-measured 8
mils in the Y direction, and 3 mils in the Z direction. The dynamic displacements are assumed to
be simultaneous with no phase shift. This is because the load causing the displacements is
believed to be from the compressor plunger moving in the X, or axial, direction. The
dis\-placements are skewed because the piping configuration entering the compressor is itself
skewed.
Harmonic Displacements at Compressor Flange
0.008
0.0
330
0.003
0.0
330
Example 2
Applying estimated eccentric forces to the pump described in the harmonic force example (see
"Increment" on page 644) did not produce the displacements witnessed in the field. Field
personnel have measured the dynamic displacements in the vertical (Y) and transverse (Z)
directions at the pump piping connections. The centerline of the pump, at the intersection of the
horizontal suction and vertical discharge is node 15. The magnitude of the Z displacement is
647
Dynamic Analysis
measured at 12 mil. The magnitude of the Y displacement is measured at 3 mils. It is assumed
that the vibration is due to the rotation of the pump shaft, and so the Z and Y loads will be taken
to be 90 degrees out of phase.
Harmonic displacements modeling pump vibration on the inline pump DOH-V33203001:
Z magnitude of the load - zero deg. phase shift
0.012 Z 0 15
Y magnitude of the load - 90 deg. phase shift
0.003 Y 90 15
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab

The Spectrum Definitions tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Definitions tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Spectrum Definitions
One analysis may have multiple spectrum types and definitions. Predefined spectra are included
in the spectrum definition list. Any combination of these predefined spectra can be used as is,
deleted, or used with any other defined spectra.
You can include the basic spectrum data definitions in the comments for each ASCII spectrum
file. Select Cmt to create a comment line. For more information, see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
(on page 713) and Examples (on page 651).
Spectrum Data Files

Special force spectrum data files are created by the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on page 714).
The response spectrum table values are entered directly or saved as a file. Data stored in a file
can be used by any analysis.
When using a file created by DLF/Spectrum Generator
, you must specify the type of data
which contained in the file, because the file only contains a table of data points. This data is
always frequency versus force-multiplier with linear interpolation. A typical definition is in this
format:
648
Dynamic Analysis
Name
Range Type
Ordinate
Type
Range
Interpol
Ordinate
Interpol
#TESTFILE
FREQ
FORCE
LIN
LIN
The data in this file may also be read in directly using Enter/Edit Spectrum Data
. In
this case, omit the "#" from the spectrum declaration. For more information, see Enter/Edit
Spectrum Data (on page 713).
Time History Definitions
Time history profiles are defined in a way similar to the definition of response spectra. The
profile must be given a name, time versus force data definitions, and interpolation methods.
Response spectra data must also be defined directly or from a file. The profile data may be
entered with actual forces or normalized to 1.0, depending on how the force sets are defined.
One force-time profile should be defined for each independent point load on the piping system.
The load case consists of one or more force profiles. Multiple force profiles can create a
staggered loading on the system.
Topics
Name.......................................................................................... 649
Range Type ................................................................................ 650
Ordinate Type ............................................................................. 651
Range Interpol ............................................................................ 651
Ordinate Interpol ......................................................................... 651
Examples.................................................................................... 651
Name
Specifies the name of the spectrum. Names should reflect the spectrum and its intended use.
This name is used when defining the load cases. The name can be any 24-character identifier
and is associated with a particular spectrum or load profile.
Do not include spaces in the name.
The following predefined spectra are delivered with the software. No additional definitions are
required when using these spectra.
El Centro
The El Centro California N-S component, taken from Biggs, "Introduction to Structural
Dynamics," applies to systems with 5-10 percent critical damping.
649
Dynamic Analysis
REG. GUIDE 1.60
1.60H.5 and 1.60V.5
1.60H2 and 1.60V2
1.60H5 and 1.60V5
1.60H7 and 1.60V7
1.60H1.0 and 1.60V10
Each of these spectra defines the horizontal and vertical components for 0.5, 2, 5, 7, and 10
percent critically damped systems. Associated with each of these spectra is a value for ZPA.
(Zero Period Acceleration), the maximum ground acceleration at the site. This value defaults to
0.5 g and can be changed on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 676).
Uniform Building Code

UBCSOIL1
UBCSOIL2
UBCSOIL3
These spectra represent the normalized (horizontal) response spectra for three soil types
provided in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code, (1991 Edition).
The spectrum name (or load profile) can be preceded by a (#) sign. The (#) sign instructs
CAESAR II to read the spectrum table from a file having the same name as the spectrum
with no extension. Several jobs in the current folder can then access this shock data.
If data is to be entered manually, click Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

, then create new rows
and enter the appropriate Range Type and Ordinate Type values. For more information,
see Enter/Edit Spectrum Data (on page 713).
The complete definition of a shock includes its name, range type, ordinate type, range
interpolation method, ordinate interpolation method, and the shock data point table.
Everything but the shock data point table can be entered on the
Range Type
Specifies the type of values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY or PERIOD.
If the value is PERIOD, then the spectrum table data is in seconds. If the value is FREQUENCY,
then the data is in Hertz (cycles per second).
For Time History analysis only, select TIME. The spectrum table data is in milliseconds (ms).
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
650
Dynamic Analysis
Ordinate Type
Specifies the type of values on the ordinate (vertical) axis of the spectrum/DLF curve. Select
FREQUENCY , VELOCITY, ACCELERATION, G-ACCELERATION, or FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
If the value is FREQUENCY, then the spectrum table data is in Hertz (cycles per second).If the
value is VELOCITY, then the data is in length per second. If the value is ACCELERATION, then
the data is in length per second squared. If the value is G-ACCELERATION, then the data are
in g's.
For Time History analysis only, select FORCE-MULTIPLIER.
The values can be abbreviated by any part of the word, but only the first letter is required.
Range Interpol
Specifies how the values on the abscissa (horizontal) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 651) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Ordinate Interpol
Specifies how the values on the ordinate (vertical) axis are interpolated. Select LINEAR or
LOGARITHMIC.
See Examples (on page 651) for additional discussion.
The values can be abbreviated as LIN and LOG.
Examples
Example 1
The analysis requires that the El Centro shock be applied in the X and Z directions using a
factor of 1.0, and in the Y direction using a factor of 0.667.
No spectrum definition is required for this shock. El Centro is a predefined spectrum. All of its
shock data resides in the CAESAR II shock database.
Example 2
The analysis requires the use of the Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60 shock loads. At a maximum
acceleration value of 0.25 gs, analysis is to be performed using 1.0 times the horizontal and
vertical components of the shock as specified in Reg. Guide 1.60.
There is no spectrum definition required for either of these two shock loads. The Reg. Guide
1.60 shock spectra are predefined. You must only specify the maximum acceleration (ZPA) of
0.25 gs on the Control Parameters Tab (on page 676), and must use the Reg. Guide spectra
corresponding to the anticipated system damping. Lower damping values mean more
conservative results.
651
Dynamic Analysis
Example 3
The analysis requires a shock spectrum that is given by the client and developed for the site. A
plot of the spectrum appears as follows. The horizontal axis is period and the vertical axis is
acceleration. Because of the variation of the numbers along each axis, a logarithmic
interpolation for each axis is used. Because the shock name is not preceded by a (#) sign, the
spectrum is not predefined, and you must manually enter the points for this spectrum. The
spectrum definition input for pointing to this file is:
Name
Range Type
Ordinate Type
Range Interpol
Ordinate Interpol
BENCHNO4
PERIOD
ACCELERATION
LOG
LOG
Example 4
All analysis on a particular project requires the use of the spectrum table shown as follows. The
data points of the spectrum are entered into an ASCII file named BENCH1 in the current folder.
The file can be created using any standard editor. The spectrum definition input for pointing to
this file is:
Name
Range Type
Ordinate Type
Range Interpol
Ordinate Interpol
#BENCH1
PERIOD
ACCELERATION
LOG
LOG
Listing of ASCII file "BENCH1":

* SPECTRUM FOR NUCLEAR BENCHMARK NO.1. THIS SPECTRUM IS
* TO BE USED FOR ALL LINES ON PROJECT 1-130023-A03.
* FILENAME = "BENCH1"
* RANGE TYPE = PERIOD (SECONDS)
* ORDINATE TYPE = ACCELERATION (IN./SEC./SEC.)
* INTERPOLATION FOR BOTH AXES = LOGARITHMIC.
PERIOD(SEC)
ACCELERATION(IN/SEC/SEC)
0.1698E-02
0.1450E+03
0.2800E-01
0.3800E+03
0.5800E-01
0.7750E+03
0.7100E-01
0.7750E+03
0.9100E-01
0.4400E+03
0.1140E+00
0.1188E+04
0.1410E+00
0.1188E+04
0.1720E+00
0.7000E+03
0.2000E+00
0.8710E+03
0.8710E+03
0.2500E+00
0.3230E+00
0.4000E+03
652
Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab

The Spectrum Load Cases tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) are selected for Analysis Type in the
The Time History Load Cases tab is available when Time History is selected for Analysis
Type in the Dynamic Analysis window. A time history analysis has only one load case.
Load cases consist of simultaneously applied spectra. Each spectrum in the case is assigned a
direction and factor.
Additional Spectrum Options

The following options are only available for the Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads
(spectrum) and Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum) analysis types.
Editing Load Case - Specifies a load case to edit.
Stress Types - Specifies the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
Fatigue Cycles - Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT
is selected for Stress Types.
Directives - Displays the Directive Builder (on page 712) dialog box.
Add New Load Case - Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case - Deletes the current load case.
Load Cases for Force Spectrum

Spectrum load cases for force spectrum analyses are set up differently than spectrum load
cases for earthquake analyses. Force spectrum analyses must link a force multiplier spectrum to
a force set.
653
Dynamic Analysis
A load case definition consists of one or more lines, as shown below. The direction specified on
this line does not need to be the direction of the load (which is specified in the force set). This
direction is used for labeling and designation of independent versus dependent loadings.
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
Force Set #
TESTFILE
1.0
Complexity increases as the number of components in the load case goes beyond one,
and as the time history phenomena being modeled deviates from true impulse type loading. For
more information, see Examples (on page 663).
Load Cases for Earthquakes

For earthquakes, the direction defines the orientation of the uniform inertial loading.
Earthquakes typically have X, Y, and Z components. The factor is used to modify the magnitude
of the shock. For example, the seismic evaluation of a piping system includes two load cases:
1.0 times (100% of) the El Centro spectrum in the X direction and 0.67 times (67% of) the
El Centro spectrum in the Y direction
1.0 in Z and 0.67 in Y.
CAESAR II also supports options for independent support motion earthquakes, where parts of
the system are exposed to different shocks. For example, a piping system is supported from
both ground and building supports. Because the building filters the earthquake, supports
attached to the building are not exposed to the same shock as the supports attached to the
ground. Two different shock inputs are required: one for the ground supports and one for the
building supports. To specify an independent support motion shock, the node range that defines
a particular group of supports is required. The maximum displacement (seismic anchor
movements) of the support attachment point must also be specified.
The example below shows a typical uniform support earthquake specification and a typical
independent support motion earthquake:
* UNIFORM SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
ELCENTRO
1
X
ELCENTRO
1
Z
ELCENTRO
.667 Y
* INDEPENDENT SUPPORT MOTION EARTHQUAKE INPUT
HGROUND
1
X
1
100
1
0.25
HGROUND
1
Z
1
100
1
0.25
VGROUND
1
Y
1
100
1
0.167
HBUILDING
1
X
101
300
1
0.36
HBUILDING
1
Z
101
300
1
0.36
VBUILDING
1
Y
101
300
1
0.24
The uniform support motion earthquake contains only components of the El Centro earthquake
acting uniformly through all of the supports. There is a 33% reduction in the earthquakes
magnitude in the Y direction.
The independent support motion earthquake above has two different support groups: 1-100 and
101-300. The 1-100 group is exposed to a ground spectrum. The 101-300 group is exposed to a
building spectrum. Different horizontal and vertical components are used for the ground and the
654
Dynamic Analysis
building spectra. The last values specified are the seismic support movements (that is the
Anchor Movement).
Stress Types can be assigned to the spectrum load cases. If FAT is selected, you must
also enter a value for Fatigue Cycles, the number of anticipated load cycles.
Load Case for Time History

Only a single load case is defined for time history analysis. The direction entry (Dir.) is used only
for labeling, not as an analytic input value.
Topics
Spectrum/Time History Profile ..................................................... 655
Factor ......................................................................................... 655
Dir. ............................................................................................. 655
Start Node .................................................................................. 656
Stop Node .................................................................................. 657
Increment ................................................................................... 657
Anchor Movement....................................................................... 657
Force Set # ................................................................................. 657
Force Sets Tab ........................................................................... 658
Examples.................................................................................... 663
Spectrum/Time History Profile

Specifies the name of a spectrum or time history pulse/shock definition applied to the load case,
as defined on the Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 648). More than one
definition can be listed, with one on each row. Each spectrum or time history pulse specified is
applied to the model in this load case.
Factor
Specifies a value for the spectrum shock table multiplier. This value is usually 1.0.
Dir.
Specifies the applied direction of the spectrum/DLF shock load. Select X, Y, or Z. You can also
enter direction cosines, such as (.707, 0, .707), or direction vectors, such as (1,0,1).
This value is used as follows, depending on the analysis type:
For earthquake analysis:
Direction specifies the loading direction.
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads. When modal

combinations precede spatial combinations, loads with the same direction are summed at
the modal level before any spatial combination.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1), where the first
profile in direction X is reported as X(1). 3X(1) indicates that the largest contributor to the
total response is from the third mode of vibration and due to the first spectrum/shock defined
as X.
655
Dynamic Analysis
For force spectrum analysis, the force vector (direction) is already established:
Direction indicates the dependence or independence of the loads as discussed above.
Direction acts as an output label for the maximum contributor, as discussed above for
earthquake analysis.
For time history analysis, time history combinations are algebraic (in-phase):
Direction acts only as an output label for the maximum contributor, such as 3X(1).
To define an earthquake type of loading, CAESAR II must know what how the earthquake shock
acts from the shock spectrum table. CAESAR II must also know the direction of the shock. A
shock load case is typically comprised of three shock components in the X, Y, and Z directions.
The combination of each of these components shock loads defines the earthquakes dynamic
loading of the piping system.
Skewed directions can be entered by giving a direction cosine or direction vector. Skewed shock
contributions are entered when the piping or structural system appears particularly sensitive to a
shock along a skewed line. This most often occurs when a majority of the piping system does
not lay along the X and Z axes.
Any number of shock components can act in the same direction. For example, there can be two
X direction components. This usually occurs with independent support shock contributions
where one X direction component applies to one support group and another X direction
component applies to a different support group. There can also be two shock components in the
same direction without having independent support contributions, by defining two shock
contributions in the same direction without start, stop, or increment node entries.
In the simplest form of force spectrum loading, there is only a single shock component in the
load case. For that situation, there is only a single line of input on the Load Cases tab. When
there are multiple lines of input on the load case screen, such as in analyzing a traveling
pressure wave that impacts different elbow-elbow pairs, there can be many components to the
shock load case. The combination of responses from each of these shock loading components
can be established in one of two ways. If the value of Direction is the same for each load
component, then the directional combination method is used to combine the responses from
each load component. If the value of Direction is different for each load component, then the
spatial combination method is used to combine the responses from each load component.
Directional combinations are always made before modal combinations, while spatial
combinations can be made before or after modal combinations. The default is to perform the
modal combinations before spatial combinations. Either spatial or directional combinations can
be made using the ABS or SRSS method.
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system.
The component of an independent support shock applies only to a group of support points. For
example, different shock spectra are generated for rack level piping and for ground level piping.
The rack supports are subject to one shock excitation, influenced by the racks response to the
earthquake. The ground level supports are subject to a different shock excitation, not influenced
by the rack. One node range is used to define the rack support shock contributions and another
is used to define the ground support shock contributions.
656
Dynamic Analysis
This option is only available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node of a group of restraints at which the spectrum load is
applied for independent support motion analysis (ISM). The spectrum is applied to all restraint
nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in steps of Increment. The range of
nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If no value is entered, the load is
applied at the start node.
Increment
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node for in a group
of restraints that is loaded by this spectrum for Independent Support Motion analysis (ISM). The
spectrum is applied to all restraint nodes in the group between Start Node and Stop Node in
steps of Increment. The range of nodes must include at least one node in the piping system. If
no value is entered, the load is applied at the start node.
Anchor Movement
Specifies the absolute displacement of the restraints included in this spectrum shock case for
independent support motion analysis (ISM). This displacement is applied to all restrained nodes
in the node group, and is used to calculate the pseudostatic load components representing the
relative displacement of the individual restraint sets. If no value is entered, and if the defined
shock for this row does not encompass the entire system, this value is calculated by the
software. The value is taken from the lowest frequency entry of the response spectrum: the
specified displacement, velocity/frequency (for velocity spectra), or acceleration/frequency2 (for
acceleration spectra). Frequency is angular frequency.
Force Set #
Specifies the force set number corresponding to a set entered in the Force Sets tab if the
spectrum/load profile name describes a force-type spectrum (instead of displacement, velocity,
or acceleration). For more information, see Force Sets Tab (on page 658). If no value is entered,
Factor and Dir. must also have no values.
This option is not available when Earthquake (spectrum) is selected for Analysis Type.
657
Dynamic Analysis
Force Sets Tab

The Force Sets tab is available when Relief Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow
(spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis
window.
Spectrum or time history analysis can have multiple force sets.
Force spectrum analyses, such as a relief valve loading, differ from earthquake analyses
because there is no implicit definition of the load distribution. For example, the loading for
earthquakes is uniform over the entire structure and proportional to the pipe mass. For relief
valves and other point loadings, the load is not uniformly distributed and is not proportional to
the mass. A water hammer load is proportional to the speed of sound and the initial velocity of
the fluid. Its point of application is at subsequent elbow-elbow pairs. Force spectrum analyses
require more information than the more common earthquake simulations: the load magnitude,
direction, and location. Forces that occur together are grouped into like-numbered force sets
and are manipulated in the analysis together. For example, the following shows two different
loading levels of the same type of load:
Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
-3400
35
-1250
35
For a skewed load, force components belong to the same force set, because the components
always occur together:
Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
-2134
104
-2134
104
Force Spectrum Workflow

The general procedure for applying a force spectrum load is as follows:
1. Determine the pulse time history acting at a single node or over a group of nodes. The pulse
waveform must be the same for all nodes in a group, but the maximum pulse amplitude may
vary.
2. To convert a time history to a response spectrum, use the DLF/Spectrum Generator (on
page 714) to build a DLF versus frequency file for the time-pulse waveform. This is a
658
Dynamic Analysis
standard shock table file. This step is not needed for a time history analysis. The data is
automatically added to the dynamic input and can be saved to a separate file.
3. On the Spectrum Definitions tab or Time History Definitions tab, define the DLF versus
frequency file just created as a force spectrum data file with linear interpolation along the
frequency axis and linear interpolation along the ordinate axis. Begin the shock name with a
#. The software then reads the shock table from the data file.
4. Determine the maximum force magnitude that acts on each node subject to the pulse load.
5. On the Force Sets tab, specify the maximum amplitude of the dynamic load, the direction,
and the nodes.
If the force-time profiles are normalized to 1.0, the maximum magnitudes of the loads
are entered here. If the profiles are entered using their actual values, the force set values
are entered as 1.0.
6. On the Spectrum Load Cases tab or Time History Load Cases tab, enter the force
spectrum name (defined in the Spectrum Definitions tab), the table multiplication factor
(usually 1.0), a direction, and the Force Set # (defined on the Force Sets tab). This step
defines the link between the force spectrum and the force loading pattern.
7. Set up any other parameters needed to run the spectrum analysis. Perform error checking,
and after there are no fatal errors, run the analysis.
You can include any number of user comment lines by clicking Cmt. There can be any
number of line entries in the Force spectrum data.
If there are multiple force spectrum components in a single dynamic load case, carefully
select the combination method. The same rules that cover earthquake shocks and
components apply to force spectrum shocks and components
Topics
Force ...........................................................................................659
Direction ......................................................................................660
Node ...........................................................................................660
Force Set #..................................................................................660
Examples ....................................................................................660
Force
Specifies the magnitude of the impulse force (dynamic load) at the node. The sign of this value
is according to the CAESAR II global coordinate system
The total applied force is the product of this value, the selected force value from the
spectrum or load profile, and the factor entered for the load case.
659
Dynamic Analysis
Direction
Specifies the direction of the impulse force (dynamic load). Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node at which the impulse force (dynamic load) is applied. The node must exist in
the model.
Force Set #
Specifies the numeric value associated with this row (force set). Force sets are used to
construct the dynamic load cases. Values are arbitrary, but usually start at 1 and increment by
one.
Each impulse can be assigned to a different force set, which provides the most capability when
constructing load cases. Multiple rows with the same value form a single force set.
Examples
Example 1
Nodes 5, 10, and 15 define a cantilever pipe leg that is part of an offshore production platform.
The dynamic load as a function of time is equal to a half sine wave. The waveform is the same
for all three nodes, but the maximum dynamic load on node 5 is 5030 lb., on node 10 is 10,370
lb., and on node 15 is 30,537 lb. Three force sets are built for this problem. One has the
dynamic loads acting in the X direction. The second has the dynamic loads acting in the Z
direction. The third has the dynamic loads acting simultaneously in the X an Z directions. The
force spectrum input data is:
X DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING
Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
5030
10370
10
30537
15
Z DIRECTION HALF SINE WAVE/CURRENT LOADING

Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
5030
10370
10
660
Dynamic Analysis
Z
30537
15
X AND Z DIRECTION WAVE/CURRENT LOADING

Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
5030
5030
10370
10
10370
10
30537
15
30537
15
Example 2
A relief valve at node 565 is being investigated for different reactor decompression conditions.
The maximum load for the first condition is 320 kips in the X direction. The maximum load for
the second decompression condition is 150 kips in the X direction. The third decompression
condition maximum load is 50 kips. Three different maximum force sets are defined:
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 1
Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
565
320000
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 2

Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
565
150000
REACTOR DECOMP CONDITION 3 (MOST FREQUENT)

Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
50000
565
661
Dynamic Analysis
Example 3
A startup shock wave passes through a single elbow system. Nodes in the piping model are 5,
10, and 15 as shown:
As the wave starts off between 5 and 10 there is an initial dynamic axial load on the anchor at 5.
When the shock wave hits the elbow at 10, the axial load in the 5-10 elements balance the initial
imbalance at node 5, and there become an axial imbalance in the 10-15 element. This shock
load is modeled as two completely separate impacts on the piping system. The first is the
dynamic anchor load at 5. If 5 is a flexible anchor then this load may cause dynamic
displacements of the piping system and 5 will just be subject to the dynamic time history pulse
due to the shock. Assume the anchor at 5 is a flexible vessel nozzle. The second shock load is
the unbalanced dynamic pressure load in the 10-15 element that exists until the shock reaches
the node 15. Friction losses in the line reduce the shock magnitude as it travels down the line. In
the time the wave leaves the anchor at 5 until it encounters the bend at 10 there is a 50% drop
in the pulse strength as shown:
662
Dynamic Analysis
This pressure drop was calculated using a transient fluid simulator. Between nodes 10 and 15
the pulse strength drops even further as shown:
The force spectrum loads are:

X DIRECTION LOAD ON FLEXIBLE ANCHOR AT 5
Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
-5600
Z DIRECTION LOAD ON ELBOW AT 10

Force
Direction
Node
Force Set #
2800
10
Examples
Example 1
Define a shock load case that excites the entire piping system with a vibration of one times the
El Centro earthquake in the X direction, one times the El Centro earthquake in the Z, and 0.667
times the El Centro earthquake in the Y direction.
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
0.667
663
Dynamic Analysis
Example 2
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with the horizontal and vertical
components of the Reg. Guide 1.60 shock spectra for a 2 percent critically damped system. The
maximum ground acceleration is 0.22 gs.
The maximum ground acceleration is set on the Control Parameters tab and has no effect on
the shock load case definitions.
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
1.60H2
1.60V2
1.60H2
Example 3
Define a shock load case that is comprised of custom shocks BENCH1 and BENCH2. BENCH1
acts in the X and Z directions, and BENCH2 acts in the Y direction. The scale factor for all
shocks is 1.0.
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
BENCH1
BENCH2
BENCH1
One of the shock load cases excites the piping system along a line that is 45 degrees off of the
global axes in the horizontal plane. It is suspected that this direction of excitation yields the
worst possible results. Apply the custom shock BENCH1 in the horizontal direction and
BENCH2 in the vertical direction.
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
BENCH1
(1,0,1)
BENCH1
(-1,0,1
)
BENCH2
Example 4
Define a shock load case that excites the piping system with a vibration of two times the El
Centro earthquake in the X, Y, and Z directions. There should be two shock load cases. The first
should use an independent summation and the second a simultaneous summation.
The load cases are defined as shown. Remember that independent summation means MODAL
then SPATIAL, and simultaneous means SPATIAL then MODAL.
664
Dynamic Analysis
There are several ways to accomplish the same objective using parameters on other
tabs, such as the Control Parameters tab. Only the method using the explicit definition of the
load case combination method is shown in this example.
LOAD CASE 1 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS
MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
LOAD CASE 2 SHOCK CONTRIBUTIONS

SPATIAL(SRSS), MODAL(GROUP), SPATIAL COMBINATIONS FIRST
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
ELCENTRO
Example 5
Define a shock case that has the custom spectrum 1DIR acting only in the Z direction. Set the
stress type for the case to be operating and use modal summations before spatial summations.
Modal or spatial summations are not shown below because modal summation is the CAESAR II
default and is controlled by Spatial or Modal Combination First (on page 699) on the Control
Parameters tab.
Stress Types: OPE
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
1DIR
Example 6
The support nodes 5, 25, 35, 45, and 56 are pipe shoes sitting on concrete foundations. The
support nodes 140, 145, 157, 160, and 180 are second level rack sup\-ports, that is, pipe shoes
sitting on structural steel beams in the second level of the rack. The ground level shock
spectrum name is GROUND04, and the second level rack spectrum name is RACKLEVEL2-04.
Set up the shock load case to define these independent support excitations and omit any
relative support movement.
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
665
Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
Start
Node
Stop
Node
Increment
Anchor
Movement
GROUND04
56
GROUND04
56
GROUND04
56
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
Start
Node
Stop
Node
Increment
Anchor
Movement
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
Next, set up a shock load case, and define all combinations options explicitly. Use the same
shock components as defined above, except assume that the pseudostatic component is added
using the SRSS combination method. Also change the modal summation method to SRSS. This
is the recommended method. When the modal summation method is SRSS it does not matter
whether modal or spatial combinations are performed first. The order is only a factor when
closely spaced modes are considered in the grouping, 10 percent, and DSRSS methods.
MODAL(SRSS),PSEUDOSTATIC(SRSS),SPATIAL(SRSS)
GROUND LEVEL EXCITATION
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
Start
Node
Stop
Node
Increment
GROUND04
56
GROUND04
56
GROUND04
56
Anchor
Movement
RACK LEVEL 2 EXCITATION
Spectrum
Factor
Dir.
Start
Node
Stop
Node
Increment
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
RACKLEVEL2-04
140
180
Anchor
Movement
666
Dynamic Analysis
Example 7
The last elbow in the relief valve piping is at node 295. The spectrum name: BLAST contains the
DLF response spectrum for relief valve firing. SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET #1
contains the load information and its point of application. Show the load case input that provides
the most conservative combination of modal results. Because there is only a single loading, no
consideration is given to spatial or directional combinations.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force Set #
ABSOLUTE MODAL SUMMATION, ONLY A SINGLE LOADING
COMPONENT AND SO NO CONSIDERATION GIVEN TO SPATIAL OR
DIRECTIONAL COMBINATIONS.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (ABS)
Click Directives to open the Directive Builder dialog box and select these values. For
more information, see Directive Builder (on page 712).
Use the same example above and combine the modes using the grouping method. This will
produce the most realistic solution.
BLAST, 1, X, 1
MODAL (GROUP)
Example 8 (Force Response Spectrum)

There are two elbow-to-elbow pairs that are of significance in this job. Water hammer loads act
on the elbow at 40 in the X direction and on the elbow at 135 in the Y-direction. In the
SPECTRUM/TIME HISTORY FORCE SET input, force set #1 is defined as the load at 40 and
force set #2 is defined as the load at 135. Add the response quantities from each load
component first, using an ABS summation, and then the resulting modal response quantities,
using the grouping summation method. Two identical methods for achieving the same results
are shown.
Shock Name, Factor, Direction, and Force set #
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS THE SAME, THAT IS "X", FOR BOTH,
LOAD CONTRIBUTIONS, THE DIRECTIONAL COMBINATION METHOD
WILL GOVERN HOW THE HAMMER 40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES
ARE COMBINED.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, X, 2
DIRECTIONAL (ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
or
BECAUSE THE "DIRECTION" INPUT IS DIFFERENT, THAT IS "X" AND "Y,"
THE SPATIAL COMBINATION METHOD WILL GOVERN HOW THE
HAMMER40 AND HAMMER135 RESPONSES ARE COMBINED. NOTE THAT
667
Dynamic Analysis
ON THE DIRECTIVE LINE THE "SPATIAL" DIRECTIVE COMES BEFORE
THE "MODAL" DIRECTIVE.
HAMMER40, 1, X, 1
HAMMER135, 1, Y, 2
SPATIAL(ABS), MODAL(GROUP)
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab

The Static/Dynamic Combinations tab is available when Earthquake (spectrum), Relief
Loads (spectrum), Water Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for
Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Each analysis can have multiple load case combinations. Multiple static and dynamic cases can
exist:
Each static or dynamic case must be on a separate line.
The order of the load cases is not important, and has no effect on the results.
Comment lines may be included.
Static cases alone can be combined without dynamic cases.
Dynamic cases alone can be combined without static cases.
Most piping codes combine occasional dynamic stresses with sustained static stresses. This
combination is compared to the occasional allowable stress.
Each combination references static load case and dynamic load case numbers to be combined.
Any number of static or dynamic loads can be combined in a single combination load case.
Each combination is on a separate row.
Additional Options
The following options are also available:
Editing Load Case - Select a load case to edit.
Stress Types - Select the stress type for the load case:
OPE - Stress from operating loads.
OCC - Stress from occasional short-term loads.
SUS - Stress from primary sustained loads.
EXP - Stress from secondary thermal expansion loads.
FAT - Stress from fatigue loads.
This option is not available for time history analysis.

Fatigue Cycles - Specifies the number of fatigue cycles. This option is only available when FAT
is selected for Stress Types and is s not available for time history analysis.
Directives - Opens the Directive Builder (on page 712) dialog box, where you can control the
combination method parameters, using methods such as ABS and SRSS (square root of the
sum of the squares).
668
Dynamic Analysis
Add New Load Case - Adds a new load case.
Delete Current Load Case - Deletes the current load case.
Topics
Load Case .................................................................................. 669
Factor ......................................................................................... 669
Examples.................................................................................... 669
Load Case
Specifies the static or dynamic load case to be included in the combination case. Select a load
case from the list. Static load cases start with S, and dynamic load cases are start with D. Each
is then followed by a load case number of a static or shock analysis defined on the Load Cases
tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 653).
The following examples are valid values: S1, STATIC1, S3, STATIC3, D1, DYNAMICS1, S#1,
and D#1. Use any length up to 24 characters. For static load case definitions, the static case
must exist and have already been run (also, the S cant refer to a spring hanger design case).
For dynamic load case definitions, the dynamic load case number refers to the shock load case.
Factor
Specifies a multiplication factor to be applied to the results of the load case. The resulting
product is then used in the combination case. The default is 1.0.
Examples
Example 1
The static load cases are:
1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1 - L2 (EXP)
The dynamic load cases are:
1 = Operating Basis Earthquake
2 = 1/2 the Operating Basis Earthquake
Combine the operating basis earthquake stresses with the sustained static stresses:
Load Case
Factor
STATIC2
1.0
DYNAMIC1
1.0
or
669
Dynamic Analysis
Load Case
Factor
S2
D1
Example 2
1 = W + P1 (For hanger design)
2 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 (For hanger design)
3 = W + P1 + D1 + T1 + H (OPE)
4 = W + P1 + H (SUS)
5 = L3 - L4 (EXP)
There is one dynamic load case. Create an occasional case that is the sum of the sustained and
the dynamic stresses using the SRSS combination method and the ABS combination method.
Additionally, combine the expansion static case and the dynamic case using the SRSS
combination method. This is a total of three combination load cases. The first two static hanger
design load cases cannot be used in a combination case.
* COMBINATION CASE 1:
* SRSS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
Load Case
Factor
STATIC4
DYNAMIC1
* ABS COMBINATION OF SUSTAINED AND DYNAMIC CASES
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(ABS)
Load Case
Factor
STATIC4
DYNAMIC1
* SRSSCOMBINATION OF EXPANSION AND DYNAMIC CASES
670
Dynamic Analysis
STRESSTYPE(OCC), COMBINATION(SRSS)
Load Case
Factor
STATIC5
DYNAMIC1
Stress type and combination are defined on the Directive Builder dialog box. For more
information, see Directive Builder (on page 712).
Example 3
1 = W+T1+P+D1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P+H (SUS)
3 = U1 (OCC) Static seismic simulation
4 = L1-L2 (EXP)
5 = L2+L3 (OCC) (SCALAR)
Create an SRSS combination of the static seismic case and both the sustained and operating
static cases:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case
Factor
STATIC2
STATIC3
* COMBINATION CASES 2:
COMBINATION (SRSS), STRESSTYPE (OCC)
Load Case
Factor
STATIC1
STATIC3
Example 4
1 = W+P1(Hanger design restrained weight case)
2 = W+T1+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #1)
3 = W+T2+P1+D1 (Hanger design load case #2)
671
Dynamic Analysis
4 = WNC+P1(Hanger design actual cold loads)
5 = W+T1+H+P1+D1 (OPE)
6 = W+P1+H(SUS)
7 = L5-L6 (EXP)
Combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 1 results, 1/2 the shock case 2
results, and 1.333 times the shock case 3 results. The combination method is SRSS. For a
second combination case, combine the static sustained stresses with 1/2 the shock case 4
results, 1/2 the shock case 5 results, and 1.333 times the shock case 6 results.
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case
STATIC6
Factor
1
DYNAMIC1
1/2
DYNAMIC2
1/2
DYNAMIC3
1.333
or
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case
Factor
S6
D1
0.5
D2
0.5
D3
1.333
COMBINATION (SRSS)
Load Case
STATIC6
Factor
1
DYNAMIC4
0.5
DYNAMIC5
0.5
DYNAMIC6
1.333
672
Dynamic Analysis
Lumped Masses Tab

This tab displays for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Adds or deletes mass from the model.
You can add extra mass, which is not considered significant in the static model (such as a
flange pair) here. You can also add weights modeled as downward-acting concentrated forces
here, because CAESAR II does not assume that concentrated forces are system weights (that
is, forces due to gravity acting on a mass).
You can also delete masses from the static mass model to economize the analysis, which is the
same as deleting degrees-of-freedom. If the system response to some dynamic load is isolated
to specific sections of the piping system, you can remove other sections of the system from the
dynamic model by removing their mass. Also, you can delete mass selectively for any of the
three global coordinate directions when you want to delete directional degrees-of-freedom.
For example, if a piping system includes a structural frame where the piping rests on the
structure and is connected to the structure only in the Y direction, these two systems are
independent of each other in the X and Z directions. You can remove the X and Z mass of the
structure without affecting the analysis results. With the X and Z masses removed, calculations
proceed much faster.
Topics
Mass........................................................................................... 673
Direction ..................................................................................... 673
Start Node .................................................................................. 674
Stop Node .................................................................................. 674
Increments.................................................................................. 674
Mass
Specifies the magnitude of the concentrated mass (in current units) to be applied to the
specified node. A positive value is added to the calculated mass assigned to the node, a
negative value is subtracted from the calculated mass, and a zero value eliminates the mass.
Direction
Specifies the direction in which the mass acts. The values for translated mass are X, Y, Z, and
ALL (where ALL represents X, Y, and Z). The values for rotated mass are RX, RY, RZ, and
RALL (where RALL represents RX, RY, and RZ).
Rotational masses only apply when the consistent mass model is used. For more
information, see Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) (on page 707) on the Control
Parameters tab.
673
Dynamic Analysis
Start Node
Specifies the number of the starting node at which this mass is applied.
If entered without values for Stop Node and Increment, then the start node must exist in the
piping system. If entered with values for Stop Node and Increment, then the range of nodes
identified in the range must include at least one node in the piping system.
Stop Node
Specifies the number of the ending node in the model to which the mass is applied. Used as
part of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command with Start Node and Increment. This value
is optional.
Increments
Specifies the node number increment used to step from Start Node to Stop Node. Used as part
of a "range of nodes" lumped mass command. This value is optional and defaults to 1 if no value
is entered.
There can be any number of line entries on the Lumped Masses tab.
The zero mass capability is particularly useful when you are not interested in the modes for part
of the system. That part of the system is usually modeled only for its stiffness effect.
Example 1
450 is added to the assigned mass at node 40 in the X, Y, and Z directions.
450 ALL 40
Example 2
All nodes from 12 to 25 have all assigned mass removed in the X, Y, and Z directions. Some
nodes may not exist in this range but this is acceptable as long as at least one node in the range
exists in the system.
0.0 ALL 12 25 1
Example 3
375 is added in the X, Y, and Z directions for nodes 25, 30, 35, 40, 45, and 50, if they exist. All
assigned mass is removed for all nodes from 1 and 600 in the X and Y directions.
375 A 25 50 5
0.0 X 1 600 1
0.0 Y 1 600 1
674
Dynamic Analysis
Snubbers Tab
This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
Add snubbers to the model. Snubbers are supports that only resist dynamic loading while
allowing static displacement, such as displacement from thermal growth. Snubbers must have
their stiffness defined. Snubbers are not rigid by default because they are typically not as stiff as
other types of restraints.
Snubbers may also be added in Input > Piping as part of the static model. In either the
static or dynamic analysis, a snubber is idealized as a stiffness rather than damping at a point.
Topics
Stiffness ..................................................................................... 675
Direction ..................................................................................... 675
Node........................................................................................... 675
CNode ........................................................................................ 675
Stiffness
Specifies the stiffness of the snubber. The value must be positive. If the snubber is rigid enter a
value of 1.0E12.
Direction
Specifies the direction for the line of action of the snubber. Valid entries are X, Y, Z, direction
cosines, or direction vectors. The format for direction cosines is (cx,cy, cz), such as
(0.707,0.0,0.707). The format for direction vectors is (vx, vy, vz), such as (1,0,1).
Node
Specifies the node number where the snubber acts.
Connecting nodes for snubbers work in the same way as for restraints.
CNode
Specifies the second node number to which the other end of the snubber is connected. This
value is optional. If the snubber acts between the piping system and a fixed point in space, then
do not enter a value for CNode.
Connecting nodes for snubbers works in the same way as for restraints.
Example 1
Add a rigid snubber at node 150 in the Z direction.
1E12 Z 150
Example 2
Add rigid snubbers at nodes 160, 165, and 170 in the Z direction.
675
Dynamic Analysis
1E12 Z 160
1E12 Z 165
1E12 Z 170
Example 3
Add a rigid snubber between the structural steel node 1005 and the piping node 405 in the Z
direction.
1E12 Z 405 1005
Example 4
Add a 5,000 lb./in. snubber in the X and Y directions at the piping node 500. The X snubber
connects to the structural steel node 1050 and the Y snubber connects to the overhead line at
node 743.
* HORIZONTAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND STEEL
5000 X 500 1050.
* VERTICAL SNUBBER BETWEEN STEAM LINE AND OVER HEAD COOLING WATER
LINE
5000 Y 500 743
676
Dynamic Analysis
Control Parameters Tab

This tab is available for any selection of Analysis Type in the Dynamic Analysis window.
The type of analysis determines the parameters available on the Control Parameters tab. The
software displays the list of applicable parameters. The control parameters available for each
analysis are shown below:
Table Notes:
X
Required.
Required if system has nonlinear restraints or hanger design.
Used only where friction is defined.
Max. No. of Eigenvalues and Frequency Cutoff work as a pair in terminating the eigen extraction.
Used if modal combination method is GROUP.
Used if modal combination method is DSRSS.
677
Dynamic Analysis
6
Used if USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.60 or Uniform Building Code seismic spectra are specified in the shock
definition.
Used if independent support movement (USM) loads are present or if defined shock does not include all
supports in the system.
Used if pseudo-static components are included.
Used if missing mass components are included.
10
Used if more than one spectrum load is applied in the same direction.
For modal analysis, set the number of modes of vibration to extract by specifying a
maximum number, a cutoff frequency, or both.
Topics
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist) ...... 678
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status .......................... 689
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated ............................................ 690
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) ................................................................ 692
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) ........ 693
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) ..................................................... 694
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) ............................................. 694
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output Cases
................................................................................................... 695
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) ....... 699
Spatial or Modal Combination First.............................................. 699
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)................................... 700
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) .... 700
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)...... 703
Include Missing Mass Components ............................................. 704
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) ... 706
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ........................ 706
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) ............................. 706
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT) ....................................... 707
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues .................... 707
Analysis Type (Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/TimeHist)

Displays the dynamic analysis type selected for Analysis Type. For more information, see The
Dynamic Analysis Window (on page 636). Displays M (Modal), H (Harmonic), S1 (Earthquake
spectrum), S2 (Relief Loads spectrum), S3 (Water Hammer/Slug Flow spectrum), or T (Time
History).
Harmonic Analysis (on page 679)
Spectrum Analysis (on page 682)
Time History (on page 686)
678
Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic Analysis
The response of a system to a dynamically applied load is generally expressed through the
dynamic equation of motion:
Where:
M = system mass matrix
= acceleration vector, as a function of time
C = system damping matrix
= velocity vector, as a function of time
K = system stiffness matrix
x(t) = displacement vector, as a function of time
F(t) = applied load vector, as a function of time
The harmonic solver is most commonly used to analyze low frequency field vibrations due to
fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. This differential equation
cannot be solved explicitly, except in a few specific cases. Harmonic analysis looks at one of
these casesthe set of dynamic problems where the forces or displacements (such as
pulsation or vibration) acting on the piping system take sinusoidal forms. When damping is zero
under harmonic loading, the dynamic equation of the system can be reduced to
M (t) + K x(t) = F0 cos (w t + Q)
Where:
F0 = harmonic load vector
w = angular forcing frequency of harmonic load (radian/sec)
t = time
Q = phase angle (radians)
This differential equation is solved directly for the nodal displacements at any time. From there
the system reactions, forces and moments, and stresses are calculated.
The equation has a solution of the form
x (t) = A cos (w t + Q)
Where:
A = vector of maximum harmonic displacements of system
Because acceleration is the second derivative of displacement with respect to time,
(t) = -A w2 cos w t
Inserting these equations for displacement and acceleration back into the basic harmonic
equation of motion yields,
-M A 2 cos ( t + Q) + K A cos ( t + Q) = Fo cos ( t + Q)
Dividing both sides of this equation by cos ( t + Q),
679
Dynamic Analysis
-M A 2 + K A = Fo
Reordering this equation,
(K - M 2) A = Fo
This is exactly the same form of the equation as is solved for all linear (static) piping problems.
The solution time for each excitation frequency takes only as long as a single static solution,
and, when there is no phase relationship to the loading, the results directly give the maximum
dynamic responses. Due to the speed of the analysis, and because the solutions are so directly
applicable, you should make as much use of this capability as possible. Keep two
considerations in mind:
When damping is not zero, the harmonic equation can only be solved if the damping matrix
is defined as the sum of multiples of the mass and stiffness matrix (Rayleigh damping), that
is
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping Cc and the
constants a and b is
Where:
= Undamped natural frequency of mode (rad/sec)
For practical problems, a is extremely small, and can be ignored. The definition of b reduces
to
= 2 Cc/
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, but two problems
exist. First, for multi-degree-of-freedom systems, there is not really a single b, but there
must be only a single b in order to get a solution of the harmonic equation. The second
problem is that the modal frequencies are not known prior to generation of the damping
matrix. Therefore the w used in the calculation of b is the forcing frequency of the load,
instead of the natural frequency of a mode. When the forcing frequency of the load is in the
vicinity of a modal frequency, this gives a good estimation of the true damping.
If multiple harmonic loads occur simultaneously and are not in phase, system response is
the sum of the responses due to the individual loads
x(t) = S Ai cos ( t + Qi)
Where:
Ai = displacement vector of system under load i
Qi = phase angle of load i
In this case, an absolute maximum solution cannot be found. Solutions for each load, and
the sum of these, must be found at various times in the load cycle. These combinations are
then reviewed in order to determine which one causes the worst load case. Alternatively,
CAESAR II can select the frequency/phase pairs which maximize the system displacement.
Damped harmonics always cause a phased response.
680
Dynamic Analysis
The biggest use by far of the harmonic solver is in analyzing low frequency field vibrations
resulting from either fluid pulsation or out-of-round rotating equipment displacements. The
approach typically used is described briefly below:
1. A potential dynamic problem is first identified in the field. Large cyclic vibrations or high
stresses (fatigue failure) are present in an existing piping system, raising questions of
whether this represents a dangerous situation. As many symptoms of the problem (such as
quantifiable displacements or overstress points) are identified as possible for future use in
refining the dynamic model.
2. A model of the piping system is built using CAESAR II. This should be done as accurately
as possible, because system and load characteristics affect the magnitude of the developed
response. In the area where the vibration occurs, you should accurately represent valve
operators, flange pairs, orifice plates, and other in-line equipment. You may also want to add
additional nodes in the area of the vibration.
3. Assume the cause of the load, and estimate the frequency, magnitude, point, and direction
of the load. This is difficult because dynamic loads can come from many sources. Dynamic
loads may be due to factors such as internal pressure pulses, external vibration, flow
shedding at intersections, and two-phase flow. In almost all cases, there is some frequency
content of the excitation that corresponds to (and therefore excites) a system mechanical
natural frequency. If the load is caused by equipment, then the forcing frequency is probably
some multiple of the operating frequency. If the load is due to acoustic flow problems, then
the forcing frequency can be estimated through the use of Strouhals equations (from fluid
dynamics). Use the best assumptions available to estimate the magnitudes and points of
application of the dynamic load.
4. Model the loading using harmonic forces or displacements, normally depending upon
whether the cause is assumed to be pulsation or vibration. Perform several harmonic
analyses, sweeping the frequencies through a range centered about the target frequency to
account for uncertainty. Examine the results of each of the analyses for signs of large
displacements, indicating harmonic resonance. If the resonance is present, compare the
results of the analysis to the known symptoms from the field. If they are not similar, or if
there is no resonance, this indicates that the dynamic model is not a good one. It must then
be improved, either in terms of a more accurate system (static) model, a better estimate of
the load, or a finer sweep through the frequency range. After the model has been refined,
repeat this step until the mathematical model behaves just like the actual piping system in
the field.
5. At this point, the model is a good representation of the piping system, the loads and the
relationship of the load characteristics to the system characteristics.
6. Evaluate the results of this run in order to determine whether they indicate a problem.
Because harmonic stresses are cyclic, they should be evaluated against the endurance limit
of the piping material. Displacements should be reviewed against interference limits or
esthetic guidelines.
7. If the situation is deemed to be a problem, its cause must be identified. The cause is
normally the excitation of a single mode of vibration. For example, the Dynamic Load Factor
for a single damped mode of vibration, with a harmonic load applied is
Where:
681
Dynamic Analysis
DLF = dynamic loading factor
Cc = ratio of system damping to "critical damping,"
where "critical damping" =
f = forcing frequency of applied harmonic load
n = natural frequency of mode of vibration
A modal extraction of the system is done; one or more of these modes should have a
natural frequency close to the forcing frequency of the applied load. The problem mode can
be further identified as having a shape very similar to the shape of the total system vibration.
This mode shape has been dynamically magnified far beyond the other modes and
predominates in the final vibrated shape.
8. The problem mode must be eliminated. You typically want to add a restraint at a high point
and in the direction of the mode shape. If this cannot be done, the mode may also be altered
by changing the mass distribution of the system. If no modification of the system is possible,
it may be possible to alter the forcing frequency of the load. If the dynamic load was
assumed to be due to internal acoustics, you should reroute the pipe to change the internal
flow conditions. This may resolve or amplify the problem, but in either case avoids
CAESAR IIs "good model" of the system. After modifying the system, the harmonic problem
is re-run using the single forcing frequency determined as a "good model." The stresses and
displacements are then re-evaluated.
9. If the dynamic problem has been adequately solved, the system is now re-analyzed
statically to determine the effects of any modifications on the static loading cases.
Adding restraint normally increases expansion stresses, while adding mass
increases sustained stresses.
Process output from a harmonic analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review displacement, restraint, force, or stress data either
graphically or in report form.
Animate the displacement pattern for each of the frequency load cases.
The results of harmonic dynamic loads cannot be combined using the Static/Dynamic
Combination option.
Spectrum Analysis
Spectrum analysis attempts to estimate the maximum response developed in a system during a
transient load. The results are a statistical summation of the maxi\-mum displacements, forces,
reactions, and stresses. The individual responses do not represent an actual physical loading
case because the maxima may all occur at different times. Spectrum analyses are especially
useful when the loading profile is random, or not exactly known, such as with seismic loads.
CAESAR II provides the ability to perform two types of spectrum analyses which may be
combined: seismic and force spectra. Seismic loadings may be evaluated either uniformly over
the entire system, or applied through individual support groups with corresponding anchor
movements. Force spectra analyses may be used to analyze impulse loadings, such as those
due to relief valve, fluid hammer, or slug flow.
682
Dynamic Analysis
Seismic Spectrum Analysis
Seismic loads cannot be solved through time history analyses, because earthquakes cause
random motion which may be different for each earthquake, even those occurring at the same
site. To simplify the analytical definition of the earthquake, it is necessary to get the expected
random waveform of acceleration (or velocity or displacement) versus time into a simple
frequency-content plot. The most predominantly used frequency-content plot is the response
spectrum. A response spectrum for an earthquake load can be developed by placing a series of
single degree-of-freedom oscillators on a mechanical shake table and feeding a typical (for a
specific site) earthquake time history through it, measuring the maximum response
(displacement, velocity, or acceleration) of each oscillator.
The expectation is that even though all earthquakes are different, similar ones should produce
the same maximum responses, even though the time at which they occur differs with each
individual occurrence. Responses are based on the maximum ground displacement and
acceleration, the dynamic load factors determined by the ratios of the pre\-dominant harmonic
frequencies of the earthquake to the natural frequencies of the oscillators, and system damping.
Response spectra for a number of damping values can be generated by plotting the maximum
response for each oscillator. A plot of a set of typical response spectra is shown below:
Seismic response spectra resemble harmonic Dynamic Load Factor curves, because seismic
loads indicate strong harmonic tendencies. As the damping value increases, the system
response approaches ground motion. Seismic spectra also usually show strong evidence of
flexible, resonant, and rigid areas. Spectra may have multiple peaks due to filtering by the
building and/or piping system. Multiple peaks are usually enveloped in order to account for
uncertainties in the analysis. Seismic response spectra peaks are typically spread to account for
inaccuracies as well.
The idea behind the generation of the response spectra is that the modes of vibration of a
system respond to the load in the exact same manner as a single degree-of-freedom oscillator.
683
Dynamic Analysis
System response may be plotted in terms of displacement, velocity, or acceleration, because
these terms of the spectra are all related by the frequency:
d = v / = a / 2
Where:
d = displacement from response spectrum at frequency
v = velocity from response spectrum at frequency
= angular frequency at which response spectrum parameters are taken
a = acceleration from response spectrum at frequency
Response Spectrum analysis proceeds according to the following steps:
Modes of vibration are extracted from the system using an Eigensolver algorithm. Each mode
has a characteristic frequency and mode shape.
1. The maximum response of each mode under the applied load is determined from the
spectrum value corresponding to the natural frequency of the mode.
2. The total system response is determined by summing the individual modal responses, using
methods that reflect the time independence of the responses and the portion of system
mass allocated to each mode.
There are four major sources of earthquake spectra available in CAESAR II:
El Centro
This predefined data is taken from J. Biggs Introduction to Structural Dynamics and is based on
the north-south component of the May 18, 1940 El Centro California earthquake. The recorded
maximum acceleration was 0.33 g. The spectrum provided here is intended to apply to elastic
systems having 5 to 10 percent critical damping.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.60
The predefined spectrum names are:
1.60H.5 1.60V.5
- Horizontal/vertical, 0.5% damping
1.60H2 1.60V2
1.60H5 1.60V5
1.60H7 1.60V7
- Horizontal/vertical ,7.0% damping
1.60H10 1.60V10
These spectra are constructed according to the instructions given in Regulatory Guide 1.60 for
seismic design of nuclear plants. They must also be scaled up or down by the maximum ground
acceleration (ZPAzero period acceleration), specified in the CAESAR II control parameter
spreadsheet.
Uniform Building Code
The pre\-defined spectrum names are:
UBCSOIL1 Spectrum for rock and stiff soils
UBCSOIL2 Spectrum for deep cohesionless or stiff clay soils
UBCSOIL3 Spectrum for soft to medium clays and sands
684
Dynamic Analysis
These spectra represent the normalized response spectra shapes for three soil types provided
in Figure 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). When used, they must be scaled by
the ZPA, which is the product of Z and I, where Z is the seismic zone coefficient and I is the
earthquake importance factor, from UBC Tables 23-I and 23-L. The ZPA can be specific using
the CAESAR II control parameter spreadsheet.
User defined spectra
User defined spectra may be entered with period or frequency as the range, and displacement,
velocity, or acceleration as the ordinate. These spectra may be read in from a text file or entered
directly into a spectrum table during dynamic input processing.
Independent Support Motion Applications

Earthquake ground motions are caused by the passing of acoustic shock waves through the
soil. These waves are usually hundreds of feet long. If supports having foundations in the soil
are grouped together within a several hundred foot radius, they typically see exactly the same
excitation from the earthquake. If all of the supports for a particular piping system are attached
directly to ground type supports, each support is excited by an essentially identical time
waveform. This type of excitation is known as uniform support excitation. Often pipe is
supported from rack, building, or vessel structures as well as from ground type supports. These
intermediate structures sometimes filter or accentuate the effect of the earthquake. In this
situation, the supports attached to the intermediate structure are not exposed to the same
excitation as those that are attached directly to ground foundations. To accurately model these
systems, different shocks must be applied to different parts of the piping system. This type of
excitation is known as independent support motion (ISM) excitation. While the different support
groups are exposed to different shocks, there are also relative movements between support
groups that dont exist for uniform support excitation. The movement of one support group
relative to another is termed pseudostatic displacement, or seismic anchor movements. For
uniform support excitation, there are spatial and modal response components available for
combination. For independent support excitation, there are spatial and modal response
components available for each different support group, plus pseudostatic components of the
earthquake that must also be added into the dynamic response.
The major difference when running ISM type earthquake loads comes while building the shock
load cases. In the uniform excitation case, the shock acts implicitly over all of the supports in the
system. In the ISM case different shocks act on different groups of supports. The Spectrum
Load Cases tab appears, with the following parameters:
Spectrum (name)
Factor
Dir (direction)
Start Node
Stop Node
Increment
Anchor Movement
Name, Factor, and Dir are all that is required for uniform support excitations. For ISM type
shocks, the group of nodes over which the shock acts must be specified as well, using Start
Node, Stop Node, and Increment. Anchor Movement is used to explicitly define the seismic
displacement of the restraint set. This displacement is used to calculate the pseudostatic load
685
Dynamic Analysis
components. If omitted, the software defaults to the displacement derived from the response
spectrum entry corresponding to the lowest frequency.
Force Spectrum Analysis

A similar method can be followed for non-random loads, such as an impulse load for which the
force versus time profile is known. A look at the equation for the earthquake problem explains
why the force spectrum solution is very similar to the earthquake solution:
The term on the right hand side is a dynamic force acting on the piping system, such as F = Ma,
so the analogous equation to be solved for the force spectrum problem is:
Where:
F = the dynamic load (water hammer or relief valve)
Instead of the displacement, velocity, or acceleration spectrum used for the seismic problem, a
Dynamic Load Factor spectrum is used for a force spectrum problem. A DLF spectrum gives the
ratio of the maximum dynamic displacement divided by the maximum static displacement. The
earthquake response spectrum analysis method starts with the time history of an earthquake
excitation. The force spectrum analysis method is done in exactly the same way, except that the
analysis starts with the force versus time profile. Just as for the earthquake, this time history
loading is applied to a shake table of single degree-of-freedom bodies. A response spectrum
(DLF versus natural frequency) is generated by dividing the maximum oscillator displacements
by the static displacements expected under the same load. An alternate means of generating a
response spectrum for an impulse load is to numerically integrate the dynamic equation of
motion for oscillators of various frequencies under the applied load. Use Tools > DLF Spectrum
Generator.
Process output from a spectrum analysis in two ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and
shock load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the individual mode shapes extracted for the spectrum analysis.
Time History
Time history analysis is a more accurate, more computationally intensive analytical method than
response spectrum analysis. It is best suited to impulse loadings or other transient loadings
where the profile is known. This method of analysis involves the actual solution of the dynamic
equation of motion throughout the duration of the applied load and subsequent system vibration,
providing a true simulation of the system response.
As noted in Harmonic Analysis (on page 679), the dynamic equation of motion for a system is
This differential equation cannot be solved explicitly, but may be integrated using numeric
techniques by slicing the duration of the load into many small time steps. Assuming that the
686
Dynamic Analysis
change in acceleration between time slices is linear, the system accelerations, velocities,
displacements, and corresponding reactions, internal forces, and stresses are calculated at
successive time steps.
Because the total response of a system is equivalent to the sum of the responses of its
individual modes of vibration, the above equation can be simplified assuming that the damping
matrix C is orthogonal. Use the transformation x = FX, to be expressed in modal coordinates:
Where:
= acceleration vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
C = diagonal damping matrix, where entry Ci = wi ci
i = angular frequency of mode i
ci = ratio of damping to critical damping for mode i
(t) = velocity vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
x(t) = displacement vector (in modal coordinates), as a function of time
= diagonal stiffness matrix, where entry i = i2
This transformation represents N uncoupled second order differential equations, where N is the
number of modes of vibration extracted. N can then be integrated and summed, using the
in-phase, algebraic summation method to give the total system response. CAESAR II uses the
Wilson method (an extension of the Newmark method) to integrate the equations of motion,
providing an unconditionally stable algorithm regardless of time step size chosen.
Only one dynamic load can be defined for a time history analysis. This dynamic load case can
be used in as many static/dynamic combination load case as necessary. The single load case
may consist of multiple force profiles applied to the system simultaneously or sequentially. Each
force versus time profile is entered as a spectrum with an ordinate of Force (in current units) and
a range of Time (in milliseconds). The profiles are defined by entering the time and force
coordinates of the corner points defining the profile.
A time can only be entered once. A time with zero force outside of the defined profile
need not be entered explicitly.
For example, the profiles shown in the following figure are entered as:
Time (MS)
Force
Time (MS)
Force
0.0
20.0
1000.0
10.0
300.0
60.0
1000.0
20.0
1000.0
30.0
0.0
0.0
687
Dynamic Analysis
The load profiles are linked with force sets (indicating magnitude, direction, and location of the
applied load) in the shock case. The magnitude of the applied load is determined by the product
of the profile force, the force set magnitude, and the scale in the shock case.
You can enter only forces, not moments or restraint displacements, in the time history load
profile. Model moments using force couples, and simulate restraint displacements by entering
forces equal to the displacement multiplied by the restraint stiffness in the direction of the
displacement.
Process output from a Time History analysis in three ways:
Use the output processor to review the natural frequencies, mode shapes, participation
factors, included mass/force, displacements, and restraint loads, forces, or stresses in report
form. CAESAR IIs implementation of time history analysis provides two types of results.
One results case contains the maximum individual components (such as axial stress,
X-displacement, and MZ reaction) of the system response, along with the time at which it
occurred. Several results cases represent the actual system response at specific times.
Dynamic results also show the largest modal contributor, along with the mode and transient
load responsible for that contribution.
Animate the shock displacement for the transient load cases. During animation, the
displacements, forces, moments, stresses, and other data associated with individual
elements are displayed at every time step and for the dynamic load alone, or for any of the
static/dynamic combinations.
Animate the individual mode shapes included in the time history response.
688
Dynamic Analysis
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint Status

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the static load case as described below. Select a load case from the list.
CAESAR II cannot perform a dynamic analysis on nonlinear systems. For dynamic analyses, a
one-directional restraint must be modeled as either seated (active) or lifted off (inactive), and a
gap must be either open (inactive) or closed (active). This process is automated when the static
load case is selected. CAESAR II automatically sets the linear condition at the non-linear
restraints in the system to correspond to their status in the selected load case. Think of this as
being the loading condition of the system (such as operating load) at the time at which the
dynamic load occurs. This automated linearization does not always provide an appropriate
dynamic model, and you may need to select other static load cases or manually alter the
restraint condition in order to simulate the correct dynamic response.
A static load case must precede the dynamics job whenever:
There are spring hangers to be designed in the job. The static runs must be made in order to
determine the spring rate to be used in the dynamic model.
There are non-linear restraints in the system, such as one-directional restraints,

large-rotation rods, bi-linear restraints, or gaps. The static analysis must be made in order to
determine the active status of each of the restraints for linearization of the dynamic model.
There are frictional restraints in the job, such as any restraints with a nonzero (mu) value.
The most common static load cases during a typical CAESAR II analysis are:
Example 1: Analyses containing no hanger design

1 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
2 = W+P1+H (SUS)
3 = L1-L2 (EXP)
If the operating condition is likely to exist throughout the duration of the dynamic transient, use
parameter 1. If the installed condition is more likely to exist during the transient, use parameter
2. It is extremely unlikely that expansion case 3 is correct, because it does not represent the
system status at any given time, but represents the difference between the first two cases.
Example 2: Analyses containing hanger design

1 = W+P1(For hanger design)
2 = W+P1+D1+T1(For hanger design)
3 = W+P1+D1+T1+H (OPE)
4 = W+P1+H (SUS)
5 = L3-L4 (EXP)
The correct static load cases to use are those in which the selected spring hangers have been
included. If the operating condition is the correct load case, use parameter 3. For the installed
condition, use parameter 4.
689
Dynamic Analysis
Stiffness Factor for Friction

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, Range, and Time History)
Specifies the friction stiffness factor as described below. Enter a value greater than zero to
consider friction stiffness in the analysis. Enter 0.0 to ignore friction in the analysis.
Dynamic analyses in CAESAR II act only on linear systems, so any non-linearities must be
linearized prior to analysis. Modeling of friction in dynamic models presents a special case,
because friction actually impacts the dynamic response in two ways. Static friction (before
breakaway) affects the stiffness of the system by providing additional restraint. Kinetic friction
(after breakaway) affects the damping component of dynamic response. Due to mathematical
constraints, damping is ignored for all analyses except time history and harmonics, for which it is
only considered on a system-wide basis.
CAESAR II allows friction to be taken into account through the use of this friction stiffness factor.
The software approximates the restraining effect of friction on the pipe by including stiffnesses
transverse to the direction of the restraint at which friction was specified. The stiffness of these
"frictional" restraints is calculated as:
Kfriction = (F) () (Fact)
Where:
Kfriction = Stiffness of frictional restraint inserted by CAESAR II.
F = The load at the restraint taken from the selected static solution.
= Friction coefficient at restraint, as defined in the static model.
Fact = Friction stiffness factor entered here.
This factor should be adjusted as necessary in order to make the dynamic model simulate the
actual dynamic response of the system. The factor does not correspond to any actual dynamic
parameter, but is actually an adjustment factor to modify system stiffness. Entering a friction
factor greater than zero causes these friction stiffnesses to be inserted into the dynamic
analysis. Increasing this factor correspondingly increases the effect of the friction. Values such
as 1000 are typical. Entering a friction factor equal to zero ignores any frictional effect in the
dynamic analysis.
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies the number of modal responses to be included in the system results through a mode
number cutoff. Enter a value for Setting. Enter 0 to limit modes extracted to the value of
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 692). Enter higher values as described below.
The first stage of the spectrum and time history analyses (and the only step for modal analysis)
is the use of the Eigensolver algorithm to extract piping system natural frequencies and mode
shapes. For the spectrum and time history analyses, the response under loading is calculated
for each of the modes, with the system response being the sum of the individual modal
responses. The more modes that are extracted, the more the sum of those modal responses
resembles the actual system response. This algorithm uses an iterative method for finding
successive modes, so extraction of a large number of modes usually requires much more time
than does a static solution of the same piping system. The object is to extract sufficient modes
to get a suitable solution, without straining computational resources.
690
Dynamic Analysis
This parameter is used, in combination with Frequency Cutoff (HZ), to limit the maximum
number of modes of vibration to be extracted during the dynamic analysis. If this parameter is
entered as 0, the number of modes extracted is limited only by the frequency cutoff and the
number of degrees-of-freedom in the system model.
Example
A system has the following natural frequencies:
Mode Number
Frequency (Hz)
0.6
3.0
6.1
10.7
20.3
29.0
35.4
40.7
55.6
The modes extracted for different values of Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated and
Frequency Cutoff are:
Max. No. of
Eigenvalues
Calculated
Frequency
Cutoff
Number of
Modes
extracted
33
50
33
60
If you are more interested in providing an accurate representation of the system displacements,
request the extraction of a few modes, allowing a rapid calculation time. However, if an accurate
estimate of the forces and stresses in the system is the objective, calculation time grows as it
becomes necessary to extract far more modes. This is particularly true when solving a fluid
hammer problem in the presence of axial restraints. Often modes with natural frequencies of up
to 300 Hz are large contributors to the solution.
To determine how many modes are sufficient, extract a certain number of modes and review the
results. Repeat the analysis by extracting five to ten additional modes and comparing the new
results to the old. If there are significant changes between the results, repeat the analysis again,
691
Dynamic Analysis
adding five to ten more modes. This iterative process continues until the results taper off,
becoming asymptotic.
This procedure has two drawbacks. First is the time involved in making the multiple analyses
and the time involved in extracting the potentially large number of modes. The second
drawback, occurring with spectrum analysis, is less obvious. A degree of conservatism is
introduced when combining the contributions of the higher order modes. Possible spectral mode
summation methods include methods that combine modal results as same-sign (positive)
values: SRSS, ABSOLUTE, and GROUP. Theory states that the rigid modes act in phase with
each other, and should be combined algebraically, permitting the response of some rigid modes
to cancel the effect of other rigid modes. This is what occurs in a time history analysis. Because
of this conservatism, it is possible to get results which exceed twice the applied load, despite the
fact that the Dynamic Load Factor (DLF) of an impulse load cannot be greater than 2.0.
Frequency Cutoff (HZ)

(Available for: Modal, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a frequency cutoff point in Hertz as described below.
When extracting modes to be used in dynamic analysis, you can specify a value for either Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 690) or a frequency cutoff. Modal extraction ceases
when the Eigensolver extracts either the number of modes requested, or extracts a mode with a
frequency above the cutoff, whichever comes first.
You can select a frequency cutoff point for modes up to, but not far beyond, a recognized "rigid"
frequency, and then include the missing mass correction For more information, see Include
Missing Mass Components (on page 704). Choosing a cutoff frequency to the left of the
resonant peak of the response spectrum provides a non-conservative result, because resonant
responses may be missed. During spectrum analysis, using a cutoff frequency to the right of the
peak, but still in the resonant range, yields either over- or under-conservative results, depending
upon the method used to extract the ZPA from the response spectrum. For time history analysis,
selecting a cutoff frequency to the right of the peak, but still in the resonant range, usually yields
non-conservative results. The missing mass force is applied with a dynamic load factor of 1.0.
Extracting a large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be
conservative in the case of spectrum analysis, because all spectral modal combination methods
(such as SRSS, GROUP, and ABS) give conservative results versus the algebraic combination
method used during time history analysis. This gives a more realistic representation of the net
response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum shown below, an appropriate
cutoff point for the modal extraction is about 33 Hz.
1. Non-conservative cutoff (Misses amplification of any modes in resonant range)
2. Conservative cutoff (Multiplies missing mass contribution by excessive DLF1.6)
3. Optimal cutoff (Includes all modes in resonant range, uses low DLF1.05for missing
mass contribution, minimizes combination of rigid modes)
692
Dynamic Analysis
4. Conservative Cutoff (Too many rigid modes combined using non-conservative summation
methods)
When the analysis type is SPECTRUM, MODES, or TIMEHIST, either this parameter or Max.
No. of Eigenvalues Calculated (on page 690) must have a value.
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms)

(Available for: Spectrum/GROUP and Time History)
Specifies a frequency or time-slice spacing as described below. The usage of this parameter
varies with the analysis type.
Spectrum Analysis
For a spectrum analysis with the GROUP Modal Combination Method (as defined by USNRC
Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the frequency spacing defining each modal group,
that is, the percentage of the base frequency between the lowest and highest frequency of the
group. Regulatory Guide 1.92 specifies the group spacing criteria as 10%, or 0.1. This is the
default value in CAESAR II. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 700).

For a time history analysis, this value is the length of the time slice, in milliseconds. The
software uses the value during its step-by-step integration of the equations of motion for each of
the extracted modes. CAESAR II uses the unconditionally stable Wilson q integration method
where any size time step provides a solution. A smaller step provides greater accuracy but more
strain on computational resources. The time step should be sufficiently small that it can
accurately map the force versus time load profile (that is, the time step should be smaller than
typical force ramp times). Additionally, the time step must be small enough that the contribution
of the higher order modes is not filtered from the response. For this reason, the time step should
be selected so that time step (in seconds) times maximum modal frequency (in Hz) is less than
0.1. For example, if Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 692) is 50 Hz, this value should be set to a
maximum of 2 milliseconds:
693
Dynamic Analysis
0.002 sec x 50 Hz = 0.1
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS and Time History)
Specifies the duration of the applied dynamic load, as described below.
Spectrum Analysis
For a time history analysis, this parameter specifies the total length of time over which the
dynamic response is simulated. The load duration divided by the time step size from Closely
Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693) gives the total number of
integration steps making up the solution. CAESAR II limits the number of time steps to 5000 or
as permitted by available memory and system size. The duration should be at least equal to the
maximum duration of the applied load plus the period of the first extracted mode. This allows
simulation of the system response throughout the imposition of the external load, plus one full
cycle of the resulting free vibration. After this point, the response dies out according to the
damping value used. For example, if the applied load is expected to last 150 milliseconds and
the lowest extracted frequency is 3 Hz, set the load duration to a minimum of 0.150 plus 1/3, or
0.483 seconds.

For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), this value specifies the duration of the earthquake. This
duration is used to calculate the modal correlation coefficients based on empirical data. For
more information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page
700).
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical)

(Available for: Spectrum/DSRSS, Harmonics, and Time History)
Specifies the ratio of critical damping as described below. Typical values for piping systems, as
recommended in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.61 and ASME Code Case N-411, range from 0.01
to 0.05, based upon pipe size, earthquake severity, and the natural frequencies of the system.
Damping is not generally considered in the mathematical solutions required for spectrum or
harmonic analysis. It is ignored or solved as specialized cases in most analyses, and must be
instead considered through adjustment of the applied loads (by generation of the response
spectrum) and/or system stiffness.
For a time history analysis, damping is used explicitly, because this method uses a numeric
solution to integrate the dynamic equations of motion.
For a spectrum analysis using the double sum (DSRSS) modal combination method (as defined
by USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92), the damping value is used in the calculation of the modal
correlation coefficients. CAESAR II does not permit the specification of damping values for
individual modes. For more information, see Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 700).
For a harmonic analysis, this ratio is converted to Rayleigh Damping, where the damping matrix
can be expressed as multiples of the mass and stiffness matrices:
[C] = a [M] + b [K]
694
Dynamic Analysis
On a modal basis, the relationship between the ratio of critical damping C c and the constants
and are given as:
Where:
= undamped natural frequency of mode (radians/sec)
For many practical problems, is extremely small, and so may be ignored, reducing the
relationships to:
=0
= 2 Cc /
CAESAR II uses this implementation of damping for its harmonic analysis, with the exception
that a single is calculated for the multi-degree-of-freedom system, and the used is that of the
load forcing frequency. When the forcing frequency is in the vicinity of a modal frequency, this
gives an accurate estimate of the true damping value.
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> # Time History Output

Cases
(Available for: Spectrum/1.60/UBC and Time History)
Specifies an acceleration factor or distinct times as described below. The usage of this
parameter varies with the analysis type.
695
Dynamic Analysis
Normalized Response Spectra
For specific pre-defined normalized response spectra, this value is the acceleration factor (in
g's) by which the spectrum is scaled. For example, when a spectrum analysis uses one of the
pre-defined spectra names beginning with "1.60" (such as 1.60H.5 or 1.60V7), CAESAR II
constructs an earthquake spectrum according to the instructions given in USNRC (formerly
USAEC) Regulatory Guide 1.60. This guide requires that the shape of the response spectrum
be chosen from the curves shown in the following figures, based upon the system damping
value. The last number in the default CAESAR II spectrum name indicates the percent critical
damping. For example, 1.60H.5 indicates 0.5% critical damping, while 1.60V7 indicates 7%. If
the analysis uses one of the pre-defined spectra names beginning with "UBC" (such as
UBCSOIL1), CAESAR II uses the normalized seismic response spectra for the corresponding
soil type from Table 23-3 of the Uniform Building Code (1991 Edition). Reg Guide 1.60 and the
UBC curves are normalized to represent a ground acceleration (ZPA or zero period
acceleration) of 1g. The true value is actually site dependent. Therefore, using the ZPA value
appropriately scales any Regulatory Guide 1.60 or the Uniform Building Code response spectra.
696
Dynamic Analysis
697
Dynamic Analysis

For a time history analysis, this value is the number of distinct times at which the results of the
load cases (the dynamic load as well as all static/dynamic combinations) are generated. In
addition, CAESAR II generates one set of results for each load case containing the maximum of
each output value (such as displacement, force, or stress) along with the time at which it
occurred. The times for which results are generated are determined by dividing as evenly as
possible the load duration by the number of output times. For example, if the load duration is
one second and five output cases are requested, results are available at 200, 400, 600, 800,
and 1000 milliseconds, in addition to the maximum case. The total number of results cases
generated for an analysis is the product of the number of load cases (one dynamic case plus the
number of static/dynamic combination cases) times the number of results cases per load (one
maxima case plus the requested number of output cases). The total number of results cases is
limited to 999:
698
Dynamic Analysis
(1 + # Static/Dynamic Combinations) x (1 + # Output Cases) 999
At least one output case, in addition to the automatically generated maxima case, must be
requested. More than one is not necessary, because the worst case results are reflected in the
maxima case and individual results at every time step are available through the ELEMENT
command when animating time history results.
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes)

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the handling of the previous eignesolution when repeating a dynamic analysis. Select
N (for no) to perform a new eigensolution. Select Y (for yes) to skip the eigensolution and reuse
the results of the earlier analysis, and only perform calculations for displacements, reactions,
forces, and stresses. This option is only valid after an initial eigensolution is performed and is
still available. The mass and stiffness parameters of the model must be unchanged or the
previous eigensolution is invalid.
Spatial or Modal Combination First

(Available for: Spectrum)
Specifies the method for combining load case results as described below. Select Spatial to first
combine spatial components of the load case. Select Modal to first combine modal components
of the load case.
In a spectrum analysis, each of the modal responses must be summed. In addition, if multiple
shocks have been applied to the structure in multiple directions, the results must be combined,
such as spatially combining the X-direction, Y-direction, and Z-direction results. A difference in
the final results (spatial first versus modal first) arises whenever different methods are used for
the spatial and modal combinations. The combination of spatial components first implies that the
shock loads are dependent, while the combination of modal components first implies that the
shock loads are independent.
Dependent and independent refer to the time relationship between the X, Y, and Z components
of the earthquake. With a dependent shock case, the X, Y, and Z components of the earthquake
have a direct relationship. A change in the shock along one direction produces a corresponding
change in the other directions. For example, an earthquake acts along a specific direction
having components in more than one axis, with a fault at a 30 angle between the X- and
Z-axes. The Z-direction load is scaled by a factor of tan 30, but the identical version of the
X-direction load is used. In this example, spatial combinations should be made first.
An independent shock has X, Y, and Z time histories producing related frequency spectra but
completely unrelated time histories. The Independent type of earthquake is far more common,
so in most cases the modal components should be combined first.
For example, IEEE 344-1975 (IEEE Recommended Practices for Seismic Qualification of Class
1E Equipment for Nuclear Power Generating Stations) states:
"Earthquakes produce random ground motions which are characterized by simultaneous but
statistically INDEPENDENT horizontal and vertical components."
699
Dynamic Analysis
This is usually less of an issue for force spectrum combinations. Normally there are no separate
spatial components to combine because X- Y- and Z-shocks are not acting simultaneously.
When there is more than one potential force load, the spatial combination method may be used
to indicate the independence of the loadings. For example, select Modal if two independent
relief valves may or may not fire simultaneously and the two shocks are defined as being in
different directions (such as X and Y). If the two valves are dependent and will definitely open
simultaneously, select Spatial. Otherwise, the direction defined for a force spectrum loading has
no particular meaning.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) describes the requirements for
combining spatial components when performing seismic response spectra analysis for
nuclear power plants.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this option has no
effect on time history results.
Spatial Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the spatial contributions of the shocks in a single spectrum
load case. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select
ABS for an absolute combination method.
This option is only used for spectrum runs with more than a single excitation direction. Because
directional forces are usually combined vectorially, SRSS is usually the best selection. ABS is
provided for additional conservatism.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this option has
no effect on time history results.
Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS)

Specifies the method for combining individual modes into the total system response.
GROUP - Grouping Method (on page 701)
10% - Ten Percent Method (on page 701)
DSRSS - Double Sum Method (on page 702)
SRSS - Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method (on page 702)
ABS - Absolute Method (on page 703)
The response spectrum yields the maximum response at any time during the course of the
applied load, and each of the modes of vibration usually have different frequencies .As a result,
the peak responses of all modes do not occur simultaneously and an appropriate means of
summing the modal responses must be considered.
Nuclear Regulatory Guide 1.92 (published in February, 1976) defines the requirements for
combining modal responses when performing seismic response spectra analysis for nuclear
power plants. The four options presented there are available, along with one other, for modal
combinations under non-nuclear seismic and force spectrum analyses.
700
Dynamic Analysis
Grouping Method
This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The grouping method attempts to
eliminate the drawbacks of the Absolute and SRSS methods. It assumes that modes are
completely correlated with any modes with similar closely spaced frequencies, and are
completely uncorrelated with those modes with widely different frequencies. The total system
response is calculated as
Where:
R = total system response of the element
N = number of significant modes considered in the modal response combination
Rk = the peak value of the response of the element due to the k th mode
P = number of groups of closely-spaced modes (where modes are considered to be
closely-spaced if their frequencies are within 10% of the base mode in the group), excluding
individual separated modes. No mode can be in more than one group.
i = number of first mode in group q
j = number of last mode in group q
Rlq = response of mode l in group q
Rmq = response of mode m in group q
The responses of any modes which have frequencies within 10% of each other are added
together absolutely, and the results of each of these groups are combined with the remaining
individual modal results using the SRSS method.
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed
by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693)
parameter.
Ten Percent Method

This method is defined in the USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. The ten percent method is similar
to the grouping method. It assumes that modes are completely correlated with any modes with
similar closely spaced frequencies, and are completely uncorrelated with those modes with
widely different frequencies. The grouping method assumes that modes are only correlated with
those that fall within the group (within a 10% band). This method assumes that modes are
correlated with those that fall within 10% of the subject model, effectively creating a 20% band
(10% up and approximately 10% down). The total system response is calculated as
Where:
Ri, Rj = the peak value of the response of the element due to the i th and jth mode,
respectively, where mode i and j are any frequencies within 10% of the each other,
701
Dynamic Analysis
The 10% value controlling the definition of closely spaced frequencies can be changed
by using the Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History Time Step (ms) (on page 693)
parameter.
Double Sum Method

This method is defined in USNRC Regulatory Guide 1.92. This combination method is the most
technically correct for earthquake loads, because it attempts to estimate the actual intermodal
correlation coefficient based upon empirical data. The total system response is calculated as:
Where:
Rs = the peak value of the response of the element due to mode s
eks = intermodal correlation coefficient = [ 1 + {( k' - s') /(k' k + s' s)}2 ]-1
k' = k [ 1 - k2 ]1/2
s' = s [ 1 - s2 ]1/2
k' = k + 2 / ( td k )
s' = s + 2 / ( td s )
k = frequency of mode k, rad/sec
s = frequency of mode s, rad/sec
k = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode k, dimensionless
s = ratio of damping to critical damping of mode s, dimensionless
td = duration of earthquake, sec
The load duration (td) and the damping ratio () can be specified by using the Load
Duration (DSRSS) (sec) (on page 694) and Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) (on page 694)
parameters.
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares Method

This method defines the total system response as the square root of the sum of the squares of
the individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method
with all correlation coefficients equal to 0.0, or the grouping method with none of the modes
being closely spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method is based upon the statistical assumption that all modal responses are completely
independent, with the maxima following a relatively uniform distribution throughout the duration
of the applied load. This is usually non-conservative, especially if there are any modes with very
702
Dynamic Analysis
close frequencies, because those modes will usually experience their maximum DLF at
approximately the same time during the load profile.
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), this modal
combination method has no effect on time history results.
Absolute Method
This method defines the total system response as the sum of the absolute values of the
individual modal responses. This is effectively the same as using the double sum method with
all correlation coefficients equal to 1.0, or the grouping method, with all modes being closely
spaced. The total system response is calculated as:
This method gives the most conservative result, because it assumes that the all maximum
modal responses occur at exactly the same time during the course of the applied load. This is
usually overly-conservative, because modes with different natural frequencies will probably
experience their maximum DLF at different times during the load profile.
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)

(Available for: Spectrum with ISM included)
Specifies the inclusion of independent support motion (anchor movement) components as part
of a shock load case and independent support spectral loadings, as described below. Select Y
(for yes) to include the components or N (for no) to ignore them.
The excitation of a group of supports produces both a dynamic response and a static response.
The static response is due to the movement of one group of supports or anchors relative to
another group of supports or anchors. These static components of the dynamic shock loads are
called pseudostatic components. USNRC recommendations (August 1985) suggest the
following procedure for pseudostatic components:
1. For each support group, calculate the maximum absolute response for each input direction.
2. Combine same direction responses using the absolute sum method.
3. Combine directional responses using the SRSS method.
4. Obtain the total response by combining the dynamic and pseudostatic responses, using the
SRSS method.
703
Dynamic Analysis
Include Missing Mass Components

(Available for: Spectrum and Time History)
Specifies the inclusion of a correction representing the contribution of higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, providing greater accuracy without
additional calculation time. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
During spectrum (either seismic or force spectrum) or time history analyses, the response of a
system under a dynamic load is determined by superposition of modal results. One of the
advantages of this type of modal analysis is that only a limited number of modes are excited and
need to be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes (possibly far into the rigid
range) before acceptable accuracy is attained.
This option automatically calculates the net (in-phase) contribution of all non-extracted modes
and combines it with the modal contributions, avoiding the long calculation time and excessively
conservative summation methods. For more information, see Inclusion of Missing Mass
Correction (on page 919).
Use Included Missing Mass Components on the Control Parameters tab as an alternative
method of ensuring that sufficient modes are considered in the dynamic model. This report is
compiled for all spectrum and time history shock cases, whether missing mass is to be included
or not. It displays the percentage of system mass along each of the three global axes and the
percentage of total force which has been captured by the extracted modes. For more
information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 704).
The percentage of system mass active along each of the three global axes (X-, Y-, and Z-) is
calculated by summing the modal mass (corresponding to the appropriate directional
degree-of-freedom) attributed to the extracted modes and dividing that sum by the sum of the
system mass acting in the same direction:
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massx
Summed over 1 = 2 to n, by 6 (Y-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active MassY
Summed over 1 = 3 to n, by 6(Z-direction degrees of freedom):
% Active Massz
Where:
Me = vector (by degree-of-freedom) of sum (over all extracted modes) of effective modal
masses
M = vector corresponding to main diagonal of system mass matrix
704
Dynamic Analysis
The maximum possible percentage of active mass that is theoretically possible is 100%, with
90-95% usually indicating that a sufficient number of modes have been extracted to provide a
good dynamic model.
The percentage of active force is calculated by the following factors:
Separately summing the components of the effective force acting along each of the three
directional degrees-of-freedom
Combining them algebraically
Doing the same for the applied load
Taking the ratio of the effective load divided by the applied load
Examples
Summed over i = 1 to n, by 6 (X - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fex = Fe[i]
Fx = F[i]
Summed over i = 2 to n, by 6 (Y - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fey = Fe[i]
Fy = F[i]
Summed over i = 3 to n, by 6 (Z - Direction degrees of freedom):
Fez = Fe[i]
Fz = F[i]
Where:
FeX,FeY,FeZ = effective force (allocated to extracted modes) acting along the global X-, Y-,
and Z-axes, respectively
Fr = vector of effective forces (allocated to extracted modes)
FX,FY,FZ = total system forces acting along the global X-, Y-, and Z-axes, respectively
F = vector of total system forces
The maximum possible percentage which is theoretically possible for this value is also 100%. In
practice it may be higher, indicating an uneven distribution of the load and mass in the system
model. There is nothing inherently wrong with an analysis where the included force exceeds
100%. If the missing mass correction is included, the modal loadings are adjusted to
automatically conform to the applied loading. The percentage of included force can often be
brought under 100% by extracting a few more modes. At other times, the situation can be
remedied by improving the dynamic model through a finer element mesh, or, more importantly,
equalizing the mass point spacing in the vicinity of the load.
705
Dynamic Analysis
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method

(SRSS/ABS)
Specifies the method for combining pseudostatic responses with dynamic (inertial) responses.
Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for
an absolute combination method.
This option is applicable only when there is at least one independent support motion excitation
component in a shock load case. Pseudostatic combinations are performed after all directional,
spatial, and modal combinations. Select SRSS for pseudostatic combinations, as recommended
by USNRC. ABS gives conservative results. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic
(Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N) (on page 703).
Missing Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining the missing mass/force correction components with the
modal (dynamic) results. Select SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination
method. Select ABS for an absolute combination method.
Research suggests that the modal and rigid portions of the response are statistically
independent, so SRSS is usually most accurate. ABS provides a more conservative result,
based upon the assumption that the modal maxima occur simultaneously with the maximum
ground acceleration. Missing mass components are combined following the modal combination.
For more information, see Include Missing Mass Components (on page 704).
Even though missing mass components may be included during time history analyses, all
time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase), so this parameter has no effect on
time history results.
Directional Combination Method (SRSS/ABS)

Specifies the method for combining shock components acting in the same direction. Select
SRSS for a square root of the sum of the squares combination method. Select ABS for an
absolute combination method.
This option is typically used with independent support motion load cases, where responses from
different support groups caused by excitation in the same direction are combined. It also
combines the rare case of multiple uniform shock spectra acting in the same direction. Select
ABS for directional combinations of pseudostatic responses, as recommended by USNRC.
Select SRSS for force spectrum loads when several loads are all defined with the same shock
direction. The loads are then modeled as independent loads. ABS always models as dependent
loads. For more information, see Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Components (Y/N)
(on page 703).
Because all time history combinations are done algebraically (in-phase) this parameter
has no effect on time history results.
706
Dynamic Analysis
Mass Model (LUMPED/CONSISTENT)

(Available for: Modal, Harmonic, Spectrum, and Time History)
Specifies a mass model type. Select CONSISTENT or LUMPED.
A lumped mass model makes very coarse simplifications that often result in correspondingly
coarse results. The benefit is that it does not require a lot of memory for data storage.
The consistent mass model is well documented. Most texts on the subject, such as Structural
Dynamics - Theory and Computation by Mario Paz, describe how to build the mass matrix. The
consistent mass matrix takes into consideration the effects of bending and other rotational
effects of the beam on its mass distribution, gives a more realistic result, but requires much
more data storage.
If mass is added at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that it is a concentrated

mass, and puts it on the on-diagonal term, effectively treating it as a lumped mass.
If mass is zeroed at a degree of freedom, CAESAR II assumes that you want to eliminate
consideration of that DOF and zero out all elements on that row/column.
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed Eigenvalues

(Available for: Spectrum, Modal, and Time History)
Specifies usage of the Sturm sequence calculation as described below. Select Y (for yes) or N
(for no). Y is the default value.
In most cases, the eigensolver detects modal frequencies from the lowest to the highest
frequency. When there is a strong directional dependency in the system, the modes may
converge in the wrong order. This could cause a problem if the eigensolver reaches the cutoff
number of modes, but has not found the modes with the lowest frequency.
This procedure determines the number of modes that should have been found between the
highest and lowest frequencies, and compares that against the actual number of modes
extracted. If those numbers are different, a warning appears. For example, if 22 natural
frequencies are extracted for a system, and if the highest natural frequency is 33.5 Hz, the
Sturm sequence checks that there are exactly 22 natural frequencies in the model between zero
and 33.5+p Hz, where p is a numerical tolerance found from:
The Sturm sequence check fails where there are two identical frequencies at the last frequency
extracted. For example, consider a system with the following natural frequencies:
0.6637
1.2355
1.5988
4.5667
4.5667
If you only ask for the first four natural frequencies, a Sturm sequence failure occurs because
there are five frequencies that exist in the range between 0.0 and 4.5667 + p (where p is
0.0041). To correct this problem, you can:
Increase the frequency cutoff by the number of frequencies not found. (This number is
reported by the Sturm sequence check.)
707
Dynamic Analysis
Increase the value of Frequency Cutoff (HZ) (on page 692) by some small amount, if the
frequency cutoff terminated the eigensolution. This usually allows the lost modes to fall into
the solution frequency range.
Fix the subspace size at 10 and rerun the job. Increasing the number of approximation
vectors improves the possibility that at least one of them contains some component of the
missing modes, allowing the vector to properly converge.
Advanced Tab
This tab is available when Modal, Earthquake (spectrum), Relief Loads (spectrum), Water
Hammer/Slug Flow (spectrum), and Time History are selected for Analysis Type in the
The values on this tab rarely need to be changed.
Topics
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues ............. 708
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance ............................................................. 709
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance .......................................... 709
Subspace Size (0-Not Used)....................................................... 709
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)................... 710
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed) ............................ 710
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization ....................... 711
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) ....................... 711
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) ............................................. 711
Frequency Array Spaces............................................................. 711
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in Eigenvalues

Specifies the approximate number of significant figures in the calculated eigenvalues (2, where
is the angular frequency in rad/sec). The default value is 6. For example, if a calculated
eigenvalue is 44032.32383 using the default value of 6, then the first digit to the right of the
decimal is usually the last accurately computed figure.
The eigenvectors, or mode shapes, are calculated to half as many significant figures as are the
eigenvalues. If the eigenvalues have six significant figures of accuracy, then the eigenvectors
have three.
This number should not be decreased. Increases to 8 or 10 are not unusual but result in slower
solutions with little change in response results.
708
Dynamic Analysis
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance

Specifies the Jacobi sweep tolerance in scientific notation. The default value is 1.0E-12.
Eigen analyses use an NxN subspace to calculate the natural frequencies and mode shapes for
a reduced problem. The first step is to perform a Jacobi denationalization of the subspace.
Iterations are performed until the off-diagonal terms of the matrix are approximately zero.
Off-diagonal terms are considered to be close enough to zero when their ratio to the on-diagonal
term in the row is smaller the Jacobi sweep tolerance.
Do not change the default value unless you understand the IEEE-488 double precision
word (of approximately 14 significant figures) on the IBM PC and the approximate size of the
on-diagonal coefficients in the stiffness matrix for the problem to be solved (which may be
estimated from simple beam expressions).
Decomposition Singularity Tolerance

Specifies the decomposition singularity tolerance for the eigensolver in scientific notation. The
default value is 1E10.
During the decomposition of what may be a shifted stiffness matrix, the eigensolver performs a
singularity check to make sure that the shift is not too close to an eigenvalue that is to be
calculated. If a singular condition is detected, a new shift, not quite as aggressive as the last
one, is calculated and a new decomposition is attempted. If the new composition fails, a fatal
error is reported. Increasing the singularity tolerance may eliminate this fatal error, but do not
enter a value greater than 1E13. Singularity problems may also exist when very light, small
diameter piping is attached to very heavy, large diameter piping, or when very short lengths of
pipe are adjacent to very long lengths of pipe.
Subspace Size (0-Not Used)

Specifies the subspace size as described below. The default value is 0 and usually does not
need to be changed. The software then selects an expected optimal subspace size.
The eigensolution reduces the NDOFxNDOF problem to an NxN problem during each subspace
iteration, where N is the subspace size.
For the default value of 0, CAESAR II uses the square root of the bandwidth as the subspace
size, with a minimum of 4, resulting in sizes of 4 to 8 for typical piping configurations. Increasing
the subspace size slows the eigensolution but increases the numerical stability. Values in the
range between 12 and 15 are appropriate when unusual geometries or dynamic properties are
encountered, or when a job is large (having 100 elements or more, and/or requires that 25 or
more frequencies be extracted).
709
Dynamic Analysis
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 - Not Used)

Specifies the shifting strategy for the eigen problem to be solved as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II selects an estimated optimal shifting strategy. Improving the
convergence characteristics increases the speed of the eigensolution. The convergence rate for
the lowest eigenpair in the subspace is inversely proportional to 1/2, where 1 is the lowest
eigenvalue in the current subspace and 2 is the next lowest eigenvalue in the current
subspace. A slow convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of one, and a fast
convergence rate is represented by an eigenvalue ratio of zero. The shift is employed to get the
convergence rate as close to zero as possible. The cost of each shift is one decomposition of
the system set of equations. The typical shift value is equal to the last computed eigenvalue plus
90 percent of the difference between this value and the lowest estimated nonconverged
eigenvalue in the subspace. As 1 shifts closer to zero, the ratio 1/2 becomes increasingly
smaller and the convergence rate increases. When eigenvalues are very closely spaced, shifting
can result in eigenvalues being lost (as checked by the Sturm sequence check).
A large value entered for this parameter effectively disables shifting so that no eigenvalues are
missed, but the solution takes longer to run. When the system to be analyzed is very large,
shifting the set of equations can be very time consuming. In these cases, set the value between
4 and 8.
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm computed)

Specifies the number of subspace iterations per shift as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates an estimated optimal number of iterations. This
parameter and % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page 711) control solution
shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt orthogonalizations. Trying to limit this number is
very dangerous for small subspace problems, but less dangerous when the subspace size is
large, at around 10-20 percent of the total number of eigenpairs required.
Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is by default performed once during each subspace iteration.
The orthogonalization assures that the eigenvector subspace does not converge to an already
found eigenpair. A large number of repeated eigenpairs calculations can appreciably slow down
the extraction of the highest eigenpairs. Proper setting of these two parameters limits the
orthogonalization in the eigensolution, such as to every second, third, or fourth iteration, and
increases the solution speed. The subspace may still converge to earlier eigenpairs during
subsequent non-orthogonalized subspace iteration passes.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 711) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.
710
Dynamic Analysis
% of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization

Specifies the decimal equivalent of the needed percentage, as described below.
For a value of 0, CAESAR II calculates a number of iterations per shift to be performed. A
maximum of N eigenpairs can conceivably converge per subspace pass, where N is the
subspace size (although this is highly unlikely). By default a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is
performed for each subspace pass. This parameter and No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) (on page 710) control solution shifting by limiting the number of Gram-Schmidt
orthogonalizations. For example, if 12 is the number of iterations, and this parameter is 50
percent (entered as 0.50), the Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed every six iterations.
Use caution when setting these parameters. Select Y as the value for Force
Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N) (on page 711) if the frequency of orthogonalization
is slowed.
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence (Y/N)

Specifies whether CAESAR II forces orthogonalization after eigenpair convergence. Select Y
(for yes) or N (for no).
Select Y for eigensolutions when % of Iterations Per Shift Before Orthogonalization (on page
711) is set to a non-zero value. When a subspace pass completes and sees at least one
eigenpair convergence, a Gram-Schmidt orthogonalization is performed even if the specified
percentage of iterations has not been completed.
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N)

Specifies use of the out-of-core eigensolver. Select Y (for yes) or N (for no).
This out-of-core eigensolver is used primarily as a benchmarking and debugging aid. Select Y to
automatically run the out-of-core eigensolver on any problem size. Using this solver can take
considerably more time than the in-core solver, but always produce exactly the same results.
A problem may be too big to fit into the in-core solver because the capacity is based
upon the amount of available extended memory. The out-of-core solver then runs automatically.
This parameter does not need to be changed to Y to have this automatic switch occur.
Frequency Array Spaces

Specifies the maximum number of eigenpairs that can be extracted for the problem. The default
value of 100 is arbitrary. Increase the value as needed.
711
Dynamic Analysis
Directive Builder
Click Directives on the Spectrum Load Cases or Static/Dynamic Combinations tabs to open
the Directive Builder dialog box and select parameters for the current load case. These
parameters are load-case-specific changes to the global parameters set for all dynamic analysis
load cases. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Load Cases Tab (on page 653)
and Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab (on page 668).
For most analyses, the global parameters apply and you do not need to specify the
parameters on this dialog box.
Directional Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 706).
Modal Combination Method - Select GROUP, 10%, DSRSS, SRSS, or ABS. For more
information, see Modal Combination Method (Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) (on page 700).
Spatial Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Spatial
Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 700).
Spatial or Modal Combination First - Select SPATIAL or MODAL. For more information, see
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies and Mode Shapes) (on page 699).
Pseudostatic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb. Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 706).
Missing Mass Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS. For more information, see Missing
Mass Combination Method (SRSS/ABS) (on page 706).
Static/Dynamic Combination Method - Select SRSS or ABS to define how the load case is
combined. The ABS method takes the absolute value of all displacement, force, and stress data
for each load case and adds them. The SRSS method sums the square of all displacement,
force, and stress data for each load case and then takes the square root of the result. This is the
only parameter available on the Static/Dynamic Combinations tab.
712
Dynamic Analysis
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data

Enter/Edit Spectrum Data and Tools > Spectrum Data Points allow you to view and edit
spectrum data for manually-entered or ASCII-file-based spectrum definitions.
The command is available when entering values on the Spectrum Definitions tab or the Time
History Definitions tab. For more information, see Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on
page 648).
Click the command, make a selection in the Select a Spectrum Name dialog box, and click OK.
The spectrum name dialog box appears. You can add, edit, or delete rows, or add ASCII data.
Enter a sufficient number of data points to fully describe the spectrum.
Add Row - Adds a new row after the selected row.

Delete Row - Deletes the selected row.
Read From File - Reads data from an ASCII text file.
Range
Specifies a spectrum range value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
713
Dynamic Analysis
Ordinate
Specifies a spectrum ordinate value. The range/ordinate pairs define the spectrum/DLF curve.
Valid formats are:
Exponents, such as 0.3003E+03, 0.3423E-03, or 0.3003E3.
Explicit multiplication or division, such as 4032.3/386, or 1.0323*12.
DLF/Spectrum Generator
DLF/Spectrum Generator and Tools > DLF Spectrum Generator converts spectrum time
waveform excitation data into a frequency domain dynamic load factor (DLF) curve. DLF data is
automatically referenced in the Spectrum Definitions tab. For more information, see
Spectrum/Time History Definitions Tab (on page 648).
The DLF curve can also be saved to a file and later referenced by CAESAR II as a FORCE
response spectrum curve.
Spectrum Name
Displays the name of the selected value of Spectrum Type. You can type a different name.
For UBC, ASCE7, IBC, and CFE Diseno por Sismo:
This is the group name for the pair of seismic shock spectra that is generated here. A suffix
of H and V is added to indicate the horizontal and vertical spectrum, respectively. After it has
been properly entered, these names are listed in the Spectrum Definitions tab and can be
used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
For B31.1 Relief & User Defined Time History Waveform:
This is the name given to the Force Response Spectrum created from the time history load
defined here. After it has been properly entered, this name is listed in the Spectrum
Definitions tab and can be used to build load cases on the Spectrum Load Cases tab.
714
Dynamic Analysis
Spectrum Type
Specifies the name of the spectrum. The data from this spectrum is used to generate the DLF
curve.
UBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the 1997 Uniform
Building Code.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on UBC Figure 16-3 shown below.
715
Dynamic Analysis
Ts=Cv/2.5Ca & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is to 50% of ICa across the entire period range.
716
Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the seismic importance factor, I, as defined in Table 16-K. The calculated spectrum
accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock spectrum. Values
range from 1.0 to 1.25 based on the function of the structure.
For this code, the vertical shock spectrum is also multiplied by the importance factor.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
Specifies the zero period acceleration, Ca, for the site as defined in Table 16-Q. The value is
based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and ranges from 0.06 to 0.66.
Seismic Coefficient Cv
Specifies the ground acceleration at higher periods (lower frequencies), Cv, for the site as
defined in Table 16-R. The value is based on soil profile type and seismic zone factor, and
ranges from 0.06 to 1.92.
ASCE7
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the ASCE 7 standard.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on ASCE 7. Figure 9.4.1.2.6 (ASCE 7-2010)
is shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5.
Above a period of four seconds, the horizontal spectrum acceleration changes.
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 9.5.2.7.1) across the entire period range.
Neither I nor R affects the vertical spectrum.
717
Dynamic Analysis
Importance Factor
Specifies the occupancy importance factor, based on the function of the structure. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are multiplied by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum.
ASCE 7 - The occupancy importance factor is I, as defined in Table 11.5. Values range from
1.0 to 1.5 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - The occupancy importance factor is IE, as defined in Section 1616.2 and shown in
Table 1604.5. Values range from 1.0 to 1.5.
Site Coefficient Fa
Specifies the acceleration-based site coefficient Fa. This value adjusts the mapped short period
acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped short period maximum
considered earthquake acceleration (Ss). Values range from 0.8 to 2.5.
ASCE 7 - Fa is listed in Table 11.4-1.
IBC - Fa is listed in Table 16.15.1.2(1).
Site Coefficient Fv
Specifies the velocity-based site coefficient Fv. This value adjusts the mapped one-second
period acceleration and is based on site class (soil profile) and the mapped one-second period
maximum considered earthquake acceleration (S1). Values range from 0.8 to 3.5.
ASCE 7 - Fv is listed in Table 11.4-2.
IBC - Fv is listed in Table 1615.1.2(2).
Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods (Ss)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at short
periods, Ss. This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a structure
having a period of 0.2 second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7 - Ss values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC - Ss values are mapped in Section 1615.1.
Mapped MCESRA at One Second (S1)

Specifies the mapped maximum considered earthquake spectral response acceleration at a
period of one second, S1.This is the mapped ground acceleration at the system location for a
structure having a period of one second and 5% critical damping.
ASCE 7 - S1 values are mapped in Chapter 22.
IBC - S1 values are mapped in Section 1615.1.
718
Dynamic Analysis
Response Modification R
Specifies the response modification coefficient, R. This coefficient reflects system ductility. The
calculated spectrum accelerations are divided by this value to generate the horizontal shock
spectrum. Values range from 3.0 to 8.0 for most plant structures. A value of 3.5 for piping is
common.
ASCE 7 - R is defined in Table 12.2-1 and applied according to paragraph 12.9.2.
IBC - R is defined in Table 1617.6 and used according to equation 16-53.
Long-Period Transition Period TL

Specifies the period of time for a longer-period structure when generating an ASCE 7
Spectrum Type in Dynamic Analysis. TL is determined from new maps, which are similar to
zone maps, for all 50 states. The ASCE standard provides these maps in Figures 22-12
through 22-16 (ASCE 7-2010). In addition, Section 11.4.5 of ASCE 7-2010, discussions the
constant-displacement branch of the code.
IBC
Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the International
Building Code, 2000.
The horizontal design response spectrum is based on IBC 2000, Fig. 1615.1.4 shown below.
Ts=SD1/SDS & T0=Ts/5
The vertical spectrum is set to 20% of SDS (from 1617.1.2) across the entire period range.
IBC generally uses the same spectrum data parameters as ASCE7 (on page 717).
719
Dynamic Analysis
CFE Diseno por Sismo

Select to create earthquake spectra (horizontal and vertical) according to the Mexico's
Earthquake Resistant Design code.
As with every other earthquake loading analysis, the object is to calculate the shear force at the
center of mass of each vessel element. After the shear force at each elevation is known, the
moments are accumulated to the base, leg or lug support.
You should begin the analysis by calculating the weights and centroidal distances of all of the
vessel elements. It is very important to model the structure in sections that are appropriate in
length. For cylinders, this value is about 10 or 12 feet (3 m). This ensures that the software has
enough information to calculate the natural period of vibration with sufficient accuracy.
Using the input data and calculated earthquake weights and natural frequency, CAESAR II
determines the values from table 3.1 of the Mexican Seismic Code.
The values are:
ao
Spectral coordinate used in computing a
Spectral coordinate used in computing a
Ta(s)
Period value used in computing a
Tb(s)
Period value used in computing a
Exponent used in computing a

For group A structures, the values of the spectral ordinates ao and c are multiplied by 1.5.
Seismic Zone
Specifies the seismic zone. Select A, B, C, or D. The zones are described in Manual de Diseno
por Sismo for Mexico. The map on page 1.3.29 shows the seismic zones.
Soil Type
Specifies the soil type.
I - Hard Soil - Ground deposits formed exclusively by layers with propagation velocity b 0 =
700 m/s or modulus of rigidity 85000.
II - Medium Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective
velocity of propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc > Bc Tc.
III - Soft Soil - Ground deposits with fundamental period of vibration and effective velocity of
propagation which meets the condition Bc Ts + Bs Tc < Bc Tc.
720
Dynamic Analysis
Structural Group
Specifies the structural group based on the degree of safety. Select A - High Safety, B Intermediate Safety, or C - Low Safety.
Towers and tanks are examples of group A structures requiring a high degree of safety in
their design
Increase Factor
Specifies a value for the increased factor of safety, as required by some facilities. The default
value is 1.0. This value directly multiplies the spectrum values. This value is traditionally 1.118
and should always be greater than or equal to 1.0.
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force Response Spectrum

Selecting to create a normalized force response spectrum for loads from a safety valve
discharge into an open system according to the nonmandatory rules of B31.1, Appendix II Rules for the Design of Safety Valve Installations.
The spectrum is based on B31.1 Appendix II, Fig. II-3-2.
Opening Time
Specifies the opening time of the relief value in milliseconds.
721
Dynamic Analysis
User Defined Time History Waveform

Select to create a normalized force response (Dynamic Load Factor or DLF) spectrum based on
manually entered load versus time history.
Maximum Table Frequency

Specifies the maximum frequency in the table to be used to generate the DLF curve. This value
is usually no more than 100 Hz and is commonly 40 to 60 Hz for relief valves. For other types of
impulse loadings, a larger maximum may be needed.
If piping frequencies greater than this value are found in the system and included in the
spectrum analysis, then the spectrum value at the maximum table frequency is used. You can
decide which frequencies are important and how high the frequency must go by looking at the
solution participation factors and the animated mode shapes. Only the lower frequencies
typically contribute to the system displacements, forces, and stresses.
Number of Points
Specifies the number of points to be generated for the spectrum table. Fifteen to twenty points
are usually sufficient. These points are distributed in a cubic relationship starting at zero hertz.
Enter Pulse Data

Specifies time and force pulse data for the waveform. Click Enter Pulse Data to enter the Time
and Force values as shown below. This command is available only for User Defined Time
History Waveform.
Figure 2: Input Table Dialog
Save/Continue - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file.
722
Dynamic Analysis
Time
Specifies time waveform values in milliseconds for the points to be modeled.
Force
Specifies forces corresponding to the points on the force/time curve.
The absolute magnitude of the force is not important, but the form of the time history
loading is important. The actual maximum value of the dynamic load is taken from the force
pattern defined on the Force Sets Tab (on page 658). There can be any number of line entries in
the excitation frequency data.
Generate Spectrum
Displays the Spectrum Table Values dialog box with the force spectrum values based on
entered spectrum data.
This command is available for all values of Spectrum Type except User Defined Time History
Waveform.
Save To File - Saves the force spectrum values to an ASCII file. For seismic spectra, two files
are saved: horizontal (with H appended to the file name) and vertical (with V appended to the file
name). Use this command if you want to reuse the spectrum values in other analyses. Click OK
if you only want to use the values in the current analysis.
OK - Loads the spectrum data into the current analysis.
Cancel - Closes the window without loading the spectrum data into the current analysis.
723
Dynamic Analysis
Relief Load Synthesis

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Dynamic forces associated with relieving devices can cause considerable
mechanical damage to equipment and supports. There are two types of destructive dynamic
forces associated with relief devices that must be evaluated:
Thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface.
Acoustic shock due to the sudden change in fluid momentum and the associated traveling
pressure waves.
The first step in performing a relief load analysis is to compute the magnitudes of the relieving
thrust forces. For open-type vent systems, use Relief Load Synthesis
. Results are
calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig.
This command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected
as Analysis Type.
The discussion here concerns only the thrust at the valve/atmosphere interface. Acoustic
traveling pressure waves can be addressed similar to water hammer. For more information, see
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow Spectra Analysis (on page 638).
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater Than 15 psig

Click Gas to enter gas properties. CAESAR II assumes that a successful vent stack/relief
system design maintains the following gas properties:
724
Dynamic Analysis
Line Temperature
Specifies the stagnation condition temperature of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas
temperature upstream of the relief valve.
Pressure (abs)
Specifies the stagnation pressure of the gas to be relieved. This is typically the gas pressure
upstream of the relief valve. This value is the absolute pressure.
Stagnation properties can vary considerably from line properties if the gas flow velocity in
the line is high.
ID of Relief Valve Orifice

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter for the smallest diameter in the relief valve throat.
This information is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
ID of Relief Valve Piping

Specifies the flow passage inside diameter of the relief valve piping.
ID of Vent Stack Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the vent stack piping. If CAESAR II is sizing the vent stack, or if
the vent stack piping is the same size as the relief valve piping, then do not enter a value.
Length of the Vent Stack

Specifies the length of the vent stack. Add double the lengths of fittings and elbows or calculate
the appropriate equivalent lengths for non-pipe fittings and add the lengths. Typical values for
these constants are shown below:
Ratio of Gas-Specific
Heats
(k) Gas Constant (R)
(ft. lbf./lbm./deg. R
Superheated Steam
1.300 Nitrogen
55.16
Saturated Steam
1.100 Carbon Dioxide
35.11
Nitrogen
1.399 Acetylene
59.35
Carbon Dioxide
1.288 Ammonia
90.73
Acetylene
1.232 n-Butane
26.59
Ammonia
1.304 Ethane
51.39
n-Butane
1.093 Ethylene
55.09
725
Dynamic Analysis
Ratio of Gas-Specific
Heats
(k) Gas Constant (R)
(ft. lbf./lbm./deg. R
Ethane
1.187 Methane
96.33
Ethylene
1.240 Propane
35.05
Methane
1.226
Propane
1.127
This value is a required.
Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k)

Specifies the ratio of gas specific heats, k. The value for air is 1.4.
Gas Constant (R)

Specifies the gas constant, R. The value for air is 53.0.
Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella Fitting (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the vent pipe has an umbrella fitting. Select Y (for yes) if the vent stack
slips inside of the piping system, or N (for no) if the vent stack is connected to the piping system.
Umbrella Fitting Example

The vent stack pipe is not hard-piped to the relief valve pipe. The relief valve pipe slips inside of
the vent pipe.
726
Dynamic Analysis
Non-Umbrella Fitting Example
The vent stack pipe is hard-piped to the relief valve pipe.
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack (Y/N)

Specifies whether or not the software sizes the vent stack. Select Y (for yes) for CAESAR II to
calculate the length and diameter of the vent stack. The software sizing algorithm searches
through a table of available inside pipe diameters starting at the smallest diameter until a vent
stack ID is found that satisfies the thermodynamic criteria. The calculated inside diameter is
automatically inserted into the input.
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids

Click Liquid to enter liquid properties. CAESAR II assumes that a liquid vent system has one of
the following configurations:
727
Dynamic Analysis
Relief Valve or Rupture Disk

Specifies whether a relief valve or rupture disk is used. Select RV for a relief valve. The software
sets the nozzle coefficient, k, to 0.80. Select RD for a rupture disk. The software sets the nozzle
coefficient, k, to 0.67. You can also enter the relieving device nozzle coefficient k if it is known.
Supply Press. (abs)

Specifies the stagnation, or zero velocity, pressure of the supply line.
ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk Opening

Specifies the inside diameter of the contracted opening in the relieving device. This information
is typically provided by the relief valve manufacturer.
For special purpose calculations, this ID may be equal to the ID of the relief exit piping.
ID Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the inside diameter of the piping connected to the downstream side of the relief valve.
ID Manifold Piping
Specifies the insider diameter of the manifold if the relief exit piping runs into a manifold. Do not
enter a value if there is not a manifold.
ID Supply Header
Specifies the inside diameter of the supply header.
Fluid Density (Specific Gravity)

Specifies the specific gravity of the fluid being relieved.
Length of Relief Exit Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the relief exit piping. Add twice the piping length for fittings and
elbows, or the calculated fitting equivalent length.
728
Dynamic Analysis
Length of Manifold Piping

Specifies the equivalent length of the manifold piping, if any. Add twice the piping length for
fitting and elbows. Enter 0 or do not enter a value if there is not a manifold system or if the
manifold is not filled by the relieving fluid.
Fluid Bulk Modulus

Specifies the bulk modulus of the fluid. If no value is entered, a default valve of 250,000 psi is
used. See Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 734) for typical values.
These are the values for an iso\-thermal compression as taken from Marks Standard Handbook
for Engineers, p. 3-35, 8th edition.
Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the supply header.
The error message "NUMERICAL ERROR OR NO FLOW CONDITION DETECTED,"

means that a physically impossible configuration was described.
Flashing of volatile relief liquids is not considered in this analysis. If the relieving liquid
flashes in the exhaust piping as its pressure drops to atmospheric, then use another method
to calculate the resulting gas properties and thrust loads.
729
Dynamic Analysis
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis
Figure 3: Relief Load Synthesis Output (Gas)
Topics
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas).......................................... 731
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface ..................................... 731
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit......................................................... 731
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening ................................. 732
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing................................... 732
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit .............. 732
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas Conditions/Subsonic
Velocity Gas Conditions .............................................................. 733
730
Dynamic Analysis
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas)

The calculated gas mass flow rate, based on choked conditions at the relief orifice. If greater
mass flow rates are expected, then investigate the error in either the approach used by
CAESAR II or in the expected mass flow rate.
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe Interface

The thrust load acting back on the relief valve piping if there is an umbrella fitting between the
vent stack and the relief valve piping.
If the vent stack is hard piped to the relief valve piping, then this intermediate thrust is balanced
by tensile loads in the pipe and can be ignored.
Thrust load acts directly on valve opening. Only the valve pipe/vent stack
interface thrust acts in this
configuration.
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit

The thrust load acting on the elbow just before the pipe opens into the atmosphere when there
is an elbow in the vent stack piping.
731
Dynamic Analysis
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic Vent Exit Limit

The thermodynamic entropy limit or subsonic vent exit limit. These values should always be
greater than one. If either value falls below 1.0, then the thermodynamic assumptions made
regarding the gas properties are incorrect and the calculated thrust values should be
disregarded.
732
Dynamic Analysis
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit Gas

Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas Conditions
The thermodynamic properties of the gas at three critical points in the relief system.
The entire formulation for the thrust gas properties is based on an ideal gas equation of state. If
the pressures and temperatures displayed above for the gas being vented are outside of the
range where the ideal gas laws apply, then some alternate source should be sought for the
calculation of the thrust loads of the system. In addition, all three of these points should be
sufficiently clear of the gas saturation line. When the exit gas conditions become saturated, the
magnitude of the thrust load can be reduced significantly. In this case, consult the manufacturer.
733
Dynamic Analysis
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis

Computed Mass Flow Rate
The calculated exhaust mass flow rate in U.S. gallons per minute. CAESAR II makes the
necessary pressure drop calculations between the stagnation pressure upstream of the relief
device and atmospheric conditions at the exit of the manifold.
Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the exit piping. If there is no manifold, then
this is the external thrust load acting on the piping system. If there is a manifold, then this thrust
is opposed by tension in the pipe wall at the junction of the exit piping and manifold. For more
information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold
Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 735).
Thrust at the End of the Manifold Piping

The calculated thrust load at the last cross section in the manifold piping. If there is no manifold
system, then this thrust is equal to the thrust at the end of the exit piping. See the figures that
follow for clarification. For more information, see the graphics in Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit
Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow Conditions (on page 735).
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Opening

The estimated magnitude of the negative pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief valve fist opens. This negative pressure wave moves back through the
relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the downstream piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated as (Po-Pa)*Ap, where Po is the
stagnation pressure at the source, Pa is atmospheric pressure, and Ap is the area of the header
piping.
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve Closing

The estimated magnitude of the positive pressure wave that is superimposed on the line
pressure when the relief device slams shut. This positive pressure wave moves back through
the relief system piping similar to the pressure wave in the supply side piping of a water hammer
type system. The magnitude of this wave is estimated from: r*c*dv where r is the fluid density, c
is the speed of sound in the fluid and dv is the change in the velocity of the fluid.
734
Dynamic Analysis
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow Conditions/Manifold

Pipe End Flow Conditions
The calculated fluid properties at the three critical cross-sections in the relief piping. If pressures
or velocities here do not seem reasonable, then some characteristic of the relief model is in
error.
If the L dimensions are significant (by several feet), then unbalanced thrust loads acting
between the elbow-elbow pairs are very similar to a water hammer load. Water hammer pulses
travel at the speed of sound in the fluid, while the fluid/atmosphere interface pulses travel at the
velocity of the flowing fluid. These unbalanced loads can cause significant piping displacements
in much shorter pipe runs. The magnitude of these loads is equivalent to the calculated thrust
and the duration may be found from the calculated fluid velocity and distance between each
elbow-elbow pair.
735
Dynamic Analysis
Analysis Results
Each type of dynamic analysis has its own procedure for producing results, but all start in the
same way:
1. Save and check the dynamic input.
2. Run the analysis.
3. The account number is requested (if accounting is active).
4. The ESL is accessed (limited run ESLs are decremented).
5. The element and system stiffness matrices are assembled.
6. Load vectors are created where appropriate.
7. The system mass matrix is generated.
From this point the processing progresses according to the type of analysis selected.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. For more
information, see Dynamic Output Processing (on page 740).
Topics
Modal ......................................................................................... 737
Harmonic .................................................................................... 738
Spectrum .................................................................................... 738
Time History ............................................................................... 739
736
Dynamic Analysis
Modal
After dynamic initialization and basic equation assembly are completed, CAESAR II opens the
Dynamic Eigensolver, which calculates natural frequencies and modes of vibration.
Each natural frequency appears as it is calculated, along with the lapsed time of the analysis.
The processor searches for the natural frequencies, starting with the lowest, and continues until
the frequency cutoff is exceeded or the mode count reaches its limit. Both the frequency cutoff
and mode cutoff are dynamic analysis control parameters. The amount of time to calculate or
find these frequencies is a function of the system size, the grouping of the frequencies and the
cutoff settings.
Eigensolution may be canceled at any time, with the analysis continuing using the mode shapes
calculated up to that point. After the last frequency is calculated, the software uses the Sturm
Sequence Check to confirm that no modes were skipped. If the check fails, you can return to the
dynamic input or continue with the spectral analysis. Sturm Sequence Check failures are usually
satisfied if the frequency cutoff is set to a value greater than the last frequency calculated.
After calculations are complete, control is passed to the Dynamic Output Processor. You can
review natural frequencies and mode shapes in text format. You can also display the node
shapes in and animated format.
737
Dynamic Analysis
Harmonic
For each forcing frequency listed in the dynamic input, CAESAR II performs a separate analysis.
These analyses are similar to static analyses and take the same amount of time to complete. At
the completion of each solution, the forcing frequency, its largest calculated deflection, and the
phase angle associated with it are listed. The root results for each frequency, and the system
deflections, are saved for further processing. Only twenty frequencies may be carried beyond
this point and into the output processor. When all frequencies are analyzed, the software
presents the frequencies. You can then select the frequencies and phase angles needed for
further analysis. This choice can be made after checking deflections at pertinent nodes for those
frequencies.
Selecting Phase Angles

Phased solutions are generated when damping is considered or when you enter phase angles in
the dynamic input.
For all phased harmonic analyses, you can select separate phase angle solutions, including the
cycle maxima and minima, for each excitation frequency. Each separate phase angle solution
represents a point in time during one complete cycle of the system response. For a solution
without phase angles, you know when the maximum stresses, forces, and displacements occur.
When phase angles are entered, you do not know when the maximum stresses, forces, and
displacements are going to occur during the cycle. For this reason, the displacements and
stresses are often checked for a number of points during the cycle for each excitation frequency.
You must select these points interactively when the harmonic solution ends.
There is a complete displacement, force, moment, and stress solution for each frequency/phase
selected for output. You have the option of letting the software select the frequency/phase pairs
offering the largest displacements on a system basis. The largest displacement solution usually
represents the largest stress solution, but this is not always guaranteed. The displaced shapes
for the remaining frequencies are processed like static cases, with local force, moment, and
stress calculations. Control then shifts to the Dynamic Output Processor, which provides an
animated display of the harmonic results.
All harmonic results are amplitudes. For example, if a harmonic stress is reported as 15,200 psi,
then the stress due to the dynamic load, which is superimposed onto any steady state
component of the stress, can be expected to vary between +15,200 psi and -15,200 psi. The
total stress range due to this particular dynamic loading is 30,400 psi.
Spectrum
The spectrum analysis procedure can be broken down into:
Calculating the systems natural frequencies, mode shapes, and mass participation factors
Pulling the corresponding response amplitudes from the spectrum table and calculating the
system response for each mode of vibration
Combining the modal responses and directional components of the shock.
The first part of the analysis proceeds exactly as in modal analysis.

After natural frequencies are calculated, system displacements, forces, moments, and stresses
are calculated and combined on the modal level. After all the results are collected, the Dynamic
738
Dynamic Analysis
Output Processor appears. You can review spectral results, natural frequencies, and animated
mode shapes.
Time History
Modal time history analysis follows steps similar to a spectrum analysis. The modes of vibration
of the system are calculated. The dynamic equation of motion is solved through numeric
integration techniques for each mode at a number of successive time steps. The modal results
are then summed, yielding system responses at each time step.
The Dynamic Output Processor displays one load case (and optionally, one load combination)
with the maximum loads developed throughout the load application. You can also request
snap-shot cases at different load levels.
739
SECTION 11
Dynamic Output Processing

In This Section
Dynamic Output Window............................................................. 740
Dynamic Output Animation Window ............................................ 755
Relief Load Synthesis Results..................................................... 758
Dynamic Output Window

Shows the load case analysis and results of a dynamic analysis operation. The Dynamic
Output window is accessed directly following completion of the dynamic analysis, or it can be
accessed anytime subsequently from the following commands in the Output menu:
Harmonic - Displays the results from a harmonic analysis.
Frequency/Modal - Displays results from a modal-only solution. This command is also

enabled if a spectrum solution was run.
Spectrum - Displays results from earthquake, water-hammer, and relief valve solutions.
Time History - Displays time history results.
740

Window Commands
Open - Opens a different job for output review. You are prompted for
the file; Modal/Spectrum results are stored in *._s files, while Time
History results are stored in *._t files.
Save - Writes the selected reports to file, in ASCII format.
Print - Prints the selected reports. To print a hard copy of the reports
click File > Print. To send reports to a file rather than the printer, click
File > Save, and then type in or select the name of the file. To change
the file name for a new report, select File > Save As.
View Animation - Allows you to view animated motion. Modem and
spectrum results allow animation of the mode shapes, while time
history analysis provides an animated simulation of the system
response to the force-time profile.
Input - Displays the Piping Input window.
View Load Cases - Provides a summary of each dynamic load case
including the spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and node
range.
Word - Sends reports to Microsoft Word.
View Reports - Displays the selected reports in the Dynamic Output
window.
Dynamic Output Window Display Lists

Load Cases Analyzed - Shows the load cases that were analyzed. For spectrum analysis, the
load cases listed constitute all of the spectrum load cases as well as all of the static/dynamic
combinations. For time history analysis, the listed loads are the results maxima case containing
each of the snap-shot cases for the single time history load case, and each of the static/dynamic
combinations.
Report Options - Shows the reports available for the analyzed load cases.
General Results - Lists reports that are not associated with load cases.
For a description of the options, see Report Types (on page 744).
You can select the reports and the load cases you want to view by Use CTRL+ or SHIFT+ and
select one or more load cases and reports. You can send the reports to a printer, print to a file,
save to a file or set to display.
The General Results Reports that display in the right-hand column do not require that a
Report Option be selected highlight to print.
741
Open a Job
Opens a different job for output review.
To review an output from a different job, click Open and browse for the output file.
Modal and Spectrum results are stored in *._s files. Time History results are stored in
*._t files.
Enter a Report Title

To include a report title at the top of each page of the report, click Enter Report Titles
.
There are two options for report titles, Edit 2-line Report Title and Edit Load Case Labels.
Click Edit 2-line Report Title and the following dialog box appears.
These two lines will be added to the top of each report page. Enter the report title, and click OK.
Now click Edit Load Case Labels and the following dialog box appears.
Here you can change the names of the load cases as they appear in the reports. Click OK to
close, and then click Done.
742
View Load Cases

To review the dynamic load cases including spectrum name, scale factor, direction cosines, and
node range, click View Load Cases
Here you can scroll through the various load cases. Click OK to close.
Send Reports to Microsoft Word

This feature is activated when producing a report and enables the use of all of MS Word
formatting, such as font selection and margin control, and printing features. You can append
multiple reports to form a final report.
All reports that are to be saved in the Word output file need not be declared at one time.
Subsequent reports sent to the file during the session are appended to the file started in the
session. (These output files are only closed when a new output device, file or printer is defined.)
After closing the report, a table of contents is added.
1. To send a report to Microsoft Word, select the reports and click View Reports using
Microsoft Word
Microsoft Word automatically opens, and the report is generated.

Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple report at once.
743
View Reports
Each report selected is presented, one at a time, for inspection. Scroll through the reports where
necessary. See Report Types (on page 744) for a list of available reports.
View Reports Commands

The following toolbar displays at the top of the report when you click View Reports.
< Previous - Takes you back to the previous report.
> Next - Takes you to the next report.
Find - Enables you to locate and highlight text in the report such as node numbers.
Print - Prints the selected report(s).
Report Types
Two types of reports are available from the Dynamic Output window: reports that are
associated with specific load cases (the Report Options shown in the center column), and
reports that are not associated with specific load cases (the General Results in the right
column).
For modal analysis, there are no load cases, so the center column is blank.
Reports associated with load cases are those associated with the spectral or time history
displacement solution. The report options are displacements, reactions, forces, moments, and
stresses.
Displacements
Provides the magnitude of the displacement for each load case. The summing methodology for
Spectral analysis results in all positive displacements. For time history analysis, the results
include the appllicable sign.
The displacement report gives the maximum displacement that is anticipated because the
application of the dynamic shock. For spectral analysis, note that all of the displacement values
are positive. The direction of the displacement is indeterminate. For example, there is a
tendency for the system to oscillate because of the potential energy stored after undergoing
some maximum dynamic movement. The displacements printed are relative to the movement of
the earth.
744

Restraints
Provides the magnitude of the reactions for each load case. A typical entry is shown below.
NODE
FX
716
649
2X(1)
The first line for each node contains the maximum load that occurred at some time during the
dynamic event. The second line for each node contains the maximum modal contribution to the
load. The third line for each node tells the mode and loading that was responsible for the
maximum. This form of the report permits easy identification of the culprit modes.
The mode identification line is broken down as follows:
2
(1)
mode
load direction
(load component)
For example, at node 5 the resultant dynamic load due to the shock was 716. The largest modal
component (of the 716) was 649, due to mode 2, and produced by the first X direction
component (either the first support motion set for displacement response spectrum analysis, or
the first force set for force response spectrum analysis). This form of dynamic output report
enables you to know if there is a problem. If there is a problem, it enables you to identify which
mode of vibration and load component is the major contributor to the problem.
745

If the component shows up as a (P), then it was the pseudo-static (seismic anchor movement)
contribution of the loading that resulted in the major component of the response. If the
component shows up as an (M), it indicates a missing mass contribution. A typical restraint
report is shown below.
Local Forces
Provides elemental forces and moments in the element local a-b-c coordinate system. The a-b-c
coordinate system is defined below.
For straight pipe not connected to an intersection:
a is along the element axis (for example, perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is a XY, unless a is vertical and then b is along the X axis
c is a Xb.
For bends and elbows, and for each segment end:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the bend
c is a Xb.
746

For intersections, and for each segment framing into the intersection:
a is along the element axis (perpendicular to the pipe cross-section)
b is to the plane of the intersection
c is a Xb.
The X indicates the vector cross product.
Force, moment, and stress reports are similar to restraint reports in that each has the maximum
response, followed by:
1. Modal maximum
2. Modal maximum load identifier.
All force/moment reports are set up to represent the forces and moments that act on the end of
the element to keep the element in equilibrium.
Global Forces
Contains information identical to information provided for Local Forces (on page 746), except
that it is oriented along the global X, Y, and Z axes. A typical report is shown below.
747

Stresses
Contains axial, bending, maximum octahedral, and code stresses, as well as in-plane and
out-of-plane stress intensification factors. These reports contain mode and modal maximum
data. A typical report is shown below.
748

Forces/Stresses
Summarizes the forces and code stresses for a particular load case. This report contains
maximum responses, the calculated stress, and the calculated stress allowable.
749

Cumulative Usage
Shows on an element-by-element basis the impact of each load case on the total fatigue
allowable and the cumulative impact of all simultaneously-selected load cases. This report is
available only for one or more fatigue stress types. Only one report is generated, regardless of
the number of selected fatigue load cases. If the total usage factor exceeds 1.0; it implies fatigue
failure under that loading condition.
750

Mass Participation Factors
Provides one number for each mode and load direction for a dynamic load case. This value
provides you with an understanding of the effect that the dynamic loading and the mass had on
the particular mode. The absolute magnitude has no significance; only the relationship between
values for a single load case is important.
751

Natural Frequencies
Calculated modal natural frequencies are reported in Hertz and radians per second. The period
is reported in seconds.
Modes Mass Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to the largest mass in the model.
Modes Unity Normalized

Scales the largest displacement in the mode shape to 1.0, with all other displacements and
rotations scaled accordingly. This mode report is the easiest way to get an understanding of the
mode shape.
The example below shows two mode shapes from a small job. In the first mode, the largest
single component is in the Y direction. In the second mode, the largest single component is in
the Z direction.
752

Unity normalized means that the largest displacement component in the mode is set to
1.0, and all other displacement values are scaled accordingly.
Included Mass Data

Displays the percent of the total system mass/force included in the extracted modes, and the
percent of system mass/force included in the missing mass correction (if any) for each of the
individual shocks of the dynamic load cases. The value gives an indication of the accuracy of
the total system response captured by the dynamic model, with 100% being the ideal.
% Mass Included - Shows the percentage of mass active in each of the X, Y, and Z directions.
% Force Active - Shows the value that is computed by taking the algebraic sum in each of the
global directions, and then applying the SRSS method to each of the three directions. The sums
of the three directions are added vectorally.
% Force Added - Shows the value obtained by subtracting % Force Active from 100.
753

Dynamic Input
Lists the input for the piping model or for the dynamic input.
Mass Model
Shows how CAESAR II lumped masses for the dynamic runs. The mass lumping report should
show a fairly uniform distribution of masses. Large or irregular variations in the values must be
investigated. Usually these large values can be reduced by breaking down exceedingly long,
straight runs of pipe.
The mass lumping report, shown below is very uniform in distribution, and should produce a
good dynamic solution. CAESAR II ignores rotational terms.
754

Active Boundary Conditions
Shows how CAESAR II deals with the nonlinear restraints in the job. It shows which directional
supports are included, which gaps are assumed closed, and how friction resistance is modeled.
Dynamic Output Animation Window

The Dynamic Output Animation window enables you to review analytic results in graphic
mode. This window has the same general capabilities as the Classic Piping Input dialog box. It
uses the 3D/HOOPS graphic standard toolbar, which provides zoom, orbit, pan, and several
other navigation options. From this window, you can also switch views and modes. Open the
animation windows by clicking Output > Animation and then selecting the appropriate
animation type.
Activate the Dynamic Output Animation window from the Dynamic Output window by
clicking View Animation .
The animation commands enable you to view animated motion of the system for static
displacements or various dynamic movements. The mode and spectrum results, for example,
allow animation of the mode shapes, while time history analysis provides an animated
simulation of the system response to the force-time profile.
A piping model is shown in its default state (volume mode, isometric view, orthographic
projection). If necessary, you can display the model using an isometric view, or by any of the
defined orthographic views: Front/Back, Top/Bottom, or Left/Right by clicking the corresponding
755

toolbar buttons. You can interactively rotate, zoom, or pan the model. Zoom to Window and
Zoom to Selection options are also available.
You can also set perspective or orthographic projections. Click Nodes to display node
numbers to display node numbers. Select the load case or mode shape you want from the
corresponding drop down list. The frequency of the load case associated with the animation is
shown at the top of the view plot whenever you select Action > Titles.
The Animated Plot menu displays several plot selections. Motion and Volume Motion activate
the animation. The Motion command uses the centerline representation while Volume Motion
produces the volume graphics image. Each of the motion options causes the graphics processor
to animate the current plot. If Node Numbers is clicked, the node number text is moved
together with the corresponding node. When the plot is animated in the window, it may be sped
up, slowed down, or stopped using appropriate the toolbar command. After selecting a different
load case or mode shape from the drop down list, the motion automatically stops. Select one of
the motion commands again to activate the model movement.
The File > Print Motion command prints all of the vibration positions of the current mode. It is
not available for time history animation. For clarity purposes, we recommend you use the single
line (Motion) option to generate the printouts.
Save Animation to File

The animated graphics can be saved to a file by clicking Create an Animation File.
Alternatively, you can access this command from the Dynamic Plot File > Save as Animation.
After activating this command, the standard MS Windows Save As dialog box displays and
prompts you to enter the file name and directory to save the files. By default the current file
name and current data directory is used. There are two file types that are created: an HTML file
and an HSF file. To view the saved animation, find the corresponding HTML file and double-click
it. The corresponding HSF file containing the animation routines is displayed. The HTML file
contains buttons to play or pause the animation. The model can also be viewed at different
orthogonal planes, or returned to the isometric view.
The HTML is an interactive file.
The first time a CAESAR II file is created, the HTML file is opened with your default internet
browser. The software displays a message requesting permission to download a control from
Tech Soft 3D. Click Yes to allow the download, after which the image displays. After the model
appears, right-click the model to view the available options such as orbit, pan, zoom, and/or
different render modes. The image can be printed or copied to the clipboard.
Animation of Static Results -Displacements

You can view the piping system as it moves to the displaced position for the basic load cases.
To animate the static results, click Static Output > Options > View Animation.
You can click View Animation
solution.
to view graphic animation of the displacement
Static animation graphics has all the standard model projection and motion toolbar commands.
The load case can be selected from the drop-down list. The title consists of the load case name
followed by the file name, and can be toggled on and off from the Action menu.
756

The Static Animation processor allows viewing of the single line and volume motion, controls
the speed of the movement, and the animation can be saved to a file as described above.
We recommend you use the Deflected Shape command button on the 3D/HOOPS
Graphics view of the Static Output Processor toolbar. For more information refer to
3D/HOOPS Graphics Tutorial for Static Output Processor, Deflected Shape.
Animation of Dynamic Results Modal/Spectrum

You can view the calculated modes of vibration that correspond to particular natural frequencies
of the system. This feature is available from the Dynamic Output Animation window after running
the modal analysis.
After invoking the modal animation type, the system is displayed in its default state. Natural
frequencies can be selected from the drop-down list to animate the corresponding mode shape.
The title shows the natural frequency in Hz followed by the current file name and the date.
Animated graphics for a particular mode shape (frequency) can be viewed in a single line or
volume mode motion with speed control, and/or saved to an HTML file for later presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Harmonic

You can calculate the system response to the excitation frequency. This response can be
animated.
The Harmonics animation module can be launched from the animation Harmonic Output
window by clicking View Animation
. The system displays in its default isometric state.
The animation screen displays the same toolbar options described earlier that allow single line
and volume motion as well as speed up and slow down options. Occasional cases
corresponding to the excitation frequencies may be selected from the drop down list. The title
shows the currently selected frequency, file name, and the date. The title may be disabled from
the Action menu.
Animated graphics for each analyzed load case can be saved to an HTML file for later
presentation.
Animation of Dynamic Results Time History

The Time History animation window can be launched from the Dynamic Output Animation
window by clicking View Animation . The system displays in the centerline isometric mode.
The model can be rotated, zoomed, or panned and can be set to different orthographic
projections. The current time history time step and the job name are shown in the title on the top
of the graphics view. Due to complexity of the time history calculations and to decrease the
animation time, the animation is only available in centerline mode.
Save Animation to File is not available in the time history animation for the same
reason.
An additional feature of the Time History animation module is the Element Viewer. The
Element Viewer displays specific element information for a given time step. After clicking
Element Viewer, the Element Info dialog box displays the nodal displacements, forces,
moments, code stress, and SIF information provided for the current element at a current time
757

step. Clicking Next >> or Previous << changes the information to correspond to the next or
previous element in the system for the same time step.
When you click Motion
to start the animation, the current time step is displayed in the title
line, and the task bar at the bottom of the window shows the progress.
There are several ways to move the model:
You can increase
Click Next >> or Previous << while the Element Info dialog box is active to update the
information for the current element for the next or previous time step. If the animation is
stopped, this advances or moves back the animation one step. Click View Animation again
after you stop the animation to continue the time history motion from the location (the time
step) where the animation was stopped.
Click Plot the First Time Step or Plot the Last Time Step to bring the animation to the
beginning or the end, correspondingly.
Drag the time slider to the appropriate time step. The position of the bar adjusts
automatically as the animation progresses. You can click on the slider and then drag it along
the time-line to find the time step you want, or to see the displaced shape of the model.
If the Element Info dialog box is active, the highlighted element information is updated to
correspond to the current time step.
You can enable the node numbers; however, we recommend node numbering be disabled
when using animation. As the animated elements move, the node numbers are redrawn for
every position in the system. This creates a blinking effect that makes it hard to follow the
animation.
, decrease
, or stop
the animation speed.
Relief Load Synthesis Results

Relief Load Synthesis and Tools > Relief Load Synthesis calculates the magnitudes of
relieving thrust forces. Results are calculated for liquids and for gases greater than 15 psig. This
command is only available when Relief Loads (spectrum) and Time History are selected as
Analysis Type. For more information, see Relief Load Synthesis (on page 724).
Example Output - Gas Relief Load Synthesis (on page 730)
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load Synthesis (on page 734)
758
SECTION 12
Generate Stress Isometrics Overview

Generate Stress Isometrics
on the Home tab creates stress isometric drawings. Using
Stress Isometric Annotations you can include the piping model data created by CAESAR II in
the display area and then generate a stress isometric drawing. CAESAR II classifies the piping
model data as input and output. The data you enter to define a piping model is the input data,
and the data generated by CAESAR II after analyzing a model is the output data.
The Stress Isometric Tutorials (on page 770) are design to familiarize you to the interface and
explain the procedures in more detail with the help of examples and illustrations. We
recommend you read the tutorials and follow the instructions if you have not previously created
a stress isometric drawing. The tutorials instruct you in a step-by-step manner to open a piping
model, add annotations, and create a stress isometric drawing.
759

In This Section
Add input feature information ...................................................... 760
Add output feature information .................................................... 761
Add custom annotations for nodal features.................................. 761
Add custom annotations for elemental features ........................... 762
Set project information ................................................................ 762
Configure annotation preferences ............................................... 763
Configure isometric drawing split points ...................................... 763
Create a drawing using the default style ...................................... 765
Create a drawing using an existing style ..................................... 766
Create a drawing using a new style ............................................. 767
Create and save an annotation template ..................................... 769
Apply a Template ........................................................................ 769
Stress Isometric Tutorials ............................................................ 770
Add input feature information

The Input tab of the Stress Isometrics Annotations pane displays a list of input features
available in CAESAR II. You can select various features from the Feature list to view
information related to a feature.
1. Select File > Open to open a model from the CAESAR II main menu.
2. On the Home tab, click Generate Stress Isometrics
C2Isogen module.
to open the model in the
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Click the Feature list to select an input feature.
The software shows the nodes associated to the feature or the model parameters within the
Feature list.
5. Select check boxes in the Select column to view the feature information on the associated
node in the 3D model. Select the check box again to clear the selection.
6. Similarly, you can select other input features in the Feature list to view nodes or elements
associated to the selected features.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected input information.
The software makes the nodes and model parameters available for selection only when you
use the input feature to analyze the model.
The software displays the model parameters, such as Diameter, Insulation Thickness, and
Wall Thickness, in the drawing only when there is a change in these parameters.
To select all the nodes in the list, select first check box, press SHIFT, and then select the
last check box in the list.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display,
area and then press DELETE.
760
Add output feature information

The Output tab defines what post-analysis results of a model that the software includes in the
drawing. Select Load Cases on the Output tab to see the load cases the software uses to
analyze the model. The analysis results are categorized as Displacement, Restraint, and
Stres in the Results box. Select Hanger Data on the Output tab to see generate hanger
information not specific to a load case.
1. Select File > Open to open a model.
C2Isogen module.
3. Select StressIso > Annotations to open the Stress Isometric Annotations pane.
The Input tab is active by default.
4. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used to analyze the model.
Output
features are available for selection only if you have analyzed the piping model. If you have
not analyzed the model, click Generate Output from the Output tab.
5. Click Load Cases to select a load case.
The results generated for the load case are listed in the Results box.
6. Select the result type you want, and then select the nodes to include the information for
annotation.
7. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotations for the selected output
information.
The Node number, Node Name, and Description columns display information entered in
CAESAR II and cannot be edited.
The Load Cases list displays load cases created for static analysis only.
To remove a node or an element from a selection set, click the annotation tag in the display
area, and then press DELETE.
Add custom annotations for nodal features

The Nodal Annotations tab adds your custom notes for each node in the drawing that you
select. The Node # and Node Name columns display the node information you enter all in
CAESAR II and are not editable. You can type your comments for the available nodes in the
User Annotations column.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
C2Isogen module.
761

3. Select StressIso > Annotations.
4. Select the Nodal Annotations tab to view a list of all the nodes in the model.
5. To add a note for a node, click the associated cell in the User Annotation column and then
type your note.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
Add custom annotations for elemental features

The Elemental Annotations tab lists all the elements of the model, you can add custom
remarks for each element in the User Annotation column on this tab. The From, From Name,
To, and To Name columns display the information you enter for each node in CAESAR II.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column on the Stress Isometric
Annotations pane can be viewed only in the drawing. Tags for user annotations are not visible
in the model.
To add personal notes for the elements:
C2Isogen module.

4. Select the Elemental Annotations tab to view a list of model elements.
5. To add a comment for an element, click the associated cell in the User Annotations
column, and then type your comment.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save custom annotations.
The comments you add in the User Annotations column can be viewed only in the
drawing, tags for user annotations are not visible in the display area.
Set project information

The Project Attributes tab defines general information about your project, such as the project
name, number, client name, and more.
C2Isogen module.

4. Select the Project Attributes tab.
5. Type values for each attribute in the Attribute Value column.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.
762
Configure annotation preferences

The Settings tab on the Stress Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output
features available for annotation. You select a text box shape for each feature allowing you to
represent information in different text box shapes on the drawing. The software then displays the
feature information in the drawing according to the shape you select.
C2Isogen module.

4. Select the Settings tab to view the list of features.
5. Click TextBox Shape list associated to a feature, and then select a text box shape for the
feature.
6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save annotation preferences.
The text box shapes you select for different features are visible only in the drawing.
Configure isometric drawing split points

The Split tab defines the split points for new isometric drawings. For example, your model
contains nodes 10 through 250. If you select nodes 90 and 170, the first isometric drawing will
have nodes 10 through 80. The second isometric drawing will have nodes 90 through 160, and
the third isometric drawing will have nodes 170 through 250.
C2Isogen module.

4. Select the Split tab.
5. In the Split column, select the nodes at which to start new isometric drawings.
763

6. Select StressIso > Save Annotation to save the values.
764
Create a drawing using the default style

You can use different drawing styles1 to create a drawing. Using the Isometric Drawing
Generation dialog box you can select a style or create a new style. Selecting the default style to
create a drawing applies a predefined set of styles and rules to the drawing. Use this option if
you are not familiar with the drawing styles or if you do not want to create a custom drawing
style.
To create a drawing using the default style:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box.
4. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to create drawings.
A drawing style is a set a parameters that you define to represent your piping system drawing.
These parameters typically include drawing format, drawing size, drawing frame, units, and
options to display other information like materials list, weld list, and so on.
765

The Drawings dialog box displays a list of drawings created for the piping model.
5. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
The drawings created using the default style are saved in the same folder as the piping
model.
The unit system used in creating the pipe model is used in the drawing, by default.
You cannot make any changes to the default drawing style.
The Status Message dialog box shows the number of files and drawings created for the
model, and reports the errors generated during creation of the drawing.
Create a drawing using an existing style

Using this option you can apply an existing drawing style and create a drawing. You must have
an existing style to use this option. You can create a new style using C2Isogen, or some other
application like Alias I-Configure.
To create a drawing using an existing style:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Create Isometric Drawing on the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
766

4. Select Use Existing Style, and then click OK to open the Select Existing Style dialog box.
5. To select an isometric directory2 for your project, click Browse, and then select the root
directory.
6. To select an isometric project3, click Browse, and then select a project.
7. To select an isometric style, click Browse, and then select the style you want to apply.
When you select the directory, project, and style, the software activates the Create Drawing
option.
8. Click Create Drawing to open the Drawings dialog box.
9. Select the drawings to view, and then click View to open the drawings in your default
viewer.
You must follow the standard folder structure to save the project file and the styles.
Create a drawing using a new style

Using this feature you can customize various parameters associated to a drawing such as the
drawing frame, units, drawing size, and so on. To create a new style you must first create an
isometric directory. The style you create is saved in a project that is created when you create an
isometric directory for a new style. To define and create a new style:
C2Isogen module.
An isometric directory is the root folder for files associated to a style. An isometric directory
can contain many projects.
3
You create isometric projects in an isometric directory. Isometric projects contain different
drawing styles.
767

3. Select Create Isometric Drawing in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
4. Select Create New Style, and then click OK to open the Isometric Style Configuration
dialog box.
5. To the right of Create New Isometric Directory, click Browse to select an empty folder, or
create a new folder.
6. Under Create New Isometric Directory, click Create to generate the required folder
structure and files.
7. To select a drawing frame4, click Browse and select a drawing frame in the Open Drawing
Frame Template dialog box.
8. Similarly, to specify a folder to save your drawings in Drawing Path, click Browse and
select a folder.
9. Select Units to select a unit system for your drawing.
10. Select Drawing Size to select a size for the drawing.
11. Click Create Drawing to save the style you created and generate drawing files.
12. On the Drawings dialog box, select the files you want to view, and then click View to open
the drawings in your default viewer.
You must choose an empty folder to create an isometric directory.
If you want to delete an existing style, you must use to delete the style.
Drawing frames are the backing sheets used to create your drawing. By default, different types
of drawing frames are generated when you create a new style.
768
Create and save an annotation template

You can create a standard template and apply this template to different piping models. The
software applies the selections that you make while creating a template to the new model. To
include nodes or elements associated to an input feature, you must select all the nodes or
elements of that feature.
You can only select input features to save as a template.
To create and save a template:
C2Isogen module.
3. Select Edit Stress Annotations in the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
4. Select the Input tab.
5. From the Feature list, select an input feature that you want to include in your template.
6. To select all the nodes or elements, press SHIFT, and then select the first and the last
check box of the list.
7. Similarly, select all the nodes and elements of other input features that you want to include
in your template.
8. To define annotation preferences for your template, click the Settings tab and select text
box shapes for the input features.
9. Select StressIso > Save Template to open the Save Annotation Template dialog box.
10. On the Save Annotation Template dialog box, type a file name and then click Save to save
the template.
Apply a Template
You can apply an existing template to a new piping model. All the selections made while
creating a template are applied to the new model along with the annotation preferences. You
can apply a template to a piping model only if a stress Iso file associated to the model does not
already exist. To apply an annotation template to a new model.
C2Isogen module.
3. Select StressIso > Apply Template to open the Open Annotation Template dialog box.
4. Select the template file to use, and then click Open to apply the template.
5. To clear all annotations, select StressIso > Reset Annotation.
6. To save the applied annotations, select StressIso > Save Annotation.
769
Stress Isometric Tutorials
Topics
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing
style ............................................................................................ 770
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features .......... 773
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure annotations preferences
................................................................................................... 775
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template .................... 779
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the

default drawing style
Using stress isometric annotations, you can annotate the input and output features from
CAESAR II and generate a drawing in different formats. Stress isometric annotations provide
you the flexibility to define different drawing styles to create a drawing. This tutorial shows you
how to open a file and create a drawing using the default drawing style.
770

Topics
Open an existing CAESAR II file ................................................. 771
Create a drawing using the default style ...................................... 772
Open an existing CAESAR II file

1. Open CAESAR II.
2. Select File > Open.
3. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select RELIEF.c2 from the file list, and then click Open.
module.
to open the file in the C2Isogen
771

To create a drawing using the default drawing style:
1. Select Create Isometric Drawing from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Isometric
Drawing Generation dialog box. You can select an existing drawing style, create new style,
or use the default drawing style to create a drawing.
2. Select Use Default Style, and then click OK to generate the drawing files.
The drawing files you create using default style are saved in the model folder.
3. Select the drawing from the list, and then click View to open the drawing in your default
viewer or select an application in the Open With dialog box.
The drawing displays without any annotations.
772
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and Output features

This tutorial show you how to annotate input and output features of a model. The Stress
Isometric Annotations pane lists all the input and output features used in the CAESAR II file.
Topics
Add annotations for input features ............................................... 773
Add annotations for output features............................................. 774
Add annotations for input features

In Tutorial A (see "Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric drawing using the default drawing style"
on page 770), we learned to open a CAESAR II file and create a drawing without any
annotations. The software saves all information associated to input features in the CAESAR II
file when you define specific inputs for a model. You can make the drawing more detailed by
adding this information to the drawing. In this part of the tutorial, we add annotations for input
features to the RELIEF.C2 file.
2. On the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side.
3. Select RELIEF.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
C2Isogen module.
5. Select Edit Stress Annotations from the Isometric Tools toolbar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane. By default, the pane opens the Input tab.
6. The Feature list displays all the input features available in CAESAR II. Depending on the
feature you select, the software displays a list of nodes associated to the feature.
773

Click the check boxes in the Select column if you want to include the information associated
to the node or element in your drawing. For example, select Node Numbers in the Feature
list, and then select nodes 110 and 115. Annotations for the selected node numbers are
added to the model and are visible in the display area.
Add annotations for output features

As with the input features, CAESAR II saves the result data after you analyze a model. The
Output tab lists the load cases that the software uses for the stress analysis and classifies them
as Displacement, Restraint, and Stress. You can make the result data available in the drawing
by selecting nodes and elements displayed for the result type.
To add annotations for output features:
1. Select the Output tab to view the load cases used for stress analysis.
774

2. The Load Cases list displays a list of load cases used in the analysis. The Results box lists
results generated for each load case. You can view a list of nodes or elements for each
result set, and then select nodes and elements that you want to annotate. Let us consider
Load Case 3, and then select elements 75-80 and 110-115 for Stress. You can now view
the annotations for the selected elements in the display area.
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and configure

annotations preferences
Along with annotating input and output features, you can also add custom notes to the nodes
and elements of a model. The annotations you add can be represented in different formats to
improve drawing readability. In this tutorial. we learn to add custom notes to nodes and
elements and yo choose representation formats for the features.
Topics
Adding custom annotations ......................................................... 775
Configuring annotation preferences............................................. 777
Adding custom annotations

In the earlier tutorial we learned to add annotations for input and output features. In this tutorial
we continue adding annotations to Relief.c2 file we opened in Opening an existing CAESAR II
file (see "Open an existing CAESAR II file" on page 771).
To add custom annotations:
775

Select Nodal Annotations tab to view the list of nodes defined in the model. You can now add
your remarks in the User Annotations cell associated to each node. For example, click the cell
associated to node 80 and type This is a user annotation for node 80.
1. Similarly, select Elemental Annotations tab to view the list of elements in the model and
add your remarks in the User Annotation cell associated to the element you want to
annotate. Here we add a note for element 75-80.
2. Click the User Annotations cell associated to element 75-80 and type This is a custom
annotation for element 75-80.
776

The custom annotations you add are not shown in the display area and can be viewed only
in the drawing.
Configuring annotation preferences

All the information that you annotate in your drawing can be represented in different formats,
selecting different textbox shapes to display different feature can make the drawing easier to
understand. In this part of the tutorial we learn to configure annotation preferences for the
drawing.
It is evident in the drawing illustrated in the first part of this tutorial that all the annotations you
made are displayed in a rectangular box. This makes it difficult to differentiate between the
input, output, and custom annotations added to the drawing. To choose different formats to
represent your annotations:
1. Select the Settings tab to view the list of input, output, and custom annotation features. You
can select different box shapes for the features you annotate.
777

2. Let us select Circle for Node Numbers, No Box for Output Stress Data, and Filleted
Rectangle for Nodal Annotations and Elemental Annotations.
You cannot view these changes in the display area, the changes you made are updated
when you create a drawing.
778
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO template

This tutorial shows you how to create a template for stress ISO annotations .You can apply this
template to your piping models and ensure consistency in representation of the input features in
the drawing. Only input features of a model can be included in a template. Therefore, you should
open a piping model that has all the input features you want to include in your template.
Topics
Create a template ....................................................................... 779
Apply a template ......................................................................... 781
Create a template
This tutorial shows you how to create and save a stress Iso annotation template. For this
tutorial, open RELIEF.C2 from the CAESAR II Examples folder.
To create a template:
1. Select Edit Stress Annotations on the Isometric Tools toobar to open the Stress
Isometric Annotations pane.
You can only include the input features in a template. Select all the nodes listed for
that feature to include an input feature in a template.
779

2. Click the Feature list. Select a feature, and then select all the nodes listed for the feature.
For example, select all the nodes listed for the Restraint/Hanger Types feature.
3. Similarly, select all the nodes or elements of other input features that you want to include.
4. Select Settings tab to specify a text box shape for the input feature you selected in the
earlier part of this tutorial. Let us select Filleted Rectangle for the Restraint/hanger types
feature.
5. Select StressIso > Save Template to save your selections as a template. A template file
with .ist extension is saved in the model folder.
780
Apply a template
After you create and save a template, you can apply this template to your piping models. When
you select all the nodes of a feature to create a template, that input feature gets selected when
you apply the template to a new piping model. You can clear the selections if you do not want to
display all the nodes or elements of the input feature included in a template.
This part of the tutorial shows you how to apply a saved template to a piping model. You can
apply a template to a piping model only if the model is not already annotated and the stress Iso
file (.iso) associated to the model does not exist.
To apply a template to a new model:
1. Open CAESAR II.
3. In the Open dialog box, click the Examples button on the right side to open the Examples
folder.
4. Select JACKET.C2 from the file list, and then click Open.
C2Isogen module.
6. Select StressIso > Apply Annotation, and then select a template file.
7. Select StressIso > Annotation to view the selections you made while creating the template
in the display area.
The previous figure shows that all the nodes listed under Restraint/Hanger types are selected
in the new model.
781
SECTION 13
Equipment Component and Compliance

You can use the CAESAR II Equipment and Component Compliance Analysis modules to enter
data and check vessels, flanges, turbines, compressors, pumps and heat exchangers for
excessive piping loads according to appropriate standards. Output reports can be sent to the
printer, the terminal, or saved as a file.
Suction (inlet), discharge (exhaust), and extraction lines are analyzed for forces and moments in
separate runs of pipe stress software. After all of the loadings for a particular piece of equipment
are calculated, you can run an analysis to determine if these loads are acceptable according to
the governing code.
A convenient feature of the analysis modules is the ability to separately analyze the nozzles on
equipment separately. You often only have suction side loads, and the dimensions of the pump
are unknown. In these cases, CAESAR II accepts a zero or a blank entry for the unknown data
and generates a single-nozzle equipment check report. Although overall compliance is not being
evaluated, you can still check individual nozzle limits. This is a valuable tool, especially if you
are more interested in load guidance, rather than some fixed or precise limit on allowables.
The analysis modules are available on the CAESAR II Analysis menu and share the same
interface for easy transition between the modules.
SIFs @ Intersections - Calculates stress intensification factors at intersections. For more
information, see Intersection Stress Intensification Factors (on page 783).
SIFs @ Bends - Calculates stress intensification factors at bends. For more information, see
Bend Stress Intensification Factors (on page 789).
WRC 107/207 - Calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. For more information, see
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses (on page 797).
Flanges - Performs flange stress and leakage calculations. For more information, see Flange
Leakage/Stress Calculations (on page 802).
B31.G - Estimates pipeline remaining life. For more information, see Pipeline Remaining
Strength Calculations (B31G) (on page 821).
Expansion Joint Rating - Evaluates expansion joints using EJMA equations. For more
information, see Expansion Joint Rating (on page 826).
AISC - Performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. For more information, see
Structural Steel Checks - AISC (on page 831).
NEMA SM23 - Evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. For more information, NEMA
SM23 (Steam Turbines) (on page 839).
API 610 - Evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. For more information, see API 610
(Centrifugal Pumps) (on page 847).
API 617 - Evaluates piping loads on compressors. For more information, see API 617
(Centrifugal Compressors) (on page 859).
API 661 - Evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. For more information, see API
661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) (on page 868).
782

HEI Standard - Evaluates piping loads on feedwater heaters. For more information, see Heat
Exchange Institute (see "HEI Standard" on page 873).
API 560 - Evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. For more information, see API 560 (Fired
Heaters for General Refinery Services) (on page 876).
In This Section
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors ................................... 783
Bend Stress Intensification Factors ............................................. 789
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses........................................ 797
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations ........................................... 802
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) ....................... 821
Expansion Joint Rating ............................................................... 826
Structural Steel Checks - AISC ................................................... 831
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) ................................................... 839
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)....................................................... 847
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) ............................................. 859
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers) ....................................... 868
HEI Standard .............................................................................. 873
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services) ................ 876
Intersection Stress Intensification Factors

Analysis > SIFs @ Intersections computes intersection stress intensification factors (SIFs) for
any of the three-pipe type intersections available in CAESAR II. To begin, specify a new job
name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing
job file.
All CAESAR II analyses require a job name for identification purposes. After you create
or open a job, you can enter input data and then define, analyze, and review your data.
783

The software opens the Intersection Stress Intensification Factors window.
784

Enter the necessary problem-specific data in the input fields, and then click Run Analysis
to
run the analysis. After processing is complete, stress intensification factors are reported for a
range of different configuration values on the Output tab, as shown below.
Topics
Intersection Type ........................................................................ 786
Piping Code ID ........................................................................... 786
Header Pipe Outside Diameter.................................................... 787
Header Pipe Wall Thickness ....................................................... 787
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter .................................................... 787
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness........................................................ 788
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection ..................................... 788
Pad Thickness ............................................................................ 788
Intersection Crotch Radius .......................................................... 788
Intersection Crotch Thickness ..................................................... 789
Extrusion Crotch Radius ............................................................. 789
Weld Type .................................................................................. 789
Ferritic Material ........................................................................... 789
Design Temperature ................................................................... 789
785
Intersection Type
Specifies the intersection type to be reviewed. After you click Run Analysis
, the software
generates tables that show the relationship between the SIFs for the entered piping code, WRC
329, ASME III (NC and ND), and Schneider recommendations. You can choose from the
following:
Reinforced Fabricated Tee
Unreinforced Fabricated Tee
Welding Tee
Sweepolet
Weldolet
Extruded Welding Tee
Bonney Forge Sweepolet
Bonney Forge Latrolet
Bonney Forge Insert Weldolet
Piping Code ID
Specifies the piping code ID. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
12 - ASME Sect.III, Class 2
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
18 - Swedish Method 1, 2nd Edition Stockholm (1979)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
786
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Header Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting diameter.
Header Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the header matching pipe.
Do not enter the fitting thickness.
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter

Specifies the outside diameter of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the diameter of the fitting.
787
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the wall thickness of the matching pipe.
Do not enter the wall thickness of the fitting.
Branch Largest Diameter at Intersection

Specifies the largest diameter for the branch pipe fitting at the intersection. See the figures in the
piping code appendices for a more detailed description of this dimension.
This is the largest diameter of any thickened nozzle neck or transition that exists at the
intersection.
Defaults to the matching pipe diameter if omitted.
Pad Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the pad on the reinforced fabricated tee.
In most piping codes, the beneficial effect of the thickness of a pad is limited to a thickness less
than 1.5 times the nominal thickness of the fitting. This factor does not apply in BS806 or Z6662,
and is 2.5 in the Swedish piping code.
This option displays only for reinforced fabricated tees.
Intersection Crotch Radius

Specifies the intersection weld crotch radius for WRC329. Specifying this value can result in a
50% reduction in the stress intensification at the intersection when WRC 329 intersection
options are selected.
When you specify this value, you are assuring that there no significant stress riser at the
intersection weld.
To be effective in reducing the stress intensification, this value must be bigger than Tb/2 and
Th/2. You must also check the value (Tb'+y)/2 in the code, where y is the largest thickness at
the intersection. The crotch radius must also be larger than this value.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the
geometric criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Thickness are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
788
Intersection Crotch Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the fitting in the crotch.
As of the 2001 addendum, B31.3 uses this value to determine if the fitting meets the geometric
criteria of B16.9 (see Note 8 in Appendix D of B31.3 for details). If this value and the
Intersection Crotch Radius are defined, CAESAR II applies Note 8 to determine how the
flexibility characteristic is to be computed. If these values are left blank, the software uses the
setting in the configuration file to determine how the flexibility characteristic is to be computed.
Extrusion Crotch Radius

Specifies the crotch radius for extruded welding tees. This option displays only for extruded
welding tees.
Weld Type
Specifies the weld type.
As Welded - This is an unfinished weld.
Finished/Ground Flush - The weld is ground flush on the inside and out and the SIF is 1.0.
Ferritic Material
Indicates that the material for this tee is ferrous, which enables the Y value to be computed on
the highest temperature value specified. This option is available for when you select ASME NC
and ASME ND in the Piping Code ID list.
Design Temperature
Specifies the system highest temperature. This value is required for piping codes ASME NC
and ASME ND to calculate material properties.
Bend Stress Intensification Factors

Opens a scratchpad for calculating stress intensification factors (SIFs) for various bend
configurations under different codes. You can access this scratchpad by selecting Analysis >
SIFs @ Bends or through the Bend SIF Scratchpad option on the Classic Piping input or on
the 3D model.
You can compute bend stress intensification factors for the following:
Pipe bends without any additional attachments. These calculations are done according to
the piping code being used.
Mitered pipe bends. These calculations are done according to the piping code being used.
Pipe bends with a trunnion attachment. These calculations are taken from the paper Stress
Indices for Piping Elbows with Trunnion Attachments for Moment and Axial Loads, by
Hankinson, Budlong and Albano, in the PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
789

To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click
Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
The Bend Stress Intensification Factors window consists of two input tabs--the Bend tab (on
page 791) and the Trunnion tab (on page 795).
In most cases data that does not apply is left blank. For example, to review the SIFs for a
bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for the trunnion-related input fields on
the Trunnion tab.
790
Bend Tab
Topics
Piping Code ID ............................................................................ 791
Pipe Outside Diameter ................................................................ 792
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe.................................................. 792
Wall Thickness of Bend ............................................................... 793
Bend Radius ............................................................................... 793
Bend Angle (Degrees) ................................................................. 793
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA) ........ 793
Number of Cuts ........................................................................... 794
Seam Welded.............................................................................. 794
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA) ......................... 794
Elastic Modulus ........................................................................... 794
Pressure Stiffening ...................................................................... 794
Piping Code ID
Identifies the piping code. The following piping codes are allowed:
1 - B31.1
3 - B31.3
4 - B31.4
5 - B31.5
8 -B31.8 & B31.8, Chapter VIII
10 - B31.9
11 - B31.11
14 - Navy 505 (1984)
15 - CAN/CSA Z662
16 - CAN/CSA Z662, Chapter 11
17 - BS 806 (1993) (Issue 1, September 1993)
20 - B31.1 (1967)
21 - Stoomwezen
22 - RCC-M C
23 - RCC-M D
24 - CODETI
791
25 - Norwegian TBK 5-6
26 - FDBR
27 - BS 7159
28 - UKOOA
29 - IGE/TD/12
30 - Det Norske Veritas (DNV) (1996)
31 - B31.4, Chapter IX (Offshore)
32 - EN-13480
33 - GPTC/Z380
34 - PD-8010, Part 1
35 - PD-8010, Part 2
36 - ISO-14692
37 - HPGSL
38 - JPI
For a complete list of current publication dates for piping codes, see the CAESAR II Quick
Reference Guide.
Pipe Outside Diameter

Defines the pipe outside diameter in the units shown.
Used in the average cross sectional radius calculation:
r2 = (OD - WT) / 2
OD = Outside Diameter as entered
WT = Wall Thickness of attached pipe

The B31.3 code defines r2 as the "mean radius of matching pipe".
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe

Specifies the matching pipe nominal wall thickness. Do not subtract out any corrosion. All SIF
calculations are made ignoring corrosion.
This wall thickness is used in the (r2), mean radius calculation as defined in the piping codes.
792
Wall Thickness of Bend

Specifies the thickness of the bend fitting if it is different than the thickness of the matching pipe.
This is the thickness used in the flexibility characteristic equation for (h):
h =
Tn =
r =
(Tn)(R) / (ry)
Thickness of bend or fitting
Mean cross sectional radius of matching pipe
Bend Radius
Specify the radius of the bend. The distance from the arc center to the centerline of the bend
curvature.
Bend Angle (Degrees)

Specifies the angle between the downstream leg of the bend and a straight line extending along
the upstream leg of the bend. If no value is entered, the software uses the default value of 90.
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for BS7159 & UKOOA)

Sets the number of rigid fittings that are attached to the end of the bend preventing the
ovalization of the bend .Ovalization provides for a large amount of the flexibility of the bend.
BS-806 (the British Power Piping Code) recommends that flanges or valves (or any rigid
cross-sectional fitting) that are within two diameters of the ending weld point of the bend be
considered as attached to the end of the bend for this calculation.
Attachments to the end of the bend are considered to affect about 30 of the arc of the bend. For
the BS 7159 code, this entry refers to the material laminate type and must be of the following
values:
1 - All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
2 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and
3 - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with internal and
Laminate type affects the calculation of flexibility factors and stress intensification factors
for the BS 7159 code only.
793
Number of Cuts
Specifies the number of cuts in the miter bend.
If only a single cut is entered, then the bend is always considered to be a widely spaced mitered
bend. For multi-cut miters, CASEAR II uses the radius and the number of cuts to determine if
the miter is closely or widely spaced.
Seam Welded
Indicates when straight pipes are seam welded and affects the SIF calculations for that pipe
section due to seam welded fabrication. This option is only available when IGE/TD/12 is active.
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 & UKOOA)

Specifies the pressure design strain. This is an optional entry, used with the pressure stiffening
calculation.
For the BS 7159 Code, this entry is the material Design Strain, d.
Elastic Modulus
Identifies the cold modulus of elasticity. Used with the pressure stiffening calculation. This is an
optional entry.
Pressure Stiffening
Controls the pressure stiffening effects on elbows. Pressure stiffening has its most significant
effect in larger diameter bends adjacent to sensitive equipment (compressors). Including
pressure stiffening where it is not included by default draws more of the system moment to the
nozzle adjacent to the bend.
This option is controlled using the CAESAR II setup file but is most commonly left to the default
condition. The default is different for each piping code because some codes mention pressure
stiffening explicitly, while others do not. Available options are:
Yes - Include pressure stiffening.
No - Remove pressure stiffening.
Default - Follow the piping code default.
794
Trunnion Tab
There are limits that must be satisfied before SIFs can be calculated on trunnions. These limits
come directly from the paper by Hankinson, Budlong and Albano.
t/T 0.2 and t/T 2.0
D/T 20 and D/T 60
d/D 0.3 and d/D 0.8
Where:
t = Wall thickness of the trunnion
T = Wall thickness of the bend
d = Outside diameter of the trunnion
D = Outside diameter of the bend
To review the SIFs for a bend that does not have a trunnion, do not enter values for
the trunnion-related input fields on the Trunnion tab.
Topics
Outside Diameter ........................................................................ 795
Wall Thickness ........................................................................... 795
Stress Concentration Factor........................................................ 796
Stress Concentrations and Intensification .................................... 796
Outside Diameter
Specifies the staunchion outside diameter. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend. If you define Staunchion OD, you must also
define Wall Thickness.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs is from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2)is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
intensification factor (i). If you do not define a value for the stress concentration factor, it defaults
to 2.0.
Wall Thickness
Designates the staunchion wall thickness. This is an optional entry, used only if there is a
staunchion or dummy leg attached to the bend.
The stress intensification factors for dummy legs are from the paper: "Stress Indices for Piping
Elbows with Trunnion attachments for Moment and Axial Loads.", PVP Vol. 129, 1987.
The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
to 2.0.
795
Stress Concentration Factor

The equation (1.7)i = (C2)(K2) is used to get from the calculated (C2) coefficients to the stress
to 2.0.
Stress Concentrations and Intensification

Designates the stress intensification calculation for bends with trunnions. It is based on the
relationship between the ASME NB stress indices C2, K2, and the B31 code i factor or stress
intensification factor. That relationship has long been taken to be
(m)(i) = (C2)(K2)
Where:
m = multiplier, usually either 1.7 or 2.
i = B31 stress intensification factor
C2 = ASME NB secondary stress index
K2 = ASME NB peak stress index
The peak stress index (K2) is commonly known as the stress concentration factor. This factor is
the ratio of the highest point stress at an intensification (or an elbow) and the nominal local
computed stress at the same point. Peak stresses typically only exist in a very small volume of
material, on the order of fractions of the wall thickness of the part.
Because most piping components are formed without crude notches, gross imperfections or
other anomalies, the peak stress index is kept well in control. Where a smooth transition radius
is provided which is at least t/2, and where (t) is the characteristic thickness of the part, the peak
stress index is typically taken as 1.0. At unfinished welds, sockets, and where no transition
radius is provided, the peak stress index approaches values of 2.0.
If you enter a trunnion (where there will be a weld between the trunnion and the elbow),
and you do not enter a stress concentration factor, CAESAR II assumes a stress concentration
factor of 2.0.
796
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle Stresses

Analysis > WRC 107/297 calculates stresses in vessels due to attached piping. The software
opens the WRC 107/297 window.
The module allows multiple analyses to be saved inside the same file. The Job Explorer--the
left pane of the WRC 107/297 window--lists each analysis contained in the job, sorted by
analysis type: WRC-107 or WRC-297. The items in the list are created by combining the item
description and the item number, which can be subsequently changed in the data input window.
The Loads pane, which contains a data input grid, displays the selected analysis type.
The following commands are available on the WRC 107/297 toolbar.
Defines a data set as a WRC-107 analysis.
Defines a data set as a WRC-297 analysis.
Starts the analysis and displays the results in the WRC 197/207 window.
Performs the initial WRC 107 calculation and summation and sends the result to
Microsoft Word.
797

Removes an analysis from the job.
To add a new analysis to the job, click the corresponding analysis type, 107 or 297,on the
toolbar. You can remove an analysis from the job by selecting it in the Job Explorer, and then
clicking Erase
on the toolbar. To display an analysis in the Loads pane, select it from the
list in the Job Explorer.
The analysis results and the graphical representation display on the Analysis and Drawing tabs
on the right side of the Loads pane. The data that displays on both of these tabs automatically
updates after each change in the Loads pane, even if they are hidden.
The following example shows a sample analysis report.
Nozzle curves in the WRC Bulletin 107 cover typical applications of nozzles in vessels or
piping. If any of the interpolation parameters fall outside the limits of the available curves,
CAESAR II uses the last curve value in the appropriate WRC table.
Topics
WRC Bulletin 107(537) ............................................................... 799
WRC Bulletin 297 ....................................................................... 802
798
WRC Bulletin 107(537)

The Welding Research Council Bulletin 107 (WRC 107) has been used extensively since 1965
to estimate local stresses in vessel/attachment junctions. There are three editions of the WRC
107 bulletin available in the software. You can set the default using Tools > Configure/Setup.
For more information about the options available in the editor, see Configuration and
In 2010, WRC Bulletin 537 was released. According to the foreword of WRC Bulletin
537, "WRC 537 provides exactly the same content in a more useful and clear format. It is not an
update or a revision of 107." CAESAR II uses the graphs from Bulletin 107. Bulletin 537 simply
provides equations in place of the curves found in Bulletin 107.
The WRC 107 Bulletin provides an analytical tool to evaluate the vessel stresses in the
immediate vicinity of a nozzle. You can use this method to compute the stresses at both the
inner and outer surfaces of the vessel wall, and report the stresses in the longitudinal and
circumferential axes of the vessel/nozzle intersection. The convention adopted by WRC 107 to
define the applicable orientations of the applied loads and stresses for both spherical and
cylindrical vessels are shown below.
Spherical Shells
Cylindrical Shells
799

Defining WRC Axes:
Defining WRC Axes:
P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive

entering vessel.
P-axis: Along nozzle centerline and positive

entering vessel.
M1-axis: Perpendicular to nozzle centerline

along convenient global axis.
MC-axis: Along vessel centerline and positive

to correspond with any parallel global axis.
M2-axis: Cross P-axis into M1 axis and the

result is M2-axis.
M2-axis: Cross the P-axis with MC axis and

result is ML-axis.
Defining WRC Stress Points:
Defining WRC Stress Points:
u - Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at

junction.
u - Upper, stress on outside of vessel wall at

junction.
l - Lower, stress on inside of vessel at junction.
l - Lower, means stress on inside of vessel at

junction.
A - Position on vessel at junction along negative

M1 axis.
A - Position on vessel at junction along
negative MC axis.
B - Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis.
B - Position on vessel at junction, along
positive MC axis.
C - Position on vessel at junction along positive
M2 axis.
C - Position on vessel at junction, along
positive ML axis.
D - Position on vessel at junction along negative
M2 axis.
D - Position on vessel at junction, along
negative ML axis.
Shear axis VC is parallel and in the

same direction as the bending axis ML.
Shear axis VL is parallel and in the opposite
direction as the bending axis MC.
WRC 107 is commonly used to conservatively estimate vessel shell stress state at the edge of a
reinforcing pad. The stress state in the vessel wall when the nozzle has a reinforcing pad can be
estimated by considering a solid plug with an outside diameter equal to the O.D. of the
reinforcing pad, subjected to the same nozzle loading.
Before attempting to use WRC 107 to evaluate the stress state of any nozzle-vessel
junction, always verify that the geometric restrictions limiting the application of WRC 107 are not
exceeded. These vary according to the attachment and vessel types. Refer to the WRC 107
bulletin directory for this information.
Using WRC 107 is not recommended when the nozzle is very light or when the parameters in
the WRC 107 data curves are unreasonably exceeded. Output from WRC 107 includes the
figure numbers for the curves accessed, the curve abscissa, and the values retrieved. Check
these outputs against the actual curve in WRC 107 to become familiar with the accuracy of the
stresses calculated. For example, if parameters for a particular problem are always near or past
the end of the figures curve data, then the calculated stresses may not be reliable.
WRC 107 Stress Summations

Because the stresses computed by WRC 107 are highly localized, they do not fall immediately
under the B31 code rules as defined by B31.1 or B31.3. However, Appendix 4-1 of ASME
800

Section VIII, Division 2 Mandatory Design Based on Stress Analysis does provide a detailed
approach for dealing with these local stresses. The analysis procedure outlined in the
aforementioned code is used in CAESAR II to perform the stress evaluation. In order to evaluate
the stresses through an elastic analysis, three stress combinations (summations) must be made:
Pm
Pm + Pl + Pb
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q
P is the design pressure of the system. Pm is the general membrane stress due to internal
pressure removed from discontinuities and can be estimated for the vessel wall from the
expression (PD) / (4t) for the longitudinal component and (PD) / (2t) for the hoop component.
The allowable for Pm is kSmh, where Smh is the allowable stress intensity. The value of k can
be taken from Table AD-150.1 of the code, which ranges from 1.0 for sustained loads to 1.2 for
sustained plus wind loads or sustained plus earthquake loads. Pl is the local membrane stress
at the junction due to the sustained piping loads. Pb is the local bending stress (and is zero at
the nozzle to vessel connections according to Section VIII, Division 2 of ASME Code). Q is the
secondary stress due to thermal expansion piping loads or the bending stress due to internal
pressure thrust and sustained piping loads. The allowable stress intensity for the second stress
combination is 1.5kSmh, as defined by the Figure 4-130.1 of the Code. Smh is the hot stress
intensity allowable at the given design temperature. Both P l and Q are calculated by WRC 107.
The third combination defines the range of the stress intensity, and its allowable is limited to
1.5(Smc+Smh ).
A summation is provided automatically following the WRC 107 analysis and displays on the
Drawing window within the main WRC 107/297 window. The calculation provides a comparison
of the stress intensities to the entered allowables, along with a corresponding Pass/Fail ruling.
Failed items display in red.
801
WRC Bulletin 297

Published in August of 1984, Welding Research Council (WRC) 297 attempts to extend the
existing analysis tools for the evaluation of stresses in cylinder-to-cylinder intersections. WRC
297 differs from the widely-used WRC 107 primarily in that WRC 297 is designed for larger d/D
ratios (up to 0.5). WRC 297 also computes stresses in the nozzle and the vessel, whereas WRC
107 only computes stresses in the vessel.
The CAESAR II WRC 297 module provides input tabs for vessel data, nozzle data, and imposed
loads. WRC 297 supports one set of loads. You can enter the loads in either global CAESAR II
convention or in the local WRC 297 coordinate system. If the global CAESAR II convention is
selected, vessel and nozzle direction cosines must be present in order to convert the loads into
the local WRC 297 convention as discussed in the WRC 297 bulletin.
The CAESAR II version of WRC 297 adds the pressure component of the stress using Lames
equations, multiplied by the stress intensification factors found in ASME Section VIII, Div. 2,
Table AD-560.7. The pressure stress calculation is not a part of the WRC 297 bulletin but is
added here for your convenience.
CAESAR II also uses, through Input > Piping, the nozzle flexibility calculations
described in WRC 297. For more information, see Piping Input Reference (on page 106).
After you provide the necessary input, CAESAR II calculates the stress components at the four
locations on the vessel around the nozzle and also the corresponding locations on the nozzle.
Stresses are calculated on both the outer and inner surfaces (upper and lower). These stress
components are resolved into stress intensities at these 16 points around the connection. For
more information on the allowable limits for these stresses and output processing, see WRC
Bulletin 107 (see "WRC Bulletin 107(537)" on page 799).
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations

Analysis > Flanges performs flange stress and leakage calculations. Historically, there have
been two different ways to calculate stress and one way to estimate leakage for flanges that
have received general application over the past 20 years. The stress calculation methods are
from the following sources:
ASME Section VIII
ANSI B16.5 Rating Tables
The leakage calculations are also based on the B16.5 rating table approach. Leakage is a
function of the relative stiffnesses of the flange, gasket and bolting. Using the B16.5 estimated
stress calculations to predict leakage does not consider the gasket type, stiffness of the flange,
or the stiffness of the bolting. Using B16.5 to estimate leakage makes the tendency to leak
proportional to the allowable stress in the flange. A flange with a higher allowable is able to
resist higher moments without leakage. Leakage is very weakly tied to allowable stress, if at all.
Flanges attempts to improve upon the solution of this difficult analysis problem. Equations
model the flexibility of the annular flange plate and its ability to rotate under moment, axial force,
and pressure. The results compare favorably with three-dimensional finite element analysis of
the flange junction. These correlations assume that the distance between the inside diameter of
the flange and the center of the effective gasket loading diameter is smaller than the distance
between the effective gasket loading diameter and the bolt circle diameter. In other words, that
802

(G-ID) < (BC-G), where, G is the effective gasket loading diameter, ID is the inside diameter of
the flange, and BC is the diameter of the bolt circle.
The following trends apply:
Thinner flanges have a greater the tendency to leak.
Larger diameter flanges have a greater tendency to leak.
Stiffer gaskets have a greater tendency to leak.
Leakage is a function of bolt tightening stress.
To begin working with the flange stress and leakage calculations, specify a new job name in the
New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
The software opens the Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations window.
Input for the flange stress and leakage calculations is divided into four input tabs:
Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 804) - Describes flange geometry.
Bolts and Gasket (see "Bolts and Gasket Tab" on page 807) - Defines data for the bolts and
gasket.
803
Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 816) - Defines material and stress-related
data.
Loads (see "Loads Tab" on page 818) - Describes the imposed loads.
Flange Tab
The following options are used to describe flange geometry.
Topics
Flange Type................................................................................ 804
Flange Class............................................................................... 804
Flange Grade.............................................................................. 805
Flange Outside Diameter (A)....................................................... 805
Flange Inside Diameter (B) ......................................................... 805
Flange Thickness (t) ................................................................... 806
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt ...................................................... 806
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID.................................................... 806
Small End Hub Thickness ........................................................... 807
Large End Hub Thickness ........................................................... 807
Hub Length ................................................................................. 807
Flange Type
Specifies the flange type. Selecting a flange type is required only if an ASME stress calculation
for the flange is needed. If you are performing only a leakage check, you can omit this entry.
Flange Class
Identifies the ANSI B16.5 or API 605 flange rating, (class).
B16.5 valid classes are 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500, 2500
API 605 valid classes are 75, 150, 300, 400, 600, 900
B16.5 specifications govern up to, and including 24-inch pipe; API 605 specifications govern
nominal pipe sizes 26- though 60-inch.
The flange rating entry is used to access the B16.5 or API pressure/temperature rating table.
Minimum and maximum allowed ratings for all different materials available in the tables are
stored. Minimum and maximum computed allowed equivalent pressures, and safety factors are
found from this data. API 605 does not have minimum and maximum data. The minimum and
maximum data is the same when the nominal English pipe size is greater than 24-inches.
804
Flange Grade
Specifies the grade of the attached flange. The grade of the attached flange is a value such as
1.1, 1.2, or 2.1. It can be found in the ANSI Standard B16.5 code for flanges and fittings. The
flange grade is used in conjunction with the flange class and design temperature to look up the
allowable pressure rating for the ANSI flange.
If the grade is 1.10, then type 1.101. If you are designing a custom flange and do not want the
printout for the allowable pressure, then type 0.
Flange Outside Diameter (A)

Defines the flange outside diameter if an ASME stress calculation for the flange is needed. You
can omit this entry if only a leakage check is to be performed.
This value is required only for ASME stress calculations. It is available in the flange ANSI
B16.5/API dimensional database. You can access the flange database properties by pressing
Ctrl+F from any data input field in the Flange tab.
Flange Inside Diameter (B)

Specifies the inner diameter of the flange. For integral type flanges, this value will also be the
inner pipe diameter. This value is referred to as "B" in the ASME code.
The flange inside diameter is contained in the flange database. The software looks up
this value whenever you press Ctrl+ F in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
For inside diameters not specified in B16.5, the matching ID of standard wall pipe is used. Verify
this dimension based on the actual application and use of the flange. The following table shows
pipe inside diameters for various nominal sizes. All sizes are shown in inches.
Nominal Size
Matching Inside Pipe Diameter

STD
Sch 40
Sch 60
Sch 80
1.049
1.049
0.957
2.067
2.067
1.939
3.068
3.068
2.900
4.026
4.046
3.826
5.047
5.047
4.813
6.065
6.065
5.671
7.981
7.981
7.813
7.625
805

10
10.020
10.020
9.750
9.564
12
12.000
11.938
11.626
11.376
14
13.250
13.126
12.814
12.500
16
15.250
15.000
14.688
14.314
18
17.250
16.876
16.500
16.126
20
19.250
18.814
18.376
17.938
24
23.250
22.626
22.064
21.564
Flange Thickness (t)

Specifies the thickness of the flange.
The flange thickness is contained in the flange database. The software looks up this value
whenever you press Ctrl+F while working in the Flange tab. The flange database contains
properties of ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges.
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt

Indicates one of the following:
For all except lap joints - The outer diameter of the flange face. The software uses the
minimum of the flange face outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the
outside flange contact point but uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle.
This is done so that the bolts do not interfere with the gasket. The software uses the
maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inside contact point of the
gasket. This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective
gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints - The lap joint contact outer diameter. This is usually the flange face outer
diameter. For additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4,
Sketches 1 and 1A.
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID

Indicates one of the following:
For all except lap joints - The inner diameter of the flange face. The software uses the
maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the
gasket. This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective
gasket diameter, G.
For lap joints - The lap joint contact inner diameter. This is usually the flange inner
diameter. For additional details, see ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2, Figure 2-4,
Sketches 1 and 1A.
806
Small End Hub Thickness

Specifies the thickness of the small end of the hub. This value is referred to as g0 in the ASME
code.
For weld neck flange types, this is the thickness of the shell at the end of the flange. For slip on
flange geometries, this is the thickness of the hub at the small end. For flange geometries
without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or omitted.
Large End Hub Thickness

Specify the thickness of the large end of the hub. This value is referred to as g1 in the ASME
code. It can be the same as Small Hub Thickness.
For flange geometries without hubs, this thickness can be entered as zero, or left blank.
Ctrl+F from any data cell in the Flange tab.
Hub Length
Defines the hub length. This value is referred to as h in the ASME code. For flange geometries
without hubs, this length can be entered as zero, or left blank.
When analyzing an optional type flange that is welded at the hub end, enter the hub length as
the leg of the weld, and include the thickness of the weld in the large end.
When analyzing a flange with no hub, such as a ring flange or a lap joint flange, enter a zero or
leave the field blank for the Hub Length, Small End Hub Thickness, and Large End Hub
Thickness. When designing a loose, ring-type flange that has a fillet weld at the back, enter the
size of a leg of the fillet weld as the large end of the hub.
Bolts and Gasket Tab

The following options are used to define data for the bolts and gasket.
807

Topics
Number of Bolts .......................................................................... 808
Bolt Diameter .............................................................................. 808
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress ........................................................ 808
Gasket Outer Diameter ............................................................... 809
Gasket Inner Diameter ................................................................ 809
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness ............................................... 809
Effective Gasket Modulus ........................................................... 809
Leak Pressure Ratio ................................................................... 810
Gasket Seating Stress ................................................................ 812
Nubbin Width or Ring .................................................................. 814
Facing Sketch ............................................................................. 814
Facing Column ........................................................................... 814
Number of Bolts
Specifies the number of bolts.
The number of bolts in standard ANSI B16.5 and API 605 flanges is contained in the
flange database and is accessed by the software whenever you press Ctrl+F.
Bolt Diameter
Specifies the nominal diameter of the bolts. Standard bolt diameters for ANSI B16.5 and API
605 flanges are contained in the flange database and are accessed by the software whenever
press Ctrl+F.
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress

Specifies the stress induced in the bolt during tightening after the flange has been seated. This
is the stress in the bolt when the system is about to be pressurized and thermally loaded.
If this value is omitted, the software uses the following bolt tightening rule to compute the
tightening stress in the bolt. (In English units: (i) = 45,000 / (d).
This entry is used only in the flexibility model of the flange to estimate the initial compression of
the gasket.
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes

This is a critical item for leakage determination and for computing stresses in the flange. The
ASME Code bases its stress calculations on a predetermined, specified, fixed equation for the
bolt stress. The resulting value is however often not related to the actual tightening stress that
appears in the flange when the bolts are tightened. For this reason, Bolt Initial Tightening
Stress, is used only for the flexibility/leakage determination. The value for the bolt tightening
stress used in the ASME Flange Stress Calculations is as defined by the ASME Code:
Bolt Load = Hydrostatic End Force + Force for Leaktight Joint
If Bolt Initial Tightening Stress is left blank, CAESAR II uses the value
808

Where 45,000 psi is a constant and d is the nominal diameter of the bolt.
This is a rule of thumb tightening stress that will typically be applied by field personnel tightening
the bolts. This computed value is printed in the output from the Flanges output. Compare this
value to the bolt stress printed in the ASME stress report (also in the output). The
rule-of-thumb tightening stress is frequently larger than the ASME required stress. When the
ASME required stress is entered into the Bolt Initial Tightening Stress field, a comparison of
the leakage safety factors can be made and the sensitivity of the joint to the tightening torque
can be determined. You are strongly encouraged to adjust these numbers to get a feel for the
relationship between all of the factors involved.
Gasket Outer Diameter

Specifies the outer diameter of the gasket. The software uses the minimum of the flange face
outer diameter and the gasket outer diameter to calculate the outside flange contact point, but
uses the maximum in design when selecting the bolt circle. This is done so that the bolts do not
interfere with the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID and the gasket
ID to calculate the inside contact point of the gasket.
This value is required for calculating the contact gasket width and the effective gasket diameter,
G.
Gasket Inner Diameter

Specifies the inner diameter of the gasket. The software uses the maximum of the flange face ID
and the gasket ID to calculate the inner contact point of the gasket.
G.
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness

Specifies the uncompressed thickness of the gasket. The software uses this value to construct
an elastic compression model of the gasket reaction at the effective gasket diameter.
Effective Gasket Modulus

Specifies the modulus of elasticity of the gasket material that occurs during loading and
unloading of the gasket. Several sources have shown this modulus to be somewhat higher than
the initial tightening modulus for spiral wound metal gaskets. Typical values used for spiral
wound metal gaskets are:
High End: 437500.0
Low End: 347000.0
Typical values are between 300,000 and 400,000 psi for spiral wound gaskets. The
higher the modulus the greater the tendency for the software to predict leakage. Errors on the
high side when estimating this value will lead to a more conservative design.
809
Leak Pressure Ratio

Specifies the ratio of gasket pressure to internal pressure at the instant when leakage starts
multiplied by a factor of safety. This is termed the "Gasket Factor" in ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes
Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other
self-sealing types)
Gasket Factor
Seating Stress
y (^06)
0.
0.
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
Below 75A Shore Durometer
.50
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00
0.
200.
Asbestos with Suitable Binder

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick
2.00
2.75
3.50
600.
3700.
6500.
Elastomers with cotton fabric
1.25
400.
Elastomers with Asbestos fabric

3 ply
2.25
2 ply
2.50
1 ply
2.75
2200.
2900.
3700.
Vegetable fiber
1.75
1100.
2.50
3.00
10000.
10000.
Spiral-wound, asbestos filled:

Carbon
Stainless, Monel, Nickel alloys
810

Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos
or corrugated metal, jacketed
with:
soft aluminum
soft copper or brass
iron or soft steel
Monel or 4%-6% chrome
Stainless steels and nickel
alloys
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
2900.
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
7600.
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75
5500.
6500.
7600.
8000.
9000.
9000.
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25
5500.
6500.
7600.
9000.
10100.
4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50
8800.
13000.
18000.
21800.
26000.
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos
filled
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
Solid flat metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
811
Gasket Seating Stress

Specifies the initial seating stress required for the gasket being used. This entry is required only
if ASME stress calculations are to be performed.
The following table, extracted from Sect VIII Div. 1 gives gasket factors for some common types
of gaskets.
Gasket Materials and Contact Facings Notes
Table 2-5.1
Gasket Material
Self-energizing types (O rings,

metallic elastomer, and other
self-sealing types)
Gasket Factor
Seating Stress
y (^06)
0.
0.
Elastomers without fabric or a

high percent of asbestos fiber:
.50
75A or higher Shore Durometer 1.00
0.
200.

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick
2.00
2.75
3.50
600.
3700.
6500.
1.25
400.

3 ply
2.25
2 ply
2.50
1 ply
2.75
2200.
2900.
3700.
Vegetable fiber
1.75
1100.
2.50
3.00
10000.
10000.

Carbon
812

Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos
or corrugated metal, jacketed
with:
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
2.50
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
2900.
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
2.75
3.00
3.25
3.50
3.75
3700.
4500.
5500.
6500.
7600.
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.50
3.75
3.75
5500.
6500.
7600.
8000.
9000.
9000.
3.25
3.50
3.75
3.75
4.25
5500.
6500.
7600.
9000.
10100.
4.00
4.75
5.50
6.00
6.50
8800.
13000.
18000.
21800.
26000.
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos
filled
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
alloys
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
Solid flat metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
alloys
813
Nubbin Width or Ring

Specifies the nubbin width, if applicable. This value is required only for facing sketches 1c, 1d, 2
and 6 (FLANGE) equivalents 3, 4, 5, and 9). For sketch 9, this is not a nubbin width but the
contact width of the metallic ring.
Facing Sketch
Specifies the facing sketch number according to the following correlations, according to Table
2-5-2 of the ASME code.
Facing Sketch
CAESAR II Equivalent
Description
1a
flat finish faces
1b
serrated finish faces
1c
raised nubbin-flat finish
1d
raised nubbin-serrated finish
1/64 inch nubbin
1/64 inch nubbin both sides
large serrations, one side
large serrations, both sides
metallic O-ring type gasket
G.
Facing Column
Specifies the facing column number according to the following correlations:
Gasket Material
Self-energizing types (O rings, metallic elastomer, and other
self-sealing types)
Facing Column
2
Elastomers without fabric or a high percent of asbestos fiber:

75A or higher Shore Durometer
2
2
814

1/8" thick
1/16" thick
1/32" thick
2
2
2

3 ply
2 ply
1 ply
2
2
2
Vegetable fiber

Carbon
2
2
Corrugated Metal, w/ Asbestos or corrugated metal, jacketed with:

soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
Stainless steels and nickel alloys
2
2
2
2
3.50
Corrugated Metal:
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
2
2
2
2
2
Flat metal, jacketed asbestos filled

soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
Monel
4%-6% chrome
2
2
2
2
2
2
Grooved Metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
2
2
2
2
2
815

Solid flat metal
soft aluminum
iron or soft steel
2
2
2
2
Material Data Tab

The following options are used to define material and stress-related data.
Topics
Flange Material ........................................................................... 816
Bolt Material................................................................................ 816
Design Temperature ................................................................... 816
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature ................................... 817
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ................................. 817
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design ....................................... 817
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient ..................................... 817
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature ........................................ 817
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature ...................................... 818
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier .......................................... 818
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier ................................................... 818
Flange Material
Displays the material database for flanges, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Bolt Material
Displays the material database for bolting, taken from ASME Section VIII, Division 1.
Design Temperature
Specifies the flange design temperature. This value is required for ASME stress calculations,
and for ANSI B16.5/API rating table look-ups.
The design temperature is not used in the flexibility model of the flange.
816
Flange Allowable @ Design Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the design temperature. This value is
required only if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
This value is available in the ASME Sect. VIII Div. 1 material database delivered with the
software. You can access the database by typing a material name in the Flange Material box or
by clicking Browse and selecting a material in the Material Selection list.
When you select a material in the database, fill in the spaces for any material values where the
defaults are not sufficient. Press F1 for guidance on the material values.
Flange Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specifies the allowable stress for the flange material at the ambient temperature. This value is
only required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Design

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the DESIGN case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @ Ambient

Defines the value of the modulus of elasticity to be used for the determination of the Flange
Rigidity Factor "J", for the SEATING case defined in Appendix S of the A93 addendum.
Bolt Allowable @ Design Temperature

Indicates the allowable stress for the bolt material at the design temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
817
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient Temperature

Specify the allowable stress for the bolt material at the ambient temperature. This value is only
required if an ASME stress analysis of the flange is to be performed.
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier

Applies the increased allowable (1.5) for the radial and tangential operating ASME flange
allowables. This increase is implied in B31.1 Appendix II Section 4.2.3 when it states that the
longitudinal hub, tangential and radial stress allowables are equal to the yield stress at design
temperature, which is essentially 1.5(S).
Prior to the 1992 edition of the ASME NC code, NC paragraph 3658.1(d) also stated that
the tangential and radial stress allowables could be increased by 50%. The 1992 edition of NC
eliminated this increase on these allowables.
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier

Designates a factor by which to increase the operating bolt allowables.
Section VIII Division 2, Article 4-141 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code allows for
operating loads on bolts to equal two times the standard table allowables. In some cases, this
increase can be by as much as three times the table allowables.
Loads Tab
The following options are used to describe the imposed loads.
Topics
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 819
Axial Force ................................................................................. 819
Bending Moment......................................................................... 819
Disable Leakage Calculations ..................................................... 819
Disable Stress Calculations......................................................... 819
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check ......................................................... 819
818
Design Pressure
Indicates the internal line pressure (lbs./sq.in.) in gage. This pressure is used in the flexibility
model of the flange in the ASME stress calculations and is the B16.5/API rating.
Axial Force
Defines the externally applied axial force applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. The
software does not include the effect of shear forces in the flexibility model.
Bending Moment
Specifies the external moment applied to the flange joint by the attached piping. If you have two
bending moments, SRSS them and enter the result here.
Disable Leakage Calculations

Turns off the leakage calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a flange
report, which only contains ASME Section VIII, Division 1, Appendix 2 results.
Disable Stress Calculations

Turns off the flange stress calculations performed by CAESAR II. Use this option if you want a
flange report, which only contains leakage calculations and omits ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
Appendix 2 results.
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check

Turns off the report for the ANSI B16.5 Equivalent Pressure check. This check compares the
equivalent pressure to the MAWP (as listed in ANSI B16.5) for the flange class and material.
The ANSI MAWP does not consider bolting or gasket properties, and it is not a good indicator of
the leakage characteristics of the flange.
Flange Rating
This is an optional input. It has been a common practice in the industry to use the ANSI B16.5
and API 605 temperature/pressure rating tables as a gauge for leakage. Because these rating
tables are based on allowable stresses and are not intended for leakage prediction, the leakage
predictions that resulted are a function of the allowable stress for the flange material, not the
flexibility, or modulus of elasticity, of the flange. To give you a comparison to the old practice,
the minimum and maximum rating table values from ANSI and API are stored and are used to
print minimum and maximum leakage safety factors that are predicted from this method. An
example of the output that you get upon entering the flange rating is shown below:
EQUIVALENT PRESSURE MODEL Equivalent Pressure (lb./sq.in.) 1639.85
ANSI/API Min Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1080.00
ANSI/API Max Equivalent Pressure Allowed 1815.00
819

According to the older method, this shows that leakage occurred if a carbon steel flange is used,
and leakage does not occur if an alloy flange is used. Both flanges have essentially the same
flexibility tendency to leak.
The following input parameters are used only for the ASME Section VIII Division 1 stress
calculations:
Flange Type
Flange Outside Diameter
Design Temperature
Small End Hub Thickness
Large End Hub Thickness
Hub Length
Flange Allowables
Bolt Allowables
Gasket Seating Stress
Optional Allowable Multipliers
Flange Face & Gasket Dimensions
Specify the Flange Type (on page 804) on the Flange (see "Flange Tab" on page 804) tab. To
acquire material allowables from the Section VIII, Division 1 material library, use the Flange
Material (on page 816) list on the Material Data (see "Material Data Tab" on page 816) tab.
An input listing for a typical flange analysis is shown below:
CA E S A R I I MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO
Flange Inside Diameter [B](in.) 30.560
Flange Thickness [t](in.) 4.060
Flange Rating (Optional) 300.000
Bolt Circle Diameter (in.) 38.500
Number of Bolts 32.000
Bolt Diameter (in.) 1.500
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress(lb./sq.in.)
Effective Gasket Diameter [G] (in.) 33.888
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness (in.) 0.063
Basic Gasket Width [b0] (in.) 0.375
Leak Pressure Ratio [m] 2.750
Effective Gasket Modulus(b./sq.in.) 300,000.000
Externally Applied Moment (optional)(in.lb.) 24,000.000
Externally Applied Force (optional)(lb.) 1,000.000
Pressure [P](lb./sq.in.) 400.000
The following inputs are required only if you wish to perform stress calcs
as per Sect VIII Div. 1
Flange Type (1-8, see ?-Help or Alt-P to plot) 1.000
Flange Outside Diameter [A](in.) 41.500
Design TemperatureF 650.000
Small End Hub Thickness [g0](in.) 1.690
Large End Hub Thickness [g1](in.) 3.440
Hub Length [h](in.) 6.620
Flange Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
820

Flange Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 17,500.000
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Design(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @Ambient(lb./sq.in.) 0.279E+08
Bolt Allowable @Design Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Bolt Allowable @Ambient Temperature(lb./sq.in.) 25,000.000
Gasket Seating Stress [y](lb./sq.in.) 3,700.000
Flange Allowable Stress Multiplier 1.000
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier (VIII Div 2 4-1411.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt OD(in.) 34.500
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID(in.) 33.000
Gasket Outer Diameter (in.) 36.000
Gasket Inner Diameter (in.) 33.000
Nubbin Width (in.)
Facing Sketch 1.000
Facing Column 2.000
Disable Leakage Calculations (Y/N) N
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G)

Analysis > B31G evaluates corroded pipelines to determine when specific pipe segments must
be replaced. The original B31G document is conservative. CAESAR II performs additional
calculations to modify the original criteria. This additional work can be found in project report
PR-3805, by Battelle, Inc. The details of the original B31G criteria, as well as the modified
methods, are discussed in detail in this report.
CAESAR II determines the following values according to the original B31G criteria and four
modified methods. The values are
The hoop stress to cause failure
The maximum allowed operating pressure
The maximum allowed flaw length
The four modified methods vary in the manner in which the corroded area is estimated. The
methods are:
.85dL - Approximates the corroded area as 0.85 times the maximum pit depth times the flaw
length.
Exact - Determines the corroded area numerically using the trapezoid method.
Equivalent - Determines the corroded area by multiplying the average pit depth by the flaw
length. Additionally, an equivalent flaw length (flaw length * average pit depth / maximum pit
depth) is used in the computation of the Folias factor.
Effective - Uses a numerical trapezoid summation; however, various sub-lengths of the total
flaw length are used to arrive at a worst case condition. If the sub-length that produces the
worst case coincides with the total length, the Exact and Effective methods yield the same
result.
821

The software opens the Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations (B31G) window. The
window consists of two input tabs--Data (see "Data Tab" on page 823) and Measurements (see
"Measurements Tab" on page 825).
822

After the data is entered, click Run Analysis
report is shown below:
to begin the computations. A typical output
For additional information or backup on these computations, an intermediate computation

file is generated.
For more information on the analysis methods used by this command, see the B31G
document or the Battelle project report PR-3-805.
Data Tab
Most of the data required by this processor is acquired through actual field
measurements.
823

Topics
Pipe Nominal Diameter ............................................................... 824
Pipe Wall Thickness.................................................................... 824
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 824
Material Yield Strength ................................................................ 824
Material Specified Minimum Yield ............................................... 824
Flaw Length ................................................................................ 824
Measurement Increment ............................................................. 825
Factor of Safety (FS)................................................................... 825
Design Factor (S)........................................................................ 825
Pipe Nominal Diameter

Specifies the pipe diameter.
Pipe Wall Thickness

Specifies the un-corroded pipe wall thickness.
Design Pressure
Specifies the design pressure. This value is the maximum pressure reported in the output
section, although the maximum allowed pressure may be less than the input design pressure.
Material Yield Strength

Defines the material yield strength. If this value is unknown, enter the specified minimum yield
strength in this cell.
Material Specified Minimum Yield

Defines the minimum yield strength.
Flaw Length
Indicates the length of flaw or anomaly. This value is a measured quantity, usually taken in a
straight line.
824
Measurement Increment
Specify the measurement increment in this cell. This value defines how often along the flaw
length depth or thickness measurements are made.
The number of measurements should be calculated by ( flaw length / measurement increment )
+1
Factor of Safety (FS)

Defines the factor of safety. For those pipelines in which the maximum operating stress level
does not exceed 72% of the specified minimum yield strength, the safety factor is 100/72 = 1.39.
The safety factor cannot be less than 1.0.
Design Factor (S)

Specifies the design factor from the applicable piping code.
Measurements Tab
You can enter a maximum of twenty pit measurements on the Measurements input screen.
825

First, you must define the measurements. Select Pits if the measurements are in pit depths.
Select Thicknesses if the measurements are remaining wall thicknesses.
Pit depths are required for the computations. If remaining thicknesses are specified, the
pit depths are computed from wall thickness - remaining thickness.
In the individual cells, enter the measurement obtained along the flaw length. The values are
based on the selection of Pits or Thicknesses.
Expansion Joint Rating

Analysis > Expansion Joint Rating computes a limit for the total displacement per corrugation
of an expansion joint. According to EJMA (Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association), the
maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation is defined as e rated where
ex + ey + eq < erated
The terms in the above equation are defined as:
ex = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed axial movements.
ey = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed lateral deflections.
eq = The axial displacement per corrugation resulting from imposed angular rotation, that is,
bending.
erated = The maximum permitted amount of axial movement per corrugation. You can find this
value in the expansion joint manufacturers catalog.
In addition, EJMA states, Also, [as an expansion joint is rotated or deflected laterally] it should
be noted that one side of the bellows attains a larger projected area than the opposite side.
Under the action of the applied pressure, unbalanced forces are set up which tend to distort the
expansion joint further. In order to control the effects of these two factors a second limit is
established by the manufacturer upon the amount of angular rotation and/or lateral deflection
which may be imposed upon the expansion joint. This limit may be less than the rated
movement. Therefore, in the selection of an expansion joint, care must be exercised to avoid
exceeding either of these manufacturers limits.
This module is intended to assist you in satisfying these limitations. This module computes the
terms defined in the above equation and the movement of the joint ends relative to each other.
These relative movements are reported in both the local joint coordinate system and the global
coordinate system.
826

The software opens the EJMA Expansion Joint window. The window consists of three input
screens--Geometry (on page 830), Displacements and Rotations (on page 831), and Allowables
(on page 831).
After the necessary data is entered, click Run Analysis

to begin the computations. After
processing completes, a report displaying both the input echo and the output calculations are
shown on a new tab called Output.
827

The units used for the coordinate and displacement values are the length units defined in
the active units file. Rotations are in units of degrees.
C A E S A R II MISCELLANEOUS REPORT ECHO

EJMA EXPANSION JOINT RATING
Node Number for FROM end 120.000
Node Number for TO end 125.000
Number of Convolutions 4.000
Flexible Joint Length (in.)4.447
Effective Diameter(in.)4.996
X Coordinate of from end (in.).000
Y Coordinate of from end (in.).000
Z Coordinate of from end (in.).000
X Coordinate of to end (in.)4.447
X Displacement of from end (in.).300
Y Displacement of from end (in.).250
Z Displacement of from end (in.).000
X Rotation of from end (deg).000
Y Rotation of from end (deg)1.222
Z Rotation of from end (deg).030
X Displacement of to end (in.)-.100
Y Displacement of to end (in.).120
Z Displacement of to end (in.).000
828

X Rotation of to end (deg).000
Y Rotation of to end (deg)-.020
Z Rotation of to end (deg).890
OUTPUT:
AXIAL DISPLACEMENTS PER CONVOLUTION
Axial Displacement.100
Axial Displacement due to Lateral .133
Axial Displacement due to Rotation.016
Axial Displacement TOTAL.250
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j
(Local Joint Coordinate System)
Relative Axial Displacement, x.401
Relative Lateral Displacement, y.158
Relative Bending, theta (deg)1.511
Relative Torsion (deg) .019
RELATIVE MOVEMENTS OF END i WITH RESPECT TO END j
(Global Piping Coordinate System)
Relative X Displacement-.399
Relative Y Displacement-.132
Relative Z Displacement.095
Relative Rotation about X (deg).000
Relative Rotation about Y (deg)-1.242
Relative Rotation about Z (deg).860
In the previous output, the axial displacement total in the report is the total axial displacement
per corrugation due to axial, lateral, and rotational displacement of the expansion joint ends.
This is the value that is compared to the rated axial displacement per corrugation. If e (total) is
greater than the rated axial displacement per corrugation, then there is the possibility of
premature bellows failure. Be sure that the displacement rating from the manufacturer is on a
per corrugation basis. If it is not, multiply the axial displacement total by the number of
corrugations and compare this value to the manufacturers allowable axial displacement. Most
manufacturers allowed rating is for some set number of cycles (often 10,000). If the actual
number of cycles is less, then the allowed movement can often be greater. Similarly, if the actual
number of cycles is greater than 10,000, then the allowed movement can be smaller. In special
situations, contact the manufacturers because many factors can affect allowed bellows
movement.
The y in the report is the total relative lateral displacement of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other, and theta is the total relative angular rotation of one end of the bellows with
respect to the other. CAESAR II does not include x in the denominator for the lateral
displacement calculations as outlined in EJMA.
829
Geometry
Topics
Node Number for "From" End ...................................................... 830
Node Number for "To" End .......................................................... 830
Number of Convolutions .............................................................. 830
Flexible Joint Length ................................................................... 830
Effective Diameter ....................................................................... 830
Z Axis Up .................................................................................... 831
Coordinates................................................................................. 831
Node Number for "From" End

Identifies the node number that represents the From end of the expansion joint. This value is
used for labeling purposes.
Node Number for "To" End

Identifies the node number that represents the To end of the expansion joint. This value is used
for labeling purposes.
Number of Convolutions
Defines the number of convolutions in the expansion joint.
Flexible Joint Length

Specifies the flexible length of the bellows.
Effective Diameter
Specifies the diameter of the circle whose area is equal to the effective area of the expansion
joint. The effective ID can be estimated using the following equation:
1.13 * sqrt (Effective Area)
You can find the effective area of the joint in the manufacturer's catalog.
830
Z Axis Up
Indicates that the z-axis is upward in your CAESAR II input file.
Coordinates
Defines the spatial coordinate at the appropriate end of the expansion joint
Displacements and Rotations

Defines the displacements and rotations at the appropriate end of the expansion joint. These
values typically come from the displacement report of a CAESAR II run.
Allowables
Specifies the allowed expansion joint movement (translation or rotation) on a per convolution
basis and for the entire bellows. Enter values using the following units of measure:
Axial
inches
Lateral
inches
Bending
inches or degrees
Torsional
inches or degrees
You can acquire this data using the vendor catalog.
Structural Steel Checks - AISC

Analyze > AISC performs AISC code check on structural steel elements. Compliance is
evaluated according to the AISC (American Institute of Steel Construction) code. This code
check uses the forces and moments at the ends of the structural members, computes stresses,
and allowables, and determines a unity check value. If the unity check value is less than 1.0, the
member is acceptable for the given loading conditions. CAESAR II performs the AISC unity
check according to either the 1977 or the 1989 edition of the AISC code.
Member properties are obtained from the AISC database and used to compute the actual
and allowable stress values for the axial and bending terms comprising the unity check
equations. The database must be either AISC77.BIN or AISC89.BIN and is set using Tools >
Configuration/Setup. For more information, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).
There are a few differences between the 1977 and 1989 AISC Code Revisions that affect unity
check computation. The most noticeable difference is that the 1989 code provides a method for
computing the unity check on single angles. This procedure, which was not addressed in the
1977 code, can be found in a special code section following the commentary. The steps
necessary to compute the unity check for single angles can be followed by reviewing the
message file (generated upon request).
831

The other differences between these two code revisions deal with members in compression.
Several constants for Qs have been altered, and a new factor kc has been added. kc is a
compression element restraint coefficient defined in the 1989 edition of the code.
Because of these code differences, CAESAR II stores the name of the active database in the
input file for the AISC module when the data file is first created. Attempting to switch databases
or compute unity checks on angles using the 1977 code generates error messages and
processing terminates. You are urged to consult the applicable AISC Manuals when using this
command.
To begin the unity check calculations, specify a new job name in the New Job Name
Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
The software displays the AISC window, which consists of two input screens:Global Input (on
page 834) and Local Member Data (see "Local Member Data Tab" on page 836).
832

Output Reports
You can direct the output reports to the screen or to a printer. The output report begins with a
one page summary describing the current global data and units, as shown below.
The remaining pages in the output report show the data for the individual members. The last
column of the report contains the most important data (namely the unity check value) and the
governing AISC equation. A sample member output reports are shown below. The report is
applicable to jobs where sidesway is allowed.
833
Global Input
The following options are used to enter data that applies to all members being evaluated.
Topics
Structural Code........................................................................... 834
Allowable Stress Increase Factor ................................................ 834
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz ..................................... 834
Youngs Modulus ........................................................................ 835
Bending Coefficient ..................................................................... 835
Form Factor Qa .......................................................................... 835
Allow Sidesway ........................................................................... 835
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . . ...................... 835
Minimum Desired Unity Check .................................................... 836
Maximum Desired Unity Check ................................................... 836
Structural Code
Identifies the code and year, typically matching the database in use. Slight variations in the
computations depend on which code year is selected. Single angles can only be checked if
AISC 1989 is selected.
Allowable Stress Increase Factor

Designates the multiplication factor applied to the computed values of the axial and bending
allowable stresses. Typically, this value is 1.0. However, in extreme events, such as
earthquakes and 100-year storms, the AISC code permits the allowable stresses to be
increased by a factor. Usually, a 1/3 increase is applied to the computed allowables, making the
allowable stress increase factor equal to 1.33. For more details see the AISC code, section
1.5.6.
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and Cmz

Specifies the interaction formula coefficients (Cmy and Cmz) for the strong and weak axis of the
elements (in-plane and out-of-plane). Values include the following:
0.85 for compression members in frames subject to joint translation (sidesway).
For restrained compression members in frames braced against sidesway and not subject to
transverse loading between supports in the plane of bending:
0.6 - 0.4(M1/M2)
but not less than 0.4, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
ends, of that portion of the member un-braced in the plane of bending under consideration.
For compression members in frames braced against joint translation in the plane of loading
and subject to transverse loading between supports, the value of Cmy can be determined by
rational analysis. Alternatively, the following values are suggested per the AISC code:
0.85 for members whose ends are restrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
834
1.0 for members whose ends are unrestrained against rotation in the plane of bending.
Youngs Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi.

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point).
Bending Coefficient
Specifies the bending coefficient (Cb). Use 1.0 in computing the value of Fby and Fbz for use in
Formula 1.6-1a or when the bending moment at any point in an unbraced length is larger than
the moment at either end of the same length. Otherwise, Cb shall be:
Cb = 1.75 + 1.05(M1/M2) + 0.3(M1/M2)2
but not more than 2.3, where (M1/M2) is the ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the ends.
Form Factor Qa
Defines the allowable axial stress reduction factor equal to the effective area divided by the
actual area.
Consult the latest edition of the AISC code for the current computation methods for the
effective area.
Allow Sidesway
Controls the ability of a frame or structure to experience sidesway (joint translation). This affects
the computation of several of the coefficients used in the unity check equations. Additionally, for
frames braced against sidesway, moments at each end of the member are required. Sidesway
is allowed.
Resize Members Whose Unity Check Value Is . . .

Determines whether the AISC module attempts to resize specific members as a result of the
unity check computations. This option is most often used for an initial pass at optimization.
Selecting this option requires that you specify a minimum unity check and a maximum unity
check. If the computed unity check falls outside this range, the module resizes the member
appropriately. The final member size is shown in the output report.
A resized member overwrites the initial input member size in the input file (input and output
share a common file). If member resizing occurs, check the final member size to ensure the
following:
1. The selected member is commonly available.
835

2. The selected member is optimal in its group.
3. The selected member does not violate fabrication requirements for flange or web size.
Minimum Desired Unity Check

Defines the minimum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is less than this minimum are resized to a
smaller shape.
The Minimum Desired Unity Check value must be less than the Maximum Desired
Unity Check value. The recommended value for the minimum desired unity check is 0.7, which
allows lightly loaded members to be reduced in size.
Maximum Desired Unity Check

Defines the maximum acceptable unity check allowed. Accepted values are between 0.0 and
1.0. Members whose computed unity check value is greater than this maximum are resized to a
larger shape.
The Maximum Desired Unity Check value must be greater than the Minimum
Desired Unity Check value. The recommended value for the maximum desired unity check is
0.9, which leaves a margin for loading inaccuracies.
Local Member Data Tab

The following options are used to enter local member data for each member being evaluated.
Topics
Member Start Node..................................................................... 837
Member End Node...................................................................... 837
Member Type ............................................................................. 837
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz ...................... 837
Unsupported Axial Length ........................................................... 838
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending) ..................................... 838
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending) .............................. 838
Double Angle Spacing ................................................................ 838
Young's Modulus ........................................................................ 838
Axial Member Force .................................................................... 838
In-Plane Bending Moment........................................................... 839
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment .................................................... 839
In-Plane Small Bending Moment............................................... 839
In-Plane Large Bending Moment............................................... 839
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment ........................................ 839
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment ........................................ 839
836
Member Start Node

Identifies the start node, or i end, of a structural element. This option is required. Enter an
integer value between 1 and 32,000.
Member End Node

Identifies the member end node, or the j end, of a structural element. This option is required.
Enter an integer value between 1 and 32,000.
Member Type
Specifies the AISC shape label found in the AISC manual. The shape label is used to acquire
the member geometric properties from the database. For properties to be obtained, the label
you enter must match exactly the label in the database.
Because many of the angle labels can be found in the single angles, the double angles (long
legs back to back), and the double angles (short legs back to back), require an angle type to tell
them apart. Enter a D double angles with equal legs, and double angles with long legs back to
back. Enter a B for double angles with short legs back to back.
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky And Kz

Specifies the coefficients used to compute the strong and weak axis slenderness ratios.
Recommended values are listed in the following table:
End Conditions Theoretical K Recommended Design K
fixed-fixed
0.5
0.65
fixed-pinned
0.7
0.8
fixed-sliding
1.0
1.2
pinned-pinned
1.0
1.0
fixed-free
2.0
2.1
pinned-sliding
2.0
2.0
837
Unsupported Axial Length

Defines the length used to determine the buckling strength of the member. Typically, this is the
total length of the member.
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
strong axis of the member.
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane Bending)

Defines the length of the member between braces or supports which prevent bending about the
weak axis of the member.
Double Angle Spacing

Indicates the gap or space separating the adjacent legs. The spacing, as defined in the AISC
manual, must be 0.0, .375, or .75-inches.
Young's Modulus
Specifies the slope of the linear portion of the stress-strain diagram. For structural steel this
value is usually 29,000,000 psi. This value of Youngs modulus overrides the Young's Modulus
(see "Youngs Modulus" on page 835) value specified on the Global Input tab.

Defines the minimum yield stress of the steel being used. The term yield stress denotes the
minimum yield point (for those steels that have a yield point) or the minimum yield strength (for
those that do not have a yield point). This value of the material yield strength overrides the
Material Yield Strength (on page 835) value specified on the Global Input tab.
Axial Member Force

Specifies the force (tension or compression) that acts along the axis of the member. The sign of
the number is not significant because a worst case load condition is assumed, that is, all positive
loads.
838
In-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member. The sign of the number is not
significant because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment

Specifies the maximum bending moment in the member (when sidesway is permitted) that will
cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the member. The sign of the number is not significant
because a worst case load condition of all positive loads is assumed
In-Plane Small Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the smaller of
the two in-plane bending moments that cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the member.
In-Plane Large Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the larger of
the two in-plane bending moments which cause bending about the strong axis Y-Y of the
member.
Out-of-Plane Small Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the smaller of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.
Out-of-Plane Large Bending Moment

Specifies the end moments for structures braced against sidesway. This value is the larger of
the two out-of-plane bending moments that cause bending about the weak axis Z-Z of the
member.
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines)

Analysis > NEMA SM23 evaluates piping loads on steam turbine nozzles. There are two types
of force/moment allowables computed during a NEMA run:
Individual nozzle allowables.
Cumulative equipment allowables.
Each individual suction, discharge, and extraction nozzle must satisfy the equation:
3F + M < 500De
Where:
F = resultant force on the particular nozzle.
839

M = resultant moment on the particular nozzle.
De = effective nominal pipe size of the connection.
A typical discharge nozzle calculation is shown below
For cumulative equipment allowables, NEMA SM23 states that "the combined resultants of the
forces and moments of the inlet, extraction, and exhaust connections resolved at the centerline
of the exhaust connection", be within a certain multiple of Dc, where Dc is the diameter of an
opening whose area is equal to the sum of the areas of all of the individual equipment
connections. A typical turbine cumulative (summation) equipment calculation is shown below:
SFX, SFY, and SFZ are the respective components of the forces from all connections resolved
at the discharge nozzle. FC(RSLT) is the result of these forces. SMX, SMY and SMZ are the
respective components of the moments from all connections resolved at the discharge nozzle.
Dc is the diameter of the equivalent opening as discussed above.
840

The software opens the NEMA SM23 window. Aside from the description, there is only one input
tab for the NEMA turbine. The Nema Input tab enables iterative addition of an arbitrary number
of nozzles to the model. To add a nozzle, click Add Nozzle.
NEMA Turbine Example

Consider a turbine where node 35 represents the inlet nozzle and node 50 represents the outlet
nozzle. The output from a CAESAR II analysis of this piping system includes the forces and
moments acting on the pipe elements that attach to the turbine:
NODE
FX
FY
FZ
MX
MY
MZ
30
-108
-49
-93
73
188
603
35
108
67
93
162
-47
-481
50
-192
-11
369
-522
39
55
192
-63
11
78
117
-56
To find the forces acting on the turbine at points 35 and 50, reverse the sign of the forces that
act on the piping:
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 35 -108 -67 -93 -162 47 481
LOADS ON TURBINE @ 50 192 -7 11 -369 522 -39
Output Reports
The first page of the output is the input echo. The second page, as well as some of the
remaining pages, display the individual nozzle calculations. The last page displays the
summation calculations. The example below shows a sample input echo report.
841

The actual number of output pages varies and depends on the number of nozzles
defined in the input.
842

The NEMA output report for the above turbine example shows that the turbine passed. The
highest summation load is only 56% of the allowable. If the turbine had failed, **FAILED** would
have displayed, in red, under the STATUS column opposite to the load combination that was
excessive. The following two examples show sample NEMA output nozzle calculations and
NEMA output summation calculations, respectively.
843
NEMA Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads for steam
turbine nozzles.
Topics
Z-Axis Vertical ............................................................................ 844
Cos X & Y................................................................................... 844
Nozzle Number ........................................................................... 844
Nozzle Type................................................................................ 845
Nozzle Diameter ......................................................................... 845
DX .............................................................................................. 845
DY .............................................................................................. 845
DZ .............................................................................................. 846
Global Force FX.......................................................................... 846
Global Force FY.......................................................................... 846
Global Force FZ .......................................................................... 846
Global Moment MX ..................................................................... 846
Global Moment MY ..................................................................... 846
Global Moment MZ ..................................................................... 846
Select Load Jobs and Load Case ................................................ 847
Z-Axis Vertical
Controls the plane in which the Z-axis lies. By default, CAESAR II assumes the Y-axis is vertical
with the X- and Z-axes in the horizontal plane. If you select this option, the software places the
Z-axis in the vertical plane, and the X- and Y-axes are in the horizontal plane.
Cos X & Y
Specifies the direction cosines (X, Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are as follows:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
Nozzle Number
Identifies the node number that describes the nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive number
only.
844
Nozzle Type
Identifies the nozzle type. This is used only for informational purposes in the output report.
Nozzle Diameter
Specifies the nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
DX
Specifies the X-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
NEMA SM 23 is ambiguous about the point of resolution of the combined forces and moments.
The resolution points are interpreted to be the following two points:
1. The face of the flange at the exhaust nozzle connection.
2. The intersection point of the exhaust nozzle centerline and the equipment shaft centerline.
In order to resolve the forces and moments at the current nozzle connection, enter the
X-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle is 0.0. In order to resolve the forces and moments at the intersection point of the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the X-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
DY
Specifies the Y-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
Y-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Y-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
845
DZ
Specifies the Z-distance from the force/moment resolution point to the nozzle.
Z-distance from the current nozzle to each connection. Distance from the exhaust to the exhaust
nozzle and the shaft centerlines, enter the Z-distance from the intersection point to each
connection.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the nozzle.
846
Select Load Jobs and Load Case

Opens up a dialog box that you can use to navigate to the appropriate loads job or load case.
Errors/Warnings Tab
The software displays the Errors/Warnings tab when the equipment jobs that you are analyzing
have issues. The software prompts you to the warnings found and asks you if you want to
continue the analysis. In some cases, no action is needed. In other situations, you can review
the error messages and correct issues in the input before re-analyzing the job.
Equipment Report Tab

Displays the equipment analysis results in a report format. The software displays results on this
tab only after you enter and analyze equipment. You can save, print, cut text , copy and paste
text, and export the entire report into a Microsoft Word document.
If there are issues during the equipment analysis the software displays an
Errors/Warnings tab with details on the issues.
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps)

Analyze > API 610 evaluates piping loads on centrifugal pumps. In October 2004, API released
the 10th edition of API 610 for centrifugal pumps for general refinery service. The API 610 load
satisfaction criteria are outlined below:
847

If clause F.1.2 is satisfied, then the pump is acceptable. Clause F.1.2a states that the individual
component nozzle loads must fall below two times the allowables listed in the Nozzle Loadings
table (Table 4) shown below:
Further, F.1.2 b) and c) must also be satisfied.

Clause F.1.2b states that the resultant applied forces and moments acting on each pump nozzle
flange shall satisfy the equations F.1 and F.2 of the code. Referring to the API 610 report, you
can determine whether F.1.2b is satisfied by comparing the Force/Moment to two. If either
resultant exceeds two, the nozzle status is reported as ** FAILED **.
The F.1.2c requirements give equations translating the applied component forces and moments
to the center of the pump. The requirements of these equations, and whether they have satisfied
API 610, are shown on the bottom of the report.
To begin an analysis of piping loads on centrifugal pumps, specify a new job name in the New
Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file. .
The software displays the API 610 dialog box, which consists of three data input tabs: Input
Data (see "Input Data Tab" on page 853), Suction Nozzle (see "Suction Nozzle Tab" on page
856), and Discharge Nozzle (see "Discharge Nozzle Tab" on page 857).
After you input all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
Report tab (on page 847). If any errors occur in the analysis, the software displays the
Error/Warnings tab (see "Errors/Warnings Tab" on page 847).
848

The following example is taken from the API 610 code and shows the review of an overhung
end-suction process pump in English units. The three CAESAR II input tabs are shown.
849
850
An example of the processing output is shown below:
851

API 610 Discharge Nozzle
852
Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads on centrifugal
pumps.
Topics
Vertical In-Line Pumps ................................................................ 854
Centerline Direction Cosine X ..................................................... 854
Centerline Direction Cosine Z ..................................................... 854
Basepoint Node Number ............................................................. 855
Suction Nozzle Node Number ..................................................... 855
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter ............................................... 855
Suction Nozzle Type ................................................................... 855
Discharge ................................................................................... 855
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter ........................................... 855
Discharge Nozzle Type ............................................................... 855
Factor for Table 4 Allowables ...................................................... 856
853
Vertical In-Line Pumps

Indicates that the pump is the vertical in-line type supported only by the attached piping. API
states that for the vertical in-line pump, you can use 2.0 times the loads from Table 4. However,
even if the pump fails the 2.0 Table 2 criteria, it may still pass. If the principal stress on the
nozzle is less than 6,000 psi, then that nozzle passes. If the principal stress on either nozzle is
greater than 6,000 psi, the overall status is reported as **FAILED**
In API 610 there is an example problem which illustrates the way stresses are computed on
these in-line pump nozzles. The two basic equations for determining stress are
Stresses (s) = Force / Area + Moment / Section Modulus
Shear Stresses (t) = Force / Area + Torque * distance / J
Where J is the polar moment of inertia.
In the second equation, both terms of the equation are always added together. On the other
hand, the Force/Area term in the first equation depends on the sign of the force (tension or
compression) that you enter in the force and moment spreadsheet. The sign of the force is
determined by Centerline Direction Cosine X (on page 854). For vertical in-line pumps, enter the
value in the direction extending from the discharge to the suction nozzle. The distances that are
usually entered for pedestal mounted pumps can be left blank because they are not used.
Centerline Direction Cosine X

Indicates one of the following, depending on whether Vertical In-Line Pumps is selected.
Vertical In-Line Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the nozzles. The positive
direction is from discharge to the suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are in the
X-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=1.0
cosine Z=0.0
Horizontal Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the pump centerline. For
example, if the pump is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=0.0
cosine Z=1.0
Centerline Direction Cosine Z

Indicates one of the following, depending on whether Vertical In-Line Pumps is selected.
Vertical In-Line Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the nozzles. The positive
direction is from discharge to the suction nozzle. For example, if the nozzles are in the
X-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=1.0
cosine Z=0.0
Horizontal Pumps - Specifies the direction cosines (X,Z) for the pump centerline. For
example, if the pump is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X=0.0
cosine Z=1.0
854
Basepoint Node Number

Identifies the node number that describes the intersection of the axis of the shaft and the
centerline of the pedestals. Enter only a positive value. This node does not have to appear in
any of the piping models but is used by API 610 as a point of reference on the pump about
which to sum moments.
In the 8th Ed. of the Standard, the base point refers to the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined by the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
midway between the four pedestals.
Suction Nozzle Node Number

Identifies the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Defines the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Suction Nozzle Type

Specifies the location of the suction nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End. Each position has
different allowables.
For pumps with centerline along Y-axis (vertical), select Side.
Discharge
Identifies the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter only a
positive number.
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Defines the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Discharge Nozzle Type

Specifies the location of the discharge nozzle. Select Top, Side, or End. Each position has
different allowables.
For pumps with centerline along Y-axis (vertical), select Side.
855
Factor for Table 4 Allowables

Defines the factor by which all Table 4 allowables are multiplied. This value is between 1.0 and
2.0. Values less than 1.0 are replaced by a default factor of 1.0, while values larger than 2.0 are
replaced by a default factor of 2.0. If left blank, a default value of 1.0 is used.
Typically, a value of 1.0 is used when evaluating individual nozzle loads. When checking vertical
in-line pumps, this value can be equal to 2.0. The value of 2.0 is also valid when suction and
discharge nozzle loads are evaluated together as defined in Appendix F of the API 610
Standard.
Suction Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for suction nozzles.
Topics
DX .............................................................................................. 856
DY .............................................................................................. 856
DZ .............................................................................................. 857
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................ 857
Moments on Nozzle .................................................................... 857
DX
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z-distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
The API 610 10th Edition defines the base point as the center of the pump. The center of the
pump is defined as the intersection of the pump shaft centerline and a vertical plane passing
through the center of the two pedestals.
DY
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
856
DZ
Specifies the distance between the suction nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the suction nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is, if
the suction nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X, Y, and Z distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are not
used.
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction
nozzle.
Discharge Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used for discharge nozzles.
Topics
DX .............................................................................................. 858
DY .............................................................................................. 858
DZ .............................................................................................. 858
Forces on Nozzle ........................................................................ 859
Moments on Nozzle .................................................................... 859
857
DX
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the X-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle X-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive X-axis.
When analyzing vertical in-line pumps, the X-, Y-, and Z- distances (DX, DY, and DZ) are
not used.
DY
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Y-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Y-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Y-axis.
used.
DZ
Specifies the distance between the discharge nozzle and base point along the Z-axis. Enter a
positive value if the discharge nozzle Z-coordinate is greater than that of the base point, that is,
if the discharge nozzle is farther out on the positive Z-axis.
used.
858
Forces on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Enter the forces in their global orientation. For vertical in-line pumps, the orientation of the
nozzle centerline is used to determine if the nozzle is in tension or compression. Positive
direction is from discharge to suction nozzle.
Moments on Nozzle
Identifies the X-, Y-, or Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the
discharge nozzle.
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors)

Analysis > API 617 evaluates piping loads on compressors. The requirements of this standard
are similar to those of NEMA SM-23 (1991). The allowable load values for API-617 are
approximately 85% higher than the NEMA allowables.
The software opens the API 617 dialog box, which consists of the following five input tabs:
API 617 Input (see "API 617 Input Tab" on page 860)
Suction Nozzle (see "Suction Nozzle Tab" on page 862)
Discharge Nozzle (see "Discharge Nozzle Tab" on page 863)
Extraction Nozzle #1 (see "Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab" on page 864)
859
Extraction Nozzle #2 (see "Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab" on page 866)
API 617 Input Tab

Topics
Node Number .............................................................................. 861
Nominal Diameter........................................................................ 861
Node Number .............................................................................. 861
Node Number .............................................................................. 861
Node Number .............................................................................. 861
Equipment Centerline .................................................................. 861
Factor for Allowables ................................................................... 862
860
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the suction nozzle flange connection. Enter a positive
number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the suction nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #1 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #1 pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the discharge nozzle flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the discharge nozzle pipe nominal diameter.
Node Number
Indicates the node number that describes the extraction nozzle #2 flange connection. Enter a
positive number.
Nominal Diameter
Specifies the extraction nozzle #2 pipe nominal diameter.
Equipment Centerline
Indicates the direction cosines (X,Z) for the equipment shaft centerline. For example, if shaft CL
is along the Z-axis, the direction cosines are:
cosine X = 0.0
cosine Z = 1.0
861
Factor for Allowables

Designates the multiplication factor by which all allowables are multiplied, if necessary
API 617 does not recommend the use of a multiplier. The code specifically states what
the allowables are.
Suction Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for suction nozzles.
Topics
X Distance to Suction.................................................................. 862
Y Distance to Suction.................................................................. 862
Z Distance to Suction .................................................................. 862
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 862
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 863
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle ............................................... 863
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle ........................................... 863
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle ............................................ 863
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle............................................ 863
X Distance to Suction
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Y Distance to Suction
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
Z Distance to Suction
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the suction nozzle.
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
862
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the suction nozzle.
Discharge Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for discharge nozzles.
Topics
X Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 863
Y Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 864
Z Distance to Discharge.............................................................. 864
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 864
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 864
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 864
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ....................................... 864
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle ....................................... 864
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle ........................................... 864
X Distance to Discharge
Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
863
Y Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
Z Distance to Discharge
Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the discharge nozzle.
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
X Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Y Moment Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the discharge
nozzle.
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the discharge nozzle.
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #1.
864

Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................. 865
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 ............................................. 865
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1.............................................. 865
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 865
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 865
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ...................................... 865
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 865
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 865
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 866
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #1.
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Y Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
865
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the extraction nozzle #2.
Topics
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................. 866
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 ............................................. 866
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2.............................................. 866
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle ..................................... 866
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle........................................ 867
Z Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle...................................... 867
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 867
Y Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 867
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle .................................. 867
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the X-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Y-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2

Specifies the Z-distance from the largest suction/discharge nozzle to the extraction nozzle #2.
X Force Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
866
Y Moment Acting on Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on |the extraction
nozzle #2.

Specifies the Z-component of the force that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
X Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the X-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.

Specifies the Y-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-component of the moment that the piping system exerts on the extraction nozzle
#1.
867
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat Exchangers)

Analysis > API 661 evaluates piping loads on air-cooled heat exchangers. These calculations
cover the allowed loads on the vertical, co-linear nozzles (item 9 in the figure below) found on
most single or multi-bundled air cooled heat exchangers. The following figures from API 661
illustrate the type of open exchanger body analyzed by this standard.
There are two requirements that must be met for API 661 compliance:
7.1.10.1 - Each nozzle, in its design corroded condition, must be capable of withstanding the
simultaneous application of the moments and forces defined in the Typical Construction of a
Tube Bundle with Plug Headers figure in the API 661 code standard.
7.1.10.2 - The design of each fixed or floating header, the design of the connections of fixed
headers to side frames, and the design of other support members should ensure that the
simultaneous application (sum) of all nozzle loadings on a single header does not cause any
damage. The components of the nozzle loadings on a single header should not exceed the
following values:
Mx
6100 Nm (4500 ftlbf)
My
8130 Nm (6000 ftlbf)
Mz
4070 Nm (3000 ftlbf)
Fx
10,010 N (2250 lbf)
Fy
20,020 (4500 lbf)
Fz
`6,680 (3750 lbf)
868

The software opens the API 661 dialog box, which allows you to specify project-specific
information, such as a description of the equipment, and details about the Input Data (see "Input
Data Tab" on page 869), Inlet Nozzle (see "Inlet Nozzle Tab" on page 871), and Outlet Nozzle
(see "Outlet Nozzle Tab" on page 872).
Input Data Tab

The following options are used to enter input data used to evaluate piping loads on air-cooled
heat exchangers.
Topics
Inlet Nozzle Node Number .......................................................... 870
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter .................................................... 870
Outlet Nozzle Node Number ....................................................... 870
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter ................................................. 870
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier ......................................... 870
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier ....................................... 870
Tube Bundle Direction ................................................................ 870
Z-Axis Vertical ............................................................................ 870
869
Inlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the inlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger inlet connection.
Outlet Nozzle Node Number

Indicates the outlet nozzle node number that is the connecting point between piping and the
exchanger. This entry is optional. If defined, enter a positive number.
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter

Specifies the nominal diameter of the exchanger outlet connection.
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier

Defines the Force and Moment multiplier as referenced in Figure 6, Nozzle Loads, in the API
661 code standard. The software bases the pass or fail status on this value. If you leave this
option blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.
Resultant Force and Moment Multiplier

Indicates the resultant force and moment multiplier. The computed force and moment ratios are
compared to this value. If you leave this option blank, the software uses a default value of 1.0.
Tube Bundle Direction

Specifies the CAESAR II global tube direction. If the X-direction is defined, the force and
moment allowables for the X- and Z-directions are flipped. The same applies to the Resultant
Force and Moment Multiplier allowables.
Z-Axis Vertical
Indicates that this equipment uses the Z-axis as the vertical reference for the model.
870
Inlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the inlet nozzle.
Topics
DY (Nozzle Orientation) .............................................................. 871
Global Force FX.......................................................................... 871
Global Force FY.......................................................................... 871
Global Force FZ .......................................................................... 871
Global Moment MX ..................................................................... 871
Global Moment MY ..................................................................... 871
Global Moment MZ ..................................................................... 872
DY (Nozzle Orientation)
Designates the Y-dimension of the suction nozzle to the header center. This dimension must be
positive. Refer to Figure 5 in API 661. In the figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the
approximate center of the header location.
Global Force FX
Specifies the X-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Force FY
Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle. This component can be
considered a radial load.
Global Force FZ
Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MX
Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
Global Moment MY
Specifies the Y-moment that the piping system exerts on the inlet nozzle.
871
Global Moment MZ
Specifies the Z-moment that the piping system exerts on the Inlet nozzle.
Outlet Nozzle Tab

The following options are used to enter input data for the outlet nozzle.
Topics
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face ......................... 872
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................ 872
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle ................................................ 872
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle................................................. 872
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................. 872
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle ............................................. 873
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle ........................................... 873
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle Face

Indicates the Y-dimension of the header center to the discharge nozzle. Refer to Figure 5 in API
661. In this figure, the number 6 arrowhead points to the approximate center of the header
location.
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Indicates the X-force which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle. This can be considered
a radial load.
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Z-force that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the X-moment that the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
872
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle

Specifies the Y-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle

Specifies the Z-moment which the piping system exerts on the outlet nozzle.
HEI Standard
Analysis > HEI Standard evaluates the allowable loads on shell type Heat Exchange Institute
(HEI) standard nozzles. To begin, specify a new job name in the New Job Name Specification
dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job file.
The software opens the HEI STD dialog box, in which you can enter the necessary input data.
The following example shows sample input for the HEI module:
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force.
Section 3.14 of the HEI bulletin discusses the computational methods used to compute these
allowable loads. The method employed by HEI is a simplification of the WRC 107 method,
873

where the allowable loads have been linearized to show the relationship between the maximum
permitted radial force and the maximum permitted moment vector. If this relationship is plotted
(using the moments as the abscissa and the forces as the ordinate), a straight line can be drawn
between the maximum permitted force and the maximum permitted moment vector, forming a
triangle with the axes. For any set of applied forces and moments, the nozzle passes if the
location of these loads falls inside the triangle. Conversely, the nozzle fails if the location of the
loads falls outside the triangle.
Because the pressure is greater than zero, a pressure thrust force is computed and
combined with the radial force modified to include both the plot of the allowables and the
location of the current load set on this plot. The HEI bulletin states that the effect of internal
pressure has been included in the combined stresses; however, the effect of the pressure on the
nozzle thrust has not. This requires combination with the other radial loads. CAESAR II
automatically computes the pressure thrust and adds it to the radial force if Add Pressure
Thrust is selected on the HEI Nozzle (on page 874) tab.
After you enter all equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
HEI Nozzle
The following options are used to enter input data for shell type heat exchanger nozzles.
Topics
Design Pressure ......................................................................... 874
Nozzle Outside Diameter ............................................................ 874
Shell Outside Diameter ............................................................... 875
Shell Thickness........................................................................... 875
Material Yield Strength................................................................ 875
Material Allowable Stress ............................................................ 875
Maximum Radial Force ............................................................... 875
Maximum Longitudinal Moment................................................... 875
Add Pressure Thrust Force ......................................................... 875
Design Pressure
Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
Nozzle Outside Diameter

Sets the design pressure under which the vessel is operating. Enter a non-negative value.
874
Shell Outside Diameter

Indicates the outside diameter of the pressure vessel.
Shell Thickness
Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.

Specifies the yield strength (Sy) of the shell material at the operating temperature. Refer to
ASME Section VIII Division 1 for this information. Enter a positive value. The yield strength is
greater than the allowable stress.
Material Allowable Stress

Indicates the allowable stress of the shell material at the operating temperature, according to
ASME Section VIII Division 1. Enter a positive value.
Maximum Radial Force

Defines the shell wall thickness. This software does not take any corrosion allowance into
consideration.
Maximum Longitudinal Moment

Specifies the moment about the transverse axis of the vessel which the piping exerts on the
nozzle. Enter a non-negative value.
Add Pressure Thrust Force

Controls whether the thrust force generated by the internal pressure is included or ignored.
Select this option to include the pressure thrust force. To ignore this force, do not select this
option.
All versions prior to CAESAR II 3.21a always included the pressure thrust force in
analysis.
875
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery Services)

Analysis > API 560 evaluates piping loads on fired heaters. To begin, specify a new job name
in the New Job Name Specification dialog box or click Browse to navigate to an existing job
file.
The software opens the API 560 dialog box. You can enter data for the nozzle tube nominal
diameter and the forces and moments acting on the nozzle tube.
After you input all the equipment details, click Analyze and the software displays the Equipment
When you run the analysis, CAESAR II compares the input forces and moments to the
allowables as published in API 560.
876
API 560 Input Data Tab

Use the following options to enter input data for the nozzle tube nominal diameter and the forces
and moments acting on the nozzle tube.
Topics
Nozzle Type................................................................................ 877
Node Number ............................................................................. 877
Nominal Diameter ....................................................................... 877
Axial Force ................................................................................. 877
Horizontal Shear Force ............................................................... 877
Vertical Shear Force ................................................................... 878
Torsional Moment ....................................................................... 878
Horizontal Moment ...................................................................... 878
Vertical Moment .......................................................................... 878
Nozzle Type
Specifies the type of nozzle you are analyzing.Options include a straight tube nozzle or a nozzle
designed for a manifold.
Node Number
Identifies the node number for the nozzle tube that is being analyzed. Because there are many
tubes in a fired heater, analyze the most highly-loaded tubes.
Nominal Diameter
Indicates the nominal diameter of the nozzle tube. You must select a Nozzle Type before
selecting a Nominal Diameter value.
Axial Force
Specifies the axial force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FX value from the appropriate load case.
Horizontal Shear Force

Specifies the horizontal force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FZ value from the appropriate load case.
877
Vertical Shear Force

Specifies the vertical force acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the FY value from the appropriate load case.
Torsional Moment
Indicates the torsional moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MX value from the appropriate load case.
Horizontal Moment
Indicates the horizontal moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the
tube direction is X, then enter the MZ value from the appropriate load case.
Vertical Moment
Indicates the vertical moment acting on the nozzle tube at the tube/header junction. If the tube
direction is X, then enter the MY value from the appropriate load case.
878
SECTION 14
Technical Discussions
In This Section
Rigid Element Application ........................................................... 879
In-Line Flange Evaluation ........................................................... 881
Cold Spring................................................................................. 882
Expansion Joints......................................................................... 885
Hanger Sizing Algorithm ............................................................. 887
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities ......................................................... 892
Modeling Friction Effects ............................................................. 895
Nonlinear Code Compliance ....................................................... 896
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints .............................. 896
Static Seismic Inertial Loads ....................................................... 900
Wind Loads ................................................................................ 901
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading ................................ 903
Evaluating Vessel Stresses ......................................................... 915
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction .......................................... 919
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II ............................................. 924
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping ............................................. 937
Code Compliance Considerations ............................................... 957
Local Coordinates ....................................................................... 997
Rigid Element Application

A piping element that is stiffer or heavier than pipe of the same size (for example, a flanged
valve) can be modeled as a rigid element in CAESAR II. CAESAR II sets the stiffness of a rigid
element based on the inside diameter defined for the pipe but with a wall thickness set to ten
times the entered value. Note that long rigid elements may bend.
Rigid elements in CAESAR II are rigid relative to the pipe around it. For example, if a 6-inch line
ties into a 72-inch heat exchanger and rigid elements are used to model the heat exchanger,
those exchanger elements are better represented by 72 inch pipe rather than 6 inch pipe.
Rigid Weight
Specifies a value for the weight of the rigid element. The rigid material weight is the weight of
the rigid excluding insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid. If left blank, then the weight of the
rigid defaults to 0. A rigid element with zero weight is often used as a construction element, used
to move a centerline load to the shell wall, or used to model the effective stiffness and thermal
growth of a piece of equipment.
If left blank or 0, then the software does not add the additional weight due either to
insulation, refractory, cladding, or fluid.
879
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements

The fluid weight in a rigid element is assumed to be equal to the fluid weight in an equivalent
straight pipe of similar length and inside diameter.
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements

The insulation weight for the rigid is assumed to be equal to 1.75 times the insulation for an
equivalent length of straight pipe of the entered outside diameter.
Total Weight on Rigid Elements

The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is zero will be zero.
The total weight for rigid elements where the entered weight is not zero is calculated as follows:
Weight = Wu + Wf + Wr +1.75(W i+Wc)
Where:
Wu = User-defined rigid weight (the Thermal Expansion/Pipe Weight report will show
user-defined weight divided by entered length)
Wf = Calculated fluid weight for equivalent straight pipe (this is reduced by refractory lining)
Wr = Calculated refractory weight for equivalent straight pipe
Wi = Calculated insulation cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
Wc = Calculated cladding weight for equivalent straight pipe
CAESAR II does not calculate stress on rigid elements. Forces and moments are not normally
printed for rigid elements however, you can select the appropriate check box found in
Environment>Special Execution Parameters from the Piping Input spreadsheet to print
these loads.
Modeling using Rigids

Zero-weight rigid elements are useful where modeling non-pipe components where thermal
growth or load transfer is important.
Use zero-weight rigids to model piping hardware such as expansion joint tie rods, base plates,
and trunnions.
You can also use these dummy rigids to provide connectivity between the centerline of an
element and the outside edge of the element. The most common example of this is when you
need to add a dummy rigid that runs from the node at the centerline of the vessel to the outside
wall where you want to connect the nozzle.
You can also model equipment using a series of rigid elements, joining nozzles to a body and
perhaps to a support point. This approach will properly distribute thermal strain through the
component based on this geometry and the entered element temperatures. For more
information on the use of these construction rigids, see the CAESAR II Applications Guide in
various sections as appropriate to a particular modeling technique.
880
In-Line Flange Evaluation

Allows you to choose the method to use for evaluating flanges under load:
The Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method
The ASME NC-365.8 Calculation for B16.5 Flanged Joints
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method

Converts piping axial forces and bending moments into an equivalent pressure on the flange.
After the conversion is complete, the software adds this equivalent pressure to the pressure
defined in the load case. It then compares this sum to the allowable pressure rating for the
flange at the appropriate temperature. (The pressure-temperature table is defined in the model
input and the temperature is specified on the Load Cases tab of the Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor.) The formula for the total equivalent pressure displays below:
Peq = 16M/()G3 + 4F/ ()G2 + PD
Where:
Peq = total equivalent pressure (for checking against flange rating)
M = calculated bending moment on flange
G = diameter of effective gasket reaction
F = absolute value of the calculated axial force on flange
PD = pressure specified in the load case (for example, P1 for W+T1+P1)
The allowable pressure rating will be multiplied by the occasional load factor specified on
the Load Cases tab.
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for B16.5 Flanged

Joints with High Strength Bolting
Restricted to joints using flanges, bolting, and gaskets as specified in ANSI B16.5 that use
bolting materials having an S value at 100F (38C) greater than or equal to 20,000 psi (138
MPa). CAESAR II uses the analysis method for Service Level A as stated in NC-3658.3(a)(2):
Mfs 3125(Sy/36,000)CAb
or
Mfd 6250(Sy/36,000)CAb
Where:
Mfs = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, and due to
weight, thermal expansion, sustained anchor movements, relief valve steady state thrust,
and other sustained mechanical loads. CAESAR II considers any moments developed
during a non-Occasional Load Case to be Mfs.
Mfd = Bending or torsional moment, whichever is greater, acting on the flange, as defined for
Mfs and but also including any dynamic loadings. CAESAR II considers any moments
881
developed during an Occasional Load Case to be Mfd, effectively the doubling flange
capacity for Occasional loadings.
Sy = Yield strength of flange material at design temperature. CAESAR II allows evaluation
to be done using as many as 10 different temperatures; Sy/36,000; where Sy, is given in psi,
cannot be greater than 36,000 psi
C = Bolt circle diameter
Ab = Total cross sectional area of bolts
PD = Design pressure
CAESAR II calculates an Equivalent Stress S in the flange and compares it to Sy (or 2*Sy for
occasional load cases), in the following manner:
S = 36,000* Mfs / (CAb * 3125) Min(Sy, 36000)
(non-Occ)
S = 36,000 * Mfd / (CAb * 3125) 2.0 * Min(Sy, 36000)
(Occ)
For systems of units that do not express stress in psi, the software converts the 36,000 values in
the above equations to the appropriate set of units.
You can do flange evaluations in Static Analysis only.
Cold Spring
Cold spring is a method where you introduce pipe strain in the installed state to modify the
resulting strain in the operating state. Adding this preload is commonly used to adjust (reduce)
equipment load in the operating state. In CAESAR II, you can indicate a cold spring into your
static load cases by using the CS variable in the load case definition.
A cut short (also called a cold pull) describes an intentional gap in the pipe assembly requiring
an initial tensile load to close the final joint. A cut long (also called a cold push) describes an
intentional overlap in the pipe assembly requiring an initial compressive load to close the final
joint. This initial gap or overlap is modeled as a cut short material or a cut long material,
respectively. CAESAR II reduces the cut short to zero length and doubles the cut long in any
load case that includes the CS load in the load case definition.
This initial cold pull is difficult to implement with any accuracycertainly in systems operating in
the creep range where long term effect is difficult to control or even predict. Due to the difficulty
of properly installing a cold spring system, most piping codes recommend that, when evaluating
equipment loads, you model only two-thirds of the design cold spring for equipment load
calculations. B31.3 also places an upper bound of four-thirds of the design cold spring for
equipment load evaluation.
In simple, linear systems without intermediate restraints, you can calculate the cold spring
element length (ignoring equipment growth) by using the following equation:
Ci = xLi dT
Where:
Ci = length of cold spring in direction i; where i is X, Y, or Z (inches)
Li = total length of pipe subject to expansion in direction i (inches)
= mean thermal expansion coefficient of material between ambient and operating
temperature (in/in/F)
882
dT = change in temperature (F)
x = percent cold spring
When x = 0%, there is no cold spring and there will be no reduction in the thermal strain found in
the operating load. When x = 100%, the operating load will have no thermal strain as all the
expected pipe strain will be realized in the installed state of the piping system. If x = 50%, the
pipe strain will be shared equally by both the installed load and operating load. This percent cold
spring (x) is not the same term as the two-thirds check mentioned above.
No credit can be taken for cold spring in the stress calculations, because the expansion
stress provisions of the piping codes require the evaluation of the stress range, which is
unaffected by cold spring, except perhaps in the presence of non-linear boundary conditions, as
discussed below. The cold spring adjusts installed and operating loads and the stress mean, but
not the stress range used in most expansion stress calculations.
Cold Spring Considerations

You must consider several factors when using cold spring:
Verify that the cold reactions on equipment nozzles due to cold spring do not exceed nozzle
allowables.
Verify that the expansion stress range does not include the direct effect of the cold spring (in
other words, do not calculate the expansion stress range as the difference between the
operating state with cold spring and the installed state without cold spring).
Verify that the cold spring value/tolerance is much greater than fabrication tolerances. This is
related to the two-third and four-third checks mentioned previously.
For elevated temperature cases, where cold spring is used to reduce operating equipment
load, using the hot modulus of analysis may also have a significant effect on the load
magnitude.
Remember, however, that the software does not consider the hot modulus in the
stress calculations for expansion stress ranges. These additional load cases, which you can
use to evaluate equipment load (not system stress), can include the modulus of elasticity for
the temperature under consideration.
Modeling design cold springs

Specify the cold gaps or overlaps as elements defined as cut short or cut long materials
(CAESAR II materials 18 and 19, respectively). There are two approaches for this:
1. Model the whole length of the design cold spring.
a. Reset the material property on the element following the cold spring element.
b. Model the whole length of the design cold spring length for the cold spring element.
c.
Analyze the cold spring system by running the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE)
W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS)
W+P1 standard sustained case for code stress check
883
Load Case4 (EXP)
L1-L2 expansion case for code stress check.
d. To check equipment operating loads considering actual cold spring variation (both
two-thirds and four-thirds checks here), use the following load cases. You can define
additional load cases for installed load variations.
Load Case 1 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE)
W+P1+CS includes all of the design cold spring but not the temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS)
Load Case4 (EXP)
W+T1+P1+0.66 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+1.33 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP)
2. Model 2/3 of the design cold spring.

As a change from the previous design, model two-thirds of the design cold spring length, and
use the following load cases:
Load Case 1 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring
Load Case 2 (OPE)
W+P1+1.5 CS includes all of the design cold spring, but not the
temperature.
Load Case 3 (SUS)
Load Case4 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 5 (OPE)
W+T1+P1+2 CS (use hot modulus)
Load Case 6 (EXP)
884
Other Applications for Cold Spring
While often used to reduce the magnitude of loads on equipment and restraints (see above),
you can also use cold spring to accelerate the thermal shakedown of the system in fewer
operating cycles.
Expansion Joints
Checking the expansion joint box on the element enables definition of an expansion joint for that
element. Expansion joints can be modeled as a single element across the flexible length of the
joint or as a zero length element at the midpoint of the expansion joint. Expansion joints
elements have a zero length if the Delta fields on the Pipe Element spreadsheet are left blank or
zero.
When an expansion joint has a defined length, CAESAR II builds the expansion joint as a beam
element using the element length with the entered expansion joint stiffnesses.
Four stiffness values define the expansion joint:
Axial
Transverse
Torsion
Bending
885
Examples of the Stiffnesses
Define Finite Length Joints

For expansion joints where flexible length is defined, the bending stiffness is defined by the
entered, flexible, length and the transverse stiffness of the joint. Some expansion joint catalogs
list what would be called bending flexibility rather than the required bending stiffness used in
CAESAR II. This bending flexibility is adequate for an expansion joint modeled by two rigid
elements that are pinned at the joint midpoint (a zero length expansion joint) but it is the wrong
value for a flexible beam element. To address this ambiguity, CAESAR II calculates and applies
a bending stiffness based on the entered expansion joint length and transverse stiffness. We
suggest that you only enter the bending term from manufacturers' catalogs when using the
zero-length expansion joint model or for rubber joint which do not follow beam bending
definitions.
Typically, expansion joint manufacturers do not supply torsional stiffness data. If the
manufacturer does not supply the data, enter a large torsional stiffness value, and verify that the
resulting load on the bellows is not excessive. When the piping system is tight, and the diameter
large, the magnitude of the large torsional stiffness can significantly affect the magnitude of the
torsion carried by the joints. For example, a stiffness of 100,000 in.lb./deg. and 1E12 in.lb./deg.
can produce considerably different torsional load results. Conservatively speaking, the tendency
is to use the larger stiffness except that the torsional stiffness value is probably closer to the
100,000 in.lb./deg. In instances where a large torsional stiffness value is important, you can get
a stiffness estimate from the manufacturer, or use the equation below to derive an estimate. Use
this equation to conservatively estimate torsional loads on the bellows and surrounding
equipment.
Where
= 3.14159
Re = Expansion joint effective radius
t = Bellows thickness
886
E = Elastic Modulus
= Poissons Ratio
L = Flexible bellows length
When the expansion joint has a zero length, none of the expansion joint stiffnesses are
related. You must be sure that you enter a value in all of the Stiffness fields.
Calculate the Pressure Thrust

CAESAR II calculates the pressure thrust on the expansion joint if you type a value for the
bellows Effective ID on the Expansion Joint auxiliary dialog box. If there is no Effective ID
specified, then there is no pressure thrust calculated.
The mathematical model for pressure thrust indictes to apply a force equal to the pressure
multiplied by the effective area of the bellows at the two nodes that define the expansion joint.
The force can open the bellows if the pressure is positive, and close the bellows if the pressure
is negative.
This model does not correctly locate pressure load components in the vicinity of the
expansion joint. In most cases, the misapplied load does not affect the solution.
There are two components of the pressure thrust to apply in practice rather than the one
component applied in the model. The first component is equal to the pressure times the inside
area of the pipe and acts at the first change in direction of the pipe on either side of the
expansion joint. This load will tend to put the pipe wall between the change in direction and the
expansion joint in tension. The second component is equal to the pressure times the difference
between the bellows effective area and inside pipe area. This load acts at the end of the
expansion joint and tends to open the bellows up putting the pipe between the expansion joint
and the change in direction in compression.
In the mathematical model, the full component of the pressure thrust force is placed on the ends
of the bellows instead of having a portion shifted out on either side of the expansion joint.
Effective ID
The pressure area used to set the pressure thrust force on an expansion joint is provided by the
expansion joint manufacturer either as an effective area or effective inside diameter (ID). If the
pressure thrust load is to be included in the analysis, the Effective ID must be provided in the
expansion joint model definition. Any load case that includes a pressure term (for example,
+P1) will include a thrust force on either end of the expansion joint based on this effective
ID.
Hanger Sizing Algorithm

At locations that you define, CAESAR II will select a rigid, variable or constant effort support
using the automated procedure defined here. Attention here is focused on selecting a variable
(spring) support from a manufacturers catalog. Be sure to review and verify all supports sized
by CAESAR II.
887
Spring Design Requirements

A rigid rod is selected if the vertical thermal growth at the location is less than the value entered
as Rigid Support Displacement Criteria and a constant support is selected if the vertical
thermal growth at the location is greater than the value entered as Max. Allowed Travel Limit.
Otherwise, CAESAR II selects the smallest single spring that satisfies all design requirements
provided in the hanger design data.
The spring design requirements are:
1. Both the operating (typically hot) and the installed (typically cold) loads must be within the
allowed working range of the spring.
2. The absolute value of the change in the load (the product of the travel and the selected
spring rate) divided by the design load must be less than the specified "Allowable Load
Variation" value. The default variation is 25%.
MSS SP-69 defines load variation as the ratio of the change in load and the
operating load. CAESAR II, in using the design load, will use the theoretical cold load
(discussed below), instead of the operating load, if the user selects "Cold Load" design.
3. If you specify "Available Space", then this space must be greater than the basic height of the
spring selected. Positive values are compared with hanger height and negative values are
compared with spring can height.
If the software cannot find a single spring that satisfies the design requirements, it
searches for two identical springs that will each carry half the load. If the software cannot find
any springs that satisfies the design requirements, it recommends a constant effort support for
the location.
888
Restrained Weight Case

If you need to design a hanger, the first analysis case that you must run is the restrained weight
case. This case usually includes weight, pressure, and concentrated loads. Hanger hot loads
are calculated in the restrained weight case.
Run the restrained weight case

1. Place rigid Y-restraints at each hanger location.
2. Determine any anchors you want to designate as freed.
3. Verify the freed anchors are properly released.
Loads on the Y-restraints at hangers, calculated from the restrained weight case, are
designated as the hanger hot design loads.
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting Hanger Deflection

through the Operating Case
After the restrained weight case, you must run an operating analysis. The operating case must
always be the second load case in the set of defined analysis cases. You can define the
operating load cases for hanger design any way you see fit. CAESAR II recommends the load
cases it thinks you should run whenever it detects the first attempt to analyze a particular
system. You can accept or reject the recommendations. If you define your own hanger design
load cases, you must understand exactly what is done in the "restrained weight" and operating
passes of the hanger design algorithm.
Run an operating case

1. Remove the Y-restraints.
2. Insert the hot loads calculated from the hanger locations in the restrained weight analysis.
3. Change any freed anchors from the restrained weight analysis to fixed.
The vertical displacement of the operating case at each hanger location defines the travel of that
particular hanger. If there are single directional restraints or gaps in the system and a changed
status in the operating case, then the hanger loads are redistributed.
When CAESAR II detects a nonlinear status change, it reruns the restrained weight case
with the restraints left as they were at the end of the operating case. To determine the updated
travel, you must calculate the new restraint loads and run another operating case.
889
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional) Setting the Actual

Installed (Cold) Load
If you need to calculate the actual hanger installed loads, the third analysis level combination
case must define the weight configuration that exists in the field when a spring is installed.
Typically, this case includes weight without fluid contents and other live loads. The theoretical
cold, or installed load, is the load on the spring when the "unbalanced" installed load is applied
and the pipe is not allowed to displace vertically (the load will be "balanced" when the pipe is in
the operating or design position). The actual installed load may differ from the theoretical
installed load by (K)(d), where (K) is the spring stiffness and (d) is the displacement of the pipe
in the installed condition.
Calculate the actual installed load

1. Install the hangers.
2. Apply the theoretical cold load and all other loads (for example, empty weight) that will be
present when the springs are set.
3. Calculate the position of all springs (d).
4. Set the actual installed spring load based on this installed position (installed load =
Theoretical Cold Load - (K)(d)).
Create Spring Load Cases

Up to three load cases are needed for spring sizing:
"Restrained" Weight (required)
Operating (required)
Installed Weight (optional)
After the Hanger Algorithm runs the hanger load cases, the software selects the hangers. The
software inserts the newly-selected springs into the piping system and includes them and their
preload (the Theoretical Cold Load) in the analysis of all remaining load cases.
Hanger installed loads are concentrated forces and are only included in subsequent load cases
that contain the hanger preload force set (+H).
You can specify any number of user-defined load cases after setting up the required spring load
cases.
Spring hanger design does not affect the ability of CAESAR II to check code compliance. In load
cases recommended by CAESAR II, the normal code compliance cases always follow the set of
load cases required for hanger design.
Multiple operating case spring hanger design implies that hanger loads and travels from more
than one operating case are included in the spring hanger selection algorithm.
Each spring in a multiple operating case hanger design has a Multiple Load Case Design
option. This design option tells CAESAR II how multiple loads and travels for a single hanger
are combined to get a single design load and travel. The set-up of the analysis cases is slightly
different for multiple operating case hanger design in that now there is more than one operating
case. You can use the Hanger Design Control dialog to specify the actual number of operating
cases.
890
The load cases that you analyze for multiple load case hanger design operating cases are:
Restrained Weight (this does not change)
Operating case #1
Operating case #9
Installed Weight (if requested)
Constant Effort Support

Enables you to specify the support load for a constant effort hanger and define the hanger
location. This value is also included in all hanger design runs and all analysis cases following
the hanger cases that include the hanger preload force set in their formulation.
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the Design

Algorithm
The operating cases for hanger travel are normally analyzed with no stiffness included at the
hanger locations. This is why these cases are traditionally referred to as "free thermal" cases.
However, when the piping system is very flexible, or the selected springs are very stiff, the
actual resulting spring loads in the installed condition can vary significantly from the theoretically
calculated results. With such a load change, perhaps this shorter, more accurate spring
deflection may allow a smaller spring selection. In that case, CAESAR II enables you to include,
using an iterative process, the stiffness of the selected springs in the operating cases for hanger
travel.
You can activate this trait for all new models through the Configure\Setup by setting the option
to Include Travel to As Designed. You can also activate this option for individual models on the
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545) tab by changing
the Hanger Stiffness option to As Designed.
Selecting this option could lead to convergence problems. If you use this option, be sure to
check the hanger load in the cold case in the field so that it matches the reported hanger Cold
Load.
You must always include the hanger preload force set H (the Theoretical Cold Load) in
subsequent load cases.
Applying thermal and displacement effects to the live loaded system should make an
installed hanger move to the hot, or balanced, load in this operating case.
891
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing

At times, CAESAR II indicates that certain hanger locations carry no load and selects zero
load constant effort supports at these locations. Typically, zero load constant effort supports
indicate poor hanger locations. It is important to not simply ignore these selections as and
other hangers selected in the vicinity of these zero load hangers have improper operating
loads assigned. Relocate or remove these zero load selections.
Unless you specifically designate your hanger design load cases with a KEEP status, they
display in the output reports as NOT ACTIVE.
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities

This analytical option was added to CAESAR II for the following reasons:
Automatic local flexibilities at intersections help you bound the true solution. Because the
computer time to do an analysis is less expensive, more frequently you can run several
solutions of the same model using slightly different input techniques to determine the effect
of the modeling difference on the results. This gives you a degree of confidence in the
numbers you get. For example, structural steel supporting structures can be modeled to see
the effect of their stiffnesses, nozzle flexibilities can be added at vessel connections to see
how these features redistribute load throughout the model, friction is added to watch its
effect on displacements and equipment loads, and with CAESAR II you can include Class 1
intersection flexibilities. The characteristic that makes this option convenient to use is that
you can enable or disable the Class 1 flexibilities using a single option in the setup file. No
other modification to the input required.
In WRC 329, there are a number of suggestions made to improve the stress calculations at
intersections. These suggestions are fairly substantial and are given in order of importance.
The most important item, as felt by E. Rodabaugh, in improving the stress calculations at
intersections is given, in part, as follows:
"In piping system analyses, it may be assumed that the flexibility is represented by a rigid
joint at the branch-to-run centerlines juncture. However, you should be aware that this
assumption can be inaccurate and should consider the use of a more appropriate flexibility
representation."
Use of the Class 1 Branch Flexibility feature may be summarized as follows: Include the
Class 1 Branch Flex option in the setup file.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a rigid
offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface, and then adds the local flexibility
of the header pipe, between the end of the offset, at the header, and the start of the branch.
Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its connection with the header.
Where reduced branch geometry requirements are not satisfied, CAESAR II constructs a
rigid offset from the centerline of the header pipe to its surface. The branch piping starts at
the end of this rigid offset. There is NO local flexibility due to the header added. (It is
deemed to be insignificant.) Stresses computed for the branch are for the point at its
connection with the header.
The reduced branch geometry requirements that CAESAR II checks are

d/D 0.5 and
D/T 100.0
Where:
892
d = Diameter of Branch
D = Diameter of Header
T = Wall thickness of Header
If you use the Class 1 branch flexibilities, intersection models in the analysis become stiffer
when the reduced geometry requirements do not apply, and become more flexible when the
reduced geometry requirements do apply. Stiffer intersections typically carry more loads and
thus have higher stresses lowering the stress in other parts of the system that have been
unloaded. More flexible intersections typically carry less load and thus have lower stresses. This
causes higher stresses in other parts of the system that have "picked up" the extra load.
The branch flexibility rules used in CAESAR II are taken from ASME III, Subsection NB, (Class
1), 1992 Edition, Issued December 31, 1992, from Code Sections NB-3686.4 and NB-3686.5.
When the reduced branch rules apply, use the following equations for the local stiffnesses:
TRANSLATIONAL:
AXIAL
RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL
RIGID
LONGITUDINAL
RIGID
ROTATIONAL:
AXIAL
RIGID
CIRCUMFERENTIAL
(kx)d/EI
LONGITUDINAL
(kz)d/EI
Where:
RIGID =
1.0E12 lb./in. or 1.0E12 in.lb./deg.
Branch Diameter
Youngs Modulus
Cross Section Moment of Inertia
Header Diameter
Header Thickness
Tb
Branch Fitting Thickness
kx
0.1(D/T)1.5[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
kz
0.2(D/T)[(T/t)(d/D)]0.5(Tb/T)
For more information, see WRC 329 Section 4.9 Flexibility Factors. A brief quote from this
section follows:
"The significance of "k" depends upon the specifics of the piping system. Qualitatively, if "k" is
small compared to the length of the piping system, including the effect of elbows and their
k-factors, then the inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have only minor effects on the
calculated moments. Conversely, if "k" is large compared to the piping system length, then the
inclusion of "k" for branch connections will have major effects. The largest effect will be to
greatly reduce the magnitude of the calculated moments acting on the branch connection. To
illustrate the potential significance of "ks" for branch connections, we use the equation [above]
to calculate "k" for a branch connection with D=30 in., d=12.75 in., and T=t=0.375 in.:
893
k = 0.1(80)1.5(0.425)0.5 * (1.0) = 46.6
This compares to the more typical rigid-joint interpretation that k=1, rather than k=46.6 !"
Further discussion in section 4.9 illustrates additional problems that can arise by overestimating
the stiffness at branch connections. Problems arise by believing "mistakenly" that the stress at
the intersection is too high. Further reference should be made to this section in WRC 329.
Branch automatic flexibility generation can be used where the user has only defined the branch
element in the model, that is has left the header piping out of the analysis. In this case there will
be no "offset" equal to one-half of the header diameter applied to the branch end. A "partial
intersection" is one where either the header pipe is not modeled, is modeled with a single
element, or is part of a geometric intersection where the header pipes are not colinear. In the
case where there is no header pipe going to the intersection, there will be no modification to the
model for the class 1 branch flexibilities. When at least a single header pipe is recognized, the
local flexibility directions are defined by the branch alone and in accordance with the CAESAR II
defaults for circumferential and longitudinal directions for the branch and header. You must build
full intersection models at all times, not only when employing the class 1 branch flexibility. In
most cases, building full intersection models eliminates problems caused by the assumptions
necessary when a partial intersection is described.
In the equations in NB-3686.5 for tn, the thickness of the branch pipe is used in all cases.
When branches are skewed with respect to the header pipe, and where the two header pipes
are colinear, the local Class 1 flexibilities are still taken to be the longitudinal and circumferential
directions that are tangent to the header surface at its intersection with the branch.
Class 1 branch flexibilities can be formed at both ends of a single pipe element.
The offsets necessary to form the class 1 intersections are automatically generated by
CAESAR II. There is no extra input required by you to have CAESAR II build these
intersections.
If there are already user-defined offsets at an intersection end, the computed offset to get from
the header centerline to its surface along the centerline of the branch is added to the already
entered user offset.
Automatic offsets are generated providing that the distance from the header centerline to the
header surface along the branch centerline is less than or equal to 98% of the total pipe straight
length.
When an element with a bend designation is part of an intersection model, the offset and
flexibility calculations are not performed.
894
Modeling Friction Effects

There are two methods to solving friction problems:
Insert a force at the node which must be overcome for motion to occur.
Insert a stiffness which applies an increasing force up to the value of Mu * Normal Force.
CAESAR II uses the stiffness method.

If there is motion at the node under evaluation then the friction force is equal to Mu * Normal
force. However, because there is a non-rigid stiffness placed at that location to resist the initial
motion; the node could experience some displacement. The force at the node is the product of
the displacement and the stiffness. If the resultant force is less than the maximum friction force
(Mu * Normal Force) the node is assumed to be not sliding. As a result, you might see
displacements at nodes that have not achieved the "sliding" friction force in the output report.
The maximum value of the force at the node is the friction force (Mu * Normal force). After the
system reaches this value, the reaction at the node stops increasing. This constant force value
is then applied to the global load vector during the next iteration to determine the nodal
displacements. The example below explains what happens in a "friction" problem.
1. The default friction stiffness is 1,000,000 lb./in. To solve convergence problems, consider
decreasing this value.
2. Until the calculated load at the node equals (Mu * Normal force), the restraint load is the
product of the displacement multiplied by the friction stiffness.
3. Should the calculated load exceed the maximum value of the friction force, the friction force
stops increasing because a constant effort force opposite the sliding direction is inserted in
the model in place of the friction stiffness.
If you increase the friction stiffness in the setup file, the displacements at the node may
decrease slightly. Usually, this causes a re-distribution of the loads throughout the system that
could have an adverse effect on the solution convergence.
If problems arise during the solution of a job with friction at supports, reducing the friction
stiffness typically improves convergence. You must do several runs with varying values of the
friction stiffness to ensure the behavior of the system is consistent.
For more information on this subject, see "Inclusion of a Support Friction into a Computerized
Solution of a Self-Compensating Pipeline" by J. Sobieszczanski, published in the Transactions
of the ASME, Journal of Engineering for Industry, August 1972. A summary of the major points
of this paper is below.
Summary of J. Sobieszczanskis ASME Paper
For dry friction, the friction force magnitude is a step function of displacement. This
discontinuity means the problem as intrinsically nonlinear and eliminates the possibility of
using the superposition principle.
The friction loading on the pipe can be represented by an ordinary differential equation of the
fourth order with a variable coefficient that is a nonlinear function of both dependent and
independent variables. No solution in closed form is known for an equation of this type.
The solution has to be sought by means of numerical integration to be carried out
specifically for a particular pipeline configuration.
895
Dry friction can be idealized by a fictitious elastic foundation, discretized to a set of elastic
spring supports.
A well-known property of an elastic system with dry friction constraints is that it may attain
several static equilibrium positions within limits determined by the friction forces.
The whole problem then has clearly not a deterministic, but a stochastic character.
Nonlinear Code Compliance

You can adhere to nonlinear piping code compliance requirements by doing the following:
1. Performing an operating and sustained analysis of the system and including with each case
the effect of nonlinear restraints.
2. Subtracting the sustained case displacements from the operating case displacements to find
the displacement range.
3. Calculating the expansion stresses from the displacement range solved for in step 2.
CAESAR II uses this method for calculating the expansion stress range. In addition, CAESAR II
scans your input and recommends load cases and combinations for performing the operating,
sustained, and expansion stress calculations. This recommendation is useful when performing
spring hanger analysis of a multiple operating case system.
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear Restraints

The proper computation of sustained stresses has been an issue since the late 1970s, when
pipe stress analysis software first attempted to address the problem of non-linear restraints. The
existing piping codes offered little guidance on the subject, because their criteria was developed
during the era when all analyses were simplified to behave in a strictly linear fashion.
Problems arose because the codes require that a piping system be analyzed separately for
sustained loadings. You must determine which loadings are causing which stresses. Sustained
loads are force loadings that are assumed not to change, while expansion loadings are
displacement loadings that vary with the system operating conditions. Determination of the
sustained loads is the simple partmost everybody agrees that those forces consist of weight,
pressure, and spring pre-loads. These forces remain relatively constant as the piping system
goes through its thermal growth.
However, confusion occurs when the status of nonlinear restraints change (pipe lift-off of
supports, gaps close, and so forth) as the pipe goes from installed to operating state. In this
case, you must determine which boundary conditions to use when evaluating the applied forces.
In other words, what portion of the stress in the operating case is caused by weight loads, and
what portion is caused by expansion effects?
There is no corresponding confusion on the question of calculating expansion stresses,
because the codes are explicit in their instructions that the expansion stress range is the
difference between the operating and cold stress positions (both of which are known).
The obvious answer to this question by the developers of some pipe stress software was that
the sustained stress calculation should be done using the operating, or hot boundary condition.
This compounded the problem in that the laws of superposition no longer held. In other words,
the results of sustained (W+P) and thermal (T) cases, when added together, did not equal the
results of the operating (W+P+T) case. One industry pioneer, DYNAFLEX, attempted to resolve
896
this by introducing the concept of the "thermal component of weight," which was an oxymoron,
in our opinion.
Other software, notably those applications which came from the mainframe/linear analysis
world, had to approximate the behavior of these non-linear restraints. Their approach to the
problem is to run an operating case, obtain the restraint status, and modify the model according
to these results. All subsequent load cases analyzed use this restraint configuration. The fact
that the laws of static superposition did not hold was hopefully not noticed by the user. CAESAR
II, on the other hand, represents technology developed expressly for operation on the personal
computer, and therefore incorporates directly the effects of non-linear restraints. This is done by
considering each load case independently. The restraint configuration is determined for each
load case by the program as it runs, based upon the actual loads that are considered present.
Some users have asserted that there are actually two sustained load cases. In fact, there has
been a B31.3 code interpretation that indicates that the sustained stress may also be checked
with the operating restraint configuration. Calculating the sustained stresses using the operating
restraint status raises several other issues; what modulus of elasticity should be used, and
which sustained stresses should be used for occasional cases.
It is our assertion that there is only one sustained case (otherwise, it is not "sustained"). There
can be, however, multiple sustained stress distributions. The two most obvious are those
associated with the cold (installed) and hot (operating) configurations. However, there are also
numerous in-betweens, as the piping system load steps from cold to hot. Whether the "true"
sustained load case occurs during the installed or operating case is a matter of the frame of
reference. If an engineer first sees a system in its cold condition, and watches it expand to its
operating condition, it appears that the first case (because weight and pressure primary loads
are present) is the sustained case, and the changes he viewed are thermal effects (due to
heat up) secondary loads due to displacements. If a second engineer first sees the same
system in the operating case and watches it cool down to the cold case, he may believe that the
first case he saw (the operating case) is the sustained case, and changes experienced from hot
to cold are the thermal expansion effects (the thermal stress ranges are the same in both
cases). Consider the further implications of cryogenic systems where changes from installed to
operating are the same as those experienced by hot systems when going from operating to
installed. After elastic shakedown has occurred, the question becomes clouded even further due
to the presence of thermally induced pre-stresses in the pipe during both the cold and hot
conditions. We feel either the operating or installed case (or some other one in-between) could
justifiably be selected for analysis as the sustained case, as long as the program is consistent.
We selected the installed case (less the effect of cold spring) as our reference sustained case,
because thermal effects can be completely omitted from the solution (as intended by the code).
This best represents the support configuration when the sustained loads are initially applied. If
the pipe lifts off of a support when going from installed to operating, we view this as a thermal
effect which is consistent with the piping codes view of thermal effects as the variation of stress
distribution as the piping system goes from cold to hot, and is explicitly corroborated by one
code, an earlier edition of the French petrochemical code, which states that weight stress
distributions due to thermal growth of the pipe should be considered as expansion stresses). For
example, we feel that a change in a rigid support load from 2,000 lbs to zero should be treated
no differently than would be a variable spring load changing from 6,000 lbs to 4,000 lbs (or
another rigid support load going 2,000 lbs to 1 lb). In the former case, if the pipe became
"overstressed", it would yield, and sag back to the support, relieving the stress. This process is
identical to the way that all other expansion stresses are relieved in a piping system.
We are confident that our interpretation is correct. However, we understand that our users may
not always agree with us that is why CAESAR II provides the greatest ability to custom tailor
the analysis to your individual specifications. If you want, you can analyze a hot sustained case
897
by adding two load cases to those normally recommended by CAESAR II. This is done by
assuming that the pipe expands first, and then the sustained loads are applied (this is of course
an idealized concept, but the stresses can only be segregated by segregating the applied loads,
so the sustained loads can only be applied either before, or after, the expansion loads).
Following are the default load cases, as well as those required for a "hot sustained."
Default
New
L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)
L1: W+P1+T1(OPE)
L2: W+P1(SUS)
L2: W+P1(SUS)
L3: L1-L2(EXP)
L3: T1(EXP)
L4: L1-L2(EXP)
L5: L1-L3(SUS)
In the new load case list, the second case still represents the cold sustained, while the fourth
case represents the expansion case (note that L1-L2, or W+P1+T1-W-P1, equals T1, with
non-linear effects taken into account). The third case represents the thermal growth of the
weightless, non-pressurized pipe, against the non-linear restraints.
The fifth case (L1-L3, or W+P1+T1-T1, equals W+P1) represents the application of weight and
pressure to that expanded case, or the "hot sustained" case. Note that when the piping system
is analyzed as above, the actual effects of the non-linear restraints are considered (they are not
arbitrarily removed from the model), and the laws of superposition still hold.
An alternative school of thought believes that a "hot sustained" is only valid if: (1) the sustained,
primary loads are applied, (2) all springs are showing their Hot Load settings, and (3) any
supports that lift off (or otherwise become non-active) have been removed from the model. An
analysis such as this is achievable by setting the Keep/Discard status of the Restrained Weight
case (the first hanger design load case) to Keep, thus permitting the results of that case to be
viewable as for any other load case. The Restrained Weight case automatically removes
restraints that become non-active during the designated operating case, and apply the Hot Load
at each of the hanger locations.
Notes on Occasional Load Cases

Several piping codes require that you add the stresses from occasional loads (such as wind or
earthquake) to the sustained stresses (due to weight, pressure, and other constant loads) before
comparing them to their allowables. You can recreate this combination in CAESAR II using the
following load cases:
CASE #
1
W+P+H
(SUS):
Sustained stresses
WIND
(OCC):
Wind load set
U1
(OCC):
Uniform g load set for earthquake
898
CASE #
4
L1+L2
(OCC):
Code stresses for wind
L1+L3
(OCC):
Code stresses for earthquake*
* Scalar Summation Method required

If you must model nonlinear effects in the system, the load case combinations are not so straight
forward. Friction, one-direction restraints, and double-acting restraints with gaps are the
nonlinear items which complicate modeling. For this example, we will use wind loading on a long
vertical run of pipe with a guide. Assume there is a 1-inch gap between the pipe and guide.
Under normal operation, the pipe moves -inch towards the stop leaving a gap of 1--inch on
either side of the pipe and a -inch gap on the other side. If you analyze the wind loads alone,
the pipe is allowed to move 1-inch from its center point in the guide to the guide stop. Because
occasional loads are usually analyzed with the system in operation, the pipe may be limited to a
-inch motion as the gap is closed in one direction, and 1--inch if the gap is closed in the
opposite direction. With nonlinear effects modeled in the system, the occasional deflections (and
stresses) are influenced by the operating position of the piping.
The following list of CAESAR II load cases takes this point into consideration. The load cases
displayed below are only for wind acting in one direction, that is, +X. Depending on the system,
the most critical loads could occur in any direction +/-X, +/-Z, or skewed in XZ. The intention of
the load case construction is to find the effect of the occasional load on the piping system in the
operating condition. The stress due to the moment change from the operating to the operating
plus wind case is added to the stress from the sustained case.
CASE #
1
W+T1+P1
(OPE):
Operation analysis
W+P1
(SUS):
Sustained stresses
W+T1+P1+WIN
D1
(OPE):
Operating analysis with wind
L1-L2
(EXP):
Expansion stresses (Algebraic summation)
L3-L1
(OCC):
Net deflection of wind(Algebraic summation)
L2+L5
(OCC):
Code stresses for wind (Scalar summation)
Case 5 computes the isolated wind effect on the piping system in the operating condition. Case
6 adds the stresses from Case 5 to the sustained stresses from Case 2.
899
Static Seismic Inertial Loads

Static earthquake loads are applied in a manner very similar to static wind loads. The static
loading magnitude is considered to be in direct proportion to the weight of the element. Express
earthquake load magnitudes in terms of the gravitational acceleration constant g. If you model
an earthquake with a 0.5-g load in the X direction, then half of the systems weight is turned into
a uniform load and applied in the X direction.
You create earthquake static load cases the same way you create wind occasional load cases.
Use the same load case, nonlinearity, and directional sensitivity logic. In some cases, the client
specifies the magnitude of the earthquake loading in g's and the direction(s). In other cases,
analysis is left to the discretion of the analyst. It is not unusual to see only X-Y or Z-Y
components of an earthquake. It is also not uncommon to see X, Y, and Z simultaneous
components.
Dynamic (response spectrum) evaluation of earthquake loads are discussed later in this section,
in the dynamic analysis and output sections, and in the screen reference section.
The ASCE #7 method for determining earthquake coefficients is described below. After you
calculate the earthquake coefficients, enter the g-factors as uniform loads on the piping
spreadsheet.
Calculate the horizontal seismic design force using equation 13.3-1 from ASCE 7 (10):
Fp = [(0.4 ap SDS W p) / (Rp / Ip)] (1 + 2 z / h)
But, because W p is "component operating weight", Fp/W p = calculated (horizontal)
acceleration, aH, so;
aH = [(0.4 ap SDS) / ( Rp / Ip )] (1 + 2 z / h),
additionally;
aH 1.6 SDS Ip
and:
aH 0.3 SDS Ip
Where:
ap = Component amplification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 2.5 for "Piping"
SDS = Design elastic response acceleration at short period (0.2 sec), from Section 11.4.4
Rp = Component response modification factor, from Table 13.6-1
= 12.0 for "Piping in accordance with ASME B31... with joints made by welding or
brazing"; values range as low as 3.0 for other joints and for less ductile materials.
Ip = Component importance factor, from Section 13.1.3
= 1.5 for life-safety components, components containing hazardous material, or
components that are required for continuous operation; 1.0 for all others
z = Height in structure at point of attachment
h = Average roof height of structure
900
Wind Loads
You can define your own wind pressure profile (Wind Pressure vs Elevation) or wind speed
(Wind Velocity vs Elevation) profile, or you can access wind load data from the following wind
codes:
ASCE 7
IBC
AS/NZS 1170
IS 875
Brazil NBR 6123
Mexico
BS 6399-2
NBC
China GB 50009
UBC
EN 1991-1-4
Generate Wind Loads

By defining a wind shape factor in the model input, CAESAR II allows you to define up to four
wind vectors in the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor. Multiply the pipe exposed area by the
equivalent wind pressure and the pipe shape factor.
CAESAR II includes insulation thickness in the cladding. You must also consider the angle
to the wind with your calculations.
Determine the Equivalent Wind Pressure

There are three ways to determine the equivalent wind pressure:
Selecting a regional wind specification (by building code)
Use the Wind Pressure vs Elevation user-defined method
Use the VWind Velocity vs Elevation user-defined method
Calculate the Total Wind Force on the Element

Calculate the total wind force on the element by using the following equation:
F = PeqSA
Where:
F = the total wind force on the element
Apply the wind force in the three global
directions as a function of the element
direction cosines.
901
Peq = the equivalent wind pressure (dynamic
pressure)
Calculate Peq for each end of the element and
then take the average.
The average applies uniformly over the whole
length of the element.
S = the pipe element wind shape factor
A = the pipe element exposed area as shown
in the figure to the right.
If you enter velocity versus elevation table data, then the program converts the velocity to a
dynamic pressure using the following equation:
P = 1/2 V2
Where V is the wind velocity and is the air density.
Enter the Wind Shape Factor on the piping input. For cylindrical elements, a value between 0.5
and 0.7 is used. A value of 0.65 is typical. The wind shape factor as entered is distributive. This
means that the shape factor entered in piping input is carried forward and applies for all
following elements until zeroed or changed.
There is no need to enter the same shape factor on each piping input segment. Zero or
disable the wind shape factor if the piping system runs inside of a building or similarly protective
structure.
Enter wind load parameters on the Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load Case Editor
Dialog Box) (on page 554) tab of the Static Analysis - Load Case Editor . You can enter up to
four different wind loads per analysis. These typically might be setup to model wind loads in the
+X, -X, +Z, and -Z directions.
Elevation
It is important to set the proper elevation of the piping system (height above ground) when
running a wind analysis. When a wind shape factor is specified in the input, CAESAR II prompts
you for the elevation (and horizontal coordinates) of this first node. By default, CAESAR II
assigns the "From" node of the first element an elevation of 0.0. You can also use the procedure
below to set the reference wind elevation of the piping system.
Set the true elevation

1. Click EDIT > GLOBAL.
A dialog appears.
2. Enter the global coordinates of the first node in the system.
3. Repeat step 2 for each (if any) disconnected section until you are finished.
You can specify and save the coordinates for up to 100 node points from the model.
902
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current) Loading

Ocean waves are generated by wind and propagate out of the generating area. Ocean wave
generation is dependent on the wind speed, the duration of the wind, the water depth, and the
distance over which the wind blows the fetch length. There are several two dimensional wave
theories, but the three most widely used are the Airy (linear) wave theory, Stokes 5th Order
wave theory, and Dean's Stream Function wave theory. The latter two theories are non-linear
wave theories and provide a better description of the near surface effects of the wave.
Of course, wave motion is a three dimensional action but it can be adequately
represented by two dimensions. One dimension is the direction the wave travels, and the other
dimension is vertical through the water column. Two dimensional waves are not found in the
marine environment, but are somewhat easy to define and determine properties for. In actuality,
waves undergo spreading, in the third dimension. To understand this concept think about a
stone dropped in a pond. As the wave spreads, the diameter of the circle increases. In addition
to wave spreading, a real sea state includes waves of various periods, heights, and lengths. To
address these actual conditions you must use a sea spectrum that includes a spreading
function.
Airy (linear) wave theory assumes the free surface is symmetric about the mean water level.
Additionally, water particle motion is in a closed circular orbit, the diameter of which decays with
depth. You should take the term circular loosely because, the orbit varies from circular to
elliptical based on whether the wave is in shallow or deep water.
Additionally, for shallow water waves, the wave height to depth ratio (H/D) is limited to 0.78 to
avoid breaking.
None of the wave theories address breaking waves.
The figure below shows a typical wave and associated hydrodynamic parameters.
SWL - The still water level.
L - The wave length or horizontal distance between successive crests or troughs.
H - The wave height or vertical distance between the crest and trough.
D - The water depth or vertical distance from the bottom to the still water level.
- The surface elevation measured from the still water level.
903
Ocean Wave Particulars

The Airy Wave Theory Implementation (on page 906) theory provides a good first approximation
to the water particle behavior. The nonlinear theories provide a better description of particle
motion, over a wider range depths and wave heights. Stokes 5tH Wave theory is based on a
power series. This wave theory does not apply the symmetric free surface restriction.
Additionally, the particle paths are no longer closed orbits, which mean there is a gradual drift of
the fluid particles, that is, a mass transport.
Stokes 5tH Order Wave theory however, does not adequately address steeper waves over a
complete range of depths. Deans Stream Function wave theory attempts to address this
deficiency. This wave theory employs an iterative numerical technique to solve the stream
function equation. The stream function describes not only the geometry of a two dimensional
flow, but also the components of the velocity vector at any point, and the flow rate between any
two streamlines.
The most suitable wave theory is dependent on the wave height, the wave period, and the water
depth. Based on these parameters, the applicable wave theory can be determined from the
figure below (from API-RP2A, American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A).
904
Applicable Wave Theory Determination

The limiting wave steepness for most deep water waves is usually determined by the Miche
Limit:
H / L = 0.142 tanh( kd )
Where:
H is the wave height
L is the wave length
k is the wave number (2)/L
d is the water depth
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading

You can model individual pipe elements that experience loading due to hydrodynamic effects.
Fluid effects can impose a substantial load on the piping elements in a manner similar to,
but more complex than wind loading.
Use wave theories and profiles to compute the water particle velocities and accelerations at the
node points. Then use, Morrisons equation, F = * * Cd * D * U * |U| + /4 * * Cm * D2* A to
compute the force on the element.
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cd- is the drag coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
Cm - is the inertial coefficient
A - is the particle acceleration
The particle velocities and accelerations are vector quantities that include the effects of any
applied waves or currents. In addition to the force imposed by Morrisons equation, piping
elements are also subjected to a lift force and a buoyancy force. The lift force is defined as the
force acting normal to the plane formed by the velocity vector and the axis of the element. The
lift force is defined as:
Fl = * * Cl * D * U2
Where:
- is the fluid density
Cl - is the lift coefficient
D - is the pipe diameter
U - is the particle velocity
The buoyancy force acts upward and is equal to the weight of the fluid volume displaced by the
element.
905
A piping system can be described by using the standard finite element equation:
[K] {x} = {f}
Where:
[K] - is the global stiffness matrix for the entire system
{x} - is the displacement / rotation vector to solve for
{f} - is global load vector
Calculate pseudo-static hydrodynamic loading

1. Place the element loads generated by the hydrodynamic effects in their proper locations in
{f}, similar to weight, pressure, and temperature.
2. Perform a standard finite element solution on the system of equations to finalize [K] and {f}.
3. Use the resulting displacement vector {x} to compute element forces.
4. Use the computed element forces to compute the element stresses.
Except for the buoyancy force, all other hydrodynamic forces acting on the element are a
function of the particle velocities and accelerations.
Airy Wave Theory Implementation

Airy Wave theory is also known as Linear Wave theory due to the assumption that the wave
profile is symmetric about the mean water level. Standard Airy Wave theory allows for the
computation of the water particle velocities and accelerations between the mean surface
elevation and the bottom. The Modified Airy Wave theory allows for the consideration of the
actual free surface elevation in the computation of the particle data. CAESAR II includes both
the standard and modified forms of the Airy wave theory.
To apply the Airy Wave theory, you must enter several descriptive parameters about the wave.
The software uses these parameters along with the Newton-Raphston iteration to determine the
wave length. Each wave has its own unique wave length that the software determines solving
the dispersion relation, shown below:
L = (gT2 / 2) * tanh(2D / L)
Where:
g - is the acceleration of gravity
T - is the wave period
D - is the mean water depth
L - is the wave length to solve for
After determining the wave length (L), you can determine any other wave parameters you want.
The parameters determined and used by CAESAR II are: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above (or below) the mean water level (ETA). For more information on the
equations for these parameters, refer to any text which discusses ocean wave theories.
906
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory Implementation

The Stokes Wave is a 5th order gravity non-linear wave. CAESAR II uses the solution technique
described in a paper published in 1960 by Skjelbreia and Hendrickson of the National
Engineering Science Company. The standard formulation as well as a modified formulation, to
the free surface, is available in CAESAR II Stokes 5th Order Wave Theory.
The solution follows a procedure very similar to that used in the Airy Wave Theory
Implementation (on page 906). You can determine the characteristic parameters of the wave by
using Newton-Raphston iteration, after finding the water particle values of interest.
The Newton-Raphston iteration procedure solves two non-linear equations for constants beta
and lambda. After you determine these values, you can compute the other constants. After
computing all of the constants, use CAESAR II to compute: the horizontal and vertical particle
velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY), and the
surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).
Stream Function Wave Theory Implementation

The solution to Dean's Stream Function Wave Theory used by CAESAR II is described in the
text by Sarpkaya and Issacson. As previously mentioned, this is a numerical technique to solve
the stream function. The solution subsequently obtained, provides the horizontal and vertical
particle velocities (UX and UY), the horizontal and vertical particle acceleration (AX and AY),
and the surface elevation above the mean water level (ETA).
Ocean Currents
In addition to the forces imposed by ocean waves, piping elements can also be subjected to
forces imposed by ocean currents. There are three different ocean current models in
CAESAR II: linear current, piece-wise, and power law profile.
The linear current profile assumes that the current velocity through the water column varies
linearly from the specified surface velocity (at the surface) to zero (at the bottom).
The piece-wise linear profile employs linear interpolation between specific user-defined
depth/velocity points.
The power law profile decays the surface velocity to the 1/7 power.
While waves produce unsteady flow where the particle velocities and accelerations at a point
constantly change, currents produce a steady, non-varying flow.
907
Technical Notes on CAESAR II Hydrodynamic Loading

The input parameters necessary to define the fluid loading are described in detail in the next
section. The basic parameters describe the wave height and period, and the current velocity.
The most difficult to obtain, and also the most important parameters, are the drag, inertia, and lift
coefficients: Cd, Cm, and Cl. Based on the recommendations of API RP2A and DNV (Det Norske
Veritas), values for Cd range from 0.6 to 1.2, values for C m range from 1.5 to 2.0. Values for Cl
show a wide range of scatter, but the approximate mean value is 0.7.
The inertia coefficient Cm is equal to one plus the added mass coefficient Ca. This added mass
value accounts for the mass of the fluid assumed to be entrained with the piping element.
In actuality, these coefficients are a function of the fluid particle velocity, which varies over the
water column. In general practice, two dimensionless parameters are computed that are used to
obtain the Cd, Cm, and Cl values from published charts. The first dimensionless parameter is the
Keulegan-Carpenter Number, K. K is defined as:
K = Um * T / D
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
T = Wave Period
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
The second dimensionless parameter is the Reynolds number, R e. Re is defined as
Re = Um * D /
Where:
Um = Maximum Fluid Particle Velocity
D = Characteristic Diameter of the Element
= Kinematic Viscosity of the Fluid 1.26e-5 ft2/sec for Sea Water
908
After you calculate K and Re use the charts to obtain Cd, Cm, and Cl. For more information, see
Mechanics of Wave Forces on Offshore Structures by T. Sarpkaya. Figures 3.21, 3.22, and 3.25
are example charts, which display below.
909
In order to determine these coefficients, the fluid particle velocity (at the location of interest)
must be determined. The appropriate wave theory is solved, and these particle velocities are
readily obtained.
Of the wave theories discussed, the modified Airy and Stokes 5th theories include a modification
of the depth-decay function. The standard theories use a depth-decay function equal to cosh(kz)
/ sinh(kd),
Where:
k - is the wave number, 2 /L
L - is the wave length
d - is the water depth
z - is the elevation in the water column where the data is to be determined
The modified theories include an additional term in the numerator of this depth-decay function.
The modified depth-decay function is equal to cosh(d) / sinh(kd),
Where:
- is equal to z / (d + h)
The term d represents the effective height of the point at which the particle velocity and
acceleration are to be computed. The use of this term keeps the effective height below the still
water level. This means that the velocity and acceleration computed are convergent for actual
heights above the still water level.
As previously stated, the drag, inertia, and lift coefficients are a function of the fluid velocity and
the diameter of the element in question. Note that the fluid particle velocities vary with both
depth and position in the wave train (as determined by the applied wave theory). Therefore,
these coefficients are in fact not constants. However, from a practical engineering point of view,
varying these coefficients as a function of location in the Fluid field is usually not implemented.
This practice can be justified when one considers the inaccuracies involved in specifying the
instantaneous wave height and period. According to Sarpkaya, these values are insufficient to
accurately predict wave forces, a consideration of the previous fluid particle history is necessary.
In light of these uncertainties, constant values for Cd, Cm, and Cl are recommended by API and
many other references.
910
The effects of marine growth must also be considered. Marine growth has the following effects
on the system loading: the increased pipe diameters increase the hydrodynamic loading; the
increased roughness causes an increase in Cd, and therefore the hydrodynamic loading; the
increase in mass and added mass cause reduced natural frequencies and increase the dynamic
amplification factor; it causes an increase in the structural weight; and possibly causes
hydrodynamic instabilities, such as vortex shedding.
Finally, Morrisons force equation is based the "small body" assumption. The term "small" refers
to the "diameter to wave length" ratio. If this ratio exceeds 0.2, the inertial force is no longer in
phase with the acceleration of the fluid particles and diffraction effects must be considered. In
such cases, the fluid loading as typically implemented by CAESAR II is no longer applicable.
Additional discussions on hydrodynamic loads and wave theories can be found in the references
at the end of this article.
Input: Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in CAESAR II

The hydrodynamic load analysis requires the specification of several measurable parameters
that quantify the physical aspects of the environmental phenomenon in question.
You can enter four different wave loads here. Use the Editing Load Case buttons to
move up or down between the Wave Load Input Spreadsheets.
The necessary hydrodynamic parameters are discussed in the following paragraphs and a
CAESAR II hydrodynamic loading dialog is shown in the figure below.
911
Current Data
Profile Type Defines the interpolation method you want CAESAR II to use to determine the
current velocity as a function of depth. Available options for this entry are:
Power Law Profile Determines the current velocity at depth D according to the equation:
Vd = Vs * [di / D]p
Where:
Vd - is the velocity at depth d i
Vs - is the specified velocity at the surface
D - is the water depth
p - is the power, set to 1/7
Piece-wise Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation of a velocity verse depth table
that you must provide, to determine the current velocity at depth d i. The table should start at
the surface (a depth of zero) and progress in increasing depth to the sea bed.
Linear Profile Performs a linear interpolation to determine the current velocity at depth d i.
However, this method assumes the current velocity varies linearly from the specified surface
velocity to zero at the sea bed.
Current Speed Defines the current speed at the surface. The units for this entry are
(length/time) as defined by the active units file at the time of input. This value should always
be a positive entry.
Current Direction Cosines Defines the direction of fluid transport due to the current.
These fields are unit-less and follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Data
Wave Theory Indicator Specifies which wave theory to use to compute the water particle
velocities and accelerations. The wave theories available are:
Standard Airy Wave This is also known as linear wave theory. Discussion of this theory can
be found in the previously mentioned references.
Modified Airy Wave This is a modification of the standard Airy theory which includes the free
surface effects due to the wave. The modification consists of determining a depth scaling factor
equal to the depth divided by the depth plus the surface elevation. Note that this scale factor
varies as a function of the location in the wave train.
Standard Stokes 5th Wave This is a 5th order wave theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stokes 5th Wave This is a modification of the standard Stokes 5th theory. The
modification is the same as applied to the Airy theory.
Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, also discussed in the
previously mentioned references.
Modified Stream Function Wave This is Deans Stream Function theory, modified to
directly consider current in the wave solution.
912
Stream Function Order When the Stream Function theory is activated, the solution order
must be defined. Typical values for the stream function order range from 3 to 13, and must be
an odd value (see API-RP2A figure).
Water Depth Defines the vertical distance (in units of length) from the still water level the
surface to the sea bed.
Wave Height Defines the height of the incident wave. The height is the vertical distance in
units of length from the wave crest to the wave trough.
Wave Period Defines the time span (in seconds) for two successive wave crests to pass a
fixed point.
Wave Kinematic Factor Because the two dimensional wave theories do not account for
spreading, a reduction factor is often used for the horizontal particle velocity and acceleration.
Wave kinematic measurements support values in the range of 0.85 to 0.95. Refer to the
applicable offshore codes before using this item.
Wave Direction Cosines Define the direction of wave travel. These fields are unit-less and
follow the standard software global axis convention.
Wave Phase Angle Defines the position of the wave relative to the starting node of the
piping system. The phase angle is a measure (in degrees) of position in the wave train, where 0
is the wave crest, 180 is the wave trough, and 360 is the following crest. Because the wave
propagates over the piping structure, each point in the structure experiences all possible wave
phase angles. One analysis technique specifies the wave phase at the system origin, and then
the phase at each node point in the model is deter\-mined. From these exact phase locations,
the water particle data is computed from the wave theory.
Alternatively, a conservative engineering approach is to use the same phase angle usually zero
for all points in the model. This technique produces higher loads; however, the extra
conservatism is warranted when given the unknowns in specifying environmental data.
Seawater Data
Free Surface Elevation Defines the height of the free surface from the global system origin.
If the system origin is at the free surface, this entry should be specified as zero. If the system
origin is at the sea bottom, this entry is equal to the water depth. By default, the first node in a
CAESAR II model is at an elevation of zero. You can change the elevation by pressing [Alt-+G].
Kinematic Viscosity Defines the kinematic viscosity of water. This value is used to
determine the Reynolds number, which is subsequently used to determine the hydrodynamic
coefficients Cd, Cm, and Cl. Typical values of kinematic viscosity for sea water display below.
Temp Deg (F)
n(ft2/sec)
Temp (C)
n(m2/sec)
60
1.26e-5
15.556
1.17058e-6
50
1.46e-5
10.000
1.35639e-6
40
1.55e-5
4.444
1.44000e-6
30
2.00e-5
-1.111
1.85807e-6
Fluid Weight Density - Defines the weight density of the fluid. For sea water, this value is
approximately .037037 pounds per cubic inch (.001025 kg/cm3, 1.0256SG).
913
Piping Element Data

Element Exposure In implementing hydrodynamic loading in your software, you must be
able to indicate that elements are either exposed to the fluid or not exposed to the fluid. In
CAESAR II, this is accomplished by a set of options, which indicate that the particular element is
exposed to hydrodynamic loads, wind loads, or not exposed. This specification carries forward
for all subsequent elements until changed.
Hydrodynamic Coefficients Piping elements that are subjected to hydrodynamic loading
must have drag (Cd), inertia (C m), and a lift (Cl) coefficient defined. The specification of these
items is optional. Alternatively, you can specify these values as constants to be applied to all
subsequent exposed elements, regardless of depth or phase position in the wave. Alternatively,
You can leave these values blank, which causes CAESAR II to interpolate their values from the
charts previously discussed.
Marine Growth Defines the amount of marine growth on the piping elements. This value is
used to increase the diameter of the piping elements. The units for this field are the units of the
current diameter. The diameter used in the computation of the hydrodynamic forces is equal to
the pipe diameter plus twice the marine growth entry.
References
1. Mechanics of Wave Forces On Offshore Structures, Turgut Sarpkaya and Michael Isaacson,
Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1982, ISBN 0-442-25402-4.
2. Handbook of Ocean and Underwater Engineering, Myers, Holm, and McAllister,
McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1969, ISBN 07-044245 -2.
3. Fifth Order Gravity Wave Theory, Lars Skjelbreia and James Hendrickson, National
Engineering Science Co., Pasadena, California, 1960.
4. Planning and Design of Fixed Offshore Platforms, McClelland and Reifel, Van Nostrand
Reinhold Co., 1986, ISBN 0-442-25223-4.
5. Intercomparison of Near-Bottom Kinematics by Several Wave Theories and Field and
Laboratory Data, R. G. Dean and M. Perlin, Coastal Engineering, #9 (1986), p399-437.
6. A Finite Amplitude Wave on a Linear Shear Current, R. A. Dalrymple, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 79, No 30, 1974.
7. Application of Stream Function Wave Theory to Offshore Design Problems, R. G. Dean,
OTC #1613, 1972.
8. Stream Function Representation of Nonlinear Ocean Waves, R. G. Dean, Journal of
Geophysical Research, Vol 70, No 18, 1965.
9. American Petroleum Institute - Recommended Practice 2A (API-RP2A), American
Petroleum Institute, July 1993.
10. Improved Algorithm for Stream Function Wave Theory, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January 1989.
11. Stream Function Wave Theory with Profile Constraints, Min-Chih Huang, Journal of
Waterway, Port, Coastal, and Ocean Engineering, January/February 1993.
914
Evaluating Vessel Stresses

ASME Section VIII Division 2 CAESAR II applies rules prior to the 2007 Edition provides a
procedure to analyze the local stresses in vessels and nozzles. For this example, we will only
discuss the nozzle analysis approach.
Always refer to the applicable design code if any of the limits described in this section are
approached, or if any unusual material, weld, or stress situation exists, or there are non-linear
concerns such as the operation of material within creep range.
The first step is to determine if the elastic approach is satisfactory. To summarize, Section
AD-160 states that if the model meets all of the following conditions, then a fatigue analysis is
not required:
1. The expected design number of full-range pressure cycles does not exceed the number of
allowed cycles corresponding to a S a value of 3Sm (4Sm for non-integral attachments) on the
material fatigue curve. Sm is the allowable stress intensity for the material at the operating
temperature.
2. The expected design range of pressure cycles other than startup or shutdown must be less
than ( for non-integral attachments) the design pressure times (S a/Sm), where Sa is the
value from the material fatigue curve for the specified number of significant pressure
fluctuations.
3. The vessel does not experience localized high stress due to heating.
4. The full range of stress intensities due to mechanical loads including piping reactions does
not exceed Sa, from the fatigue curve, for the expected number of load fluctuations.
After deciding if an elastic analysis is satisfactory, you must determine whether to take either a
simplified or a comprehensive approach to do the vessel stress analysis. For more information
on the simplified or the comprehensive approach, see ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic
Nozzle Simplified Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified Analysis
pre-2007" on page 919) or ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive
Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007)"
on page 915). For more information on Section VIII Division 2 requirements, refer to the latest
version of the ASME code.
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Comprehensive

Analysis (pre-2007)
To address the local allowable stress problem, you should have the endurance curve for the
material of construction and complete design pressure/temperature loading information.
Carefully consult the code before performing the local stress analysis if:
any elastic limit is approached
there is anything unusual in the nozzle/vessel connection design
The material Sm table and the endurance curve for carbon steels used in this
section are for illustration purposes. You should only use values taken directly from the code in
your design.
There are three criteria you must satisfy before considering stresses in the vessel wall due to
nozzle loads within the allowables. The three criteria are summarized as:
915
Pm < kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb< 1.5kSmh
Pm + Pl + Pb + Q < 3Smavg
Where Pm, Pl, Pb, and Q are the general primary membrane stress, the local primary membrane
stress, the local primary bending stress, and the total secondary stresses (membrane plus
bending), respectively; and k, S mh, and Smavg are the occasional stress factor, the hot material
allowable stress intensity, and the average material stress intensity (S mh + Smc) / 2.
The stress classification defined by the Section VIII Division 2 code in the vicinity of nozzles,
classifies the bending stress terms caused by any external load moments or internal pressure in
the vessel wall near a nozzle or other opening, as secondary stress Q, regardless of whether
they were caused by sustained or expansion loads. This definition causes P b to disappear and
leads to a more detailed classification:
Pm - General primary membrane stress (primarily due to internal pressure)
Pl - Local primary membrane stress, which may include the following:
Membrane stress due to internal pressure
Local membrane stress due to applied sustained forces and moments
Q - Secondary stresses, which may include the following:
Bending stress due to internal pressure
Bending stress due to applied sustained loads
Membrane stress due to applied expansion loads
Bending stress due to applied expansion loads
Each of the stress terms defined in the above classifications contains three parts: two stress
components in normal directions and one shear stress component. To combine these stresses,
the following rules apply:
1. Compute the normal and shear components for each of the three stress types, that is, Pm,
Pl, and Q.
2. Compute the stress intensity due to the P m and compare it against kSmh.
3. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to P m and Pl; compute the
resultant stress intensity and compare its value against 1.5kS mh.
4. Add the individual normal and shear stress components due to P m, Pl, and Q, compute the
resultant stress intensity, and compare its value to against 3S mavg.
5. Determine if there is an occasional load as well as a sustained load, these types can be
repeated using a value of 1.2 for k.
These criteria can be readily found from Figure 4-130.1 of Appendix 4 of ASME Section VIII,
Division 2 2004 and the surrounding text. Note that the primary bending stress term, P b, is not
applicable to the shell stress evaluation, and therefore disappears from the Section VIII, Division
2 requirements. Using the same analogy, write the peak stress limit as:
Pl + Pb + Q + F < Sa
The preceding equation need not be satisfied, provided the elastic limit criteria of AD-160 is met
based on the statement explicitly given in Section 5-100, which is cited below:
916
"If the specified operation of the vessel meets all of the conditions of AD-160, no analysis for
cyclic operation is required and it can be assumed that the peak stress limit discussed in 4-135
has been satisfied by compliance with the applicable requirements for materials, design,
fabrication, testing and inspection of this division."
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles Using WRC 107

Check vessel stresses in shells using WRC 107
1. Check the geometric limitation to see whether WRC 107 is applicable.
2. If yes, determine whether the elastic approach as outlined in Section VIII Division 2 AD-160
is applicable.
3. Compute the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads in the vessel shell due to the
applied nozzle loads.
4. Consider the local restraint configuration to determine whether some or all the axial
pressure thrust load P * A in should be added to the sustained and occasional loads. If you
choose, the software can automatically calculate the thrust load and add it to the applied
loads.
5. Calculate the pressure stresses, P m, on the vessel shell wall in both the longitudinal and
circumferential hoop directions for both sustained and occasional load cases.
Notice that two different pressure terms are required in carrying out the pressure stress
calculations. P is the design pressure of the system (sustained), while P var is the difference
between the peak pressure and the design pressure of the system, which is used to qualify
the vessel membrane stress under the occasional load case.
If you enter the pressure value, the software automatically calculates the P m
stresses.
6. The processor will calculate the P l, and Q stresses as defined earlier.
If needed, you can simultaneously compute the local stresses due to sustained,
expansion, and occasional loads.
7. Obtain the various stress components by combining the stress intensities computed from
applying the sustained, expansion, and occasional loads, if applicable.
8. Then use stress intensities to carry out the stress summations.
If needed, use the results to determine the acceptability of the local stresses in the
vessel shell. Notice how CAESAR II provides the WRC 107 Stress Summation module in
line with the stress calculation routines.
The equations used in CAESAR II to qualify the various stress components can be summarized
as follows:
Pm(SUS) < Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) < 1.2Smh
Pm(SUS) + Pl(SUS) < 1.5Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) < 1.5(1.2)Smh
Pm(SUS + OCC) + Pl(SUS + OCC) + Q(SUS + EXP + OCC) < 1.5(S mc + Smh)
917
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME Section VIII

Division 2 Elastic Nozzle Analysis pre-2007
The most difficult problem associated with the comprehensive ASME Section VIII Division 2
nozzle/vessel analysis involves the pressure calculation. Hoop and longitudinal pressure hand
calculations are not considered reliable, and axial pressure loading on the junction is often
miscalculated or omitted. Another issue with the comprehensive calculation is the amount of
time it takes to organize and manipulate the stress data. For these reasons, an alternate
simplified approach was developed using three checks.
The first check, Pm due to pressure, must be 1.0 Smh. To eliminate the concern for pressure,
both the loading pressure term on the left side of the inequality and the allowable pressure term
on the right side of the inequality cancel out.
This assumes that the area of reinforcement around the nozzle satisfies the pressure
requirements. Also, let Pm equal the maximum value.
The second check, Pm + Pl + Pb, must be 1.5 Smh. Subtract the stress due to pressure, P m, from
both sides of the inequality and assuming Pm equals Smh. This reduces the check to: Pl + Pb
0.5 Smh (due to external sustained forces without pressure).
The third check, Pm + Pl + Q, is the root of the application controversy. There are three schools
of thought:
Pm+Pl+Q is an operating loading condition, and as such, includes the loads due to pressure
and weight.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads or the expansion loading condition, and as such, excludes the
effects of sustained, or primary loads. Also, exclude the primary sustained loads like weight
and pressure.
Pm+Pl+Q is the range of loads and excludes the primary load weight, but includes the
varying pressure load at least in those thermal load cases where the system goes from a
startup ambient temperature and pressure condition to operating condition.
To simplify the calculation, assume that P m, due to pressure, is included on both sides of the
Pm+Pl+Pb+Q < 3Sm inequality. Also, assume that the area reinforcement requirements are
exactly satisfied. Again, let P m = Sm and subtract this term from the expansion allowable (P m + Pl
+ Q < 3Sm) to provide a simplified allowable limit.
The expansion, operating, or both loads from the CAESAR II Restraint report (see
"Restraints" on page 586) must satisfy the computed stress requirement:
Pl + Pb + Q (operating or expansion excluding pressure) < 2S m.
To summarize:
1. Ensure proper nozzle reinforcement for pressure and assume pressure stresses are at their
maximum.
2. Compare primary stresses without pressure to Smh.
3. Compare stresses due to the sum of primary and secondary loads to 2S m(avg); where Sm(avg)
is the average of the hot and cold allowable stress intensities S mh and Smc.
918
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle Simplified

Analysis pre-2007
1. Perform a CAESAR II analysis of the piping loads on the vessel/nozzle junction. Use WRC
297 flexibilities to compute loads more accurately, but less conservatively or do two
analyses, one with flexibilities and one without.
From this analysis you should have sustained, operating, and expansion loads on the
vessel/nozzle junction.
2. Find Smh and Smc from the Sect. VIII allowable stress tables.
Smh is the vessel material hot allowable, and S mc is the vessel material cold allowable.
3. Run WRC 107 with the sustained loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < 0.5 Smh.
This operation helps in conservatively considering bending stresses from internal
pressure and sustained moments and also lets you categorize the stresses and moment as
a primary classification. If the operation fails, review the stresses in more detail.
4. Run WRC 107 with the operating loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < S mh + Smc.
5. Run WRC 107 with the expansion loads on the vessel/nozzle junction from CAESAR II, and
verify that the computed stress intensities are < S mh + Smc.
Should any of the checks described fail, then perform the more comprehensive analysis of the
junction described earlier. For more information, see ASME Section VIII Division 2 - Elastic
Analysis of Nozzle Comprehensive Analysis (see "ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis (pre-2007)" on page 915).
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction

The response of a system under a dynamic load is often determined by superposition of modal
results, with CAESAR II specifically providing the Spectral Analysis method for use. One of the
advantages of modal analysis is that usually only a limited number of modes are excited and
need be included in the analysis. The drawback to this method is that although displacements
may be obtained with good accuracy using only a few of the lowest frequency modes, the force,
reaction, and stress results may require extraction of far more modes, possibly far into the rigid
range, before acceptable accuracy is attained. The Missing Mass option offers the ability to
include a correction which represents the quasi-static contribution of the higher order modes not
explicitly extracted for the modal/dynamic response, thus providing greater accuracy with
reduced calculation time.
The dynamic response of a linear multi-degree-of-freedom system is described by the following
equation:
Ma(t) + Cv(t) + Kx(t) = F(t)
Where:
M = n x n mass matrix of system
C = n x n damping matrix of system
K = n x n stiffness matrix of system
919
a(t) = n x 1, time-dependent acceleration vector
v(t) = n x 1, time-dependent velocity vector
x(t) = n x 1, time-dependent displacement vector
F(t) = n x 1, time-dependent applied force vector
Assuming harmonic motion and neglecting damping, the free vibration eigenvalue problem for
this system is
K - M2 = 0
Where:
= n x n mode shape matrix
2 = n x n matrix where each diagonal entry is the angular frequency squared of the
corresponding mode
The modal matrix can be normalized such that T M = I (where I is the n x n identity matrix)
and T = 2.
Partition the modal matrix into two sub-matrices:
= [e r ]
Where:
e = mode shapes extracted for dynamic analysis (that is., lowest frequency modes)
r = residual (non-extracted) mode shapes (corresponding to rigid response, or the "missing
mass" contribution)
The extracted mode shapes are orthogonal to the residual mode shapes, or:
eT x r = 0
The displacement components can be expressed as linear combinations of the mode shapes:
x = Y = e Ye + r Yr = xe + xr
Where:
x = Total System Displacements
xe = System Displacements Due to Extracted Modes
xr = System Displacements Due to Residual Modes
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
The dynamic load vector can be expressed in similar terms:
F = K Y = K e Ye + Kr Yr = Fe + Fr
Where:
F = Total System Load Vector
Fe = Load Vector Due to Extracted Modes
Fr = Load Vector Due to Residual Modes
920
Y = Generalized Modal Coordinates
Ye = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Extracted Modes
Yr = Partition of Y Matrix Corresponding to Residual Modes
Normally, modal superposition analyses completely neglect the rigid response the displacement
Xr caused by the load Fr. This response, of the non-extracted modes, can be obtained from the
system displacement under a static loading Fr. Based upon the relation\-ships stated above, you
can estimate Fr as follows:
F = K e Ye + K r Yr
Multiplying both sides byeT and considering that eT r = 0:
eT F = eT K e Ye + eT K r Yr = eT K e Ye
Substituting e2 for eT K e and solving for Ye:
eT F = e2 Ye
Ye = eT e-2 F
The residual force can now be stated as
Fr = F - K e Ye = F - eT K e e-2 F
As seen earlier
T M 2 = I 2 = T K
Substituting eT Me e2 for eT K e:
Fr = F - eT M e e2 e-2 F = F - eT Me F
Therefore, CAESAR II calculates the residual response (and includes it as the missing mass
contribution) according to the following procedure:
1. The missing mass load is calculated for each individual shock load as:
Fr = F - eT M e F
The load vector F represents the product of:
the force set vector and the rigid DLF for force spectrum loading;
the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and directional vector for non-ISM seismic loads;
and the product of the mass matrix, ZPA, and displacement matrix (under unit ISM
support displacement) for seismic anchor movement loads.
Note that the missing mass load will vary, depending upon the number of modes
extracted by the user and the cutoff frequency selected (or more specifically, the DLF or
acceleration corresponding to the cutoff frequency). "Rigid," for the purposes of
determining the rigid DLF, or the ZPA, may be designated by the user, through a setup
parameter, to be either the DLF/acceleration associated with the frequency of the last
extracted mode, or the true spectral DLF/ ZPA that corresponding to the largest entered
frequency of the input spectrum.
2. The missing mass load is applied to the structure as a static load. The static structural
response is then combined (according to the user-specified combination method) with the
dynamically amplified modal responses as if it was a modal response. Actually this static
921
response is the algebraic sum of the responses of all non-extracted modesrepresenting
in-phase response, as would be expected from rigid modes.
3. The Missing Mass Data report is compiled for all shock cases, whether missing mass is to
be included or not. The percent of mass active is calculated according to:
% Active Mass = 1 - ( Fr[i] / F [i])
summed over i = 1 to n, where n is the number of modes included
The maximum possible percent that is theoretically possible for this value is of course 100%;
however numerical inaccuracies may occasionally cause the value to be slightly higher. If the
missing mass correction factor is included, the percent of mass included in the correction is
shown in the report as well.
Because the CAESAR II procedure assumes that the missing mass correction represents the
contribution of rigid modes, and that the ZPA is based upon the spectral ordinate value at the
frequency of the last extracted mode, we recommend that you extract modes up to, but not far
beyond, a recognized "rigid" frequency. Choosing a cutoff frequency below the spectrums
resonant peak [point (1) below] provides a non-conservative result, because resonant responses
may be missed. Using a cutoff frequency higher than the peak (2), but still in the resonant range,
will yield conservative results, because the ZPA/rigid DLF will be overestimated. Extracting a
large number of rigid modes for calculation of the dynamic response may be conservative (4),
because all available modal combination methods (SRSS, GROUP, ABS, and so forth) give
conservative results versus the algebraic combination method which gives a more realistic
representation of the net response of the rigid modes. Based upon the response spectrum
shown below, an appropriate cutoff point for the modal extraction would be about 33 Hz (3).
922
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted Loads
CAESAR II provides two options for combining the missing mass correction with modal dynamic
results SRSS and Absolute. The Absolute Combination method provides the more
conservative result and is based upon the assumption that dynamic amplification is going to
occur simultaneously with the maximum ground acceleration or force load. Literature
(References 1, 2) states that the modal and the rigid portions of the response to typical dynamic
loads are actually statistically independent, so that the SRSS Combination method is a more
accurate representation of reality. Because the SRSS Combination method is most closely
aligned to reality, CAESAR II defaults to this missing mass combination method.
References
1. A. K. Gupta, Response Spectrum Method in Seismic Analysis and Design of Structures,
CRC Press, 1990
2. K. M. Vashi, "Computation of Seismic Response from Higher Frequency Modes," ASME
80-C2/PVP-50, 1980
3. O. E. Hansteen and K. Bell, "On the Accuracy of Mode Superposition Analysis in Structural
Dynamics," Earthquake Engineering and Structural Dynamics, Volume 7, John Wiley &
Sons, Ltd., 1979
923
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II

For most piping codes supported by CAESAR II, performing a fatigue analysis is an extension
to, rather than an explicit part of, the code requirements. However, it is an explicit part of the
IGE/TD/12 Pipework Stress Analysis for Gas Industry Plant code.
Fatigue Basics
Piping and vessels have been known to suffer from sudden failure following years of successful
service. Research done during the 1940s and 1950s, primarily advanced by A. R. C. Markls
"Piping Flexibility Analysis," published in 1955, provided an explanation for this phenomenon, as
well as design criteria aimed at avoiding failures of this type. The explanation was that materials
were failing due to fatigue, a process leading to the propagation of cracks, and subsequent
fracture, following repeated cyclic loading.
Steels and other metals are made up of organized patterns of molecules, known as crystal
structures. However, these patterns are not maintained throughout the steel producing an ideal
homogeneous material, but are found in microscopic isolated island-like areas called grains.
Inside each grain a pattern of molecules is preserved. From one grain boundary to the next the
molecular pattern is the same, but the orientations differ. As a result, grain boundaries are high
energy borders. Plastic deformation begins within a grain that is subject to both a high stress
and oriented such that the stress causes a slippage between adjacent layers in the same
pattern. The incremental slippages, called dislocations, cause local cold-working. On the first
application of the stress, dislocations can move through many of the grains that are in the local
area of high stress. As the stress is repeated, more dislocations move through their respective
grains. Dislocation movement is impeded by the grain boundaries. After multiple stress
applications, the dislocations tend to accumulate at grain boundaries. Eventually they become
so dense that the grains "lock up" causing a loss of ductility and thus preventing further
dislocation movement. Subsequent applications of the stress cause the grain to tear, forming
cracks. Repeated stress applications cause the cracks to grow. Unless abated, the cracks
propagate with additional stress applications until sufficient cross sectional strength is lost to
cause a catastrophic failure of the material.
924
You can estimate the fatigue capacity of a material through the application of cyclic
tensile/compressive displacement loads with a uniaxial test machine. A plot of the cyclic stress
capacity of a material is called a fatigue or endurance curve. These curves are generated
through multiple cyclic tests at different stress levels. The number of cycles to failure usually
increases as the applied cyclic stress decreases, often until a threshold stress, known as the
endurance limit, is reached below which no fatigue failure occurs, regardless of the number of
applied cycles. An endurance curve for carbon and low alloy steels, taken from the ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Pressure Vessel Code displays below:
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems

IGE/TD/12 does present specific requirements for true fatigue evaluation of systems subject to a
cyclic loading threshold. Furthermore, ASME Section III, Subsection NB and ASME Section VIII
Division 2 provide guidelines by which fatigue evaluation rules can be applied to piping and
other pressure retaining equipment. These procedures have been adapted, where possible, to
the methodology used by CAESAR II.
Perform fatigue analysis

1. From the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, enter fatigue data or import it in from a text file.
You can also define your own fatigue curves as discussed later in this section. By doing this,
you assign the fatigue curve data to the piping material.
To help with your fatigue analysis, CAESAR II provides a number of commonly used
curves.
925
2. From either the Static or Dynamic Load Case Builders you must define, for every fatigue
load case, the number of anticipated cycles.
Also we have added a new FAT stress type.
3. Unless explicitly defined in the applicable code, CAESAR II calculates the fatigue stress the
same way it calculates the stress intensity.
IGE/TD/12 is the only piping code supported by CAESAR II that has explicit
instructions for calculating fatigue stresses. For more information on IGE/TD/12, refer to
IGE/TD/12 (on page 993).
4. Allowable fatigue stresses are interpolated logarithmically from the fatigue curve based upon
the number of cycles designated for the load case. For static load cases, the calculated
stress is assumed to be a peak-to-peak cyclic value (for example, thermal expansion,
settlement, pressure, and so forth), so the allowable stress is extracted directly from the
fatigue curve. For harmonic and dynamic load cases, the calculated stress is assumed to be
a zero-to-peak cyclic value (for example, vibration, earth\-quake, and so forth), so the
extracted allowable is divided by two prior to use in the comparison.
5. The flip side of calculating the allowable fatigue stress for the designated number of cycles
is the calculation of the allowable number of cycles for the calculated stress level. You can
do this by logarithmically interpolating the "Cycles" axis of the fatigue curve based upon the
calculated stress value. Because static stresses are assumed to be peak-to-peak cyclic
values, the allowable number of cycles is interpolated directly from the fatigue curve.
Because harmonic and dynamic stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak cyclic values, the
allow\-able number of cycles is interpolated using twice the calculated stress value.
6. CAESAR II provides two reports for viewing the results of load cases for the FAT stress
type. The first of these is the standard Stress report that shows the calculated fatigue stress
and fatigue allowable at each node.
You can generate individual stress reports for each load case to show whether any of the
individual load cases in isolation fail the system
However, in those instances where there is more than one cyclic load case potentially
contributing to a fatigue failure, the Cumulative Usage report is appropriate. To generate this
report select all the FAT load cases that contribute to the overall system degradation. The
Cumulative Usage report lists for each node point the usage ratio actual cycle divided by
allowable cycles, and then sums these to obtain the total cumulative usage. A total greater than
1.0 indicates a potential fatigue failure.
Static Analysis Fatigue Example

Consider a sample job that potentially has several different cyclic load variations:
Operating cycle from ambient 70F to 500F, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Shut down external temperature variation from ambient 70F to -20F, 200 cycles
anticipated
Pressurization to 1800 psig, 12,000 cycles anticipated
Pressure fluctuations of +/- 30 psi from the 1800 psig, 200,000 cycles anticipated
To do a proper fatigue analysis, you must group the load pairs that represent the worst-case
combination of stress ranges between extreme states. These load variations can be laid out in
graphical form. The figure below shows a sketch of the various operating ranges this system
926
experiences. Each horizontal line represents an operating range. At the each end of each
horizontal line, the temperatures and pressures defining the range are noted. At the center of
each horizontal line, the number of cycles for each range is defined.
Using this sketch of the operating ranges, the four fatigue load cases can be determined. Case
1: Cover the absolute extreme, from -20F and 0 psi to 500F and 1830 psi. This occurs 200
times. As a result of this case, the cycles for the ranges defined must be reduced by 200. The
first range (-20, 0 to 70, 0) is reduced to zero, and has no contribution to additional load cases.
The second range (70, 0 to 500, 1800) is reduced to 11,800 cycles. The third and fourth ranges
are similarly reduced to 199,800 cycles.
These same steps can be used to arrive at cases 2 through 4, reducing the number of
considered cycles at each step. This procedure is summarized in the table below.
Segment
-20, 0 to 70, 0 70, 0 to 500, 1800 500, 1700 to 500,

1800
500, 1800 to 500, 1830
Initial
200
12,000
200,000
200,000
After 1
11,800
200,000
199,800
After 2
200,000
188,000
After 3
12,000
After 4
Case
This table is then used to set the load cases as cycles between the following load values:
Between -20F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (200 cycles)
Between 70F, 0 psig and 500F, 1830 psig (11,800 cycles)
927
These temperatures and pressures are entered as operating conditions accordingly:
Next enter the fatigue curve data for the material. This is done by clicking Fatigue Curves to
activate the Material Fatigue Curve dialog box. This dialog box can be used to enter the fatigue
curve for the materials.
For IGE/ TD/12, you only need to enter five sets of fatigue curves for fatigue
classes D, E, F, G, and W.
1. Enter up to eight Cycle versus Stress data points to define the curve. Interpolations are
made logarithmically.
2. Enter Cycle/Stress pairs in ascending cycle order.
928
3. Enter stress values as the allowable stress range, rather than the allowable Stress
Amplitude.
You can enter fatigue curve data from a text file, by clicking Read from file. This displays a
list of all \CAESAR\SYSTEM\*.FAT files.
The following fatigue curve files are delivered with CAESAR II. You can also construct additional
fatigue curve files. For more information on fatigue curve files, see Appendix A below:
5-110-1A.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS < 80 ksi
5-110-1B.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.1, UTS = 115-130 ksi
5-110-2A.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve A
5-110-2B.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve B
5-110-2C.FAT
ASME Section VIII Division 2 Figure 5-110.2, Curve C
929
In this case for A106B low carbon steel operating at 500F, 5-110-1A.FAT is the appropriate
selection. This populates the fatigue curve data boxes in the dialog box:
Error check the job, and set up your load cases.

The static load case builder offers a new stress type, FAT (fatigue). Selecting this stress type
does the following:
1. Enables you to define the number of cycles for the load case. Dragging the FAT stress type
into the load case or clicking the Load Cycles button opens the Load Cycles field.
2. Calculates the stress range as per the Fatigue Stress method of the applicable code. This
is the stress intensity for all codes except IGE/TD/12.
3. Compares the calculated stress range to the full value extracted from the fatigue curve.
Indicates that the load case may be included in the Cumulative Usage report.
930
The last four load cases represent the load set pairs defined earlier.
After you run the job the presence of a FAT stress type adds the Cumulative Usage
report to the list of available reports.
931
You can check the fatigue stress range against the fatigue curve allowable for each load case
by selecting it along with the Stresses report. A review of each load case confirms that all stress
levels passed.
932
However, this is not a true evaluation of the situation because it is not a case of either-or. The
piping system is subjected to all of these load cases throughout its expected design life, not just
one of them. Therefore, we must also review the Cumulative Usage (see "Cumulative Usage
Report" on page 596) report, which shows the total effect of all fatigue load cases, or any
user-selected combination, on the design life of the system. This report lists for each load case
the expected number of cycles, the allowable number of cycles (based upon the calculated
stress), and the Usage Ratio (actual cycles divided by allowable cycles). The Usage Ratios are
then summed for all selected load cases. If this sum exceeds 1.0, the system has exceeded its
fatigue capabilities. In this case, it is apparent that with the maximum cumulative usage ratio of
0.87 at node 115, this system is not predicted to fail due to fatigue:
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic Analysis

Fatigue analysis capability is also available for harmonic and dynamic analyses. Harmonic load
cases are entered as they always have been. They can be designated as being stress type FAT
by entering the number of expected load cycles on the harmonic input dialog box:
933
This produces the same types of reports as are available for the static analysis. They can be
processed as discussed earlier.
The only difference between the harmonic and static fatigue analyses is that for harmonic jobs
the calculated stresses are assumed to be zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared
to only half of the stress value extracted from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the
Cumulative Usage report, the number of allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated
stress.
For other dynamic applications (response spectrum and time history), the stress type can be
identified as fatigue by selecting the stress type from the drop list for the Load Case or
Static/Dynamic Combination, and by entering the number of expected cycles in the provided
field.
Note that as with the harmonic analyses, the calculated stresses are assumed to be
zero-to-peak calculations so that they are compared to only half of the stress value extracted
from the fatigue curve. Likewise, when creating the Cumulative Usage report, the number of
allowable cycles is based upon twice the calculated stress.
Creating the .FAT Files

The .FAT file is a text file, containing the data points necessary to describe the fatigue curve for
the material, for both butt welded and fillet welded fittings. A sample FAT file is shown below.
* ASME SECTION VIII DIVISION 2 FATIGUE CURVE
* FIGURE 5-110.1
* DESIGN FATIGUE CURVES FOR CARBON, LOW ALLOY, SERIES 4XX,
* HIGH ALLOY AND HIGH TENSILE STEELS FOR TEMPERATURES NOT
* EXCEEDING 700 F
* FOR UTS 80 KSI
*
0.5000000 - STRESS MULTIPLIER (PSI); ALSO CONVERTS AMPLITUDE TO FULL RANGE
*
10
580000.0
100
205000.0
1000
83000.0
10000
38000.0
934
100000
500000
1000000
0
*
20000.0
13500.0
12500.0
0.0
You can create this text file by using any text editor. Lines beginning with an * are treated as
comment lines. It is good practice to use comment lines so that the data can be tied to a specific
material curve.
The first data line in the file the stress multiplier. This value is used to adjust the data values
from "zero to peak" to "peak to peak" or to convert the stress levels to psi. The entered values
are divided by this number. For example, if the stress values in the file represent the stress
amplitude, in psi, rather than a range, this "stress multiplier" should be 0.5. Following the stress
multiplier is the Fatigue Curve Data table. This table consists of eight lines, of two columns.
The first column is the Cycle column, and the second is the Stress column. For each value in
the cycle column, a corresponding stress value from the material fatigue curve is listed in the
stress column.
Fatigue curves intended for use with IGE/TD/12 are built slightly different. The first data line
contains three values: the stress multiplier, a modulus of elasticity correction, and a modulus of
elasticity multiplier (the correction factor is divided by this to convert to psi). After the files are
read in, the modulus of elasticity correction is inserted into the appropriate field on the Fatigue
Curve dialog. IGE/TD/12 fatigue files also include five sequential fatigue curves, Fatigue Class
D, E, F, G, and W, rather than one. You can use optional comment lines to separate the tables.
The comments help with the readability of the data file. You can best determine the format of the
IGE/TD/12 fatigue files by reviewing the contents of the TD12ST.FAT file.
In all tables, the number of cycles increases as you work down the table. If you do not have
enough data to use all eight lines, fill the unused lines with zeroes.
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses

For IGE/TD/12 the computation of fatigue stresses is detailed in Section 5.4.4 of that code. This
section of the code states: "The principal stress in any plane can be calculated for any set of
conditions from the following formula:"
Where:
Sh = Hoop stress
Sa = Axial stress
Sq = Shear stress
"This should be used for establishing the range of stress, due regard being paid to the direction
and sign." For all other piping codes in CAESAR II, the fatigue stress is computed as the stress
intensity, as follows:
3D Maximum Shear Stress Intensity (Default)
SI = Maximum of:
S1OT - S3OT
S1OB - S3OB
935
Max(S1IT,RPS) - Min(S3IT,RPS)
Max(S1IB,RPS) - Min(S3IB,RPS)
Where:
S1OT=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top
= (SLOT+HPSO)/2.0+(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2)1/2
S3OT=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOT+HPSO)/2.0-(((SLOT-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IT=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0+(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IT=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Top

=(SLIT+HPSI)/2.0-(((SLIT-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S1OB=Maximum Principal Stress, Outside Top

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0+ (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S3OB=Minimum Principal Stress, Outside Bottom

=(SLOB+HPSO)/2.0- (((SLOB-HPSO)/2.0)2+TSO2) 1/2
S1IB=Maximum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0+ (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
S3IB=Minimum Principal Stress, Inside Bottom

=(SLIB+HPSI)/2.0- (((SLIB-HPSI)/2.0)2+TSI2) 1/2
RPS=Radial Pressure Stress, Inside

HPSI=Hoop Pressure Stress (Inside, from Lame's Equation)
HPSO=Hoop Pressure Stress (Outside, from Lame's Equation)
SLOT=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Top
SLIT=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Top
SLOB=Longitudinal Stress, Outside Bottom
SLIB=Longitudinal Stress, Inside Bottom
TSI=Torsional Stress, Inside
936
TSO=Torsional Stress, Outside
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping

Underlying Theory
The behavior of steel and other homogeneous materials has been long understood, permitting
their widespread use as construction materials. The development of the piping and pressure
vessel codes (Reference 1) in the early part of this century led to the confidence in their use in
piping applications. The work of Markl and others in the 1940s and 1950s was responsible for
the formalization of todays pipe stress methods, leading to an ensuing diversification of piping
codes on an industry by industry basis. The advent of the digital computer, and with it the
appearance of the first pipe stress analysis software (Reference 2), further increased the
confidence with which steel pipe could be used in critical applications. The 1980s saw the wide
spread proliferation of the microcomputer, with associated pipe stress analysis software, which
in conjunction with training, technical support, and available literature, has brought stress
analysis capability to almost all engineers. In short, an accumulated experience of close to 100
years, in conjunction with ever improving technology has led to the utmost confidence on the
part of todays engineers when specifying, designing, and analyzing steel, or other metallic,
pipe.
For fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) and other composite piping materials, the situation is not
the same. Fiberglass reinforced plastic was developed only as recently as the 1950s, and did
not come into wide spread use until a decade later (Reference 3). There is not a large base of
stress analysis experience, although not from a lack of commitment on the part of FRP vendors.
Most vendors conduct extensive stress testing on their components, including hydrostatic and
cyclic pressure, uni-axial tensile and compressive, bending, and combined loading tests. The
problem is due to the traditional difficulty associated with, and lack of understanding of, stress
analysis of heterogeneous materials.
First, the behavior and failure modes of these materials are highly complex and not fully
understood, leading to inexact analytical methods and a general lack of agreement on the best
course of action to follow. This lack of agreement has slowed the simplification and
standardization of the analytical methods into universally recognized codes BS 7159 Code
Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics Piping (GRP) Systems for Individual
Plants or Sites and UKOOA Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP
Piping Offshore being notable exceptions.
Second, the heterogeneous, orthotropic behavior of FRP and other composite materials has
hindered the use of the pipe stress analysis algorithms developed for homogeneous, isotropic
materials associated with crystalline structures. A lack of generally accepted analytical
procedures has contributed to a general reluctance to use FRP piping for critical applications.
Stress analysis of FRP components must be viewed on many levels. These levels, or scales,
have been called Micro-Mini-Macro levels, with analysis proceeding along the levels according
to the "MMM" principle (Reference 4).
937
Micro-Level Analysis
Stress analysis on the "Micro" level refers to the detailed evaluation of the individual materials
and boundary mechanisms comprising the composite material. In general, FRP pipe is
manufactured from laminates, which are constructed from elongated fibers of a commercial
grade of glass, E-glass, which are coated with a coupling agent or sizing prior to being
embedded in a thermosetting plastic material, typically epoxy or polyester resin.
This means, on the micro scale, that an analytical model must be created which simulates the
interface between these elements. Because the number and orientation of fibers is unknown at
any given location in a FRP sample, the simplest representation of the micro-model is that of a
single fiber, extending the length of the sample, embedded in a square profile of matrix.
Micro Level GRP Sample -- Single Fiber Embedded in Square Profile of Matrix
Evaluation of this model requires use of the material parameters of:

1. the glass fiber
2. the coupling agent or sizing layer normally of such microscopic proportion that it may be
ignored
3. the plastic matrix
It must be considered that these material parameters might vary for an individual material based
upon tensile, compressive, or shear applications of the imposed stresses, and typical values
vary significantly between the fiber and matrix (Reference 5):
Young's Modulus Ultimate Strength
Coefficient of Thermal Expansion
tensile (MPa)
tensile (MPa)
m/m/C
Glass Fiber 72.5 x103
1.5 x 103
5.0 x 10-6
Plastic
Matrix
.07 x 103
7.0 x 10-6
Material
2.75 x 103
The following failure modes of the composite must be similarly evaluated to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the coupling agent layer
failure of the matrix
938
failure of the fiber-coupling agent bond
failure of the coupling agent-matrix bond
Because of uncertainties about the degree to which the fiber has been coated with the coupling
agent and about the nature of some of these failure modes, this evaluation is typically reduced
to:
failure of the fiber
failure of the matrix
failure of the fiber-matrix interface
You can evaluate stresses in the individual components through finite element analysis of the
strain continuity and equilibrium equations, based upon the assumption that there is a good
bond between the fiber and matrix, resulting in compatible strains between the two. For normal
stresses applied parallel to the glass fiber:
f = m = af / Ef = am / Em
af = am Ef / Em
Where:
f = Strain in the Fiber
= Strain in the Matrix
af = Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Fiber
Ef = Modulus of Elasticity of the Fiber
am = Axial Normal Stress Parallel to Fiber, in the Matrix
Em = Modulus of Elasticity of the Matrix
Due to the large ratio of the modulus of elasticity of the fiber to that of the matrix, it is apparent
that nearly all of the axial normal stress in the fiber-matrix composite is carried by the fiber.
Exact values are (Reference 6):
af = L / [ + (1-)Em/Ef]
am = L / [Ef/Em + (1-)]
Where:
L = nominal longitudinal stress across composite
= glass content by volume
939
The continuity equations for the glass-matrix composite seem less complex for normal stresses
perpendicular to the fibers, because the weak point of the material seems to be limited by the
glass-free cross-section, shown below:
Stress Intensification in Matrix Cross-Section
For this reason, it would appear that the strength of the composite would be equal to that of the
matrix for stresses in this direction. In fact, its strength is less than that of the matrix due to
stress intensification in the matrix caused by the irregular stress distribution in the vicinity of the
stiffer glass. Because the elongation over distance D1 must be equal to that over the longer
distance D2, the strain, and thus the stress at location D1 must exceed that at D2 by the ratio
D2/D1. Maximum intensified transverse normal stresses in the composite are:
Where:
b = intensified normal stress transverse to the fiber, in the composite
= nominal transverse normal stress across composite
m = Poisson's ratio of the matrix
Because of the Poisson effect, this stress produces an additional 'am equal to the
following:
'am = V mb
940
Shear stress can be allocated to the individual components again through the use of continuity
equations. It would appear that the stiffer glass would resist the bulk of the shear stresses.
However, unless the fibers are infinitely long, all shears must eventually pass through the matrix
in order to get from fiber to fiber. Shear stress between fiber and matrix can be estimated as
Where:
ab = intensified shear stress in composite
T = nominal shear stress across composite
Gm = shear modulus of elasticity in matrix
Gf = shear modulus of elasticity in fiber
Determination of the stresses in the fiber-matrix interface is more complex. The bonding agent
has an inappreciable thickness, and thus has an indeterminate stiffness for consideration in the
continuity equations. Also, the interface behaves significantly differently in shear, tension, and
compression, showing virtually no effects from the latter. The state of the stress in the interface
is best solved by omitting its contribution from the continuity equations, and simply considering
that it carries all stresses that must be transferred from fiber to matrix.
After the stresses have been apportioned, they must be evaluated against appropriate failure
criteria. The behavior of homogeneous, isotropic materials such as glass and plastic resin,
under a state of multiple stresses is better understood. Failure criterion for isotropic material
reduces the combined normal and shear stresses (a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) to a single stress, an
equivalent stress, that can be compared to the tensile stress present at failure in a material
under uniaxial loading, that is, the ultimate tensile stress, S ult.
Different theories, and different equivalent stress functions f(a, b, c, ab, ac, bc) have been
proposed, with possibly the most widely accepted being the Huber-von Mises-Hencky criterion,
which states that failure will occur when the equivalent stress reaches a critical value the
ultimate strength of the material:
eq = {1/2 [(a - b)2 + (b - c)2+ (c - a)2 + 6(ab2+ ac2+ bc2)} Sult
This theory does not fully cover all failure modes of the fiber in that it omits reference to direction
of stress, that is, tensile versus compressive. The fibers, being relatively long and thin,
predominantly demonstrate buckling as their failure mode when loaded in compression.
941
The equivalent stress failure criterion has been corroborated, with slightly non-conservative
results, by testing. Little is known about the failure mode of the adhesive interface, although
empirical evidence points to a failure criterion which is more of a linear relationship between the
normal and the square of the shear stresses. Failure testing of a composite material loaded only
in transverse normal and shear stresses are shown in the following figure. The kink in the curve
shows the transition from the matrix to the interface as the failure point.
Mini-Level Analysis
Mini-Level Analysis Fiber Distribution Models

Although feasible in concept, micro level analysis is not feasible in practice. This is due to the
uncertainty of the arrangement of the glass in the composite the thousands of fibers that might
be randomly distributed, semi-randomly oriented, although primarily in a parallel pattern, and of
randomly varying lengths. This condition indicates that a sample can truly be evaluated only on
a statistical basis, thus rendering detailed finite element analysis inappropriate.
For mini-level analysis, a laminate layer is considered to act as a continuous hence the common
reference to this method as the "continuum" method, material, with material properties and
failure modes estimated by integrating them over the assumed cross-sectional distribution,
which is, averaging. The assumption regarding the distribution of the fibers can have a marked
effect on the determination of the material parameters. Two of the most commonly postulated
942
distributions are the square and the hexagonal, with the latter generally considered as being a
better representation of randomly distributed fibers.
The stress-strain relationships, for those sections evaluated as continua, can be written as:
aa = aa/EL - (VL/EL)bb - (VL/EL)cc
bb = -(VL/EL)aa + bb/ET - (VT/ET )cc
cc = -(VL/EL)aa - (VT /ET )bb + cc/ET
ab = ab / 2 GL
bc = bc / 2 GT
ac = ac / 2 GL
Where:
ij = strain along direction i on face j
ij, ab = stress (normal, shear) along direction i on face j
EL = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
VL = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
ET = modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
VT = Poissons ratio of laminate layer in transverse direction
GL = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in longitudinal direction
GT = shear modulus of elasticity of laminate layer in transverse direction
These relationships require that four modules of elasticity, E L, ET, GL, and GT, and two Poissons
ratios, VL and V, be evaluated for the continuum. Extensive research (References 4 - 10) has
been done to estimate these parameters. There is general consensus that the longitudinal terms
can be explicitly calculated; for cases where the fibers are significantly stiffer than the matrix,
they are:
EL = EF + EM(1 - )
GL = GM +/ [ 1 / (GF - GM) + (1 -) / (2GM)]
VL = VF + VM(1 - )
You cannot calculate parameters in the transverse direction. You can only calculate the upper
and lower bounds. Correlations with empirical results have yielded approximations (Reference 5
and 6):
ET = [EM(1+0.85f2) / {(1-VM2)[(1-f)1.25 + f(EM/EF)/(1-VM2)]}
GT = GM (1 + 0.6) / [(1 - )1.25 + (GM/GF)]
VT = VL (EL / ET )
Use of these parameters permits the development of the homogeneous material models that
facilitate the calculation of longitudinal and transverse stresses acting on a laminate layer. The
resulting stresses can be allocated to the individual fibers and matrix using relationships
developed during the micro analysis.
943
Macro-Level Analysis
Macro to Micros Stress Conversion

Where Mini-level analysis provides the means of evaluation of individual laminate layers,
Macro-level analysis provides the means of evaluating components made up of multiple
laminate layers. It is based upon the assumption that not only the composite behaves as a
continuum, but that the series of laminate layers acts as a homogeneous material with
properties estimated based on the properties of the layer and the winding angle, and that finally,
failure criteria are functions of the level of equivalent stress.
Laminate properties may be estimated by summing the layer properties (adjusted for winding
angle) over all layers. For example
Where:
ExLAM = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate
tLAM = thickness of laminate
Ek = Longitudinal modulus of elasticity of laminate layer k
Cik = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to longitudinal laminate axis
Cjk = transformation matrix orienting axes of layer k to transverse laminate axis
tk = thickness of laminate layer k
After composite properties are determined, the component stiffness parameters can be
determined as though it were made of homogeneous material that is, based on component
cross-sectional and composite material properties.
Normal and shear stresses can be determined from 1) forces and moments acting on the
cross-sections, and 2) the cross-sectional properties themselves. These relationships can be
written as:
aa = Faa / Aaa Mba / Sba Mca / Sca
bb = Fbb / Abb Mab / Sab Mcb / Scb
cc = Fcc / Acc Mac / Sac Mbc / Sbc
ab = Fab / Aab Mbb / Rab
944
ac = Fac / Aac Mcc / Rac
ba = Fba / Aba Maa / Rba
bc = Fbc / Abc Mcc / Rbc
ca = Fca / Aca Maa / Rca
cb = Fcb / Acb Mbb / Rcb
Where:
ij = normal stress along axis i on face j
Fij = force acting along axis i on face j
Aij = area resisting force along axis i on face j
Mij = moment acting about axis i on face j
Sij = section modulus about axis i on face j
ij = shear stress along axis i on face j
Rij = torsional resistivity about axis i on face j
Using the relationships developed under macro, mini, and micro analysis, these stresses can be
resolved back into local stresses within the laminate layer, and from there, back into stresses
within the fiber and the matrix. From these, the failure criteria of those microscopic components,
and hence, the component as a whole, can be checked.
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for Piping Systems

The macro-level analysis described above is the basis for the preeminent FRP piping codes in
use today, including Code BS 7159 (Design and Construction of Glass Reinforced Plastics
Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites) and the UKOOA Specification and Recommended
Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore.
BS 7159
BS 7159 uses methods and formulas familiar to the world of steel piping stress analysis in order
to calculate stresses on the cross-section, with the assumption that FRP components have
material parameters based on continuum evaluation or test. All coincident loads, such as
thermal, weight, pressure, and axial extension due to pressure need be evaluated
simultaneously. Failure is based on the equivalent stress calculation method. Because one
normal stress (radial stress) is traditionally considered to be negligible in typical piping
configurations, this calculation reduces to the greater of (except when axial stresses are
compressive):
(when axial stress is greater than hoop)
(when hoop stress is greater than axial)
A slight difficulty arises when evaluating the calculated stress against an allowable, due to the
orthotropic nature of the FRP piping normally the laminate is designed in such a way to make
the pipe much stronger in the hoop, than in the longitudinal, direction, providing more than one
allowable stress. This difficulty is resolved by defining the allowable in terms of a design
strained, rather than stress, in effect adjusting the stress allowable in proportion to the strength
945
in each direction. In other words, the allowable stresses for the two equivalent stresses above
would be (ed ELAMX) and (ed ELAMH) respectively. In lieu of test data, system design strain is
selected from Tables 4.3 and 4.4 of the Code, based on expected chemical and temperature
conditions.
Actual stress equations as enumerated by BS 7159 display below:
1. Combined stress straights and bends:
C = (f 2+ 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
or
C = (X2 + 4S2)0.5 d ELAM
Where:
ELAM = modulus of elasticity of the laminate; in CAESAR II, the first equation uses the
modulus for the hoop direction and in the second equation, the modulus for the longitudinal
direction is used.
C = combined stress
= circumferential stress
= P + B
S = torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
X = longitudinal stress
= XP + XB
P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + td) / 2 td
B = circumferential bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFi)2 + Mo SIFo)2] 0.5 for bends, = 0 for straights
MS = torsional moment on cross-section
Di = internal pipe diameter
td = design thickness of reference laminate
I = moment of inertia of pipe
m = pressure stress multiplier of component
P = internal pressure
Mi = in-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFi= circumferential stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
M = out-plane bending moment on cross-section
SIFo = circumferential stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
XP = longitudinal pressure stress
= P(Di+ td) / 4 td
946
XB = longitudinal bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFxi)2 + Mo SIFxo)2]0.5
SIFxi = longitudinal stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFxo = longitudinal stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
2. Combined stress branch connections:
CB = ((P + bB)2 + 4SB2)0.5 d ELAM
Where:
CB = branch combined stress
P = circumferential pressure stress
= mP(Di + tM) / 2 tM
bB = non-directional bending stress
= [(Di + 2td) / 2I] [(Mi SIFBi)2 + Mo SIFBo)2]0.5
SB = branch torsional stress
= MS(Di + 2td) / 4I
tM = thickness of the reference laminate at the main run
SIFBi = branch stress intensification factor for in-plane moment
SIFBo = branch stress intensification factor for out-plane moment
3. When longitudinal stress is negative (net compressive):
- Vx x ELAM
Where:
Vx = Poissons ratio giving strain in longitudinal direction caused by stress in circumferential
direction
= design strain in circumferential direction
ELAM= modulus of elasticity in circumferential direction
947
BS 7159 also dictates the means of calculating flexibility and stress intensification (k- and i-)
factors for bend and tee components, for use during the flexibility analysis.
948
BS 7159 imposes a number of limitations on its use, the most notable being: the limitation of a
system to a design pressure of 10 bar, the restriction to the use of designated design laminates,
and the limited applicability of the k- and i- factor calculations to pipe bends (that is, mean wall
thickness around the intrados must be 1.75 times the nominal thickness or less).
This code appears to be more sophisticated, yet easy to use. We recommend that its calculation
techniques be applied even to FRP systems outside its explicit scope, with the following
recommendations:
Pressure stiffening of bends should be based on actual design pressure, rather than
allowable design strain.
Design strain should be based on manufacturers test and experience data wherever
possible (with consideration for expected operating conditions).
Fitting k- and i- factors should be based on manufacturers test or analytic data, if available.
UKOOA
The UKOOA Specification is similar in many respects to the BS 7159 Code, except that it
simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more limitations and more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions.
949
Rather than explicitly calculating a combined stress, the specification defines an idealized
envelope of combinations of axial and hoop stresses that cause the equivalent stress to reach
failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / x-all)2 + (hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = allowable stress, axial
hoop-all = allowable stress, hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all (also known as sa(0:1)) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice sx-(a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure), as shown in the following figure.
An implicit modification to this requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of
safety (typically equal to 2/3) while other loads are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = allowable design pressure
f1 = factor of safety for 97.5% lower confidence limit, usually 0.85
f2 = system factor of safety, usually 0.67
f3 = ratio of residual allowable, after mechanical loads
= 1 - (2 ab) / (r f1 LTHS)
ab = axial bending stress due to mechanical loads
r = a(0:1)/a(2:1)
a(0:1) = long term axial tensile strength in absence of pressure load
a(2:1) = long term axial tensile strength under only pressure loading
LTHS = long term hydrostatic strength (hoop stress allowable)
LTHP = long term hydrostatic pressure allowable
This has been implemented in the CAESAR II pipe stress analysis software as:
Code Stress
ab (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t)
Code Allowable
(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
950
Where:
P = design pressure
D = pipe mean diameter
t = pipe wall thickness
K and i-factors for bends are to be taken from the BS 7159 Code, while no such factors are to
be used for tees.
The UKOOA Specification is limited in that shear stresses are ignored in the evaluation process;
no consideration is given to conditions where axial stresses are compressive; and most required
calculations are not explicitly detailed.
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II

Practical Applications
CAESAR II has had the ability to model orthotropic materials such as FRP almost from its
inception. It also can specifically handle the requirements of the BS 7159 Code, the UKOOA
Specification, and more recently ISO 14692. FRP material parameters corresponding to those of
many vendors lines are provided with CAESAR II. You can pre-select these parameters to be
the default values whenever FRP piping is used. Other options, as to whether the BS 7159
pressure stiffening requirements should be carried out using design strain or actual strain can be
set in CAESAR IIs configuration module as well.
951
Selecting material (20) FRP (FIBER REIN PLASTIC) activates the CAESAR II orthotropic
material model and brings in the appropriate material parameters from the pre-selected
materials.
When the software uses the orthotropic material model, it changes two fields from their previous
isotropic values: Elastic Modulus (C) changes to Elastic Modulus/axial and Poisson's Ratio
changes to Ea/Eh*Vh/a, as shown below.
These changes are necessary because orthotropic models require more material parameters
than isotropic models. For example, there is no longer a single modulus of elasticity for the
material, but now two: axial and hoop. There is no longer a single Poissons ratio, but again two:
Vh/a (Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced strain in the hoop
direction) and Va/h (Poissons ratio relating strain in the hoop direction due to stress-induced
952
strain in the axial direction). Also, unlike isotropic materials, the shear modulus does not follow
the relationship G = 1 / E (1-V), so that value must be explicitly input.
To minimize input, a few of these parameters can be combined due to their use in the software.
Generally, the only time that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction or the Poissons
ratios is used during flexibility analysis is when calculating piping elongation due to pressure
(note that the modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction is used when determining certain stress
allowables for the BS 7159 code):
dx = (x / Ea - Va/h * hoop / Eh) L
Where:
dx
= extension of piping element due to pressure
= longitudinal pressure stress in the piping element
= modulus of elasticity in the axial direction
Va/h
= Poissons ratio relating strain in the axial direction due to stress-induced

strain in the hoop direction
hoop = hoop pressure stress in the piping element

Eh
= modulus of elasticity in the hoop direction
= length of piping element
This equation can be rearranged, to require only a single new parameter, as:
dx = (x - Va/h hoop * (Ea / Eh )) * L / Ea
In theory, that single parameter, V h/a is identical to (Ea / Eh * Va/h) giving: dx = (x Vh/ahoop) * L / Ea
The shear modulus of the material is required in ordered to develop the stiffness matrix. In
CAESAR II, this value, expressed as a ratio of the axial modulus of elasticity, is brought in from
the pre-selected material, or can be changed on a problem-wise basis using the Special
Execution Parameter (see "Special Execution Parameters" on page 297) dialog box
accessed by the Environment menu from the piping spreadsheet (see figure). This dialog box
also shows the coefficient of thermal expansion (extracted from the vendor file or user entered)
for the material, as well as the default laminate type, as defined by the BS 7159 Code:
Type 1 All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with an internal and an external
Type 2 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
Type 3 Chopped strand mat (CSM) and multi-filament roving construction with an internal
and an external surface tissue reinforced layer.
The latter is used during the calculation of flexibility and stress intensification factors for piping
bends.
You can enter bend and tee information by using the auxiliary spreadsheets.
953
You can also change bend radius and laminate type data on a bend by bend basis, as
shown in the corresponding figure.
Specify BS 7159 fabricated and molded tee types by defining CAESAR II tee types 1 and 3
respectively at intersection points. CAESAR II automatically calculates the appropriate flexibility
and stress intensification factors for these fittings as per code requirements.
Enter the required code data on the Allowables auxiliary spreadsheet. The software provides
fields for both codes, number 27 BS 7159 and number 28 UKOOA. After selecting BS 7159,
CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = Longitudinal Design Stress = d ELAMX
Kn1 through Kn9 = Cyclic Reduction Factor (as per BS 7159 paragraph 4.3.4)
Eh/Ea = Ratio of Hoop Modulus of Elasticity to Axial Modulus of Elasticity
K = Temperature Differential Multiplier (as per BS 7159 paragraph 7.2.1)
954
After selecting UKOOA, CAESAR II provides fields for entry of the following code parameters:
SH1 through SH9 = hoop design stress = f1 * LTHS
R1 through R9 = ratio r = (a(0:1) / a(2:1))
f2 = system factor of safety (defaults to 0.67 if omitted)
K = temperature differential multiplier (same as BS 7159)
These parameters need only be entered a single time, unless they change at some point in the
system.
Performing the analysis is simpler than the system modeling. <Product> evaluates the operating
parameters and automatically builds the appropriate load cases. In this case, three are built:
Operating includes pipe and fluid weight, temperature, equipment displacements, and
pressure. This case is used to determine maximum code stress/strain, operational
equipment nozzle and restraint loads, hot displacements, and so forth.
Cold (same as above, except excluding temperature and equipment movements). This case
is used to determine cold equipment nozzle and restraint loads.
Expansion (cyclic stress range between the cold and hot case). This case may be used to
evaluate fatigue criteria as per paragraph 4.3.4 of the BS 7159 Code.
After analyzing the response of the system under these loads, CAESAR II displays a menu of
possible output reports. Reports may be designated by selecting a combination of load case and
results type (displacements, restraint loads, element forces and moments, and stresses). From
the stress report, you can determine at a glance whether the system passed or failed the stress
criteria.
955
For UKOOA, the piping is considered to be within allowable limits when the operating stress falls
within the idealized stress envelope this is illustrated by the shaded area in the following figure.
Conclusion
Pipe stress analysis software with worldwide acceptance is now available for evaluation of FRP
piping systems as per the requirements of the most sophisticated FRP piping codes. This
means that access to the same analytical methods and tools enjoyed by engineers using steel
pipe is available to users of FRP piping design.
References
1. Cross, Wilbur, An Authorized History of the ASME Boiler an Pressure Vessel Code, ASME,
1990
2. Olson, J. and Cramer, R., "Pipe Flexibility Analysis Using IBM 705 Computer Pro\-gram
MEC 21, Mare Island Report 277-59," 1959
3. Fiberglass Pipe Handbook, Composites Institute of the Society of the Plastics Indus\-try,
1989
4. Hashin, Z., "Analysis of Composite Materials a Survey," Journal of Applied Mechanics, Sept.
1983
5. Greaves, G., "Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic Pipe Design," Ciba-Geigy Pipe Systems
6. Puck, A. and Schneider, W., "On Failure Mechanisms and Failure Criteria of
Filament-Wound Glass-Fibre/Resin Composites," Plastics and Polymers, Feb. 1969
7. Hashin, Z., "The Elastic Moduli of Heterogeneous Materials," Journal of Applied Mechanics,
March 1962
8. Hashin, Z. and Rosen, B. Walter, "The Elastic Moduli of Fibre Reinforced Materials," Journal
of Applied Mechanics, June 1964
9. Whitney, J. M. and Riley, M. B., "Elastic Properties of Fiber Reinforced Composite
Materials," AIAA Journal, Sept. 1966
10. Walpole, L. J., "Elastic Behavior of Composite Materials: Theoretical Foundations,"
Advances in Applied Mechanics, Volume 21, Academic Press, 1989
11. BS 7159: 1989 British Standard Code of Practice for Design and Construction of Glass
Reinforced Plastics GRP Piping Systems for Individual Plants or Sites.
12. UK Offshore Operators Association Specification and Recommended Practice for the Use of
GRP Piping Offshore., 1994
956
Code Compliance Considerations

This section comprises general notes that cover code compliance. The first several pages
contain information that applies to all of the codes. The last pages contain code-specific
discussions. Review the general notes, highlighting those that apply to your problem. Also,
review the notes for the piping code that you need.
Configuration and Environment (on page 48) gives details about the various parameters that you
can use in the CAESAR II setup file. Many of these parameters are discussed from an
"application point-of-view" in the text that follows. For more information on the CAESAR II setup
file, see Configuration and Environment (on page 48).
General Comments on Configuration Settings' Effect on

Piping Code Calculations
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) for all codes
Use the table below to determine which SIF value you need.
If you have...
then use an SIF Value of ...
threaded joints
2.3
double welded slip-on flanges
1.2
lap joint flanges with B16.9 stub

ends
1.6
Calculate Bonney Forge sweepolet and insert weldolet fittings

Use the Weld ID on the SIF & TEE Auxiliary dialog box to calculate the sweepolet and insert
weldolet fittings.
If you can verify that the welds for these fittings are finished or dressed, then specifying the
weld ID lowers the SIF.
Bend SIF overrides

User-defined bend SIF overrides affect the entire cross section of the bend, and as such you
cannot use them to specify a single point on the bend curvature. You must specify the SIFs for
the bend TO node. CAESAR II will apply this SIF, in place of the code SIF, over the entire bend
curvature, from weldline to weldline.
The default value for Fiberglass-Reinforced Plastic (FRP) bend and intersection SIFs is 2.3. Use
this value for all user-modified bends and intersections. The default flexibility factor value for
FRP bends is 1.0. If you modify these values, and generate the SIFs using the steel fatigue tests
you might not be able to use them as a basis for SIFs with FRP fittings.
CAESAR II does not permit the use of SIF values less than 1.0.
957
WRC 329
The only piping codes that cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 options, or the option to use
the ASME NC and ND rules for reduced intersections, are BS806 and the Swedish Power
Method 1. These codes do not use the effective section modulus, and any extrapolation of the
ASME methods into these codes is unwarranted.
There is a small difference between Use WRC329 and Reduced Intersection = WRC329. Use
Use WRC329 for all full and reduced intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced tees.
Use Reduced Intersection =WRC329 for reduced fittings that are not welding tees or
reinforced fabricated tees. A fitting is reduced when d/D is less than 0.975.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.3, B31.4, B31.11, or B31.1 (1967) codes
1. Include torsional stresses in all stress calculations (sustained and occasional).
2. Use a torsional SIF of (r/R) io.
3. Compute i(ib) use 0.6(R/T)2/3 [1+0.5(r/R)3](r/rp).
4. For i(ob) use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9 use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp) and i(ob)(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
5. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
6. If the radius at the junction provided is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
WRC 329 impact on use with B31.1, B31.8, ASME III NC, ASME III ND, Navy 505, Z183, Z184,
or Swedish Method 2 codes
1. For ib use 1.5(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.5
when (r/R) < 0.9
use 0.9(R/T)2/3 (r/rp), and ib(t/T)>1.0
when (r/R) = 1.0 and
use interpolation when 1.0 > (r/R) > 0.9
2. For ir use 0.8 (R/T)2/3 (r/R), and ir > 2.1
3. If a radius at the provided junction is greater than the larger of t/2 or T/2, then divide the
calculated SIFs by 2.0, but with ib>1.5 and ir>1.5.
Bonney Forge Sweepolets tend to be a little more conservative because they are used for
fittings in the nuclear industry. Bonney Forge Sweepolet equations can generate SIFs less than
one because they are stronger than the girth butt weld used as the unity basis for the code fitting
SIFs. CAESAR II does not permit SIFs of less than 1.0. If you generate a Bonney Forge
Sweepolet SIF that is less than 1.0, the default value 1.0 is used.
The Bonney Forge SIF Data came from the technical flyer: "Bonney Forge Stress Intensification
Factors" Bulletin 789/Sl-1, Copyright 1976.
Although CAESAR II allows the specification of two element intersections, you cannot specify
two SIFs at a single node and get an increased SIF. For example, you cannot specify a socket
weld SIF and an intersection SIF at the same point.
958
Stress calculations for under-specified fittings
For two element joints use the largest diameter and the smallest wall thickness, when
discrepancies exist between the two adjoining pipes. For two element fittings modeled as socket
welds use the largest wall thickness. Both of these selections generate the largest SIFs and the
most conservative stress calculations for under-specified fittings.
The mismatch given for girth butt welds is the average mismatch and not the maximum
mismatch. You must verify that any maximum mismatch requirements are satisfied.
If a fillet leg is given in conjunction with a socket weld SIF definition, then both socket weld types
result in the same SIF.
B31.3 sustained case SIF

The B31.3 sustained case SIF factor in the setup file affects all of the following codes: B31.4,
B31.8, B31.11, Navy 505, Z662, and B31.1 (1967). The default value for the B31.3 SUS case
SIF factor is 1.0.
Corrosion
Calculate the corroded effective section modulus by using (r2)te
Where:
r is the average cross sectional radius of the non-corroded pipe
(te) is the corroded thickness.
Select the thickness (te) based on the non-corroded thicknesses of the branch and header,
in other words, the lesser of Th and iTb. The resulting value has the corrosion subtracted from it
before the effective section modulus calculation is made.
Always use the corroded wall thickness to calculate the Maximum Shear Stress regardless of
the setting of the All Stress Cases Corroded option located in the setup file.
Using more than one Piping Code

If you use different piping codes in one job, the code that displays at the top of the Output
Stress report is the last code used during model input. SIFs, allowables, and code equations
are all computed in accordance with the code that varies with the input.
When there are multiple piping codes in the same piping job, and a piping code change occurs
at an intersection, if the intersection is completely defined with three pipes framing into the
intersection then the piping code used to generate the SIF equations will be that one associated
with the first header pipe framing into the intersection. If the intersection is only partially defined,
then the piping code will be selected from the first pipe framing into the intersection point.
Axial Stress in the Expansion Stress Range

The ASME piping codes primarily combine moments for thermal expansion stresses. When
there is any tendency for large axial forces to exist in the pipe these code equations are not
adequate. An example of this is for buried or partially buried pipe. Here the axial stresses can be
very high. B31.4 directs you to compute a longitudinal stress for completely restrained pipe.
CAESAR II enables you to specify just how much of the pipe is buried. This longitudinal stress is
then added to the stress calculations for thermal and contributes to a failure prediction that might
have otherwise been ignored. Similar effects can be achieved in CAESAR II by using the axial
959
soil restraint and telling the setup file to include F/A components in the stress calculations. Be
aware that for any type of problem, if large axial loads are developed because of the design, the
piping code might not be adequately considering it.
Application of Torsion in Stress Calculations

The piping codes that do not, by default, include torsion in the sustained or occasional stress
calculations display below:
B31.3
Navy 505
B31.4
Z662
B31.8
B31.1 (1967)
B31.11
GPTC/Z380
These codes tell you to add the longitudinal stresses due to weight, pressure, and other
sustained loadings so torsion is not added. Torsional shear stresses are not longitudinal
stresses. You can request that torsion is added into the sustained and occasional stress
equations by including the Add Torsion in SL Stress option in the setup file. The torsion stress
is still not intensified as it is in the power piping codes. This lack of intensification is considered
an oversight and is corrected in WRC 329. You can include this fix by running any of the above
codes and including the Use WRC330 option in the setup file.
Radius Entry for Mitered Joints

The radius given in CAESAR II is always the equivalent closely spaced miter radius. Only use
the radius calculation for widely spaced miters in the piping codes after breaking the widely
spaced miter bend down into individual single cut miters as recommended.
Reduced intersection calculations

Use reduced intersection calculations when d/D < 0.975.
Where:
d = Outside Diameter of the Branch
D = Outside Diameter of the Header
B31.1 and the ASME Section III piping codes provide stress intensification factors for reduced
branch ends. None of the other piping codes provide these SIFs. The Reduced Intersection
option in the setup file enables other piping code users to access improved SIFs for reduced
fittings. You should review the notes associated with the B31.1 and the ASME Section III codes
that follow to verify that any other parameters or input associated with the reduced intersection
calculations are set as necessary.
Pressure Stiffening
If you request pressure stiffening for those codes that do not normally provide it, CAESAR II
applies pressure stiffening for all bends and for both miter types.
960
Occasional Load Factors
The defaults occasional load factor from the setup file used in the evaluation of the allowable
stress, display the text that follows for each of the piping codes.
B31.1: The occasional load factor is 1.15.
B31.4: This is 0.8Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.4. OCC does not affect a
B31.4 analysis in CAESAR II.
B31.8: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case the
allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
B31.11: This is 0.88Sy as defined in the most recent edition of B31.11 OCC does not affect
a B31.11 analysis in CAESAR II.
ASME Section III NC and ND: The default value of OCC is 1.2, the occasional stress
allowable is 1.8 (1.2 X 1.5)Sh but not greater than 1.5Sy. If OCC is 1.5 or 2.0, the allowable
is set to the minimum of 2.25Sh/1.8Sy (Level C) or 3.0Sh/2.0Sy (Level D). Note in the latter
two cases, enter Sm for Sh.
Navy 505: Occasional cases are not addressed but defaults to the method used in B31.1,
and an OCC value of 1.15 is the default.
Z662: The occasional case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable for the
case defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable.
BS806: The occasional load case is not defined, but if you make an entry the allowable
stress for the OCC load case is KSh. This is the occasional load factor times the sustained
allow\-able. The default value for k is 1.0.
Swedish Method 1: OCC is not used. The load cases are not differentiated. The same
allowable Sigma(ber)/1.5 is used for all load cases.
Swedish Method 2: Uses an OCC default of 1.2 as recommended in the Swedish Piping
Code.
B31.1(1967): OCC default is 1.15.
Stoomwezen: OCC default is 1.2.
RCC-M C&D: OCC default is 1.2.
CODETI: OCC default is 1.15.
NORWEGIAN: OCC default is 1.2.
FBDR: OCC default is 1.15
BS 7159: The occasional load case is not defined.
UKOOA: The occasional load case is not defined.
IGE/TD/12: Table 4 of the code addresses occasional stress increases. The occasional
factor in the setup file has no bearing on this code.
EN-13480: The occasional load factor varies from 1.0 to 1.8, depending on the loading.
Refer to Section 12.3.3 for details.
961
GPTC/Z380: Occasional cases are not specifically defined. If you enter an OCC load case
the allowable defaults to 1.0 times the sustained allowable stress in other words OCC=1.0.
HPGSL: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
JPI: The occasional load factor is 1.33.
You can change the occasional load factor from the software defaults by using the setup file.
Enter the value as a percent.
Code-Specific Notes
B31.1
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=No option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using B31.1

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code providing the bend is not a
widely spaced miter. CAESAR II does not verify the B31.1 criteria "B" length for closely spaced
miters.
B31.1 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation. F/A and the pressure stresses are
added to the bending stress, whether the tensile or compressive component of bending, to
produce the largest longitudinal stress component. This is true for all codes where the addition
of axial and pressure terms are concerned. You can include the axial force terms into the code
stress by inserting the Add F/A In Stress=Yes option in the setup file.
The F/A forces are structural forces developed in the pipe independent of the pressure
PD/4t forces.
Calculate reduced branch stress intensification factors (SIFs) using B31.1

In 1980, B31.1 added a reduced branch SIF equation to Appendix D. This equation came from
ASME Section III. However, B31.1 continued to use the effective section modulus calculation for
the branch. The ASME Section III rules clearly stated that the branch section modulus, not the
effective section modulus should be used with the new SIF. B31.1 continued use of the effective
section modulus produced unnecessarily high calculated stresses. This error was corrected in
the 1989 version of B31.1. Prior to CAESAR II version 3.0, you had two options:
Use the pre-1980 version of the B31.1 SIF rules
Use the very conservative post-1980 B31.1 SIF rules
These options also exist in version 3.0 and later except that the section modulus problem is
corrected. If you need to run version 3.0 and later without the section modulus correction, then
include the B31.1 Reduced Z Fix=No option in the setup file.
Calculate reduced intersection branch using B31.1

Reduced intersection branch SIFs were not intended for reinforced or welding tees.
Conservative results are produced, but the original researchers did not intend for SIFs to be
used for these fittings. You can disable the reduced branch fitting calculations for reinforced or
962
welded tees by including the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT option in the setup file. This
produces less conservative results, but can in some cases be justified.
B31.1 102.3.2 (c) says to divide the allowable stresses coming from the stress tables in
Appendix A by the applicable weld joint factors listed in Paragraph 102.4.3.
Calculate the B31.1 stress allowables

Use the equations below to calculate the stress allowables.
Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable = Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * (Occ)
Where:
f = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Sc = Cold Allowable Stress
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress
Sl = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default is 1.15
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using B31.1

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same.
B31.1 reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
maximum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*Alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
D2 - Diameter of the Small End
t2 - Thickness of the Small End
Alpha - the Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees.
Where:
Alpha = atan[ (D1-D2) / (2*length of the sloped portion of the reducer*0.6) ]
Alpha is the slope of the (concentric) reducer transition in degrees. If unspecified, CAESAR
II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60 and the larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
963
B31.3
widely spaced miter.

In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are separate and unique.
B31.3 piping code gives the equation for the expansion stress. Because that equation does not
include the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe, CAESAR II does not include the F/A
component of the stress in the expansion stress equation. The code also says that you can add
the F/A component where it is significant. Change this by including the Add F/A In Stress
option in the setup file. The F/A longitudinal stress components are added by default to the code
stress component for all other stress categories.
B31.3 girth butt welds default value

The default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0. This is also Markls original basis for SIFs.
Calculate socket welds using B31.3

B31.3 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1 for all
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3 for all
B31.3 socket welds.

Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable
= Sh
Occasional Allowable = Sh * (Occ)

Where:
Sh = Hot Allowable Stress (as selected)
Calculate corroded stress using B31.3

By default, B31.3 applied corrosion to section modulus calculation for sustained and occasional
stress calculation. Specifying All Stress Cases Corroded in the setup file performs the
corroded stress calculations for all stress calculations.
964
Calculate pressure effects on miters using B31.3
Pressure effects on miters are allowed in the B31.3 piping code.

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
B31.4
Pressure stiffening is defined by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends in the setup file.




Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.8)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = (0.9)(Sy) if the axial stress is compressive, no code check is done if
axial stress tensile
Where:
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
B31.4 does not use EFF, (found in the Allowable Stress auxiliary field). The minimum yield
stress is all that is required to compute flexibility stress allowables.
Calculate effective section modulus using B31.4

B31.4 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate liberal allowable using B31.4

B31.4 does not include a provision for the liberal allowable. This particular option is not used for
B31.4 stress allowable calculations. The occasional load factor, used in the other piping codes
965
for determining the allowable stress for occasional load sets, is not used in B31.4, as the default
allowable stress is 0.8 times the minimum yield stress.
CAESAR II assumes that 419.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy; when the net axial stress is compressive (for example, when longitudinal
pressure stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph
establishes that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those
portions of the restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for
including the axial stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the ADD_F/A parameter into the setup file. Set
Fac to 0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not
present, so the hoop stress component must be considered.
2. Use the Fac value to have CAESAR II compute the "axially-restrained" stress and include it
during stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac value, then multiply the pressure plus
axial loads in the pipe by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in
the pipe when you include both of the effects above.
Paragraph 419.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poisson's ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addiction of the hoop stress
to the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress
is compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the Operating Load
Case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 419.6.4(b). "Fac" is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.4
pipe is sent through the Buried Pipe Modeler. The stress due to axial force is also included for
these elements.
The Fac variable should probably not be set to 1.0 with B31.4 and thermal expansion cases
where you are going from one thermal state to another state. In other words, where the case is
of the form: L1-L2, and both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case, the thermal
expansion used in the restrained pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the
load case definition. In the example above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load
case.
The software references the Base Hoop Stress On OD in the setup file for B31.4 jobs when the
hoop stress is calculated for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation. The software
defaults to using the base hoop stress calculation on the outer diameter with the equation PD/2t.
This is the hoop stress that is printed in the extended CAESAR II Stress report.

The default SIF value is 1.0. The default Flexibility Factor value is 1.0.
966
B31.4 Chapter IX
Chapter IX presents the offshore requirements of the B31.4 (on page 965).
Calculate Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as stated in the standard B31.4
code.
Calculate stress using B31.4 Chapter IX

Use the uncorroded wall thickness to make stress calculations.
Calculate load cases using B31.4 Chapter IX

There is no provision for a code check for the expansion load case, so no expansion cases are
generated under this code. Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated
identically. Do three stress calculations for these load cases, each with a different allowable
limit. The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable. These three stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1 Sy
Longitudinal Stress: |S L| 0.8 Sy
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9 Sy
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
Pi = Internal Pressure
Pe = External Pressure
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.60 or 0.72, see Table A402.3.5(a) of the B31.4 Code
Sy = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
SL = Sa + Sb or Sa - Sb, whichever results in greater stress value
Sa = Axial Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Sb = Bending Stress
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + St2]1/2
St = Torsional Stress
967
B31.5
B31.8
Restrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):
For Straight Pipe:
Both SL and SC < 0.9ST (OPE)
Both SL, and SC < 0.9ST (SUS)
SL < 0.9ST and Sc < ST (OCC)
and
* The Stress Report displays the calculation causing the highest percent of allowable along
with its specific allowable.
For All Other Components
SL < 0.9ST (OPE, SUS, OCC)
Unrestrained Pipe (as defined in Section 833.1):

SL < 0.75ST (SUS, OCC)
SE < f[1.25(SC + SH) SL] (EXP)
Where:
SL = SP + SX + SB
SP = 0.3SHoop (for restrained pipe); 0.5S Hoop (for unrestrained pipe)
SX = R/A
SB = MB/Z (for straight pipe/bends with SIF = 1.0); MR/Z (for other components)
SC = Max (|SHoop SL|, sqrt[SL2 SLSHoop + SHoop2])
MR = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
SE = ME/Z
ME = sqrt[(0.75iiMi)2 + (0.75ioMo)2 + Mt2]
S = Specified Minimum Yield Stress
T = Temperature Derating Factor
SH = 0.33SUT
SC = 0.33SU
SU = Specified Minimum Ultimate Tensile Stress
B31.8 distinguishes between restrained and unrestrained piping for the purposes of stress
computations. To implement B31.8 you must define which sections of the piping system are
968
restrained, as per Code Section 833.1. In general, restrained piping is piping in which the soil or
supports prevent axial displacement of flexure at bends. Conversely, unrestrained piping is
piping that is free to displace axially or flex at bends. For more information, see Section 833.1.
Processing a B31.8 model through the Buried Pipe Modeler designates the buried sections as
restrained.
For restrained pipe, B31.8 specifies that the operating case stresses should include the thermal
axial stress component, a constant stress due to linear thermal expansion, but exclude thermal
bending stresses from the S B component. Because CAESAR II cannot go back and segregate
internal thermal forces and moments from those of other loads, the thermal axial stresses are
calculated and included as part of SX (as opposed to added as a constant), and thermal bending
stresses are conservatively included in S B.
Bending stress SB is defined differently for straight pipe or "large-radius" bends than it is for
other components. CAESAR II resolves the ambiguity of exactly what constitutes a
"large-radius" bend by considering any bend having an SIF of 1.0 as being a "large-radius"
bend.
Occasional load default values

The occasional load default value for B31.8 is 1.111 (1/0.9) and is only applied to the allowable
for SC combined stress calculated only in straight pipes. The allowable in this case is ST as
opposed to 0.9ST. There is no provision for increasing or decreasing this allowable.
In the case of occasional stresses in straight pipes, there are potentially two stresses (SL and
SC) to be compared against two different allowable limits. CAESAR II only prints the one that
provides the greater ratio of calculated stress versus allowable stress. You can visually
determine which stress prints by examining the magnitude of the allowable.

Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.
Modifications to the flexibility factor and Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) using B31.8
Modifications to the flexibility factor and SIF of bends resulting from flanged ends are permitted
by the code.
Calculate socket welds using B31.8

B31.8 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 2.1 for all
B31.8 socket welds.
Using reducers with B31.8

Use of reducers is subject to the following limitations:
Alpha the reducer cone angle is limited to 60
The larger of D1/SQRT(t1) and D2/SQRT(t2) cannot exceed 100 where D1/t1 and D2/t2 are
the diameters and thicknesses of the large and small ends, respectively.
969
B31.8 Chapter VIII

Chapter VIII discusses the offshore requirements of B31.8. For more information, see B31.8 (on
page 968)
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, and section moduli
using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Calculate all SIFs, flexibility factors, and section moduli exactly as in the standard B31.8 Code.
Make all stress calculations using the non-corroded wall thickness for the hoop and longitudinal
stresses. Use the corroded thickness for the combined stress.
Calculate the expansion load case using B31.8 Chapter VIII

generated under this code.
Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using B31.8 Chapter VIII
Operating, sustained, or occasional load cases are treated identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations, each with specific allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable displays in the stress report along with its specific
allowable. The stress checks are:
Hoop Stress: Sh F1ST
Longitudinal Stress: |S L| 0.8S
Equivalent Stress: Se 0.9S
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) D / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
F1 = Hoop Stress Design Factor 0.50 or 0.72 see Table A842.22 of B31.8
S = Specified Minimum Yield Strength
T = Temperature Derating Factor see Table 841.116A of B31.8
The product of S and T, the yield stress at operating temperature, is required in
the SH field of the CAESAR II Input:
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress Positive Tensile and Negative Compressive
Se = 2[((SL - Sh)/2)2 + Ss2]1/2
Ss = Torsional Stress
970
B31.9 Notes
Paragraph 919.4.1.b states that for analysis methods follow B31.1. For more information, refer
to B31.1.
B31.11
Pressure stiffening is included by default in the code. You can exclude pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by setting the Use Pressure Stiffening switch in the setup file.

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code provided the bend is not a


Calculate the B31.11 allowable stresses

Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (0.75)(0.72)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (0.88)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = (0.9)(Sy) if the axial stress is compressive; no code check done if the
axial stress is tensile
Where:
B31.11 does not use EFF, found on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field. The minimum yield
stress is all that is required to compute flexibility stress allowables.
Calculate effective section modulus using B31.11

B31.11 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate liberal allowable using B31.11

B31.11 does not include a provision for the liberal allowable. This option is not used for B31.11
stress allowable calculations. The occasional load factor, used in the other piping codes for
determining the allowable stress for occasional load sets, is also not used in B31.11, as the
allowable stress is 0.88 times the minimum yield stress.
971
CAESAR II assumes that 1119.6.4(b) establishes a requirement for the allowable operating
stress at 90% of Sy when the net axial stress is compressive (when longitudinal pressure
stresses can be ignored in underground pipes). The last sentence in the paragraph establishes
that: "Beam bending stresses shall be included in the longitudinal stress for those portions of the
restrained line which are supported above ground." You have two options for including this axial
stress in your analyses:
1. Include axial friction restraints and include the Add F/A option in the setup file. Set Fac to
0.001 to indicate that the line is buried, so longitudinal pressure stresses are not present,
and so the hoop stress component is considered.
2. Use Fac to tell CAESAR II to compute the axially-restrained stress and include it during
stress calculations. If you enter a nonzero Fac, the pressure plus axial loads in the pipe are
multiplied by (1-Fac). This gives a more realistic estimation of the axial stress in the pipe
when you have included both of the effects above.
Paragraph 1119.6.4(b) requires 1) the reduction of the axial expansion stress by the
product of Poissons ratio and the pressure hoop stress, and 2) the addition of the hoop stress to
the axial stress. The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is
compressive, implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the pressure
loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles this case in the operating load
case, where the hoop stress is added in and the allowable stress is set to 0.9 Sy whenever the
axial stress is compressive. If Fac is 0.001, the piping element is considered buried, so the
longitudinal pressure stress is replaced by the product of Poissons ratio and the hoop stress, in
keeping with the spirit of paragraph 1119.6.4(b). Fac is automatically set to 0.001 when B31.11
pipe is sent through the buried pipe modeler (on page 494). The stress due to axial force is also
included for these elements.
Do not set Fac to 1.0 when using B31.11with thermal expansion cases where you are going
from one thermal state to another state. In other words where the case is of the form: L1-L2, and
both L1 and L2 contain temperatures. In this case the thermal expansion used in the restrained
pipe calculation comes from the last thermal specified in the load case definition. In the example
above the thermal expansion associated with the L2 load case.
When calculating the hoop stress for the restrained pipe longitudinal stress calculation use the
Base Hoop Stress On option in the setup file. The default is to base the hoop stress calculation
on D = average diameter in the equation PD/2t. In mechanical stress calculations the hoop
stress is based on the inside diameter. This is the hoop stress that displays in the extended
CAESAR II Stress report.

972
ASME III Subsections NC and ND

Calculate pressure stiffening using NC and ND
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using NC and ND

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in this code providing the bend is not a
Minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees using NC and ND
The minimum SIF for reinforced and unreinforced fabricated tees is 2.1.
Calculate B1 and B2 using NC and ND

Calculate B1 and B2 according to the equations in ASME NC and ND.
Calculate liberal allowable using NC and ND

If you are using this piping code and define a dynamic load case as a Expansion, a request for
Liberal Allowable is ignored and the (Sh-Sl) term is removed from the allowed limit (see
below). This is a programming decision rather than an interpretation of the piping code or a
recommendation for doing dynamic analysis.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using NC and ND

Using WRC 329 with NC or ND

For all intersections that are not welding tees or reinforced fabricated tees use the equation
*r2*t to calculate the approximate section modulus for the stress calculations.
This includes all reduced intersections and all d/D ratios.
Determine the branch SIF using NC or ND

If you do not want to use the branch SIF of the Code for welding and reinforced reducing tees,
include the No Reduced SIF for RFT and WLT flag in the setup file.
Calculate the NC and ND stress allowables

Expansion Allowable = f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl)
Sustained Allowable = 1.5Sh If not at an intersection
Occasional Allowable = 1.8Sh not greater than 1.5Sy, if OCC=1.2;
2.25Sh not greater than 1.8Sy, if OCC=1.5;
3.0Sh not greater than 2.0Sy, if OCC=2.0
973
Where:
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
Sl = Sustained Stress from PD/4t+0.75iMb
Sy = Material Yield Stress
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
Calculate two pipe intersections using NC and ND

For two pipe intersections, for example butt welds or socket welds, B1 and B2 factors are 1.0. If
the ratio of the average branch to average run radius is less than 0.5, then apply the reduced
intersection rules to the B1 and B2 calculations regardless of the intersection type. If the
reduced intersection rules do not apply then use the following rules for butt welded fittings:
B2b = 0.4 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.5 * (R/T)**2/3 but not < 1.0
You can modify the values for B1 and B2 for any node in the SIF&TEE auxiliary field. Any
changes you make to B1 and B2 on an auxiliary field only apply for that element, regardless of
whether the node is an intersection or not.
Calculate the ratio of r/R using NC and ND

When r/R < 0.5 use the following equations for B1 and B2:
B2b = 0.50 C2b but not < 1.0
B2r = 0.75 C2r but not < 1.0
C2b = 3(R/T)2/3 (r/R)1/2 (t/T)(r/rp), but not < 1.5
C2r = 1.15(r/t)1/4 but not < 1.5
Branch SIFs using NC and ND

WRC 329 produces smaller branch SIFs than ASME NC and ND, and the same run SIFs. The
branch SIFs are smaller by a factor of 2. This is when d/D<0.5 and WRC 329 corrects the Mob
(out of plane bending) inconsistency when d/D is between 0.5 and 1. In the lower ranges of d/D
ratios WRC 329 is less conservative than the present codes and in the higher ranges WRC 329
is more conservative than the present codes.
Calculate Pvar using NC and ND

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
11. CAESAR II forms occasional stresses by adding the sustained stress including pressure,
and the occasional stress including the stress difference between the operating pressure and
the peak pressure.
974
Limit for expansion stress range
To satisfy equations 10 or 11, the expansion stress, iMc/Z, must remain below the maximum of
either f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh-Sl) where Sl is the sustained stress as
defined by equation 11: Sl= PDo/4tn+0.75iMa/Z.
Calculate moment summations using NC and ND

The approach taken by CAESAR II for moment summations at inter\-sections to satisfy
equations 8 and 9 is to use the SRSS of the moments at each end of the pipe framing into the
intersection. You do not have to adhere to the cumulative moment summation rules for a single
intersection as per NB 3683.1. In addition, use the effective section modulus rules of NC and ND
for all intersection stress calculations like equations 8 and 9. Use subsection NB to get the
values for B1 and B2 only, and to compute the local flexibility if requested. Because of the use of
this approach in CAESAR II, there is no allowable calculated for intersection points and
sustained or occasional loads.
Determine sustained case SIF using NC and ND

Do not use the SIF in the ASME class 2 or 3 sustained stress calculations.
NC and ND reducer default values

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0. Use the following equation to determine the SIF value:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
D1- Diameter of the Large End
t1- Thickness of the Large End
Alpha - the reducer cone angle in degrees
Where:
II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.rees. If left blank, the value is
set from an estimated slope equal to the arc tangent times 1/2 the change in diameters times
sixty percent of the entered reducer length.
Alpha cannot exceed 60. The larger of D1/t1 and D2/t2 cannot exceed 100.
B1=.5 if alpha 30, 1.0 if 30 < alpha 60; B2 = 1.0.
There is an error in the code, the code states note 12 however, they meant note 14.
Alpha cannot exceed 60.
975
CANADIAN Z662
Calculate pressure stiffening using Z662
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening=Yes option in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Z662

Pad thickness using Z662

There is no limit in Z662 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For Z662, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.
Z662 girth butt welds default value

In-plane and out-plane stress intensification factors for intersections are the same.
Calculate socket welds using Z662

Z662 makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate effective section modulus using Z662

Z662 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate the CANADIAN Z662 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = (0.72)(T)(Sy)
Sustained Allowable = (Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)(Fac)(T)(L)(Sy)
Operating Allowable = 0.9(T)(Sy), if pipe is buried and axial stress is compressive
Operating Allowable = (T)(Sy), if pipe is not buried and axial stress is compressive
Where:
Fac = Construction Design Factor
T = Temperature De-rating Factor
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.0)
L = Location Factor
976
CAESAR II assumes that Section 4.6.2 of the Z662 code establishes a requirement for the
allowable operating stress of 0.9 x S x T whenever the net axial stress is compressive in the
absence of bending stress, and an allowable operating stress of S x T when the net axial stress
is compressive in the presence of bending stress.
Section 4.6.2 requires the following:
1. The reduction of the axial expansion stress by the product of Poissons Ratio and the
pressure hoop stress.
2. The addition of the hoop stress to the axial stress.
The latter represents the calculation of stress intensity when the axial stress is compressive,
implying that there is no longitudinal pressure stress in buried pipe (the longitudinal pressure
thrust loads are transmitted directly to the soil). CAESAR II handles these requirements, in the
operating load case, in the following manner:
1. If FAC is 1.0, the piping system is fully restrained in the axial direction as described in
Section 4.6.2.1, and the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh + E a (T2 - T1) - v Sh < 0.9 S x T
2. If FAC is 0.001, the piping system is buried, but the soil supports are modeled (rather than
just assumed to be fully rigid). This setting removes the longitudinal pressure stress from the
equation (as described above), and takes bending stresses into consideration, as required
by Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the operating stress is calculated as:
Sh +Fax/A + Sb - v Sh < S x T
3. If FAC is 0.0, the piping system is either not restrained, or is a freely spanning or above
ground portion of a restrained line, as described in Section 4.6.2.2.1. In this case, the
longitudinal pressure stress is restored, so this formula only comes into effect if the net axial
stress including pressure is compressive, in which case the operating stress is calculated
as:
Sh +Slp + Fax/A + Sb < S x T
4. CAESAR II does not do an operating code stress check for those elements for which the net
axial stress is longitudinal.
5. CAESAR II does not check for buckling, as required by Section 4.6.2.2.2.
Z662 reducer default values

NAVY 505
Calculate pressure stiffening using Navy 505
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the Code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Navy 505

977
Navy 505 girth butt welds default value
Calculate effective section modulus using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at intersections.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIF)s for intersections using Navy 505
In-plane and out-plane SIFs for intersections are the same.
Calculate liberal allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 has no provision for a liberal allowable, that is, adding the difference between Sh and
Sl to the allowed expansion stress range. This feature from the control parameter spreadsheet
has no effect on 505 runs.
Calculate cold and the hot allowable using Navy 505

Navy 505 uses longitudinal weld joint efficiency (Eff) to compute the cold and the hot allowable
stress. The use of this parameter is subject to some speculation however.
Calculate the Navy 505 allowable for occasional loads

Navy 505 has no specific allowable for occasional loads. An occasional load factor (k), similar to
the B31.1 code is used, and the occasional allowable calculated from kSh.
Calculate the Navy 505 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = [f(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)]/Eff
Occasional Allowable = k*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Joint Efficiency (Not explicitly in the Code)
k = Occasional Load Factor, Defaults to 1.15
Use the B31.3 SUS Case SIF Factor option to multiply the SIFs for sustained and
occasional loads to be more in line with the current B31.1 practice.
978
BS806
For BS806, the maximum hot stress case is considered to be the operating load case. Operating
load case allowables are only given as per BS806 when the creep rupture strength governs the
stress range allowable. See BS806 sect 4.11.2.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs) using BS806

BS806 SIFs printed are labeled fti and fto for bends, and Bi and Bo for intersections.
Calculate pressure stiffening using BS806

bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
Pad thickness using BS806

There is no limit in BS806 for the beneficial effect of the pad on an intersection. Most codes limit
the pad thickness to 1.5 times the header thickness. For BS806, CAESAR II does not limit the
pad thickness.
Flanged end modifications using BS806

The code permits modifications due to flanged ends for all bend types. This includes closely and
widely spaced mitered bends.
BS806 girth butt welds default value

Calculate the BS806 allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = lesser of (H)(Sc)+(H)(Sh) <or> (H)(Sc)+F
Sustained Allowable = Sy
Occasional Allowable = (Sy)(Occ)
Operating Allowable = S avg rupture at design temperature
Where:
H = Multiplication Factor 0.9 or 1.0 from CAESAR II
Sc = 0.2% Proof Stress at Room Temperature
Sh = 0.2% Proof Stress at Design Temperature
F = Mean Stress to Failure in Design Life at Design Temperature
Calculate pressure at intersections using BS806

The pressure calculation at the intersections is made as required in BS806 4.8.5.1 Eq. (17). The
pressure stress as per Eq. (17) is computed and then combined with the bending and torsional
979
moment at each of the intersection ends 1, 2 and 3 respectively. The m factor is computed as
required with a value of n=1, in other words, for non-interacting intersections. BS806 does not
address reducers for SIF calculations.
Other BS806 Notes

When there is more than one thermal case to evaluate, read the following note carefully
concerning CAESAR II and the application of BS806.
Regarding BS806 4.11.3.1 paragraph 2, for sectionalized systems: CAESAR II only
makes the moment summation on a load case by load case basis, and does not take the largest
moments for an axis for any combination of load cases. The CAESAR II method is designed to
enable you to set up and combine the effects of each of the load transients that the piping
system undergoes. This method, for the most part is used in the B31/ASME piping codes. The
BS806 method is conservative in that it uses what is basically a shakedown approach and
computes a single worst case moment difference. The CAESAR II method satisfies the
shakedown theory but, also computes the moment range for each different load traversed. The
BS806 method of combining the maximum moment range is more conservative. The BS806
method also eliminates the need to know where on the pipe the stress is the highest. Use the
moment tables in Appendix F, to get the moment difference between any two load cases.
However, you cannot use the moment tables to get the maximum moment difference for any of
the three moment axes as requested by the sectionalized piping rules. To satisfying 4.11.3.1(a)
CAESAR II uses the moment difference between the cold and the hot case to compute the
stress.
You can only enter a single modulus of elasticity for a single element in each job. Different
elements can have different moduli of elasticity, but you cannot vary that modulus between load
cases in the same run. Also, you cannot use cold and a hot moduli of elasticity in the same run
at this time.
For BS806 in 4.11.5.2 the value of n is 1.0.for all branches of the non-interacting type. See the
fourth paragraph 4.11.4.2 for the definition of n for interacting branches.
980
The CAESAR II equation modeling of the BS806 SIF curves for bends displays in the following
plots.
Swedish Method 1 and 2

Calculate pressure stiffening using Swedish Method 1 and 2
bends in the analysis by including the parameter Use Pressure Stiffening in the setup file.
Flanged end modifications using Swedish Method 1 and 2

WRC329 recommendations
Swedish Method 1 cannot take advantage of the WRC 329 recommendations. WRC 329, if
requested, is ignored.
Calculate effective section modulus using Swedish Method 1

Swedish Method 1 has no provision for using an effective section modulus calculation at
intersections.
981
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using Swedish codes
Swedish Code item 9 is dealt with as a US tapered transition. Also, items 10 and 11 in the
Swedish table 9:2 correspond to items 8 and 9 in the CAESAR II nomenclature.
Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 1

Sber = lesser of Sh or F
Allowable = (Fac)(Sber) / 1.5
Where:
Sh = Yield Stress at Temperature
F = Creep Rupture Stress at Temperature
Fac = Usually 1.5 for Pre-stressed Pipe Use 1.35.
Calculate the allowable stress limits using Method 2

Expansion Allowable = f ( 1.17S1 + 0.17S2 )
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = Occ * Sh
Where:
S1 = Lesser of Sc or 0.267Sy
S2 = Lesser of Sh or 0.367Sy
Sc = Allowable Stress at Room Temperature (Stn2)
Sh = Allowable Stress at Design Temperature (Stn1)
Sy = Ultimate Tensile Strength at Room Temperature
Default girth butt welds for Swedish Method codes

If the weld is ground flush inside and out then the default SIF value for a girth butt weld is 1.0.
Pressure Variation in Swedish Codes

Swedish methods 1 and 2 Beta in the code is entered in the Pvar field on the Allowable Stress
Auxiliary dialog box. Enter the value for Pvar in percent, for example 10.0 for ten percent. If left
blank, the default is 10.0 percent.
Limits on the reasonable Betas that you may enter for the Swedish piping code is 10% to 25%.
Anything less than 0.1 is taken to be 10% and anything entered greater than 0.25 is taken to be
25%.
982
Pressure Stress in Swedish Codes
Include the Use PD/4t option in the setup file to tell CAESAR II to use the thin walled equations
for stress calculations for Swedish Method 1 code compliance.
Default occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2

The default value for the occasional load factor for Swedish Method 2 is 1.2.
Pad thickness using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The pad thickness on an intersection reduces stresses up to pad thickness of 2.5 times the
header wall thickness.
Calculate reducers using the Swedish Method 1 and 2

The default value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where D1 and t1 are the diameter and thickness of the large end and D2 and t2 are the
diameter and thickness of the small end.
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
Where:
II calculates alpha using 60 percent of the entered reducer length.
Other Swedish Notes

If you are using Swedish Method 1 to calculate the CAESAR II allowable, assume that the
SIGMA(tn) multiplier is 1.5 for piping that is not pre-stressed. If you use pre-stressed or cold
sprung pipe change Fac on the Allowable Stress Auxiliary field to 1.35 as per the Swedish
code.
Use the corroded section modulus for all stress calculations as per the definition of Di in the
Swedish code.
B31.1 (1967)
Calculate full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) uses ii = io for full-sized intersections for both the header and the branch, and for
reduced intersections uses ii = 0.75io + 0.25 for both the header and the branch.
Calculate pressure stiffening using B31.1 (1967)

Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in this code. You can include pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
983
Flanged end modifications using B31.1 (1967)
B31.1 (1967) girth butt welds default value

Calculate socket welds using B31.1 (1967)

B31.1 (1967) makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds
without undercut. Codes that do differentiate use 1.3 for socket welds with no undercut, and 2.1
for all others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate the B31.1 (1967) allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Occasional Allowable = Sh/Eff * Occ
Where:
Eff = Longitudinal Weld Joint Efficiency
Occ = Occasional Load Factor (Default is 1.15)
Stoomwezen
Sc
The yield stress at room temperature is referred to as Re in the code.
Sh1
The yield stress at design temperature is referred to as Re (um) in the

code.
Sh2
not used
Sh3
not used
FN
The average creep stress to produce one percent set is referred to as

Rrg in the code. F2 is the average creep tensile stress to produce
rupture and is referred to as Rmg in the code. F3 is the minimum creep
tensile stress to produce rupture and is referred to as Rmmin in the
code.
Eff
The cyclic reduction factor is referred to as Cf in the code.
984
Sy
The tensile strength at room temperature is referred to as Rm in the

code.
Fac
A constant whose value is either 0.44 or 0.5. For more information, refer
to Stoomwezen Section 5.2.
Pvar
The Cm coefficient in the code whose value is usually 1.0.
Calculating reducers using Stoomwezen

Stoomwezen does not mention reducers for Stress Intensification Factor (SIF) calculations.
RCC-M Subsection C and D

Calculate pressure stiffening using RCC-M Subsection C and D
Pressure stiffening is not defined by default in the code. You can enable pressure stiffening on
bends in the analysis by including the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
Flanged end modifications using RCC-M

Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted providing the bend is not a widely
spaced miter.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using RCC-M

Inplane and outplane SIFs for intersections are the same for these piping codes.
Calculate SIF for branch connection using RCC-M

If you do not want to use the SIF for branch connections, found in Figure C3680.1 of the code
for welding and reinforced reduced tees, include the No Reduced SIF For RFT and WLT option
in the configuration file.
Calculate the RCC-M allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable
= F (1.25Sc + 0.25Sh)+(Sh SSL)
Sustained Allowable
= Sh
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh

OCC defaults to 1.2 for Level
B
C
D
Where:
985
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
Sc = Cold Allowable
Sh = Hot Allowable
SSL = Sustained Stress (PD/4t + 0.75i Mb/Z)
OCC = Occasional Factor from the CAESAR II configuration file
Calculate Pvar using RCC-M

Pvar represents the difference between the operating pressure and Pmax, which is used in eq
10. To satisfy equations 7 or 8 use iMc/Z stress as the maximum of either F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) or
F(1.25Sc + 0.25Sh) + (Sh - Ssl) where Ssl is the sustained stress as defined by equation 6.
Calculate reducers using RCC-M

For reducers RCC-M states that the flexibility factor is 1.0. The code also states that the SIF is:
The minimum of 2.0 or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
Alpha is the reducer cone angle in degrees.
If not specified:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends using CODETI
Modifications resulting from flanged ends are permitted in the code for all bends, including
widely spaced miters.
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using CODETI

CODETI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using CODETI

CODETI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by setting Add F/A In Stress to the configuration file. The software adds the F/A
longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all other stress
categories.
986
Calculate the CODETI allowable stress limits
Expansion Allowable = F [1.25 (Sc + Sh)] - Sl
Sustained Allowable = Sh
Occasional Allowable = OCC * Sh
Where:
F = Cyclic Reduction Factor
OCC = Occasional Load Factor from Configuration - Defaults to 1.15
Pressure stiffening using CODETI

Pressure stiffening of bends is automatically included as directed by the code. You can disable
pressure stiffening on bends in the analysis by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in
the configuration file.
SIFs and flexibility coefficients using CODETI

Flexibility coefficients and SIFs are phased in for bends with an included angle between 15 and
45. The default value for bends smaller than 15 is 1.0.
SIFs and fabricated tees using CODETI

To determine the SIF of a fabricated tee having an angle of incidence other than 90divide it by
(sin a)3/2
CODETI recommended occasional load factor values

Recommended occasional load factor values are 1.15, 1.2, and 1.3, as per Code Table C3.3.
CODETI requires that when "the design temperature is such that the creep
characteristics are determinant, and if a section of the piping presents locally weaker
characteristics," the sum of the primary and secondary stresses must not exceed the value
flexibility factor (from Section C1.4.3). CAESAR II does not implement this requirement and is
left for you to verify.
CODETI reducer default values

Norwegian (TBK 5-6)

Calculate pressure stiffening using TBK 5-6
Pressure stiffening of bends is required for flexibility factors only and is done by default. You can
disable pressure stiffening by excluding the Use Pressure Stiffening option in the setup file.
987
You can enable pressure stiffening for stress intensification factors (SIF)s as well by including
the Use Pressure Stiffening option.
Expansion stress in TBK 5-6

Summing the longitudinal component F/A into the stress calculation is not defined by default in
the code. You can enable the axial force term in the code stress by including the Add F/A In
Stress option in the configuration file.
The code uses a circumferential weld strength factor (Z) when calculating longitudinal
pressure stress. Enter this value as Eff.
Calculate cyclic reduction factor using TBK 5-6

You can calculate the cyclic reduction factor using the following equation: F = (7000/Ne)0.2
Where
Ne = Number of Anticipated Cycles
F may be as high as 2.34 but not greater than 1.0 when Rm governs the expansion
stress allowable.
Calculate SIFs for bends and intersections using TBK 5-6

In-plane and out-of-plane SIFs for bends and intersections use the same stress equation.
Calculate the Norwegian allowable stress limits

Expansion Allowable = Sr + F2 - SSUS
Sustained Allowable = F2
Occasional Allowable = Occ * F2
Where:
Sr =
Minimum of 1.25F1 + 0.25F2; Fr * Rs - F2; or Fr (1.25 R1 + 0.25 R2) The latter for higher
temperatures; above 425C for austenitic stainless steel, or above 370C for other
materials.
F2 =
Hot Allowable Stress (entered in Sh)
OCC
Occasional Load Factor from the configuration file (defaults to 1.2)
SSUS = Sustained Stress

F1 =
Allowable Stress at Ambient (entered in Sc)
Fr =
Cyclic Reduction Factor
RS =
Permissible Extent of Stress for 7000 Cycles (from Code Table 10.2)
R1 =
Lesser of F1 and 0.267 RM
988
R2 =
Lesser of F2 and 0.367 RM
Rm =
Ultimate Tensile Strength at room temperature
Calculate SIFs using TBK 5-6

SIFs for fitting types 6 (branch with raised edge radius), 7 (branch on locally thickened pipe), 13
(conical reducer with knuckles), and 14 (reducer without knuckles) have not been implemented
in CAESAR II so you must enter them manually. The Norwegian code offers an alternative
stress analysis method in Appendix D. However, CAESAR II does not implement this method.
TBK 5-6 reducer default values

Calculate the SIFs by using the following equation: 2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2).
Where:
alpha - the slope of the reducer
TBK 5-6 flexibility factor default value

The default flexibility factor value is 1.0.
FDBR
FDBR is similar to Code-Specific Settings in most requirements. For more information, see
Code-Specific Settings.
Calculate reinforced tees using FDBR

FDBR limits the pad thickness to a maximum equal to the header thickness. If you enter a pad
thickness that is greater than the header thickness, the software overrides it with the header
thickness.
Calculate reduced intersections using FDBR

Treat intersections similar to ASME NC. For more information, see ASME NC.
Calculate butt welds using FDBR

Use either 1.0 or 1.8 depending on the thickness.
Calculate flexibility analysis using FDBR

You must use the Hot Modulus of Elasticity in your flexibility analysis.
Calculate the expansion case allowable stress using FDBR

Additionally, when computing the expansion case allowable stress you must include the ratio of
Ehot to Ecold. You can override the software-computed ratio by manually entering a value for
Fac.
989
Calculate reducers using FDBR
The value for the flexibility factor is 1.0 and the equation to calculate reducer SIFs is:
2.0 max or 0.5 + .01*alpha* SQRT(D2/t2)
Where:
D1 - Diameter of the Large End
t1 - Thickness of the Large End
Alpha - Reducer Cone Angle in Degrees
When not entered:
Alpha = atan[ 0.5 * (D1-D2) / (0.60 * length of the reducer element) ]
BS 7159
BS 7159 for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe requires that you evaluate the operating
load case only. You must verify the following operating load case combined stress requirements
are met:
If Sx is tensile:
(OPE)
and
(OPE)
or
if Sx is compressive:
If Fx/A > P(D m)/(4t) and it is compressive

(OPE)
and
990
(OPE)
Circumferential Stress
for straight pipes
for bends
for tees
Dm and t are always for the Run Pipe
Calculate the allowable stress limits using BS 7159

BS 7159 allowables are based on material design strain d. Therefore allowable stresses differ in
the axial and hoop directions by the ratio of the axial and hoop moduli of elasticity:
Sh = dEx
SHOOP = (dEx) (Eh/Ex)
Enter the ratio Eh/Ex in the allowable stress Eff field. If left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 for
isotropic materials.
Calculate pressure stiffening using BS 7159

Pressure stiffening of bends is done assuming the bends are fully pressurized up to the design
strain of the components. You can exclude pressure stiffening on bends by including the Use
Pressure Stiffening option in the configuration file.
BS 7159 does not by default add F/A into the stress calculation (unless this puts an element into
compression as described above). Use the Add F/A in Stress option to tell CAESAR II to
include the axial force term into the code stress.
Calculate the fatigue factor using BS 7159

The fatigue factor Kn is used inversely relative to the cyclic reduction factor in most codes, so its
value should be greater than or equal to 1.0 (allowable stress is divided by this number). K n is
calculated as:
Kn = 1.0 + 0.25 (As/n) (Log10(n) - 3.0)
Where:
As = Stress Range During Fatigue Cycle
n = Maximum Stress During Fatigue Cycle
n = Number of Cycles During Design Life
Enter Kn in the Cyclic Reduction Factor fields.
991
BS 7159 requires that you consider the thermal strain of the pipe material as being from 80% 85% below the true material strain due to insulation effects of the pipe wall. Enter this reduction
factor K in the allowable stress FAC field. If left blank, this value defaults to 1.0.
Calculate the stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends using BS 7159
The stress intensity and flexibility factors of bends vary based on laminate type:
All chopped strand mat (CSM) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and woven roving (WR) construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
CSM and multi-filament roving construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
You can enter the laminate type in the Bend Type field, or set the type default on the
Special Execution Parameter dialog box.
Calculate SIFs for Reducers using BS 7159

BS 7159 does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
UKOOA
The United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association (UKOOA) Specification and
Recommended Practice for the Use of GRP Piping Offshore is similar in many respects to the
BS 7159, except that it simplifies the calculation requirements in exchange for imposing more
conservatism on the piping operating conditions. Rather than explicitly calculating a combined
stress, the specification defines an idealized envelope of combinations of axial and hoop
stresses which cause the equivalent stress to reach failure. This curve represents the plot of:
(x / -all)2 + hoop / hoop-all)2 - [x hoop / (x-all hoop-all)] 1.0
Where:
x-all = Allowable Stress Axial
hoop-all = Allowable Stress Hoop
The specification conservatively limits you to that part of the curve falling under the line between
x-all also known as a(0:1) and the intersection point on the curve where hoop is twice x a
natural condition for a pipe loaded only with pressure. An implicit modification to this
requirement is the fact that pressure stresses are given a factor of safety typically equal to 2/3
while other stresses are not. This gives an explicit requirement of:
Pdes f1 f2 f3 LTHP
Where:
Pdes = Allowable Design Pressure
f1 = Factor of Safety for 97.5% Lower Confidence Limit Usually 0.85
f2 = System Factor of Safety Usually 0.67
f3 = Ratio of Residual Allowable After Mechanical Loads
= 1 - (2 sab) / (r f1 LTHS)
992
sab = Axial Bending Stress Due to Mechanical Loads
r = a(0:1) / a(2:1)
a(0:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength In Absence Of Pressure Load
a(2:1) = Long Term Axial Tensile Strength Under Pressure Loading Only
LTHS = Long Term Hydrostatic Strength Hoop Stress Allowable
LTHP = Long Term Hydrostatic Pressure Allowable
This is implemented in the CAESAR II using the following equations:
Code Stress
ab (f2 /r) + PDm / (4t)
Code Allowable
(f1 f2 LTHS) / 2.0
Where:
P = Design Pressure
Dm = Pipe Mean Diameter
t = Pipe Wall Thickness
On the Allowable auxiliary dialog box, the product of f1 and LTHS is entered in the SH1, SH2,
SH3 fields; r is entered in the F1, F2, F3 fields; f2 is entered in the Eff field; and the temperature
reduction factor K (described for BS 7159 above) is entered in the Fac field if omitted, it defaults
to 1.0. K- and i-factors for bends and tees, and bending and pressure stresses are calculated
as described for the BS 7159.
Calculate SIFs using UKOOA

UKOOA refers to BS 7159 for SIF calculations.
IGE/TD/12
CAESAR II performs calculations as per the IGE/TD/12 Edition 2 code requirements. The
complexity of these requirements far exceeds what can be described here. We recommend that
you acquire a copy of this code from the International Institution of Gas Engineers & Managers.
Det Norske Veritas (DNV)

This code is entitled "Rules for Submarine Pipeline Systems." The Allowable Stress Design
(ASD) provisions of the code are implemented here, rather than the limit state requirements.
Calculate the Stress Intensification Factors (SIFs), flexibility factors, or section moduli
using DNV
DNV does not provide any guidance on calculating SIFs, flexibility factors, or section moduli. An
informal poll of DNV experts and users was taken and the decision was made to use the B31.1
Power Code. Make all stress calculations using the corroded wall thickness.
993
Calculate the expansion load case using DNV
generated under this code.
Calculate the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases using DNV

Treat the operating, sustained, or occasional load cases identically. For these load cases, you
must perform three stress calculations with different allowable limits. The stress calculation
causing the highest percent of allowable is reported in the stress report, along with its specific
allowable. These stress checks are:
Hoop Stress:
Sh ns SMYS
Hoop Stress:
Sh nu SMTS
Longitudinal Stress:
SL n SMYS
Equivalent Stress:
Se n SMYS
Where:
Sh = (Pi Pe) (D t) / 2t
D = Outer Diameter
t = Wall Thickness
ns = Hoop Stress Yielding Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMYS = Specified Minimum Yield Strength at Operating Temperature
nu = Hoop Stress Bursting Usage Factor; see Tables C1 and C2 of the DNV Code
SMTS = Specified Minimum Tensile Strength at Operating Temperature
SL = Maximum Longitudinal Stress
n = Equivalent Stress Usage Factor; see Table C4 of the DNV Code
Se = [Sh2 + SL2 - ShSL + 3t2]1/2
t = Torsional Stress
Calculate reducers using DNV

DNV does not mention reducers for SIF calculations.
EN-13480
Flexibility calculations using EN-13480
EN-13480 uses the hot modulus of elasticity in the flexibility calculations (Sect 12.1.7.2). The
expansion allowable stress is subsequently modified by the ratio of Eh/Ec.
994
Calculate the flexibility stresses using EN-13480
EN-13480 provides two methods of determining the flexibility stresses. The CAESAR II default
implementation is to use Sections 12.3.2 through 12.3.6, which perform an SRSS of the bending
moments with a single SIF. As an alternative, the flexibility stresses can be determined by
distinguishing between in and out of plane bending, using distinct SIFs, as discussed in Section
12.3.1. The option to implement this alternative can be found on the "SIF & Stress" tab of the
configuration module.
EN-13480 pressure stiffening

EN-13480 does not consider pressure stiffening effects on bends.
GPTC/Z380
The recommendations of this code apply only to above ground steel piping through 450F.
GPTC/Z380 and B31.8, prior to 2004, recommendations are similar in many ways. The
differences between GPTC/Z380 and B31.8 display below:
The longitudinal joint factors vary slightly between B31.8 Table 841.115a and GPTC/Z380
Table 192.113.
The design factor in B31.8 Table 841.114b provides more detail than GPTC/Z380 Table
192.11.
The allowable for the combined stress calculation in GPTC/Z380 Section 192.159-1.5e
includes a "0.75" factor, while B31.8 Section 833.4 does not.
GPTC/Z380 uses a single stress intensification factor (SIF) for both in-plane and
out-of-plane loads, while B31.8 distinguishes between in-plane and out-of-plane SIFs.
ISO-14692
ISO-14692 addresses the analysis of Fiber Reinforced Plastic (FRP) pipe. Qualification is based
on the comparison of actual stresses, hoop and axial, to a failure envelope. See BS 7159 (on
page 990) for the CAESAR II approach for FRP pipe analysis.
HPGSL
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using HPGSL
HPGSL provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane stress
intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using HPGSL

HPGSL provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. This equation does not include
calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does not include
the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation. You can
change this by including the Add F/A In Stress option in the configuration file. The program
adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress component for all
other stress categories.
995
HPGSL girth butt welds default value
Calculate socket welds using HPGSL

HPGSL makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
others. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate the HPGSL stress allowables

Expansion Allowable
f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl ]
Sustained Allowable
Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable =
(Occ)*Sh/Eff
Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency Minimum Wall Thickness Only
SI = Sustained Stress
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
HPGSL reducer default values

HPGSL Pressure effects

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
JPI
Calculate stress intensification factors (SIFs) for intersections using JPI
JPI provides two separate equations to calculate the in-plane and out-plane SIFs for
intersections.
Calculate expansion stress using JPI

JPI provides an equation to calculate the expansion stress. However, this equation does not
include calculations for the longitudinal stress due to axial loads in the pipe. CAESAR II does
not include the F/A longitudinal stress component for stress in the expansion stress equation.
996
The program adds the F/A longitudinal stress component, by default, to the code stress
component for all other stress categories.
JPI girth butt welds default value

Calculate socket welds using JPI

JPI makes no distinction between socket welds with undercut and socket welds without
undercut. Unless you are specifying a fillet weld leg length, use a default SIF value of 1.3.
Calculate the JPI Stress allowables

Expansion Allowable
= f [ (1.25/Eff)(Sc+Sh) - Sl
]
Sustained Allowable
= Sh/Eff
Occasional Allowable = (Occ)*Sh/Eff

Where:
Eff = Weld Joint Efficiency minimum wall thickness only
SI = Sustained Stress
Occ = Occasional Load Factor Default - 1.33
When specifying a corrosion allowance, do not use a corrosion value in the sustained
and occasional stress calculations.
JPl reducer default value

Pressure effects and JPl

Pressure effects on miters are allowed in this piping code.
Local Coordinates
Many analytical models in engineering are based upon being able to define a real physical
object mathematically. This is accomplished by mapping the dimensions of the physical object
into a similar mathematical space. Mathematical space is usually assumed to be either
two-dimensional or three-dimensional. For piping analysis, the three dimensional space is
necessary, because almost all piping systems are three dimensional in nature.
997
Two typical three-dimensional mathematical systems are shown below in Figure 1. Both of these
systems are "Cartesian Coordinate Systems". Each axis in these systems is perpendicular to all
other axes.
Figure 1 Typical Cartesian Coordinate Systems

In addition, for these Cartesian coordinate systems the "right hand rule" is used to define
positive rotation about each axis and the relationship, or ordering, between the axes. Before
illustrating the "right hand rule", there are several traits of the systems in Figure 1 that should be
noted.
Each axis can be thought of as a "number line", where the zero point is the point where all of
the axes intersect. While only the positive side of each axis is shown in Figure 1, each axis
has a negative side as well.
The direction of the arrow heads indicates the positive direction of each axis.
In Figure 1, the X-axis has one arrowhead, the Y-axis has two arrowheads, and the Z-axis
has three arrowheads. The circular arcs labeled RX, RY, and RZ define the direction of
positive rotation about each axis. (This point will be dis\-cussed later.)
Any point in space can be mapped to these coordinate systems by using its position along
the number lines. For example, a point 5 units down the X-axis would have a coordinate of
(5.0, 0.0, 0.0). A point 5 units down the X-axis and 6 units down the Y-axis would have a
coordinate of (5.0, 6.0, 0.0).
Notice that if the system on the right side of Figure 1 is rotated a positive 90-degrees about
the X-axis, the result is the system on the left side of Figure 1.
The coordinate system on the left side of Figure 1 is the default CAESAR II global coordinate
system. In this system, the X and Z axes define the horizontal plane, and the Y-axis is vertical.
The other coordinate system in Figure 1 can be obtained in CAESAR II by selecting the
Z-axis Vertical option, discussed later in this section.
All further discussion in this section targets this default coordinate system, unless other\-wise
noted.
998
Other Global Coordinate Systems

There are other types of coordinate systems that can be used to mathematically map a physical
object.
A Polar coordinate system maps points in a two dimensional space using a radius and a
rotation angle (r, theta).
A Cylindrical coordinate system maps points using a radius, a rotation angle, and an
elevation (r, theta, z). The origin in this system could be considered the center of the bottom
of a cylinder. Cylindrical coordinates are convenient to use when there is an axis of
symmetry in the model.
A Spherical coordinate system maps points using a radius and two rotation angles (r, theta,
phi). The origin in this system could be considered the center of a sphere. Spherical
coordinates are convenient to use when there is a point which is the center of symmetry in
the model.
Typically, none of these coordinate systems are easily used to map piping systems. Most piping
software deals exclusively with the Cartesian coordinate system.
The Right Hand Rule

In the Cartesian coordinate system, each axis has a positive and a negative side, as previously
mentioned. Translations, straight-line movement, can be defined as movement along these
axes. Rotation can also occur around these axes, as illustrated by the arcs in Figure 1.
A standard rule must be applied in order to define the direction of positive rotation about these
axes. The right hand rule is used as the standard. Put the thumb of your right hand along the
axis, in the positive direction of the axis. The direction your fingers curl is positive rotation about
that axis. This is best illustrated in Figure 2.
Figure 2 The Right Hand Rule

The right hand rule can also be used to describe the relationship between the three axes.
Mathematically, the relationship between the axes can be defined as:
X cross Y = Z (EQ 1)
Y cross Z = X (EQ 2)
Z cross X = Y (EQ 3)
Where cross indicates the vector cross product.
999
Physically, using your right hand, what do the above equations mean? This question is best
answered by Figure 3.
Figure 3 The Right Hand Rule - Continued

The left pane of Figure 3 corresponds to vector equation 3 above. Similarly, the center pane in
Figure 3 also corresponds to vector equation 3 above. The right pane in Figure 3 corresponds to
vector equation 2 above. All panes of Figure 3 refer to the left hand image of Figure 1.
Straight-line movement along any axis can be therefore described as positive or negative,
depending on the direction of motion. This straight-line movement accounts for three of the six
degrees of freedom associated with a given node point in a model.
Analysis of a model requires the discretization of the model into a set of nodes and
elements. Depending on the analysis and the element used, the associated nodes have certain
degrees of freedom. For pipe stress analysis, using 3D Beam Elements, each node in the model
has six degrees of freedom.
The other three degrees of freedom are the rotations about each of the axes. In accordance with
the right hand rule, positive rotation about each axis is defined as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
When modeling a system mathematically, there are two coordinate systems to deal with, a
global or model coordinate system and a local (or elemental) coordinate system. The global or
model coordinate system is fixed, and can be considered a constant characteristic of the
analysis at hand. The local coordinate system is defined on an elemental basis. Each element
defines its own local coordinate system. The orientation of these local systems varies with the
orientation of the elements.
An important concept here is the fact that local coordinate systems are defined by, and
therefore associated with, elements. Local coordinate systems are not defined for, or associated
with, nodes.
1000
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate Systems

As noted previously, most pipe stress analysis computer programs use the 3D Beam Element.
This element can be described as an infinitely thin stick, spanning between two nodes. Each of
these nodes has six degrees of freedom three translations and three rotations. Piping systems
models are constructed by defining a series of elements, connected by nodes. These pipe
elements are typically defined as vectors, in terms of delta dimensions referenced to a global
coordinate system. Several example pipe elements are shown below in Figure 4.
Figure 4 - Example Pipe Elements

For most pipe stress applications, there are two dominant global coordinate systems to choose
from, either Y-axis or Z-axis up. These two systems are depicted in Figure 1. As previously
noted, the global coordinate system is fixed. All nodal coordinates and element delta dimensions
are referenced to this global coordinate system. For example, in Figure 4 above, the pipe
element spanning from node 10 to node 20 is defined with a DX (delta X) dimension of 5 ft.
Additionally, node 20 has a global X coordinate 5 ft. greater that the global X coordinate of node
10. Similar statements could be made about the other two elements in Figure 4, only these
elements are aligned with the global Y and global Z axes.
In CAESAR II, you can choose between the two global coordinate systems shown in Figure 1.
By default, the CAESAR II global coordinate system puts the global Y-axis vertical, as shown
in the left half of Figure 1, and in Figure 4. There are two ways to change the CAESAR II global
coordinate system so that the global Z-axis is vertical.
1001
The first method is to modify the configuration file in the current data directory. This can be
accomplished from the Main Menu, by selecting Tools>Configure Setup. After the
configuration dialog appears, select the Geometry tab, as shown in Figure 5. On this tab, click
the Z-axis Vertical check box, as shown in the figure below.
Figure 5 - Geometry Configuration

After the Z axis Vertical check box is selected, the CAESAR II global coordinate system is in
accordance with the right half of Figure 1. This configuration affects all new jobs created in this
data directory. Existing jobs with the Y-axis vertical are not affected by this configuration
change.
1002
The second method to obtain a global coordinate system with the Z-axis vertical is to switch
coordinate systems from within the input for the specific job at hand. This can be accomplished
from the Special Execution Parameters dialog box of the piping input processor. This dialog
box is shown below in Figure 6.
Figure 6 - Special Execution Parameters Dialog

Checking the Z Axis Vertical check box immediately changes the orientation of the global
coordinate system axis, with corresponding updates to the element delta dimensions. However,
the relative positions and lengths of the elements are not affected by this switch.
1003
Defining a Model
Using the CAESAR II default coordinate system (Y axis vertical), and assuming the system
shown below in Figure 7, the corresponding element definitions are given in Figure 8.
Figure 7 - Sample Piping Model
Figure 8 - Sample Piping Model Element Definitions

For this sample model, most of the element definitions are very simple:
The first element, 10-20, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global X direction. This element
starts at the model origin.
The second element, 20-30, is defined as 5 ft. in the positive global Y direction. This element
begins at the end of the first element, because both elements share node 20.
The third element, 30-40, is defined as 5 ft. in the negative global Z direction. Note in Figure
8 that the delta dimension for this element is a negative number. This is necessary to define
the element in a negative direction.
The fourth element, 40-50, runs in both the positive global X and negative global Y
directions. This element slopes to the right and down, and is defined with delta dimensions
in both the DX and DY fields. Notice that these delta dimensions are equal in magnitude;
therefore this element slopes at 45 degrees.
Continuing the model, from node 50, along the same 45 degree slope can be rather tedious,
because most often only the overall element length is known, not its components in the global
directions. In CAESAR II this can be best accomplished by activating the Edit Deltas dialog
box, shown below in Figure 9. The Edit Deltas dialog box can be activated by clicking the
Browse button next to the DX field. Using this dialog box, you can enter the element length, and
1004
CAESAR II determines the appropriate components in the global directions, based on the
current direction cosines, which default to those of the preceding element.
Figure 9 - Edit Deltas Dialog Box

CAESAR II provides an additional coding tool, for longer runs of pipe with uniform node spacing.
Element Break enables you to break an element into equal length segments, given a node
number increment.
In the preceding example, the model is defined solely using delta dimensions. By constructing
the model in this fashion, it is assumed that the world coordinates of node 10 the first node in
the model are at (0., 0., 0.). This assumption is acceptable in all but one instance, when
environmental loads are applied to the model. In this instance, the elevation of the model is
critical to the determination of the environmental loads, and therefore must be specified. In
CAESAR II, the specification of the starting node of the model can be accomplished using the
Alt+G key combination, and all nodal coordinates are displayed as absolute coordinates.
Regardless of whether or not the global coordinates of the starting node are specified, the
relative geometry of the model will plot the same.
After a model has been defined, there are a number of operations that can be performed on the
entire system, or on any section of the system. These operations include:
Translating the model: translation can be accomplished by specifying the global coordinates
of the starting node of the model. If the model consists of disconnected segments,
CAESAR II requests the coordinates of the starting node of each segment.
Rotating the model: by using the List processor or by clicking List Input
. The List
processor presents the model in a spreadsheet, format, as shown in Figure 8. Options in this
processor allow you to rotate the model about any of the three global axes, or a specified
amount. For example, if the model shown in Figures 7 and 8 is rotated a negative -90
degrees about the global Y-axis, the result is as shown in Figure 10.
1005
Figure 10 - Example of Model Rotation
Duplicating the model: duplication can also be accomplished by using the List processor.
The entire model, or any sub-section of the model, can be duplicated.
Using Local Coordinates

When analyzing a piping system, there are a number of items that must be checked and
verified. These items include:
Operating Loads On Restraints & Terminal Points
Maximum Operating Displacements
Hanger design results
Code stresses for code cases
Equipment Evaluations
Vessel Nozzle Evaluation
Expansion joint evaluation

Restraint loads and displacements are checked in the global coordinate system. This is
necessary because restraint loads and displacements are nodal quantities. Element loads and
stresses are most often evaluated in their local coordinate system. A good example illustrating
the use of a local (element) coordinate system is the free body diagram, of forces and moments.
The forces and moments in this free body diagram remain the same, regardless of the position
of the element in the global coordinate system. Note however, that each element has its own
local coordinate system. Furthermore, the local coordinate system of one element may be
different from the local coordinate system of a different element.
While the global coordinate system is typically referred to using the capital letters X, Y, and Z,
local coordinate systems use a variety of nomenclature. In almost all cases, local coordinate
systems use lower case letters. Typical local coordinate system axes are: xyz, abc, and uvw.
CAESAR II uses xyz to denote the local element coordinate system.
The local coordinate system for an element is related to the global coordinate system through a
rule. There may be a number of such rules, depending on the type of element. In CAESAR II,
the following rules are used to define the local coordinate systems of the piping elements in a
model.
CAESAR II Local Coordinate Definitions

Rule 1 - Straight Pipe -- For straight pipe elements, the local X-axis always points from the
"From Node" to the "To Node". You can find the local Y-axis by using the vector cross product of
the local X-axis along with the global Y-axis.
Apply the "Right Hand Rule" to the local Y-axis

1. Lay your right hand on the pipe, with the wrist at the From Node, and the fingers pointing to
the To Node.
2. Align or rotate your hand so that the global Y-axis points perpendicularly out from the palm.
The thumb is now aligned with the local Y-axis for this element.
Find the local Z-axis

Find the local Z-axis by using the vector cross product of the local x and local y axes.
1006
An exception to this rule is the case of a vertical element. In this case, the local X-axis is still
aligned in the From - To direction. However, you cannot cross a vertical element into global Y,
so the local Y-axis was arbitrarily assigned to align with the global X-axis.
The straight elements of the model in Figure 7 are reproduced below in Figure 11, along with
their local coordinate systems. Notice that each of these straight elements has its own local
coordinate system, and that in this model, they are all aligned differently.
Figure 11 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (1)

In Figure 11, the positive direction of the local X-axis for each element is defined accord\-ing to
the From - To definition of the element. For example, the local X-axis of element 10-20 is
aligned with the positive global X-axis, because that is the direction defined in moving from node
10 to node 20. The local X-axis of element 30-40 is aligned with the negative global Z-axis,
because that is the direction defined in moving from node 30 to node 40. Figure 11 should be
studied to ensure a good understanding of how the local element coordinate system can be
defined based on the definition of the element, especially with regard to the skewed element
40-50.
1007
As an additional example, the local element coordinate systems for the rotated system of Figure
10 are shown below in Figure 12.
Figure 12 - Local Coordinate Systems for Straight Elements (2)

Rule 2 - Bend Elements -- For the near weld line of bend elements, the local X-axis is directed
along the incoming tangent, in the From To direction. The local Z-axis points to the center of
the circle described by the bend. For the far weld line of bend elements, the local X-axis is
directed along the outgoing tangent, in the From To direction. The local Z-axis points to the
center of the circle described by the bend. In both cases, the local Y-axis can be found by
applying the right hand rule. The local coordinate system for the bends in the example model of
Figure 7 display below in Figure 13.
Figure 13 Local Coordinate Systems for Bend Elements

Rule 3 - Tee Elements -- For tees, there is no element or fitting as there is in a CAD application.
Rather designating a node as a tee simply applies code defined SIFs at that point, for the three
elements framing into the tee node. As usual, the local X-axis is defined by the element From To direction. The local Y-axis coincides with the line that defines the in-plane plane of the tee. In
1008
other words, the local Y-axis is perpendicular to the plane of the three tee elements. The
positive direction of the local Y-axis is found by vectorally crossing the local X-axis of the header
element with the local X-axis of the branch, and then reversing the sign direction. In those cases
where the two header elements have opposite local x axes, CAESAR II chooses the first one
that it finds. The local Z-axis can then be determined using the right-hand rule.
The local Z-axis coincides with the out-of-plane axis of the tee, for each element. Examples of
local coordinates for elements framing into tees are depicted below in Figure 14.
Figure 14 - Local Coordinate Systems for Tee Elements
Applications Using Global and Local Coordinates

Global coordinates are used most often when dealing with piping models. Global coordinates
are used to define the model and review nodal results. Even though element stresses are
defined in terms of axial and bending directions, which are local coordinate system terms, local
coordinates are rarely used. A typical piping analysis scenario is:
A decision is made as to how the global coordinate system for the piping model will align
with the plant coordinate system. Usually, one of the two horizontal axes is selected to
correspond to the North direction. However, if this results in a majority of the system being
skewed with respect to the global axes, you should consider realigning the model. It is best
to have most of the system aligned with one of the global coordinate axes.
The piping system is then assigned node points at locations where: there is a change in
direction, a support, a terminal point, a point of cross section change, a point of load
application, or any other point of interest.
After you assign the nodes, define the piping model using the delta dimensions as dictated by
the orientation of the global coordinate system. Use Break, List, Rotate, Duplicate, and the
Direction Cosines to construct the model.
1009
After verifying the input, confirming the load cases, and analyzing the model, output review
commences.
Output review involves checking various output reports to ensure the system responds within
certain limits. These checks include:
Checking that operating displacements make sense and are within any operational limits to
avoid ponding. Displacements, being nodal quantities, are reviewed in the global coordinate
system. There is no local coordinate system associated with nodes. For the model defined in
Figures 7 and 8, the operating displacements are shown in Figure 15 below.
Figure 15 - Operating Displacements

This report shows the movements of all of the nodes in the model, in each of the six degrees
of freedom, in the global coordinate system.
1010
Checking that the restraint loads for the structural load cases are reasonable. This includes
ensuring that the restraints can be designed to carry the computed load. Restraints being
nodal quantities are reviewed in the global coordinate system. There is no local coordinate
system associated with restraints. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, the operating /
sustained restraint summary is shown in Figure 16 below.
Figure 16 - Operating / Sustained Restraint Summary

This report shows the loads on the anchor at 10 and the nozzle at 50, for all six degrees of
freedom, for the two selected structural load cases, in the global coordinate system.
1011
Checking the code cases for codes stress compliance. Typically the code stress is
compared to the allowable stress for each node on each element. Occasionally, when there
is an overstress condition, a review of axial, bending, and torsion stresses are necessary.
These stresses axial, bending, and torsion are local coordinate system terms, and therefore
relate to the elements local coordinate system. For the model defined in Figures 7 and 8, a
portion of the sustained stress report is shown in Figure 17 below.
Figure 17 - Sustained Stress Report

These reports provide sufficient information to evaluate the pipe elements in the model, to
ensure proper behavior and code compliance. However, the analysts job is not complete, loads
and stress must still be evaluated at terminal points, where the piping system connects to
equipment or vessel nozzles. Depending on the type of equipment or nozzle, various
procedures and codes are applied. These include API-610 for pumps and WRC-107 for vessel
nozzles, as well as others. In the case of API-610 and WRC-107, a local coordinate system
specific to these codes is employed. These local coordinate systems are defined in terms of the
pump or nozzle/vessel geometry.
1012
When the equipment coordinate system aligns with the global coordinate system of the piping
model, the nozzle loads from the restraint report (node 50 in Figure 14) can be used in the
nozzle evaluation. However, when the equipment nozzle is skewed as it is in the case of node
50 in Figure 14, the application of the loads is more difficult. In this case, it is best to use the
loads from the elements force/moment report, in local coordinates. The only thing to remember
here is to flip the signs on all of the forces and moments, because the element force/moment
report shows the loads on the pipe element, not on the nozzle. For the element FROM node 40
to node 50, the local element force/moment report is shown in Figure 18 below.
Figure 18 - Local Element Force/Moment Report

Because the correlation between the pipe models coordinate systems and those of equipment
codes API and WRC are often times tedious and error prone, CAESAR II provides an option in
its equipment modules to acquire the loads on the nozzle directly from the static output. Select
the node and the load case; CAESAR II acquires the loads and rotates them into the proper
coordinate system as defined by the applicable equipment code. You really do not have to be
concerned with the transformation from global to local coordinates, even for skewed
components. This is illustrated below, in Figure 19. In this figure, the API-610 nozzle loads at
node 50 have been acquired by clicking Select Loads by Job/Load Case.
1013
Notice that the loads shown in Figure 19 are in the CAESAR II global coordinate system. This
can be easily verified by comparing these values to those in the restraint summary for the
operating load case as shown previously in Figure 16.
Figure 19 - API-610 Nozzle Load Acquisition

In the corresponding output report for this API-610 analysis, both the global and API local loads
are reported. This is shown below in Figure 20.
1014
Figure 20 - API-610 Nozzle Output Report Segments

Notice in Figure 20, that each report segment indicates which values are related to the global
coordinate system and which are related to the local API coordinate system.
Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates

A new report Local Restraint Loads (see "Restraint Report - In Local Element Coordinates" on
page 587), is available to assist in dealing with restraint loads on skewed nozzles. This report
uses the local coordinate system of the "defining" element (because restraints do not have a
local coordinate system). If the restraint is defined on the straight element to which the restraint
is attached, then the proper orientation of local loads is reported in the Local Restraint Loads
report. However, if the restraint was defined on some other element, or on the mid-side node of
a bend, then the loads reported in the Local Restraint Loads report are associated with the
local coordinate system of that defining element.
Transforming from Global to Local

Converting or transforming values from the CAESAR II Global Coordinate System to a local
coordinate system involves applying a number of rotation matrices to the global values. Matrix
mathematics is not a trivial task, and you must exercise the utmost care to arrive at the correct
result. To complete this task, visit the CAESAR II Downloads page at
http://www.intergraph.com/products/ppm/caesarii/downloads.aspx and click CAESAR II "Global
to Local" to download the GlbtoLocal utility, glbtoLoca. zip. For more information, see the
July 2001 issue of our Mechanical Engineering News. For an example on how to use the
GlbtoLocal utility using the nozzle at node 50 see below.
The element 40-50 is defined with the delta coordinates of:
DX = 3 ft. (6.426 in)
DY = -3 ft. (6.426 in)
DZ = 0.0
The global restraint forces at node 50, in global coordinates, for the operating case are:
1015
FX = 323 MX = -953
FY = 4 MY = -9
FZ = -271 MZ = -548
Using this data as input to GlbtoLocal, the utility yields the forces on the restraint in the
elements local coordinate system. This is shown in Figure 21 below.
Example Global to Local Transformation
Compare the set of values labeled Rotated Displacements / Load Vector with the Local
Element Force / Moment report, as shown above. A change in sign is necessary because the
Restraint report shows loads acting on the restraint, while the Element report shows loads
acting on the element.
Frequently Asked Questions

What are global coordinates?
Global coordinates defines the mapping of a physical system into a mathematical system. For a
given model, the global coordinate system is fixed for the entire model. In CAESAR II, there are
two alternative global coordinate systems that you can apply to a model. Both coordinate
systems follow the Right Hand Rule and use X, Y, and Z as mutually perpendicular axes. The
first uses the Y-axis vertical, while the second uses the Z axis Z-axis as vertical.
What are local coordinates?
Local coordinates represent the mapping for a single element. Use Local coordinate systems to
define positive and negative directions and loads on elements. Typically, Local Coordinate
systems are aligned with the elements, therefore vary throughout the model.
What coordinates are used to plot and view the model?
Use the global coordinate system of the model to generate plots of the model. This is necessary
because each element has its own local coordinate system, and these local systems vary from
element to element. Local coordinate systems are an element property, not a system property.
How do you obtain nodal displacements in local coordinates?
1016
In general, you do not. Displacements are a nodal property. Nodes do not have local coordinate
systems, elements do. For more information, see Restraint Data in Local Element Coordinates.
What do you do with local coordinates?
In most instances nothing. The local coordinates are only useful in CAESAR II is when dealing
with a skewed nozzle. This coordinate system is used in the Local Restraint Report.
1017
SECTION 15
Miscellaneous Processors
This section discusses the processors that are available in CAESAR II.
In This Section
Material Database ....................................................................... 1018
Accounting.................................................................................. 1026
Units File Operations .................................................................. 1033
Batch Stream Processing............................................................ 1037
CAESAR II Error Processing ....................................................... 1038
Material Database
CAESAR II delivers a material database that defines the physical properties and
code-dependent allowable stresses for more than 300 materials. You can edit and manage the
delivered materials data, as well as create new materials, using the Material Database Editor.
To open the editor, click Tools > Materials or click Materials
on the toolbar.
1018
Material Database Editor Toolbar
The Material Database Editor toolbar displays icons for commonly-used commands.
Print - Prints the materials data for every material in the entire material database.
Cut - Removes the selected data from its current location and places a copy on the Clipboard.
Copy - Creates a copy of the selected data and places it on the Clipboard.
Paste - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the specified location.
Clear Screen to Add - Saves the current editor window contents, and then clears the screen so you can
add a new material. For more information, see Add a new material to the database (on page 1020).
Edit a Material - Allows you to edit a material item in the database. For more information, see Edit a
material in the database (on page 1021).
Delete a Material - Deletes the material from the database. For more information, see Delete a material
from the database (on page 1021).
Save Material - Saves the changes made to the current material item.
Print the Current Material - Prints only the materials data for the current material item.
It is your responsibility to check material allowables and other physical property data for the
particular code being used. While Intergraph CAS makes every attempt to keep the material
database up-to-date, the codes are subject to change frequently, and the accuracy of the
database is not guaranteed.
The Material Database Editor does not modify the data in the material database delivered
with CAESAR II. Any changes that you make are saved to a secondary database, which, by
default, is named umat1.umd and is located in the \System directory. You can specify a
different secondary database using User Material Database File Name (see "User Material
Database Filename" on page 60) in the Configuration Editor. This setup permits multiple
user-supplied database files to be used on a single system.
What do you want to do?
Add a new material to the database (on page 1020)
Delete a material from the database (on page 1021)
Edit a material in the database (on page 1021)
1019
Add a new material to the database

When adding a new material to the database, you must add at least two records in the Material
Database Editor. The first record saves the new material for the All Codes option. CAESAR II
uses the All Codes option to populate the Material list in the Classic Piping Input dialog box.
Enter all the material information except for the allowable stresses. You can add subsequent
records for the same material to address additional piping codes and identify the allowable
stresses for each piping code.
1. In the Material Database Editor, click Clear Screen to Add
The software saves any data currently shown in the editor window, and then clears the
window contents.
2. Enter the required data for the new material, except for the allowable stresses. At a
minimum, you must specify the Number and select All Codes in the Applicable Piping
Code list.
You must enter a number that is less than 1000. If you enter a number that currently
exists in the database, the software prompts you to enter a different number.
3. Click Save Material
to save the new material.
4. After you save the new material, you can add subsequent new material records to modify
the piping code and define the allowable stresses. Select the Applicable Piping Code for
the new material. Then, specify the allowable stresses.
5. Click Save Material
to save the new material in the Piping Input processor. Repeat
steps 4 and 5 to add new material records for each piping code that you need.
6. Close the Material Database Editor dialog box, and open the Classic Piping Input dialog
box for the current job.
CAESAR II displays the new material as an option in the Material list on the Classic Piping
Input dialog box.
1020
Delete a material from the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Delete a Material
2. Select the material item you want to delete, and then click OK.
The software deletes the material from the database.
You can only delete user-defined materials. Materials that are delivered with the
CAESAR II material database cannot be deleted. If no user-defined materials exist in the
database, the software displays an informational message.
Edit a material in the database

1. In the Material Database Editor, click Edit a Material
2. In the Material Selection dialog box, do one of the following to select the material item you
want to modify:
Scroll through the list and double-click the material name.
Type all or part of a material name or number in the text box and click Search. The
software searches the database and displays matching materials for selection.
3. Edit the material item as needed, and then click Save Material
the material database.
to save your changes to
The Piping Code ID list corresponds to the piping code ID on the Piping Input dialog box.
To exit the dialog box without selecting a material press Esc or click Cancel.
Material Number
Enter a number for the material in the CAESAR II Material Database Editor. The Piping Input
module uses this number to reference the material. The number must be between 101 and 1000
inclusive and must not have been used for another material previously.
Material Name
Enter the material name as listed in the applicable code.
1021
Applicable Piping Code

Select the CAESAR II piping code number for which this material applies. The following piping
codes are currently supported:
All Codes
B31.9
BS 806
CODETI
DNV
B31.1
B31.11
Swedish 1
Norwegian TBK-6 EN 13480
B31.3
ASME NC
Swedish 2
FDBR
GPTC/Z380
B31.4
ASME ND
Stoomweze
n
BS 7159
PD 8010-1
B31.5
NAVY 505
RCC-M C
UKOOA
ISO-14692
B31.8
CAN Z662
RCC-M D
IGE/TD/12
HPGSL
JPI
Composition/Type
Specifies the material composition of the pipe.
Aluminum - Aluminum alloy or alloy steel containing 9% nickel. For use at

temperatures lower than room temperature.
Austenite - Austenite stainless steel and high nickel contained allows. For use at
temperatures higher than room temperature.
Others - Any material other than aluminum or austenite.
Material Density
Enter the density of the material.
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D)

Specify the curve used to check the material. As defined by B31.3 (Section 323.2.2), some
carbon steels are limited to a minimum metal temperature (as shown in Figure 323.2.2 of the
B31.3 section). If this code section is applicable, select A, B, C, or D. If this code section is not
applicable, leave this box blank.
CAESAR II does not currently use this information.
1022
Eff, Cf, z
Enter the appropriate factor. This factor is required by the following piping codes:
Stoomwezen - Enter the cyclic reduction factor. This is referred to in the code as Cf.
Norwegian TBK-6 - Enter the circumferential weld strength factor. This is referred to in the
code as z.
BS 7159 - Enter the ratio of the design stress (d) in the circumferential (hoop) direction to
the design stress in the longitudinal direction. Because design stress is defined in Sec. 4.3 of
the code as:
d = d * EIam, sdx = d * EIamx
and design strain should be the same for both directions, this entry is also the ratio of the
moduli of elasticity:
EIam (hoop) to EIam (longitudinal)
For Norwegian TBK-6 and BS 7159 piping codes, if the Eff, Cf, z field is left blank, the
software uses a default value of 1.0.
Cold Elastic Modulus

Enter the value of the elastic modulus to be used in code compliance stress cases. The software
uses this value only if no Elastic Modulus (on page 1025) is given for the ambient (70 F)
temperature. This value is used for metal materials only.
Poisson's Ratio
Enter the value to be used for Poissons ratio. This input is only required for metals.
FAC
Enter the applicable factor as determined by the following piping codes.
Stoomwezen - Enter 0.44 or 0.5. This value is used to compute the equilibrium stresses as
discussed in Section 5.2 of the code. You can use 0.5 for steel if the design and fabrication
are such that stress peaks are avoided.
Norwegian - Enter the material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature R m. If you do
not define a value, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
1023
Laminate Type
Enter the laminate type (as defined in the BS 7159 code) of the fiberglass reinforced plastic pipe
used. Valid laminate types are:
CSM and Woven Roving - Chopped strand mat (CSM) and woven roving (WR) construction
with internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM and Multi-filament - Chopped strand mat and multi-filament roving construction with
internal and external surface tissue reinforced layer.
CSM - All chopped strand mat construction with internal and external surface tissue
reinforced layer.
Eh / Ea
Displays the ratio of the hoop modulus to the axial modulus of elasticity. If omitted, the software
uses a default value of 2.0.
Temperature
Enter the temperature that corresponds to the database values you will add in the remaining
cells.
In the database delivered with the software, all temperatures are in 100F increments.
Some codes list physical property values in 50F increments; therefore, small
discrepancies may occur between CAESAR II and a given code because of the interpolation of
data.
Exp. Coeff.
Enter the coefficient of thermal expansion at the reference Temperature in the indicated units.
This value must be multiplied by 10 6 F prior to being entered. For example, for carbon steel at
400-deg F, B 31.3 Table C-3 gives an expansion coefficient of 6.82 in/in/F. Thus, you would
enter 6.82 in the database.
1024
Allowable Stress
Enter the code allowable stress corresponding to the reference Temperature. These values
generally correspond to the SC and SH values on the allowable auxiliary screens.
Elastic Modulus
Enter the modulus of elasticity to the reference Temperature. If no entry is given for ambient
(70 F), the software uses the value defined for Cold Elastic Modulus (on page 1023).
Yield Stress
Enter the yield stress that corresponds to the reference Temperature.
Ult Tensile Stress

Enter the temperature dependent stress value (lbs./sq.in.).This value varies by piping code.
Valid entries based on the current piping code are:
BS 806 - Mean stress to failure for design life at temperature.
Swedish Method 1 - Creep rupture stress at temperature.
Stoomwezen - Rrg average creep stress to produce 1% permanent set after 100,000 hours
IGE/TD/12 - Ultimate tensile strength.
Norwegian - The material ultimate tensile strength at room temperature is Rm (lbs./sq. in.).
If no value is entered, this factor is not considered to control the expansion stress allowable.
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W)

The Weld Strength Reduction Factor, W, is a temperature dependent value from B31.3/B31.1.
CAESAR II uses this value as:
Wl - A longitudinal reduction factor used in the determination of the pipe's minimum wall
thickness.
Wc - A circumferential reduction factor used in the determination of the allowable stress.
The use of W is optional, and is controlled through a configuration setting in the SIF and
Stresses section of the Configuration Editor.
1025
Temperature Dependent Stress Value

Provides stress value information that is dependent upon the temperature and varies based on
the piping code selected. Currently, the software supports the following values:
Rmmin - The minimum creep tensile stress to produce rupture after 100,000 hours at the
temperature (vm) when using the Stoomwezen piping code.
Material Selection Dialog Box

Allows you to search and select a material in the database for viewing or editing.
Scroll through individual materials by using the arrow keys or the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN
keys. Press HOME or END to go to the beginning or end of the materials list.
You can also type all or part of a material name or number and click Search, and the software
searches the database and displays all materials that include your entry.
Press ENTER or double-click on a material to select it. The software returns you to the
CAESAR II Material Database Editor dialog box and populates the fields with the selected
material values.
Database Status (Consistency Check) Dialog Box

Scans the material database for any numeric inconsistencies. The Consistency Check Results
list any material values that are numerically out of sequence. You can then use the Material
Database Editor to look up and review or modify these reported values for the materials.
Accounting
The CAESAR II Accounting module allows you to conveniently control all pricing factors for
jobs. The total price of any job is computed from:
IF (C4 > 0.0) THEN
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) * C4 * numcases + C5
ELSE
cost = C1*cputime + (C2*nodes + C3*elements) + C5
ENDIF
You can enter C1, C2, C3, C4, and C5 one time, and change them only when necessary.
Any of the constants may be zero, but at least one constant must be greater than zero.
CAESAR II Accounting is an optional module. If you do not need to keep
accounting records of your jobs, you can disregard this module.
You can generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on
a per-account basis. This module also lets you:
Generate reports for any requested combination of account numbers.
Define account numbers, which may contain up to 25 alphanumeric characters.
Control account and software access using the optional password protection feature
(accessed by selecting the Type 2 accounting method).
1026
Identify account numbers for each job using either of the following two methods:
Select the account number from a table of allowed account numbers. Otherwise, the
system defaults to the last valid account number input. The account manager sets up
and maintains the account number table.
Enter an account number, which can be any non-blank string, in a text box. There is no
default, but your entry must match one of the allowed account numbers previously input
by the account manager.
Access to the available account number list is password protected.
If you do not have a valid account number, the run is not permitted.
For more information on setting up the software to use accounting, see Activating the
Accounting System (on page 1028).
Accounting File Structure

The CAESAR II accounting file (ACCTG.DAT) contains all of the information used by CAESAR II
to produce accounting reports. The file format allows you to create a program to access or
manipulate the file. You can open the accounting file (in FORTRAN) with the following:
OPEN(1,FILE=ACCTG.DAT,STATUS=OLD,FORM=BINARY,
ACCESS=DIRECT,RECL=55)
The following information is stored on each record:
Variable
Type
Definition
JOBNAME
CHARACTER*8
Name of the job being run
ICPUTIME
INTEGER*4
Analysis CPU time used (Seconds)
NODES
INTEGER*2
Number of nodes in the job
NELEMS
INTEGER*2
Number of elements in the job
NLOADS
INTEGER*2
Number of load cases in the job
MYEAR
INTEGER*2
Year the job was run
MMONTH
INTEGER*2
Month the job was run
MDAY
INTEGER*2
Day of the month the job was run
MHOUR
INTEGER*2
Hour of the day the job was run
MMINUTE
INTEGER*2
Minutes of the hour when the job was run
MSECOND
INTEGER*2
Seconds of the minute when the job was run
ACCOUNTNO
CHARACTER*25 Account number to be billed for job
1027
The first record contains only a single integer value (ILAST), giving the last valid record number
in the accounting file. The number of job entries is equal to (ILAST-1). This first record may be
read:
READ(1,REC=1) ILAST
Activating the Accounting System

The CAESAR II Accounting module must be activated before you can begin collecting billing
and account information on jobs.
To access the accounting system, click Tools > Accounting on the Main Menu. The CAESAR
II Accounting dialog box displays. You can use the options in this dialog box to specify the
accounting method, set pricing, define account numbers, and generate reports.
For information about the options available on a specific dialog box tab, see:
Activate Accounting Tab (on page 1029)
Pricing Factors Tab (on page 1030)
Account Numbers Tab (on page 1031)
Reports Tab (on page 1031)
Status Tab (on page 1032)
1028
After the accounting system is initialized, the pricing factors are set, and account numbers
entered, you can initiate jobs with account tracking. The prompt for the account number appears
during analysis immediately after you initiate the accounting process.
The prompt for accounting information requires user-account identification.
If you selected Type 2 on the Activate Accounting tab (on page 1029), enter a valid
account number, or click OK for the default (last used) account number.
If you selected Type 1, select the appropriate account number from the list and click OK to
continue.
Activate Accounting Tab

Select the applicable accounting method (Type 1 or Type 2), and then click Activate
Accounting. After the accounting system is activated, click OK in the message box.
If the accounting system becomes unnecessary, deactivate it by clicking Deactivate
Accounting.
Type 1 Accounting Method

Select the Type 1 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, the software displays a list of the currently valid accounts
from which to choose.
Select an account number, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the
CAESAR II Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected
account.
1029
Type 2 Accounting Method
Select the Type 2 accounting method for the software to accept valid account numbers, up to 25
characters in length. With this method, you must enter a valid account number. The software
does not display a list of current account numbers.
This method also requires you to set a password to prevent account corruption. Select Type 2,
enter a password, and then click OK. Click Activate Accounting to enable the CAESAR II
Accounting module. You can then enter other accounting details for the selected account.
Pricing Factors Tab

Enter any costs as appropriate; blanks are allowed. Each rate is multiplied by the respective job
quantity, and the sum of these products is equivalent to the job cost. Job costs are calculated on
an integer dollar basis, and are never be less than one dollar. Any of the five rate constants can
be zero, but not all; none of the constants may be negative.
Click Submit to save the pricing factors.
Rate per CPU second

Specifies the cost per second of computer processing time.
Rate per NODE

Specifies the cost per node in the input file.
Rate per ELEMENT

Specifies the cost per element in the input file.
Rate per LOAD CASE

Specifies the cost per load case evaluated during the analysis.
This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
Rate per JOB/ANALYSIS

Specifies the cost on a per-job basis.
This information also displays on the Status tab in the CAESAR II Accounting module.
1030
Monetary Label
Specifies the monetary label. For example, type $ for US dollars.
Account Numbers Tab

Enter the required account numbers, and then click Save. These are the numbers that the
software uses to prompt you for an account number during software execution.
Reports Tab
Generate accounting reports on a per-run basis and the software summarizes them on a
per-account basis. From the Reports tab, you can specify the accounts for which you're
generating reports, the date range of the reports, and whether you're generating a detailed or a
summary report.
All generated reports contain the following items:
Account number
Job name
Time and date of run
Number of nodes, elements, and load cases
Calculated job cost
Accounts
Specifies the accounts for which you are generating reports.
Select Specific Accounts to generate a report for a specific account or set of accounts.
Click Select Accounts, select the accounts from the list, and then click OK.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all accounts.
After you select the account information, you can specify a date range and the type of report you
want to generate, then select Generate Report.
Date Range
Controls the range of dates for the report you are generating.
Select Specific Date Range to specify a range of dates for which to generate a report.
Select Entire Data File to generate a report that includes all dates.
After you select the account information and the date range, you can specify the type of report
you want to generate, then select Generate Report.
1031
Report
Controls the length of the report.
Select Summary to generate a shorter report. Accounting summary reports include

subtotals on a per-account basis, the number of jobs run for the account, and the time period
in which the account has been active.
Select Detailed to generate a full report.
The example below shows a sample detailed report.
Status Tab
Summarizes the number of accounts and pricing factors specified for the current accounting
system. The software displays the current accounting method, Type 1 (accounting without a
password required) or Type 2 (accounting with a password required) at the top.
The Status tab displays the total Number of defined account numbers, as well as the number
of account records run (i.e., how many times you've analyzed all of the defined accounts).
1032
Units File Operations

The active units file as specified in the configuration file is used with all new input files and all
existing output files in the given data directory. The units file specified in the configuration file
does not modify the units in an existing CAESAR II input file
Create/Review Units
Creates a custom units file. Click Tools > Create/Review Units to display the CAESAR II Units Maintenance dialog box, which you can use to create a new units file or to review data in
an existing units file.
Existing File to Review

Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you can review an existing units file to
determine if it is the file you want to use. Select the existing file and click View/Edit File. After
reviewing, if you see changes you need to make to the units file, you can Create a New Units
File (on page 1035) based upon the existing file and give the revised file a New Units File
Name (on page 1036).
1033
Review Existing Units File

Enables the Existing Files to Review list, which contains all existing units files located in both
the data folder and the program folder. Select the units file you want to review, and then click
View/Edit File. The software displays the Units File Review window, which contains all
CAESAR II dimensional items, their internal units, the conversion factor between the internal
units and the user-specified units, and the user-defined units.
1034
Create a New Units File

Creates a new units file and activates the Existing File to Start From list and New Units File
Name box. After you have completed both items, click View > Edit File. The software displays
the Units File Maintenance dialog box, in which you can edit your units and conversion factor
entries.
If the user-defined units for a given item exist in the list, then it is not necessary to specify
a conversion factor, as it is updated automatically. If a new set of units is required, such as, for
example, feet (instead of inches) in the Length category, either select the new unit name (ft.) in
the User Units list and select the new conversion factor in the Constant list or type a new factor
in the text box.
Existing File to Start From

Select an existing units file in the list. In CAESAR II, you create a new units file by using an
existing units file as a template. For ease and simplicity, we recommend that the units contained
within the existing file closely mirror the units contained within the new file to be created.
1035
New Units File Name

Enter a unique file name without the extension.
View/Edit File
Displays one of the following windows, depending on whether you are reviewing an existing
units file or creating a new one.
User File Review - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
reviewing an existing units file (see "Review Existing Units File" on page 1034). The contents
of this window are read-only.
User File Maintenance - Displays only when you click View/Edit File in conjunction with
creating a new units file (see "Create a New Units File" on page 1035). The contents of this
window are editable.
Change Model Units

Converts an existing input file to a new set of units. Click Tools > Change Model Units. The
software opens the CAESAR II Input File Units Conversion dialog box.
Enter the Name of the Input File to Convert

Type the full path name followed by the input file name, including the .c2a extension, to be
converted. Alternatively, you can click Browse and use Windows Explorer to navigate to the
appropriate file.
1036
Enter the Name of the Units File to Use

Select the name of the appropriate units file in the list of available units files.
Enter the Name of the Output File (Optional)

Type the full path name followed by the input file name that corresponds to the new input file.
If you select an existing ._a file using Browse, the converted file overwrites the
existing ._a file chosen from the list.
Batch Stream Processing

Tools > Multi-Job Analysis opens the Batch Stream Processor, which you can use to
analyze multiple jobs in batch mode.
You can run up to twelve different jobs completely unattended. Before initiating the batch stream
process, verify that the batch jobs meet the following criteria:
All jobs are located in the same data folder, and the default data folder is set to this folder.
All jobs have successfully passed error checking and must have dynamic load cases
defined. If the static load cases have not been defined, CAESAR II uses the standard
recommended cases.
Accounting is turned off or is set so that a default account number can be assumed by the
software.
The Batch Stream Processor creates a log file, named BATCH.LOG, and saves it in the same
folder as the batch jobs. You can use the log file to review processing times and to help
diagnose any failures in the batch process. The log file is a standard ASCII text file, which can
be edited or printed using a standard text editor, such as Notepad.
Define Jobs to Run

Opens the Batch Stream Data Definition dialog box in which you can define the names and
job types to be executed by the stream. The job names are the usual CAESAR II job names that
have been prepared for analysis.
Analyze Specified Jobs

Analyzes all previously defined jobs. You do not have to analyze the jobs immediately. Job
names and analysis types are stored in a data file, BATCH.STM, which can be invoked at any
time.
1037
CAESAR II Error Processing

CAESAR II makes every effort to alert you when it encounters data that is inconsistent or
unusual for the type of analysis that it is performing. Even so, the potential still exists for
user-modeling techniques or hardware/operating system problems that can generate an error
condition within the CAESAR II computation routines. Recognizing this potential, the software
performs internal self-checks to trap abnormal conditions such as full hard disks, invalid or
expired ESLs, file corruption, and insufficient free memory.
Whenever a fatal error condition arises, CAESAR II aborts the current process and uses a
multi-stage approach to provide you with an explanation regarding why the process was
aborted.
First, each error trap/condition is assigned a unique number. When an abort condition occurs,
this error number and a short description of the fatal error are displayed in a Help Facility
window similar to the one shown below.
When you click OK, the software closes the Help Facility window and opens the Additional
Error Information dialog box. You can use this dialog box to reference another error number,
which can be useful when one error definition references another. Clicking OK on the
Additional Error Information dialog box returns the software to the main CAESAR II window.
At any time, you can review fatal error information by clicking Diagnostics > Error
Review, entering the appropriate error number, and then clicking OK. The Help Facility window
opens and displays the corresponding fatal error description.
1038
SECTION 16
External Interfaces
External Interfaces allow data transfer between CAESAR II and other software applications. To
view a list of those software applications, click Tools > External Interfaces in the Main menu.
In most cases, data transfer is from a drawing or analysis package to CAESAR II. However, the
CAESAR II Neutral File transfers both to and from CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant provides a seamless, bi-directional interface between
CADWorx and CAESAR II without a translation procedure.
Most of the interfaces are CAD interfaces. The exceptions are LIQT, AFT IMPULSE,
PIPENET, Pipeplus, FlowMaster, the CAESAR II Data Matrix, and the CAESAR II
Neutral File.
1039
External Interfaces
CAD interfaces (CADPIPE, Intergraph Smart 3D PCF, Intergraph PDS, and PCF) are
intended to transfer piping geometry into CAESAR II. The resulting CAESAR II input must be
thoroughly checked, with loads, restraints, and other specifics added.
The CAESAR II Neutral File and the Intergraph CADWorx Plant interfaces are capable of
transferring 100% of the data that comprises the _A (input) file.
LIQT, AFT IMPULSE, PIPENET, PipePlus, and FlowMaster are transient analysis packages
for liquids in piping networks that calculate pressure imbalances as a function of time. The
CAESAR II interface converts this LIQT output from these packages to create force
response spectra for CAESAR II dynamic input.
The interfaces typically prompt you for a file name, transfer the data, and then prompt for
another file name. This cycle continues either until a blank file name is encountered or you
cancel the process.
Before beginning an interface to CAESAR II, follow the requirements of the CAESAR II
Neutral File interface. This enables all of the spreadsheet data to be transferred.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant is the Intergraph CAS piping design and drafting software for the
AutoCAD environment. Data may be completely and seamlessly transferred between CAESAR
II and Intergraph CADWorx Plant, without creating any neutral files or going through any
intermediate steps.
CAESAR II Neutral File

Enables access to any particular data item from an _A input file, to enable a complete _A file to
be built from a CAD application. The general neutral file can be used to send data either to or
from the standard CAESAR II binary input file, otherwise known as the _A file. The name of the
file used or generated by this interface is the CAESAR II jobname with the extension .CII. Also,
the interface allows CAESAR II input data to be used for other analysis purposes.
The content and format described in this section is subject to change as a function of the
enhancements made to CAESAR II. Every effort is being made to keep "drastic" changes to a
minimum.
Several third-party CAD applications, such as AVEVA s PDMS and Jacobus PlantSpace,
also support this neutral file. If you prefer, instead of launching this interface from Tools >
External Interface, the processor can be run in "batch mode" from either a batch file or the
command line as shown below.
f:\ProgramDirectory\iecho
f:\DataDirectory\NeutralFile.cii
where:
f:\ProgramDirectory and f:\DataDirectory must be changed as appropriate.
The CAESAR II neutral file, also referred to as the .CII file, is divided into sections which
organize the piping data in logical groupings. Section divisions are denoted in the neutral file by
the #$ character sequence found in columns 1 and 2. The token following the #$ character
sequence is a section identifier that is used by CAESAR II for data sequencing purposes, and to
aid you in reading the neutral file. For each item listed on the following pages, the necessary
FORTRAN format for the input/output is provided. The variables listed below are used in
dimensioning arrays.
1040
External Interfaces
N1Base memory allocation quantity used to set array sizes. For example, if N1=2,000,
your neutral file can handle up to 2,000 elements.
N21/2 N1
N31/3 N1
N41/4 N1
N51/5 N1
N6N1/13.33
Version and Job Title Information

#$ VERSION - Provides section header information.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 4G13.6) to write the values of the following variables on the first line
of the neutral file:
GVERSION is the version of the neutral file interface being used. This corresponds to the
major version number of CAESAR II (4 for 4.x., for example).
RVERSION is the specific CAESAR II version generating this file, for example. 4.50.
SPARE are unused (at this time) locations on the record.
The next 60 lines of 75 characters each are reserved for the CAESAR II title-page text. Use
FORTRAN format (2X, A75).
The last line of the job title array, if blank, is set by this transfer interface. The text that is set
here indicates that the file was created by the CAESAR II interface.
Control Information
#$ CONTROL - Provides the section division header. The #$ and space are required, and the
word CONTROL is in all uppercase.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following variables on the next
line of the neutral file:
NUMELT - Defines the number of piping elements (spreadsheets) in the input file.
NUMNOZ - Defines the number of nozzles in the input file.
NOHGRS - Defines the number of spring hangers in the input file.
NONAM - Defines the number of Node Name data blocks in the input file.
NORED - Defines the number of reducers in the input file.
NUMFLG - Defines the number of flanges in the input file.
Write 13 items that contain the number of auxiliary data types used in the input file followed by
the vertical axis indicator. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13). These 13 values are:
The number of bend auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of rigid-element auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of expansion-joint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of restraint auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
1041
External Interfaces
The number of displacement auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of force/moment auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of uniform-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of wind-load auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of element-offset auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of allowable-stress auxiliary data blocks in the input file.
The number of intersection auxiliary data blocks in the input file. IZUP flag. Equal to zero (0)
for the global -Y axis vertical; equal to 1 for the global -Z axis vertical.
The number of (nozzle) equipment limits data blocks in the input file.
Basic Element Data

#$ ELEMENTS - Contains integer and real data for each element in the input file. The data is
organized as shown below.
1. Real values for element "i"
2. Integer values for element "i"
3. Real values for element "i+1"
4. Integer values for element "i+1"
These real and integer values are stored in arrays that are described below.
A 98-member array (REL) contains the real basic-element data. The REL array is dimensioned
(N1,98).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 53 items on the
appropriate nine lines of the neutral file.
1. FROM node number
2. TO node number
3. Delta X
4. Delta Y
5. Delta Z
6. Diameter (value stored here is actual OD)
7. Wall Thickness (actual)
8. Insulation Thickness
9. Corrosion Allowance
10. Thermal Expansion Coefficient #1 (or Temperature #1)
1042
External Interfaces
19. Pressure #1
20. Pressure #2
21. Pressure #3
22. Pressure #4
23. Pressure #5
24. Pressure #6
25. Pressure #7
26. Pressure #8
27. Pressure #9
28. Elastic Modulus (cold)
29. Poissons Ratio
30. Pipe Density
31. Insulation Density
32. Fluid Density
33. Minus Mill Tolerance
34. Plus Mill Tolerance
35. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
36. Hydro Pressure
37. Elastic Modulus (Hot #1)
46. "wL" Factor
47. Element Orientation Angle (To End), FEATools Data Only
48. Element Orientation Angle (From End), FEATools Data Only
49. Cladding Thickness
1043
External Interfaces
50. Cladding Density
51. Insulation + Cladding Weight/length
52. Refractory Thickness
53. Refractory Density
Non-specified real values are assigned a value of 0.0 by this interface.
If the delta coordinates are not specified, they default to zero. If the To/From fields are not
specified, it is considered an error.
An 18-member array (IEL) contains the pointers to the auxiliary data arrays. The IEL array is
dimensioned (N1,18).
At this time, only 15 of the members of this array are used.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13) to write the values of the following 15 items on the next
three lines of the neutral file.
1. Pointer to Bend Auxiliary field. This indicates where in the bend auxiliary array the bend
data for the current element can be found.
2. Pointer to Rigid Element Auxiliary field.
3. Pointer to Expansion Joint Auxiliary field.
4. Pointer to Restraint Auxiliary field.
5. Pointer to Displacement Auxiliary field.
6. Pointer to Force/Moment Auxiliary field.
7. Pointer to Uniform Load Auxiliary field.
8. Pointer to Wind Load Auxiliary field.
9. Pointer to Element Offset Auxiliary field.
10. Pointer to Allowable Stress Auxiliary field.
11. Pointer to Intersection Auxiliary field.
12. Pointer to Node Name Auxiliary field.
13. Pointer to Reducer Auxiliary field.
14. Pointer to Flange Auxiliary field.
15. Pointer to Nozzle/Equipment Check Auxiliary field.
When there is no auxiliary data of a particular type associated with the current element
use a pointer value of zero.
1044
External Interfaces
Auxiliary Element Data

#$ AUX_DATA - Contains the auxiliary data corresponding to the elements. This data is
arranged in the same order as the IAUXAU array described previously. For example, if
IAUXAU(1) contains a 3, then there are three bends in the model, and their data is found next in
the neutral file. Likewise, if IAUXAU(2) contains a 5, then there are five rigid elements in the
model and their data follows the bend data.
Each set of auxiliary data is separated by a sub-section header. If a particular value in IAUXAU
is zero, then only the subsection header is written to the neutral file.
The data storage for these arrays is allocated at runtime based on the available free system
memory. These arrays are allocated proportionally as a percentage of the n-number of elements
allowed. Four proportions are used: 1/2, 1/3, 1/4, and 1/5. These proportions correspond to the
variables: N2, N3, N4, and N5. Maintain these proportions to ensure that the neutral file reader
can accept the file.
#$ NODENAME - Defines the Node Name data. To maintain downward compatibility, this
section is optional. The data for each element set of node names in the input file is listed here.
A two-member array (NAM) defines each set of node names. The NAM array is dimensioned
(N6, 2). Use the FORTRAN format (2X, A10, 16X, A10) to read the character name of the
FROM node and then that of the TO node.
#$ BEND - Defines the bend data. The data for each bend in the input file is listed here.
A 15-member array (BND) defines each bend. The BND array is dimensioned (N3,15).
Only 13 items are currently used. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of
the following 13 items on the next three lines of the neutral file.
1. Bend radius
2. Type: 1 - single flange; 2 - double flange; 0 or blank - welded
3. Angle to node position #1
4. Node number at position #1
9. Number of miter cuts
10. Fitting thickness of bend if different from the pipe
11. Seam Weld (1=Yes, 0=No)
12. Bend flexibility (K) factor
13. Weld strength reduction factor WL
#$ RIGID - Defines the rigid data. The data for each rigid in the input file is listed here.
A single-element array (RIG) is used for each rigid. The RIG array is dimensioned (N3,1). The
single element of the array represents the rigid weight.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the value.
1045
External Interfaces
#$ EXPJT - Defines the expansion joint data. The data for each expansion joint in the input file
is listed here. The EXP array is dimensioned (N5,5).
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file.
1. Axial stiffness
2. Transverse stiffness
3. Bending stiffness
4. Torsional stiffness
5. Effective inside bellows diameter
#$ RESTRANT - Defines the restraint data.
The data for each restraint auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here. The RES array is
dimensioned (N2,36).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following nine items on the
next two lines of the neutral file. These nine items are repeated four times for the four possible
restraints defined in the auxiliary data block.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each restraint specification. This means eight lines
total for each restraint auxiliary.
1. Restraint node number
2. Restraint type (see additional notes to follow)
3. Restraint stiffness
4. Restraint gap
5. Restraint friction coefficient
6. Restraint connecting node
7. X direction cosine
8. Y direction cosine
9. Z direction cosine
The restraint type is an integer value whose valid range is from 1 to 62. The 62 possible restraint
types include:
1046
External Interfaces
#$ DISPLMNT - Defines the displacement data. The data for each displacement auxiliary data
block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
lines of the neutral file. The DIS array is dimensioned (N3,110).
This requires 10 lines in the neutral file for each displacement specification. This means 20 lines
total for each displacement auxiliary.
These 55 items are repeated twice for the two possible displacements defined on the auxiliary.
Unspecified displacement values (free-displacement degrees of freedom, for example)
are designated by using a value of 9999.99.
#$ FORCMNT - Defines the start of the force/moment data. The data for each force/moment
auxiliary data block in the input file is listed here.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 55 items on the next
ten lines of the neutral file. The FOR array is dimensioned (N3,38).
This requires ten lines in the neutral file for each force/moment specification. This means 20
lines total for each force/moment auxiliary data block.
1047
External Interfaces
#$ UNIFORM - Defines the start of the uniform load data. The data for each uniform load in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 12 items on the next two
lines of the neutral file. The UNI array is dimensioned (N5,36). Currently three vectors of four
values each (three directions and a G-load flag) are used.
This requires two lines in the neutral file for each uniform load auxiliary data block.
G-flag is 1 for the input values in G's and 0 for input values in force-per-length notation.
{vector 1 & 2}
UX1
UY1
UZ1 G-fla
g1
{vector 2 & 3}
UZ2
G-flag UX3 UY3

2
UX2 UY2
UZ3 G-flag
3
#$ WIND - Defines the start of the wind/wave data. The data for each wind/wave specification in
the input file is listed here. The WIND array is dimensioned (N5,6).
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the set of values on the next line of the neutral
file. This requires a single line in the neutral file for each wind auxiliary.
The data items on each line are as follows:
1. Entry type (0.0 for Wind, 1.0 for Wave, 2.0 for Off)
2. Wind shape factor or wave drag coefficient
3. Wave added mass coefficient
4. Wave lift coefficient
5. Wave marine growth
6. Marine growth density
1048
External Interfaces
#$ OFFSETS - Defines the start of the element offset data. The data for each offset pipe in the
input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following six items on the next line
of the neutral file. The OFF array is dimensioned (N5,6).
This requires a single line in the neutral file for each offset auxiliary.
1. Element FROM node offset in X direction
2. Element FROM node offset in Y direction
3. Element FROM node offset in Z direction
4. Element TO node offset in X direction
5. Element TO node offset in Y direction
6. Element TO node offset in Z direction
#$ ALLOWBLS - Defines the start of the allowable stress data. The data for each allowable
spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 153 items on the next 26
lines of the neutral file. The ALL array is dimensioned (N5,153).
1. Cold allowable stress
2. Hot allowable for thermal case #1
5. Code cyclic reduction factor for thermal case #1
8. Eff.
9. Sy
10. Fac
11. Pmax
12. Piping code id
1049
External Interfaces
Items 25 through 32 represent Cycles, and items 33 through 40 represent Stresses for eight BW
(butt-weld)/Class D Fatigue pairs.
Items 41 through 48 represent Cycles, and items 49 through 56 represent Stresses for eight FW
(fillet-weld)/Class E Fatigue pairs.
Items 57 through 64 represent Cycles, and items 65 through 72 represent Stresses for eight
Class F Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Class G Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Class W Fatigue pairs used with TD/12 piping code.
Item 105 Elastic Modulus correction
Item 106 has different meanings based on the active piping code: Allowed Cycles Maximum
(per B31.3); Restrained Piping (per B31.8); Material Composition/Type (per HPGSL and JPI).
Item 107 UTS ambient
Item 108 Allowable Sy/St value
Items 109 through 117 represent nine SY values at temperature.
Items 118 through 126 represent nine UTS values at temperature.
Items 127 through 153 are currently unused. Write the value of 0.000000.
Some of these items (notably 8-24) may have various meanings based on the active piping
code.
Piping code ISO-14692 has special mapping for the first 24 items.
#$ SIF&TEES - Defines the start of the SIF/TEE data. The data for each SIF/TEE specification
in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following 30 items, for each of the
two tees that can be specified on the dialog box. The SIF array is dimensioned (N4,60).
The software requires five lines in the neutral file for each SIF/TEE specified. This means you
must specify 10 lines total for each auxiliary element.
The information in parenthesis below gives information about each input value.
1. Node (the intersection node number)
2. Type (the intersection type code, if not specified this auxiliary this is only used to specify
SIFs)
3. In-Plane SIF (ii)*
4. Out-Plane SIF (io)*
5. Weld (d) (circumferential weld mismatch, used for butt welds and tapered transitions
1050
External Interfaces
6. Fillet (fillet leg length)
7. Pad Thk (thickness of the reinforcing pad)
8. Ftg Ro (fitting outside radius for branch connections)
9. Crotch R (crotch radius of the formed lip on an extruded welding tee)
10. Weld ID (weld ID value)
11. B1 (code-specific value)
12. B2 (code-specific value)
13. In-Plane Index (Ii)*
14. Out-Plane Index (Io)*
15. Torsion SIF (it)*
16. Axial SIF (ia)*
17. Pressure SIF (ip)*
18. Pressure Index (Ip)*
19-22*
*Values 3, 4, 11, and 13-22 are for the IGE/TD/12 piping code.
23. (code-related "Note" options)
24. (code-related "Note" options)
25. Axial Index (Ia)
26. Torsion Index (It)
Some of these values may have different meanings based on the piping code you have
selected. For more information on piping input specifics, see SIFs & Tees (on page 131).
#$ REDUCERS - This subsection header defines the start of the REDUCER data. The data for
each REDUCER spec in the input file is listed here.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6) to write the values of the following five items on the next
line of the neutral file. The RED array is dimensioned (N6,5).
This requires one line in the neutral file for each REDUCER specified.
1. Second diameter of the reducer
2. Second thickness of the reducer
3. Alpha angle of the reducer
4. R1 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
5. R2 value of the reducer for the TD/12 piping code
These values are repeated for the second intersection specification.
#$ FLANGES - Defines the FLANGE data. The data for each FLANGE spec in the input file is
listed here. There are 72 data values used to describe a flange.
1. FROM/TO (0 = FROM, 1 = TO, 2= BOTH)
2. METHOD (0 = PEQ, 1 = ASME NC)
1051
External Interfaces
3. GASKET OR BOLT CIRCLE DIAMETER, DEPENDING ON METHOD
4. BOLT AREA (ASME METHOD ONLY)
5. SYC (ASME METHOD ONLY)
6. SY1 (ASME METHOD ONLY)
15. 15-24 CLASS NAME, (40 CHAR MAX)
16. 25-48 24 TEMPERATURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD
ONLY)
17. 49-72 24 PRESSURES OF THE TEMP/PRESS RATING CURVE (PEQ METHOD ONLY)
These values are arranged in the neutral file on 12 lines using a format of (2X, 6G13.6) unless
otherwise specified:
Line 1: Flange items 1-5
Line 4: Class Name, using a format of (2X, A40)
All 12 lines must be written to the neutral file for each flange. Unused fields/values can be
represented by 0.00.
#$ EQUIPMNT - Defines the Equipment/Nozzle Check data. The data for each EQUIPMNT
spec in the input file is listed here. There are two sets of 17 data values that use a format of
(2X, 6G13.6) as shown below:
1. Node Number
1052
External Interfaces
2. Limiting load value FX
3. Limiting load value FY
4. Limiting load value FZ
5. Limiting load value MX
6. Limiting load value MY
7. Limiting load value MZ
8. Reference axis direction cosine CosX
9. Reference axis direction cosine CosY
10. Reference axis direction cosine CosZ
11. Flange rating
12. Interaction method: 0=absolute; 1=SRSS; 2=Unity Check;
Items 13-17 are spares represented by 0.00. These values are arranged in the neutral file on six
lines. All six lines must be written to the neutral file for each Nozzle/Equipment check. Unused
fields/values can be represented by 0.00.
Miscellaneous Data Group #1

#$ MISCEL_1 - Contains the material id (RRMAT) for each element in the input file, the nozzle
data (VFLEX), the hanger data, and the execution options.
Material ID - Contains the material id number in the first array for each element in the input file.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
The RRMAT array is dimensioned (N1). The material ids range from 1 to 699 (See the Users
Guide for details).
The number of lines required to write the RRMAT array in the neutral file is determined by the
following FORTRAN routine:
NLINES = NUMELT / 6
IF(MOD(NUMELT,6).NE.0)THEN
NLINES = NLINES + 1
ENDIF
Nozzles - Describes the flexible (WRC-297, PD-5500, API 650) nozzles in the input file.
The value 9999.99 represents infinity.
Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). The nozzle (VFLEX) contains 16 values for each
nozzle in the input.
This requires four lines in the neutral WRC-297, PD-5500, and/or API 650 spread\-sheet. The
VFLEX array is dimensioned (N6, 16).
For WRC-297 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle Node Number
2. Vessel Node Number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (-1.0101 = 297, 1.0 = 650)
4. Nozzle Outside Diameter (in.)
1053
External Interfaces
5. Nozzle Wall Thickness (in.)
6. Vessel Outside Diameter (in.)
7. Vessel Wall Thickness (in.)
8. Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional)(1-17)
For PD-5500 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle Node Number
2. Vessel Node Number (optional)
3. Nozzle type indicator (2.0-5500)
4. Vessel Type (0-Cylinder, 1-Sphere)
5. Nozzle Outside Diameter (in.)
6. Vessel Outside Diameter (in.)
7. Vessel Wall Thickness (in.)
8. Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness (in.)
9. Spare (not used)
10. Dist. to stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
11. Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head (in.) (9999.99 = )
12. Vessel centerline direction vector X
13. Vessel centerline direction vector Y
14. Vessel centerline direction vector Z
15. Vessel Temperature (optional) (F)
16. Vessel Material # (optional) (1-17)
For API 650 nozzles, the 16 items are:
1. Nozzle
2. Specific gravity of fluid
3. Thermal expansion coefficient (in/in/deg)
4. Delta Temperature (F)
5. Elastic Modulus (psi)
1054
External Interfaces
Hangers - Describes the spring hangers in the input file. Some of the hanger data listed below
represents uninitialized data. In the instances where this uninitialized data represent infinite
values (such as maximum travel limit and available space), it is reported here as 9999.99.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in FORTRAN format (2X, I13,
5G13.6):
IDFTABLE is the default hanger table.
DEFVAR is the default for allowed load variation.
DEFRIG is the default for rigid support displacement criteria.
DEFMXTRAVEL is the default for maximum allowed travel.
DEFSHTSPR is the default for allowing short range springs (0=no 1=yes).
DEFMUL is the default multi-load case design option.
The next line contains values for the following parameters in the FORTRAN format (2X, 5I13):
IDFOPER is the default number of hanger design operating cases (always 1).
IACTCLD is the default cold load calculation switch (0=no, 1=yes).
IHGRLDS is the number of hanger operating loads (0 -3).
IACTUAL is the load case defining actual cold loads.
IMULTIOPTS is the multi-load case design option (1-7).
An array of hanger node numbers (IHGRNODE) is read and written for each hanger in the input
file and is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5
hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
A 10-element array (HGRDAT) is read and written for each hanger in the input file. The
HGRDAT array is dimensioned (10,N5). Each hanger in the model requires two lines in the
neutral file. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6).
1. Hanger stiffness
2. Allowable load variation
3. Rigid support displacement criteria
4. Allowed space for hanger
5. Cold load #1 (theoretical)
6. Hot load #1 (initialize to 0.0)
7. User defined operating load f/ variable springs (init to 0.0)
8. Maximum allowed travel limit
9. Multiple load case design option
10. Hanger hardware weight
A four-element array (IHGRFREE) is read/written for each hanger in the input file. The
IHGRFREE array is dimensioned ( 4,N5). Each hanger in the file requires one line in the neutral
file.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
1. Anchor node to be freed (#1)
1055
External Interfaces
2. Anchor node to be freed (#2)
3. d.o.f. type for #1 (1-free Y, 2-free XY, 3-free ZY, 4-free X, Y, Z, 5-free all)
4. d.o.f. type for #2
An array (IHGRNUM) lists the number of hangers at this location for each hanger in the input
file. There is one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRNUM array is dimensioned
(N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use
the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
An array (IHGRTABLE) lists the hanger table numbers for each hanger in the input file. There is
one entry here for every hanger in the file. The IHGRTABLE is dimensioned (N5). There are
seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers are specified. Use the FORTRAN
format (2X, 6I13).
An array of flags (IHGRSHORT) indicates if short range springs can be used at each hanger
location. The IHGRSHORT array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file
for this data. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
0 = cannot use short range springs
1 = can use short range springs
An array of connecting node numbers (IHGRCN) is available for each hanger. The IHGRCN
array is dimensioned (N5). There are seven lines in the neutral file for this data if all N5 hangers
are specified. Use the FORTRAN format (2X, 6I13).
Execution Options - Defines the execution options used by CAESAR II. Use the FORTRAN
format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13). This requires three lines in the neutral file. These values are:
Print forces on rigids and expansion joints 0=no, 1=yes
Print alphas & pipe props. during error checking 0=no, 1=yes
Activate Bourdon Pressure Effects 0, 1, or 2
Activate Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 0=no, 1=yes
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature degrees
Use Liberal Stress Allowable 0=no, 1=yes
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format: (2X, I13, 2G13.6, 3I13):
Uniform Load Input in gs 0=no, 1=yes
Stress Stiffening due to Pressure 0, 1, 2
Ambient Temperature (If not 70.00 deg F ) degrees
FRP Expansion * 1,000,000 len/len/deg
Optimizer 0-Both, 1-CuthillMcKee, 2-Collins
Next Node Selection 0-Decreasing, 1-Increasing
For the following data, use the FORTRAN format (2X, 4I13, G13.6, I13):
Final Ordering 0-Reversed, 1-Not Reversed
Collins Ordering 0-Band, 1-No. of Coefficients
Degree Determination 0-Connections, 1-Band
User Control 0-None, 1-Allow User Re-Looping
1056
External Interfaces
FRP Shear ratio
Laminate type
Units Conversion Data

#$ UNITS - Defines both the conversion constants and the conversion labels. The conversion
constants are all REAL*4 values in FORTRAN format (2X, 6G13.6). This requires four lines in
the neutral file. The character definitions for the labels are listed below.
CNVLEN - Defines the length conversion
CNVFOR - Defines the force conversion
CNVMAS - Defines the mass conversion
CNVMIN - Defines the moment (input) conversion
CNVMOU - Defines the moment (output) conversion
CNVSTR - Defines the stress conversion
CNVTSC - Defines the temperature conversion
CNVTOF - Defines the temperature offset
CNVPRE - Defines the Pressure conversion
CNVYM - Defines the Youngs modulus conversion
CNVPDN - Defines the pipe density conversion
CNVIDN - Defines the insulation density conversion
CNVFDN - Defines the fluid density conversion
CNVTSF - Defines the translational stiffness conversion
CNVUNI - Defines the uniform load conversion
CNVWND - Defines the wind load conversion
CNVELE - Defines the elevation conversion
CNVCLN - Defines the compound length conversion
CNVDIA - Defines the diameter conversion
CNVTHK - Wall thickness conversion
Next, enter the following labels for units, one per line, in the format given in the label
descriptions. This requires 24 lines in the neutral file.
CCVNAME - Defines the name of the units used, such as English (CHARACTER*15)
CCVNOM - Sets On or Off, and tells PREPIP whether or not nominal diameters are allowed
(CHARACTER* 3)
CCVLEN - Defines the length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVFOR - Defines the force label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMAS - Defines the mass label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVMIN - Defines the moment (input) label (CHARACTER* 6)
1057
External Interfaces
CCVMOU - Defines the moment (output) label (CHARACTER* 6)
CCVSTR - Defines the stress label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSC - Defines the temperature label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVTOF - Defines the temperature offset/label (CHARACTER* 1)
CCVPRE - Defines the pressure label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVYM - Defines Youngs modulus label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVPDN - Defines the pipe density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVIDN - Defines the insulation density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVFDN - Defines the fluid density label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVTSF - Defines the translational stiffness label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVRSF - Defines the rotational stiffness label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVUNI - Defines the uniform load label (CHARACTER* 7)
CCVGLD - Defines the gravitational load label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVWND - Defines the wind load label (CHARACTER*10)
CCVELE - Defines the elevation label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVCLN - Defines the compound length label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVDIA - Defines the diameter label (CHARACTER* 3)
CCVTHK - Defines the wall thickness label (CHARACTER* 3)
Nodal Coordinate Data

#$ COORDS - Specifies the X, Y, Z global coordinates of the starting node point of each
discontinuous piping segment. The data in this section of the neutral file is optional; it may not
exist. The existence of this data depends on user preference and the particular job. The data is
defined below.
NXYZ - Defines how many sets of coordinates follow. Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13).
INODE, XCORD, YCORD, ZCORD - Consists of four values in a line and is repeated NXYZ
times.
Use FORTRAN format (2X, I13, 3F13.4) to define a node number and the X, Y, Z global
coordinates.
This section only exists in Versions 3.22 and later.
CAESAR II Data Matrix

The generic CAESAR II data matrix input routine creates a CAESAR II file from a simple neutral
file. The Data Matrix Interface transfers only the piping geometry. This requires you to input
additional data to complete the stress model. It expects to read a file that contains a single line
of data for each pipe in the model. Each line of data contains 12 parameters as listed below.
ELMT - Defines the element number sequential from 1.
1058
External Interfaces
N1 - Defines the From node number.
N2 - Defines the To node number.
DX - Defines the delta dimension in the global "X" direction.
DY - Defines the delta dimension in the global "Y" direction (the "Y" axis is vertical in
CAESAR II).
DZ - Defines the delta dimension in the global "Z" direction.
DIAM - Defines the actual pipe diameter.
THK - Defines the actual pipe wall thickness.
ANCH - Provides a restraint flag. A value of 1 sets the From node to be restrained. A zero (0)
value is otherwise and is currently ignored.
BEND - Defines the bend indicator. A value of 1 sets a bend at the To node. A zero (0) value is
no bend.
BRAD - Defines the bend radius if not a long radius bend.
RIGID - Defines a rigid element flag. A value of 1 sets the element to rigid. A value of zero (0)
value sets the element to nonrigid.
All values in the matrix should be real floating point numbers. The format for each line of data
must be (12E13.6). This generic interface prompts for an arbitrary conversion constant for the
delta dimensions, and the diameter /thickness values to overcome any differences between the
assumed units of the neutral file and the CAESAR II defaults.
If you are developing a completely new interface, use the CAESAR II Neutral File (on page
1040).
Data Export Wizard

Provides export of both the input model and output data.
You can also export output data automatically with each analysis through ODBC
Settings in the configuration file under Database Definitions.
This wizard is compatible with ODBC Microsoft Access and Excel and can also export data in
XML format. The Excel interface produces a semicolon delimited text file that can quickly be
imported into Excel. You can access the Data Export Wizard by clicking Tools > External
Interfaces > Data Export Wizard.
Export Data Using the Data Export Wizard

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Data Export Wizard.
The Data Export Wizard displays.
2. Review the export types and click Next to proceed.
3. On the Input and Output Files page, browse for the required CAESAR II piping file to
export. This file can be the .C2 file or the specific ._A file). By default, the current CAESAR II
file is selected for export.
4. Specify a revision number for the exported data set, if applicable.
1059
External Interfaces
5. Select Export Output Data Also if you want to include any output results (if available) in the
exported data set.
6. Select Use System Units to convert the output data to the set of units currently defined in
the CAESAR II Configure/Setup.
7. Do one of the following:
a. Click Quick XML Export to transfer the input data to the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and
output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where filename is the name of the file
you selected to export).
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file. Click OK to
open the file or Cancel to exit the wizard.
You must have the appropriate application installed to open the file format or the
exported file does not open.
b. Complete steps 8 through 15.
8. Click Browse in the Select the Data Export Output File box and navigate to the location of
the output data. CAESAR II defaults the output filename to the name of the file you have
open currently.
9. Select the Save as type list to specify the required data output. You can export files in the
following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access Database, .accdb (Microsoft
Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel compatible text), or .xml
(Extensible Markup Language).
10. Click Save.
11. Click Next.
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Input Export Options dialog box.
12. Select the input options you want to export and then click Next.
1060
External Interfaces
CAESAR II displays the CAESAR II Output Report Options dialog box.
13. Select the static load cases for your results and the output report options that you want to
export.
Several built-in reports, queries, and other helpful options are provided in the default
Access file format, or you can develop custom reports and queries.
14. Click Finish.
CAESAR II prompts you and asks if you want to open the newly exported file.
15. Do one of the following:
a. Click OK to open the exported file.
b. Click Cancel to close the wizard.
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog Box

Select the file that you want to export.
Additionally, you can specify details about the file, such as a revision number, whether or not
you want output results included in the exported data set, and if you want to convert the output
data set into another unit of measure. Also, you specify for CAESAR II to perform a quick export
of the job, where CAESAR II uses a standard naming convention and exports the input and
output of the job into .xml format.
1061
External Interfaces
Select CAESAR II File

Browse and select the CAESAR II file that you want to export.
This file can be a CAESAR II (.C2) file or the specific CAESAR II binary input (._A) file. By
default, the current CAESAR II file is selected for export.
Specify Revision Number

Specifies a revision number for the CAESAR II exported file. The revision number is stored as
ISSUE_NO in the exported file.
Export Output Data Also

Indicates whether you want to also export output reports. If you select this check box, CAESAR
II prompts you with the Output Report Options dialog box after you specify input export
options.
Use System Units

Indicates that CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the CAESAR II configuration file
(Caesar.cfg, which is located in the current input file directory) for the exported output file. When
not selected, CAESAR II uses the units of measure specified in the selected input file.
Quick XML Export

Click Quick Xml Export if you want CAESAR II to export the selected file using all default
export options selected. CAESAR II immediately begins the export, exporting the input data to
the "filename_ INPUT.xml" file and output data to the "filename_OUTPUT.xml" file (where
filename is the name of the file you selected to export).
Select Data Export Output File

Click Browse to locate and select an existing output file to which you want to export the current
file, or specify a file name and format for the data export.
You can export files in the following formats: .mdb (Microsoft Office 2001/2002/Access
Database), .accdb (Microsoft Office 2007/2010/Access Database), .txt (Microsoft Excel
compatible text), or .xml (Extensible Markup Language).
1062
External Interfaces
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog Box

Select the input options to export.CAESAR II exports the input and results to various formats,
which you can use to interface with other software. The options you select in this dialog box
determine what columns appear in the specified exported format.
Elements Input Export Option

Exports the basic element data including pointers to auxiliary data.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA
XML Primary Tag: PIPINGELEMENT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
Element Identifier
ELEMENTID
From node number
FROM_NODE
FROM_NODE
To node number
TO_NODE
TO_NODE
From node name
FROM_NODE_NAME
To node name
TO_NODE_NAME
Line number
LINE_NO
Delta X
DELTA_X
DELTA_X
Delta Y
DELTA_Y
DELTA_Y
Delta Z
DELTA_Z
DELTA_Z
Diameter (actual OD)
DIAMETER
DIAMETER
Wall Thickness (actual)
WALL_THICK
WALL_THICK
INSUL_THICK
INSUL_THICK
Corrosion Allowance
CORR_ALLOW
CORR_ALLOW
Thermal Expansion Coefficient TEMP_EXP_C1

#1 or Temperature #1
TEMP_EXP_C1

TEMP_EXP_C2

TEMP_EXP_C3
XML Tag Name
1063
External Interfaces
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name

TEMP_EXP_C4

TEMP_EXP_C5

TEMP_EXP_C6

TEMP_EXP_C7

TEMP_EXP_C8

TEMP_EXP_C9
Pressure #1
PRESSURE1
PRESSURE1
Pressure #2
PRESSURE2
PRESSURE2
Pressure #3
PRESSURE3
PRESSURE3
Pressure #4
PRESSURE4
PRESSURE4
Pressure #5
PRESSURE5
PRESSURE5
Pressure #6
PRESSURE6
PRESSURE6
Pressure #7
PRESSURE7
PRESSURE7
Pressure #8
PRESSURE8
PRESSURE8
Pressure #9
PRESSURE9
PRESSURE9
Elastic Modulus
MODULUS
MODULUS
Hot Elastic Modulus #1
HOT_MOD1
HOT_MOD2
HOT_MOD3
HOT_MOD4
HOT_MOD5
1064
External Interfaces
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
HOT_MOD6
HOT_MOD7
HOT_MOD8
HOT_MOD9
Poisson's Ratio
POISSONS
POISSONS
Pipe Density
PIPE_DENSITY
PIPE_DENSITY
Insulation Density
INSUL_DENSITY
INSUL_DENSITY
Fluid Density
FLUID_DENSITY
FLUID_DENSITY
REFRACT_THK
Refractory Density
REFRACT_DENSITY
Cladding Thickness
CLAD_THK
Cladding Density
CLAD_DENSITY
Insulation and Cladding Unit

Weight
INSUL_CLAD_UNIT_WEI
GHT
Material Number
MATERIAL_NUM
MATERIAL_NUM
Material Name
MATERIAL_NAME
MATERIAL_NAME
Plus Mill Tolerance
MILL_TOL_PLUS
MILL_TOL_PLUS
Minus Mill Tolerance
MILL_TOL_MINUS
MILL_TOL_MINUS
Seam Weld
SEAM_WELD
SEAM_WELD
See Auxiliary Data Pointers for a list of database pointers to auxiliary data, which
also appear in this input options output table.
Auxiliary Data Pointers
The auxiliary data pointers indicate the location of the details for each piece of auxiliary data.
For example, if Bend Pointer is equal to 1 here, then the details of this bend will be contained in
the Bend table where the bend number is also equal to 1.
Auxiliary pointers are only applicable to data export for Microsoft Access and Microsoft
Excel and not to XML.
1065
External Interfaces
Pointer Type
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Bend Array Pointer
BEND_PTR
BEND
Rigid Array Pointer
RIGID_PTR
RIGID
Expansion Joint Array

Pointer
EXPJ_PTR
EXPANSIONJOINT
Restraint Array Pointer
REST_PTR
RESTRAINT
Displacement Array
Pointer
DISP_PTR
DISPLACEMENTS
Force/Moment Array
Pointer
FORCMNT_PTR
FORCEMOMENTS
Uniform Load Array

Pointer
ULOAD_PTR
UNIFORMLOAD
Wind/Wave Load Array

Pointer
WLOAD_PTR
WIND OR WAVE
Element Offset Array

Pointer
EOFF_PTR
OFFSET
Allowable Stress Array

Pointer
ALLOW_PTR
ALLOWABLESTRESS
Intersection Array Pointer
INT_PTR
SIF
Hangers Array Pointer
HGR_PTR
HANGER
Nozzles Array Pointer
NOZ_PTR
NOZZLE
Reducers Array Pointer
REDUCER_PTR
REDUCER
Flanges Array Pointer
FLANGE_PTR
FLANGE
1066
External Interfaces
Bends Input Export Option

Exports all the bend information defined in the job. Below are the details of the bend data
available from CAESAR II along with the respective column names and XML tag names.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_BENDS
Microsoft Excel section name: BEND DATA
XML Primary Tag: BEND
Data Name
Access Column Name XML Tag Name
Bend Pointer
BEND_PTR
Bend Radius
RADIUS
RADIUS
Type
(1-Single flange,
2- double flange,
0 or blank- welded)
TYPE
TYPE
Angle to node position #1
ANGLE1
ANGLE1
Node number at position #1
NODE1
NODE1
ANGLE2
ANGLE2
NODE2
NODE2
ANGLE3
ANGLE3
NODE3
NODE3
Number of miter cuts
NUM_MITER
NUM_MITER
Fitting thickness of bend if

different from the pipe
FIT_THICK
FITTINGTHICKNESS
Bend K Factor
KFACTOR
Is Seam Welded?
SEAM_WELD
WL Factor
WI_FACTOR
Access and Excel contain a number that identifies on which element they were defined.
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.BEND_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.BEND_PTR
1067
External Interfaces
Rigids Input Export Option

Exports rigid information of all rigid elements defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_RIGIDS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RIGID DATA
XML Primary Tag: RIGID
Data Name
Access Column Name
Rigid Pointer
RIGID_PTR
Rigid Weight
RIGID_WGT
XML Tag Name
WEIGHT
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RIGID_PTR = INPUT_BENDS.RIGID_NUM.
Expansion Joints Input Export Option

Export expansion joint information of all expansion joints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access table name: INPUT_EXPJT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: EXPANSION JOINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: EXPANSIONJOINT
Data Name
Access Column Name
Expansion Joint Pointer
EXPJT_PTR
Axial stiffness
AXIAL_STIF
AXIAL_STIF
Transverse stiffness
TRANS_STIF
TRANS_STIF
Bending Stiffness
BEND_STIF
BEND_STIF
Torsional stiffness
TORS_STIF
TORS_STIF
Effective inside bellows diameter BEL_DIA
XML Tag Name
BEL_DIA
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EXPJT_PTR = INPUT_EXPJT.EXPJT_PTR.
1068
External Interfaces
Restraints Input Export Option

Export Restraint information of all restraints defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_RESTRAINTS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: RESTRAINT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: RESTRAINT
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Restraint pointer
REST_PTR
Node number
NODE_NUM
Node name
NODE_NAME
Restraint type (see

"Restraint Codes" on
page 1069)
RES_TYPEID
TYPE
Stiffness
STIFFNESS
STIFFNESS
Gap
GAP
GAP
Friction coefficient
FRIC_COEF
FRIC_COEF
Connecting node
CNODE
CNODE
X direction cosine
XCOSINE
XCOSINE
Y direction cosine
YCOSINE
YCOSINE
Z direction cosine
ZCOSINE
ZCOSINE
NODE
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.REST_PTR = INPUT_RESTRAINTS.REST_PTR.
Restraint Codes
There are 62 different restraints available in CAESAR II. When the restraint information is
exported to a format such as Microsoft Access, a restraint type code is exported. The following
is the key for those restraint codes.
Code
Abbreviation Type
ANC
Anchor
1069
External Interfaces
Code
Abbreviation Type
RX
RY
RZ
GUI
Guide, Double Acting
LIM
Double Acting Limit Stop
10
XSNB
11
YSNB
12
ZSNB
13
+X
14
+Y
15
+Z
16
-X
17
-Y
18
-Z
19
+RX
20
+RY
21
+RZ
22
-RX
23
-RY
24
-RZ
25
+LIM
26
-LIM
27
XROD
Large Rotation Rod
1070
External Interfaces
Code
Abbreviation Type
28
YROD
Large Rotation Rod
29
ZROD
Large Rotation Rod
30
+XROD
Large Rotation Rod
31
+YROD
Large Rotation Rod
32
+ZROD
Large Rotation Rod
33
-XROD
Large Rotation Rod
34
-YROD
Large Rotation Rod
35
-ZROD
Large Rotation Rod
36
X2
37
Y2
38
Z2
39
RX2
40
RY2
41
RZ2
42
+X2
43
+Y2
44
+Z2
45
-X2
46
-Y2
47
-Z2
48
+RX2
49
+RY2
50
+RZ2
51
+RX2
1071
External Interfaces
Code
Abbreviation Type
52
+RY2
53
+RZ2
54
-RX2
55
-RY2
56
-RZ2
57
+XSNB
Directional Snubber
58
+YSNB
Directional Snubber
59
+ZSNB
Directional Snubber
60
-XSNB
Directional Snubber
61
-YSNB
Directional Snubber
62
-ZSNB
Directional Snubber
Displacements Input Export Option

Export user specified displacement information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_DISPLMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: DISPLACEMENT DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: DISPLACEMENTS
Data Name
Column Name
Displacement Pointer
DISP_PTR
XML Tag Name
Displacement Number DISP_NUM
DISP_NUM
Node Number
NODE_NUM
NODE_NUM
Vector Number
VECTOR_NUM
NUMBER*
X axis displacement
DX
DX*
Y axis displacement
DY
DY*
Z axis displacement
DZ
DZ*
1072
External Interfaces
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
X axis rotation
RX
RX*
Y axis rotation
RY
RY*
Z axis rotation
RZ
RZ*
*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.DISP_PTR = INPUT_DISPLMNT.DISP_PTR
Forces Moments Input Export Option

Export user specified forces/moments information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FORCMNT
Microsoft Excel Section Name: FORCES/MOMENTS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: FORCESMOMENTS
Data Name
Column Name
Force/Moment Pointer
FORCMNT_PTR
XML Tag Name
Force/Moment Number FORCMNT_NUM
FORCMNT_NUM
Node Number
NODE_NUM
NODE_NUM
Vector Number
VECTOR_NUM
NUMBER*
X axis force
FX
FX*
Y axis force
FY
FY*
Z axis force
FZ
FZ*
X axis moment
MX
MX*
Y axis moment
MY
MY*
Z axis moment
MZ
MZ*
*These tags are child tags of the VECTOR tag.

INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FORCMNT_PTR = INPUT_FORCMNT.FORCMNT_PTR
1073
External Interfaces
Uniform Load Input Export Option

Export user specified uniform load information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_UNIFORM
Microsoft Excel Section Name: UNIFORM LOAD DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: UNIFORMLOAD
Data Name
Column Name
Uniform Load Pointer
UNIF_PTR
XML Tag Name
Uniform Load Number VECTOR_NUM
VECTOR_NUM
X axis load
UX
UX
Y axis load
UY
UY
Z axis load
UZ
UZ
Uniform Load Type
UTYPE
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ULOAD_PTR = INPUT_UNIFORM.ULOAD_PTR
Wind Wave Input Export Option

Export user specified wind or wave information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_WIND
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WIND/WAVE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WIND or WAVE
Data Name
Column Name
Wind Pointer
WIND_PTR
Entry Type
ENTRY_TYPE
Not Applicable
Wind Shape Factor OR Wave

Drag Coefficient
WSHAP_WDRC
WSHAP_WDRC
Wave added mass coefficient
WADD_MASS
WADD_MASS
Wave Lift Coefficient
WLIFT_COEFF
WLIFT_COEFF
Wave Marine Growth
WMAR_GROWTH WMAR_GROWTH
Wave Growth Density
WMAR_GROWTH
_DENSITY
XML Tag Name
1074
External Interfaces
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.WLOAD_PTR = INPUT_WIND.WIND_PTR
Offsets Input Export Option

Export user specified offset information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_OFFSETS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: OFFSET DATA
Microsoft XML Primary Tag Name: OFFSET
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Offsets Pointer
OFFSETS_PTR
From node offset in X direction
FROMX
FROMX
From node offset in Y direction
FROMY
FROMY
From node offset in Z direction
FROMZ
FROMZ
To node offset in X direction
TOX
TOX
To node offset in Y direction
TOY
TOY
To node offset in Z direction
TOZ
TOZ
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.OFFSETS_PTR = INPUT_OFFSETS.OFFSETS_PTR
Allowables Input Export Option

Export user specified allowable stress information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_ALLOWBLES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: ALLOWABLE STRESS DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: ALLOWABLESTRESS
Data Name
Column Name
Allowables Pointer
ALLOWBL_PTR
Case Number
CASE_NUM
CASE_NUM
Cold Allowable Stress
COLD_ALLOW
COLD_ALLOW
Hot Allowable Stress
HOT_ALLOW
HOT_ALLOW*
Cyclic Reduction Factor
CYC_RED_FACTOR
CYC_RED_FACTOR*
XML Tag Name
1075
External Interfaces
Eff
EFF
EFF
Sy (yield stress)
SY
SY
Hot Sy
HOT_SY
SU (minimum ultimate tensile

strength
SU
Hot SU
HOT_SU
FAC
FAC
FAC
PMax
PMAX
PMAX
Piping Code
PIPING_CODE
PIPING_CODE
Cycles for BW (butt-weld) fatigue

pair
BUTTWELDCYCLES
BUTTWELDCYCLES*
Stress for BW fatigue pair
BUTTWELDSTRESS
BUTTWELDSTRESS*
Cycles for FW (fillet-weld) fatigue

pair
FILLETWELDCYCLES
FILLETWELDCYCLES
*
Stress for FW fatigue pair
FILLETWELDSTRESS
FILLETWELDSTRESS
*
Appendix P - Operating Allowable

Reduction
APP_P_OPE_ALL_REDUC
TION
* These tags are child tags of CASE_NUM (can range from 1 through 9)
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.ALLOW_PTR = INPUT_ALLOWBLS.ALLOW_PTR
SIFs Tees Input Export Option

Export user specified SIF information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_SIFTEES
Microsoft Excel Section Name: SIF DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: SIF
Data Name
Column Name
SIF Pointer
SIF_PTR
SIF Number
SIF_NUM
XML Tag Name
SIF_NUM
1076
External Interfaces
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Node Number
NODE
NODE
Type
TYPE
TYPE
SIF In-Plane
SIF_IN
SIF_IN
SIF Out-Plane
SIF_OUT
SIF_OUT
SIF Torsion
SIF_TORSION
SIF_TORSION
SIF Axial
SIF_AXIAL
SIF_AXIAL
SIF Pressure
SIF_PRESSURE
SIF_PRESSURE
B31.3 2010 Stress

Index for in-plane, Iin
STRESSINDEX_Iin
STRESSINDEX_Ii
n
B31.3 2010 Stress

Index for out-plane,
Iout
STRESSINDEX_Iou STRESSINDEX_I
t
out
B31.3 2010 Stress

Index for torsion
stress, It
STRESSINDEX_It
STRESSINDEX_It
B31.3 2010 Stress

STRESSINDEX_Ia
Index for axial stress,
Ia
STRESSINDEX_I
a
B31.3 2010 Stress

Index for pressure,
Ipr
STRESSINDEX_Ipr
STRESSINDEX_I
pr
Circumferential Weld
WELD_d
WELD_D
Fillet
FILLET
FILLET
Pad Thickness
PAD_THK
PAD_THK
FTG Ro
FTG_RO
FTG_RO
Crotch
CROTCH
CROTCH
Weld ID
WELD_ID
WELD_ID
B1
B1
B1
B2
B2
B2
1077
External Interfaces
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.INT_PTR = INPUT_SIFTEES.SIF_PTR
WRC297 Nozzle Input Export Option

Export user specified WRC297 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297
Microsoft Excel Section Name: WRC297 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: WRC297_NOZZLE
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Nozzle Pointer
NOZ_PTR
Vessel Node Number
VESSEL_NODE
VESSEL_NODE
Nozzle Node Number
NOZZLE_NODE
NOZZLE_NODE
NOZ_OD
NOZ_OD
NOZ_WT
NOZ_WT
Vessel Outside Diameter
VES_OD
VES_OD
VES_WT
VES_WT
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness
VES_RPT
VES_RPT
Dist. to stiffeners or head
DIST_HEAD
DIST_HEAD
Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head
DIST_OPP_HEAD
DIST_OPP_HEAD
Vessel centerline direction vector X
VES_CENT_X
VES_CENT_X
Vessel centerline direction vector Y
VES_CENT_Y
VES_CENT_Y
Vessel centerline direction vector Z
VES_CENT_Z
VES_CENT_Z
Vessel Temperature
VES_TEMP
VES_TEMP
Vessel Material #
VES_MAT
VES_MAT
Material Name
MATERIAL_NAME
MATERIAL_NAME
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_WRC297.NOZ_PTR
1078
External Interfaces
API650 Nozzle Input Export Option

Export user specified API650 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_API650
Microsoft Excel Section Name: API650 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: API650_NOZZLE
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Nozzle Pointer
NOZ_PTR
Tank Node Number
TANK_NODE
TANK_NODE
Nozzle Node Number
NOZZLE_NODE
NOZZLE_NODE
NOZ_OD
NOZ_OD
NOZ_WT
NOZ_WT
Tank Outside Diameter
TANK_OD
TANK_OD
Tank Wall Thickness
TANK_WT
TANK_WT
Reinforcing
REINFORCE
REINFORCE
Nozzle height
NOZ_HEIGHT
NOZ_HEIGHT
Fluid height
FLUID_HEIGHT
FLUID_HEIGHT
Fluid specific gravity
FLUID_SG
FLUID_SG
Thermal expansion coefficient THERM_EXP_COEFF THERM_EXP_COEFF

Temperature change
DELTAT
DELTAT
Elastic modulus
EMOD
EMOD
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_API650.NOZ_PTR
1079
External Interfaces
BS5500 Nozzle Input Export Option

Export user specified BS5500 nozzle information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500
Microsoft Excel Section Name: BS5500 NOZZLE DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: BS5500_NOZZLE
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Nozzle Pointer
NOZ_PTR
Vessel Node Number
VESSEL_NODE
VESSEL_NODE
Nozzle Node Number
NOZZLE_NODE
NOZZLE_NODE
Vessel Type
VESSEL_TYPE
VESSEL_TYPE
NOZ_OD
NOZ_OD
Vessel Outside Diameter
VES_OD
VES_OD
VES_WT
VES_WT
Vessel Reinforcing Pad Thickness
VES_RPT
VES_RPT
Dist. to stiffeners or head
DIST_HEAD
DIST_HEAD
Dist. to opposite side stiffeners or head DIST_OPP_HEAD
DIST_OPP_HEAD
Vessel centerline direction vector X
VES_CENT_X
VES_CENT_X
Vessel centerline direction vector Y
VES_CENT_Y
VES_CENT_Y
Vessel centerline direction vector Z
VES_CENT_Z
VES_CENT_Z
Vessel Temperature
VES_TEMP
VES_TEMP
Vessel Material #
VES_MAT
VES_MAT
Material Name
MATERIAL_NAME
MATERIAL_NAME
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.NOZ_PTR = INPUT_NOZZLES_BS5500.NOZ_PTR
1080
External Interfaces
Hangers Input Export Option

Export user specified hanger information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_HANGERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name: HANGER DATA
XML Primary Tag Name: HANGER
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Hanger pointer
HANGER_PTR
Node number
NODE
NODE
Connecting node
CNODE
CNODE
Constant effort support load or

stiffness
CONST_EFF_LOAD
CONST_EFF_LOAD
Load variation
LOAD_VAR
LOAD_VAR
Rigid support displacement criteria
RIGID_SUP
RIGID_SUP
Available space for hanger
AVAIL_SPACE
AVAIL_SPACE
Theoretical cold load
COLD_LOAD
COLD_LOAD
Operating load
HOT_LOAD
HOT_LOAD
Maximum travel limit
MAX_TRAVEL
MAX_TRAVEL
Multiple load case option
MULTI_LC
MULTI_LC
Anchor to be freed #1
FREEANCHOR1
FREEANCHOR1
Anchor to be freed #2
FREEANCHOR2
FREEANCHOR2
Degree of freedom for #1
DOFTYPE1
DOFTYPE1
Degree of freedom for #2
DOFTYPE2
DOFTYPE2
Number of hangers
NUM_HGR
NUM_HGR
Hanger table
HGR_TABLE
HGR_TABLE
Short range springs
SHORT_RANGE
SHORT_RANGE
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.HGR_PTR = INPUT_HANGERS.HGR_PTR
1081
External Interfaces
Reducers Input Export Option

Export user specified reducer information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_REDUCERS
Microsoft Excel Section Name:
XML Primary Tag Name:
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Reducer pointer
RED_PTR
"To" node diameter
DIAMETER2
DIAMETERS2
"To" node thickeness
THICKNESS2
THICKNESS2
Reducer transition slope ALPHA
ALPHA
Reducer large end

transition radius
R1
R1
Reducer small end

transition radius
R2
R2
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.RED_PTR = INPUT_REDUCERS.RED_PTR
Flanges Input Export Option

Export user specified flange information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_FLANGES
Data Name
Column Name
Flange Pointer
FLANGE_PTR
Flange Location
FLANGE_LOCATION
FLANGE_LOCATION
Flange Evaluation
Method
METHOD
METHOD
Flange Class and

Material Grade
CLASS_GRADE
CLASS_GRADE
Gasket Diameter
GASKET_DIAMETER
GASKET_DIAMETER
Bold Circle Diameter
BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA
BOLT_CIRCLE_DIA
XML Tag Name
1082
External Interfaces
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Bold Area
BOLT_AREA
BOLT_AREA
Flange Yield Stress Cold (Ambient)

Temperature
SY_COLD
SY_COLD
Flange Yield Stress,

Operating Temperature
1
SY1
SY1

2
SY2
SY2

3
SY3
SY3

4
SY4
SY4

5
SY5
SY5

6
SY6
SY6

7
SY7
SY7

8
SY8
SY8

9
SY9
SY9
Flange Temperature
TEMPERATURE1 through
TEMPERATURE24
TEMPERATURE1
through
TEMPERATURE24
Flange Pressure
PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24
PRESSURE1 through
PRESSURE24
1083
External Interfaces
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.FLG_PTR = INPUT_FLANGES.FLG_PTR
Title Input Export Option

Export user specified title information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_TITLE
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
Title
TITLE
TITLE
Equipment Input Export Options

Export user specified equipment information defined in the input file.
Microsoft Access Table Name: INPUT_EQUIPMENT
Data Name
Column Name
Equipment Pointer
EQP_PTR
XML Tag Name
NODE1
NODE1
FX1
FX1
FY1
FY1
FZ1
FZ1
MX1
MX1
MY1
MY1
MZ1
MZ1
COSX1
COSX1
COSY1
COSY1
COSZ1
COSZ1
RATING1
RATING1
1084
External Interfaces
Data Name
Column Name
XML Tag Name
METHOD1
METHOD1
NODE2
NODE2
FX2
FX2
FY2
FY2
FZ2
FZ2
MX2
MX2
MY2
MY2
MZ2
MZ2
COSX2
COSX2
COSY2
COSY2
COSZ2
COSZ2
RATING2
RATING2
METHOD2
METHOD2
INPUT_BASIC_ELEMENT_DATA.EQP_PTR = INPUT_EQUIPMENT.EQP_PTR
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog Box

Select the output reports to export.
Static Load Cases Output Report Options

Displays the list of load cases that are available for exporting. The load cases might not contain
data for all reports. The generation of data for all reports is controlled by Load Cases Tab (Static
Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog Box) (on page 545). If Hanger Reports is selected, the load
case selection is not effective because Hanger reports are not tied to any particular load case.
1085
External Interfaces
Displacement Reports Output Report Option

Exports the displacement report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_DISPLACEMENTS. In XML, these data values appear under the
tag DISPLACEMENT_REPORT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Node
NODE
NODE
Load Case Number LCASE_NUM

Load Case
CASE
LOADCASE
Translation X
DX
DX
Translation Y
DY
DY
Translation Z
DZ
DZ
Translation Units
DUNITS
UNITS
Rotation X
RX
RX
Rotation Y
RY
RY
Rotation Z
RZ
RZ
Rotation Units
RUNITS
UNITS
Restraint Reports Output Report Option

Exports the restraint report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored
in the table OUTPUT_RESTRAINTS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
RESTRAINT_REPORT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Node
NODE
NODE
Node Name
NODE_NAME
Load Case Number LCASE_NUM

Load Case
CASE
LOADCASE
Force X
FX
FX
1086
External Interfaces
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Force Y
FY
FY
Force Z
FZ
FZ
Resultant Force
RESULTANTF
RESULTANT
Force Units
FUNITS
UNITS
Moment X
MX
MX
Moment Y
MY
MY
Moment Z
MZ
MZ
Resultant Moment
RESULTANTM
RESULTANT
Moment Units
MUNITS
UNITS
Restraint Type
TYPE
TYPE
Global Force Reports Output Report Option

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_GLOBAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag GLOBAL_FORCE_REPORT.
Data Name
Load Case Number
LCASE_NUM
Load Case
CASE
LOADCASE
From Node
FROM_NODE
FROM_NODE
To Node
TO_NODE
TO_NODE
Axial Force From Node
AXIAL_FORCEF
AXIAL_FORCE\FROM
Shear Force From Node
SHEAR_FORCEF
SHEAR_FORCE\FROM
Bending Moment From Node
BENDING_MOMENTF
BENDING_MOMENT\FROM
Torsion Moment From Node
TORSION_MOMENTF
TORSION_MOMENT\FROM
Axial Force To Node
AXIAL_FORCET
AXIAL_FORCE\TO
1087
External Interfaces
Data Name
Shear Force To Node
SHEAR_FORCET
SHEAR_FORCE\TO
Bending Moment To Node
BENDING_MOMENTT
BENDING_MOMENT\TO
Torsion Moment To Node
TORSION_MOMENTT
TORSION_MOMENT\TO
Force X From Node
FXF
FORCES\FROM\FX
Force Y From Node
FYF
FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force Z From Node
FZF
FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force X To Node
FXT
FORCES\TO\FX
Force Y To Node
FYT
FORCES\TO\FY
Force Z To Node
FZT
FORCES\TO\FZ
Force Units
FUNITS
UNITS\FORCE
Moment X From Node
MXF
MOMENTS\FROM\FX
Moment Y From Node
MYF
MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment Z From Node
MZF
MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment X To Node
MXT
MOMENTS\TO\FX
Moment Y To Node
MYT
MOMENTS\TO\FY
Moment Z To Node
MZT
MOMENTS\TO\FZ
Moment Units
MUNITS
UNITS\MOMENT
1088
External Interfaces
Local Force Report Output Report Option

Exports the global force report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is
stored in the table OUTPUT_LOCAL_ELEMENT_FORCES. In XML, these data values appear
under the tag LOCAL_FORCE_REPORT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
Load Case Number
LCASE_NUM
Load Case
CASE
LOADCASE
From Node
FROM_NODE
FROM_NODE
To Node
TO_NODE
TO_NODE
Force X From Node
FXF
FORCES\FROM\FX
Force Y From Node
FYF
FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force Z From Node
FZF
FORCES\FROM\FZ
Force X To Node
FXT
FORCES\TO\FX
Force Y To Node
FYT
FORCES\TO\FY
Force Z To Node
FZT
FORCES\TO\FZ
Force Units
FUNITS
UNITS\FORCE
Moment X From Node
MXF
MOMENTS\FROM\FX
Moment Y From Node
MYF
MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment Z From Node
MZF
MOMENTS\FROM\FZ
Moment X To Node
MXT
MOMENTS\TO\FX
Moment Y To Node
MYT
MOMENTS\TO\FY
Moment Z To Node
MZT
MOMENTS\TO\FZ
Moment Units
MUNITS
UNITS\MOMENT
XML Tag Name
1089
External Interfaces
Stress Reports Output Report Option

Exports the stress report for the selected load cases. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in
the table OUTPUT_STRESSES. In XML, these data values appear under the tag
STRESS_REPORT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
From Node
FROM_NODE
FROM_NODE
To Node
TO_NODE
TO_NODE
Load Case Number
LCASE_NUM
Load Case
CASE
Piping Code
PIPING_CODE
Code Check Status
CHECK_STATUS
Axial Stress From Node
AXIAL_STRESSF
AXIAL_STRESS\FROM
Bending Stress From Node BENDING_STRESSF
BENDING_STRESS\FROM
Torsion Stress From Node
TORSION_STRESSF
TORSION_STRESS\FROM
Axial Stress To Node
AXIAL_STRESST
AXIAL_STRESS\TO
Bending Stress To Node
BENDING_STRESST
BENDING_STRESS\TO
Torsion Stress To Node
TORSION_STRESST
TORSION_STRESS\TO
Hoop Stress From Node
HOOP_STRESSF
HOOP_STRESS\FROM
Torsion Stress To Node
TORSION_STRESST
TORSION_STRESS\TO
Code Stress From Node
CODE_STRESSF
CODE_STRESS\FROM
Code Stress To Node
CODE_STRESST
CODE_STRESS\TO
Allowable Stress From

Node
ALLOW_STRESSF
ALLOWABLE_STRESS\FROM
Allowable Stress To Node
ALLOW_STRESST
ALLOWABLE_STRESS\TO
SIF In
SIFINF
SIF_IN_PLANE\FROM
SIF In
SIFINT
SIF_IN_PLANE\TO
1090
External Interfaces
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
SIF Out
SIFOUTF
SIF_OUT_PLANE\FROM
SIF Out
SIFOUTT
SIF_OUT_PLANE\TO
Max 3D Stress Intensity
3DMAXF
MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\FRO
M
Max 3D Stress Intensity
3DMAXT
MAX_STRESS_INTENSITY\TO
Percent Stress From
PRCT_STRF
PERCENTAGE\FROM
Percent Stress To
PRCT_STRT
PERCENTAGE\TO
Hanger Reports Output Report Option

Exports the hanger report. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_HANGERS. In XML, these data values appear under the tag HANGER_REPORT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Number Required
NUMREQ
HANGER\NUMREQUIRE
D
Hanger Node
NODE
HANGER\NODE
Figure
FIGNUM
HANGER\FIGURE
Size
SIZE
HANGER\SIZE
Vertical Movement
VERT_MOVEMENT
HANGER\VERT_MOVEM
ENT
Hot Load
HOT_LOAD
HANGER\HOT_LOAD
Theoretical Installed Load TH_INSTALL_LOAD
HANGER\TH_INSTALL_L
OAD
Actual Installed Load
AC_INSTALL_LOAD
HANGER\AC_INSTALL_L
OAD
Spring Rate
SPRING_RATE
HANGER\SPRING_RATE
Horizontal Movement
HOR_MOVEMENT
HANGER\HOR_MOVEME
NT
1091
External Interfaces
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
Load Variation
LOAD_VARIATION
HANGER\LOAD_VARIATI
ON
Manufacturer
MANUF
HANGER\MANUFACTUR
ER
Load Units
LOAD_UNITS
HANGER\LOAD_UNITS
Movement Units
MOVEMENT_UNITS
HANGER\MOVEMENT_U
NITS
Spring Units
SPRING_UNITS
HANGER\SPRING_UNITS
Axial Horizontal
Movement
HOR_MOVEMENT_AXIAL
Lateral Horizontal
Movement
HOR_MOVEMENT_LATE
RAL
Equipment Reports Output Report Option

Exports the equipment reports. In Microsoft Access, this data is stored in the table
OUTPUT_EQUIPMENT. In XML, these data values appear under the tag EQUIPMENT.
Data Name
Access Column Name
XML Tag Name
LCASE_NUM
LCASE_NUM
CASE
CASE
NODE
NODE
METHOD
METHOD
FX_LIMIT
FX_LIMIT
FY_LIMIT
FY_LIMIT
FZ_LIMIT
FZ_LIMIT
MX_LIMIT
MX_LIMIT
MY_LIMIT
MY_LIMIT
MZ_LIMIT
MZ_LIMIT
1092
External Interfaces
FRES_LIMIT
FRES_LIMIT
MRES_LIMIT
MRES_LIMIT
PASSFAIL
PASSFAIL
FX
FX
FY
FY
FZ
FZ
MX
MX
MY
MY
MZ
MZ
FRES
FRES
MRES
MRES
FX_PER
FX_PER
FY_PER
FY_PER
FZ_PER
FZ_PER
MX_PER
MX_PER
MY_PER
MY_PER
MZ_PER
MZ_PER
FRES_PER
FRES_PER
MRES_PER
MRES_PER
FUNITS
FUNITS
MUNITS
MUNITS
1093
External Interfaces
AFT IMPULSE
Generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing response spectra.
Response spectra input files contain dynamic pipe forces. These time history loads are
determined from pressure transient loading by the AFT Impulse software. CAESAR II reads the
output file generated by AFT Impulse, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for the dynamic
analysis in CAESAR II.
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > AFT IMPULSE from the Main menu.
The AFT IMPULSE dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the AFT IMPULSE data:
AFT IMPULSE output file name. (This file is generated by AFT IMPULSE with extension
.FRC.)
Names of AFT IMPULSE pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the AFT IMPULSE pipes
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve
Frequency cut-off value
The data transfer begins. During the computation, you can monitor the process status.
3. Click Cancel at any time to stop the computation.
The resulting force spectrum files (DLF curves) are written to the CAESAR II data directory
during the computation phase of the transfer.
The names of generated force spectrum files have the following format:
P*.DLF where "*" is your CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent AFT IMPULSE pipe name.
The AFT IMPULSE interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
spectrum definition, force sets, load cases, and combination load cases. The resulting input
file is ready to be run, or you can further modify it.
When all computations have completed, the CAESAR II Main menu displays.
1094
External Interfaces
PIPENET
determined from pressure transient loading by the Sunrise System's PIPENET package. The
PIPENET interface reads the output file generated by PIPENET, extracts the information
needed, and generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then
be used for the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
PIPENET performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a particular
liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure transient of
this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The CAESAR II PIPENET Transfer
Interface bridges the gap between PIPENET and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by PIPENET, the CAESAR II PIPENET
Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the PIPENET generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear, one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response, such as dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection that would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load, which occurs at any time during the period of interest, is taken.
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load.
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PIPENET from the Main menu.
The PIPENET dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the PIPENET data:
PIPENET output file name. (This file is generated by Sunrise System's PIPENET
package with extension .FRC.)
Names of PIPENET pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the PIPENET pipes
1095
External Interfaces
the equivalent PIPENET pipe name.
The PIPENET interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
LIQT
Reads the output file generated by LIQT, extracts the information needed, and generates the
response spectra. The LIQT interface generates CAESAR II dynamic input data files containing
response spectra for input files. The spectra input files contain the dynamic pipe forces. These
time history loads are determined by the Stoner Associates, Inc. (SAI) LIQT package from
pressure transient loading. Then, the generated response spectrum files can be used for the
Technical Discussion of LIQT Interface

Normal piping system operating procedures such as pump start-up and shutdown, valve
closure, and unexpected events such as power failure, may produce unsteady pressure-flow
conditions. A piping system with rapid pressure-flow variations must be carefully designed to
prevent devastating results.
The SAI LIQT package performs the analysis and simulation of the unsteady flow situations for a
particular liquid piping system, and generates the piping load time histories for the pressure
transient of this particular liquid piping system.
In the dynamic analysis module of CAESAR II, a response spectrum can be generated from the
input of time history pulse. However, there are typically too many data points from a time history
analysis for you to manually input the data into CAESAR II. The LIQT interface bridges the gap
between the SAI LIQT package and the CAESAR II dynamic analysis module.
After the time history loads have been generated by the SAI LIQT package, the CAESAR II
LIQT Interface extracts the dynamic pipe forces from the LIQT generated file, and computes the
response spectrum. Afterward, the response spectrum can be used as the DLF curve for the
The response spectrum is a plot giving the maximum response of all possible linear one-degree
of freedom systems because of a given input, which is a force. The abscissa of the spectrum is
the frequency axis, and the ordinate is the maximum response such as the dynamic load factor
(DLF). The DLF is the ratio of the dynamic deflection at any time to the deflection which would
have resulted from the static application of the load. In cases where the applied load is not
constant, the maximum load that occurs at any time during the period of interest is taken.
1096
External Interfaces
The dynamic load factor is non-dimensional and independent of the magnitude of load. The
following examples illustrate the characteristics of the DLF curve in terms of the magnitude and
the duration of the load.
How to Use the LIQT Interface

When you reach the LIQT interface, enter the following input to process the LIQT data:
LIQT output file name. (This file is generated by SAIs LIQT package with extension .FRC)
Names of LIQT nodes identifying pipes for which response spectra are to be generated.
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the LIQT pipes.
Maximum number of points on each generated response spectrum curve.
Frequency cut-off value.
After the proper input data is acquired, the LIQT interface module starts the data transfer. During
the computation, you can monitor the process status. Click Cancel at any time to stop the
computation.
during the computation phase of the software. The names of generated force spectrum files
have the following format:
L*.DLF where "*" is the user CAESAR II node number in the piping model that corresponds to
the equivalent LIQT pipe name.
When all computations have completed, you are returned to the CAESAR II Main menu.
1097
External Interfaces
Example 1
Find the DLF response spectrum of the trapezoidal pulse loads shown in the following figure.
1098
External Interfaces
Solution: The response spectra generated from all four pulse loads are identical, as displayed
below.
The result shows that the DLF curve is independent of the magnitude of the pulse load.
1099
External Interfaces
Example 2
Find the response spectrum of the following trapezoidal pulse loads.
1100
External Interfaces
1101
External Interfaces
Solution: The plotted results displayed below shows that the longer the duration of the force,
the higher the DLF. The triangular pulse, which has a duration of zero, generates the lowest
DLF curve.
Pipeplus
Reads a Pipeplus neutral file (.pnf suffix), and translates it into a CAESAR II model.
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface

1. Click Tools > Eternal Interfaces > Pipeplus.
1102
External Interfaces
The Pipeplus Interface dialog box displays.
2. Enter the name of the target neutral file.

If needed, use the Browse button to locate the neutral file on your hard disk.
3. Enter the CAESAR II Starting Node Number.
The default value is 10.
4. Enter the CAESAR II Node Number Increment.
The default value is 10.
5. Select the Model Orientation by clicking either the Y axis or Z axis radio button.
CAESAR II assumes the units of the data in the neutral file match the units
designated in the CAESAR II configuration file.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
6. Click OK to begain translation of the data.
The CAESAR II input file is created in the same directory as the Pipeplus neutral file.
7. Review the Pipeplus Interface dialog box with the updated information:
Log File Warnings: Number of warnings/problems encountered.
Current Units File: Units file that was used for translation and stored in the CAESAR II
input file.
1103
External Interfaces
The name and location of the CAESAR II input file.
The log file name is the name of the neutral file with .LOG suffix. This file contains general
information about the translation process, including:
The number of lines in the neutral file
The number of CAESAR II elements that were created
Any warning or error messages
Node Association table that relates the Pipeplus node names to the corresponding
CAESAR II node numbers.
8. Compare the CAESAR II input model with the Pipeplus model.
1104
External Interfaces
a. View the CAESAR II model in the Classic Piping Input dialog box or in the 3D Graphics
pane.
b. View the Pipeplus view of this same model in the Pipeplus software.
1105
External Interfaces
An example of the Pipeplus model is shown below.
FlowMaster
determined from pressure transient loading by the FlowMaster package. The FlowMaster
interface reads the output file generated by FlowMaster, extracts the information needed, and
generates the response spectra. The generated response spectrum files can then be used for
the dynamic analysis in CAESAR II.
1106
External Interfaces
How to Use The Flowmaster Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Flowmaster from the Main menu.
The Flowmaster dialog box displays.
2. Enter the following inputs to process the Flowmaster data:
Flowmaster output file name. (This file is generated by Flowmaster with extension
.FRC.)
Names of Flowmaster pipes for which response spectra are to be generated
Corresponding CAESAR II node numbers for the Flowmaster pipes
the equivalent Flowmaster pipe name.
The Flowmaster interface creates a complete CAESAR II Dynamic Input file including
Intergraph CADWorx Plant

Provides a bi-directional data transfer link to CAESAR II. Intergraph CADWorx Plant is an
AutoCAD-based design/drafting product that allows you to create models in ortho, iso, 2D, or 3D
modes. You can transfer these models into CAESAR II; likewise, models built in CAESAR II can
be sent into Intergraph CADWorx Plant. Modifications made in either product are retained for
future transfers.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant also allows CAESAR II output data to be imported and placed on the
drawing. This provides the ability to generate stress and restraint isometrics.
Because the external interface operates seamlessly, no action is required in CAESAR II.
Intergraph CADWorx Plant reads CAESAR II _A (input) and _P (output) files without
modification, and creates CAESAR II _A files directly. The Intergraph CADWorx Plant
command that appears on the Tools menu serves only as a reminder that the external interface
exists. For more information about importing and exporting data between these two products,
refer to documentation delivered with lntergraph CADWorx Plant.
1107
External Interfaces
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF

Processes a Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs generated from Intergraph
SmartPlant 3D, and then generates a CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion
information.
Both the Intergraph Smart 3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External
Interfaces menu operate the same.
See PCF (see "Import PCF" on page 1142) for detailed information about how this command
works.
Intergraph PDS
Transfers piping system geometry from an Intergraph neutral file to a standard CAESAR II _A
binary input file. The geometry data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses,
connectivities, and node numbers. All nodal specific quantities, such as loads, displacements,
and so forth, must be manually added to the CAESAR II input file.
There are three basic steps necessary to generate a CAESAR II input file from an Intergraph
neutral file:
1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph PDS to create an Intergraph neutral file.
1108
External Interfaces
2. Transfer this ASCII file to the CAESAR folder.
You can create and transfer as many Intergraph neutral files as necessary. During
data transfer, the interface continues to prompt you for neutral file names until you cancel
the session.
3. Verify the proper units file is active in the folder in which the neutral file is located. This is
necessary for the proper conversion of the data.
File Name
Specifies the full path and filename of the neutral file. When you open the software, this field
displays the current data path. You can manually add a file name to the end of this string, or
click Browse to search for a neutral file.
Browse
Opens a standard file selection dialog box from which you can search for the appropriate neutral
file. You can use the options at the bottom of the dialog box to switch between the neutral file
suffix types, such as .N or .NEU.
Minimum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the minimum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Maximum Anchor Node

Identifies the node number interpreted as the maximum node number for a terminal point in the
model. Only change the default value if your Intergraph system has been set up with a different
anchor node range.
Start Node
Indicates the starting node number in the resulting CAESAR II model. By default, the entire
model is renumbered using this value as the starting point. To disable renumbering, you must
set this option and Increment (on page 331) to zero.
Increment
Defines the value used as a node number increment. This value is used during the renumbering
of the model. To disable renumbering, you must set this option and Start Node (on page 331) to
zero.
1109
External Interfaces
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is Less Than

Defines the minimum allowed pipe size. Any elements less than this minimum diameter are
ignored. This option is used to keep drain lines and taps out of the stress model.
Remove HA Elements
Controls whether HA elements are removed. Typically, HA (hanger-support direction) elements
should be removed. The support is placed on the pipe where the HA element joins it. Clear this
check box to keep HA elements in the stress model.
Force Consistent Bend Materials

Allows the interface to ensure that all bend elements, incoming and outgoing, have the same
material name and properties. Often, bends are given a material specification that is different
from that of the attached piping, even though the properties are the same. Select this option to
change the material information on the bend elements to that of the attached piping.
Include Additional Bend Nodes

Allows the interface to add a mid-point node and a near-point node on bends. Clear this box to
cause bends to have only the far-point node.
Enable Advanced Element Sort

Allows a second, more thorough sorting of the elements. This sort considers the length of the
runs, the diameter, and the elevation in determining where to begin the node numbering
sequence. By default, this option is turned on. Turning off this option uses only the first sort
where the elements are sorted starting with the largest (diameter) anchor nodes and proceeds
to the smallest.
Model TEES as 3 Elements

Instructs the software to treat tees as three elements, instead of condensing them down to a
point. In either case, the SIF is applied at the tee node. Using three elements allows pipe
properties of the tee to differ from those of the attached piping.
Model Rotation
90-degrees.
1110
External Interfaces
Neutral File Weight Units

Defines the value for the neutral file weight units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the weight values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because the neutral
file does not indicate the units for the weight values. The value you select should match the
corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.
Neutral File Insulation Units

Specifies the value for the neutral file insulation units. This value allows the software to properly
interpret the insulation thickness values contained in the neutral file. This is necessary because
the neutral file does not indicate the units for insulation thickness values. The value you select
should match the corresponding value in the active CAESAR II units file.
Data Modification and Details

After the Intergraph PDS data transfer is complete, you can open the CAESAR II input files. You
must make the following modifications and additions:
Specification of material properties. Material 1 is assumed, unless a material mapping file is

provided.
Specification of temperatures and pressures. The temperature/pressure pairs are assigned

to T1, T2, T3 and P1, and P2 in order.
Specification of intersection types. Unreinforced is assumed.
Specification of restraints details. By default, only anchors and double acting supports are
detected by the interface. If the exact type of restraint is to be transferred, PDS must be
configured to generate the CAESAR II restraint type indicators. These restraint type
indicators are shown in the Additional Notes section of the complete Neutral File interface,
discussed later in this chapter. These restraint type values must be placed in HA Field 7 of
the neutral file.
The fluid density can be transferred into CAESAR II also. Place this density value in Field 7
of the neutral file. The density value should be defined according to the density unit used in
the CAESAR II units file, not in terms of specific gravity.
Specification of other loads. The weight of rigid elements can be transferred into CAESAR II
for 3W, 4W, AV, RB, and VA type elements. For the weight of these elements to transfer, the
weight value must be placed in Field 8.
Insulation thickness and density can also be transferred into CAESAR II. The thickness and
density values should be placed in Fields 9 and 10, respectively.
In addition, review the log file generated by the interface for any anomalies. The interface sorts
the elements and then ensures that diameters and wall thicknesses are defined for each
element. Depending on how disorganized the Intergraph neutral file is, some assumptions made
by the interface may not be correct and may require you to modify the resulting CAESAR II input
file.
If the interface encounters any major problems, the process aborts and no CAESAR II input is
generated. In these instances, contact Intergraph CAS Support for assistance.
If necessary, you can define a material mapping file to relate the material designations in the
Intergraph neutral file to the standard CAESAR II materials. You must name this file
1111
External Interfaces
PDS_MAT.MAP, and place it beneath the application's \SYSTEM subfolder. This mapping file
contains two fields of data per line. Field 1 is 5 characters wide, and contains the CAESAR II
material number that corresponds to the PDS material name. Field 2 is held in columns 7
through 21 and contains the PDS material name as it appears in the neutral file. Neither of these
values should contain a decimal point.
Example Neutral File from PDS

The following is an example neutral file from PDS.
! Model Design file(s) : ZG2:[006,006]MDLTEST.DGN
!
: ZG2:[006,006]EQPTEST.DGN
! Line name(s)
: P-1002
! Date
: 26-JUL-89 13:58:12
DRAW ,P-1002,P-1002
LOAD, 202000E, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000E, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000E,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 202000F, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 202000F, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 202000F,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001A, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001A, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001A,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 102001D, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 102001D, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 102001D,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020020, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020020, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020020,3,6,5,3
LOAD, 1020023, 1, 3, 100.00, 300.00,
0.00,
500.00
LOAD, 1020023, 4, 6, 200.00, 400.00,
0.00,
0.00
LSET, 1020023,3,6,5,3
CODE,CODE23,ASME2,1982,D
TF, 3020009,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 25, 24
PROP,TF, 3020009, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
0.00,
300.00,
0.00,
0.00,
1112
External Interfaces
PROP,TF, 3020009, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TF, 3020009, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,TF, 3020009, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001F
RB, 302000B,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 901, 26
PROP,RB, 302000B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,RB, 302000B, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000E
PI, 5020013,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 26, 25
PROP,PI, 5020013, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020013, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
PROP,PI, 5020013, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000E
RB, 302000A,16"STDCB30255,,CODE23, 902, 12
PROP,RB, 302000A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,RB, 302000A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,RB, 302000A, 4,0.,0,BW,0.,, 202000F
TF, 302000C,16"x10"STDCB390155,,CODE23, 15, 14
PROP,TF, 302000C, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TF, 302000C, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TF, 302000C, 3,16.,16,BE,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,TF, 302000C, 4,10.,10.75,BE,0.365,, 102001A
PI, 5020014,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 17, 15
PROP,PI, 5020014, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020014, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,PI, 5020014, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
FL, 3020042,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 27, 13
PROP,FL, 3020042, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020042, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001A
PROP,FL, 3020042, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001A
PI, 5020015,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 14, 13
PROP,PI, 5020015, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020015, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
PROP,PI, 5020015, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001A
TE, 3020008,16"STDCB30245,,CODE23, 22, 17, 20, 951
PROP,TE, 3020008, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,TE, 3020008, 2,0,0.0,90
PROP,TE, 3020008, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,TE, 3020008, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 102001D
PROP,TE, 3020008, 5,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
FL, 3020041,10"STDCB20015,,CODE23, 28, 23
PROP,FL, 3020041, 1,A105,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,FL, 3020041, 3,10.,16,WN,0.,CL150, 102001F
PROP,FL, 3020041, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,CL150, 102001F
PI, 5020012,10"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 23, 24
PROP,PI, 5020012, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020012, 3,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
PROP,PI, 5020012, 4,10.,10.75,BW,0.365,, 102001F
EL, 3020040,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 903,
1, 952
PROP,EL, 3020040, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020040, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020040, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020023,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 18, 16, 953
PROP,EL, 3020023, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
1113
External Interfaces
PROP,EL, 3020023, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020023, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020023, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 3020024,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 16, 10, 954
PROP,EL, 3020024, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 3020024, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 3020024, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302002A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 11,
9, 955
PROP,EL, 302002A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302002A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302002B,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23,
8,
6, 956
PROP,EL, 302002B, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302002B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302002B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003C,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23,
5,
3, 957
PROP,EL, 302003C, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003D,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23,
4,
2, 958
PROP,EL, 302003D, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003D, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003D, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020016,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 19, 18
PROP,PI, 5020016, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020016, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020016, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020018,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 10, 11
PROP,PI, 5020018, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020018, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020018, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5020019,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
9,
8
PROP,PI, 5020019, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5020019, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 5020019, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001A,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
6,
7
PROP,PI, 502001A, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001B,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
3,
4
PROP,PI, 502001B, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001B, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001B, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502001C,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23,
2,
1
PROP,PI, 502001C, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502001C, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502001C, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302003E,16"STDCB30235,,CODE23,
5,
7, 959
1114
External Interfaces
PROP,EL, 302003E, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 2,24.1421,45,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302003E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302003E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
EL, 302005A,16"STDCB30215,,CODE23, 19, 21, 960
PROP,EL, 302005A, 1,A234-WPB,0,0,0,0,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 2,24,90,0,0.
PROP,EL, 302005A, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,EL, 302005A, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 502005E,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 21, 20
PROP,PI, 502005E, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 502005E, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PROP,PI, 502005E, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020023
PI, 5027531,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 25, 22
PROP,PI, 5027531, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027531, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PROP,PI, 5027531, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 1020020
PI, 5027532,16"STDCB10075,,CODE23, 15, 12
PROP,PI, 5027532, 1,API-5L-B,0.0000E+00,0.0000E+00,,0,,0.0000E+00
PROP,PI, 5027532, 3,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
PROP,PI, 5027532, 4,16.,16,BW,0.375,, 202000F
LNOD, 27,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
LNOD, 28,RE, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0, 1.0
NODE,
1, 12024.00, 12000.00,
3011.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
2, 12044.50, 12000.00,
3011.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
3, 12068.50, 12000.00,
2470.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
4, 12068.50, 12000.00,
2987.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
5, 12075.57, 12000.00,
2452.93, 2,
0.00
NODE,
6, 12082.64, 12000.00,
1764.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
7, 12082.64, 12000.00,
2435.86, 2,
0.00
NODE,
8, 12106.64, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
9, 12168.00, 12000.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
10, 12192.00, 11815.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
11, 12192.00, 11976.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
12, 12198.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
13, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1594.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
14, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1632.94, 2,
0.00
NODE,
15, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
16, 12216.00, 11791.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
17, 12228.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
18, 12240.00, 11815.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
19, 12240.00, 11887.00,
1740.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
20, 12240.00, 11911.00,
1656.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
21, 12240.00, 11911.00,
1716.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
22, 12252.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
23, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1594.12, 2,
0.00
NODE,
24, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1632.94, 2,
0.00
NODE,
25, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
26, 12282.00, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE,
27, 12210.00, 11911.00,
1590.05, 2,
0.00
NODE,
28, 12270.00, 11911.00,
1590.05, 2,
0.00
NODE, 901, 12285.50, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
NODE, 902, 12194.50, 11911.00,
1644.00, 2,
0.00
1115
External Interfaces
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
NODE,
903,
904,
905,
951,
952,
953,
954,
955,
956,
957,
958,
959,
960,
12000.00,
12210.00,
12270.00,
12240.00,
12000.00,
12240.00,
12192.00,
12192.00,
12082.64,
12068.50,
12068.50,
12082.64,
12240.00,
12000.00,
11911.00,
11911.00,
11911.00,
12000.00,
11791.00,
11791.00,
12000.00,
12000.00,
12000.00,
12000.00,
12000.00,
11911.00,
2987.12,
1577.18,
1577.18,
1644.00,
3011.12,
1740.00,
1740.00,
1740.00,
1740.00,
2460.00,
3011.12,
2445.86,
1740.00,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
2,
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
0.00
The .LOG file produced by the CAESAR II translator is shown below, followed
by a plot of the job from the CAESAR II input module.
*** CAESAR II / Intergraph Geometry Translator ***
INTERGRAPH DATA AS READ IN FOR FILE: P-1002.NEU
Maximum Temperature and Pressure encountered:
300.0
Looking for node:
901
Have sorted element:
1, its location pointer is:
2
Number of "resume" nodes is:
0
Element type is: 10
Looking for node:
26
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
25
0
Element type is: 14
Looking for node:
24
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
23
0
Element type is: 7
Looking for node:
11
10
28
Looking for node:

902
0
Element type is: 10
Looking for node:
12
500.0
1116
External Interfaces
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
15
0
Element type is: 14
Looking for node:
14
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
13
Have sorted element: 10, its location pointer is:
0
Element type is: 7
Looking for node:
27
Looking for node:
903
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
1
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
2
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
4
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
3
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
5
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
7
0
Element type is: 9
29
12
24
18
23
17
25
22
1117
External Interfaces
Looking for node:
6
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
8
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
9
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
11
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
10
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
16
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
18
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
19
0
Element type is: 5
Looking for node:
21
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
20
0
Element type is: 13
Looking for node:
22
16
21
15
20
14
13
19
26
27
28
1118
External Interfaces
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
25
Looking for node:

17
0
Element type is: 9
Looking for node:
15
Intergraph Data After Element Sort
1119
External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross Modifications
1120
External Interfaces
(End nodes replaced with center point, and TEE/CROSS element removed. Modifications also
performed on 3 & 4 way valves.)
Intergraph Data After Valve Modifications
(Flange lengths added to valve lengths.)

** BEND MODIFICATION START **
INCOMING ELEMENT: 11 NODES:
1
BEND ELEMENT
: 11 NODES:
903
EXITING ELEMENT : 12 NODES:
1
CURRENT COORDINTES FOR ELEMENT: 11
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12024.00
NODE:
903 X, Y, Z =
12000.00
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12024.00
NODE:
2 X, Y, Z =
12044.50
COMPUTED TANGENT INTERSECTION POINT
903
1
2
3011.12 -12000.00
2987.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
1121
External Interfaces
NODE:
1 X, Y, Z =
12000.00
4
BEND ELEMENT
: 13 NODES:
2
4
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
2 X, Y, Z =
12044.50
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
3 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
4 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
5
BEND ELEMENT
: 15 NODES:
3
5
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12075.57
NODE:
3 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12075.57
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
7
BEND ELEMENT
: 16 NODES:
5
7
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
5 X, Y, Z =
12068.50
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
6 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
7 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
8
BEND ELEMENT
: 18 NODES:
6
8
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12106.64
NODE:
6 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12106.64
NODE:
9 X, Y, Z =
12168.00
NODE:
8 X, Y, Z =
12082.64
11
BEND ELEMENT
: 20 NODES:
9
11
3011.12 -12000.00
2
4
3
2987.12 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
2987.12 -12000.00
2470.00 -12000.00
3011.12 -12000.00
3
5
7
2452.93 -12000.00
2470.00 -12000.00
2452.93 -12000.00
2435.86 -12000.00
2460.00 -12000.00
5
7
6
2435.86 -12000.00
2460.00 -12000.00
2435.86 -12000.00
1764.00 -12000.00
2445.86 -12000.00
6
8
9
1740.00 -12000.00
1764.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -12000.00
9
11
10
1122
External Interfaces
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
9 X, Y, Z =
12168.00
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
10 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
11 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
16
BEND ELEMENT
: 22 NODES:
10
16
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12216.00
NODE:
10 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12216.00
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
18
BEND ELEMENT
: 23 NODES:
16
18
CURRENT COORDINATES FOR ELEMENT: 23
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
16 X, Y, Z =
12192.00
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
19 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
18 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
21
BEND ELEMENT
: 25 NODES:
19
21
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
19 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
951 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
NODE:
21 X, Y, Z =
12240.00
1740.00 -11976.00
1740.00 -12000.00
1740.00 -11976.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -12000.00
10
16
18
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11791.00
16
18
19
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11791.00
1740.00 -11815.00
1740.00 -11887.00
1740.00 -11791.00
19
21
951
1716.00 -11911.00
1740.00 -11887.00
1716.00 -11911.00
1644.00 -11911.00
1740.00 -11911.00
1123
External Interfaces
Intergraph Data After Bend Modifications
1124
External Interfaces
(Far Weld Line Nodal coordinates changed to Tangent Intersection Point coordinates)
DATA FOR PROPERTY ARRAY WITH # ENTRIES = 5
LOCATIONS 1-11
LOCATIONS 1, 12-20
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 1
*** CAESAR II INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 2
1125
External Interfaces
1126
External Interfaces
1127
External Interfaces
1128
External Interfaces
The CAESAR II job file name is P-1002_A Y

Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
28 elements
9 Bends
2 Rigids
2 Restraints
1129
External Interfaces
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.
CADPIPE
Provides a one-way transfer of the geometry data from CADPIPE to CAESAR II. The geometry
data consists of pipe lengths, diameters, thicknesses, connectivities, and node numbers. All
nodal specific quantities, such as restraints, loads, and displacements, must be manually added
to the CAESAR II input file.
The CADPIPE external interface is set up so that several models can be transferred in a single
session. During data transfer, the interface first prompts you for the name of the CADPIPE
connectivity (.UDE ) neutral file. After you specify the file name, the data transfer process
begins. When that transfer is complete, the interface prompts you for another neutral file name.
This cycle continues until you cancel the data transfer process.
The neutral file read by the interface must be generated by the CADPIPE software. For more
information, refer to the CADPIPE product documentation.
The CADPIPE neutral file must be transferred to the current CAESAR II folder so that it is
available to the external interface.
The interface reads the CADPIPE neutral file, and generates the CAESAR II input file and a log
file of the data transfer process. Check the data in both the CAESAR II input file and the log file
for consistency and any assumptions made by the interface.
1130
External Interfaces
The following paragraphs describe the layout of the data extracted from the CADPIPE neutral
file and how it is arranged for storage in the interface. The data storage is maintained in two
arrays. The first array contains geometry data for each pipe element; the second array contains
additional load and specification data.
In the first array, an entry is required for each piece of pipe in the system. "Pipe" refers to an
entity between two nodes, which can be a pipe or a rigid element. There are 12 values per entry,
and all values must be specified.
Field 1- ELMT
Enter the pipe element number, which can correspond to an entry in the
second array. This is also the pipe or element number in the model.
Values must be sequential from 1.
Field 2 - N1
Enter the From node number, which is the starting node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 3 - N2
Enter the To node number, which is the ending node for the element.
Values must be greater than zero and less than 32000.
Field 4 - DX
Enter the delta X dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the X direction.
Field 5 - DY
Enter the delta Y dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Y direction. In CAESAR II, Y is vertical.
Field 6 - DZ
Enter the delta Z dimension for the element. This is the distance
between N1 and N2 in the Z direction.
Field 7 - DIAM
Enter the pipe outer diameter.
Field 8 - THK
Enter the pipe wall thickness.
Field 9 - ANCH
Specify the location of the restraint (support). If there is a restraint on

N1, ANCH is 1. If there is a restraint on N2, then ANCH is 2. The type of
restraint can be obtained from the second array.
Field 10 - BND
Specify whether there is a bend at the N2 end of the element. If BND is

1, there is a bend at N2. If BND is 0, this is a straight pipe.
Field 11 - BRAD
Specify the bend radius if the bend is not a long radius bend. This value
is the required bend radius.
Field 12 - RIGD
Indicate whether the current element is a rigid element.
Records in the second array are only necessary when additional data is required. This means
there is always a record in the first array for pipe element #1, which could be the only entry in
the array. Any additional entries contain some type of change to data normally duplicated
forward by CAESAR II.
Field 1 - ELMT
Enter the pipe element number, which corresponds to an entry in the first
array. This is also a pipe or element number in the model. Values are
sequential from 1.
1131
External Interfaces
Field 2 - TEMP1
Enter the operating temperature for load case 1. You can find this value
by scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum temperature.
Field 3 - PRESS1
Enter the operating pressure for load case 1. You can find this value by
scanning the CADPIPE data for the maximum pressure.
Field 4 - RGDWGT Enter the weight of rigid elements. This entry is only required if you set
the RIGID flag in the first array.
Field 5 - TEEFLG
Field 6 - RESTYP
Specify the TEE type. Acceptable values are:
1 - reinforced
2 - unreinforced
3 - welding tee
4 - sweepolet
5 - weldolet
6 - extruded welding tee
Specify the restraint (support) type indicator. Acceptable values are:
0 - anchor
1 - double acting X
2 - double acting Y
3 - double acting Z
4 - double acting RX
5 - double acting RY
6 - double acting RZ
Field 7 - RINFO1
Enter the restraint stiffness for the support.
Field 8 - RINFO2
Enter the restraint gap for the support.
Field 9 - RINFO3
Enter the restraint friction coefficient for the support.
Field 10 - MATID
Enter the CAESAR II material ID value.

If the coefficient of expansion is to be changed, it should be
entered in the Temperature field above (Field 2).
Field 11 - EMOD
Enter the value of Youngs modulus.
Field 12 - POIS
Enter the value of Poissons ratio.
Field 13 - GAMMA Enter the weight density of the material.

Field 14 - INSTHK
Enter the insulation thickness.
1132
External Interfaces
Field 15 - INSWGT Enter the weight density of the insulation material.
Field 16 FLDWGT
Enter the weight density of the pipe contents (fluid).
Field 17 - TEENOD Enter the element node number where there is a tee.
Field 18
Placeholder for future development.
Field 19
Field 20
CADPIPE Example Transfer

The following is an example connectivity file produced by the CADPIPE interface. Examination
of this file reveals two distinct regions. The first region defines the entities which make up the
piping system; the second region connects the entities. Both regions are required for the
interface to work properly. The first line of each entity definition contains various codes that
define: the element type, the element diameter, and the element thickness.
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 1
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OBB1dLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 2
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-2OPPATLATL
134.50
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.35999997e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.35999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 3
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR AAA1 C-3O1BATLATL
INSERTION 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.80000000e+002 3.36000033e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 4
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
105.38
INSERTION 2.41687500e+002 3.35999959e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 1.89000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
1133
External Interfaces
ENTITY_NUMBER 5
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O2HATLATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.94375000e+002 3.35999917e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 6
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 7
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
90.00
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 3.90000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.01999934e+002 3.45000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 8
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-3O1BATLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000099e+002 4.35000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 9
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-2OBB1dLATL
INSERTION 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 10
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-2OPPATLATL
134.50
INSERTION 4.02000017e+002 4.43999981e+002 1.27075000e+003
END 4.02000000e+002 4.43999961e+002 1.20350000e+003
END 4.02000033e+002 4.44000000e+002 1.33800000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 11
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0O1BATLATL
INSERTION 3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 12
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
105.38
INSERTION 3.00000025e+002 2.77687500e+002 1.34700000e+003
1134
External Interfaces
END 2.99999967e+002 2.25000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.00000083e+002 3.30375000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 13
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLZTL
69.00
INSERTION 3.43500000e+002 2.16000017e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.09000000e+002 2.16000033e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_ENTITY
ENTITY_NUMBER 14
ATTRIBUTES 1CAESAR
AAA1
C-0OPPATLATL
87.38
INSERTION 3.49312500e+002 3.36000008e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.05625000e+002 3.36000083e+002 1.34700000e+003
END 3.93000000e+002 3.35999934e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_ENTITY
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.00000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
ENTITY 1
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
END_COORD
1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 1
ENTITY 2
ENTITY 3
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 1.80000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 3
ENTITY 4
ENTITY 5
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD
3.78000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
BEGIN_SEGMENT
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002 3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
END_COORD
3.00000000e+002 2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 12
ENTITY 11
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
1135
External Interfaces
BEGIN_COORD 3.00000000e+002
END_COORD
3.78000000e+002
ENTITY 11
ENTITY 13
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
BEGIN_RUN
LINE_NUMBER CAESAR
AAA1
END_COORD
4.44000000e+002
BEGIN_SEGMENT
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002
ENTITY 5
ENTITY 14
ENTITY 6
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002
ENTITY 6
ENTITY 7
ENTITY 8
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
END_COORD
4.02000000e+002
ENTITY 8
ENTITY 10
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
BEGIN_SEGMENT
END_COORD
4.44000000e+002
ENTITY 9
END_SEGMENT
END_RUN
2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
2.16000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
3.36000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.34700000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
4.44000000e+002 1.20000000e+003
As the interface runs, status messages display for information purposes. After the transfer is
complete, review the log file to insure that there are no unexplained errors or warnings.
The log file generated for the above .UDE file is listed as follows.
*** CAESAR II / CADPIPE Geometry Translator ***
CADPIPE data as read in for NEUTRAL file: NRGTST1.UDE
General Notes
This file contains the status of the data conversion from the CADPIPE ISO system to the
CAESAR II stress analysis package. The data contained in this file is grouped into three
sections:
1. Entity information
2. Segment connectivity information
1136
External Interfaces
3. Final interpreted CAESAR II data.
Anomalies with final CAESAR II model geometry should be traced through this file, possibly
back to the CADPIPE connectivity file. Notes and warning messages are shown below as
necessary.
Because all required CAESAR II data is not available in the CADPIPE environment, CAESAR II
must make certain modeling assumptions. As such, it is important that you verify the following
assumptions:
1. Thicknesses of .05 are generated by the software because no match could be found in the
standard CAESAR II diameter/thickness tables. This value must be corrected after it is in
CAESAR II.
2. Rigid elements are assumed to have a weight of 1.0. This value should be corrected after it
is in CAESAR II.
3. Temperatures, pressures, and other loading items are not available for transfer by the
interface.
4. Restraint information is not available for transfer by the interface.
5. Material #1 (low carbon steel) is assumed by the interface.
Error Code Statements

1. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a custom bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius must take
place in CAESAR II.
2. The item code for this entity indicates that it is a mitered bend. The interface makes the
transfer assuming it is a long radius elbow. The correction to the proper radius and number
of cuts must take place in CAESAR II.
3. The item code for this entity indicates that it is some type of OLET fitting. Because there is
only a single reference to this entity in the CADPIPE neutral file, this segment is not
contiguous with the rest of the model in CAESAR II. The interface attempts to connect the
OLET as it sees fit. The final geometry should be checked.
4. The item code for this entity is unknown to the current version of the interface. The entity is
set to a 2 node, zero length rigid element. You must modify the CAESAR II data to correct
this anomaly.
5. The segment being processed referenced an ENTITY that was not defined in the ENTITY
Information section of the .UDE file. This indicates some type of error during the generation
of the neutral file. Regenerate the neutral file before using the interface again.
1137
External Interfaces
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion

The log file is useful in identifying problems that may have been encountered by the interface
during the data transfer. The log file is divided into the following sections:
Introduction - Lists general notes about the interface and defines the error code. Typically,
this is a one-page summary.
Section 1 - Lists the entity information as read from the CADPIPE connectivity file. Each
entity is grouped into one of four possible element types, node numbers are assigned, and
the coordinate system is rotated to conform to the standard pipe stress coordinate system (Y
vertical).
Section 2 - Details the interpretation and model building process.
Section 3 - Lists the final transformed data which the interface system wrote as the
CAESAR II input file.
The following is a sample log file:

Section 1-Entity Information
--------------------------------------------------------Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.
Section 1 - Entity Information

Section 1-Entity Information
--------------------------------------------------------Element types are: 1 - Pipe 2 - Bend 3 - Intersection 4 - Rigid
1138
External Interfaces
Interpreted Entity information for: 14 Entities.
Section 2-Segment Information

Processing LINE_NUMBER:
CAESAR AAA1
Entity
1 Original nodes:
10.
20.
STARTING new segment with new Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 10.
CAESAR II type is PIPE
Final nodes:
10.
20.
Finished processing segment with entities:
1
Entity
1 Original nodes:
10.
20.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 1, "FROM" node is 20.
CAESAR II type is 1.
Entity 1 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity 2 Original nodes:
30.
40.
Final nodes:
20.
40.
50.
60.
Switched TO/FROM orientation.
Final nodes:
40.
50.
1
2
3
Entity
3 Original nodes:
60.
50.
Entity 3 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
70.
80.
Final nodes:
50.
80.
90.
100.
Resetting element 4 "TO" node from 80. to 100. and adjusting deltas.
3
4
5
Processing LINE_NUMBER:
CAESAR
AAA1
Entity
5 Original nodes:
100.
100.
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
230.
240.
Final nodes:
100. 230.
210. 220.
Final nodes:
230.
220.
5 12 11
210.
220.
STARTING new segment with old Entity # 11, "FROM" node is
220.
Entity 11 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
250. 260.
Final nodes:
220. 260.
11 13
1139
External Interfaces
Processing LINE_NUMBER: CAESAR
AAA1
100. 100.
Entity 5 TEE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
270.
280.
Final nodes:
100.
280.
110. 120.
Final nodes:
280.
120.
5
14
6
Entity
6 Original nodes:
110.
120.
STARTING new segment with old Entity #
6, "FROM" node is
120.
Entity
6 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
Entity
7 Original nodes:
130.
140.
Final nodes:
120.
140.
Entity
8 Original nodes:
150.
160.
Final nodes:
140.
160.
6
7
8
Entity
8 Original nodes:
150.
160.
8, "FROM" node is
160.
Entity
8 BEND has already been processed. Skip in progress.
190.
200.
Final nodes:
160.
190.
Entity
9 Original nodes:
170.
180.
Final nodes:
190.
170.
8 10
9
Entity
9 Original nodes:
180.
170.
9, "FROM" node is
170.
Entity
9 PIPE has already been processed. Skip in progress.
9
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data

*** C A E S A R I I
INTERPRETED GEOMETRY DATA ***
*** C A E S A R I I
INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 1
*** C A E S A R I I
INTERPRETED PROPERTY DATA ***
Part 2
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Data transferred to CAESAR II array structures.

The CAESAR II job file name is: NRGTST._A
1140
External Interfaces
Starting generation of CAESAR II input file for:
13 Elements
4 Bends
0 Rigids
0 Restraints
Conversion of data to CAESAR II completed.
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data Transfer

It is important to verify the resulting CAESAR II input file. Begin by reviewing the log file to see if
any errors or warnings were generated.
The log file is a standard ASCII text file that can be output to a printer or viewed with a
text editor, such Notepad.
Next, enter the input mode of CAESAR II and plot the model. The CAESAR II plot for the
CADPIPE data transfer example is shown in the following figure.
If the resulting CAESAR II geometry is inconsistent with the CADPIPE drawing, use the log file
to identify the problem:
1. Identify the problem area and locate the relevant elements in Section 3 of the log file.
2. Find the appropriate segment in Section 2 of the log file and verify that it contains the same
entities as shown in the CADPIPE connectivity file.
3. Verify that the information in Section 1 of the log file matches the interpreted data in Section
3.
Anomalies with the resulting CAESAR II geometry can usually be attributed to one of the
following causes:
1141
External Interfaces
An unexpected geometry condition was handed to the CAESAR II interface. The solution is
to update the interface for the current condition. Forward the .UDE file to Intergraph CAS
Support for analysis and subsequent interface modification.
An unknown item code was encountered during the data transfer, indicating that the
CADPIPE software has been updated and new item codes added. Because the interface
does not recognize the new items, it must be modified. Contact Intergraph CAS Support for
assistance.
OLET entities in the CADPIPE connectivity file do not contain a reference to the piping
element they intersect. As a result, the interface attempts to determine the associated pipe
using coordinate computation and 3D intersection calculations. Potentially, the procedure
can pass over the intersection point, and the branch containing the OLET plots at the origin
of the CAESAR II model. You can correct this in the CAESAR II input by breaking the
intersected pipe and assigning the OLET node number to the break point.
Some CADPIPE connectivity files that have been submitted to Intergraph CAS for analysis
have been found to contain errors consisting of either pipe doubling back on itself or piping
elements indicated as bends where there was no change in direction. Errors such as these
can be detected by the CAESAR II error checker when it is run prior to attempting the data
transfer.
Import PCF
Processes a single Piping Component File (PCF) or multiple PCFs, and then generates a
CAESAR II piping input model file from the conversion information.
The goal of the conversion process is:
To create a CAESAR II model that is complete, ready to run, and contains no errors.
To provide a method for stress engineers to quickly and accurately collect data.
After the PCF is created from external software, it can be converted to a CAESAR II piping input
model file.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF menu options in the External Interfaces
menu operate the same.
The PCF file format is a standard drawing exchange format developed by Alias Ltd. The PCF is
a flat text file containing detailed information about the piping system components. The
information is extracted from a CAD system. Details on the format of the PCF and its capabilities
can be obtained from Alias.
A valid PCF has a .pcf file extension name.

PCFs contain custom attributes in the form of component-attribute<n>. Intergraph Smart 3D can
generate PCFs with ISO_STRESS PCF configuration. This configuration assures that a number
of various data fields are passed in specific PCF data fields.
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 = Design pressure
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2 = Maximum temperature
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 = Material name
1142
External Interfaces
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4 = Wall thickness (reducing thickness in the case of reducing

components)
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE5 = Insulation thickness
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE6 = Insulation density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE7 = Corrosion allowance
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE8 = Component weight
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE9 = Fluid density
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE10 = Hydro test pressure
The units associated with the values of these attributes are defined by including a descriptive
unit label after the value. For example, the pressure attribute, COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1, can
be specified as COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1 15.3 barg. If the unit label chosen (barg) is not
one of the labels recognized by CAESAR II as defined through Tools > Create/Review Units
on the CAESAR II Main menu, then you must include that label in the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT
file in the CAESAR II System folder.
The only PCF SUPPORT attribute that is not ignored is the SUPPORT-DIRECTION
attribute. It must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or SOUTH.
One note on the Material Number setting is that the selected material is applied to a piping
element as the default only if the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 for that element is not
specified or recognized.
You can achieve the best results by preparing customized mapping files before beginning the
conversion process.
You may use default mapping files if the values fit our model. There are a number of mapping
files that define various values. Locate these files in the CAESAR II System folder.
PCF Unit Mapping

The PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file maps the PCF Units name to the conversion factor used to
convert it to the CAESAR II internal units (English).
This file defines three columns:
CAESAR II Unit
Displays the internal unit used by the software
PCF Unit
Displays the user-supplied unit label
Conversion from CAESAR II -> PCF
Displays the conversion factor used to convert the

user-supplied unit to a CAESAR II internal unit
Comments can be added at the end of each line separated from the last column value by
spaces and preceded by the "*" character.
All PCF component attributes can be specified inside the PCF with their associated units. Any
unit specified by the PCF component attributes which is not a standard internal CAESAR II unit
1143
External Interfaces
as defined by the Tools > Create/Review Units dialog box on the CAESAR II Main menu needs
to be mapped inside the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file.
CAESAR II divides the user-supplied value by this constant to calculate the value for the
attribute that is displayed by the software according to the units specified in the configuration
options (except that temperature from C to F will also add the 32 ).
To Modify the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II System folder.
1. Open the PCF_UNITS_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
An example of the CAESAR II default file is shown below.
2. Modify any of the units definitions or add another unit definition as needed.
PCF Material Mapping

The PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file maps PCF material names to a corresponding CAESAR II
material number. Note that the first line is currently reserved to the CAESAR II version number.
The match in this file must be an exact match. If no match is found, then the software searches
the CAESAR II material database to find the "best match" (where the "best match" tries to do an
1144
External Interfaces
intelligent match, adjusting for dashes, spaces, "GR", "SA" versus "A", and so forth) for the
material name.
PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 is used by the software to set the material attribute for each
component. If the COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 value is not defined or recognized, the software
applies the default material as specified by the Material Number value in the dialog box.
Any material specified by the PCF COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 which is not a standard
CAESAR II material as defined in the Tools > Materials dialog under the Material > Edit
menu must be mapped inside the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file.
To Modify the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT File

This file is located in the CAESAR II System folder.
1. Open the PCF_MAT_MAP.TXT file in any text viewer, such as Notepad.
The CAESAR II default file looks like this.
2. Modify any of the materials definitions.

3. Save and close the file.
PCF Restraint Mapping

The PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II restraint types corresponding to PCF
support/restraint names.
1145
External Interfaces
The PCF SUPPORT attribute is used by CAESAR II to apply supports at the specified
coordinates. Only the SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier is interpreted by the software if no
match is found for a particular support NAME in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file. The
SUPPORT-DIRECTION identifier must have a value of UP, DOWN, EAST, WEST, NORTH, or
SOUTH.
In order to fine-tune the support configuration placed on the imported model by CAESAR II for a
given PCF SUPPORT component, the PCF support NAME identifier value needs to be mapped
in the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
The example below shows a typical PCF SUPPORT component, highlighting the support NAME
value which should be used to define CAESAR II support mapping.
To Modify the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT File

Locate the file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This file defines the CAESAR II function corresponding to PCF support/restraint names.
1. Open the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the restraints definitions.
In the example, the Support type VG100 corresponds functionally to two CAESAR II supports:
+Vertical support (weight support)
Guide, each with friction coefficients equal to 0.3
1146
External Interfaces
This file supports a wide range of support functions, plus the key words MU= (for friction) and
GAP= (to define gaps in the restraint).
Syntax for each support type is:

<Support Name>
<N->
<Restraint Function>
<MU=>
<GAP=>
<Support Name> - CAESAR II considers a matching as any PCF support/restraint name that
contains this <Support Name> (not an exact match). Best results are achieved if the <Support
Names> are listed in order of longest names to shortest names. Otherwise VG1" might register
as a match before VG100 is processed.
<N> - Followed by N lines of: This means how many CAESAR II restraints need to get placed
on the corresponding Restraint auxiliary screen. N should be limited to 4 or less.
<Restraint Function> - This is defined in terms of CAESAR II function (GUI, LIM, VHGR, and
so forth.), Global Axes (VERT, NS, EW, and so forth), or Local Axes (A, B, C, and so forth):
ANC, GUI, LIM, VHGR, CHGR These create a CAESAR II Anchor, Guide, Axial Restraint,
Variable Hanger, or Constant Hanger, respectively. The last two create to-be-designed
hangers, which may end up as either variable or constant hangers.
1147
External Interfaces
VERT, EW, NS These create translational restraints corresponding to the compass points
of the global axes (Y, X, Z respectively for the Y-up setting, and Z, X, Y respectively for the
Z-up setting). See the figure below. One-way restraints may be created by prefixing with "+"
or "-".
A, B, C These create translational restraints corresponding to the local axes of the

support/pipe installation. The A corresponds to the centerline of the pipe, B corresponds to
the "direction" attributed to the support, and C corresponds to the cross-product of the A and
B axes. As with the global restraints, one-way restraints may be created by prefixing with +
or -. See the figure below.
<MU=> Optional keyword followed by a value for adding a friction coefficient to the restraint (not
valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
<GAP=> Optional keyword followed by a value and set of units for adding a gap to the restraint
(not valid with ANC, VHGR, CHGR).
The software also processes equipment nozzles designated by the
END-CONNECTION-EQUIPMENT keyword as imposed thermal displacements in all degrees of
freedom, all with values of 0.0. This creates an initial behavior of an anchor, but allows you to
easily impose actual thermal displacements when known.
1148
External Interfaces
Examples
The examples below illustrate typical restraint configurations, along with suggested mapping
entries.
Variable Spring Hanger
These represent variable spring hangers, and are mapped onto a single CAESAR II support (=
VHGR). This is interpreted as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
Constant Effort Spring Hanger

This represents a constant effort spring hanger, and thus is mapped onto a single CAESAR II
support (= CHGR). This is treated as a program-designed spring hanger in CAESAR II.
1149
External Interfaces
Note that it is identical to the VHGR shown in the figure above.
These hanger rod assemblies only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward
movement. In CAESAR II, they are typically modeled as +Y (or +Z, depending on how the
vertical axis is set).
1150
External Interfaces
These sliding supports only resist downward (weight) loads, and allow upward movement. They
are represented as a single +VERT support. However, because they slide against a base, most
stress analysts prefer to add a friction coefficient (MU=x.xx).
YRIGID 1
VERT MU=0.3
or
YRIGID 1
B
MU=0.3
These restraints resist load/movement in both directions (so the "+" of the previous two supports
is eliminated). If the restraint is always installed vertically, then use the first definition (VERT). If
the restraint is installed in any direction (for example, vertically or horizontally), use the second
definition B, indicating that it acts along the installed support direction. This assumes that the
installed direction of the restraint is always defined as the direction from the main steel towards
the pipe. Because sliding is involved, a friction coefficient is included as well.
UGUIDE
GUI
MU=0.3
or
1151
External Interfaces
UGUIDE
C
MU=0.3
If this restraint is always installed vertically on horizontal lines (as shown in the figure above),
then the support function can always be modeled as a Guide (with sliding friction). If the restraint
may be installed in any direction at all (with restraint direction corresponding to the direction of
the attachment point toward the pipe), then use the second definition (C) as it represents the
direction lateral to the pipe and the restraint.
TEESUPPORT 2
+VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
+VERTical
GUIde
Because sliding is involved in both functions, friction coefficients are provided for both.
VERTLATERAL
VERT
MU=0.3
GUI
MU=0.3
or
VERTLATERAL
B
MU=0.3
MU=0.3
1152
External Interfaces
up/down restraint
side-to-side restraint
If it is always installed vertically, then it is defined as a VERTical and a GUIde. If it is possible

that the restraint may be rotated about the pipe to be installed in any direction, then use the
second definition, which represents restraint along the direction of the support as well as lateral
to the support and pipe.
VERTAXIAL
+VERT
MU=0.3
LIM
MU=0.3
or
VERTAXIAL
+VERT
MU=0.3
MU=0.3
+VERT support
An axial restraint. The axial restraint can be defined equally as LIM or A (as A corresponds
to restraint along the direction of the pipe centerline).
SWAYSTRUT
1153
External Interfaces
These represent sway struts, which may be installed in any direction, and provide restraint along
the line of action of the sway strut. Assuming that the restraint direction corresponds to the
direction of the sway strut, then the best way to define these restraints is B (restraint along the
support direction).
ANCHOR
ANC
These restraints all restrict movement of the pipe in all six degrees-of-freedom, so they can be
defined as Anchors ("ANC").
PENETRATION
+C
GAP=aMM
-C
GAP=bMM
1154
External Interfaces
-VERT
GAP=cMM
+VERT
GAP=dMM
In the example above, the pipe (and the local A-axis) is running into the page. With B up, +C is
to the right.
Some of these can get quite complex, especially if restraints have different gaps in different
directions. It may require trial and error to determine exactly how the +/- restraint directions
correspond to the support direction passed in the PCF. In some cases, you may want to model
the restraint behavior in CAESAR II rather than in the mapping file.

The PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file defines the CAESAR II SIF data to be applied at the intersection of
tees and olets. The file also provides support for some SIF keywords.
Stress Intensification Factors (SIF) are not assigned a separate PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE or defined in any other way inside PCFs. In order to tune Stress
Intensification Factor settings of imported PCF components, CAESAR II provides the
PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT mapping file.
The file defines five columns:
SKEYS
PCF components use SKEYS to indicate how their subtype is

used within the general component group.
CAESAR II SIF TYPE
Should be set to the SIF type number used by CAESAR II as

shown in the CAESAR II SIF TYPE figure below.
PAD=X.X UNITS
(optional) Should be set to the SIF pad thickness, including the

applicable unit (for example, PAD=10 MM)
Ii=X.XX
(optional) Should be set to the in-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Ii=1.23)
Io=X.XX
(optional) Should be set to the out-plane SIF of the component.

This is a multiplier, and therefore unit-less (for example, Io=2.34)
1155
External Interfaces
Applying the above example values to set the TERF SKEY to the associated reinforced type
requires the following mapping entry to be specified inside the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file:
TERF
PAD=10 MM Ii=1.23 Io=2.34
Each PCF component defines an SKEY. For an example, see the SUPPORT component
identifier listed in the figure in PCF Restraint Mapping (on page 316) (SKEY 01HG). In this case,
these are typically four-character words indicating tee type (CROSS, OLET) and end type. The
PCF menu command matches the SKEYS to the entries in this mapping file. If an SKEY is not
found in this file, you should add it.
To Modify the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT File

Locate this file in the CAESAR II system folder.
This step is strongly recommended in order to take advantage of the capabilities of the
PCF menu command.
1156
External Interfaces
1. Open the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file in any text editor, such as Notepad.
2. Modify any of the SIF definitions.

How to Use the PCF Interface

1. Click Tools > External Interfaces > PCF or Tools > External Interfaces > Intergraph
Smart3D PCF from the Main menu.
The Intergraph Smart3D PCF and the PCF options are identical.
1157
External Interfaces
The PCF Interface dialog box displays.
2. Click Add PCF Files to Conversion List
on the toolbar.
A PCF must have a file extension of .pcf.
You can add one or multiple files to be converted.
You can remove PCF(s) from the list by clicking Remove PCF Files from the
Conversion List
.
The selected file(s) displays in the PCF Files section of the dialog box.
The default corresponding CAESAR II input file that will be built from the conversion process
displays in the CAESAR II Files section of the dialog box. You can change the path by
clicking the "..." ellipsis button and selecting another path.
3. Change any of the options listed under Conversion Options, as needed.
Condense Rigids (on page 331)
1158
External Interfaces
Condense Tees (on page 1162)
Condense Elbows (on page 332)
Use Pipe Materials Only (on page 332)
Combine PCF Files (on page 332)
Model Rotation (on page 332)
Diameter Limit (on page 333)
Material Number (on page 333)
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness (on page 333)
4. Click Convert selected PCF files into CAESAR II
to initiate the conversion process.
During the conversion process, status messages display in the Message Area, which is
located in the lower right of the PCF Interface dialog box.
1159
External Interfaces
These messages are also written to a LOG file with the name XXXX.LOG, where XXXX
represents the name (less the extension) of the combined CAESAR II file. The log file is
placed in the selected CAESAR II output file folder.
5. View your new CAESAR II input model.
1160
External Interfaces
For example, this CAESAR II model was created from the sample file 1001-P.PCF:
Elements are ordered and nodes are numbered in a logical manner.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_UNITS_ MAP_TXT file.
Materials
Diameter and Wall Thickness
Corrosion Allowance and Fluid Density
Operating Conditions (Temperature and Pressures) also are translated.
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_RES_MAP.TXT file.
Restraints
The following attributes transfer correctly from the PCF_SIF_MAP.TXT file.
Tees convert with the correct SIFs in this case a Welding Tee and a Weldolet.
Besides supports/restraints, boundary conditions such as equipment connections are also

transferred. (in this example, at all three nozzle connections are set). You can easily change
these to thermal displacements.
Weights of in-line components, insulation thickness and density, all material properties, and
Allowable Stress information transfer correctly.
Line numbers are assigned according to the name of the PCF file.
In this example, the output displays the applicable CAESAR II warnings, which are informational
only.
1161
External Interfaces
Phantom components (PCF items marked as CONTINUATION or STATUS DOTTED or

MATERIAL LIST EXCLUDE) are ignored during the conversion process.
Tee components are modeled using the thickness of the matching pipe.
Node Numbering preferences (start node and increment) are based on the Node
Numbering Increment set in the active CAESAR II Configuration file.
Add PCF Files to Conversion List

Select PCF(s) for conversion. You can also select a text file (*.txt) that contains a list of
PCFs.
Remove PCF Files from Conversion List

Remove selected PCF(s) from the Conversion List pane.
Convert selected files into CAESAR II format
Initiates the conversion process to convert a PCF(s) to a standard CAESAR II piping

input file.
Condense Rigids
Instructs the software to combine rigids that connect to each other into a single element.
This indicates whether these items should be condensed/merged into adjacent elements. For
example, a valve with adjacent gaskets and flanges would be combined into a single rigid
element.
If activated, then elements are condensed/merged unless there is a valid reason not to (change
of cross section, change of operating conditions, restraint at the location, and so forth).
Condense Tees
When set to TRUE, this directive instructs the software NOT to treat tees as three elements but
instead condense them to a single node. The SIF is applied at the tee node. The use of the
three elements allows pipe properties of the tee to differ from the attached piping.
1162
External Interfaces
Condense Elbows
Controls whether the software treats elbows as two designated elements. When set to TRUE,
this directive instructs the software NOT to treat elbows as two designated elements. Rather, it
is condensed into its adjacent elements for each direction in which the elbow travels.
Use Pipe Materials Only

Instructs the software to apply pipe materials only as defined by the PCF
COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3 identifiers.
Activating this option replaces the material of various components (elbows, valves, flanges,
reducers, tees, and so forth) with the appropriate piping material, where possible, leading to a
much more homogenous CAESAR II model. Matching components to their corresponding piping
material is done by assembling a matrix of Pipe Spec/diameter combinations, based the
available data transmitted in the PCF. Where an exact match is available, the material
substitution is made. Where piping materials are available for the Pipe Spec but not the
diameter, a match is made to the closest diameter. Where no piping material is available for the
Pipe Spec, the component material is retained. For example, A106 Grade B would be applied
but A234 Grade WPB would be ignored.
If you choose to condense Rigids, Tees, or Elbows, set Use Pipe Materials Only to
TRUE.
Combine PCF Files

Converts and combines PCFs in the dialog box into a single CAESAR II model. You are
prompted for the name of the combined CAESAR II file.
When you merge multiple PCFs into a single CAESAR II model using Combine PCF
Files, line numbers are assigned based on the originating PCF name.
Model Rotation
90-degrees.
1163
External Interfaces
Diameter Limit
Use this to exclude the processing of small pipes, such as vents and drains, by specifying the
size (nominal diameter) below which pipes will be ignored. Enter a diameter limit of -1.000 to
include all pipe sizes that you want to import into CAESAR II.
Material Number
Select the CAESAR II material to be assigned to components which do not have the material
attribute explicitly set otherwise.
The default is low carbon steel (material number 1).
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness

Select the default schedule of the pipe to be used in case the wall thickness of the pipe cannot
be determined from the PCF.
1164
SECTION 17
Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases

CAESAR II permits the export of the analysis results to ODBC-compliant databases. ODBC is a
programming interface that enables applications to access data in database management
systems that use Structured Query Language (SQL) as a data access standard. CAESAR II
uses two drivers supplied by Microsoft to communicate with the Access database or Excel
spreadsheet. These drivers are installed by default when either of the two products is set up on
a system.
DSN Setup
To use the CAESAR II data export facility, you need to set up two Data Source Names (DSNs)
on the system. DSNs contain information regarding where the database resides on the
computer and how to communicate with (what driver to use, for example). CAESAR II has
capabilities to export data to either an Access database or an Excel spreadsheet. Therefore, you
need two DSNs set up to allow use of this feature. The names of these two DSNs are fixed
(read-only) by ICAS.
The CAESAR II installation program is designed to set up these DSNs automatically. However,
in the event that the DSNs are not set up, follow the procedure below.
Setting Up the Data Source Name:

1. From the Start menu, select Settings > Control Panel.
2. Double-click ODBC Data Sources, and click User DSN.
3. Click Add.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the figure below.
1165
External Interfaces
Follow steps 4 through 7 for Microsoft Access DSN Setup ONLY. Skip to step 9
for Microsoft Excel DSN Setup. [no info for Excel DSN setup - missing]
4. Select the Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb), and click Finish.
The system displays a dialog box similar to the one below. You are prompted to select your
database.
The data source name must be the C2_OUT_ACCESS. The description is an

optional field, and can hold any description information.
5. Enter the Data Source Name and the Description. Click Select to select the CAESAR II
template database.
CAESAR II is supplied with a template database that contains the structure to hold
data exported from the software. For Microsoft Access, this file is named caesarII.mdb and
is present in the system directory of your CAESAR II installation directory.
6. Select the file, and click OK.
1166
External Interfaces
The system returns you to the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box.
7. Click OK.
The C2_OUT_ACCESS has been added to list of available user DSNs.
You have now successfully completed the Access DSN setup.

This above process needs to be performed only once per computer.
1167
External Interfaces
Controlling the Data Export

The CAESAR II data export is controlled using the Setup/Configuration module. By default,
data export is disabled. You must run Configure/Setup to enable ODBC data export.
Setting Up the ODBC Data Export

1. Click Tools > Configure/Setup.
The CAESAR II Configuration Editor window displays.
2. Click Database Definitions.
3. Set Enable Data Export to ODBC Compliant Databases to True.
4. On ODBC Database File Name, click Browse and then type the name of your database.
CAESAR II copies the template database to the specified directory and names the database
as specified.
5. The Append re-runs to existing data configuration setting is optional. If set as False (the
default setting), re-runs of the same job overwrite any existing data for the same job in the
database/spreadsheet. If you set this option to True, then re-runs add or append data from
the new runs to the database/spreadsheet.
Click Save and Exit
to save changes to the configuration.
As in previous versions of CAESAR II, the configuration file applies to all CAESAR IIjobs
present in that directory. Similarly, the external database/spreadsheet specified in one
configuration file applies to all jobs present in that directory.
1168
SECTION 18
File Sets
This chapter discusses two sets of files: the files that CAESAR II delivers to your computer
during installation, and the files that CAESAR II creates for a particular job.
In This Section
CAESAR II File Guide ................................................................. 1169
Required Program Files .............................................................. 1170
Required Error Data Files ........................................................... 1172
Required Data Sets..................................................................... 1172
Required Printer/Listing Files ...................................................... 1176
Dynamics Files ........................................................................... 1178
Auxiliary Sets .............................................................................. 1179
Structural Data Files ................................................................... 1180
Example Files ............................................................................. 1180
External Interface Files ............................................................... 1182
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data.............................................. 1183
CAESAR II File Guide

Approximately 60 MB of free disk space is required for a complete installation of the software. If
your hard drive has limited free space, you may have to manually delete files from your hard
disk before installing a new version of CAESAR II. If you are storing data files in your CAESAR II
installation folder, archive them before you begin the file deletion process. If you are performing
a partial installation, verify that the folder is clean before you start; if this folder is not clean, the
mixing of software versions may generate CRC errors during installation and can adversely
impact performance.
If you have adequate space on your hard drive, the new software data files will overwrite the
data files from the previous version. Some files, such as the material database file, change from
year to year, and may have to be deleted manually to maximize disk space.
After a successful installation of the software, the following folder structure will exist on the hard
drive, assuming that you have named the installation folder caesar and the data directory
caesar data.
\caesar
Main program files
\caesar\acrobat
Adobe Reader installation file
\caesar\assidrv
HASP device drivers and instructions
\caesar\c2_docu
CAESAR II online documentation
\caesar data\examples
Example jobs
1169
File Sets
\caesar data\lib_i
CADWorx library file in Imperial units
\caesar data\lib_m
CADWorx library file in Metric units
\caesar\setupesl
\caesar data\Spec
CADWorx specification files
\caesar\ssidrv
\caesar data\system
Program data file templates and libraries
As the hard drive reaches its storage capacity, disk access can slow considerably.
Intergraph CAS recommends that you periodically use the File > Clean Up Files command to
perform general hard disk housekeeping tasks such as deleting scratch files and old job files.
Required Program Files

Required Program
Filename
Description
ANAHLP01.EXE
Help file for dynamic input and load case

editor
ANAHLP02.EXE
Help file for dynamic input and load case

editor
ANAL1.EXE
Static load cases/dynamic input program file
ANNOUNCE.EXE
Build changes announcement program file
C2.EXE
Main Menu program file
C2DATA.EXE
Input conversion to new units program file
C2SET01.EXE
Help file
C2SET02.EXE
Help index file
C2SETUP.EXE
Configuration program file
C2U.EXE
Buried pipe modeler
CRCCHK.EXE
CRC check program file
ELEM.EXE
Element generator
ENGLISH.FIL
English units file
1170
File Sets
Required Program
Filename
Description
EXPJT.HED
Generic expansion joint header file
FRP.HED
Generic FRP header file
ECHO.EXE
Input echo setup/Neutral file program file
INCORE.EXE
In-core solution module program file
M1HELP01.EXE
Miscellaneous help file
M1HELP02.EXE
Miscellaneous help file
OP2HLP01.EXE
Output processor help file
OP2HLP02.EXE
Output processor help file
MM.FIL
Millimeter units file
OUTCORE.EXE
Out-of-core solution module program file
OUTP01.EXE
Static force/stress computation program file
OUTP02.EXE
Static output processor
PIERCK.EXE
Piping error checker
PREPIP.EXE
Piping input module
REPORT.EXE
Input list/echo generation program file
SI.FIL
SI units file
STREAM.EXE
Batch stream processor program file
TIPS.TXT
Start-up Tip-of-the-Day program file
TYPE.BIN
Parameter definition file TUV.fil
VALVE.HED
Generic valve/flange header file
XX.CRC
CRC check data file
1171
File Sets
Required Error Data Files

Error Data Filename
Description
C2ER01A.EXE
Error explanation text
C2ER01B.EXE
Error index file
C2ER01C.EXE
C2ER01D.EXE
Error index file
C2ER01E.EXE
C2ER01F.EXE
Error index file
C2ER01Z.EXE
C2ER02A.EXE
Error index file
C2ER02B.EXE
C2ER02C.EXE
Error index file
C2ER02D.EXE
C2ER02E.EXE
Error index file
C2ER02F.EXE
C2ER02Z.EXE
Error index file
C2ERROR.EXE
Error reporting program
Required Data Sets

Data Set Filename
Description
5-110-1A.FAT
Material fatigue curve
5-110-1B.FAT
5-110-2A.FAT
5-110-2B.FAT
1172
File Sets
Data Set Filename
Description
5-110-2C.FAT
ACCESS2K.BAT
Batch file to switch to Access 2000
ACCESS97.BAT
Batch file to switch to Access 97
AMRN2020.FRP
FRP data
ANVIL.HGR
Anvil hanger data
AP.BIN
ANSI pipe sizes
API650.DIG
API650 chart data
APPRVD.BIN
Stoomwezen approval certificate
BE.HGR
Basic engineering hanger data
BERGEN.HGR
Bergen Power hanger data
BHEL.HGR
BHEL hanger data
C2MAT.EXE
Material database editor
CAESAR.FRP
FRP data
CAESARII.MDB
Access template file
CAESARI1997I.MDB
Access 97 database template
CAESARII2000.MDB
Access 2000 database template
CAESARII.XLS
Excel template file
CAPITOL.HGR
Capitol hanger data
CARPAT.HGR
Carpenter & Paterson hanger data
CHINAPWR.HGR
China Power hanger data
CMAT.BIN
Supplied material database
CMP_INP.BAT
Batch file for compressed input listing
COL_INP.BAT
Batch file for column oriented input listings
COMET.HGR
Comet hanger data
CRANE.DAT
Crane valve/flange database
1173
File Sets
Data Set Filename
Description
CRANE.VHD
Crane valve/flange header file
DP.BIN
DIN pipe sizes
ENGLISH.FIL
English units template
FLEXIDIR.HGR
Flexidir hanger data
FLEXPATH.DAT
Flexonics/Pathway Bellows expansion joint database
FLEXPATH.JHD
Flexonics/Pathway Bellows header file
FRONEK.HGR
Fronek hanger data
GENERIC.DAT
Generic valve/flange database
GENERIC.VHD
Generic valve/flange header file
HYDRA.HGR
Witzenmann hanger data
HYDRAANG.DAT
Witzenmann angular expansion joint database
HYDRAANG.JHD
Witzenmann angular expansion joint header file
HYDRAAXI.DAT
Witzenmann axial expansion joint database
HYDRAAXI.JHD
Witzenmann axial expansion joint header file
HYDRALAT.DAT
Witzenmann lateral expansion joint database
HYDRALAT.JHD
Witzenmann lateral expansion joint header file
INOFLEX.HGR
Inoflex hanger data
IWK_ANG.DAT
IWK angular expansion joint database
IWK_ANG.JHD
IWK angular expansion joint header file
IWK_AXI.DAT
IWK axial expansion joint database
IWK_AXI.JHD
IWK axial expansion joint header file
IWK_LAT.DAT
IWK lateral expansion joint database
IWK_LAT.JHD
IWK lateral expansion joint header file
JP.BIN
JIS pipe sizes
LISEGA.HGR
Lisega hanger data
1174
File Sets
Data Set Filename
Description
MATFIL1.BIN
ASME Sect VIII material database
MM.FIL
Millimeter units template
MITSUBISHI.HGR
Mitsubishi hanger data
MYATT.HGR
Myatt hanger data
MYRICKS.HGR
Myricks hanger data
NETUSERC2.BAT
DLL registration batch file
NHK.hgr
NHK hanger data
NOFLANGE.DAT
Valve/flange database (no flanges)
NOFLANGE.VHD
Valve/flange header file (no flanges)
NPS.HGR
NPS hanger data
OUTPUT.HED
Dynamic report header template
PDS_MAT.MAP
Intergraph PDS material mapping file
PDS_PIPES_CSV
Intergraph PDS pipe sizes
POWER.HGR
Power piping hanger data
PRINTER.FMT
Printer formatting string file
PSC.HGR
PSC hanger data
PSU.HGR
Pipe Supports USA data
PTP.HGR
PTP hanger data
PTP-LRG.DAT
PTP large expansion joint database
PTP-LRG.JHD
PTP large expansion joint header file
PTP-SML.DAT
PTP small expansion joint database
PTP-SML.JHD
PTP small expansion joint header file
QUALITY.HGR
Quality Pipe Supports data
SANWATEKKI.HGR
Sanwa Tekki hanger data
TECHNOINDUSTRIES.HGR
Techno Industries hanger data
1175
File Sets
Data Set Filename
Description
YAMASHITA.HGR
Yamashita hanger data
Required Printer/Listing Files

Printer/ Listing Filename
Description
LIST.CRC
CRC check data file
OUTPUT.HED
Dynamic output report headers file
TITLE.HED
Piping input title page template file
SCREEN.TXT
Piping input resource file
ALLOW.INP
Compressed formatting for allowable stresses
ALLWTD.INP
Formatting for TD/12 allowables
API650.INP
Formatting for API 650
API6502.INP
Alternate formatting for API 650 nozzles
BENDS.INP
Compressed formatting for bends
PD5500.INP
Formatting for PD5500 nozzles
PD55002.INP
Alternate formatting for PD5500 nozzles
CONPARM.INP
Compressed formatting for control parameters
COORDS.INP
Compressed formatting for coordinates
DISPLACE.INP
Compressed formatting for displacements
ELEMENT.INP
Compressed formatting for elements, layout 1
ELEMENT0.INP
ELEMENT1.INP
ELEMENT2.INP
ELEMENT3.INP
ELEMTD12.INP
Element formatting for TD/12
1176
File Sets
Description
EXPJTS.INP
Compressed formatting for expansion joints
FORCES.INP
Compressed formatting for forces
HANGERS.INP
Compressed formatting for spring hangers
INITIAL.INP
Listing setup file
MATERIAL.INP
Compressed formatting for materials
MAT_FRP.INP
NOZZLES.INP
Compressed formatting for nozzles
OFFSETS.INP
Compressed formatting for offsets
RIGIDS.INP
Compressed formatting for rigid elements
RIGIDS2.INP
Alternate formatting for rigids
SETUP.INP
Compressed formatting for setup parameters
SIF&TEE.INP
Compressed formatting for SIFs & tees
SIF&TD12.INP
TITLE.INP
Compressed formatting for title page
UNIFORM.INP
Compressed formatting for uniform loads
UNITS.INP
Compressed formatting for units
WIND.INP
Compressed formatting for wind shape factors
ALLOW2.INP
Column oriented formatting for allow\-able stresses
BENDS2.INP
Column oriented formatting for bends
DISPLAC2.INP
Column oriented formatting for dis\-placements
ELEMENT4.INP
Column oriented formatting for elements
EXPJTS2.INP
Column oriented formatting for expansion joints
FORCES2.INP
Column oriented formatting for forces
HANGERS2.INP
Column oriented formatting for spring hangers
MATRIAL2.INP
Column oriented formatting for materials
1177
File Sets
Description
NOZZLES2.INP
Column oriented formatting for nozzles
OFFSETS2.INP
Column oriented formatting for offsets
RIGIDS2.INP
Column oriented formatting for rigid elements
SIF&TEE2.INP
Column oriented formatting for SIFs & tees
SUPPORT2.INP
Column oriented formatting for restraints
UNIFORM2.INP
Column oriented formatting for uniform loads
WIND2.INP
Column oriented formatting for wind shape factors
Dynamics Files
Dynamics Filename
Description
DYN.EXE
Dynamic setup/Harmonic Solution
DYNHEAD.BIN
Dynamic input screen data
DYNOUT1.EXE
Dynamic force/stress computation pro\-gram file
DYNOUT2.EXE
Dynamic output reporting program file
DYNPLOT.EXE
Graphics animation program file
DYNSTART.BIN
Dynamic input example data
EIGEN.EXE
Eigen solution program file
1178
File Sets
Auxiliary Sets
Auxillary Set Filename
Description
ACCTNG.EXE
Accounting report generator
BIGPRT.EXE
Large print program file
C2_MAT.EXE
Material Database Editor program file
COADEXE.EXE
EXE file scanner
DLLVBASE.TXT
DLL baseline information
DLLVERSN.EXE
DLL version scanner program file
DLLVERSN.LST
DLL data list
HLPROT1.EXE
Help file
HLPROT2.EXE
Help file index
MAKEUNIT.EXE
Units generation program file
MATDAT.92
ASME material database
MISC.EXE
SIF, WRC297, B31G, Flange program file
MISC01.EXE
Help file
MISC02.EXE
Help file index
NETUSERC2.BAT
DLL registration batch file
ROT.EXE
Equipment analysis program file
RUN107.EXE
WRC107 program file
UCS66.BIN
ASME UCS-66 chart data
WRC-2.DIG
WRC107 chart data
1179
File Sets
Structural Data Files

Structural Data Filename
Description
AISC.EXE
AISC unit check program file
AISC77.BIN
1977 AISC steel database
AISC89.BIN
1989 AISC steel database
AISCHLP.HLP
AISC program help file
AISCHLP.PTR
Help index file
AUST90.BIN
1990 Australian steel database
C2S.EXE
Structural input program file
C2SHL01.EXE
Help file for structural input
C2SHL02P.EXE
GERM91.BIN
1991 German steel database
HELPSTR.HLP
KOREAN.BIN
1990 Korean structural database
SAFRICA.BIN
1990 South African structural database
UK.BIN
United Kingdom structural database
Example Files
Example Filename
Description
45-75
DLF file for HAMMER job
90-110
DLF file for HAMMER job
CRYISM._7(.C2)
Dynamic input example
CRYISM._A(.C2)
CRYISM._J(.C2)
Static load case data
1180
File Sets
Example Filename
Description
CRYNOS._7(.C2)
CRYNOS._A(.C2)
CRYNOS._J(.C2)
CRYSTR.STR(.C2)
Structural input for CRYISM job
FRAME.J(.C2)
FRAME.STR(.C2)
Structural input example
HAMMER._7(.C2)
HAMMER._A(.C2)
HAMMER._J(.C2)
Dynamic input example, NRC benchmark
JACKET._A(.C2)
Jacketed pipe example input
JACKET._J(.C2)
NUREG9._7(.C2)
NUREG9._A(.C2)
NUREG9._J(.C2)
OMEGA._A(.C2)
Omega loop example input
OMEGA._J(.C2)
RELIEF.C2
DLF file for RELIEF job
RELIEF._7(.C2)
RELIEF._A(.C2)
Relief Valve example input
RELIEF._J(.C2)
TABLE._7(.C2)
Dynamic input example, harmonic
TABLE._A(.C2)
TABLE._J(.C2)
1181
File Sets
External Interface Files

External Interface
Filename
Description
ACADX.EXE
AutoCad DXF generator program file
ADEV.EXE
PRO-ISO interface program file
APLANT.EXE
Autoplant interface program file
C2DATIN.EXE
Generic neutral file interface program file
C2DXF.DAT
AutoCad DXF template file
C2LIQT.EXE
LIQT interface program file
C2PIPNET.EXE
PIPENET interface program file
C2PIP.EXE
PipePlus interface program file
C2VUECONVERTER.EXE Converts Smart 3D view to a CAESAR II view

CADPIP.EXE
CADPIPE interface program file
COMPRESSOR.EXE
Imports Smart 3D views
CVISON.EXE
ComputerVision interface program file
DATAEXP.CHM
Data export wizard help file
DATAEXP.EXE
Data export wizard program file
INTGRPH.EXE
Intergraph interface program file
ISOMET.EXE
Isomet interface program file
NODSIZ.LSP
Autocad node display routine
PCF.EXE
PCF interface program file
PCFDLL.DLL
Supports DLL for PCF interface
PIPEDLL.DLL
Supports DLL for PCF interface
1182
File Sets
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data

During the input/analysis/output phases of operation, CAESAR II creates a number of
job-specific data files. Some of these data files are used solely by CAESAR II, while others
contain either input or output data. This section defines the files that you will most likely
encounter, their purpose, and whether they are important for archiving purposes. In most cases,
the job files listed below are only exposed, or visible, on the machine when a job is active. When
a job is not active, all of its files are compressed into either a C2 archive (for piping) or a C2S
archive (for structural).
In the following list, an asterisk (*) after the file extension indicates that it should be saved to
archive input data. A double asterisk (**) indicates the file should be saved to archive output
data.
Not every file listed may be present for a given job. The presence of a file is dependent upon
what analysis has been run.
Static Input Files

._A *
User-defined spreadsheet input data.
._J *
Load case data.
Dynamic Input File

._7 *
User-defined dynamic input data.
Structural Input File

.STR * User-defined structural input data.
Soil Input File

.SOI * User-defined soil property data.
Scratch Files
._B -
Nodal boundary condition file created by the piping error checker and used by the
analysis modules.
._C
Element properties file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._N
Nodal coordinate file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._R
Job control information created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
1183
File Sets
._E
Element connectivity file created by the piping error checker and used by the analysis
modules.
._X
Structural geometry file used with piping preprocessor.
._1
Scratch file.
._2
Scratch file.
._5
Scratch file with intermediate hanger data.
._6
Scratch file.
.DXF
Geometric data file created for input into AUTOCAD.
.HAR
Harmonic components for animation.
.FRQ
Harmonic solution frequency and phase data.
._L
Intermediate harmonic data file.
.XYT
Animation output data file from time history analysis.
Listing Files
.MSG
Secondary output file with intermediate computation data.
.LST
Data listing file
.LIS
Data listing file
.C2U
Buried modeler error check file.
Output Files
._M ** Intermediate output file that contains data generated by the piping error checker and
load case setup modules.
Static output data file.
._P **
Actual harmonic displacement data.
._Q **
Dynamic output data file.
._S **
1184
File Sets
Time history output data file.
._T **
.OUT
User-generated output (text) data file.
.VAL
Intermediate eigenvalue output file.
.VEC
Intermediate eigenvector output file.
.OTL
**
Input/Output QA sequencing data file.
.WRN Model warning messages from the error checker.
1185
APPENDIX A
Update History
The lists on the following pages detail the functional updates made to CAESAR II by version
number. These lists correspond to the major releases of the software and do not reflect items
such as minor releases (such as Service Packs or Hot Fixes); re-publication of the User Guide,
or additional new modules released to aid customers between updates.
In This Appendix
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84).......................................... 1187
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86) .................................... 1187
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86) .................................. 1188
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87) .................................... 1189
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88) .................................... 1189
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90) ...................................... 1190
CAESAR II Version 3.1 Features (11/90) .................................... 1191
CAESAR II Version 3.16 Features (12/91)................................... 1193
CAESAR II Version 3.20 Features (10/93)................................... 1196
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements (7/94) ..... 1197
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements (4/95) ......... 1199
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96) .................................... 1200
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements (3/97) ......... 1201
CAESAR II Version 4.50 Changes and Enhancements (11/03) ... 1206
CAESAR II Version 5.10 Changes and Enhancements ( 9/07) .... 1207
1186
Update History
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities (12/84)
Input data spreadsheets featuring data duplication to the next pipe element
Vessel local Flexibility Calculations
Multiple load case spring hanger design
Algebraic load case combinations
Nonlinear restraints with gaps, friction, 2-node, and skewed options
Zero or finite length expansion joints with Tension Only tie-bars
Built-in database of pipe materials and properties
B31 code compliance reports
Static and dynamic capabilities, including animated mode shape plots
Extensive input/output graphics
Pressure effects on bends, including consideration of circular or slightly oval cross-sections
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features (2/86)
Help Windows
AutoCAD Interface
HP Plotter Interface
Batch Execution Opinion
Accounting System
File Handler
Spooled Input Listings
Uniform Load in Gs
Liberal Code Stress Allowable
Cursor Pad and Function Key Implementation in Input Spreadsheets
Plot Menu Single Keystroke Access
Stainless Steel Pipe Schedules
Direct Input of Specific Gravity
Bourdon Pressure Options
Hanger Control Spreadsheet Updates
1187
Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features (10/86)
AISC Structural Steel Database with over 800 different structural steel cross-sections.
Keyword/Batch Structural Steel Preprocessor - Provides the same quality CAESAR II

graphics with structural steel volume plots, interactive error checking, extensive interactive
help, and is fully compatible with CAESAR II piping models.
High Resolution Graphics - EGA support for monochrome and 640x350, 16 color mode.
Tecmar Graphics Master support for monochrome and 640x200, 16 color mode. Hercules
support for monochrome 720x348 mode.
Graphics - Added Pan and Range options. Improved zooming, stresses and displaced
shapes in color, hidden lines removed from volume plots, and pipe and structure plotted
together.
3D-Graph - Added an option to plot stresses for all nodes for all load cases on the same
plot.
Simultaneous Use Of Two Screens - Supports one monochrome screen and another for
graphics.
WRC 107 Stress Calculations.
Units - Use English and SI standard options, or define your own set of unit constants and
labels. Output may be generated in multiple unit sets, and input files may be converted from
one unit set to another.
Wind Load Calculations - According to ANSI A58.1-1982, or you can input your own velocity
or pressure versus elevation tables.
Pipe/structure include Option - Piping input from one file may be included in another with a
given node and rotational offset.
Quick Natural Frequency Range Calculations - Computes the number of natural frequencies
in any user given range in the amount of time needed to do a single static solution.
High Resolution Hardcopy Printer Plots.
Setup file options - You can set the following CAESAR II execution parameters:
Graphics hardware configurations.
Colors for over 27 different plotted items.
B3.1 reduced intersection options.
Plot/Geometry connection through CNodes options.
Corroded cross section stress calculation options.
Minimum and Maximum allowed bend angle options.
Occasional load factors.
Loop closure tolerance.
1188
Update History
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features (6/87)
Uniform and Independent support shock spectrum capability.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Fluid Waterhammer.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Relief Loads.
Force Spectrum Dynamic Analysis of Wind Gust Loads.
Fluid Mechanics Analysis of Gas or Liquid open vent relief system. Includes vent stack
sizing, thrust, and pressure rise computations.
NRC Dynamics Benchmarks for: NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. I, 1980; and

NUREG/CR-1677, BNL-NUREG-51267, Vol. II, 1985.
Dynamic Friction modeling based on static load case results.
Eleven pre-defined shock spectra including all Reg. Guide 1.60 spectra and the El Centro
North-South component spectra.
Improved Harmonic Analysis including the effect of phased loading relationships. This
analysis allows the modeling of eccentrically loaded rotating equipment.
Improved dynamic output processor, includes user-defined headings and comments.
Animated static and dynamic solutions with structural members and hidden line volume
plots.
Improved EIGENSOLVER many times faster than earlier algorithms, with automatic
out-of-core solution mode.
Updated Static Analysis Load Case Processor.
New Friction Algorithm with interactive control during solution of nonlinear restraints.
Improved Output file handling of various solution methods.
Ability to abort any function at any time during a session using the <ESC> key.
New keydisk memory protection scheme.
Hardware/Software QA capability for analysis verification.
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features (9/88)
Large Rotation Supports - Allows large rotation supports to be handled properly, by

computing the support forces in all three global directions. Rod and Chain hanger supports
can now be modeled.
Nonlinear Out-of-Core Solver - This new solver increases the range of problems CAESAR II
can solve by allowing nonlinear solutions to be performed on the hard disk. This capability is
necessary when a job is too large to be solved in memory.
Friction Report - Friction is a non-conservative force, and CAESAR II treats it as such. The
restraint reports now show restraint loads due to friction for each load case.
New External Interface Hooks - A new interface module allows smooth interface to data
conversion modules between CAESAR II and other programs such as AutoCAD. A new
1189
Update History
AutoCAD DXF interface is provided, and two thirds of the part vendors have completed
interfaces from their AutoCAD ISO packages to CAESAR II.
ASCII Editor - Due to an overwhelming need and subsequent lack of easy to use system
editors, a stand alone ASCII editor is provided. This editor easily modifies files such as
AUTOEXE.BAT, CONFIG.SYS, and SETUP.CII.
2D XY Engineering Plotting Program - Stand alone plotting software that allows you to plot
engineering data such as CAESAR II spectrum files. This software plots any real data
arranged in columns.
Valve & Flange Database - The addition of a valve and flange database enables you to
define or select the specific rigid element to insert into the piping system. The database is
constructed to allow you to add or modify entries.
Dynamic Restart - The most time consuming part of a dynamic analysis is the Eigensolution.
This feature allows a job to be restarted and use a previous Eigensolution.
WRC Updates - The latest edition (1979) of the WRC107 bulletin has been incorporated.
Input Title Page - An optional title page has been added to the input module. You can now
define a title page of up to 19 lines which is stored with the input.
Expansion Joint Rating Program - This stand alone software allows you to compute the
compression of each expansion joint corrugation and the compression of the joint as a
whole. These values can then be compared to manufacturers recommendations for joint
acceptance.
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features (4/90)
VGA Graphics support on input.
Interactive (immediate) rotation of the input graphics image.
Updated graphics user interface.
Optional WRC 329 implementation of new stress intensification factors for intersections.
Optional ASME Class 1 flexibility calculations for reduced intersections.
Optional WRC 329 fixed to B31.1 and B31.3 piping code equations.
Piping codes - B31.4, B31.8, ASME Sect III Class NC and ND, CAN Z184 and Z183,
Swedish Power Methods 1 and 2, BS806.
Updated SIF library to include welded joints and Bonney Forge fittings.
New scrolling help screens.
Editing list features, including rotate and duplicate of total or partial models
Updated WRC 107 table limit check.
AISC member check.
Wind load calculations on structural members.
Additional stress equation control using the SETUP file.
Numerical sensitivity checks in both the in-core and out-of-core solvers.
Automatic expansion joint modeler using manufacturers database.
1190
Update History
Additional restraint types including bottomed-out spring hangers and bi-linear soil springs.

Graphical Updates
Instantaneous center-of-rotation calculation.
Element Highlight.
Element Range.
Rotating Equipment Report Updates
API 610 7th Edition Addition.
SI/User Units.
HEI Additions.
WRC 107 Updates
Simplified input.
WRC 297 stress calculations.
Miscellaneous Modifications
Screen data presentation changes.
Direct control jumping between executables.
Increased number of allowed software designed hangers.
Additional spring hanger design options.
Database updates include additional spring hanger tables.
Soil Modeler for Buried Pipe.

The installation software uses the file compression routines from PKWARE. This significantly
reduces the number of diskettes distributed and the time needed to install the CAESAR II
package.
1191
Update History
Flange Leakage and Stress Calculations

Elastic models of the annular plate, gasket and bolts predict the relative degrees of gasket
deformation leading to a leaking joint. Stress calculations in accordance with ASME Sect. VIII
Div. 1 are also provided for comparison.
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations

This bulletin supplements WRC 107, addition to computing stresses in the nozzle as well as the
vessel.
Stress Intensification Factor Scratchpad

The new module shows the effects of the various code options available in CAESAR II, and
illustrates the relationship between the various interpretations. WRC 329 SIF options are
included. SIFs for stanchions on elbows are also computed.
Miscellaneous
A pen plotting program (PENPLT) plots up to 2500 element models (LARGE Includes) on
the screen or on an HPGL compatible hardware device.
The static output processor has been updated to support VGA graphics and to provide
screen dumps to HP Laser Jet Series II compatible printers.
Updated SYSCHK program now checks that SHARE is loaded when necessary. Missing
coprocessor is also immediately reported.
Updated PLTS now allow you to save labels, scaling information, and file names during
plotting sessions.
Updated ROT (rotating equipment program) provides additional code interpretations for the
HEI bulletin.
The BIGPRT (large job printing program) has been expanded to handle even larger jobs and
to provide a local element report.
As of Version 3.15, CAESAR II uses ESL devices to authorize access to the software. The
ESLs are more stable than the previously used keydisk and provide additional client
information to the software. Additional information on the ESLs can be found in the update
pages for the User Manual.
The first access of Version 3.15 will cause the ESL activation code to prompt for the
keydisks (both unlimited and limited). Both keydisks must be available to properly activate
the ESL.
A printer setup program (PRSET) is provided to adjust the number of lines per logical page
for dot matrix printers, useful for page lengths longer than 11 inches.
1192
Update History
The internal file maintenance utility has been completely rewritten. The new file handler
provides the same capabilities as the previous file handler but with faster response times.
Additionally, the new file handler is compatible with disk partitions larger than 32 Mbytes,
and manipulates the data files created by Versions 3.xx of CAESAR II.
A configuration program has been added to CAESAR II to allow you to modify the
SETUP.CII file from spreadsheets. The configuration program also includes the standard
COADE help interface to facilitate setting the directives.
The structural programs (C2S and AISC) have been revised to access either the 1977 AISC
database or the 1989 AISC database. Additionally, the AISC program has been updated to
perform the unity checks (code compliance) using the 1989 code which includes the
methodology for checking single angles.
The equipment module (ROT) has been enhanced to handle vertical in-line pumps for
API-610, 7th Edition.
The Stoomwezen 1989 (Dutch) piping code has been added.
Three additional spring hanger tables have been added (Basic Engineering, Capitol Pipe
Supports, Piping Services Company).
The editors found in the structural preprocessor, the ASCII file editor, and the piping
preprocessor title page have been modified to allow the insertion and deletion of single
characters. Appropriate screen instructions are provided where necessary.
An automatic loop closure command has been added to the piping preprocessor.
A jacketed pipe example has been included in the documentation. The input file for this
example is included in the EXAMPLES set on the distribution diskettes.
Updated moduli of elasticity for default CAESAR II materials based on 1990 code revisions.
Support of DOS environments now available in CAESAR II. This allows you to run the
software from various subdirectories on the hard disk other than the installation directory.
Facilities have been provided to enable you to modify the default colors used throughout
CAESAR II. Four predefined sets of text colors are provided as well as the ability to modify
whichever set is currently selected.
The Utilities menu has been expanded to include all of the secondary CAESAR II
processors.
Help has been added for the Input graphics, the Pen Plot graphics, and WRC 107.
A new online error processor has been incorporated. This enables the software to provide
an explanation of the cause of many fatal error messages, as opposed to the display of only
the error number.
The file handler has been modified to allow the manual entry of a new job name.
The input piping preprocessor now includes a material number (21) for User Defined
Materials.
1193
Update History
The Static and Dynamic Output menus have been modified to allow you to return directly to
the input, or in the case of the dynamics output, to invoke the animation module directly.
Graphics for flange selection and output have been added to the ASME Flange modules.
Input and output file sequencing are checked to aid in Quality Assurance, insuring that the
current input file produced the current output file. Input Echo reports are also possible from
the static output processor.

Codes and Databases
The Canadian codes Z183 and Z184 have been revised according to the 1990/1992
publications.
The Italian spring hanger manufacturer INOFLEX has been added.
The Database option of the configuration program now allows you to set the Valve and
Flange database. Additionally a database excluding flanges (NOFLANGE) is included.
The Material Database used for the Flange Stress/Leakage module has been updated. The
new database includes all changes from the ASME Sect VIII, Division 1, A91 Addenda, the
materials are listed in code order, and the number of materials has increased from 450 to
1100.
The structural modules C2S and AISC have been updated to work with the German
structural steel library.
Interfaces Added
A new neutral file interface is provided which allows a two way transfer of data between the
CAESAR II input file and an ASCII text file.
An interface is provided between Stoners LIQT program and the dynamic modules of
CAESAR II. This interface enables dynamic pipe forces from a time domain analysis to be
used in the generation of a force spectrum.
Miscellaneous Changes
The static stress summary report has been modified so that the maximum code stress
percent is reported, not the maximum code stress.
A miscellaneous option has been added to the configuration program. This option allows
various options, including the specification of the ANSI, JIS, or DIN piping specifications.
Other options available from the Miscellaneous menu are:
Intro/Exit Screens (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the display of the initial entry
screen and the final exit screen.
Yes/No Prompts (On/Off) - This option can be used to disable the yes/no/are_you_sure
prompts.
Output Reports by Load Case (Yes/No) - By default, CAESAR II produces static output
reports by load case. This option can be used to generate the same reports by subject.
1194
Update History
Displacement Report Node Sort (Yes/No) - This option can be used to disable the nodal
sorting of the static displacement report.
The file handler has been modified to enable directory and disk drive selection and logging.
You also have control of the initial display of the file names. This allows you to set the sort
order as well as the single/multi-column display presentation.
A file verification routine has been added to check the installation of CAESAR II. This aids in
detecting software corruption due to hard disk defects and viruses.
A new report has been added to the static output menu. This enables you to obtain a local
force/moment report for the elements in the system.
A 32 bit version of the dynamic summation module is provided for large dynamic analysis.
This module requires at least a 386 processor.
The animation module has been modified to provide hard copy output of the mode shapes.
Batch Stream Processor - A new processor has been included which allows multiple jobs
(up to 12) to be run in series, without intervention. The jobs can be static analysis, dynamic
analysis, or both.
Expansion Joint Database - The Pathway Bellows expansion joint database has been
updated. The new database includes two additional pressure classes and diameters out to
144 inches.
A new expansion joint database from RM Engineered Products has been added for this
release.
Input Echo - The input echo processor has been modified so that the input echo precedes
the output data. Additionally, the intermediate data generated by the error checker now
appears in this listing.
B31G - The B31G criteria for the remaining strength of corroded pipelines has been
incorporated. This module includes the original B31G criteria as well as several of the
modified methods discussed in the Battelle project.
Output Processor - A new report has been added to the output processor which generates a
Restraint Summary report. This summary details all the loads for all selected load cases for
each restraint in the model.
Thermal Bowing - The effects of thermal bowing on horizontal pipes can be analyzed. By
specifying the thermal gradient between the bottom and the top of the pipe, CAESAR II
computes the loads induced and include them with the thermal loads.
32 Bit Modules - All of the dynamic modules have been moved from the 16 bit mode to the
32 bit mode. Additionally, the animation program now supports EGA and VGA display
modes.
Title Page Template - A user-configurable ASCII text file can now be used as a title page
template.
Interface Updates - The CAESAR II data matrix interface and the Autoplant interface have
both been updated to use the currently active units file. The ComputerVision interface has
been updated to handle tube type piping.
1195
Update History
Expansion Joint Rating - The expansion joint rating module, ERATE, has been moved into
the Miscellaneous Module, facilitating input through the standard spreadsheets.
Refractory Lining - The computation modules of CAESAR II have been modified to accept a
negative value of insulation thickness. If a negative thickness is encountered, the software
assumes the insulation is refractory lining (inside the pipe).
Minimum Required Thickness - The piping error checker now makes the minimum required
thickness computation according to B31.1, 104.1. This information is reported for each pipe
in the listing of intermediate data (See item 3 above).
Spring Hanger Tables - The E. Myatt & Co. spring hanger table has been added.
ESL Updates - All of the code used to access the ESLs has been updated to allow access to
the 50 and 66 Mhz CPUs.
Missing Mass - The dynamics modules can consider missing mass effects in the spectrum
solutions.
Seismic Anchor Movements - The dynamics modules allows the specification of seismic
anchor movements for independent support motion analysis.
RCC-M - The French piping code RCC-M, Section C has been incorporated.
Languages - The input and dynamic output supports English, French, and Spanish language
headings. Language dependent files can be activated with the appropriate command line
switch on the INSTALL directive. For example, INSTALL /S installs any Spanish specific
files.
PCX Files - All of the graphics modules have been modified to allow the images to be saved
to disk files in PCX format. This enables these images to be brought into word processing
and desktop publishing systems.
A completely new documentation set accompanies this release. This documentation

consists of: a User Guide, an Applications Guide, and a Technical Reference Guide.
The static in-core and out-of-core solvers have been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode
utilizing extended memory. Solution times for large jobs have been cut by an order of
magnitude.
The Static Output processor has been converted to run in 32 bit protect mode utilizing
extended memory.
Both the Static and Dynamic Output processors now have the capability to generate ASCII
disk files on any drive or directory (using the COADE file manager) on the computer.
Additionally, a table of contents summarizing the output is generated for printer and disk
devices.
The Dynamic Output processor now includes titles and page numbers (similar to statics),
and provides input echo (both system and dynamic) abilities.
Modal time history analysis has been added. This includes output report review and
animated response review.
Standard spectrum analysis now includes modal components for displacements. Additionally
displacement information is now available for static-dynamic combinations.
1196
Update History
The Included Mass Report has been clarified and modified to include the active mass in
each of the global directions. The percent of the force included/added is now based on a
vector sum rather than an absolute sum.
The ZPA used in the missing force correction can now be controlled via the configuration
file. You can specify that the ZPA be based on the last extracted mode or the last spectrum
value.
The static load case array space has been increased by a factor of 5, allowing more
flexibility in static load case setup.
API 650 nozzle flexibilities, according to the ninth edition, July 1993.
Checks for allowable loads on Fired Heater Tubes according to API-560 have been added.
As an option, you can consider the effects of pressure stiffening on straight pipes.
Three additional spring hanger tables: Sinopec (China), BHEL (India), and Flexider (Italy).
The Australian structural steel shape database has been added.
The ASME material database has been updated to reflect the 1992 Code addendum.
The printer testing routines have been completely rewritten. Additionally, output can be
directed to any LPT port.
The ability to configure the printer, either dot matrix or laser jet. This is implemented through
a text file containing the printer formatting codes which you can modify.
Password protection for input data files, to prevent modification of completed projects.
All of the screens in the piping preprocessor (except for the main spreadsheet) are now
supported in Spanish and French.
Input/Output file time/date sequencing checks have been added to the dynamics modules.
The Break command in the piping input processor has been modified to accept input in
feet-inch units instead of only feet. This should allow compound entries in any units system.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and Enhancements

(7/94)
Most of the CAESAR II executable modules have been converted from Microsoft 16 bit
FORTRAN to WATCOM 32 bit FORTRAN. This has reduced the low DOS RAM requirements of
the software from 577k to 475k.
The modules converted to 32 bit operation for Version 3.21 are summarized below:
Static Stress Computation Module (1)
Piping, Buried & Structural Steel Input Modules (3)
Piping Error Checker (1)
Load Case & Dynamic Input Module (1)
All CAD interfaces (8)
Neutral File interfaces (2)
1197
Update History
The software now supports an ESL from a new vendor. This provides CAESAR II with full
networking abilities. The software first checks for a local ESL (from either vendor), then for a
network ESL.
Toward the support for network operations, the data files which are not job specific are now
assumed to be located in a SYSTEM subdirectory underneath the CAESAR II installation
directory. These data files include: the input listing formatting files (*.INP), the accounting data
files, the printer formatting file, the file handler template file, and the various header files.
The common factor among all of these files is that they are specific to a company installation,
not a particular data directory. Up until Version 3.21, these data files were manipulated by the
software (or sometimes directly by you) in the installation directory. However, many network
installations write protect their installation directories, making modifications to these files
impossible. These files are placed in a SYSTEM subdirectory to which you should be given
complete access.
CAESAR II Version 3.21 is capable of running on a local machine (with either vendors
local ESL) or on a network (with the network ESL). The changes made to the software enable
the same version to be run under these various configurations.
Added additional spring hanger manufacturer has been added, Carpenter & Paterson, UK.
The UBC (Uniform Building Code) earthquake spectra have been added.
The B31.5 piping code has been added.
The piping code addenda have been reviewed and any necessary changes made to the
software. The addenda include revisions for: ASCE #7, B31.1, B31.8, ASME NC, and ASME
ND.
The SIF scratch-pad from the Miscellaneous processor (Option C of the Main Menu) has
been incorporated into the piping preprocessor. This processor includes all of the supported
piping codes (not just B31.1 and B31.3 as before) and all of the fittings. Additionally, any
changes made to the scratch-pad data can optionally be transferred directly to the main
CAESAR II data spreadsheets.
Additional changes to the input piping preprocessor include the following:

problem size is now dependent on the amount of free extended memory - the old limit of 400
elements is now upwards of 8,000 elements
graphics menus automatically turned off for hard copies
optional node number display for supports, anchors, hangers, and nozzles
function key map shown on main spreadsheet
auxiliary input spreadsheets support help
The accounting system has been completely rewritten. This provides a more streamlined
interface. Additionally, accounting statistics are now recorded from the stress computation
modules (previous versions only recorded the actual matrix decomposition times).
The API-617 and NEMA-SM23 reports have been overhauled so that the code compliance
when using non-English units systems is consistent.
The new Flange Rigidity factor from ASME Section VIII has been added.
A new loader (C2.EXE) has replaced the original one (C2.COM). This new loader performs
initial startup checks, with diagnostic reporting if necessary, and enables error processing
from the Main Menu.
1198
Update History
The configuration program has been modified to track changes. If you attempt to [Esc] out
after making changes, you are warned that the changes will not be saved.
A graphics viewer has been added to the file manager. This enables rapid model plotting
directly from the file manager of the Main Menu.
Additional directives are available to disable the generation of the Table of Contents page,
and disable the display of the spreadsheet function key mapping.
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes & Enhancements

(4/95)
The Harmonic solver has been updated to provide damping. Harmonic analysis can now
include or exclude damping as you deem necessary.
The following codes have been reviewed (and any necessary changes made) for
compliance to the latest editions: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, NC, ND, and BS-806.
The following additional piping codes have been added: RCCM-D, CODETI, and TBK 5-6.
Center of Gravity calculations have been added with results displayed in the error checker.
A Bill of Materials report has been added.
Yield criterion stresses can be computed as either Von Mises or as 3D Maximum Shear
Stress intensity.
Hoop Stress can be computed based on Outer Diameter, Inner Diameter, Mean Diameter, or
Lames equation.
The spring hanger design spreadsheet has been modified to default to a 25% load variation.
In addition, the actual hanger load variation now appears in the hanger output reports.
A new command (WIND) has been added to the structural steel preprocessor. This allows
selective wind loading on an element by element basis.
A new key-combination Alt-D is available in the input processor to compute the distance
between two nodes.
User-specified coordinates for up to 30 nodes are saved in the input file.
The input title page has been expanded from 19 to 60 lines.
Automatic node numbering abilities have been added to the spreadsheets of the main piping
input module
Expansion Joint databases from IWK (Germany) are provided.
Expansion Joint database from Senior Flexonics is provided.
MISC converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the SIF, Flange, WRC297,
B31G, and expansion joint rating computations.
ROT converted to 32 bit operations. This module provides the equipment calculations for
NEMA, API, and HEI. General revisions made for more consistent input screens and help
messages.
A new report option (in static output) is available to review the miscellaneous computations
made by the error checker. This report includes: SIFs and flexibility factors, pipe properties,
nozzle flexibility data, wind data, CG data, and the bill of materials report.
1199
Update History
The Intergraph Interface has been improved. The interface now transfers the
temperature/pressure pairs. Additionally, if a material mapping file is present, material data
can be set correctly by CAESAR II.
The CADPIPE Interface has been updated in accordance with CADPIPE Version 4.0.
The Restraint Summary in the static output processor has been modified to include the
translational displacements of the restrained nodes.
The output processors (static and dynamic) have been modified to allow you to change the
name of the disk output file if necessary. Additionally, modifications have been made so that
only a single output device can be enabled.
All language files have been translated into German. Use INSTALL /G to acquire the
German files.
A new control F8 at the output menu level allows switching jobs without returning to the
Main menu.
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes (3/96)

The following items have been completed for the 3.23 release:
Mouse support has been added to most modules.
The German piping code, FBDR, has been added.
Major improvements to FRP (fiber reinforced plastic) stress calculations. This includes the
BS 7159 code and guidelines set forth by FRP manufacturers.
A bi-directional link to CADWorx/Plant (COADEs Piping CAD system) has been added.
The WRC107 module has been redesigned to incorporate multiple load cases and perform
the ASME Division 2 Stress Intensity Summation, all in one step.
An interface to Sunrise Systems PIPENET program has been developed.
The South African structural steel tables are being added.
Two new spring hanger manufacturers tables have been added; Comet (UK), and
Witzenmann (Germany).
Two new commands have been added to the structural preprocessor: UNIT, and GLOAD.
The CADPIPE interface has been updated to comply with the new release (Version 4.1) of
CADPIPE.
Additional modifications have been made to the Intergraph interface.
The low DOS RAM requirement has been reduced to 420 Kbytes.
The equipment module has been updated to reflect the 1995 edition of API-617.
The following U.S. piping codes have been updated according to recent editions: B31.3
(1995)
1200
Update History
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes & Enhancements

(3/97)
Multiple (3) displacement/force/uniform load vectors have been added. These load cases,
called D1/D2/D3 and F1/F2/F3, may be toggled on the input plot by continuing to press F3
and F5 (displacements cycle through D1, D2, D3, and then off). The naming of these load
cases has also required the renaming of the CAESAR II load combination terms D1, F1,
S1, etc. must now be called DS1, FR1, and ST1. All hanger loads and cold spring forces
(from materials 18 and 19) are still combined into load case F1 for consistency with previous
versions of CAESAR II.
A material database for piping properties and allowable stresses for many of the piping
codes supported by CAESAR II has been implemented. This is invoked by pressing [ALT M]
on the main CAESAR II input spreadsheet (also at the list option and on the WRC 297
nozzle flexibility spreadsheet). After bringing up the list of materials, a material name can be
typed in; matching records are then displayed for selection. Allowable stresses are updated
automatically whenever temperatures, materials, and/or piping codes change.
Database management is provided from the Utilities option of the main menu. You can edit
COADE provided materials or add your own. Material parameters can be provided for code
0 (represents generic values for any non-specified code) or for specific codes. It is
recommended, due to future implementation plans, that metals be assigned identification
numbers between 100 and 699. FRP materials receive numbers between 700 and 999.
Selection of FRP materials from the material database does not currently activate the
orthotropic material model in CAESAR II. This must still be done through the use of material
20 (see item 6 concerning this below).
Eight-character job names are now supported. Input files are identified by extension ._A,
output files by extension ._P, ._S, and so on. Existing files are automatically recognized and
converted to their new format. (See related item 16 below.)
Modifications have been made to allow multiple users working from the same network data
directory through the environment variable COADE_USER. This environment variable
should be set to a unique 3 character combination, such as the initials, for each user working
in the common directory. Implementation can be done by adding to your AUTOEXEC.BAT
file a line such as: SET COADE_USER=TVL
CAESAR IIs Valve and Flange database now incorporates data files from CADWorx/Plant.
This change provides four advantages:
Component weights and lengths are more accurate, as well as traceable to specific
catalogs, standards, and so on.
Weights and lengths are provided for more components than were previously available
in the CRANE or GENERIC databases.
Because CADWorx/Plant data files are text files, you can easily edit or add
components.
If you also have CADWorx/Plant on your computer, the two programs share the same
data files and project specs, enhancing the performance of the bi-directional interface.
Gaskets are included for flanged items, so a better fit is provided between the
CADWorx/Plant and CAESAR II models.
1201
Update History
You can now set default values for FRP (material 20) parameters through the
configuration/setup. These default parameters can be read automatically from
manufacturers data files by toggling through the list of available files, and then pressing
[ALT-U] (for Update) on the selected vendor file. Vendor files are recognized by their .FRP
extensions; because these are text files, you can create them easily yourself, or vendors
may distribute them to their customers.
The UKOOA (United Kingdom Offshore Operators Association) piping code for FRP piping
has been added.
The Z183 and Z184 piping codes have been replaced with the Z662 code, which has been
expanded to consider calculation of stresses in restrained piping.
The ASCE #7 wind code has been updated to the 1995 edition.
The API-610 code in the equipment module has been updated to the 8th edition.
ASME Section VIII Division 2 stress indices and WRC-107 SIF (kn, kb) values have been
incorporated into the WRC-107 module.
The Relief Load Synthesis dynamics module now supports metric (or custom) units.
A number of configuration file default values have been revised in order to improve
calculational results or software performance:
Changed
From
To
BEND_LENGTH_ATTACHMENT=
5.0
1.0
BEND_AXIAL_SHAPE =
NO
YES
FRICT_STIFF =
50000
1.0E6
FRICT_NORM_FORCE_VAR =
25
15
FRICT_ANGLE_VAR =
30
15
VALVE_&_FLANGE =
GENERIC
CADWORX
Four new directives added to the configuration file.

SYSTEM_DIRECTORY_NAMEUser defined, defaults to SYSTEM. You vsn now maintain
multiple system directories for different projects)
UNITS_FILE_NAMEUser-selected from list. Current units are now set through the
configuration/setup, not through the units option of the main menu.
BS_7159_PRESSURE_STIFFENINGDesign strain or Actual Pressure.
FRP_PROPERTY_DATA_FILEUser-selected from list.
The configuration file can also be password protected in the Installation Directory. This
prevents modification of all Computation and Stress Control directives. Subsequent use of
the configuration module prevents modification of these directives, unless the password is
known. Colors, printer settings, and so on can still be changed without the password.
CAESAR II has been modified to accept an optional job name (including full drive and path
data) as an argument. The software switches to the appropriate drive and directory, opens
the specified job, and goes into input bypassing the Main Menu. This allows the definition of
1202
Update History
._A files as CAESAR II input files under Windows 95 and subsequent double clicking on the
file name in a Windows/95 explorer window to start the input processor on the picked job file.
This also allows CAESAR II to be spawned from other programs, right into a job.
Modifications to CAD interfaces: Intergraph and CADPIPE.
All necessary routines have been checked and modified where appropriate to address the
Year 2000 issue.
A Korean structural steel shape library has been added.
A new spring hanger table has been added (SARAFTHI).
PD-5500 nozzle flexibilities have been incorporated to complement the WRC-297 and API
650 nozzle connections.

(1/98)
The CAESAR II Version 4.00 release is a major program rewrite making it compatible with
Windows 95/NT (version 4.0) operating systems. Minimal functionality enhancements were
included in order to make CAESAR II input files interchangeable between Version 4.00 and
CAESAR II Version 3.24, the last DOS-based version. Specific new features include:
Simultaneous review of graphics and spreadsheet.
Addition of rendering and wireframe graphics in plot mode.
The ability to turn off subsequent occurrences of an error type in the piping error checker.
The ability to extract loads directly from a piping output file for inclusion in the WRC 107 and
rotating equipment modules.
Addition of bend mid-point modes (indicated by angle M) which allow you to designate the
mid-point of the bend without knowing the included angle.
Ability to review 132-column reports on screen.

(1/99)
9 temperatures, 9 pressures, 9 displacement sets, and 9 force/moment sets.
Finalization of TD/12 piping code.
Fatigue capabilities including cumulative damage.
Increase in number of load cases to 99.
Reactivation of the input LIST facilities.
Printing capabilities for graphical renderings.
Saving graphics images to BMP files.
Online User and Quick Reference Guide in PDF format.
Update of piping codes (CODETI, NC, ND, B31.1, B31.3).
1203
Update History
Addition of results filters to output reports.
Update of the Technical Reference Manual to reflect Windows version of CAESAR II.
Variability of mill tolerance on an element-by-element basis.

(2/00)
New Input Graphics - utilizes a true 3D library, enabling graphic element selection.
New local coordinate element input and specification.
Completely revised material database, including Code updates.
Optional static output in ODBC compliant database format.
Hydrodynamic loading for offshore applications. This includes the Airy, Stokes 5th, and
Stream Function wave theories, as well as Linear and Power Law current profiles.
Wind analysis expanded to handle up to 4 wind load cases.
New piping codes: B31.4 Chapter IX, B31.8 Chapter VIII, and DNV (ASD).
A wave scratchpad - see the recommended theory graphically, or plot the particle data for
the specified wave.
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
Automatic Dynamic DLF Plotting.
Witzenmann expansion joint databases.
As a result of the merger between Senior Flexonics and Pathway Bellows, a new expansion
joint database replaces the two previous individual databases.
A new spring hanger vendor (Myricks) is provided.
PCF Interface.

(3/01)
New Static Load Case Builder / Editor. Allows multiplication factors on load components plus
additional combination methods (SRSS, Algebraic, ABS, Min, Max, Signed Min, Signed Max,
and Scalar).
Z-Up - Build or review models with Z as the vertical axis instead of Y. Switch between Y and
Z up automatically.
New undo/redo ability in the piping input module.
Piping input can be sent to ODBC database.
A new data export wizard is provided to selectively target input or output data for ODBC
export.
All modules support optional output directly to MS-Word.
1204
Update History
Updated piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, ASME NC, and ASME ND.
User control over the auto-save feature implemented.
Improvements to the 3D graphics (job specific configuration, additional data display).
Added graphics to the WRC 107 Module to show loads and orientation.
Added a new Code Compliance report to the static output processor.
Spring hanger design expanded from 3 to 9 operating cases.

(5/02)
Revised piping codes: B31.3, B31.4, B31.5, B31.8, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Added the B31.11 piping code.
Added an alpha-numeric node label option to the piping input module.
Expanded Static Load case options: (1) added load components H, CS, HP, and WW
(hanger loads, cold spring, hydro pressure, and weight filled with water, respectively), (2)
added HYDRO stress type, (3) added option to set snubber and hanger status on a load
case basis, (4) provided ability to scale friction factor on a load case basis.
Added automatic generation of a hydrotest load case (WW+HP, HYD stress type, and spring
hangers locked), triggered by the presence of a non-zero HP.
Updated the 3D input graphics as well as partial implementation in the static output
processor, including the Element Viewer.
Updated the spring hanger design algorithm to provide the option to iterate the Operating for
Hanger Travel load case to include the stiffness of the selected hanger.
Added new configuration options for the following:
Ambient temperature.
Default friction coefficient. If this value is nonzero, it automatically gets applied to new
translational restraints.
Liberal stress allowable.
Stress stiffening.
Bourdon settings.
How to handle B16.9 welding tee and sweepolet SIFs in B31.3.
Added two new spring manufacturers' tables Pipe Supports USA and Quality Pipe Supports.
Added the ability to define the flexibility factor on bends.
Piping and structural files now support long file names. These files may be located in any
directory path. The number of included structural files has been expanded from 10 to 20.
Results of the Hanger Design Cases are now optionally viewable in the Static Output
Processor. To use this option, set status to KEEP in the Load Case Options.
Added the ability to filter static Restraint reports by CNODE status.
1205
Update History
Added a new warning report to the static output.
Added a dirty flag to the piping input preprocessor and the configuration modules.
Attempting to exit these processors without saving changes produces a warning message.
Added the ability to detect the differences between material data in the input file and that in
the material database (including missing user-materials). This feature offers you the
opportunity to use the original data.
Reviewed/updated the minimum wall computation for all piping codes for straight pipe.
Added a field for specifying Marine Growth Density to the Wind/Wave dialog box.
Updated API-661 to 4th Edition.
Added the ability to save static load case data without running the job.

(11/03)
Revised material database for B31.1 A2001 changes.
Added Reducer element.
Improved interaction and error reporting in static load case editor.
Improved graphics changes include:
A walk-through option is available.
The static output processor can now produce colored stress plots of the piping system.
A graphical find (zoom to) option has been added.
Instant use of graphics, even before drawing is completed.
Recitable restraint/hanger symbols.
Added Spectrum wizard for the generation of earthquake and relief valve spectra.
Revised codes: B31.1, B31.4, ASME NC, ASME ND, IGE/TD/12, API-610.
Included additional FRP data files.
The static output processor remembers all user settings, such as filters, labels, and report
size.
Added dynamic help system for piping & structural input and configuration.
Added automatic acquisition of website software updates.
Combined WRC-107/297 module for local stress calculations.
Redesigned the structural steel interface for easier operation.
Implemented a new job wizard for the creation of structural steel input models.
Modified to allow multiple instances of CAESAR II to run.
Implemented Load Case Template for recommending static load cases.
Modified to allow access to the output for expired date or run limited ESL.
1206
Update History

(11/05)
Added the following new piping codes: EN-13480, GPTC/192, Z662 Ch 11.
Revised, due to code changes, the following piping codes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.5, B31.8,
B31.11, ASME NC, ASME ND, CODETI, TBK 5-6.
Updated API-610 codes and standards.
Added Ameron Bondstrand, and Conely FRP Pipe Specification files.
Added Binder (UK) and PiHASA (Spain) Spring Hanger tables.
Added Structural Steel databases from India and Japan.
Renamed all references to Grinnell to Anvil.
Added the capability to perform dynamic analysis optionally using a consistent mass matrix.
This obviates the need to re-mesh the model for better mass distribution.
Added the capability to perform an analysis using the hot material elastic modulus.
Enhanced the static output processor to provide you with the ability to create custom,
reusable reports.
Revised the piping input processor to provide a combined view showing both the graphics
and the spreadsheet. The new piping input processor has integrated the Piping Error
Checker, and access to the configuration module has been provided. For debugging and
problem solving, relevant sections of the spreadsheet can be torn off and placed on the
graphics pane, allowing the spreadsheet to be hidden for larger graphics display.
Additionally, sections of the model can be graphically selected and then modified.
Updated the Intergraph and PCF interfaces.
Added an Isogen export facility allowing the creation of Isogen stress isometrics.

( 9/07)
Added flange rating evaluation per B16.5 and NC-3658.
Graphics Improvements:
Improved graphics rendering speed proved by 20% to 50% depending on the job.
Added additional controls to view corrosion and densities.
Added the ability to import an Autocad (CADWorx) model directly into the piping input,
to provide visualization of supporting steel, vessels and other equipment.
Static Output Processor Improvements:
Reduced report generation times by 70% or better.
Added Presentation in tabbed window to allow viewing multiple reports, and immediate
switching between reports.
1207
Update History
Added ability to select Individual items from the Miscellaneous Report.
Added ability to zoom reports and individually direct to an output device using a context
menu.
Added ability to import and export custom report templates.
Static Load Case Editor Enhancements
Added In-Line Flange Evaluation at the load case level.
Added the ability to alter the occasional load multiplier on a per load case basis.
Added the ability to import static load case data from different jobs.
Added the ability to copy wind and wave vectors.
Added user control over whether or not insulation should be considered in hydro test cases.
Added PD-8010 Part 1 and Part 2 piping code.
Revised the following piping codes due to code changes: B31.1, B31.3, B31.4, Z662,
EN-13480.
Added support for B31.3 Section 319.2.3(c), allowing axial stress to be included in the
Expansion Code Stress.
Revised API-661 to 6th Edition.
Revised Wind and Seismic load calculations to ASCE #7 2005.
Added a number of European materials to the material database.
Updated stainless steel pipe specification data per B36.19M.
Updated DIN pipe size specification to comply with EN-10220 (seamless) instead of
DIN-2458 (welded).
Added Chinese structural steel and expansion joint databases.
Added spring hanger data from Gradior Power, (Czech Republic).
Updated the flange material database per ASME Sect VIII Div 1, 2007 Edition.
Updated the Inoflex Spring Hanger data.

(4/09)
Added ISO-14692 Code for FRP systems.
Added a Loop Optimization Wizard to assist in expansion loop design.
Added the American LifeLines Alliance as a second soil stiffness method to the Buried Pipe
Modeler.
Added the Mexican Seismic Code to the Dynamic Input module for the automatic generation
of response spectra.
Added a static seismic wizard to assist in computing G factors for ASCE, NBC, and CFE.
Added additional wind codes (10)to the Static Load setup.
1208
Update History
Raised the permitted number of static load cases from 99 to 999.
Modified the valve/flange insertion routine to cut back the straight pipe length if necessary.
Added a number of lists to the Piping Input Spreadsheet to assist with input specification.
These lists appear on the bend radius and insulation density fields.
Streamlined Spring Hanger Table definition through the addition of three checkboxes for
cold load design, extended range springs, and centered hot load.
Flange Symbols are now drawn on the piping elements if flange ratings have been
requested.
Revised the following piping codes have been revised due to code changes: B31.1, B31.8,
GPTC/Z380, ASME NC, ASME ND.
Moved user-writeable subdirectories from below \caesarii to the %allusersprofile area.
Added automatic e-mail generation for technical support issues.
Improved the File Open dialog box to permit the roll-back to earlier revisions of the (piping)
input.
Added a new exportto MS Excel option for Static Output data. This is raw data only to
improve export speed.

(11/10)
Added the B31.9 piping.
Updated the following piping codes: RCCM-C, RCCM-D, ASME-NC, ASME-ND,

GPTC/Z380, Z662, B31.1, B31.3, EN-13480 (2010 Draft).
Added the ability to visually show on the Static Output menu which load cases have passed
or failed.
Added the spring hanger databases for PSS (Germany) and Seonghwa (Korea).
Added structural tubing shapes to the AISC Structural database.
Added a new restraint report showing reactions in local element coordinates.
Added additional flexibility with user material databases through user named files.
Added the ability to have user configurable nozzle limits.
Added insulation, cladding & refractory specifications
Improved the uniform load to display Gs or force/length in same job
Improved the displacement import/export facility.
Improved the PCF interface.
Improved the WRC module.
Added graphics/modeling/Interfacing improvements:
Improved the Valve/Flange database option to keep 3 elements
Added the ability to automatically generate Flange G values
1209
Update History
Added the ability to specify optional spring hanger hardware weight.
Added the ability to automatically included API-650 nozzle displacement values in the
model.
Added the ability to plot Spectra and Time Histories in dynamics.
Added line number specification and manipulation.
Added the ability to add or reassign key strokes.
Improved the CAESAR II documentation search capabilities by adding a combined PDF

Search.

(5/12)
Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF).
Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced PCF
(APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor.
Enhanced the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added new element order commands for block operations: Invert and Change Sequence.
Added usability improvements to reduce user input and editing time, including the use of line
numbers to block select elements.
Improved many Isogen-related issues.

(10/13)
Updated piping code information for ASME B31.1, B31.3, B31.8, B31.9, and Z662 codes.
Enhanced and improved the Smart 3D to CAESAR II interface (PCF). (This is also available
in Version 5.31.)
Introduced a faster, interactive, on-demand and flexible PCF interface, called Advanced
PCF (APCF) Import, into the Piping Input processor. From the APCF Import dialog box,
you can quickly import the model from design software, such as Intergraph's SmartPlant 3D,
saving time while reducing errors. (APCF Import is also available in Version 5.31.)
Added the import of the SmartPlant 3D (S3D)/SmartPlant Review (SPR) graphic

environment (VUE file), along with filtering capabilities within CAESAR II input to provide
context to the pipe stress analyst. You can also generate this VUE file from SmartPlant
Review.
1210
Update History
Updated the CAESAR II Data Export Wizard to support ODBC Microsoft Access format,
which facilitates round-trip results to S3D and SPR.
Added an option to store a revision number and line numbers.
Added a new Restraint Summary output report.
Included new functionality so you can send a user Load Case name, if specified.
Implemented other enhancements to simplify the process for generating the database.
Added new element order commands for block operations: invert and change sequence.
Invert _ reverses the order of one or more elements in a selected group, as well as the
node numbering.
Change Sequence _ moves (or rearranges) the sequence of one or more blocks of
elements to another location in the CAESAR II model.
Added usability improvements to reduce the input and editing time.
Enhanced line numbers with a Renumber _ operation that lets you select a group of
nodes on which to perform block operations.
Added functionality that lets you renumber when you select elements on the graphical
model.
Added functionality that lets you renumber boundary nodes after using the Renumber
operation.
Enhanced the graphical model with an option to retain the colors for line numbers
across user sessions on a per-job basis.
Included the ability to clear a window by using the SHIFT + CLICK window selection.
Added ability to edit or delete annotations on the input and output graphics.
Increased performance and functionality with enhancements.
Updated the personal Isogen module to Personal ISOGEN 2012 R1 (8.1).
Updated the CAESAR II 3D Graphics engine.
Continued standardization for development using ASME NQA-1.
Implemented Japanese localization in the following areas:
Translated the user interface (Static Analysis module) and selected documentation in
Japanese.
Added Japanese seismic code, KHK Level 1.
Added spring hanger databases for Mitsubishi, Yamashita, Sanwa Tekki, and Techno.
Updated and enhanced documentation to include more context-sensitive (F1) help and
additional task-oriented information.
1211
Update History
Updated the CAESAR II main menu to use the Office 2010 ribbon interface.
Rewrote the methodology used by the Piping Error checker (PIERCK.EXE) in determining
duplicated allowable stress data for the elements. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the calculation of the bending stress at the From end of elements for PD 8010-2
(to use the SIF for the From end instead of the To end). (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1
Version 5.30.02, 110830 build.)
Corrected the usage of the in-plane/out-of-plane SIF configuration setting for CODETI
bends. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
Corrected the PD 8010-2 equivalent stress calculation to consider both positive and negative
bending effects. (Distributed in CAESAR II 2011 R1 Version 5.30.04, 120525 build.)
Implemented additional changes to how the software duplicates the Wc and Sy material
values to succeeding elements.
Corrected the calculation of the NC/ND branch stress index for reduced intersections of
reinforced tees.
Corrected the calculation of the (dynamic) mass matrix for elements with refractory lining.
Added corrosion consideration in the SIF computation for the CODETI piping code.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.9 2011 Edition.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.8 2010 Edition, including the hoops stress
change for Chapter VIII.
Implemented the piping code updates for B31.3 2010 Edition, including the following
revisions:
Modified the calculation of longitudinal stress for Sustained loads (SUS). This previously
optional calculation was referred to as ASME Code Case 178.
Added input values for two new stress indexes (It, Ia). The software uses the index
values in the new computation of Sustained and Occasional stresses.
Added the ability to calculate the allowable stress for Sustained and Occasional cases
at the temperature of the corresponding operating case. The software defaults the value
to the minimum Sh value; however, you can select a corresponding Sh.
Revised the allowable that CAESAR II uses for Appendix P Operating range cases to
include a new reduction option based on the ratio of yield versus tensile strength
(Sy/St).
1212
Update History
Updated the material properties in accordance with Appendix A.
Updated the SIF determination of Fillet or Socket welds.
Modified how the software determines the Sc value to use with range load cases.

(10/14)
CAESAR II 2014, Version 7.00
Updated to support the following piping code and material database updates:
ASME B31.1 code, 2012 Edition. This work included material property updates.
ASME B31.3 code, 2012 Edition. This work included a new equation for calculating
expansion stress cases with new SIF and index values. Extended the content for the
ASME B31.3 code update and B163 to 1400F.
ASME B31.8 code, 2012 Edition. Updated the code interpretation to use either of the
two combined biaxial stress equations for restrained pipe, as referred to in Paragraph
833.4, instead of using the maximum of the two. You can specify this using the Yield
Stress Criterion configuration setting in the SIFs and Stresses section of the
Configuration Editor.
ASME B31.5 code, 2013 Edition.
EN 13480 code, 2012 Edition. This work included addressing bend pressure stiffening
and changes to the longitudinal pressure stress equation, among other revisions.
ASME Section VIII, Div. 2, 2013 Edition. Added fatigue curves as per this edition.
Updated the Material database, as required for piping code updates.
Updated the flange rating for in-line flange checks per EN 1092-1:2013 and ANSI B16.5
2009.
Added support for ANSI 16.5 2009 metric flange ratings.
Addressed modeling and user interface issues, including:
Enabled quick global property changes (such as for temperature and pressure) from the
Legend dialog box in the 3D model.
Enhanced the Distance command to measure between two points in the 3D model
without requiring the input of node numbers.
Added a new Global menu in piping input, which includes the Block commands. These
commands are also accessible through the Block Operations toolbar and the right-click
context menu from the List>Elements dialog box.
Addressed graphics issues and other minor usability enhancements based on customer
feedback.
Enhanced the Structural Steel Wizard to display units for various input fields, added
more tool bar icons and enhanced input grid usability.
Improved static and dynamic analysis in the following areas:
1213
Update History
Revised the Static Analysis (Load Case Editor) to automatically recommend

Expansion (EXP) stress range load cases for better coverage of multiple operating
conditions.
Provided an option for users to select the allowable corresponding to temperature for
that particular Occasional (OCC) load case for B31.3 jobs.
Added support for in-line flange check evaluations for MAX and ABS load case
combinations.
Added improvements to functions that work with other interfaces, including:
Added the ability to import multiple supports at the same location from the Import PCF
or Intergraph Smart 3D PCF interfaces.
Enhanced the hanger table for support design with LISEGAs LICAD software in the
Data Export Wizard (Export to MS Access)
Improved several areas in output/post-processing, including:
Added output filters for flanges so that you can identify the most overstressed flanges.
Updated the software to show the actual Stress Indices (I) that are used for sustained
and occasional static load cases for ASME B31.3 code.
Updated the Generate Stress Isometrics (CAESAR II Isogen module) with

I-Configure 2014 (5.0).
Updated the user documentation in the following areas:
Updated the Quick Reference Guide with dates and information for all piping code
updates made in CAESAR II 2014.
Updated the F1 help in the Static Output Processor.
1214
Glossary
anchor
A stationary support used to restrict the movement of a pipe, sometimes caused by vibration,
expansion, or other external forces.
bend/elbow, long radius
A 90-degree bend or elbow with a radius that is equal to one and one-half times the nominal
size of the pipe.
bend/elbow, short radius
A 90-degree bend or elbow having a radius that is equal to the nominal size of the pipe.
branch
A connection for the same or a smaller pipe size.
butt-weld
A weld made when two beveled ends are butted together end-to-end and welded.
codes
A collection of regulations and guidelines for the design, construction, or operation of a facility or
a piping model. Code standards in CAESAR II include piping based on the region or the type of
piping, wind and seismic guidelines, and nozzle and flexibility standards.
coefficient of expansion
The numeric factor of expansion or contraction of a substance, due to a change in temperature.
coordinates
Intersecting north-south or east-west lines used to position foundations, equipment, supports,
buildings, models and so forth on a piping or structural model.
corrosion
A dissolving of a surface material made by a chemical reaction within a pipe.
corrosion allowance
The amount of surface material allowed to be eroded by the chemical reactions within a pipe,
while still permitting the pipe to be in service.
coupling
A fitting used to join two lengths of screwed pipe together. Couplings are also used as branch
connections on pipes or a nozzle connections on equipment.
diameter, inside (ID)
The circumference measured around the interior wall of a pipe.
1215
Glossary
diameter, nominal
A name given to represent a particular size of pipe.
diameter, outside (OD)
The circumference measured around the outer wall of a pipe.
fitting
A generic term describing components that are used to make turns, branches, or reductions in a
run of pipe.
flange
A ring-shaped piece that is welded or screwed on to the end of a pipe, which permits the pipe to
attach to other piping components.
gasket
A material that is put between two meeting surfaces to prevent leaks.
gate valve
A valve designed for the on or off control of a substance flowing through a pipe.
hanger
A pipe support used on horizontal piping that suspends the piping using a stationary object from
above.
insulation
An exterior covering on pipe or equipment that maintains a constant temperature.
nozzle
A connecting point of the piping system to a vessel or equipment. Nozzles are used in locations
where fluids are introduced or removed from a vessel or a piece of equipment.
nozzle orientation
A drawing depicting the location of nozzles around the perimeter of vessels or a piping system.
A nozzle orientation plan shows angular measurements from 0 degrees.
o-lets
Any of several fittings used to make branch connections for piping. O-let connections can
include weldolets (for welds), sockolet (for socket-welds), sweepolet (for contoured connections
with low SIFs) and latrolets (for lateral connections).
pipe rack
A structural framework that consists of a series of vertical columns that connect with horizontal
components. Pipe racks are generally used to support pipes traveling in a process facility or
plant.
pipe size, nominal
A descriptive name given to a pipe with reference to its size in diameter.
1216
Glossary
pipe support
A structural component that carries the weight of a piping system configuration.
pump
A mechanical devise used to move fluids under pressure from one location to another.
reducer
A pipe fitting with one end larger than the other that reduces the diameter of a run of pipe.
reinforcing pad
A plate contoured to the shape of a the element it lines that is positioned around a nozzle to
provide additional strength in the connection area.
seamless
A manufactured pipe made without any welding connections.
slip-on flange
A flange with a low hub where a pipe can be inserted prior to welding.
spring hanger
A pipe hanger that uses a coil spring to absorb pipe movement.
tee
A three-way fitting used for branch connections on a run of pipe. Tee types include welded and
extruded (or drawn).
tee, extruded (drawn)
A tee fitting designed with a smoothly contoured intersection that does not include welds. This
tee design reduces fabrication stress, withstands greater external loading, and eliminates the
need for external reinforcement.
thermal expansion
An increase in pipe dimension due to the application of heat.
valve
A device used to control the flow of a fluid through a pipe.
weld neck flange
A flange with a tapered neck that you can butt-weld to another beveled-ended piping
component.
1217
Glossary
1218
Index
%
% of Iterations Per Shift Before
Orthogonalization 711
1
1, 2, ... 9 for Partial Factor for Temperature
(A1) 220
3
3D Modeler 372
4
4 View 363, 626
A
About the CAESAR II Documentation 25
Absolute Method 703
Access Protected Data 105
Account Numbers Tab 1031
Accounting 1026
Accounts 1031
Activate Accounting Tab 1029
Activate Bourdon Effects 299
Activating the Accounting System 1028
Active Boundary Conditions 755
Actual Stress Settings 81
Add a new material to the database 1020
Add annotations for input features 773
Add annotations for output features 774
Add custom annotations for elemental
features 762
Add custom annotations for nodal
features 761
Add F/A in Stresses 96
Add input feature information 760
Add output feature information 761
Add PCF Files to Conversion List 1163
Add Pressure Thrust Force 875
Add Torsion in SL Stress 96
Added Mass Coefficient, Ca 198
Adding custom annotations 775
Advanced Options 72
Advanced PCF Import (APCF) 305
Advanced Settings 92
Advanced Tab 708
AFT IMPULSE 1094

After the Current Element 433
Airy Wave Theory Implementation 906
AISC 1977 Database 474
AISC 1989 Database 481
al(01) 217
al(11) 217
al(21) 218
all 438
All Cases Corroded 97
all stiffness 438
Allow Short Range Springs 169, 264
Allow Sidesway 835
Allow User's SIF at Bend 97
Allowable Load Variation (%) 167, 264
Allowable Stress 200, 1025
Allowable Stress (ISO 14692) 216
Allowable Stress Increase Factor 834
Allowables 831
Allowables Input Export Option 1075
Alpha 130
ALPHA - ADHESION FACTOR 508
Alpha [x] 459
Alpha Tolerance 53
Alternate CAESAR II Distributed Data
Path 58
Alternate SUS/OCC 548
Always Use System Colors 84
Always Use System Fonts 84
Ambient Temperature 302
American Lifelines Alliance Soil Model 503
Analysis Menu 40
Analysis Results 736
Analysis Type
(Harmonic/Spectrum/Modes/Range/Time
Hist) 678
Analyze Specified Jobs 1037
anchor 1216
Anchor 158
Anchor CNode 74
Anchor Movement 657
Anchors 74, 340, 620
angle 450, 453
Angle 122, 449
Animation of Dynamic Results
Harmonic 757
Animation of Dynamic Results Time
History 757
1219
Index
Animation of Dynamic Results
Modal/Spectrum 757
Animation of Static Results Displacements 756
Annotation Text 82
API 560 (Fired Heaters for General Refinery
Services) 876
API 560 Input Data Tab 877
API 610 (Centrifugal Pumps) 847
API 617 (Centrifugal Compressors) 859
API 617 Input Tab 860
API 650 180
API 661 (Air Cooled Heat
Exchangers) 868
API650 Nozzle Input Export Option 1079
Append Reruns to Existing Data 62
Appendix P - OPE Allowable
Reduction 215
Applicable Piping Code 1022
Applicable Wave Theory
Determination 905
Applications Using Global and Local
Coordinates 1009
Apply a template 781
Apply a Template 769
Archive 232
Archive Dialog Box 232
area 460
AS/NZS 1170 Wind Code Options 557
ASCE 7 Wind Code Options 555
ASCE Example 270
ASCE Static Seismic Wizard 268
ASCE7 717
ASME III Subsections NC and ND 973
ASME NC/ND 3673.2(b)-1 Note 3 140
ASME NC-3658.3 Calculation Method for
B16.5 Flanged Joints with High Strength
Bolting 881
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Comprehensive Analysis
(pre-2007) 915
ASME Section VIII Division 2-Elastic Nozzle
Simplified Analysis pre-2007 919
At End of Model 433
At Node 282
Australian 1990 Database 487
Auto Node Number Increment 69
Autosave Time Interval 87
Aux Tools Toolbar 357
Auxiliary Element Data 1045
Auxiliary Sets 1180
Available Commands 229, 605
Available Expansion Joint End-Types 260
Available Space 261

Available Space (neg. for can) 166
Axial Force 819, 877
Axial Index (Ia) 136
Axial Member Force 838
Axial Modulus of Elasticity 63
Axial SIF (ia) 136
Axial Strain
Hoop Stress (Ea/Eh*Vh/a) 64
Axis Mode 84
B
B2 139
B31.1 962
B31.1 (1967) 983
B31.1 Appendix II (Safety Valve) Force
Response Spectrum 721
B31.1 Reduced Z Fix 93
B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding and Contour
Tees 93
B31.11 971
B31.3 964
B31.3 Implement Appendix P 102
B31.3 Use SL Formulation Para 320
(2010) 102
B31.4 965
B31.4 Chapter IX 967
B31.5 968
B31.8 968
B31.8 Chapter VIII 970
B31.9 Notes 971
Back View 362, 625
Background Colors 72
Backplane Culling 72
Bandwidth Optimizer Options 304
Base Hoop Stress On (ID/OD/Mean/
Lam) 97
Basepoint Node Number 855
Basic Element Data 1042
Basic Operation 30
Basic Soil Modeler Dialog Box 507
Batch Run 232
Batch Stream Processing 1037
Beams 463
Before Current Element 433
Bellows Application Notes 260
Bellows Stiffness Properties 127
Bend Angle (Degrees) 793
Bend Axial Shape 55
Bend Cost Factor 284
Bend Length Attachment Percent 68
Bend Radius 793
1220
Index
Bend Stress Intensification Factors 789
Bend Tab 791
bend/elbow, long radius 1216
bend/elbow, short radius 1216
Bending Coefficient 835
Bending Moment 819
Bends 67, 121
Bends Input Export Option 1067
Block Operations Toolbar 356
Bolt Allowable @ Ambient
Temperature 818
Bolt Allowable @ Design
Temperature 817
Bolt Allowable Stress Multiplier 818
Bolt Area (Ab) 190
Bolt Diameter 808
Bolt Initial Tightening Stress 808
Bolt Material 816
Bolt Tightening Stress Notes 808
Bolts and Gasket Tab 807
Bottom 72
Bottom View 362, 625
Boundary Conditions 155
Bounding Box from Selection 394
Bounding Volume - Depth 395
Bounding Volume - Height 395
Bounding Volume - Width 395
boxH 461
boxW 461
Braces 466
branch 1216
Branch Error and Coordinate Prompts 300
Branch Largest Diameter at
Intersection 788
Branch Pipe Outside Diameter 787
Branch Pipe Wall Thickness 788
Brazil NBR 6123 Wind Code Options 561
Break 245
Browse 1109
BS 7159 990
BS 7159 Pressure Stiffening 66
BS5500 Nozzle Input Export Option 1080
BS-6399-2 Wind Code Options 558
BS806 979
Build Version 44
Building Load Cases 35
Building Models Quickly 376
Building Static Load Cases 529
Buried Pipe Example 515
Buried Pipe Modeler 494
Buried Pipe Modeler Window 496
butt-weld 1216
by 435, 438, 455
C
C - SOIL COHESION OF BACKFILL 508
CADPIPE 1131
CADPIPE Example Transfer 1134
CADPIPE LOG File Discussion 1139
CADWorx Options 73
CAESAR II Basic Model 502
CAESAR II Configuration 333
CAESAR II Configuration File
Generation 48
CAESAR II Data Matrix 1058
CAESAR II Error Processing 1038
CAESAR II File Guide 1170
CAESAR II Initial Capabilities
(12/84) 1188
CAESAR II Input and Output Files Dialog
Box 1061
CAESAR II Input Export Options Dialog
Box 1063
CAESAR II Local Coordinate
Definitions 1006
CAESAR II Neutral File 1040
CAESAR II Operational (Job) Data 1184
CAESAR II Output Report Options Dialog
Box 1085
CAESAR II Structural Input 403
CAESAR II Tools Toolbar 353
CAESAR II Version 1.1S Features
(2/86) 1188
CAESAR II Version 2.0A Features
(10/86) 1189
CAESAR II Version 2.1C Features
(6/87) 1190
CAESAR II Version 2.2B Features
(9/88) 1190
CAESAR II Version 3.0 Features
(4/90) 1191
(11/90) 1192
(9/91) 1192
(12/91) 1194
(3/92) 1194
(9/92) 1195
(3/93) 1196
(10/93) 1197
1221
Index
CAESAR II Version 3.21 Changes and
Enhancements (7/94) 1198
CAESAR II Version 3.22 Changes &
CAESAR II Version 3.23 Changes
(3/96) 1201
CAESAR II Version 3.24 Changes &
Enhancements ( 9/07) 1208
Calculate Actual Cold Loads 263
Calculation of Fatigue Stresses 935
CANADIAN Z662 976
Centerline Direction Cosine X 854
Centerline Direction Cosine Z 854
CFE Diseno por Sismo 720
CFE Sismo Example 272
CFE Sismo Static Seismic Wizard 271
Change Model Units 1036
Change Password 105
Change Sequence 338
Changing the Model Display 382
Checking the CADPIPE/CAESAR II Data
Transfer 1142
Chemical Resistance (A2) 220
China GB 50009 Wind Code Options 562
Clad Thk 227
Cladding Density 228, 344, 624
Cladding Thickness 344, 624
Class 1 Branch Flexibilities 892

Class 1 Branch Flexibility 92
Classic Piping Input Dialog Box 107
Close Loop 239
Closely Spaced Mode Criteria/Time History
Time Step (ms) 693
CNode 157, 164, 675
Code 201
Code Compliance Considerations 957
Code Compliance Report 595
Code Options (B31.1 & B31.8) 140
codes 1216
Code-Specific Notes 962
Code-Specific Settings 93
CODETI 986
coefficient of expansion 1216
Coefficient of Friction (Mu) 53
Cold Elastic Modulus 1023
Cold Spring 882
Color - Ambient 73
Color - Face 73
Color - Line 73
Color - Specular 73
Color - Transmission 73
Columns 468
Combination Method 550
Combine PCF Files 332, 1164
Comma Separated Value Format 366
Commands Menu 433
Comment 471
Comparison Method 192
Compass 342, 621
Component Amplification Factor [Rp]
(NBC) 274
Component Amplification Factor ap
(ASCE) 270
Component Colors 74
Component Elevation Ratio [hx/hn]
(NBC) 274
Component Elevation Ratio z/h
(ASCE) 269
Component Force Amp. Factor [Ar]
(NBC) 274
Component Information 120
Composition/Type 216, 1022
Compress CAESAR II Files 90
Computational Control 50
Computed Mass Flow Rate 734
Computed Mass Flowrate (Vent Gas) 731
Conclusion 956
Condense Elbows 332, 1164
Condense Rigids 331, 1163
Condense Tees 1163
1222
Index
Configuration and Environment 48
Configure annotation preferences 763
Configure isometric drawing split
points 763
Configuring 3D Graphics 381
Configuring annotation preferences 777
Connect Geometry Through CNodes 69
Constant Effort Support 891
Constant Effort Support Load 175
Continue 237
Control Information 1041
Control Parameters Tab 677
Controlling Results 543
Controlling the Data Export 1169
Convergence Tolerances 51
Convert selected files into CAESAR II
format 1163
coordinates 1216
Coordinates 831
Copy 237
Copy Environmental Loading Data Dialog
Box 570, 571
Copy Wave Vector 571
Copy Wind Vector 570
corrosion 1216
Corrosion 115, 343, 622
Corrosion Allowance 1216
Cos X & Y 844
coupling 1216
Covers 261
CRC Check 44
Create a drawing using a new style 767
Create a drawing using an existing
style 766
765, 772
Create a model using the Structural Steel
Wizard 404
Create a new job 30
Create a new job file 404
Create a New Units File 1035
Create a template 779
Create and save an annotation
template 769
Create Loop on Element 283
Create Spring Load Cases 890
Create/Review Units 1033
Creating the .FAT Files 934
CROTCH R 137
Culling Maximum Extent 72
Cumulative Usage 750
Cumulative Usage Report 596
Current Data 912
Current Profile Type 571

Current Table Depth 573
Current Table Velocity 574
Custom Reports Toolbar 610
Cut 237
Cutting Planes Toolbar 350
Cycle Stress Table 216
Cyclic Service (A3) 221
D
Damping (DSRSS) (ratio of critical) 694
Data Export to ODBC Compliant
Databases 1166
Data Export Wizard 1059
Data Modification and Details 1112
Data Tab 823
Database Definitions 56
Database Status (Consistency Check)
Dialog Box 1026
Databases 57
Date Range 1031
Decomposition Singularity
Tolerance 51, 709
Default 471
Default Operator 77
Default Piping Code 98
Default Projection Mode 77
Default Render Mode 77
Default Rotational Restraint Stiffness 53
Default Spring Hanger Table 59
Default Translational Restraint
Stiffness 53
Default View 78
Define a cross-section 405
Define Jobs to Run 1037
Defining a Model 1004
Definition 547
Delete 334
Delete a material from the database 1021
Delete Custom Report Template 613
Delete Element 238
Deltas 110
dens 459
Densities 224
Density 573
Description of Alternate Simplified ASME
Section VIII Division 2 Elastic Nozzle
Analysis pre-2007 918
Design (Button) 285
Design Data 164
Design Factor (S) 825
Design Pressure 819, 824, 874
1223
Index
Design Temperature 789, 816
Det Norske Veritas (DNV) 993
DFac 211
Diagnostics Menu 43
Diameter 113
Diameter 2 129
Diameter Limit 333, 1165
diameter, inside (ID) 1216
diameter, nominal 1217
diameter, outside (OD) 1217
Diameters 342, 622
Dim S3D/SPR Model 395
Dir. 655
Direction 643, 646, 660, 673, 675
Direction Cosines 112, 571
Directional Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 706
Directive Builder 712
Disable 87
Disable ANSI B16.5 Check 819
Disable Graphic Tooltip Bubble 78
Disable Leakage Calculations 819
Disable Stress Calculations 819
Disable Undo/Redo Ability 87
Discharge 855
Discharge Nozzle Nominal Diameter 855
Discharge Nozzle Tab 857, 863
Discharge Nozzle Type 855
Displaced Shape 81
Displacement 646
Displacement File Formats 365
Displacement Reports Output Report
Option 1086
Displacement Reports Sorted by
Nodes 88
Displacements 186, 341, 585, 620, 744
Displacements and Rotations 831
Displacements Input Export Option 1072
Displacements Tab 581
Displacements Toolbar 607
Display Options 349
Displaying Displacements, Forces, Uniform
Loads, and Wind/Wave Loads 386
Distance 239
Distance to Opposite Stiffener 179, 185
Distance to Stiffener or Head 179, 185
DLF/Spectrum Generator 714
Do/r3 146
Does the Vent Pipe have an Umbrella
Fitting (Y/N) 726
Double Angle Spacing 838
Double Sum Method 702
dP - YIELD DISP FACTOR, LAT, MAX

MULTIPLE OF D 509
dQd - YIELD DISP FACTOR, DOWN,
MULTIPLE OF D 509
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UP, MAX
MULTIPLE OF D 509
dQu - YIELD DISP FACTOR, UPWARD,
MULTIPLE of H 509
Drag Coefficient, Cd 198
Draw Cube 285
DSN Setup 1166
dT - YIELD DISP FACTOR, AXIAL 510
Duplicate 334
Duplicate Element 237
DX 110, 845, 856, 858
dx, dy, dz 436, 448
DY 111, 845, 856, 858
DY (Nozzle Orientation) 871
Dynamic Analysis 628
Dynamic Analysis Workflow 635
Dynamic Example Input Text 87
Dynamic Input 754
Dynamic Loads in Piping Systems 628
Dynamic Output Animation Window 755
Dynamic Output Processing 740
Dynamic Output Window 740
Dynamics Files 1179
DZ 111, 846, 857, 858
E
Earthquake Response Spectrum
Analysis 638
EDim 447
Edit a material in the database 1021
Edit Custom Report Template 613
Edit Dynamic Load Cases 244
Edit Menu 237
Edit Mode Toolbar 352
Edit Static Load Cases 244
Edit Tools Toolbar 358
Editing Multiple Load Cases 529
Editing Wave Case 570
Editing Wind Case 554
Eff 208
Eff, Cf, z 1023
Effective Diameter 830
Effective Gasket Modulus 809
Effective ID 128, 887
EFill 441
EGen 443
Eh / Ea 1024
Eh/Ea 220
1224
Index
Elastic Analyses of Shells near Nozzles
Using WRC 107 917
Elastic Modulus 552, 794, 1025
Elbow Stiffening Elastic Modulus 553
Elbow Stiffening Pressure 553
Elem 440
Element or Component Factor [Cp]
(NBC) 274
Element Viewer Dialog Box 626
Element/Node/Stress/Restraint Load
Component 283
Elements Input Export Option 1063
Elevation 902
EN Wind Code Options 562
EN-13480 994
EN-13480/CODETI Use In-Plane/Out-Plane
SIF 94
Enable Advanced Element Sort 1111
Enable Autosave 88
Enable Data Export to ODBC-Compliant
Databases 62
Ending Frequency 640
Enter a Report Title 742
Enter Pulse Data 722
Enter the Name of the Input File to
Convert 1036
Enter the Name of the Output File
(Optional) 1037
Enter the Name of the Units File to
Use 1037
Enter/Edit Spectrum Data 713
Environment Menu 286
Equipment Centerline 861
Equipment Component and
Compliance 782
Equipment Input Export Options 1084
Equipment Report Tab 847
Equipment Reports Output Report
Option 1092
Error Check 232
Error Checking 522
Error Code Statements 1138
Error Review 44
Errors/Warnings Tab 847
ESL Menu 45
Estimated Number of Significant Figures in
Eigenvalues 708
Evaluating Vessel Stresses 915
Example 436, 440, 443, 446, 449
Example 1 1098
Example 2 1100
Example Files 1181
Example Neutral File from PDS 1113
Example Output - Gas Relief Load

Synthesis 730
Example Output - Liquid Relief Load
Synthesis 734
Example Problem
Multiple Load - Case Spring - Hanger
Design 171
Examples 452, 453, 455, 456, 463, 465,
468, 470, 651, 660, 663, 669
Excitation Frequencies Tab 639
Exclude F2 from UKOOA Bending
Stress 66
Existing File to Review 1033
Existing File to Start From 1035
Exit 236
Exp. Coeff. 1024
Expansion Joint 252
Expansion Joint Design Notes 256
Expansion Joint Modeler - Expansion Joint
Database 256
Expansion Joint Modeler - From / To
Nodes 255
Expansion Joint Modeler - Hinge/Pin
Axis 256
Expansion Joint Modeler - Modeler
Results 257
Expansion Joint Modeler - Overall
Length 256
Expansion Joint Modeler - Tie Bar
Plane 256
Expansion Joint Modeler Notes 257
Expansion Joint Rating 826
Expansion Joint Styles 258
Expansion Joints 59, 75, 126,
342, 622, 885
Expansion Joints Input Export
Option 1068
Export Custom Report 614
Export Output Data Also 1062
Exporting Displacements to a File 368
External Interface Files 1183
External Interfaces 1039
Extraction Nozzle #1 Tab 864
Extraction Nozzle #2 Tab 866
Extrusion Crotch Radius 789
F
F - COATING FACTOR 512
F1, F2, ... F9 205
Fac 211, 1023
Facing Column 814
Facing Sketch 814
1225
Index
Factor 655, 669
Factor for Allowables 862
Factor for Table 4 Allowables 856
Factor of Safety (FS) 825
Fatigue Analysis of Piping Systems 925
Fatigue Analysis Using CAESAR II 924
Fatigue Basics 924
Fatigue Capabilities in Dynamic
Analysis 933
Fatigue Class 155
Fatigue Curves 215
FDBR 989
FEA Tools Menu 46
Ferritic Material 789
Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) 223
Figure 6 Force and Moment Multiplier 870
File Menu 37, 229
File Name 1109
File Sets 1170
FILLET 138
Filter Options Tab 580
Filter Out Elements Whose Diameter is
Less Than 1111
Filter Reports 577
Filters Dialog Box 579
Find 238
Finite Length Expansion Joints 127
First Element 244
First Mode Period (CFE) 272
fitting 1217
Fitting Thickness 123
Fix 437
Fixed Format 365
Fixed Size Restraint Size 84
flange 1217
Flange 75
Flange Allowable @ Ambient
Temperature 817
Flange Allowable @ Design
Temperature 817
Flange Allowable @ Stress Multiplier 818
Flange Analysis Temperature 554
Flange Check 341, 620
Flange Checks 187
Flange Class 804
Flange Class/Grade 189
Flange Face ID or Lapjt Cnt ID 806
Flange Face OD or Lapjt Cnt 806
Flange Grade 805
Flange Inside Diameter (B) 805
Flange Leakage and Stress
Calculations 1193
Flange Leakage/Stress Calculations 802
Flange Material 816

Flange Modulus of Elasticity @
Ambient 817
Flange Modulus of Elasticity @
Design 817
Flange NC-3658.3 Tab 583
Flange Outside Diameter (A) 805
Flange Peq Tab 583
Flange Rating 819
Flange Reports 590
Flange Tab 804
Flange Thickness (t) 806
Flange Type 804
Flange Yield Strength, SYC, SY1-SY9 190
Flanges Input Export Option 1082
Flaw Length 824
Flexible Joint Length 830
FlowMaster 1106
Fluid Bulk Modulus 729
Fluid Density 116, 343, 623
Fluid Density (Specific Gravity) 728
Fluid Height 182
Fluid SG 182
Fluid Weight in Rigid Elements 880
Force 643, 659, 723
Force Black and White Printing 78
Force Consistent Bend Materials 1111
Force Orthogonalization After Convergence
(Y/N) 711
Force Set # 657, 660
Force Sets Tab 658
Forces 341, 621
Forces - Moments 193
Forces Moments Input Export Option 1073
Forces on Nozzle 857, 859
Forces Tab 582
Forces/Stresses 749
Form Factor Qa 835
Free Code 174
Free End Connections - FREE 461
Free Restraint at Node 173
Free Surface Elevation 573
Frequency Array Spaces 711
Frequency Cutoff (HZ) 692
Frequently Asked Questions 1016
FRICT. ANGLE 512
Friction Angle Variation 51
FRICTION COEFFICIENT 512
Friction Multiplier 553
Friction Normal Force Variation 51
Friction Slide Multiplier 52
Friction Stiffness 52
1226
Index
from 434, 436, 438, 441, 442, 444, 447,
451, 453, 454, 456, 462
From 109
From Node 497
From, To, Both 188
From/To End Mesh 498
Front View 362, 625
FRP Alpha (xe-06) 64
FRP Analysis Using CAESAR II 951
FRP Coef. of Thermal Expansion (x
1,000,000 ) 302
FRP Density 64
FRP Laminate Type 64, 303
FRP Pipe Properties 62
FRP Property Data File 65
FRP Ratio of Shear Modulus/Emod
Axial 302
Ftg Ro 137
Full Load 393
fx, fy, fz 455
G
g 458
GAMMA - DRY SOIL DENSITY 510
GAMMA PRIME - EFFECTIVE SOIL
DENSITY 511
Gap 160
Gas Constant (R) 726
gasket 1217
Gasket Diameter, G / Bolt Circle 189
Gasket Inner Diameter 809
Gasket Outer Diameter 809
Gasket Seating Stress 812
gate valve 1217
General Comments on Configuration
Settings' Effect on Piping Code
Calculations 957
General Computed Results 596
General Notes 1137
General Settings 96
Generate Spectrum 723
Generate Stress Isometrics Overview 759
genInc 444
genIncTo 444
genLast 444
Geometry 830
Geometry Directives 67
German 1991 Database 488
Getting Started 29
Gimbal 259
GLoads 457
Global 238
Global Element Forces 592

Global Force FX 846, 871
Global Force FY 846, 871
Global Force FZ 846, 871
Global Force Reports Output Report
Option 1087
Global Forces 747
Global Input 834
Global Menu 334
Global Moment MX 846, 871
Global Moment MY 846, 871
Global Moment MZ 846, 872
Gloss Value 73
GPTC/Z380 995
Graphic Settings 70
Graphical Output 616
Grouping Method 701
Grow Toolbar 607
Guide 159
H
H - BURIED DEPTH TO TOP OF P
IPE 513
Hand Lay 220
hanger 1217
Hanger CNode 75
Hanger Default Restraint Stiffness 53
Hanger Design Control Data 262
Hanger Hardware Weight 170
Hanger Reports Output Report
Option 1091
Hanger Sizing Algorithm 887
Hanger Stiffness 552
Hanger Table 164, 265
Hanger Table with Text 598
Hangers 75, 162, 341, 620
Hangers Input Export Option 1081
Harmonic 630, 738
Harmonic Analysis 638, 679
Harmonic Displacements Tab 645
Harmonic Forces Tab 641
Header Pipe Outside Diameter 787
Header Pipe Wall Thickness 787
HEI Nozzle 874
HEI Standard 873
Help Menu 46
Help Screens and Units 108
Hide Overlapping Text 84
Highlighting Graphics 383
Hinged 259
hl(11) 217
hl(21) 218
1227
Index
Horizontal Moment 878
Horizontal Shear Force 877
Horizontal Thermal Bowing Tolerance 69
How to Use the Advanced PCF Import
(APCF) 328
How to Use the AFT IMPULSE
Interface 1094
How to Use the CAESAR II / PIPENET
Interface 1095
How to Use The Flowmaster
Interface 1107
How to Use the LIQT Interface 1097
How to Use the PCF Interface 1158
How to Use the Pipeplus Interface 1102
HPGSL 995
Hub Length 807
Hydrodynamic (Wave and Current)
Loading 903
I
IBC 719
IBC/UBC Wind Code Options 563
ID Manifold Piping 728
ID of Relief Valve Orifice 725
ID of Relief Valve Piping 725
ID of Vent Stack Piping 725
ID Relief Exit Piping 728
ID Relief Orifice or Rupture Disk
Opening 728
ID Supply Header 728
Idle Processing Count 79
IGE/TD/12 993
IGE\TD\12 Reference 150
IGE\TD\12 Requirements 145
Ignore B31.1/B31.3 Wc Factor 94
Ignore Spring Hanger Stiffness 55
Implementation of Macro-Level Analysis for
Piping Systems 945
Import Custom Report 614
Import Load Cases 546
Import Model Toolbar 359
Import PCF 1143
Import/Export Displacements Dialog
Box 365
Import/Export Displacements from
File 364
Importance Factor 717, 718
Importance Factor I (ASCE) 269
Importance Factor IE (NBC) 274
Importing Displacements from a File 368
Impulse 632
in G's, in F/L 196
In-And Out-Of-Plane Fixity Coefficients Ky

And Kz 837
inc 436, 442, 444, 448, 451, 453, 456, 462
Include Additional Bend Nodes 1111
Include Axial Force in Expansion
Stress 102
Include Insulation in Hydrotest 55
Include Missing Mass Components 704
Include Piping Input Files 304
Include Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement)
Components (Y/N) 703
Include Spring Stiffness in Hanger OPE
Travel Cases 55
Included Mass Data 753
Including Structural Input Files 305
Including the Spring Hanger Stiffness in the
Design Algorithm 891
Inclusion of Missing Mass Correction 919
incmatId 442, 445, 449
Incore Numerical Check 55
Increase Factor 721
Increase Factor (CFE) 272
Increment 239, 331, 640, 644,
47, 657, 1110
Increments 674
incSecId 448
incTo 442, 444, 448, 451, 453, 456, 462
Inlet Nozzle Node Number 870
Inlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter 870
Inlet Nozzle Tab 871
In-Line Flange Evaluation 881
In-Plane 839
In-Plane Bending Moment 839
In-Plane Index (Ii) 134
In-Plane SIF (ii) 134
Input
Specifying Hydrodynamic Parameters in
CAESAR II 911
Input Card Toolbar 360
Input Data Tab 853, 869
Input Echo 599
Input Items 69, 86
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations (Except for ISO
14692)* 132
Input Items Optionally Affecting SIF
Calculations For ISO 14692 140
Input Listing Options Dialog Box 235
Input Menu 40
Input Spreadsheet Defaults 53
Input Tools Toolbar 355
insecid 442
inSecId 445
1228
Index
Insert Element 237
Insert Menu 433
Insul Thk 227
Insul/Cladding Unit Weight 228
Insul/Cladding Unit Wt. 345, 624
insulation 1217
Insulation Density 227, 344, 624
Insulation Thickness 344, 623
Insulation Weight on Rigid Elements 880
Intergraph CADWorx Plant 1107
Intergraph Data After Bend
Modifications 1125
Intergraph Data After Element Sort 1120
Intergraph Data After TEE/Cross
Modifications 1121
Intergraph Data After Valve
Modifications 1122
Intergraph PDS 1108
Intergraph Smart 3D PCF 1108
Intersection Crotch Radius 788
Intersection Crotch Thickness 789
Intersection Stress Intensification
Factors 783
Intersection Type 786
Introduction 24
Invert 337
IS 875 Wind Code Options 564
ISO-14692 995
J
Jacobi Sweep Tolerance 709
JPI 996
K
K2 160
Kellogg Equivalent Pressure Method 881
K-Factor 125
Kinematic Viscosity 573
KO - COEFFICIENT OF PRESSURE AT
REST 513
Korean 1990 Database 492
Ksd 210
L
L1/Lb 149
Laminate Type 1024
Language Menu 42
Large End Hub Thickness 807
last 436, 442, 444, 448, 451,
453, 456, 462
Last Element 244
Leak Pressure Ratio 810

Left-side View 362, 625
Legacy Settings 102
Legend Text 83
Legends Toolbar 351
Length 112, 342, 622
Length of Manifold Piping 729
Length of Relief Exit Piping 728
Length of the Vent Stack 725
Liberal Stress Allowable 301
Lift Coefficient, Cl 198
LIM 159
Limiting the Display 361, 379
Line Number 228
Line Numbers 285
Line Numbers Dialog Box 617
Line Numbers Tab 582
Line Temperature 725
Liners 261
LIQT 1096
List 242
List Operations Toolbar 354
List Options 473
Load 454
Load an S3D/SPR Model 390
Load Case 669
Load Case (for Design) 282
Load Case Name 547, 618
Load Case Report 597
Load Case Template 59
Load Cases Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Case Editor Dialog Box) 545
Load Cases with Hanger Design 536
Load Cases with Pitch and Roll 537
Load Cases with Thermal
Displacements 538
Load Cases with Thermal Displacements
and Settlement 538
Load Cycles 549, 641
Load Duration (DSRSS) (sec) 694
Load S3D/SPR Model Dialog Box 392
Loading Conditions 193
Loads Defined in Input 546
Loads Tab 818
Local Coordinates 997
Local Element Forces 592
Local Force Report Output Report
Option 1089
Local Forces 746
Local Member Data Tab 836
Long-Period Transition Period TL 270, 719
Loop Closure Tolerance 70
Loop Optimization Wizard Overview 282
1229
Index
Loop Type 283
Lumped Masses Tab 673
lxx 460
lyy 460
M
Macro-Level Analysis 944
Main Menu 37
Major Direction 285
Major Direction Available Space 285
Manipulating the Toolbar 386
Mapped MCESRA at One Second
(S1) 718
Mapped MCESRA at Short Periods
(Ss) 718
Marine Growth 198
Marine Growth Density 198
Marker Color 76
Marker Options 76
Marker Size 76
Markups 349
Mass 673
Mass Model 754
Mass Model (LUMPED/
CONSISTENT) 707
Mass Participation Factors 751
Material 199, 343, 623
Material Allowable Stress 875
Material Data Tab 816
Material Database 1018
Material Density 1022
Material Elastic Properties 222
Material Name 1021
Material Number 333, 1021, 1165
Material Properties 63, 223
Material Selection Dialog Box 1026
Material Specified Minimum Yield 824
Material Yield Strength 824, 835, 838, 875
Materials 199, 261
matId 441, 442, 445, 448, 457, 458
Max. Mapped Res. Acc. Ss (ASCE) 269
Max. No. of Eigenvalues Calculated 690
Max. Stress 282
Maximum Allowable Bend Angle 68
Maximum Allowed Travel Limit 168, 265
Maximum Anchor Node 1110
Maximum Desired Unity Check 836
Maximum Longitudinal Moment 875
Maximum Radial Force 875
Maximum Stress Versus Extracted
Loads 923
Maximum Table Frequency 722
Measurement Increment 825

Measurements Tab 825
Member End Node 837
Member Start Node 837
Member Type 837
Memory Allocated (Mb) 90
Mexico Wind Code Options 566
Micro-Level Analysis 938
-Mill Tol % 115
Mini-Level Analysis 942
Minimum Allowable Bend Angle 68
Minimum Anchor Node 1110
Minimum Angle to Adjacent Bend 68
Minimum Desired Unity Check 836
Minimum Temperature Curve (A-D) 1022
Minimum Wall Mill Tolerance (%) 54
Mini-windows 364
Minor Direction 285
Minor Direction Available Space 285
Miscellaneous 55, 1193
Miscellaneous Data 600
Miscellaneous Data Group #1 1053
Miscellaneous Options 77, 86
Miscellaneous Processors 1018
Missing Mass Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 706
Missing Mass ZPA 56
Miter Points 123
Modal 737
Modal Analysis 637
Modal Combination Method
(Group/10%/DSRSS/ABS/SRSS) 700
mode 464, 467, 469
Model an underground piping system 514
Model Error Checking 34
Model Menu 245
Model Modifications for Dynamic
Analysis 634
Model Rotation 332, 394, 1111, 1164
Model TEES as 3 Elements 1111
Modeling Friction Effects 895
Modes Mass Normalized 752
Modes Unity Normalized 752
Moments on Nozzle 857, 859
Monetary Label 1031
Movement Capability 260
Moving Elements 389
Mu 162
Multiple Load Case Design Option 170
Multiple Load Case Design Options 267
mxmymz 455
1230
Index
N
name 460
Name 109, 649
Natural Frequencies 752
Navigating the Classic Piping Input Dialog
Box using the Function Keys 108
Navigation Tools Toolbar 353
NAVY 505 977
NBC Example 275
NBC Static Seismic Wizard 273
NBC Wind Code Options 568
NEMA Input Data Tab 844
NEMA SM23 (Steam Turbines) 839
NEMA Turbine Example 841
Neutral File Insulation Units 1112
Neutral File Weight Units 1112
New 38, 229
New Custom Report Template 612
New Job Ambient Temperature 54
New Job Bourdon Pressure 54
New Job Liberal Expansion Stress
Allowable 99
New Job Name Specification Dialog
Box 230
New Job Z-Axis Vertical 70
New Password 104
New Units File Name 1036
Next Element 244
NFill 434
NGen 435
No RTF/WLT in Reduced Fitting SIFs 94
No. Hangers at Location 169
No. of Hanger - Design Operating Load
Cases 263
No. of Iterations Per Shift (0 - Pgm
computed) 710
No. to Converge Before Shift Allowed (0 Not Used) 710
Nodal Coordinate Data 1058
Node 123, 133, 145, 157, 164, 187, 192,
194, 433, 660, 675
Node Name 618
node number 434
Node Number 861, 877
Node Number for 830
Node Numbers 108, 342, 621
Node Text 83
nodeInc 436
Nominal Diameter 861, 877
Nonlinear Code Compliance 896
Northeast ISO View 363, 626
Northwest ISO View 363, 626
Norwegian (TBK 5-6) 987

Notes on Occasional Load Cases 898
nozzle 1217
Nozzle Check 341, 620
Nozzle Check Report 590
Nozzle Diameter 845
Nozzle Flexibility 341, 620
Nozzle Height 182
Nozzle Limit Color 1 75
Nozzle Limit Color 2 75
Nozzle Lmt Check 190
Nozzle Node 178, 181, 184
Nozzle Number 844
nozzle orientation 1217
Nozzle Outer Diameter 178, 181, 184
Nozzle Outside Diameter 874
Nozzle Type 845, 877
Nozzle Wall Thickness 178, 181
Nozzles 75, 175
Nubbin Width or Ring 814
Number of Bolts 808
Number of Convolutions 830
Number of Cuts 794
Number of Flanges (Laminate Type for
BS7159 & UKOOA) 793
Number of Points 722
O
OCC Load Factor 553
Occasional Load Factor 94
Ocean Currents 907
Ocean Wave Particulars 904
ODBC Compliant Database Name 62
ODBC Settings 62
Off 199
Offsets 111
Offsets Input Export Option 1075
o-lets 1217
On Element 283
On Screen 611
Open 39, 230
Open a Job 742
Open an existing CAESAR II file 771
Open CADWorx Model 231
Open Dialog Box 230
Opening Time 721
Operating Conditions 116
Operating Load (Total at Loc.) 169
Optimal Frame Rate 79
Optimization Type 282
Optimization Wizard 275
Options Menu 340, 611
1231
Index
Ordinate 714
Ordinate Interpol 651
Ordinate Type 651
Organization Tools Toolbar 360
Orient 452
Orifice Flow Conditions/Exit Pipe End Flow
Conditions/Manifold Pipe End Flow
Conditions 735
Other Global Coordinate Systems 999
Other Notes on Hanger Sizing 892
Outlet Nozzle Node Number 870
Outlet Nozzle Nominal Diameter 870
Outlet Nozzle Tab 872
Out-of-Plane 839
Out-of-Plane Bending Moment 839
Out-Plane Index (Io) 135
Out-Plane SIF (io) 135
Output Colors 81
Output Items 88
Output Menu 41
Output Reports by Load Case 89
Output Status 549
Output Table of Contents 89
Output Text 83
Output Type 549
Output Viewer Wizard 602
Outside Diameter 795
OVERBURDEN COMPACTION
MULTIPLIER 513
P
Pad Thickness 788
Pad Thk 137
Parameters for Degrees of Freedom 462,
464, 467, 469
Partial Load 394
Paste 237
313, 1143
PCF Material Mapping 315, 1145
PCF Restraint Mapping 316, 1146
326, 1156
PCF Unit Mapping 314, 1144
PD 5500 183
Percent Stress Settings 82
Performing Block Operations 377
Performing Single-Element
Operations 376
Phase 643, 646
Phase Angle 573
Pipe Density 115, 343, 623
Pipe Nominal Diameter 824

Pipe Outside Diameter 792
pipe rack 1217
Pipe Schedule/Wall Thickness 333, 1165
pipe size, nominal 1217
Pipe Sizes 113
Pipe Stress Analysis Coordinate
Systems 1001
Pipe Stress Analysis of FRP Piping 937
pipe support 1218
Pipe Wall Thickness 824
Pipeline Remaining Strength Calculations
(B31G) 821
PIPENET 1095
Pipeplus 1102
Pipes 75
Piping Code ID 786, 791
Piping Codes 343, 622
Piping Element Data 914
Piping Input generation 31
Piping Input Reference 106
Piping Size Specification 60
Plate 260
Plot Options Menu 619
Plot Tools Toolbar 350
Plot View Menu 625
pois 458
Poisson's Ratio 1023
Post-Selection Load Case (Optional)
Setting the Actual Installed (Cold)
Load 890
Practical Applications 951
Predefined Hanger Data 174
Pre-Selection Load Case 2 Setting
Hanger Deflection through the Operating
Case 889
Pressure (abs) 725
Pressure (Design Strain for BS 7159 &
UKOOA) 794
Pressure Index (Ip) 137
Pressure Rating 261
Pressure SIF (ip) 136
Pressure Stiffening 794
Pressure Variation in EXP Case 95
Pressures 119, 345, 624
Previous Element 244
Pricing Factors Tab 1030
Print <filename> 234
Print Alphas and Pipe Properties 299
Print Forces on Rigids and Expansion
Joints 298
Print or Save Reports to File Notes 583
Print Preview 233
1232
Index
Print Setup 232
Print Setup Dialog Box 233
Prompted Autosave 88
Propagate Properties 116, 224, 228
Providing Wave Data 540
Providing Wind Data 539
Pseudostatic (Anchor Movement) Comb.
Method (SRSS/ABS) 706
Pseudo-Static Hydrodynamic Loading 905
pump 1218
Pvar 214
Q
QA Test 45
Qs 218
Quick XML Export 1062
R
r 219
R1 130
r1/Tc/Lh 149
R2 130
r2/rc 148
Radius 122
Random 630
Range 340, 619, 713
Range Interpol 651
Range Type 650
Rate per CPU second 1030
Rate per ELEMENT 1030
Rate per JOB/ANALYSIS 1030
Rate per LOAD CASE 1030
Rate per NODE 1030
Ratio of Gas Specific Heats (k) 726
Ratio Shear Modulus
Elastic Modulus 65
RCC-M Subsection C and D 985
Read from File 189, 193, 216
Recent Piping Files 236
Recent Structural Files 236
Recommend Load Cases 546
Recommended Load Cases 530
Recommended Load Cases
Dialog Box 546
Recommended Load Cases for Hanger
Selection 535
Redo 244
Reduced Intersection 95
reducer 1218
Reducer 128
Reducers Input Export Option 1082
Ref Vector X, Y, Z 193

Reference CAD Models Toolbar 359
References 914, 956
Refract Density 226
Refract Thk 226
Refractory Density 344, 623
Refractory Thickness 344, 623
Re-Import 394
Reinforcing on Shell (1) or Nozzle (2) 182
reinforcing pad 1218
Relief Load Synthesis 724
Relief Load Synthesis for Gases Greater
Than 15 psig 724
Relief Load Synthesis for Liquids 727
Relief Load Synthesis Results 758
Relief Loads and Water Hammer/Slug Flow
Spectra Analysis 638
Relief Valve or Rupture Disk 728
Remove HA Elements 1111
Remove Password 105
Remove PCF Files from Conversion
List 1163
Rendered Mode Text Always Visible 83
Renumber 336
Report 1032
Report Template Editor 603
Report Types 744
Reports Navigation Toolbar 609
Reports Tab 1031
Required Data Sets 1173
Required Error Data Files 1173
Required Printer/Listing Files 1177
Required Program Files 1171
Reset 362, 625
Reset and Refresh Tools Toolbar 354
Reset Default Custom Report
Templates 614
Reset Toolbar Layout 364
Reset View on Refresh 333
Resetting Loads on Existing Spring
Hangers 175
Resize Members Whose Unity Check
Value Is . . . 835
Response Factor R (ASCE) 269
Response Modification R 719
Restore Previous Anchor Size 79
Restore Previous Hanger Size 79
Restore Previous Operator 79
Restore Previous Projection Mode 80
Restore Previous Render Mode 80
Restore Previous Restraint Size 80
Restore Previous View 80
Restrained Piping per B31.8 215
1233
Index
Restrained Weight Case 889
Restraint CNode 76
Restraint Codes 1069
Restraint Data in Local Element
Coordinates 1015
Restraint Helix is a Line 84
Restraint Report - In Local Element
Coordinates 587
Restraint Reports Output Report
Option 1086
Restraint Summary 589
Restraints 76, 156, 340, 586, 620, 745
Restraints Input Export Option 1069
Restraints Tab 581
Restraints Toolbar 608
Resultant Force and Moment
Multiplier 870
Return to Input 618
Re-use Last Eigensolution (Frequencies
and Mode Shapes) 699
Review Error Report 363
Review Existing Units File 1034
Review SIFs at Bend Nodes 294
Review SIFs at Intersection Nodes 286
Review Static Results 363
Review Units 245
Right-side View 362, 626
Rigid 126
Rigid Element Application 879
Rigid Support Displacement
Criteria 168, 264
Rigid Weight 879
Rigids 76
Rigids Input Export Option 1068
Rod Increment (Degrees) 52
Rod Tolerance (Degrees) 52
Rotate 334
rp/do 148
Run a static analysis 36
Running the Static Analysis 541
rx 439
RX (cosx, cosy, cosz) or RX (vecx,
vecy, vecz) 159
rx stiffness 439
RX, RY, or RZ 158
ry 439
ry stiffness 439
rz 439
rz stiffness 439
S
S3D Graphics Environment
Dialog Box 396
S3D/SPR Model View 390
S3D/SPR Visibility Options 395
Sa(0.2) (NBC) 274
Save <filename> 231
Save Animation to File 756
Save As 231
Save As Dialog Box 231
Save as Graphics Image 232
Saving an Image for Later
Presentation 387
SC 202
Seam Welded 114, 794
seamless 1218
Seam-Welded 125
Seawater Data 913
secId 441, 442, 445
secID 448
SecId 459
Section 1 - Entity Information 1139
Section 2-Segment Information 1140
Section 3-Final CAESAR II Data 1141
section Id 460
Seismic Coefficient Ca 717
Seismic Coefficient Cv 717
Seismic Design Code 268
Seismic Wizard 268
Seismic Zone 720
Seismic Zone (CFE) 271
Select a File 393
Select a units file 404
Select a vertical axis 404
Select CAESAR II File 1062
Select Data Export Output File 1062
Select Load Jobs and Load Case 847
Select material properties 405
Select the model definition method 406
Select Wind Code or Profile 554
Selection 76
Send Reports to Microsoft Word 743
Set Default Data Directory 38
Set Displacement Vector 183
Set project information 762
Set Report Font 611
Set/Change Password 104
Settings 65
SH1, SH2, ... SH9 203
Shadow Mode 84
shape 456
Shell Outside Diameter 875
1234
Index
Shell Thickness 875
Should CAESAR II Size the Vent Stack
(Y/N) 727
Show Bounding Box 85
Show Informational Messages 333
Show Lines 73
Show Model 74
Show/Hide S3D/SPR Model 395
SIF Multiplier for Sustained Stress
Index 103
SIF Scratchpad 143
SIFs & Tees 131
SIFs and STRESSES 91
SIFs Tees Input Export Option 1076
SIFs/Tees 76
Silhouette Mode Text Always Visible 83
Site Class (ASCE) 269
Site Class (NBC) 274
Site Coefficient Fa 718
Site Coefficient Fv 718
Slipon 260
slip-on flange 1218
Small End Hub Thickness 807
Smooth Transitions 85
Snubbers Active 552
Snubbers Tab 675
Software Revision Procedures 26
Software Support/User Assistance 25
SOIL DENSITY 513
Soil Model No. 498
Soil Model Type and Classification 508
Soil Models 501
Soil Type 720
Soil Type (CFE) 272
South African 1992 Database 490
Southeast ISO View 362, 626
Southwest ISO View 362, 626
Spatial Combination Method
(SRSS/ABS) 700
Spatial or Modal Combination First 699
Special Execution Parameters 298
Specify Revision Number 1062
Spectrum 738
Spectrum Analysis 682
Spectrum Name 714
Spectrum Type 715
Spectrum/Time History Definitions
Tab 648
Spectrum/Time History Load Cases
Tab 653
Spectrum/Time History Profile 655
Spring Design Requirements 887
Spring Forces 260
spring hanger 1218

Spring Rate 175
Square Root of the Sum of the Squares
Method 702
Standard Operators Toolbar 347
Standard Reports 584
Standard Toolbar 346, 606
Standard Views Toolbar 348
Start Node 331, 643, 647, 656, 674, 1110
Starting CAESAR II 29
Starting Frequency 640
Starting Point X 394
Starting Point Y 394
Starting Point Z 395
Static Analysis 522
Static Analysis - Load Case Editor Dialog
Box 544
Static Analysis Fatigue Example 926
Static Analysis Overview 522
Static Load Case for Nonlinear Restraint
Status 689
Static Load Cases Output Report
Options 1085
Static Output Processor 575
Static Output Review 36
Static Seismic Inertial Loads 900
Static Seismic Load Cases 531
Static/Dynamic Combinations Tab 668
Status Tab 1032
Steel 76
Stif 161
Stiffness 675
Stiffness Factor for Friction 690
STOKES 5th Order Wave Theory
Implementation 907
Stoomwezen 984
Stop Node 644, 647, 657, 674
Stream Function Order 572
Stream Function Wave Theory
Implementation 907
Stress Concentration Factor 796
Stress Concentration Factors 155
Stress Concentrations and
Intensification 796
Stress Intensification Factor
Scratchpad 1193
Stress Intensification Factors and Stress
Indices Details 141
Stress Isometric Tutorials 770
Stress Reduction Factors Cmy and
Cmz 834
Stress Reports Output Report Option 1090
Stress Summary 594
1235
Index
Stress Type 547
Stresses 593, 748
Stresses Tab 582
Stresses Toolbar 608
Structural Code 834
Structural Data Files 1181
Structural Database 60
Structural Databases 474
Structural Group 721
Structural Steel Checks - AISC 831
Structural Steel Example #1 406
Structural Steel Graphics 402
Structural Steel Input Examples 406
Structural Steel Model Basics 397
Structural Steel Modeler 397
Structure Group (CFE) 272
Sturm Sequence Check on Computed
Eigenvalues 707
Subspace Size (0-Not Used) 709
Suction Nozzle Node Number 855
Suction Nozzle Nominal Diameter 855
Suction Nozzle Tab 856, 862
Suction Nozzle Type 855
Summary Report 367
Supply Header Pipe Wall Thickness 729
Supply Press. (abs) 728
Surface Velocity 571
SUS Case Sh 553
Sustained Stresses and Nonlinear
Restraints 896
Swedish Method 1 and 2 981
Sy 209
SY (c) 210
SY1, SY2, ... SY9 204
SYa 210
System Design Factor 222
System Level Items 89
T
T/Th/T'b 147
Tank Coefficient of Thermal
Expansion 182
Tank Modulus of Elasticity 183
Tank Node (optional) 181
Tank Outer Diameter 181
Tank Wall Thickness 182
Target Stress 282
TD/12 Modulus Correction 216
Te/Tb 147
Technical Discussion of LIQT

Interface 1096
Technical Discussion of the PIPENET
Interface 1095
Technical Discussions 879
Technical Notes on CAESAR II
Hydrodynamic Loading 908
tee 1218
tee, extruded (drawn) 1218
Tees 342, 622
Temperature 1024
Temperature Change 182
TEMPERATURE CHANGE 514
Temperature Dependent Stress
Value 1026
Temperature-Pressure Table 190
Temperatures 117, 345, 624
Ten Percent Method 701
Text Options 82
The Dynamic Analysis Window 636
The Right Hand Rule 999
Theoretical Cold (Installation) Load 175
Thermal Bowing Delta Temperature 300
thermal expansion 1218
Thermal Expansion 119
THERMAL EXPANSION
COEFFICIENT 514
Thermal Factor (k) 222
Thermodynamic Entropy Limit/Subsonic
Vent Exit Limit 732
Thickness 2 129
Thrust at the End of the Exit Piping 734
Thrust at the End of the Manifold
Piping 734
Thrust at the Vent Pipe Exit 731
Thrust at Valve Pipe/Vent Pipe
Interface 731
Tied 258
Time 723
Time History 686, 739
Time History Analysis 639
Time History Animation 89
Title Input Export Option 1084
Title Lines 618
Title Page 262
to 435, 436, 438, 441, 442, 444, 448, 451,
453, 454, 456, 462
To 109
To Node 497
Toggle Graphics Update 362
Toolbars 345
Tools Menu 42, 363
Top 72
1236
Index
Top View 362, 625
torsion 460
Torsion Index (It) 135
Torsion SIF (it) 135
Torsional Moment 878
Torsional Spring Rates 256
Transforming from Global to Local 1015
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve
Closing 732, 734
Transient Pressure Rise on Valve
Opening 732, 734
Trunnion Tab 795
Tube Bundle Direction 870
T-UNIV 259
Tutorial A - Create a stress isometric
drawing using the default drawing
style 770
Tutorial B - Add annotations for Input and
Output features 773
Tutorial C - Add custom annotations and
configure annotations preferences 775
Tutorial D - Create and apply a stress ISO
template 779
Type 122, 134, 146, 157
Type 1 Accounting Method 1029
Type 2 Accounting Method 1030
U
UBC 715
UK 1993 Database 493
UKOOA 992
Ult Tensile Stress 1025
Ultimate Axial Load 500
Ultimate Downward Load 501
Ultimate Lateral Load 499
Ultimate Upward Load 500
Uncompressed Gasket Thickness 809
Underlying Theory 937
Understanding Alternate Sustained (SUS)
and Occasional (OCC) Load Cases 548
Understanding Jobs 30
Undo 244
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH 514
Unif 450
Uniform Load in G's 301
Uniform Load Input Export Option 1074
Uniform Loads 194, 341, 621
Unit 473
Units Conversion Data 1057
Units File Name 60
Units File Operations 1033
Unsupported Axial Length 838
Unsupported Length (In-Plane Bending)

838
Unsupported Length (Out-Of-Plane
Bending) 838
Untied 258
Update History 1187
Updates and License Types 28
Updating Properties from the 3D
Model 380
Use AutoCAD Colors 74
Use Culling Frustrum 72
Use Fixed Size Restraints 85
Use FRP Flexibilities 66
Use FRP SIF 67
Use Keyboard for Walkthrough 74
Use Model Bounding Box 394
Use Out-of-Core Eigensolver (Y/N) 711
Use PD/4t 99
Use Pipe Materials Only 332, 1164
Use Pressure Stiffening on Bends 56
Use Schneider 92
Use System Units 1062
Use Uniform Background Color 72
Use WRC 329 92
User Defined Time History Waveform 722
User ID 90
User Material Database Filename 60
User-Defined 460
User-Defined Axial Stif 499
User-Defined Downward Stif 500
User-Defined Lateral 499
User-Defined SIFs Anywhere in the Piping
System 141
User-Defined Upward Stif 500
Using Local Coordinates 1006
Using Microsoft Excel 612
Using Microsoft Word 611
UTS (c) 211
UTS1, UTS2, ... UTS9 205
UTSa 210
U-UNIV 259
ux, uy, uz 451
V
valve 1218
Valve 247
Valve Orifice Gas Conditions/Vent Pipe Exit
Gas Conditions/Subsonic Velocity Gas
Conditions 733
Valve/Flange Files Location 61
Valves and Flanges 61
Vector 1, Vector 2, ... Vector 9 187, 194
1237
Index
Vector 1, Vector 2, Vector 3 196
Version and Job Title Information 1041
Vertical 472
Vertical In-Line Pumps 854
Vertical Moment 878
Vertical Shear Force 878
Vessel Centerline Direction Cosine VX, VY,
VZ 179, 185
Vessel Material (Optional) 180, 186
Vessel Node (Optional) 178, 184
Vessel Outer Diameter 178, 184
Vessel Pad Thickness 179, 185
Vessel Temperature (Optional) 179, 185
Vessel Type - Cylinder (0) or
Sphere (1) 184
Vessel Wall Thickness 179, 185
Video Driver 81
View Animations 615
View Load Cases 743
View Menu 45, 345, 606
View Reports 744
View/Edit File 1036
Visibility % 85
Visual Options 83
W
Walking Through the Model 388
Wall Thickness 343, 622, 795
Wall Thickness of Attached Pipe 792
Wall Thickness of Bend 793
Warning Messages 367
Warnings 601
Water Depth 572
Wave Data 912
Wave Direction Cosines 572
Wave Height 572
Wave Kinematics Factor 572
Wave Loads 198
Wave Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Wave Period 572
Wave Phase Option 572
Wave Theory 571
B1 138
WELD (D) 138
Weld ID 138, 155
weld neck flange 1218
Weld Strength Reduction Factor (W) 1025
Weld Type 789
Welded 260
What is a Load Case? 524
What's New in CAESAR II 19
WI Factor 115
Width to Height Ratio 284
Wind / Wave Loads 196
Wind Direction Specification 570
Wind Loads 197, 455, 901
Wind Loads Tab (Static Analysis - Load
Wind Pressure/Velocity vs. Elevation
(User-Defined) 569
Wind Shape Factor 197
Wind Wave Input Export Option 1074
Wind/Wave 342, 621
Wizards Toolbar 359
+Mill Tol % 115
Wl for Bends 125
WN 260
Work with Reports 576
Working with Load Cases 528
WRC 107 Stress Summations 800
WRC 107/297 Vessel/Nozzle
Stresses 797
WRC 297 176
WRC 297 Local Stress Calculations 1193
WRC Bulletin 107(537) 799
WRC Bulletin 297 802
WRC-107 Interpolation Method 56
WRC-107(537) Version 56
WRC297 Nozzle Input Export Option 1078
Wt/Sch 114
X
x 438
X (cosx, cosy, cosz) or X (vecx, vecy, vecz)
158
X Distance to Discharge 863
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 865
X Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 866
X Distance to Suction 862
X Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 864
X Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 862
X Force Acting on the Extraction
Nozzle 865, 866
X Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 872
X Moment Acting on Discharge
Nozzle 864
X Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 863
X Moment Acting on the Extraction
Nozzle 865, 867
X Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 872
x stiffness 438
X, Y, or Z 158
x, y, z 434
1238
Index
X2, Y2, Z2 159
XROD (COSX, COSY, COSZ) or XROD
(VECX, VECY, VECZ) 159
XROD, YROD, ZROD 159
XSNB, YSNB, ZSNB 160
XSPRYSPRZSPR 159
Y
y 438
Y Distance From Header Center to Nozzle
Face 872
Y Distance to Discharge 864
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 865
Y Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 866
Y Distance to Suction 862
Y Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 864
Y Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 863
Y Force Acting on the Extraction
Nozzle 865
Y Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 872
Y Moment Acting on Discharge
Nozzle 864
Y Moment Acting on Extraction
Nozzle 867
Y Moment Acting on suction Nozzle 863
865, 867
Y Moment Applied to Outlet Nozzle 873
y stiffness 439
YIELD DISPLACEMENT FACTOR 514
Yield Stress 1025
Yield Stress Criterion 99
ym 458
Youngs Modulus 835
Young's Modulus 838
ys 459
Z Moment Acting on the Extraction

Nozzle 866, 867
Z Moment Applied to Suction Nozzle 873
z stiffness 439
Z-Axis Vertical 303, 844, 870
Zero Length Expansion Joints 127
ZPA (Reg. Guide 1.60/UBC - g's) <or> #
Time History Output Cases 695
/ 194
Z
z 439
Z Axis Up 831
Z Distance to Discharge 864
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #1 865
Z Distance to Extraction Nozzle #2 866
Z Distance to Suction 862
Z Force Acting on Discharge Nozzle 864
Z Force Acting on Suction Nozzle 863
865, 867
Z Force Applied to Outlet Nozzle 872
Z Moment Acting on Suction Nozzle 863
1239

Caesar - II - Tutorial - Version 8

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Caesar - II - Tutorial - Version 8

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

CAESAR II

Version 2016 (8.0)

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Corrected the B31.1/B31.3 Verified Welding/Contour Tees configuration setting to only

Piping Code Updates

ASME B31.1, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10720, DI-TX-13119)

ASME B31.3 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10721), including the following changes:

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Updated B31.3 materials, including changes to expansion coefficients (Ec), weld

ASME B31.9, 2014 Edition (CR-TX-10723, DI-TX-13441)

Wind/Seismic Code Updates

NBC Wind Code Standard, 2010 Edition. (CR-TX-11109, CR-TX-11110)

NBC Seismic Code Standard, 2010 Edition (CR-TX-13497)

Equipment Code Updates

API 560, 4th Edition (CR-TX-11947, CR-TX-13176)

API 610, 11th Edition (CR-TX-792, CR-TX-13178)

API 617, 8th Edition (CR-TX-4365, CR-TX-4366)

API 661, 7th Edition (CR-TX-11949, CR-TX-13177)

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Finite Element Analysis (FEA)

Load Case Editor

Updated user documentation.

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

Added a comprehensive glossary of terms to the CAESAR II User's Guide to improve

CAESAR II User's Guide

What's New in CAESAR II

CAESAR II User's Guide

What are the applications of CAESAR II?

Why is CAESAR II from other pipe stress software?

CAESAR II User's Guide

About the CAESAR II Documentation

Software Support/User Assistance

CAESAR II User's Guide

ICAS Dealer Support (http://www.coade.com/Support/Dealers.shtml ) or ICAS General

Technical Support E-mail: ppmcrm@Intergraph.com

Phone: 1-800-766-7701 (CAESAR II Direct), 280-890-4566 (General)

Sales E-mail: sales.icas@intergraph.com

Knowledge-based Articles/Tutorials (US and Canada only):

Software Revision Procedures

How do I find out about software updates?

Can software updates be applied to any version?

How do I download a software update?